HELP
Macro Commands
$SET @variable=value
This
command assigns the value to the variable.
This variable can then be used later in the script in any line. Be careful of creating variables which may
occur accidentally in commands, such as variables whose names are substrings of
others (e.g. @number and @num or @file1 and @file13). Unexpected results may occur. Its recommended to use a long name, such as
@filename or @baudrate, rather than @f or @b.
Example:-
$SET
@baudrate=115200
AT+IPR=@baudrate
$SET BAUD=rate
This
command sets the baud rate of the connection to the new rate. It will automatically close and re-open the
port, once the rate has been changed. This
does NOT issue an instruction to the remote device to change baud rate, it
affects only the local status.
Example:-
$SET
BAUD=115200
$WAIT time
Instructs
the app to pause for a particular number
of milliseconds
Example:
$WAIT
10000
$WAIT OK [time]
Instructs
the app to wait for an OK response.
Anything else will throw an error.
An optional time will set the time for how long the app will wait for
the OK response
Example:-
$WAIT OK
10000
$SEND file
Instructs
the app to load the contents of a particular file and send it using the
XMODEM-1K protocol.
Example:-
$SEND
c:\firmware\NewFW.img
$PROMPT @variable
Prompts
the user to set the value for that particular variable. The prompt box which appears also allows the
user to select a filename, if they wish to. Here Is an example of use:
$PROMPT
@baudrate
AT+IPR=@baudrate
$PROMPT
@firmware-file
$SEND
@firmware-file
AT
Commands Interface Guide
for
Firmware 7.45
AT Commands Interface
Guide for Firmware 7.45
Important
Notice
Due to the nature of
wireless communications, transmission and reception of data can never be
guaranteed. Data may
be delayed, corrupted (i.e., have errors) or be totally lost. Although
significant
delays or losses of
data are rare when wireless devices such as the Sierra Wireless modem are used
in a normal manner
with a well-constructed network, the Sierra Wireless modem should not be used
in situations where
failure to transmit or receive data could result in damage of any kind to the
user or
any other party,
including but not limited to personal injury, death, or loss of property.
Sierra Wireless
accepts no
responsibility for damages of any kind resulting from delays or errors in data
transmitted or
received using the
Sierra Wireless modem, or for failure of the Sierra Wireless modem to transmit
or
receive such data.
Safety
and Hazards
Do not operate the
Sierra Wireless modem in areas where blasting is in progress, where explosive
atmospheres may be
present, near medical equipment, near life support equipment, or any
equipment which may
be susceptible to any form of radio interference. In such areas, the Sierra
Wireless modem MUST BE
POWERED OFF. The Sierra Wireless modem can transmit signals that
could interfere with
this equipment. Do not operate the Sierra Wireless modem in any aircraft,
whether
the aircraft is on
the ground or in flight. In aircraft, the Sierra Wireless modem MUST BE
POWERED
OFF. When
operating, the Sierra Wireless modem can transmit signals that could interfere
with
various onboard
systems.
Note:
Some airlines may permit the use of cellular phones while the aircraft is on
the ground and the door is
open.
Sierra Wireless modems may be used at this time.
The driver or
operator of any vehicle should not operate the Sierra Wireless modem while in
control of
a vehicle. Doing so
will detract from the driver or operators control and operation of that
vehicle. In
some states and
provinces, operating such communications devices while in control of a vehicle
is an
offence.
Limitations
of Liability
This manual is
provided as is. Sierra Wireless makes no warranties of any kind, either
expressed or
implied, including
any implied warranties of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, or
noninfringement. The
recipient of the manual shall endorse all risks arising from its use.
The information in
this manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a
commitment on the part
of Sierra Wireless. SIERRA WIRELESS AND ITS AFFILIATES
SPECIFICALLY
DISCLAIM LIABILITY FOR ANY AND ALL DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
GENERAL, INCIDENTAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
LOSS OF PROFITS OR REVENUE OR ANTICIPATED PROFITS OR
REVENUE ARISING OUT
OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE ANY SIERRA WIRELESS
PRODUCT, EVEN IF
SIERRA WIRELESS AND/OR ITS AFFILIATES HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES OR THEY ARE FORESEEABLE OR FOR CLAIMS BY ANY
THIRD PARTY.
Notwithstanding the
foregoing, in no event shall Sierra Wireless and/or its affiliates aggregate
liability
arising under or in
connection with the Sierra Wireless product, regardless of the number of
events,
occurrences, or
claims giving rise to liability, be in excess of the price paid by the
purchaser for the
Sierra Wireless
product.
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 0 February 18, 2011 2
AT Commands Interface
Guide for Firmware 7.45
Patents
This product may
contain technology developed by or for Sierra Wireless Inc.
This product
includes technology licensed from QUALCOMMฎ 3G
This product is
manufactured or sold by Sierra Wireless Inc. or its affiliates under one or
more patents
licensed from
InterDigital Group.
Copyright
ฉ 2011 Sierra
Wireless. All rights reserved.
Trademarks
AirCardฎ and
Watcherฎ are registered trademarks of Sierra Wireless. Sierra Wireless,
AirPrime,
AirLink,
AirVantage and the Sierra Wireless logo are trademarks of Sierra Wireless.
, , ฎ,
inSIMฎ, YOU MAKE IT, WE MAKE IT WIRELESSฎ,
WAVECOMฎ,
WISMOฎ, Wireless Microprocessorฎ,
Wireless CPUฎ, Open ATฎ are filed or registered
trademarks of Sierra
Wireless S.A. in France and/or in other countries.
Windowsฎ and
Windows Vistaฎ are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Macintosh and Mac OS
are registered trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
QUALCOMMฎ is
a registered trademark of QUALCOMM Incorporated. Used under license.
Other trademarks are
the property of the respective owners.
Contact
Information
Phone: 1-604-232-1488
Sales Desk: Hours: 8:00
AM to 5:00 PM Pacific Time
E-mail: sales@sierrawireless.com
Post:
Sierra Wireless
13811 Wireless Way
Richmond, BC
Canada V6V 3A4
Fax: 1-604-231-1109
Web: www.sierrawireless.com
Consult our website
for up-to-date product descriptions, documentation, application notes, firmware
upgrades,
troubleshooting tips, and press releases: www.sierrawireless.com
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 0 February 18, 2011 3
AT Commands Interface
Guide for Firmware 7.45
Document
History
Revision
Date History
001 June 19, 2008
Creation for Open ATฎ Software Suite 2.10
002 August 20, 2008
Updates for Open ATฎ Software Suite 2.10
003 September 16, 2008
Updates for Open ATฎ Software Suite 2.11
004 October 14, 2008
Creation for Open ATฎ Software Suite 2.12
005 October 21, 2008
Update for Open ATฎ Software Suite 2.12
006 December 5, 2008
Creation for Open ATฎ Software Suite 2.20
007 February 2, 2009
Updates for Open ATฎ Software Suite 2.20
009 February 27, 2009
Updates for Open ATฎ Software Suite 2.21
010 March 16, 2009
Updates for Open ATฎ Firmware
v7.4
New commands:
+CGEQREQ
+CGEQMIN
+CGEQNEG
Updated commands:
+CREG
+CGREG
+COPS
+CCFD
+WUBS
API
+SPEAKER
011 April 24, 2009
Updates for Open ATฎ Firmware
v7.4
Updated Commands
+WDWL
+WHCNF
+WFM
+STSF
+CPOL
+ILLR
+WDSS
+WDSG
+WMBS
+WDSS
+CGEQNEG
+CGEQMIN
+CGEQREQ
+CPLS
012 August 21, 2009
Updates for Open ATฎ Firmware
v7.4a
New Command
+WWSM
+WTMR
Updated Commands
+WBHV
+WGPRS
+CNMI
+SPEAKER
+CMGF
+CSAS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 0 February 18, 2011 4
AT Commands Interface
Guide for Firmware 7.45
+CCLK
+WDSH,
+WDSG,
+WDSI,
+WDSS,
+WDSF,
+WDSB
+WIPS
+STSF
+WTMR
+WDSD
+CMUX
013 October 23, 2009
Updates for Open ATฎ Firmware
v7.4a
Updated Commands
+WIPS
+IPR
+CCED
+CMUX
Appendix
+WTMR
+CLIP
+STGR
014 February 26, 2010
Updates for Open ATฎ Firmware
7.42
Updated Commands
+WCFM
+WOPEN
+WSCAN
+VGR
+COPS
+WDSS
+STSF
+WGPRS
+WTBI
+WCFM
+CGMR
+ATI
+WSVN
New Command
+WPPP
015 March 25, 2010
Updates for Open ATฎ Firmware
7.43
Updated Commands
+WUBS
+WCPS
Added Note to Commands
not applicable to Q26 Extreme
Module
016 June 1, 2010
Updated command +WMBS
Updated the following
commands regarding the AirPrime
SL6087 module:
+WHCNF
+DAC
+SPEAKER
+WDSS
017 July 23, 2010
Updates for Open ATฎ Firmware
7.44
Updated commands:
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 0 February 18, 2011 5
AT Commands Interface
Guide for Firmware 7.45
+CGDCONT
+IFC
Dial Command to a
specific number D
+WMBS
In Appendix: Results,
Specific Error Codes
+WDOP
+CCED
+CGMM
+WTMR
+Auto-tests &T
+CRMP
+VGR
+CGMI
Request identification
information I
+W32K
+WCPS
+COPS
+WOPEN
+CPHS
+CSVM
+WSVN
018 January 14, 2011
Updates for Open ATฎ Firmware
7.44
Updated commands:
+WDSH
+CFUN
Request identification
information I
+CCED
+CLVL
+VGT
+VGR
+WDGT
+WDGR
+CMGL
+WRIM
+WCCS
+WCFM
+WOPEN
+WWSM
Appendix
019 February 18, 2011
Updates for Open ATฎ Firmware
7.45
Updated commands
+CGACT
%Dn
+COPS
+WPPP
Information I
+CCED
&S
+WCPS
+WCFM
+WOPEN
+WWSM
+WHCNF
+W32K
+WBHV
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 0 February 18, 2011 6
AT Commands Interface
Guide for Firmware 7.45
+CGMR
+DAC
+CSCA
+WTMR
+IPR
+IFC
+ICF
&W
+WDSS
+WDSG
+WDSE
+CMUX
+CGCLASS
New Commands
+WPOW
+WUSB
+WCER
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 0 February 18, 2011 7
Overview
The aim of this document
is to provide Sierra Wireless customers with a full description of the AT
commands associated
with the Firmware 7.45 software release.
Note:
Though all features are documented in this manual, new features may still be in
beta stage at
publication
and therefore may not yet be validated. Please refer to the Customer Release
Note for
complete
and detailed information regarding beta and validated features at time of
release.
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 0 February 18, 2011 8
Contents
VOLUME
1
1 Introduction
2 AT
Commands Features
3 Basic
commands
4
Identifications commands
5 Open
ATฎ Commands
6
Global Configuration Commands
7
Embedded module Status Commands
8
Serial Port Commands
9
Security Commands
10 Time
Management Commands
VOLUME
2
11 GSM
Network Commands
12 Call
Control Commands
13 Data
Commands
14 GPRS
Commands
15 PLMN
Commands
VOLUME
3
16
Phonebooks Commands
17
Short message Commands
18 SIM
Commands
19 SIM
ToolKit Commands
20
Supplementary Services Commands
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 0 February 18, 2011 9
AT Commands Interface
Guide for Firmware 7.45
VOLUME
4
21
Audio Commands
22 I/O
Commands
23
Battery Commands
24 CPHS
Commands
25 Fax
Commands
26 Fax
class 2 Commands
27
Remote Device Management Services Commands
APPENDIX
1 Codes
and Values
2
Examples
3
Technical Appendixes
4
Interoperability
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 0 February 18, 2011 10
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079
019
February
18, 2011
Volume 1
AT
Commands Interface Guide
for
Firmware 7.45
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 2
Contents
1.
INTRODUCTION
..................................................................................................5
1.1. Scope of this Document
....................................................................................................5
1.2. Related
Documents...........................................................................................................6
1.3. ETSI Secretariat
................................................................................................................8
1.4. Abbreviations and
Definitions............................................................................................9
1.5. AT Commands Presentation
Rules.................................................................................14
2. AT
COMMANDS FEATURES
............................................................................15
2.1. Sierra Wireless Line Settings
..........................................................................................15
2.2. Command Line
................................................................................................................15
2.3. Information Responses and Result
Codes......................................................................15
2.4. Proprietary Commands
...................................................................................................15
2.5. SIM Insertion and Removal
.............................................................................................16
2.6. Background Initialization
.................................................................................................16
2.7. Length of Phone Numbers
..............................................................................................17
2.8. Bad Software Message
...................................................................................................17
2.9. Commands
concatenation...............................................................................................18
3.
BASIC COMMANDS ..........................................................................................20
3.1. Attention Command
AT...................................................................................................20
3.2. Repeat Last Command A/ ...............................................................................................21
4.
IDENTIFICATIONS COMMANDS
......................................................................23
4.1. Manufacturer Identification +CGMI
.................................................................................23
4.2. Request Model Identification +CGMM
............................................................................25
4.3. Hardware Version
+WHWV.............................................................................................27
4.4. Date of Production +WDOP
............................................................................................29
4.5. Write IMEI
+WIMEI..........................................................................................................31
4.6. Embedded module Serial Number
+WMSN....................................................................33
4.7. Product Serial Number +CGSN
......................................................................................35
4.8. Request Revision Identification
+CGMR.........................................................................37
4.9. Request identification information ATI
............................................................................39
4.10. Write IMEI SVN +WSVN
.................................................................................................45
4.11. Capabilities List
+GCAP..................................................................................................47
5. OPEN
ATฎ COMMANDS....................................................................................49
5.1. Sierra Wireless Downloading
+WDWL............................................................................49
5.2. Sierra Wireless Open ATฎ
Control Command
+WOPEN................................................51
5.3. Open ATฎ Tasks Resume Command +WOPENRES
.....................................................60
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 3
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
6.
GLOBAL CONFIGURATION
COMMANDS.......................................................61
6.1. Report Mobile Equipment Errors +CMEE
.......................................................................61
6.2. Hardware Configuration
+WHCNF..................................................................................63
6.3. Embedded Module Behaviour Configuration +WBHV
....................................................72
6.4. Features Management +WFM ........................................................................................81
6.5. Commercial Feature Management +WCFM
...................................................................85
6.6. Sierra Wireless SLEEP Mode +W32K
............................................................................88
6.7. Power Off +CPOF
...........................................................................................................90
6.8. Set Phone Functionality +CFUN
.....................................................................................92
6.9. Sierra Wireless Reset
+WRST........................................................................................95
6.10. Save Configuration W
.....................................................................................................97
6.11. Restore Factory Settings
F..............................................................................................99
6.12. Default Configuration
ATZ.............................................................................................101
6.13. Display configuration
V..................................................................................................103
6.14. Sierra Wireless Custom Character Set
+WCCS...........................................................105
6.15. Select TE Character Set +CSCS
..................................................................................108
6.16. Sierra Wireless Phonebook Character Set +WPCS
.....................................................110
6.17. Set Language +CLAN
...................................................................................................112
6.18. Language Event
+CLAE................................................................................................115
6.19. Select Type of Address +CSTA
....................................................................................118
6.20. Cellular Text Telephone Modem
+WCTM.....................................................................120
6.21. Sierra Wireless Debug Interface Management
+WDEBUG..........................................122
6.22. Digital to Analog Converter
+DAC.................................................................................124
6.23. Automatic Boost Mode +WCPS ....................................................................................128
6.24. Auto shutdown
+WASR.................................................................................................132
6.25. IP Stack Settings +WIPS
..............................................................................................137
7.
EMBEDDED MODULE STATUS
COMMANDS...............................................140
7.1. General Indications
+WIND...........................................................................................140
7.2. Phone Activity Status +CPAS
.......................................................................................147
7.3. SIM Holder Status +WSHS
...........................................................................................149
7.4. Indicator Control
+CIND................................................................................................151
7.5. Mobile Equipment Event Reporting
+CMER.................................................................154
7.6. Mobile Equipment Control Mode
+CMEC.....................................................................157
7.7. Sierra Wireless Status Request
+WSTR.......................................................................159
7.8. Temperature Monitoring Report +WTMR......................................................................161
7.9. Sierra Wireless Critical Error Report
+WCER...............................................................165
8.
SERIAL PORT COMMANDS ...........................................................................167
8.1. Echo ATE
......................................................................................................................167
8.2. Fixed DTE Rate
+IPR....................................................................................................169
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 4
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
8.3. DTE-DCE Character Framing +ICF
..............................................................................172
8.4. DTE-DCE Local Flow Control
+IFC...............................................................................175
8.5. Result Code Suppression ATQ
.....................................................................................177
8.6. DCE Response Format ATV
.........................................................................................179
8.7. Set DCD Signal
C..........................................................................................................181
8.8. Set DTR Signal D
..........................................................................................................183
8.9. Set DSR Signal S
..........................................................................................................185
8.10. Sierra Wireless Ring Indicator Mode
+WRIM................................................................187
8.11. Back to online mode AT0
..............................................................................................191
8.12. Multi-flow Management +WMFM
..................................................................................192
8.13. Multiplexing Mode
+CMUX............................................................................................197
8.14. Sierra Wireless USB Configuration +WUSB
.................................................................200
9.
SECURITY COMMANDS
.................................................................................205
9.1. Enter PIN +CPIN ...........................................................................................................205
9.2. Enter PIN2 +CPIN2
.......................................................................................................209
9.3. PIN Remaining Attempt Number +CPINC.....................................................................211
9.4. Change Password
+CPWD...........................................................................................213
9.5. Facility Lock
+CLCK......................................................................................................216
9.6. Sierra Wireless LoCK +WLCK
......................................................................................219
10.TIME
MANAGEMENT COMMANDS................................................................222
10.1. Clock Management
+CCLK...........................................................................................222
10.2. Alarm Management +CALA
..........................................................................................224
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 5
1.
Introduction
1.1.
Scope of this Document
This document
describes the AT-command based messages exchanged between an application and
Sierra Wireless
products in order to manage GSM/GPRS related events or services.
Embedded
module
External
AT
Application
Send AT command
Receive AT response
Serial Link
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Introduction
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 6
1.2.
Related Documents
This interface
specification is based on the following recommendations:
[1] ETSI GSM 07.05:
Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2); Use of DTE-DCE
interface for Short
Message Service (SMS) and Cell Broadcast Service (CBS)
[2] ETSI GSM 07.07: Digital
cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2); AT command set for GSM
Mobile Equipment (ME)
[3] ITU-T Recommendation
V.25 ter: Serial asynchronous automatic dialing and control
[4] ETSI GSM 03.40:
Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2); Technical implementation
of the Short Message
Service (SMS) Point-to-Point (PP)
[5] ETSI GSM 03.38:
Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2); Alphabets and
languagespecific
information
[6] ETSI GSM 04.80:
Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2): Mobile radio interface
layer 3, Supplementary
service specification, Formats and coding
[7] 3GPP 05.02: 3rd Generation Partnership Project; Technical Specification Group
GSM/EDGERadio
Access Network;
Multiplexing and multiple access on the radio path 3GPP TS 05.02
V6.9.2 (2001-04)
[8] 3GPP 24.008: Mobile
radio interface Layer 3 specification; Core network protocols; Stage 3
[9] 3GPP TS 11.11
Specification of the Subscriber Identity Module - Mobile Equipment (SIM-ME)
Interface
[10] 3GPP TS 05.08 Radio
subsystem link control
[11] 3GPP TS 23.040
Technical realization of the Short Message Service (SMS);
[12] 3GPP TS 22.042
Network Identity and Time Zone (NITZ) service description; Stage 1
[13] 3GPP TS 51.011
Specification of the Subscriber Identity Module - Mobile Equipment (SIM-ME)
interface
[14] 3GPP TS 27-010
Terminal Equipment to User Equipment (TE-UE) multiplexer protocol
[15] 3GPP 23.014 Support
of Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) signaling
[16] ISO 639 Langages
Codes
[17] 3GPP 27 060 Packet
domain; Mobile Station (MS) supporting Packet Switched services
[18] 3GPP TS 23.038
Alphabets and language-specific information
[19] 3GPP TS 27.005 Use of Data Terminal Equipment - Data Circuit
terminating Equipment (DTEDCE)
interface for Short
Message Service (SMS) and Cell Broadcast Service (CBS)
[20] ETSI GSM 11.14
Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+); Specification of the SIM
Application Toolkit for
the Subscriber Identity Module - Mobile Equipment (SIM - ME) interface
[21] 3GPP TS 23.003
Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+) (GSM); Universal Mobile
Telecommunications System
(UMTS); Numbering, addressing and identification
[22] ETSI GSM 02.24
Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+) (GSM);Description of
Charge Advice Information
(CAI)
[23] ETSI GSM 02.86
Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+) (GSM);Advice of Charge
(AoC) Supplementary
Services - Stage 1
[24] ETSI GSM 02.90
Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+) (GSM);Unstructured
Supplementary Service
Data (USSD) - Stage 1
[25] ETSI GSM 02.85
Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+) (GSM);Closed User
Group (CUG) Supplementary
Services - Stage 1
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Introduction
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 7
[26] 3GPP 27.007:Digital
cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+) (GSM); Universal Mobile
Telecommunications System
(UMTS);AT command set for 3GPP User Equipment (UE) (Release
1999)
[27] 3GPP
23.107:Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS);QoS Concept and
Architecture (Release
1999)
[28] 3GPP 24.008:
European digital cellular telecommunication system (Phase 2+). Mobile radio
interface layer 3
specification. (Release 1999)
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Introduction
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 8
1.3.
ETSI Secretariat
The following
addresses may be of use in obtaining the latest GSM/GPRS recommendations:
Postal
address: F-06921 Sophia Antipolis CEDEX France
Office
address: 650 Route des Lucioles Sophia Antipolis Valbonne France
Web
address: http://www.etsi.org/
Tel: +33
4 92 94 42 00
Fax: +33
4 93 65 47 16
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Introduction
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 9
1.4.
Abbreviations and Definitions
1.4.1.
Abbreviations
ACM Accumulated Call Meter
ADC Analog Digital Converter
ADN Abbreviated Dialing Number (Phonebook)
AMR Adaptive Multi-Rate
AMR-FR AMR Full Rate (full rate speech version 3)
AMR-HR AMR Half Rate (half rate speech version 3)
AOC Advice Of Charge
APN Access Point Name
ARN Address Resolution Protocol
ARFCN Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange,
Standard
characters table (1 byte coding)
AT ATtention
Hayes Standard AT command Set
BCCH Broadcast Channel
BER Bit Err Rate
BM Broadcoast Message Storage
CBM Cell Broadcast Message
CB Cell Broadcast
CCK Corporate Control Key
CCM Current Call Meter
CHV Card Holder Verification
CHAP Challenge handshake Authentication Protocol
CI Cell Identifier
CLI Client Line Identification
CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation
CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction
CNL Cooperative Network List
CODEC Coder Decoder
COLP Connected Line Identification Presentation
CPHS Common PCN Handset Specification
CPU Central Processing Unit
CSD Circuit Switched Data
CSP Customer Service Profile
CTM Cellular Text telephone Modem
CTS Clear To Send signal
CUG Closed User Group
DAC Digital to Analog Converter
DTR Data Terminal Ready
DCS Digital Cellular System
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Introduction
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 10
DCE Data Circuit Equipment
DCD Data Carrier Detect
DLC Data Link Connection
DLCI Data Link Connection Identifier
DM Device Management
DNS Domain Name System
DSR Data Set Ready
DTE Date Terminal Equipment
DTMF Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
DTR Data Terminal Ready
ECC Emergency Call Codes
ECM Error Correction Mode
ECT Explicit Call Transfer
EDGE Enhanced Data rates for GSM Evolution
EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programming Only Memory
EF Elementary Files
EFR Enhanced Full Rate (full rate speech version 2)
EGPRS Enhanced GPRS
ENS Enhanced Network Selection
E-ONS Enhanced Operator Name Service
ERMES European Radio Messaging System
ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute
FD FIFO depth
FDN Fixed Dialing Number (Phonebook)
FR Full Rate (full rate speech version 1)
GERAN GSM EDGE Radio Access Network
GPIO General Purpose Input Output
GPRS General Packet Radio Service
GSM Global System for Mobile communication
HDLC High-level Data Link Control
HFR High Frequency Regeneration
HLR Home Location Register
HR Half Rate (half rate speech version 1)
HSDPA High Speed Downlink Packet Access
HSUPA High Speed Uplink Packet Access
ID IDentifier
IETF Internet Engineering Task ForceT
IMEI International Mobile Equipment Identity
IMSI International Mobile Subscriber Identity
IN/OUT/IN_OUT In, out or In Out. see glossary
I/O Input/Output
IP Internet Protocol
LAC Local Area Code
LED Light Emitting Diode
LND Last Number Dialed
LP Language Preferred
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Introduction
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 11
LPI Lines Per Inch
M Mandatory
MCC Mobile Country Code
ME Mobile Equipment
MMI Man Machine Interface
MNC Mobile Network Code
MNP Microcom Networking Protocol
MO Mobile Originated
MOC Mobile Originated Call (outgoing call)
MS Mobile Station
MSB Most Significant Bit
MSISDN Mobile Station International ISDN Number
MT Mobile Terminal
MTC Mobile Terminated Call (incoming call)
N.A. Not applicable
NCK Network Control Key
NITZ Network Information and Time Zone
NSCK Network Subset Control Key
NTC Negative Temperature Coefficient
N.U. Not used
O Optional
OA Outgoing Access
OPL Operator PLMN List
OS Operating System
OTA Over the Air
PAD Portable Application Description
PAP Password Authentication Protocol
PC Personal Computer
PCCP PC character set Code Page
PCK Personalization Control Key
PCL Power Control Level
PCM Protection Circuit Module
PCN Personal Communication Network
PCS 1900 Personal Communication Service (GSM system offering 148
full
duplex voice channels per cell)
PDP Packet Data Protocol
PDU Protocol Description Unit
PIN Personal Identification Number
PLMN Public Land Mobile Networks
PNN PLMN Network Name
PPP
Point-to-Point Protocol
Peer to Peer
PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network
PTS Product Technical Specification
PUCT Price per Unit and Currency Table
PUK PIN Unlock Key
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Introduction
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 12
QoS Quality of Service
RAM Random Access Memory
RDMS Remote Device Management Services
RI Ring Indicator
RIL Radio Interface Layer
RLP Radio Link Protocol
RSSI Received Signal Strength Indication
RTS Ready To Send signal
RX Reception
SAP Service Access Point
SC Service Center
SDU Service Data Unit
SIM Subscriber Information Module
SMSR Short Message Status Report
SMS Short Message Service
SS Supplementary Services
SPCK Service Provider Control Key
SPN Service Provider Name
STK Sim ToolKit
SVN Software Version Number
TA Terminal Adaptor
TBF Temporary Block Flow
TE Terminal Equipment
TTY TeleTYpe
TON/NPI Type Of Number/Numbering Plan Identification
TX Transmission
UART Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter
UCS2 Universal Character Set 2 Character table (2-byte coding)
UDUB User Determined User Busy
UIH Unnumbered Information with Header check
UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunication System
USB Universal Serial Bus
USSD Unstructered Supplementary Service Data
UTRAN Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Introduction
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 13
1.4.2.
Definitions
The words
"Mobile Station" (MS) or "Mobile Equipment" (ME) are used
for mobile terminals
supporting GSM/GPRS
services.
Terminal Equipment
is the Man-Machine Interface of a GSM/GPRS device (modem or handset). A TE
can be a handset MMI
or the AT command line interface.
User
GSM/GPRS network
TE ME
Sierra Wireless product
A call from a
GSM/GPRS mobile station to the PSTN is called a "mobile originated
call" (MOC) or
"outgoing
call", and a call from a fixed network to a GSM/GPRS mobile station is
called a "mobile
terminated
call" (MTC) or "incoming call"
In this document,
the word "product" refers to any Sierra Wireless product supporting
the AT
commands interface.
1.4.3.
Logos
This picture indicates the +WIND indication from which the AT
command is allowed. X values
can be: 1, 3, 4, 16.
This picture indicates that a SIM card must be inserted to
support the AT command.
This picture indicates that an AT command is supported even if
the SIM card is absent.
This picture indicates that the PIN 1 /CHV 1 code must be
entered to support the AT command.
This picture indicates that an AT command is supported even if
the PIN 1 /CHV 1 code is not
entered.
This picture indicates that the PIN 2 /CHV 2 code must be
entered to support the AT command.
This picture indicates that an AT command is supported even if
the PIN 2/CHV 2 code is not
entered.
This picture indicates that the AT command is available using
the AirPrime Management
Services.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Introduction
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 14
1.5. AT
Commands Presentation Rules
The AT commands are
presented in the present documentation as follows:
A
"Description" section provides general information on the AT command
(or response)
behaviour.
A
"Syntax" section describes the command and response syntaxes and all
parameters
description.
A
"Parameters and Defined Values" section describes all parameters and
values.
A
"Parameter Storage" presents the command used to store the parameter
value and/or the
command used to
restore the parameter default value.
An
"Examples" section presents the real use of the described command.
A
"Note" section can also be included indicating some remarks about the
command use.
Figures
are provided where necessary
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 15
2. AT
Commands Features
2.1.
Sierra Wireless Line Settings
A serial link
handler is set with the following default values (factory settings):
speed
according to customer choice at order time,
8
bits data,
1
stop bit,
no
parity,
RTS/CTS
flow control.
Please use the +IPR,
+IFC and +ICF commands to change these settings.
2.2.
Command Line
Commands always
start with AT and finish with a <CR> character, excepted A/ command.
2.3.
Information Responses and Result Codes
Responses start and
end with <CR><LF>, except for the ATV0 DCE response format and the
ATQ1
(result code
suppression) commands.
If
command syntax is incorrect, the "ERROR"
string is returned.
If
command syntax is correct but transmitted with wrong parameters, the "+CME
ERROR:
<Err>" or
"+CMS ERROR: <SmsErr>" strings is
returned with adequate error codes if CMEE
was previously set
to 1. By default, CMEE is set to 0, and the error message is only
"ERROR".
If
the command line has been executed successfully, an "OK" string is
returned.
In some cases, such
as "AT+CPIN?" or (unsolicited) incoming events, the product does not
return the
"OK"
string as a response.
In the following
examples <CR> and <CR><LF> are intentionally omitted.
Note: The command syntax accepts negative
parameters. If the command parameter is negative and out of
the acceptable range, the "+CME ERROR:
3" string is returned if CMEE was previously set to 1.
2.4.
Proprietary Commands
When a command is
Sierra Wireless proprietary, the information is indicated in the command
description.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
AT Commands Features
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 16
2.5.
SIM Insertion and Removal
SIM card insertion
and removal procedures are supported. There are software functions relying on
positive reading of
the hardware SIM detect pin. This pin state (open/closed) is permanently
monitored.
When the SIM detect
pin indicates that a card is present in the SIM connector, the product tries to
set
up a logical SIM
session. The logical SIM session will be set up or not depending on whether the
detected card is a
SIM card or not. The AT+CPIN? command delivers the following responses:
If
the SIM detect pin indicates "absent", the response to AT+CPIN? is
"+CME ERROR: 10"
(SIM not inserted).
If
the SIM detect pin indicates "present", and the inserted card is a
SIM card, the response to
AT+CPIN? is
"+CPIN: xxx" depending on SIM PIN state.
If
the SIM detect pin indicates "present", and the inserted card is not
a SIM card, the response
to AT+CPIN? is
"+CME ERROR: 10".
These
last two states are not provided immediately due to background initialization.
Between
the hardware SIM
detect pin indicating "present" and the final results, the AT+CPIN?
sends
"+CME ERROR:
515" (Please wait, init in progress).
When the SIM detect
pin indicates card absence, and if a SIM card was previously inserted, an IMSI
detach procedure is
performed, all user data is removed from the product (phonebooks, SMS etc.).
The product then
switches to emergency mode.
2.6.
Background Initialization
After entering the
PIN 1/CHV 1, some SIM user data files are loaded into the product (phonebooks,
SMS status, etc.).
Please be aware that it might take some time to read a large phonebook.
The AT+CPIN? command
response occurs after PIN checking. After this response user data is
loaded in
background. This means that some data may not be available just when PIN entry
is
confirmed by
"OK". The reading of phonebooks will then be refused by "+CME
ERROR: 515" or
"+CMS ERROR:
515" meaning, "Please wait, service is not available yet, init in
progress".
This type of answer
may be sent by the product at several points:
when
trying to execute another AT command before the previous one is completed
(before
response),
when
switching from ADN to FDN (or FDN to ADN) and trying to read the relevant
phonebook
immediately,
when
asking for +CPIN? status immediately after SIM insertion and before the product
has
determined if the
inserted card is a valid SIM card.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
AT Commands Features
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 17
2.7.
Length of Phone Numbers
Phone numbers can be
made of up to 80 digits. The 20 first digits are stored in SIM, in the
phonebook
file (EFADN,
EFFDN or EFLND) corresponding to the selected phonebook. The next digits are
stored in
other extension SIM
files (EFEXT1 or EFEXT2).
As an example:
Number of
digits Nb of records in EFADN Nb of free
records in EFEXT1
1 to 20 1 0
21 to 40 1 1
41 to 60 1 2
61 to 80 1 3
If there is no more
free records in the EFEXT1, the behaviour is:
if
user tries to store an entry of more than 20 digits: +CME ERROR: 20,
if
user tries to dial a number of more than 20 digits: +CME ERROR: 20.
As the maximum
length for the numbers (in ADN, FDN, LND) phonebooks is 80 digits:
if
user tries to dial a number of more than 80 digits: +CME ERROR: 26.
Before performing a
call, the number of free records in the EFEXT1 is
checked, to be able to store the
dialed number.
if
there are free records left, the call is setup
otherwise,
+CME ERROR: 20 errors are returned (memory full).
Please refer to
Recommendation 3GPP 11.11 97H[9] for
more details.
2.8.
Bad Software Message
The Sierra Wireless
embedded module is designed to be downloaded with specific software. When
the user has to take
in charge the software download, it is necessary to be sure that the compatible
software is
downloaded. If the software downloaded is either corrupt or non-compatible, the
message
BAD SOFTWARE is
displayed. To remedy, reinstall the initial specific software version.
Note: If the embedded module is still displaying
BAD SOFTWARE, only Sierra Wireless or a distributor can
recover it.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
AT Commands Features
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 18
2.9.
Commands concatenation
The Sierra Wireless
embedded module supports basic AT commands and extended AT commands
concatenation.
2.9.1.
Basic Syntax commands
2.9.1.1.
Basic Syntax command format
The format of Basic
Syntax commands, except for the D and S commands, is as follows:
<command>[<number>]
where <command>
is either a single character, or the "&"
character (IA5 2/6) followed by a single
character.
Characters used in <command> shall be taken from the set of alphabetic
characters.
<number> may
be a string of one or more characters from "0" through "9"
representing a decimal
integer value.
Commands that expect a <number> are noted in the
description of the command (see
clause 6). If a
command expects <number> and it is missing (<command>
is immediately followed in
the command line by
another <command> or the termination
character), the value "0" is assumed. If a
command does not
expect a <number> and a number is present, an
ERROR is generated. All leading
"0"s in <number> are
ignored by the DCE.
Additional commands
may follow a command (and associated parameter, if any) on the same
command line without
any character required for separation. The actions of some commands cause
the remainder of the
command line to be ignored (e.g., A).
See the D command
for details on the format of the information that follows it.
2.9.1.2.
S-parameters
Commands that begin
with the letter "S" constitute a special group of parameters known as
"Sparameters".
These differ from
other commands in important respects. The number following the "S"
indicates the
"parameter number" being referenced. If the number is not recognized
as a valid
parameter number, an
ERROR result code is issued.
Immediately
following this number, either a "?" or "="
character (IA5 3/15 or 3/13, respectively) shall
appear. "?"
is used to read the value of the indicated S-parameter; "="
is used to set the S-parameter
to a new value.
S<parameter_number>?
S<parameter_number>=
[<value>]
If the "="
is used, the new value to be stored in the S-parameter is specified in decimal
following the
"=".
If no value is given (i.e., the end of the command line occurs or the next
command follows
immediately), the
S-parameter specified may be set to 0, or an ERROR result
code issued and the
stored value left
unchanged. The ranges of acceptable values are given in the description of each
Sparameter.
If the "?"
is used, the DCE transmits a single line of information text to the DTE. For
S-parameters
defined in this
Recommendation, the text portion of this information text consists of exactly
three
characters, giving
the value of the S-parameter in decimal, with leading zeroes included.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
AT Commands Features
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 19
2.9.1.3.
Concatenating commands after extended syntax
commands
Additional commands
may follow an extended syntax command on the same command line if a
semicolon
(";", IA5 3/11) is inserted after the preceding extended command as a
separator. The
semicolon is not
necessary when the extended syntax command is the last command on the
command line.
2.9.1.4.
Concatenating commands after basic format commands
Extended syntax
commands may appear on the same command line after a basic syntax command
without a separator,
in the same manner as concatenation of basic syntax commands.
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 20
3.
Basic commands
3.1.
Attention Command AT
3.1.1.
Description
This command always
returns OK.
3.1.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT
OK
Read command
None
Test command
None
3.1.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
None
3.1.4.
Parameter Storage
None
3.1.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Basic
commands
Repeat
Last Command A/
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 21
3.2.
Repeat Last Command A/
3.2.1.
Description
This command repeats
the last command of the open session. Only the A/ command itself cannot be
repeated.
If this command is
the first one of the open session, the response is OK without any treatment.
3.2.2.
Syntax
Action command
A/
Note: The response depends on the previous
command
Read command
None
Test command
None
3.2.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
None.
3.2.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Basic
commands
Repeat
Last Command A/
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 22
3.2.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CGMI SIERRA WIRELESS
EMBEDDED MODULE
OK
A/
Note: Repeat last command
SIERRA WIRELESS EMBEDDED MODULE
OK
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 23
4.
Identifications commands
4.1.
Manufacturer Identification +CGMI
4.1.1.
Description
This command gives
the manufacturer identification.
4.1.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CGMI
Sierra Wireless
OK
Read command
None
Test command
None
4.1.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
None.
4.1.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Identifications
commands
Manufacturer
Identification +CGMI
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 24
4.1.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CGMI
Sierra Wireless
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Identifications
commands
Request
Model Identification +CGMM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 25
4.2.
Request Model Identification +CGMM
4.2.1.
Description
This command is used
to get the model identification text.
4.2.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CGMM
<model>
OK
Read command
None
Test command
None
4.2.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<model>:
model identification text
The total number of characters, including line terminators, in
the
information text shall not exceed 2048 characters.
4.2.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Identifications
commands
Request
Model Identification +CGMM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 26
4.2.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CGMM
WMP100 Product
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Identifications
commands
Hardware
Version +WHWV
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 27
4.3.
Hardware Version +WHWV
4.3.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command gets the hardware version.
4.3.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WHWV
Hardware Version <version>
OK
Read command
None
Test command
AT+WHWV=?
OK
4.3.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<version>:
embedded module hardware version
string type
4.3.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Identifications
commands
Hardware
Version +WHWV
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 28
4.3.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WHWV
Note: Requests hardware version
Hardware Version 4.14
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Identifications
commands
Date of
Production +WDOP
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 29
4.4. Date
of Production +WDOP
4.4.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command gets the date of production.
4.4.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WDOP
Production Date (W/Y):
<date>
OK
Read command
None
Test command
AT+WDOP=?
OK
4.4.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<date>:
production date
string format for date is: ww/y where ww is the week number
(range: 01-53)
and y the year.
4.4.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Identifications
commands
Date of
Production +WDOP
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 30
4.4.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WDOP
Note: Requests date of production
Production Date (W/Y): 01/6
OK
Note: Date of production is WEEK: 01/YEAR: 6 (1st
week of year 6)
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Identifications
commands
Write
IMEI +WIMEI
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 31
4.5.
Write IMEI +WIMEI
4.5.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command downloads the IMEI. This operation is possible only if the
embedded module
contains the default IMEI.
The IMEI can only be
downloaded once.
No password is
needed. If the download is not correct, only Sierra Wireless can reset the
IMEI.
4.5.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WIMEI=<IMEI>
OK
Read command
AT+WIMEI?
+WIMEI: <IMEI>
OK
Test command
AT+WIMEI=?
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Identifications
commands
Write
IMEI +WIMEI
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 32
4.5.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<IMEI>:
IMEI
14 or 15 digits as defined in GSM 23.003 762H[21]
default value: 012345678901234
When a 14 digits IMEI is written, the 15th digit is automatically added using
Luhn
algorithm.
4.5.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
4.5.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WIMEI?
Note: Request IMEI
+WIMEI: 012345678901234
OK
AT+WIMEI=123456789099998
Note: First dowload on 15 digits
OK
AT+CGSN
Note: Get stored IMEI
123456789099998
OK
AT+WIMEI=35282000000005
Note: First dowload on 14 digits
OK
AT+CGSN
Note: Get stored IMEI
352820000000054
OK
AT+WIMEI?
Note: Request IMEI
+WIMEI: 352820000000054
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Identifications
commands
Embedded
module Serial Number +WMSN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 33
4.6.
Embedded module Serial Number +WMSN
4.6.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command returns the serial number of the embedded module.
4.6.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WMSN
Serial Number <serial
number>
OK
Read command
None
Test command
AT+WMSN=?
OK
4.6.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<serial
number>: Embedded module serial number
integer type on 15 digits
4.6.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Identifications
commands
Embedded
module Serial Number +WMSN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 34
4.6.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WMSN Serial Number
123456789012345
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Identifications
commands
Product
Serial Number +CGSN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 35
4.7.
Product Serial Number +CGSN
4.7.1.
Description
This command allows
the user application to get the IMEI of the product.
4.7.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CGSN
<IMEI>
OK
Read command
None
Test command
None
4.7.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<IMEI>:
Embedded module IMEI (15 digits
number)
4.7.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Identifications
commands
Product
Serial Number +CGSN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 36
4.7.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CGSN
Note: Get the IMEI
012345678901234
OK
Note: IMEI read from EEPROM
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Identifications
commands
Request
Revision Identification +CGMR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 37
4.8.
Request Revision Identification +CGMR
4.8.1.
Description
This command is used
to get the revised software version.
4.8.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CGMR
<SW release>.<WCPU>
<size> <date> <time>
OK
Read command
None
Test command
None
4.8.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<SW
release>: software release
<WCPU>
type of embedded module
<size>
software size
<date>
date (mmddyy) of software
generation
<time>
hour (hh:mm) of software generation
4.8.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Identifications
commands
Request
Revision Identification +CGMR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 38
4.8.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CGMR
R7.43.0.201003261552.WMP50
2139952 032610
15:52
OK
Note : Software release v7.42, generated on
January 28, 2010.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Identifications
commands
Request
identification information ATI
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 39
4.9.
Request identification information ATI
4.9.1.
Description
This command causes
the product to transmit one or more lines of specific information text.
4.9.2.
Syntax
Action command
ATI<n>
Depending on <n>
OK
Read command
None
Test command
None
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Identifications
commands
Request
identification information ATI
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 40
4.9.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<n>:
information display control
parameter
0 embedded module with the 2nd core:
display manufacturer identification (equivalent to 98H+CGMI, refer to these commands for more
precisions)
embedded module without the 2nd core:
display manufacturer followed by model identification
(equivalent to 9H+CGMI and 10H+CGMM,
refer to these commands for more precisions)
3 display revision identification (equivalent to +CGMR)
4 display embedded module configuration in RAM (equivalent to
&V0)
5 display embedded module configuration in EEPROM (equivalent to
&V1)
6 display embedded module data features. Lists the supported
data rates, data modes and fax
classes.
7 display embedded module voice features
8 embedded module with the 2nd
core:
display software version followed by the chip Id
embedded module without the 2nd
core:
"OK"
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Identifications
commands
Request
identification information ATI
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 41
9 display component details: Downloader, Firmware, embedded Openฎ AT application
(Developer Studio version used to build it, Integrated Plug In
version), memory
the response is divided in 4 groups:
<Component>,<Version>[,<Name>,<Company>,<Size>,
<TimeStamp>,<Checksum>,<Offset>
[-<SubComponent>,<SubComponentVersion>]
<MemoryType>,<MemorySize>
[<InfoTage>,<InfoValue>]
<Component>: ascii string
embedded software component type
possible values:
"DWL","FW","OAT","3G+"
<Version>: ascii string
version of the software component
<Name>: ascii string
component name
<Company>: ascii string
component company
<Size>: integer
component size in bytes
<TimeStamp>: ascii string
component timestamp
<Checksum>: ascii string
component checksum
<Offset>: ascii string
offset address of the component
Note: For the Open ATฎ application, <Version>,
<Name> and <Company> fields are
filled in
the application source code. Please refer to
ADL User Guide for more information.
<SubComponent>: ascii string
subcomponent name
this field is filled by Developer Studio (supported from
version 1.1)
<SubComponent Version>: ascii string
subcomponent version
this field is filled by Developer Studio (supported from
1.1 version)
<MemoryType>: "ROM" or "RAM"
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Identifications
commands
Request
identification information ATI
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 42
<MemorySize>: size of the <MemoryType> in bytes, in
hexadecimal, set
at the upper roundish value ( 100000 = 8 Mb, 200000 =
16 Mb, 400000 = 32 Mb, 800000 = 64 Mb,
)
<InfoTag>: Information Tag, the value is the following
parameter.
Current supported value: "DWLNAME"
<InfoValue>: Information value.
For "DWLNAME" information Tag: Type of the correct
DWL file type to be downloaded in the embedded
module, based on the product name. ASCII string
other "OK" string is sent back
Note: The 2nd core is the other brand chip
used in Sierra Wireless embedded module. For example, the
Icera chip is the 2nd core used in Q26Extreme product.
4.9.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
4.9.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
ATI0
Note: Manufacturer and model
identification
SIERRA WIRELESS
WMP100 Product
OK
Note: See 101H+CGMI and 102H+CGMM commands
ATI0
Note: Manufacturer identification (if the
embedded module has the 2nd core)
SIERRA WIRELESS
OK
Note: Response of embedded module with 2nd core inside.
ATI3
Note: Revision identification
R7.42.0.201001280843.WMP100
2131488 012810 08:43
OK
Note : Software release v7.42, generated on
January 28, 2010.
ATI6
Note: embedded module data features
DATA RATES:
AUTOBAUD,300,1200,1200/75,2400,4800,9600,14400
DATA MODES: T/TN,ASYNCHRONOUS
FAX CLASS 1,2
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Identifications
commands
Request
identification information ATI
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 43
Command
Responses
ATI7
Note: embedded module voice
features
SPEECH CODINGS: FR,EFR,HR,AMR
OK
ATI8
Note: Request the 2nd core SW version
and chip Id
RELEASE_R3_0/ICERA_SDK_EV2_3g/wcom_q26e_02_audio/Stack_
18.2.a
P4 rev: CL125092 with 0 local
changes
ABCFE4597AE87F21EC57
OK
Note : For example, Icera chip is used as the 2nd core in the embedded module
ATI8
Note: For other embedded module
OK
ATI9 "DWL","V08b0i","","Sierra
Wireless",54752,"011410
16:55","d7ba6c55","00010000"
"FW","FW_SRC_742_5.WMP100G","R7.42.0.201001280843.WMP10
0","Sierra
Wireless",2131488,"012810
08:43","460a8311","00020000"
"OAT","1.0.0","My
Test Application","Sierra
Wireless",226748,"012210
10:05","5e796578","00260000"
-"Developer
Studio","1.1.1.200911160856-R3160"
-"Open AT OS
Package","6.32.0.01"
-"Firmware
Package","7.4.2"
-"WIP Plug-in
Package","5.30"
"ROM","400000"
"RAM","100000"
"DWLNAME","WMP100SM3"
OK
Note: Component details with an embedded Open ATฎ
application.
"DWL","V08b0i","","Sierra
Wireless",54752,"011410
16:55","d7ba6c55","00010000"
"FW","FW_SRC_742_5.WMP100G","R7.42.0.201001280843.WMP10
0","Sierra
Wireless",2131488,"012810
08:43","460a8311","00020000"
"ROM","400000"
"RAM","100000"
"DWLNAME","WMP100SM3"
OK
Note: Component details without an embedded Open
ATฎ application.
"DWL","V08b0i","","Sierra
Wireless",54752,"011410
16:55","d7ba6c55","00010000"
"FW","FW_SRC_742_5.WMP100G","R7.42.0.201001280843.WMP10
0","Sierra
Wireless",2131488,"012810
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Identifications
commands
Request
identification information ATI
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 44
Command
Responses
08:43","460a8311","00020000"
"OAT","1.0.0","My
Test Application","Sierra
Wireless",226748,"012210
10:05","5e796578","00260000"
"ROM","400000"
"RAM","100000"
"DWLNAME","WMP100SM3"
OK
Note: Component details with an embedded Open ATฎ
application which was not
built using Developer Studio and with DWL file
information.
"DWL","V08b0i","","Sierra
Wireless",54752,"011410
16:55","d7ba6c55","00010000"
"FW","FW_SRC_742_5.WMP100G","R7.42.0.201001280843.WMP10
0","Sierra
Wireless",2131488,"012810
08:43","460a8311","00020000"
"OAT","","","",226748,"012210
10:05","5e796578","00260000"
-"Developer
Studio","1.1.1.200911160856-R3160"
-"Open AT OS
Package","6.32.0.01"
-"Firmware
Package","7.4.2"
-"WIP Plug-in
Package","5.30"
"ROM","400000"
"RAM","100000"
OK
Note: Component details with an embedded Open ATฎ
application on which fields
are not filled.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Identifications
commands
Write
IMEI SVN +WSVN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 45
4.10.
Write IMEI SVN +WSVN
4.10.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command updates the IMEI SVN.
4.10.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WSVN=<IMEI
SVN>
OK
Read command
AT+WSVN?
+WSVN: <IMEI SVN>
OK
Test command
AT+WSVN=?
+WSVN: (list of supported
<IMEI SVN>s)
OK
4.10.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<IMEI
SVN>: IMEI SVN
BCD type
range: 0-98
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Identifications
commands
Write
IMEI SVN +WSVN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 46
4.10.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
4.10.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WSVN=? +WSVN: (0-98)
OK
AT+WSVN?
Note: Request IMEI SVN
+WSVN: 10
OK
AT+WSVN=11
Note: Update the IMEI SVN
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Identifications
commands
Capabilities
List +GCAP
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 47
4.11.
Capabilities List +GCAP
4.11.1.
Description
This command returns
the complete list of capabilities.
4.11.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+GCAP
+GCAP: (list of supported
<name>s)
OK
Read command
None
Test command
None
4.11.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<name>:
supported capability
+CGSM CGSM command supported
+FCLASS fax command supported
4.11.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Identifications
commands
Capabilities
List +GCAP
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 48
4.11.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+GCAP
Note: Get capabilities list
+GCAP: +CGSM,+FCLASS
OK
Note: Supports GSM and FAX commands
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 49
5. Open
ATฎ Commands
5.1.
Sierra Wireless Downloading +WDWL
5.1.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command switches the product to download mode.
After downloading,
the embedded module should be reset using AT+CFUN=1.
5.1.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WDWL
+WDWL: 0
Note: Downloading in progress. NACK character is
sent every second by the embedded module.
Read command
AT+WDWL?
+WDWL: <version>
OK
Test command
None
5.1.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<version>:
XModem downloader version
string type
5.1.4.
Parameter Storage
None
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Open
ATฎ Commands
Sierra
Wireless Downloading +WDWL
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 50
5.1.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WDWL?
Note: Get downloader version.
+WDWL: V02.12
OK
AT+WDWL
+WDWL: 0
Note: Download mode started. File can be sent
using the terminal
application
AT+CFUN=1 OK
5.1.6.
Notes
+WDWL command allows
launching the download process only on UART1, UART 2 and USB ports
(and not on
multiplexed port (see 103H+CMUX command)).
Because a reset is
made when the AT+WDWL command is sent to the embedded module, the host
application should
support the reset on USB port if this command is sent on this port (USB
disconnection and
reconnection in USB CDC mode).
Downloading is
performed using the Xmodem protocol or 1K-Xmodem (checksum only, CRC is not
supported) protocol.
The flow control of
the hyperterminal has to be set to "Hardware".
Caution:
Software damages may occur
if power is lost or if a hardware reset occurs during the downloading
phase. If it occurs, send again AT + WDWL command
to the embedded module and download again
the file.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Open
ATฎ Commands
Sierra
Wireless Open ATฎ Control Command +WOPEN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 51
5.2.
Sierra Wireless Open ATฎ Control Command
+WOPEN
5.2.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command performs the start, stop, delete, and get information about
the current Open ATฎ embedded
application.
This command also
erases the Open ATฎ flash objects storage place, and configures the Application
& Data (A&D)
storage place size (including AirPrime Managment Services storage place).
Please
refer to the Open ATฎ development
guides for more information.
This command permits
to configure the Open ATฎ Safe Boot. This service prevents the Open ATฎ
application from
starting when defined keys of the keyboard are pressed.
5.2.2.
Syntax
If
<Mode>=0,1,3,4 or 5
Action command
AT+WOPEN=<Mode>
OK
If
<Mode>=2
Action command
AT+WOPEN=<Mode>
+WOPEN:
<Mode>,<IntVersion>[,<ExtVersion>]
OK
If
<Mode>=6
Action command
AT+WOPEN=<Mode>[,<A&Dsize>]
+WOPEN:
<Mode>,<A&DSize>,<OatSize>
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Open
ATฎ Commands
Sierra
Wireless Open ATฎ Control Command +WOPEN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 52
If
<Mode>=7
Action command
AT+WOPEN=<Mode>
+WOPEN:
<Mode>,<OatState>
OK
If
<Mode>=8
Action command
AT+WOPEN=<Mode>[,<SafeBootState>[,<Key1>[,<Key2>]]]
+WOPEN:
<Mode>[,<SafeBootState>[,<Key1>[,<Key2>]]]
OK
Read command
AT+WOPEN?
+WOPEN: <Mode>
OK
Test command
AT+WOPEN=?
+WOPEN: (list of supported
<Mode>s),(list of supported <A&DSize>s),(list of
supported <Key1>s),(list
of supported <Key2>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Open
ATฎ Commands
Sierra
Wireless Open ATฎ Control Command +WOPEN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 53
5.2.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<Mode>:
operating mode
0 stop the Open ATฎ
embedded application
If the Open ATฎ application is running, the embedded module resets.
1 start the Open ATฎ
embedded application
If the Open ATฎ application is stopped, the embedded module resets.
2 get the Open ATฎ library versions
3 erase the Open ATฎ
embedded application flash objects
4 erase the Open ATฎ
embedded application
5 suspend (in Sierra Wireless OS) the Open ATฎ embedded application tasks
6 If the <A&Dsize> parameter is used: configure the
Application & Data storage size.
If the <A&Dsize> parameter is not used: display the
current A&D storage place size and
Open ATฎ application space size.
7 Open ATฎ application current state
8 Configure the Open ATฎ
Safe Boot: please refer to the 104H<SafeBootState>, 105H<Key1> &
106H<Key2> parameters description for more information
<IntVersion>:
ASCII string giving the internal
Open ATฎ library version
<ExtVersion>:
ASCII string giving the external
Open ATฎ library version
If no embedded application is loaded, the <ExtVersion>
parameter is not returned.
<A&DSize>:
This parameter includes A&D
volume and AirPrime Managment Services volume.
Kbytes size allocated for the Application & Data storage
place (default value: 768 Kbytes)
usable only with <Mode> = 6
MinSize is different according to AirPrime Managment Services
features activation state (see
chapter Device Services General status +WDSG command).
When the Device services are in prohibited state (see chapter
Device Services General
status +WDSG), MinSize=0.
When the Device services are not in prohibited state (see
chapter Device Services General
status +WDSG), Minsize value differs according to the flash memory
size:
64 for 32Mbits Flash size, 256 for 64Mbits flash size, and 256
for 128Mbits flash size.
MaxSize value differs according to the flash memory size:
1024 for 32Mbits Flash size, 4864 for 64Mbits flash size and
13056 for 128Mbits flash size.
Provided parameter value will be rounded up to the next flash
sector sub-division (64
Kbytes). For example, if a 100 Kbytes size is required, a 128
Kbytes size will effectively be
set.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Open
ATฎ Commands
Sierra
Wireless Open ATฎ Control Command +WOPEN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 54
<OatSize>:
Open ATฎ application reserved size (in
Kbytes)
returned with <Mode> = 6
This size is calculated from the <A&Dsize> one, since
the whole available size for Open
ATฎ, A&D and AirPrime Managment Services storage places is
fixed according to flash
memory size. 1280 Kbytes (<OatSize> + <A&Dsize>
= 1280) for 32Mbits Flash size, 5120
Kbytes (<OatSize>+<A&Dsize>=5120) for 64Mbits
Flash size and 13312 Kbytes
(<OatSize>+<A&Dsize>=13312) for 128Mbits Flash
size.
<OatState>:
Open ATฎ application current state
returned with <Mode> = 7
This state will be greater than 0 only if the current +WOPEN
command state is 1 (except
when OatState = 13, which can occur even if the application is
not started on the target).
0 application is not started (current mode is AT+WOPEN=0)
1 no downloaded application in the embedded module
2 bad checksum
The application binary seems to be corrupted.
3 bad header
The downloaded file seems not to be an Open ATฎ application.
4 version mismatch
The application binary was built with an SDK version which is
not compatible with the
current OS.
5 too many tasks
The number of declared tasks in the application exceeds the
maximum allowed one.
6 bad binary init function
The application binary seems to be corrupted.
7 bad task entry point
The application binary seems to be corrupted.
8 link issue
The application global variables area initialization is
impossible.
9 bad memory configuration
The RAM size required by the application exceeds the maximum
allowed one.
10 application is not started; starting was cancelled by the
Open ATฎ Safe Boot. When
reset with this command, the safe boot buttons must be held down
until the reception of
+wind3.
11 application is not started; starting was cancelled due to
Open ATฎ OS internal tests
(depending on the OS version linked vs the downloaded
application. Please refer to the
ADL User guide for more information).
12 application started in target mode
The application is now running on the target (the application
adl_main function or task
entry points have been called).
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Open
ATฎ Commands
Sierra
Wireless Open ATฎ Control Command +WOPEN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 55
13 application initialization pending in RTE mode;
The application is going to be started in debug mode.
14 application started in RTE mode;
The application is now running in debug mode
15 application initialization pending in Target mode;
System error during flash or RAM initialisation.
16 no tasks declared;
The application tasks table is empty, no task is declared
17 bad priority value;
At least one task priority value is incorrect (not unique or too
high value w.r.t.,the number
of tasks)
18 Reserved
19 Reserved.
The application has declared call stacks for High Level Handler
interrupt execution
context but not the Low Level Handler interrupt execution
context.
20 Reserved
21 The Open ATฎ application has defined some interrupt priority change,
but the interrupt
priority array not valid.
<SafeBootState>:
usable with <Mode> = 8
0 stop the Open ATฎ
Safe Boot.
1 start the Open ATฎ
Safe Boot.
(default value: 1)
<Key1>:
usable with <Mode> = 8
[0 24] first key used for Open ATฎ Safe Boot.
(default value: 19)
<Key2>:
usable with <Mode> = 8
[0 24] second key used for Open ATฎ Safe Boot. This key has to be
either on the same
row or the same column of the keyboard that Key1.
(default value: 24)
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Open
ATฎ Commands
Sierra
Wireless Open ATฎ Control Command +WOPEN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 56
5.2.4.
Parameter storage
The <Mode>,
<A&Dsize>, <Key1> and <Key2> parameters are stored in
EEPROM without using the
AT&W command.
The default value can be restored using AT&F.
5.2.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WOPEN=? +WOPEN:
(0-8),(64-1024),(0-24),(0-24)
OK
AT+WOPEN? +WOPEN: 0
OK
AT+WOPEN=2
Note: Get the Open ATฎ library versions
+WOPEN: 2,"AT
v03.01","AT v02.10"
OK
Note: Open ATฎ version 2.10 application downloaded.
AT+WOPEN=7 +WOPEN: 7,0
OK
Note: Open ATฎ application not started
AT+WOPEN=1 +CME ERROR: 541
Note: since main versions do not match, the Open
ATฎ application
can not be started.
AT+WOPEN=2
Note: Get the Open ATฎ library versions
+WOPEN: 2,"AT
v2.00","AT v2.00"
OK
Note: Open ATฎ v2.00 library version. An embedded application has
been downloaded on this product..
AT+WOPEN=3 OK
Note: The flash objects are erased
AT+WOPEN=1
Note: Start the embedded application.
OK
+WIND: 3
Note: Product resets in order to start the
embedded application.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Open
ATฎ Commands
Sierra
Wireless Open ATฎ Control Command +WOPEN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 57
Command
Responses
AT+WOPEN=7 +WOPEN: 7,12
OK
Note: Open ATฎ application started on the target.
AT+WOPEN=8 +WOPEN:
8,1,19,24
OK
Note: Safe Boot is active and uses the keys 19
and 24
AT+WOPEN=8,1,10,12
OK
Note: Safe Boot is active and uses the keys 10
and 12.
AT+WOPEN=8,1,10,10
+CME
ERROR: 3
Note: Two different keys have to be supplied
AT+WOPEN=8,1,10,16
+CME
ERROR: 3
Note: The two supplied keys have to be on the
same row or on the
same column
AT+WOPEN=3 +CME ERROR: 532
Note: The embedded application is activated so
the flash objects are
not erased.
AT+WOPEN=4 +CME ERROR: 532
Note: the embedded application is activated so
it cannot be erased
AT+WOPEN=0
Note: Stop the embedded application.
OK
+WIND: 3
Note: Product reset in order to stop the
embedded application.
AT+WOPEN=3 OK
Note: The flash objects are erased
AT+WOPEN=4 OK
Note: The embedded application is erased
AT+WOPEN=6 +WOPEN:
6,704,576
OK
Note: 704 Kbytes are reserved for the A&D
storage place, and 576
Kbytes for the Open ATฎ application
AT+WOPEN=6,1344
+CME
ERROR: 550
Note: The current Open ATฎ application size is too big to allow this
new A&D storage place size.
AT+WOPEN=6,704 +WOPEN:
6,704,576
OK
Note: No product reset (same size used)
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Open
ATฎ Commands
Sierra
Wireless Open ATฎ Control Command +WOPEN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 58
Command
Responses
AT+WOPEN=6,900 +WOPEN:
6,960,320
OK
+WIND: 3
Note: Size updated according to the next flash
sector sub-division.
Product reset in order to set the new A&D
storage place size.
AT+WOPEN=6 +WOPEN:
6,960,320
OK
Note: 960 Kbytes are reserved for the A&D
storage place, and 320
Kbytes for the Open ATฎ application
AT+WOPEN=5
Note: Suspend Open ATฎ tasks
+CME ERROR: 3
Note: The Open ATฎ application is not running
AT+WOPEN=1
Note: Start the embedded application
OK
+WIND: 3
Note: Product reset in order to start the
embedded application
AT+WOPEN=5
Note: Suspend Open ATฎ tasks
OK
AT+WOPEN? +WOPEN:5
OK
Note: Open ATฎ application suspended by giving AT+WOPEN=5
command can be resumed by AT+WOPENRES command
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Open
ATฎ Commands
Sierra
Wireless Open ATฎ Control Command +WOPEN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 59
5.2.6.
Notes
For mode = 1: if the
main version numbers returned by the AT+WOPEN=2 command do not match,
the command will
reply "+CME ERROR: 541"
<Mode> = 3 and
<Mode> = 4 are only available if the Open ATฎ
embedded application
is stopped
(AT+WOPEN=0).
Open ATฎ embedded
applications can be resumed with AT+WOPENRES command.
The command returns
an error when trying to use a key not available for Open Open ATฎ Safe
Boot.
The external Open ATฎ library
version is not returned in the "AT+WOPEN=2" response.when an
Open ATฎ application
is corrupted. This happens when the application download was incomplete, and
when the CRC is
corrupted, then the application decompression is impossible.
Caution:
With <Mode> = 6, any
A&D size change will lead to the area format process (this process will
take
some seconds on start-up, before the "+WIND:
3" indication display (up to 1.5 second per 64 Kbytes
flash sector size can be considered as a
maximum); all A&D cells data will be erased.
USB restrictions:
Starting or stopping
an Open ATฎ application resets the Sierra Wireless embedded module. When
these AT commands
(AT+WOPEN=1 or AT+WOPEN=0) are sent to the Sierra Wireless embedded
module by using the
USB serial port, the user must:
1. Close the USB
serial port as soon as the command is sent to the Sierra Wireless embedded
module. This means
that the OK response cannot be received by the user application.
2. Wait sufficient
time to allow the Sierra Wireless embedded module to reset. Usually, the user
must
wait 1 second before
reopening the USB serial port.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Open
ATฎ Commands
Open
ATฎ Tasks Resume Command +WOPENRES
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 60
5.3.
Open ATฎ Tasks Resume Command
+WOPENRES
5.3.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command allows to resume the suspended Open ATฎ embedded
application.
5.3.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WOPENRES
OK
Read command
None
Test command
AT+WOPENRES=?
OK
5.3.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
None.
5.3.4.
Parameter Storage
None
5.3.5.
Examples
None.
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 61
6.
Global Configuration Commands
6.1.
Report Mobile Equipment Errors +CMEE
6.1.1.
Description
This command defines
the method for returning error messages. The simple ERROR message can
be replaced by the
verbose method to include the results codes +CME ERROR: <err>. (See
section
"ME error
result code: +CME ERROR" in the "Appendixes" of the present
document for "+CME
ERROR" result
codes description. See section "Message service failure result code: +CMS
ERROR"
in the
"Appendixes" of the present document for "+CMS ERROR"
result codes).
6.1.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CMEE=<n>
OK
Read command
AT+CMEE?
+CMEE: <n>
OK
Test command
AT+CMEE=?
+CMEE: (list of supported
<n>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Report
Mobile Equipment Errors +CMEE
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 62
6.1.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<n>:
error reporting method
0 disable ME error reports, use only "ERROR" (default
value)
1 enable "+CME ERROR: <err>" or "+CMS
ERROR: <err>"
6.1.4.
Parameter Storage
The <n>
parameter is stored in EEPROM using AT&W command. The default value can be
restored
using AT&F.
6.1.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CMEE=? +CMEE: (0,1)
OK
AT+CMEE=0
Note: Disable ME error reports, use only
"ERROR"
OK
AT+CMEE=1
Note: Enable "+CME ERROR: <err>"
or "+CMS ERROR:
<err>"
OK
AT+CMEE? +CMEE: 1
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Hardware
Configuration +WHCNF
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 63
6.2.
Hardware Configuration +WHCNF
6.2.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command allows to:
activate
or deactivate the keypad functionality in the embedded module when available.
When
the keypad is
deactivated, ten more I/0 pins will be free to be used (see PTS documentation
for more
information).
The new setting to
activate or deactive the keypad will be in effect after the next module
restart. With the
keypad activation, ten GPIO pins are subsequently used by the keypad and
cannot be used by
other applications.
activate
or deactivate the flash LED (activity status indication)
The new setting will
be taken into account after a restart.
If the software
downloaded is either corrupted or non-compatible, the flash LED is in
"very
quick flash"
mode even if the flash LED is deactivated.
activate
or deactivate the 32 kHz clock to output on a pin of the embedded module. When
the
32 kHz feature is
deactivated, one more I/0 pin will be free to be used (see PTS
documentation for
more information).
The new setting will
be taken into account immediately after the 32 kHz feature activation or
deactivation. With
the 32 kHz feature activation, one I/O pin is immediately used to output the
clock and this pin is
no more usable as an I/O pin (until the 32 kHz feature will be
deactivated).
This
command allows the users to activate or deactivate the management of Voltage
Indication pin used
by an External SIM Switch to know the power supply level to use as SIM
Vcc. User can choose
the I/O pin which will be allocated for the feature among available I/O
(see +WIOM AT
command). If user does not use the command, a default I/O is defined (see
PTS documentation
for more information).
The new setting will
be taken into account after a restart. The I/O pin is allocated after the
restart during the
embedded module initialization.
This
command allows the users to select the InSIM switch mode. User without adding
an
external SIM card
will be able to make some usage of the network (SMS, GPRS). They can
also insert an
external SIM card which can have precedence over the embedded SIM. Three
modes which are
provided are:
External SIM privileged
(default) External SIM selected if detected, otherwise internal
SIM is selected if
feature is activated
External SIM only
External SIM selected, whatever the state of the external SIM
Internal SIM only
Internal SIM selected, whatever the state of the external SIM
This
command allows the users to activate or deactivate the Diversity Antenna Test
which is
used for test
purpose at customer factory.
The new setting will
be taken into account after a restart such that the diversity antenna will
be used as main
antenna.
The Diversity
Antenna Test feature is available only on specific product; for example, the
Q26Extreme
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Hardware
Configuration +WHCNF
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 64
This
command allows the users to set the FD of UART. The new setting will be taken
into
account immediately.
UARTs have dedicated memory in the form of a FIFO structure for each
receive and transmit
operations. The purpose of the FIFO structures is to hold data either
received from the
serial port or to be written to the serial port.
6.2.2.
Syntax
For
<type> = 0, 2 and 6
Action command
AT+WHCNF=<type>,<mode>
[+WHCNF:
<type>,<status>]
OK
For
<type> = 1, 4 and 5
Action command
AT+WHCNF=<type>,<mode>
[+WHCNF:
<type>,<status>,<resetFlag>]
OK
For
<type> = 3
Action command
AT+WHCNF=<type>,<mode>[,<GpioId>[,<Polarity>]]
[+WHCNF:
<type>,<status>,<resetFlag>[,<
GpioId>,<Polarity>]]
OK
Read command
AT+WHCNF?
+WHCNF:
<type>,<status>[,<resetFlag>[,<GpioId>,<Polarity>]]
[+WHCNF:
<type>,<status>[,<resetFlag>[,<GpioId>,<Polarity>]][
]]
OK
Test command
AT+WHCNF=?
+WHCNF: <type>,(list of
supported <mode>s)[,(list of supported <GpioId>s,(list of
supported <Polarity>s]
[+WHCNF: <type>,(list of
supported <mode>s)[,(list of supported <GpioId>s,(list of
supported <Polarity>s][
]]
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Hardware
Configuration +WHCNF
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 65
6.2.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<type>:
hardware functionality
0 keypad (not supported for AirPrime SL6087 module)
1 flash LED
2 32 kHz clock
3 voltage indication IO supplier
4 InSIM Switch functionality
5 Diversity Antenna Test
6 FD functionality
<mode>:
requested operation
For <type> = 0
0 deactivate the keypad
1 activate the keypad (default value)
2 get the keypad status
Note: Keypad is not supported for AirPrime SL6087
module
For <type> = 1
0 deactivate the flash LED
1 activate the flash LED (default value)
2 get the flash LED status
For <type> = 2
0 deactivate the 32 kHz clock. The I/O pin is available (default
value).
1 activate the 32 kHz clock. The I/O pin is used to output the
clock.
2 interrogate the 32 kHz clock management status
For <type> = 3
0 deactivate the voltage indication IO supplier feature (default
value)
1 activate the voltage indication IO supplier feature
2 reserved for future use
3 get the voltage indication IO supplier feature status
For <type> = 4
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Hardware
Configuration +WHCNF
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 66
0 external SIM privileged (default)
1 external SIM only
2 internal SIM only
3 get the inSIM switch selected mode
For <type> = 5
0 deactivate the diversity antenna test (default value)
1 activate the diversity antenna test
2 get the diversity antenna test status
For <type> = 6
1 set the UART FD to 16 bytes
2 set the UART FD to 32 bytes
3 set the UART FD to 56 bytes (default value).
<status>:
current functionality status
For <type> = 0
0 the keypad is deactivated
1 the keypad is activated
For <type> = 1
0 the flash LED is deactivated
1 the flash LED is activated
For <type> = 2
0 the 32 kHz clock management is deactivated
1 the 32 kHz clock management is activated
For <type> = 3
0 the voltage indication IO supplier feature is deactivated
1 the voltage indication IO supplier feature is activated
For <type> = 4
0 external SIM selected if detected, otherwise internal SIM is
selected
1 external SIM always selected
2 internal SIM always selected
For <type> = 5
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Hardware
Configuration +WHCNF
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 67
0 the diversity antenna test is deactivated
1 the diversity antenna test is activated
For <type> = 6
1 UART FD is 16 bytes
2 UART FD is 32 bytes
3 UART FD is 56 bytes
<resetFlag>:
indicate if the embedded module
must be reset to take into account the
functionality state change
Note: Only for <type> = 1, <type> =
3, <type> = 4 and <type> = 5.
0 the functionality has not been modified since the last boot of
the product.
1 the functionality has been modified since the last boot of the
product: It has
to be reset in order to take the modification into account.
<GpioId>:
Gpio name (as mentioned in the
embedded module Product Technical
Specification and Customer Design Guideline) to use for voltage
indication
IO supplier feature.
This parameter is optional. GPIO24 is the default value for wmp100, q64001,
q2686, q2687, q2687cl, fsu01 and fsu02 embedded modules.
Note: Only for <type> = 3
<Polarity>:
Gpio polarity selection. Optional
parameter. 1 is the default value for
wmp100, q64001, q2686, q2687, q2687cl, fsu01 and fsu02 embedded
modules
0 inverted polarity:
- High level is applied on Gpio if lower voltage must be used as
SIM Vcc
- Low level for higher voltage
1 direct polarity:
- High level is applied on Gpio if higher voltage must be used
as SIM Vcc
- Low level for lower voltage
6.2.4.
Parameter storage
For each kind of
<type> parameter, the <mode> parameter is stored in EEPROM without
using
AT&W. Default
values can be restored using AT&F.
For <type>=3,
<GpioId> and <Polarity> parameters value are stored in EEPROM
without using
AT&W. Default
values cannot be restored using AT&F.
For <Type>=6,
<Mode> parameter value is stored in the EEPROM with using AT&W.
Default value
cannot be restored
using AT&F.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Hardware
Configuration +WHCNF
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 68
6.2.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WHCNF=? +WHCNF: 0,(0-2)
+WHCNF: 1,(0-2)
+WHCNF: 2,(0-2)
+WHCNF:
3,(0-3),("GPIO0"-"GPIO48"),(0-1)
+WHCNF: 4,(0-3)
+WHCNF: 5,(0-2)
+WHCNF: 6,(1-3)
OK
Note: The InSIM syntax is only given for embedded
module that
embeds an InSIM.
AT+WHCNF? +WHCNF: 0,1
+WHCNF: 1,1,0
+WHCNF: 2,0
+WHCNF: 3,0,0
+WHCNF: 4,0,0
+WHCNF: 5,0,0
+WHCNF: 6,3
OK
Note: The InSIM state is only given for embedded
module that
embeds an InSIM
AT+WHCNF=0,2
+WHCNF: 0,1
OK
Note: Keypad is activated
AT+CMER=,1
Note: Ask key press event report
OK
+CKEV: 12,1
+CKEV: 12,0
Note: Key 12 has been pressed and released
AT+WHCNF=0,0
Note: The keypad is deactivated
OK
AT+WHCNF=1,0
Note: The flash LED is deactivated
OK
AT+WHCNF=2,0
Note: The 32 kHz output clock is deactivated
OK
AT+WHCNF=3,1
Note: The voltage indication IO supplier is
activated
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Hardware
Configuration +WHCNF
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 69
Command
Responses
AT+WHCNF=3,3
Note: Get the voltage indication IO supplier
status
+WHCNF:
3,1,1,"GPIO24",1
OK
Note: The third parameter <1> indicates a
embedded module reset is
needed
AT+WHCNF=6,2
Note: Set UART FD to 32 bytes
OK
AT+CFUN=1
Note: Reset the embedded module
OK
AT+WHCNF=3,3
Note: Get the voltage indication IO supplier
status
+WHCNF:
3,1,0,"GPIO24",1
OK
Note: The third parameter <0> indicates
that the voltage indication IO
supplier feature is taken into account
AT+WHCNF=3,1,"GPIO2",1
Note: The voltage indication IO supplier is
activated
OK
AT+WHCNF=3,3 +WHCNF:
3,1,1,"GPIO2",1
OK
AT+CFUN=1
Note: Reset the embedded module
OK
AT+WHCNF? +WHCNF: 0,1
+WHCNF: 1,1,0
+WHCNF: 2,0
+WHCNF:
3,1,0,"GPIO2",1
+WHCNF: 4,0,0
+WHCNF: 5,0,0
+WHCNF: 6,3
OK
AT+WHCNF=3,0
Note: The voltage indication IO supplier is
deactivated
OK
AT+WHCNF=3,3 +WHCNF: 3,0,1
OK
AT+WHCNF=4,2
Note: The internal SIM always selected
OK
AT+WHCNF=4,3
Note: Get the inSIM switch mode
+WHCNF: 4,2,1
OK
Note: The third parameter <1> indicates
that the internal SIM always
selected feature is not taken into account
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Hardware
Configuration +WHCNF
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 70
Command
Responses
AT+CFUN=1
Note: Reset the embedded module
OK
AT+WHCNF? +WHCNF: 0,1
+WHCNF: 1,1,0
+WHCNF: 2,0
+WHCNF: 3,0,0
+WHCNF: 4,2,0
+WHCNF: 5,0,0
+WHCNF: 6,3
OK
AT+WHCNF=0,2
Note: Interrogate the keypad status.
+WHCNF: 0,0
OK
AT+CMER? +CMER:
3,1,0,0,0
OK
Note: After the keypad is deactivated, no
unsolicited result is sent
when a key is pressed or released.
AT&F
Note: Restore factory settings
OK
AT+WHCNF=0,2 +WHCNF: 0,1
OK
AT+WHCNF=1,2 +WHCNF: 1,1,1
OK
Note: The third parameter <1> indicates a
embedded module reset is
needed
AT+WHCNF=2,2 +WHCNF: 2,0
OK
AT+WHCNF=0,1
Note: Activate the keypad
OK
AT+WHCNF=5,1
Note: Activate the Diversity Antenna Test
OK
AT+WHCNF=5,2 +WHCNF: 5,1,1
OK
Note: The third parameter <1> indicates a
embedded module reset is
needed
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Hardware
Configuration +WHCNF
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 71
Command
Responses
AT+WHCNF=6,1
Note: Set UART FD to 16 bytes
OK
AT+CFUN=1
Note: Reset the embedded module
OK
AT+WHCNF? +WHCNF: 0,1
+WHCNF: 1,1,0
+WHCNF: 2,0
+WHCNF: 3,0,0
+WHCNF: 4,0,0
+WHCNF: 5,1,0
+WHCNF: 6,3
OK
6.2.6.
Notes
To
activate the voltage indication IO supplier feature with
this command, you must select a
single voltage (i.e.
3v only or 1v8 only) with the Sierra Wireless feature command (AT+WFM).
Its this voltage
that will be used by the electrical SIM interface of the embedded module. This
selection with
AT+WFM must be the current settings (i.e. the reset flag must be equal to 0).
The
mode 4 allows choosing the InSIM mode for the embedded module start is only
available
on the embedded
module that embeds an InSIM. For other embedded modules, the +CME
ERROR: 3 will
be returned.
Keypad
is not supported for AirPrime SL6087 module; parameter <type>=0 is
therefore
unavailable for the
SL6087.
The
<type>=6 for setting UART FD will not be supported for USB. "+CME
ERROR: 3" will be
returned if
"AT+WHCNF=6,x" (where x can be 1, 2 or 3) is passed on USB port.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Embedded
Module Behaviour Configuration +WBHV
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 72
6.3.
Embedded Module Behaviour Configuration
+WBHV
6.3.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command allows the user to configure the behaviour of the
embedded module.
6.3.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WBHV=<parameter1>[,[<parameter2>][,<parameter3>]]
For <parameter1>=6
[+WBHV:
<parameter1>,<parameter2>,<parameter3>]
Else
[+WBHV:
<parameter1>,<parameter2>[,<resetFlag>]]
OK
Read command
AT+WBHV?
+WBHV:
<parameter1>,<parameter2>[,<resetFlag>]
Except for <parameter1>=6:
+WBHV:
<parameter1>,<parameter2>,<parameter3>
[+WBHV:
<parameter1>,<parameter2>[,<resetFlag>][
]]
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Embedded
Module Behaviour Configuration +WBHV
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 73
Test command
AT+WBHV=?
+WBHV: <parameter1>,(list
of supported <parameter2>s) [,<resetFlag>]
Except for <parameter1>=6
+WBHV: <parameter1>,(list
of supported <parameter2>s),(list of supported
<parameter3>s)
[+WBHV: <parameter1>,(list
of supported <parameter2>s) [,<resetFlag>][
]]
OK
6.3.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<parameter1>:
configuration mode
0 configure embedded module response on outgoing voice calls
1 configure embedded module working mode
2 configure the response delay for a call
3 active/deactive ENS feature
4 configure Mix Tone with voice feature
5 Configure Network registration denied indication
6 configure DTMF blank duration for DTMF decoder
8 configure Gain expression (index or dB unit)
9 active/deactive Enhanced Network Selection for Fixed
Application
feature
<parameter2>
configuration value
<parameter1>
<parameter2>
0 0 embedded module response is sent on call establishment
(default
value)
0 1 embedded module response is sent when audio path is opened
0 - interrogate embedded module respond mode
1 0 ACTIVE mode with GSM stack in idle is normal (default value)
1 1 ACTIVE mode with the GSM stack turn-off
1 2 SLEEP mode with the GSM stack turn-off
1 - get modem init mode state
2 0 response when the remote part hangs up (default value)
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Embedded
Module Behaviour Configuration +WBHV
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 74
2 1 107HOK will be displayed immediately after the ATD command and
+WIND: 5,x indication.
2 - interrogate modem call respond mode
3 0 deactivate ENS feature (default value)
3 1 activate ENS feature
3 - get ENS feature mode state
4 0 deactivate Mix tone with voice feature (default value)
4 1 activate Mix tone with voice feature
4 - get Mix tone with voice feature mode state
5 0 deactivate Network registration denied indication feature
(default
value)
5 1 activate Network registration denied indication feature
5 - get Network registration denied indication feature mode
state
6 BlankDuration Also expressed by <parameter3>
only for <parameter1>=6.
configures the silence duration used to separate 2 DTMFs.
It can be expressed by step (with <parameter2>) or by ms
(with
<parameter3>).
108HIf user sets blank duration with
<parameter2> and <parameter3>,
an error is returned.
109HIf user sets blank duration in ms
with a <parameter3> which it is
not a step multiple, a round up is done (cf example).
The step depends on
the embedded module used:
Step <parameter2> <parameter3>
10HWMP100,
WMP50,
Q2686,
Q2687
10ms [1-255]
Default: 20
[10-2550]
Default: 200ms
1HNote: If SLEEP or ACTIVE mode is
activated (+WBHV:1,1 or
+WBHV:1,2 and a reset has been done for the activation of the
consumption mode), blank duration value is null, because DTMF
decoding feature is not avalaible.
So <parameter2> and <parameter3> =0.
6 - get the current silent duration use to separate DTMF
decoding
8 0 set gain expression in dB unit (default value)
8 1 set gain expression in index
8 - get gain expression mode state
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Embedded
Module Behaviour Configuration +WBHV
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 75
9 0 deactivate Enhanced Network Selection for Fixed Application
feature (default value)
9 1 activate Enhanced Network Selection for Fixed Application
feature
9 - get Enhanced Network Selection for Fixed Application feature
mode state
6.3.4.
Parameter Storage
12H<parameter1>, <parameter2> and <parameter3>
are stored without using AT&W command. The
default values can
be restored using AT&F.
6.3.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WBHV=? 13H+WBHV: 0,(0-1)
14H+WBHV: 1,(0-2)
15H+WBHV: 2,(0-1)
16H+WBHV: 3,(0-1),(0-1)
17H+WBHV: 4,(0-1)
18H+WBHV: 5,(0-1)
19H+WBHV: 6,(1-255),(10-2550)
120H+WBHV: 8,(0-1)
121H+WBHV: 9,(0-1)
OK
12HNote: Response on WMP50,
WMP100
123HAT+WBHV=0,1
Note: Set modem response when audio path is
opened
OK
Note: Modem response is sent on audio path opened
AT+WBHV=0
Note: Interrogate modem respond mode
124H+WBHV: 0,1
OK
125HAT+WBHV=1,1
Note: Modem powerless mode
OK
AT+WBHV=1
Note: Interrogate modem init mode
126H+WBHV: 1,2
OK
127HAT+WBHV=2,1
128HNote: Modem response mode on
a call: OK just after
+WIND: 5,x indication
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Embedded
Module Behaviour Configuration +WBHV
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 76
Command
Responses
AT+WBHV=2
Note: Interrogate modem call respond mode
129H+WBHV: 2,1
OK
130HAT+WBHV=3,0
Note: Deactivate ENS feature. The feature will be
deactivated after reset
OK
131HAT+WBHV=3,1
Note: Activate ENS feature. The feature will be
activated after reset
OK
132HNote: OK if STK session is
already opened, else +CME ERROR: 3
AT+WBHV=3
Note: Interrogate ENS feature mode
13H+WBHV: 3,1,1
OK
Note: Third parameter <1> indicates that a
embedded module reset is
needed
AT+WBHV? 134H+WBHV: 0,1
135H+WBHV: 1,1
136H+WBHV: 2,1
137H+WBHV: 3,1,1
138H+WBHV: 4,0
139H+WBHV: 5,0
140H+WBHV: 6,20,200
141H+WBHV: 8,0
142H+WBHV: 9,0,0
OK
Note1: Third parameter <1> indicates that a
embedded module reset
is needed)
Note2: Response on WMP100
AT+CFUN=1 OK
AT+WBHV=3 143H+WBHV: 3,1,0
OK
Note: Third parameter <0> indicates that a
embedded module reset is
not needed
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Embedded
Module Behaviour Configuration +WBHV
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 77
Command
Responses
AT+WBHV? 14H+WBHV: 0,1
145H+WBHV: 1,1
146H+WBHV: 2,1
147H+WBHV: 3,1,0
148H+WBHV: 4,0
149H+WBHV: 5,0
150H+WBHV: 6,20,200
151H+WBHV: 8,0
152H+WBHV: 9,0,0
OK
Note1: Third parameter <0> indicates that a
embedded module reset
is not needed
Note2: Response on WMP100
AT&F
Note: Restore factory settings
OK
AT+WBHV=3 153H+WBHV: 3,0,1
OK
Note: Third parameter <1> indicates that a
embedded module reset is
needed since ENS feature before AT&F was 1
154HAT+WBHV=8,1
Note: Enable gain expression in index
OK
AT+WBHV=8
Note: Get gain expression state
15H+WBHV: 8,1
OK
156HAT+WBHV=4,1
Note: Enable mix tone with voice
OK
AT+WBHV=4
Note: Get mix tone with voice feature state
157H+WBHV: 4,1
OK
158HAT+WBHV=5,1
Note: Enable network registration denied
indication
OK
AT+WBHV=5
Note: Get network registration denied indication
feature state
159H+WBHV: 5,1
OK
AT+WBHV=6
Note: Get DTMF silent duration use to separate
DTMF
during a DTMF decoding
160H+WBHV: 6,20,200
OK
161HNote: Response on WMP100,
WMP50
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Embedded
Module Behaviour Configuration +WBHV
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 78
Command
Responses
162HAT+WBHV=6,30
Note: Set the duration used to separate DTMF
during
a DTMF decoding to:
163H- 300 ms for a WMP100, WMP50
OK
AT+WBHV=6
Note: Get DTMF silent duration use to separate
DTMF
during a DTMF decoding
164H+WBHV: 6,30,300
OK
165HNote: Response on WMP100,
WMP50
16HAT+WBHV=6,10,100 +CME ERROR:3
Note: parameter2 and parameter3 are not used.
167HAT+WBHV=6,,250
Note: Set the duration used to separate DTMF
during
a DTMF decoding to 250 ms
OK
AT+WBHV=6 168H+WBHV: 6,25,250
OK
169HNote: response on WMP100,
WMP50
170HAT+WBHV=6,,251 OK
Note: a round up is done. The duration used to
separate DTMF during
a DTMF decoding is:
171H260 ms for a WMP100, WMP50
AT+WBHV=6
Note: Get DTMF silent duration use to separate
DTMF
during a DTMF decoding
172H+WBHV: 6,26,260
OK
173HNote: response on WMP100,
WMP50 after a round up has been done
174HAT+WBHV=9,0
Note: Deactivate Enhanced Network Selection
feature. The feature will be deactivated after
reset
OK
175HAT+WBHV=9,1
Note: Activate Enhanced Network Selection
feature.
The feature will be activated after reset
OK
AT+WBHV=9
Note: Interrogate Enhanced Network Selection
feature
mode
176H+WBHV: 9,1,1
OK
Note: Third parameter <1> indicates that a
embedded module reset is
needed
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Embedded
Module Behaviour Configuration +WBHV
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 79
Command
Responses
AT+WBHV? 17H+WBHV: 0,0
178H+WBHV: 1,0
179H+WBHV: 2,0
180H+WBHV: 3,0,1
181H+WBHV: 4,1
182H+WBHV: 5,1
183H+WBHV: 6,26,260
184H+WBHV: 8,1
185H+WBHV: 9,1,1
OK
Note1: Third parameter <1> indicates that a
embedded module reset
is needed)
Note2: Response on WMP100
AT+CFUN=1 OK
AT+WBHV? 186H+WBHV: 0,0
187H+WBHV: 1,0
18H+WBHV: 2,0
189H+WBHV: 3,0,0
190H+WBHV: 4,1
191H+WBHV: 5,1
192H+WBHV: 6,26,260
193H+WBHV: 8,1
194H+WBHV: 9,1,0
OK
Note: Third parameter <0> indicates that a
embedded module reset is
not needed
Note2: Response on WMP100
AT&F
Note: Restore factory settings
OK
AT+WBHV=9 195H+WBHV: 9,0,1
OK
Note: Third parameter <1> indicates that a
embedded module reset
is needed since the feature before AT&F was 1
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Embedded
Module Behaviour Configuration +WBHV
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 80
6.3.6.
Notes
196HIf <parameter1> value is 0, the command is used to
configure when the embedded module sends the
response of an
outgoing voice call.
197HIf <parameter1> value is 1, the command is used to
configure the embedded module power
consumption mode.
198HIf <parameter1> value is 2, the command is used to
configure when the embedded module sends the
response for a call.
19HIf <parameter1> value is 3, the command is used to
activate/deactivate ENS feature.
20HIf <parameter1> value is 3, new setting will be taken into
account only after a embedded module
reset. To be able to
activate ENS Feature, a STK session must be opened (AT+STSF=1), otherwise
+CME ERROR: 3
occurs.
The mix tone with
voice feature (<parameter1>= 4) does not allow cutting the voice when the
embedded module
plays a tone during a voice communication.
The network
registration denied indication feature (<parameter1>= 5) is used to
change the +CREG
indication response
to return the cause of the network registration reject.
The DTMF blank
duration feature (<parameter1>= 6) is used to configure the threshold in
ms used to
separate 2 DTMF when
we use the DTMF decoding feature.
The gain expression
mode (<parameter1>= 8) allows to choose how to express gain for audio
command (ex:+WTONE).
The gain can be expressed in dB unit or in index (see table in the
corresponding AT
command paragraph).
The Enhanced Network
Selection for Fixed Application feature (<parameter>=9) is used to speed
up
the embedded module
registration to the network at switch on and when it stays in a fixed location.
This feature also
enhances the embedded module power consumption.
201HIf <parameter1> value is 9, new setting will be taken into
account only after a embedded module reset
or GSM stack restart
(AT+CFUN=1,0).
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Features
Management +WFM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 81
6.4.
Features Management +WFM
6.4.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command enables or disables specific selected features.
202HOnce a feature is successfully enabled or disabled, the product
needs to be reset to take the
modification into
account.
6.4.2.
Syntax
Action command
203HAT+WFM=<mode>[,<FtrID>]
204H[+WFM: <FtrID>,<status>,<resetFlag>
205H[+WFM: <FtrID>,<status>,<resetFlag>[
]]]
OK
Read command
None
Test command
None
6.4.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mode>:
requested operation
0 disable feature <FtrID>
1 enable feature <FtrID>
2 get the feature <ftrID> state
206HIf the <FtrID> parameter is
not used, the status of all the features are listed (with
several +WFM responses).
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Features
Management +WFM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 82
<FtrID>:
feature identification
The +WFM response only uses alphabetical values for the
<FtrID> parameter.
207HFor <FtrID> values with two
digits (like 1x, 6x or 8x), the <mode> 0 value is not
"allowed". When a "xa" feature is enabled,
enabling another "xb" feature will
automatically disable the "xa" feature.
numerical
alphabetical
11 "MONO900" mono-band mode 900 MHz (default: 0)
12 "MONO1800" mono-band mode 1800 MHz (default:0)
13 "MONO1900" mono-band mode 1900 MHz (default:0)
14 "BI9001800" dual-band mode 900/1800 MHz (default:
0)
15 "BI9001900" dual-band mode 900/1900 MHz (default:
0)
16 "MONO850" mono-band mode 850 MHz (default: 0)
17 "BI8501900" dual-band mode 850/1900 MHz (default:
0)
18 "QUADBAND" quad-band mode 850/900/1800/1900 MHz
(default: 1)
2 "EFR" enhanced full rate feature (default: 1)
3 "HR" half rate feature (default: 1)
4 "DTXDATA" data with DTX feature (default: 1)
5 "DATA144" data 14.4 kbits/s feature (default: 1)
61 "SIM3VONLY" 3V SIM voltage mode (default: 0)
62 "SIM1V8ONLY" 208H1,8V SIM voltage mode (default: 0)
63 "SIM1V8AND3V" 209H1,8V and 3V SIM voltage mode (default: 1)
7 "SIMREMOVE" SIM removal feature (default: 1)
8 "OFFWHENUNPLUG" off when unplug mode (default: 0)
9 "SWITCHATT" switch attenuation feature (default: 1)
A "CPHS" CPHS feature (default: 1)
B "SIMSPEEDENH" SIM speed enhancement feature
(default:1)
C "LOCA" location feature (default: 0)
D "AMR" AMR feature (default: 1)
E "NT_6K" NIRR bit management for network (default: 1)
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Features
Management +WFM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 83
<status>:
feature <FtrID> status
0 disabled
1 enabled
<resetFlag>:
indicate if the embedded module
must be reset to take into account the feature
<ftrID> state change.
0 The feature has not been modified since the last boot of the
product.
1 The feature has been modified since the last boot of the
product; a reset must be
performed to take the modifications into account.
6.4.4.
Parameter Storage
The <status>
parameter is stored in EEPROM without using AT&W.
6.4.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
210HAT+WFM=2,"BI9001800" 21H+WFM: "BI9001800",1,0
OK
Note: Dual-band mode 900/1800 is enabled
212HAT+WFM=0,"EFR" OK
Note: Disable the Enhanced full rate feature
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Features
Management +WFM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 84
Command
Responses
AT+WFM=2 213H+WFM: "MONO900",0,0
+WFM: "MONO1800",0,0
+WFM: "MONO1900",0,0
+WFM: "BI9001800",1,0
+WFM: "BI9001900",0,0
+WFM: "MONO850",0,0
+WFM: "BI8501900",0,0
+WFM: "QUADBAND",0,0
+WFM: "EFR",0,1
+WFM: "HR",1,0
+WFM: "DTXDATA",1,0
+WFM: "DATA144",1,0
+WFM: "SIM3VONLY",0,0
+WFM: "SIM1V8ONLY",0,0
+WFM:
"SIM1V8AND3V",1,0
+WFM: "SIMREMOVE",1,0
+WFM:
"OFFWHENUNPLUG",0,0
+WFM: "SWITCHATT",1,0
+WFM: "CPHS",1,0
+WFM:
"SIMSPEEDENH",0,0
+WFM: "LOCA",0,0
+WFM: "AMR",0,0
+WFM: "NT_6K",1,0
OK
Note : Get all <FtrID> status Note: The
modified features have their <resetFlag> parameter
set to 1.
6.4.6.
Notes
214H"MONO900",
"MONO850", "MONO1800", "MONO1900",
"BI9001900", "BI9001800",
"BI8501900"
and "QUADBAND" features are read-only. In order to change the band
selection, use the
+WMBS command.
The
"SIMREMOVE" feature and AT+WIND=1 enable "+WIND: 1" and
"+WIND: 2" unsolicited
responses for SIM
insertion and extraction.
215HWhen the "OFFWHENUNPLUG"
feature is activated, if the pin interrupt is set, an AT+CPOF
is executed.
216HWhen the "SWITCHATT" feature
is activated, the switch attenuation algorithm is available to
the +ECHO command.
217H"AMR" feature can only be
activated for AMR product. If the AMR function is not available, its
activation or
deactivation has neither effect nor error response.
"SIMREMOVE"
feature cannot be changed for product using the InSIM v1 (i.e. product that
used only the
internal SIM without any way to connect an external SIM).
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Commercial
Feature Management +WCFM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 85
6.5.
Commercial Feature Management +WCFM
6.5.1.
Description
218HThis Sierra Wireless proprietary command enables or disables
Sierra Wireless specific features.
Disabling a feature
can be done with no restriction, but a password is required to enable features.
This command is used
only on request of Sierra Wireless
219HOnce a feature is successfully enabled or disabled, the product
needs to be reset to take the
modification into
account.
6.5.2.
Syntax
Action command
20HAT+WCFM=<mode>[,<FtrMask>[,<PassWord>]]
21H[+WCFM: <FtrMask>,<resetFlag>]
OK
Read command
None
Test command
None
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Commercial
Feature Management +WCFM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 86
6.5.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mode>:
requested operation
0 disable some features of <FtrMask>
1 enable some features of <FtrMask>
2 display the features state
3 Obsolete mode (disabled some extended commercial features of
<FtrMask>). This mode does not impact the embedded module
even if the
returned response is OK.
4 Obsolete mode (enabled some extended commercial features of
<FtrMask>). This mode does not impact the embedded module
even if the
returned response is OK.
5 Obsolete mode (displayed the extended commercial features
state. These
extended commercial features are not locked anymore. The
returned value
should not be taken into account. This mode is kept for
compatibility).
<FtrMask>:
features mask
16 bits hexadecimal string
2Hcommercial features (
<mode>=0, <mode>=1 or <mode>=2) :
02 "Reserved for future use" (old obsolete GPRS Class
2 feature. Now, this
feature is always activated)
04 "Reserved for future use" (old obsolete embedded
module Highest GPRS
CLASS feature. Now, this feature is always activated)
08 "Reserved for future use" (old obsolete WAP
feature)
10 "Reserved for future use"(old obsolete Open ATฎ Bluetooth Plug In)
20 Echo Cancellation Algorithm
40 EDGE (EGPRS)
80 Sierra Wireless debug feature
100 "Reserved for future use" (old obsolete AT Parser
Lock feature)
200 DOTA 3
400 AirPrime Managment Services Third Server
800 "Reserved for future use"(old obsolete 3G feature
feature)
<PassWord>:
password for feature unlocking
256 bits hexadecimal string
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Commercial
Feature Management +WCFM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 87
<resetFlag>:
reset flag
0 The feature has not been modified since the last boot of the
product.
1 The feature has been modified since the last boot of the
product; a reset
must be performed to take the modifications into account.
6.5.4.
Parameter Storage
The <FtrMask>
parameter is stored in EEPROM without using AT&W.
6.5.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WCFM=2
Note: Display the feature status
23H+WCFM: "AAAA",0
OK
24HAT+WCFM=0,"0A00"
Note: Disable some features
OK
AT+WCFM=2 25H+WCFM: "0A00",1
OK
Note: Display the feature status Note:
<resetFlag> parameter indicates if a reset is
necessary
A reset must be performed to take the
modifications into
account.
26HAT+WCFM=1,"0003","1234567890ABCDEF1234567
890ABCDEF1234567890ABCDEF1234567890ABCDEF
"
OK
Note : Enable features Note: The features are
enabled (the password is correct)
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Sierra
Wireless SLEEP Mode +W32K
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 88
6.6.
Sierra Wireless SLEEP Mode +W32K
6.6.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command allows the SLEEP mode to be enabled or disabled. This
command also allows
to ignore or not the DTR signal for the SLEEP mode.
27HWith this command, a specific procedure on RS232 serial link is
requested to activate or deactivate
SLEEP mode.
6.6.2.
Syntax
Action command
28HAT+W32K=<mode>[,<DTRSignalUsed>]
OK
Read command
None
Test command
None
6.6.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mode>:
SLEEP mode
0 disable
1 enable
<DTRSignalUsed>
indicate if the DTR signal is used
to enter/leave the SLEEP mode
0 29HThe DTR signal is ignored to enter the SLEEP mode. When using
this setting, the
SLEEP cannot be left by using the DTR.
1 The DTR signal is used to enter or leave the SLEEP mode (default)
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Sierra
Wireless SLEEP Mode +W32K
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 89
6.6.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
6.6.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+W32K=1
Note: Enable SLEEP mode
OK
Note: 32kHz SLEEP mode is enabled and the DTR
signal is used to
enter/leave SLEEP mode.
AT+W32K=0
Note: Disable SLEEP mode
OK
230HAT+W32K=1,0
Note: Enable 32kHz SLEEP mode without using the
DTR signal
OK
Note: 32kHz SLEEP mode is enabled and the DTR
signal is ignored
to enter/leave the SLEEP mode.
AT+W32K=0
Note: Disable 32kHz SLEEP mode
OK
Note: 32kHz SLEEP mode is disabled
6.6.6.
Notes
231HWhen power down mode is entered, the
product uses a 32kHz internal clock during inactivity
stages (despite of
its nominal internal clock).
232HWhen enabled, power down mode is active
after 1 to 15 seconds. The mode is not stored in
EEPROM: the command
has to be repeated after a reset.
23HWhen enabled with "the DTR signal ignored", DTR signal
is not taken into account to enter or
leave the SLEEP
mode. The customer application needs to focus particularly on all sleep and
wake-up conditions
without using the UART.
234HThe optional parameter
<DTRSignalUsed> only applies to UART1 (and not UART2, CMUX
virtual ports).
For
additional information
235Habout
power down mode, see Application Note on Power Down Control via RS232,
236Habout
embedded modules working modes, please refer to the Appendixes of the AT
Commands Interface
Guide,
237Habout
RS232 serial link procedure to activate or deactivate the SLEEP mode, please
refer
to the Appendixes of
the AT Commands Interface Guide.
When
enabled with "the DTR signal ignored" the embedded module exits slow
idle mode on
keypress and
re-enters slow idle mode after all Open ATฎ treatments.
By
entering into 32kHz mode, the watchdog functionality of the unit will be turned
OFF i.e. if a
problem occurs
within the Open ATฎ application, the unit will not power cycle to recover the
unit. To ensure full
system recovery in this situation, an external watchdog needs to be
implemented.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Power
Off +CPOF
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 90
6.7.
Power Off +CPOF
6.7.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command stops the GSM software stack and the hardware layer or
the embedded module
activity. The AT+CFUN=0 command is equivalent to +CPOF.
Note: 238HIn autobaud mode, after a +CPOF unsolicited
information waking up the embedded module is sent at
9600 bps until an AT command is sent. When an AT
command is sent, the embedded module will
synchronize to the sender speed. (see CAUTION in
section 8.2 Fixed DTE rate +IPR in Serial Ports
Commands section).
6.7.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CPOF[=<mode>]
OK
Read command
None
Test command
None
6.7.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mode>:
power off mode
1 power off
6.7.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Power
Off +CPOF
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 91
6.7.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CPOF
Note: Stop GSM stack
OK
AT+CPOF=1
Note: Stop the embedded module
OK
6.7.6.
Notes
239HAfter AT+CPOF=1, the embedded module will not respond to AT
commands. To reset, use the hard
reset.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Set
Phone Functionality +CFUN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 92
6.8.
Set Phone Functionality +CFUN
6.8.1.
Description
This command selects
the functionality level for the mobile station.
240HWhen the application wants to stop the product with a power off,
or if the application wants to force
the product to
execute an IMSI DETACH procedure, then it must send:
AT+CFUN=0
(equivalent to +CPOF).
This command
executes an IMSI DETACH and makes a backup copy of some internal parameters in
SIM and in EEPROM.
The SIM card cannot be accessed.
241HIf the mobile equipment is not powered off by the application
after this command has been sent, a restart
command (AT+CFUN=1
or AT+CFUN=1,1) will have to be issued to restart the GSM registration
process.
242HIf the mobile equipment is turned off after this command, then a
power on will restart the GSM
registration
process.
243HThe AT+CFUN=1 (or AT+CFUN=1,1) command restarts the entire GSM
stack and GSM functionality:
a complete software
reset is performed. All parameters are reset to their previous values if
AT&W was
not used.
24HThe AT+CFUN=1,0 command set the MT full functionality without
reset. The command can be used
after AT+CFUN=0,
AT+CPOF or AT+CFUN=4, otherwise +CME ERROR: 3 is returned. The RF and
SIM are accessible.
The AT+CFUN=4
command stops the RF (performs an IMSI DETACH if the embedded module is
registered) and
keeps access to the SIM. All AT commands related to SIM access are allowed.
245HAfter performing a Power-OFF using +CPOF or AT+CFUN=0 command,
the AT+CFUN=4 command
returns +CME ERROR:
3.
246HIf entries are written in the phonebook (+CPBW) and if the
product is reset directly before +CPBW
response (AT+CFUN=1
or AT+CFUN=1,1, with no previous AT+CFUN=0 command), some entries
may be lost (the SIM
task does not have enough time to write entries in the SIM card).
247HIn addition, the OK response will be sent at the last saved
(AT&W) baud rate defined by the +IPR
command. With the
autobauding mode, the response can be sent at a different baud rate, it is
therefore preferable
to save the defined baud rate with AT&W before sending the AT+CFUN=1 (or
AT+CFUN=1,1)
command.
248HNormally, when using UART1 or UART2 to manage the embedded
module, the OK response is sent
to the application
after the embedded module reset.
Caution:
249H When using the emulated serial port, the OK
response is not provided. In addition, the embedded
module reset will cause the USB stack to stop.
From the hosts point of view, it is similar to a USB
cable disconnection. As a consequence, the host
will uninstall the Sierra Wireless USB driver and the
application will reference a non valid driver.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Set
Phone Functionality +CFUN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 93
6.8.2.
Syntax
Action command
250HAT+CFUN=<fun>[,<rst>]
OK
Read command
AT+CFUN?
+CFUN: <fun>
OK
Test command
AT+CFUN=?
251H+CFUN: (list of supported <fun>s),(list of supported
<rst>s)
OK
6.8.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<fun>:
functionality level
0 252Hset minimum functionality, IMSI detach procedure and SIM stop
1 set the full functionality mode with a complete software reset
4 only stop the RF (IMSI detach procedure) and keep access to
the SIM
<rst>:
reset (only for <fun> equals
1)
0 do not reset the MT before setting it to full functionality
power level
1 reset the MT before setting it to full functionality power
level (default value)
6.8.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Set
Phone Functionality +CFUN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 94
6.8.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CFUN=? 253H+CFUN: (0,1,4),(0,1)
OK
AT+CFUN?
Note: Ask for current functionality level
+CFUN: 1
OK
Note: Full functionality
AT+CFUN=0
254HNote: Set minimum
functionality, IMSI detach procedure
OK
25HAT+CFUN=1,0
Note: Set the full functionality mode with a
complete software
reset
OK
256HAT+CFUN=1,0 +CME ERROR: 3
257HNote: No Power Off done
before (CFUN=0, CFUN=4 or
CPOF)
AT+CFUN=4
Note: Stop the RF and keep SIM access
OK
AT+CFUN=1
Note: Set the full functionality mode with a
complete software
reset
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Sierra
Wireless Reset +WRST
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 95
6.9.
Sierra Wireless Reset +WRST
6.9.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command resets the embedded module after a programmed delay.
The embedded module
will reset cyclically until this mode is disabled.
6.9.2.
Syntax
Action command
258HAT+WRST=<Mode>[,<Delay>]
OK
Read command
AT+WRST?
259H+WRST: <Mode>[,<Delay>,<RemainTime>]
OK
Test command
AT+WRST=?
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Sierra
Wireless Reset +WRST
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 96
6.9.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<Mode>:
timer reset mode
0 disabled
1 enabled
<Delay>:
time set to reset the embedded
module
range: "000:01"- "168:59" (format hhh:mm)
<RemainTime>:
time before next reset
range: "000:01"- "168:59" (format hhh:mm)
6.9.4.
Parameter Storage
The <Mode> and
<Delay> parameters are stored in EEPROM without using AT&W.
6.9.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WRST=0
Note: Disable timer
OK
260HAT+WRST=1,"001:03"
Note: Enable timer and set delay at 1 hour 3
minutes
OK
AT+WRST? 261H+WRST: 1,"001:03","001:01"
OK
262HNote: Timer activated to
reset after 1hour and 3 minutes., next reset
is set for 1 hour and 1 minute.
6.9.6.
Notes
Caution:
: The +WRST command is
strictly forbidden when the user application communicates with the Sierra
Wireless embedded module by using the USB serial
port.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Save
Configuration W
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 97
6.10.
Save Configuration W
6.10.1.
Description
This command writes
the active configuration into a non-volatile memory (EEPROM).
6.10.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT&W
OK
Read command
None
Test command
None
6.10.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
None.
6.10.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Save
Configuration W
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 98
6.10.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+IPR=9600
Note: Change data rate in memory only
OK
AT&W OK
AT+CFUN=1 OK
AT+IPR?
+IPR: 9600
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Restore
Factory Settings F
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 99
6.11.
Restore Factory Settings F
6.11.1.
Description
This command is used
to restore factory settings from EEPROM.
6.11.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT&F[<n>]
OK
Read command
None
Test command
None
6.11.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<n>:
setting restore parameter
263HIf <n> is not omitted and
with a value different from 0, the response is OK without any
treatment.
0 restore factory settings
6.11.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Restore
Factory Settings F
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 100
6.11.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT&F
Note: Asks for restoring the factory settings
OK
Note: Done
AT&F0
Note: Idem
OK
Note: Done
6.11.6.
Notes
264HFor each parameter, the section "Parameter Storage"
specifies which default values can be restored
using AT&F. The
parameters are restored in RAM and in E2P, overwriting the profile set with
AT&W.
This command does
not update the +IPR command.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Default
Configuration ATZ
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 101
6.12.
Default Configuration ATZ
6.12.1.
Description
This command
restores the configuration profile from non-volatile memory (EEPROM).
6.12.2.
Syntax
Action command
ATZ
OK
Read command
None
Test command
None
6.12.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
None.
6.12.4.
Parameter Storage
None
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Default
Configuration ATZ
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 102
6.12.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+IPR?
+IPR: 115200
OK
Note: Default value is in EEPROM
AT+IPR=9600
Note: Change data rate in memory only
OK
AT+IPR?
+IPR: 9600
OK
ATZ OK
AT+IPR?
+IPR: 115200
OK
Note: Default value set back from EEPROM
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Display
configuration V
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 103
6.13.
Display configuration V
6.13.1.
Description
This command is used
to display the embedded module configuration.
6.13.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT&V[<n>]
Q:<val1> V:<val2>
S0:<val3> S2:<val4> S3:<val5> S4:<val6> S5:<val7>
+CR:<val8>
+CRC:<val9> +CMEE:<val10> +CBST:<val11>
+SPEAKER:<val12>
+ECHO:<val13> &C:<val14> &D:<val15> %C:<val16>
[+IPR:<val17>]
+ICF:<val18> +IFC:<val19>
OK
265HNote: For each <valx>
parameter, please refer to the corresponding command.
Read command
None
Test command
None
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Display
configuration V
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 104
6.13.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<n>:
display control parameter
0 display the embedded module configuration in RAM (default value
if no parameter
provided)
1 display the embedded module configuration in EEPROM
2 display the embedded module factory configuration
6.13.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
6.13.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT&V
Note: Display active parameters in RAM
Q:0 V:1 S0:000 S2:043 S3:013
S4:010 S5:008
26H+CR:0 +CRC:0 +CMEE:0 +CBST:0,0,1
267H+SPEAKER:0 +ECHO:1,4 &C:1 &D:2 %C:0
268H+IPR:9600 +ICF:3,4 +IFC:2,2
OK
269HNote: Done for Echo, the
first parameter indicates the echo cancellation activation
and the second parameter indicates the chosen
algorithm. If no echo cancellation
is activated, the response is "+ECHO:
0".
6.13.6.
Notes
The parameters
displayed are the following:
For
<n> = 0 or 1
270H Q:val1, V:val2, S0:val3, S2:val4, S3:val5, S4:val6, S5:val7,
271H +CR:val8, +CRC:val9, +CMEE:val10, +CBST:val11,
272H +SPEAKER:val12, +ECHO:val13, &C:val14, &D:val15,
%C:val16
273H +IPR:val17, +ICF:val18, +IFC:val19
For
<n> = 2
274H Q:val1, V:val2, S0:val3, S2:val4, S3:val5, S4:val6, S5:val7,
275H +CR:val8, +CRC:val9, +CMEE:val10, +CBST:val11,
276H +SPEAKER:val12, +ECHO:val13, &C:val14, &D:val15,
%C:val16
27H +ICF:val18, +IFC:val19
The +IPR value is
not returned for <n>=2.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Sierra
Wireless Custom Character Set +WCCS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 105
6.14.
Sierra Wireless Custom Character Set +WCCS
6.14.1.
Description
278HThis Sierra Wireless proprietary command allows to edit and
display the custom character set tables.
These tables are
used by the "CUSTOM" mode of the +CSCS and the +WPCS commands. In
this
"CUSTOM"
mode, when the user enters a string, it is converted into GSM alphabet using
the custom
to GSM table. In a
similar way, when the user requests a string display, the string is converted
from
GSM alphabet using
the custom alphabet and the custom alphabet extension tables.
6.14.2.
Syntax
If
<mode>=0
Action command
279HAT+WCCS=<mode>,<table>,<character_range>[,<character_range>]
280H+WCCS: <character_number>,<characters>
OK
If
<mode>=1
Action command
281HAT+WCCS=<mode>,<table>,<character_range>[,<character_range>]
>
<characters><ctrl-Z>
OK
Read command
AT+WCCS=?
+WCCS:
<mode>,<table>,<character_range>[,<character_range>]
OK
Test command
None
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Sierra
Wireless Custom Character Set +WCCS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 106
6.14.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mode>:
requested operation
0 display the table
1 edit the table
<table>:
character table selection
0 custom to GSM conversion table (default table is PCCP437 to
GSM table)
1 custom alphabet table (default table is GSM 7 bit default
alphabet)
2 custom alphabet extension table (default table is GSM 7 bit
default alphabet
extended)
<character_range>:
range of character codes in
<table>
0-127 for table index 1 and index 2
0-255 for table index 0
<character_number>:
number of displayed characters
0-127 for table index 1 and index 2
0-255 for table index 0
<characters>:
sequence of ASCII characters
hexastring type
6.14.4.
Parameter Storage
The
<characters> parameter is stored in EEPROM without using AT&W.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Sierra
Wireless Custom Character Set +WCCS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 107
6.14.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WCCS=? 282H+WCCS: (0-1),(0-2),(0-255),(0-255)
OK
283HAT+WCCS=0,0,120,130
Note: Display from character 120 to character 130
of
the custom to GSM conversion table
284H+WCCS: 11, 78797A2020202020097E05
OK
Note: 11 characters displayed
285HAT+WCCS=1,0,115 >
20<ctrl-Z>
Note: Edit character 115 of the custom to GSM
conversion table
OK
Note: Edition successful
286HAT+WCCS=1,1,0,4 >
40A324A5E8<ctrl-Z>
Note: Edit the 5 first characters of the custom
alphabet table
OK
Note: Edition successful
287HAT+WCCS=0,1,1
Note: Display character 1 of the custom alphabet
table
28H+WCCS: 1,A3
OK
6.14.6.
Notes
289HIn edition mode, the session is terminated by <ctrl-Z>, or
aborted by <ESC>. Only hexadecimal
characters
("0"
"9", "A"
"F") can be used. The
number of characters entered must be equal to the
edition range
requested, otherwise the command will return "+CME ERROR: 24".
The default custom
alphabet extension table contains the following extended characters:
| ^ { } [ ]
~ \
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Select
TE Character Set +CSCS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 108
6.15.
Select TE Character Set +CSCS
6.15.1.
Description
290HThis command informs the ME which character set is used by the
TE. The ME can convert each
character of entered
or displayed strings. This is used to send, read or write short messages.
6.15.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CSCS=<Character
Set>
OK
Read command
AT+CSCS?
+CSCS: <Character Set>
OK
Test command
AT+CSCS=?
+CSCS: (list of supported
<Character Set>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Select
TE Character Set +CSCS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 109
6.15.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<Character
Set>: character table set (ASCII string)
"GSM" GSM default alphabet.
"PCCP437" PC character set code page 437 (default
value)
"CUSTOM" user defined character set
"HEX" hexadecimal mode. No character set used; the
user can read or write
hexadecimal values
6.15.4.
Parameter Storage
The <Character
Set> parameter is stored in EEPROM using AT&W command. The default value
can
be restored using
AT&F.
6.15.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CSCS=?
Note: Get possible values
291H+CSCS:
("GSM","PCCP437","CUSTOM","HEX")
OK
AT+CSCS="GSM"
Note: GSM default alphabet
OK
AT+CSCS?
Note: Get current value
+CSCS: "GSM"
OK
Note: GSM default alphabet
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Sierra
Wireless Phonebook Character Set +WPCS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 110
6.16.
Sierra Wireless Phonebook Character Set
+WPCS
6.16.1.
Description
292HThis Sierra Wireless proprietary command informs the ME which
character set is used by the TE for
the phonebooks. The
ME can convert each character of entered or displayed strings. This is used to
read or write
phonebook entries (parameters <text>, <address> and <mail>).
6.16.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WPCS=<Character
Set>
OK
Read command
AT+WPCS?
+WPCS: <Character Set>
OK
Test command
AT+WPCS=?
+WPCS: (list of supported
<Character Set>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Sierra
Wireless Phonebook Character Set +WPCS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 111
6.16.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<Character
Set>: character table set (ASCII string)
"TRANSPARENT" transparent mode
The strings are displayed and entered as they are stored in SIM
or in ME.
(default value)
"CUSTOM" user defined character set
"HEX" hexadecimal mode
No character set used; the user can read or write hexadecimal
values.
6.16.4.
Parameter Storage
The <Character
Set> parameter is stored in EEPROM using AT&W command. The default value
can
be restored using
AT&F.
6.16.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WPCS=?
Note: Get possible values
293H+WPCS:
("TRANSPARENT","HEX","CUSTOM")
OK
Note: Possible values
AT+WPCS="CUSTOM"
Note: Custom character set
OK
AT+WPCS? +WPCS:
"CUSTOM"
Note: Get current value OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Set
Language +CLAN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 112
6.17.
Set Language +CLAN
6.17.1.
Description
This command sets
the language in the MT.
6.17.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CLAN=<code>
OK
Read command
AT+CLAN?
+CLAN: <code>
OK
Test command
AT+CLAN=?
+CLAN: (list of supported
<code>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Set
Language +CLAN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 113
6.17.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<code>:
2 character code for the language
The number indicated after the name refers to numeric value for
the language in ISO
639 294H[16].
"AUTO" Selects the first language from EF-LP in the
SIM card.
"AUTO" is not returned by the read command.
default value
"de" German (0)
"en" English (1)
"it" Italian (2)
"fr" French (3)
"es" Spanish (4)
"nl" Dutch (5)
"sv" Swedish (6)
"da" Danish (7)
"pt" Portuguese (8)
"fi" Finnish (9)
"no" Norwegian (10)
"el" Greek (11)
"tr" Turkish (12)
"hu" Hungarian (13)
"pl" Polish (14)
"cs" Czech (32)
"he" Hebrew (33)
"ar" Arabic (34)
"ru" Russian (35)
"is" Icelandic (36)
6.17.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Set
Language +CLAN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 114
6.17.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CLAN="fr"
OK
AT+CLAN=? 295H+CLAN:
("AUTO","de","en","it","fr","es","nl","s
v","da","pt","fi","no","el","tr","hu","p
l","cs","he","ar","ru","is")
OK
AT+CLAN? +CLAN:
"fr"
OK
6.17.6.
Notes
296HAfter reset, the embedded module starts in "AUTO"
mode.
The read command
returns a NULL string when in "AUTO" mode and the first entry in
EF-LP is
undefined.
The read command
returns an error message when in "AUTO" mode and the first entry in
EF-LP SIM
file is invalid.
The read command
returns an error message when EF-LP SIM file is invalidated.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Language
Event +CLAE
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 115
6.18.
Language Event +CLAE
6.18.1.
Description
297HThis command is used to enable/disable +CLAV unsolicited result
code, returned when the language
in the MT is
changed.
6.18.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CLAE=<mode>
OK
Read command
AT+CLAE?
+CLAE: <mode>
OK
Test command
AT+CLAE=?
+CLAE: (list of supported
<mode>s)
OK
Unsolicited response
+CLAV: <code>
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Language
Event +CLAE
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 116
6.18.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mode>:
language event mode
0 disable unsolicited result code +CLAV (default value)
1 enable unsolicited result code +CLAV
<code>:
2 character code for the language
The number indicated after the name refers to numeric value for
the language in ISO
639 298H[16].
"de" German (0)
"en" English (1)
"it" Italian (2)
"fr" French (3)
"es" Spanish (4)
"nl" Dutch (5)
"sv" Swedish (6)
"da" Danish (7)
"pt" Portuguese (8)
"fi" Finnish (9)
"no" Norwegian (10)
"el" Greek (11)
"tr" Turkish (12)
"hu" Hungarian (13)
"pl" Polish (14)
"cs" Czech (32)
"he" Hebrew (33)
"ar" Arabic (34)
"ru" Russian (35)
"is" Icelandic (36)
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Language
Event +CLAE
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 117
6.18.4.
Parameter Storage
The <mode>
parameter is stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can
be
restored using
AT&F.
6.18.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CLAE=? +CLAE: (0-1)
OK
AT+CLAE=1 OK
+CLAV: "fr"
Note: Current language is French.
AT+CLAE? +CLAE: 1
OK
6.18.6.
Notes
The +CLAV
unsolicited response is returned by the embedded module when the
"AT+CLAE=1"
command is sent to
the embedded module and when the previous setting of <mode> was 0.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Select
Type of Address +CSTA
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 118
6.19.
Select Type of Address +CSTA
6.19.1.
Description
This command selects
the type of number for further dialing commands (D) according to GSM
specifications.
6.19.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CSTA=<type>
OK
Read command
AT+CSTA?
+CSTA: <type>
OK
Test command
AT+CSTA=?
+CSTA: (list of supported
<type>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Select
Type of Address +CSTA
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 119
6.19.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<
type>: 29Htype of address octet (refer to 3GPP TS 24.008 subclause
10.5.4.7) ; default 145
when dialling string includes international access code
character "+", otherwise 129
integer type
129 30HISDN / telephony numbering plan, national / international
unknown
145 301HISDN / telephony numbering plan, international number
6.19.4.
Parameter Storage
The <type>
parameter is stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can
be
restored using
AT&F.
6.19.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CSTA=? 302H+CSTA: (129,145)
OK
AT+CSTA=145 OK
ATD33146290800;
Note: International access code character
"+"will be
automatically added to each outgoing call
OK
AT+CSTA=129 OK
ATD+33146290800;
303HNote: International access
code character "+" has to be
added for international calls, national calls
otherwise.
OK
AT+CSTA? +CSTA: 129
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Cellular
Text Telephone Modem +WCTM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 120
6.20.
Cellular Text Telephone Modem +WCTM
6.20.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command allows the user to activate and deactivate the Cellular
Text
Telephone Modem
capability for outgoing voice call as specified in 3GPP 24.008 304H[8].
CTM mode is used to
send audio signals from an external text terminal (ex: a TTY typewriter) within
a
voice call made by
the ME. The text terminal must have a special mobile phone input/output to work
correctly.
305HWhen the ME indicates that CTM text telephony for an outgoing
voice call is supported, the network
selects a speech
CODEC and additionally CTM text telephony detection and conversion functions.
306HTo guarantee optimal audio management of CTM signals, it is
mandatory to deactivate Acoustic Echo
Cancellation (see
+ECHO command) and Side Tone (see +SIDET command).
307HVoice gain of transmitter and receiver (see +VGR, +VGT commands)
have to be calibrated according
to the external text
terminal audio characteristics.
Note: This command is not yet available to the
AirPrime Q26Extreme module.
6.20.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WCTM=<mode>
OK
Read command
AT+WCTM?
+WCTM: <mode>
OK
Test command
AT+WCTM=?
+WCTM: (list of supported
<mode>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Cellular
Text Telephone Modem +WCTM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 121
6.20.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mode>:
CTM mode
0 disable (default value)
All incoming CTM calls will be rejected. Caller will receive a
"no carrier"
indication.
1 enable
6.20.4.
Parameter Storage
The <mode>
parameter is stored using AT&W command.
6.20.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WCTM=? +WCTM: (0-1)
OK
AT+WCTM=1 OK
AT+WCTM? +WCTM: 1
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Sierra
Wireless Debug Interface Management +WDEBUG
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 122
6.21.
Sierra Wireless Debug Interface Management
+WDEBUG
6.21.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command enables or disables the Sierra Wireless debug interface.
308HOnce the interface state is modified, the product needs to be
reset to take the modification into
account.
6.21.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WDEBUG=<state>
OK
Read command
AT+WDEBUG?
309H+WDEBUG: <state>,<resetFlag>
OK
Test command
AT+WDEBUG=?
+WDEBUG: (list of supported
<state>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Sierra
Wireless Debug Interface Management +WDEBUG
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 123
6.21.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<state>:
state of the interface
0 disable (default value)
1 enable
<resetFlag>:
reset flag
0 The state has not been modified since the last boot of the
product.
1 The state has been modified since the last boot of the
product; a reset must
be performed to take the modification into account.
6.21.4.
Parameter storage
The <state>
parameter is stored in EEPROM without using AT&W.
6.21.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WDEBUG=? 310H+WDEBUG: (0,1)
OK
AT+WDEBUG=1 OK
AT+WDEBUG?
31H+WDEBUG: 1,1
OK
AT+CFUN=1 OK
AT+WDEBUG? 312H+WDEBUG: 1,0
OK
6.21.6.
Notes
This command is
allowed only if the Sierra Wireless debug interface commercial feature is
activated.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Digital
to Analog Converter +DAC
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 124
6.22.
Digital to Analog Converter +DAC
6.22.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command sets various DACs present on embedded module to a
defined value.
6.22.2.
Syntax
Action command
313HAT+DAC=<mode>,<DACIdx>[,<DACUnit>,<DACValue>]
OK
Read command
AT+DAC?
314H+DAC: <DAC0Value>[,<DAC1Value>[,<DAC2Value>]
[
]]
OK
Test command
AT+DAC=?
315H+DAC:
<DACIdx>,<AnalogMinVolt>,<AnalogMaxVolt>,<Resolution>
316H[+DAC:
<DACIdx>,<AnalogMinVolt>,<AnalogMaxVolt>,<Resolution>
[
]]
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Digital
to Analog Converter +DAC
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 125
6.22.3.
Parameters and defined values
<mode>:
mode
0 DAC de-allocation
1 DAC allocation
<DACIdx>:
DAC index
<DACUnit>:
write unit
0 write DAC in analog value
1 write DAC in digital value
<DACValue>:
DAC value (in analog or digital
unit)
Range example: 0-2300 (mV). It depends on embedded module
(Please refer to
the embedded module Product Technical Specification).
317HFor the read command, DAC value is
returned in analog unit.
<AnalogMinVolt>:
minimal analog output signal
deliverable by DAC (in mV)
It depends on embedded module (Please refer to the embedded
module Product
Technical Specification)
<AnalogMaxVolt>:
maximal analog output signal
deliverable by DAC (in mV).
It depends on embedded module. (Please refer to the embedded
module
Product Technical Specification)
<Resolution>:
digital register number of bit
It depends on embedded module (Please refer to the embedded
module Product
Technical Specification)
6.22.4.
Parameters storage
No parameter is
stored in EEPROM.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Digital
to Analog Converter +DAC
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 126
6.22.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+DAC=? 318H+DAC: 0,0,2200,8
OK
319HNote: Response on Q26XX,
WMP100
+CME ERROR: 3
Note: Response on Q24NG
AT+DAC? +CME ERROR: 505
320HNote: Response on Q26XX,
WMP100. DAC has not been allocated
+CME ERROR: 3
Note: Response on Q24NG
321HAT+DAC=0,0 +CME ERROR: 505
32HNote: Response on Q26XX,
WMP100. DAC has not been allocated
+CME ERROR: 3
Note: Response on Q24NG
323HAT+DAC=1,0,0,1600 OK
Note: DAC0 set to 1600mv
+CME ERROR: 3
Note: Response on Q24NG
AT+DAC? +DAC: 1600
OK
324HNote: Response on Q26XX,
WMP100
+CME ERROR: 3
Note: Response on Q24NG
325HAT+DAC=1,0,0,2400 +CME ERROR: 3
Note: 4th parameter value exceeded. Previous DAC
value is kept.if it
has been already set.
326HAT+DAC=1,0,1,45 OK
Note: DAC0 set to 45 (digital value)
+CME ERROR: 3
Note: Response on Q24NG
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Digital
to Analog Converter +DAC
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 127
Command
Responses
327HAT+DAC=1,0,1,45 +CME ERROR: 558
Note: DAC0 already reserved by another client.
+CME ERROR: 3
Note: Response on Q24NG
328HAT+DAC=0,0 OK
Note: DAC0 deallocate.
+CME ERROR: 3
Note: Response on Q24NG
6.22.6.
Notes
329HDeallocation command (AT+DAC=0,x) and read command (AT+DAC?)
return an error (+CME
ERROR: 505) if DAC
has not been previously allocated.
30HIf an analog DAC value with a range 0 to 2200 is set, the
converted digital value in the range of 0-255
is stored in the DAC
register. As a result of the digital conversion, the requested value will
differ from
the original analog
value entered.
The AT+DAC command
is not supported in the AirPrime SL6087 module; an error will be returned if
used with the
SL6087.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Automatic
Boost Mode +WCPS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 128
6.23.
Automatic Boost Mode +WCPS
6.23.1.
Description
31HThis Sierra Wireless proprietary command allows to activate or
deactivate the automatic boost mode
functionality in the
embedded module. When this feature is enabled, the firmware can change the
embedded module
clock dynamically according to features used by the service user (like an EGPRS
transfer).
32HThe new setting will be taken into account immediately after the
automatic boost mode feature
activation or
deactivation. When this feature is disabled and if the service user hasnt
enabled the Vari
Speed feature (with
a Sierra Wireless application), the firmware changes the embedded module clock
to the lowest
frequencies.
Set the AHB bus
clock. Only two values are possible, which corresponds to the minimal clock
value
and the maximal
clock value. This new setting will take into account only after resetting the
embedded
module.
AHB bus is the internal
bus between the ARM core and the peripherals. By increasing the bus speed,
it will optimise the
RAM time access and at the same time, it will also increase the power
consumption, because
the minimal ARM clock is equal to the AHB bus clock.
6.23.2.
Syntax
Action command
3HAT+WCPS=<type>,<mode>
34H[+WCPS: <type>,<status>]
OK
Read command
AT+WCPS?
35H+WCPS: <type>,<status>
36H[+WCPS: <type>,<status>[
]]
OK
Test command
AT+WCPS=?
37H+WCPS: <type>,(list of supported <mode>s)
38H[+WCPS: <type>,(list of supported <mode>s)[
]]
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Automatic
Boost Mode +WCPS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 129
6.23.3.
Parameters and defined values
<type>:
embedded module functionality
0 automatic boost mode
1 AHB bus clock settings
<mode>:
requested operation
For
<type> = 0
0 deactivate the automatic boost mode
1 activate the automatic boost mode (default value)
2 get the automatic boost mode state
For
<type> = 1
0 AHB bus clock set to its minimal value
1 AHB bus clock set to its maximal value
2 get the AHB bus clock state
<status>:
current functionality status
For
<type> = 0
0 automatic boost mode deactivated
1 automatic boost mode activated
For
<type> = 1
0 AHB bus clock is set to minimal value
1 AHB bus clock is set to maximal value
6.23.4.
Parameters storage
The <mode>
parameter value is stored in EEPROM without using AT&W.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Automatic
Boost Mode +WCPS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 130
6.23.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WCPS=? 39H+WCPS: (0-1),(0-2)
OK
AT+WCPS? 340H+WCPS: 0,1
+WCPS: 1,0
OK
341HAT+WCPS=0,2 342H+WCPS: 0,1
OK
Note: Automatic boost mode is enabled.
AT+WCPS=1,2 +WCPS: 1,0
OK
Note: AHB bus clock set to its minimal value.
343HAT+WCPS=0,0
Note: Disable the automatic boost mode.
OK
AT+WCPS=1,1 OK
Note: AHB bus clock set to its maximal value.
AT+WCPS? 34H+WCPS: 0,0
+WCPS: 1,1
OK
Note: Automatic boost mode is disabled and AHB
bus clock set to its
maximal value.
AT+CFUN=1
Note: Reset the embedded module.
OK
AT+WCPS? 345H+WCPS: 0,0
+WCPS: 1,1
OK
Note: Automatic boost mode is disabled and AHB
bus clock set to its
maximal value.
346HAT+WCPS=0,0
Note: Disable the automatic boost mode when its
already enabled.
OK
AT&F
Note: Restore factory settings.
OK
Note: No effect on Automatic Boost Mode & AHB
bus clock.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Automatic
Boost Mode +WCPS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 131
Command
Responses
AT+WCPS? 347H+WCPS: 0,0
+WCPS: 1,1
OK
Note: Automatic boost mode is disabled and AHB
bus clock is set to
its maximal value. There is no effect of the
AT&F command on the
Automatic Boost Mode status.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Auto
shutdown +WASR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 132
6.24.
Auto shutdown +WASR
6.24.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command allows the user to enable or disable the auto shutdown
feature on the
specified UART port. The auto shutdown feature provides the ability to shut
down or
power up an external
RS232 transceiver by toggling a specific I/O in the embedded module. After the
feature is enabled in
the embedded module, the user can activate or deactivate the auto shutdown
mode on that UART by
toggling the DTR signal.
348HThe auto shutdown feature is only available on UARTs with DTR
signal. By default, all UART ports will
have the auto
shutdown feature disabled.
The user can enable
the auto shutdown feature on <uart> only when that port is not used by
another
plug-in application
such as C-GPS or C-BT.
The user can enable
the auto shutdown feature using <GpioId> only when that I/O is not used
by
another feature.
349HThe new settings will be taken into account immediately after
the auto shutdown feature has been
enabled or disabled.
When the auto shutdown feature is enabled, a specific I/O pin will be dedicated
to the feature and
cannot be used from other applications.
6.24.2.
Syntax
<mode=0>
Action command
350HAT+WASR=<mode>[,<uart>]
OK
<mode=1>
Action command
351HAT+WASR=<mode>[,<uart>[,<GpioId>[,<timing>]]]
OK
<mode=2>
Action command
352HAT+WASR=<mode>[,<uart>]
353H[+WASR: <status>,<uart>,<GpioId>,<timing>]
354H[+WASR:
<status>,<uart>,<GpioId>,<timing>[
]]
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Auto
shutdown +WASR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 133
Read command
AT+WASR?
35H+WASR: <status>,<uart>,<GpioId>,<timing>
356H[+WASR:
<status>,<uart>,<GpioId>,<timing>[
]]
OK
Test command
AT+WASR=?
357H+WASR: (list of supported <mode>s),(list of supported
<uart>s),(list of supported
<GpioId>s),(list of
supported <timing>s)
358H[+WASR: list of supported <mode>s],(list of supported
<uart>s), (list of supported
<GpioId>s),(list of
supported <timing>s)[
]]
OK
6.24.3.
Parameters and defined values
<mode>:
requested operations
0 disable the auto shutdown feature on <uart>
359HIf <uart> is missing, all the
available ports status will be disabled.
1 enable the auto shutdown feature on <uart> using the
GPIO <GpioId> and the wake-up
time <timing>.
360HIf <uart>, <GpioId>
and/or <timing> are missing, the current values (the previous
values set) will be used.
2 get the auto shutdown feature status on <uart>.
361H If <uart> is missing, all the
available ports status will be listed.
<uart>:
UART port identifier
1 UART1
Note: Currently only UART1 supports the auto
shutdown Feature
<Gpiold>:
I/O name
I/O name (as mentioned in the embedded module Product Technical
Specification and
Customer Design Guideline) string type
362Hrange: list of available I/O (For
WMP100, default value: GPIO24).
363HIf this parameter is missing, the
current setting will be used
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Auto
shutdown +WASR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 134
<timing>
wake-up time of the external
transceiver
t1 time delay to wake up the UART transceiver before displaying
the unsolicited response in
30 micro second (μs) steps
range: 1-15 (default value: 6 (180μs))
364HIf this parameter is missing, the
current setting will be used.
<status>
current functionality status
0 auto shutdown feature disabled on <uart>(default value)
1 auto shutdown feature enabled on <uart>
6.24.4.
Parameter Storage
365HThe <mode>, <uart>, <GpioId> and
<timing> parameters are stored in EEPROM without using AT&W
command. The default
values can be restored using AT&F.
6.24.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WASR=? 36H+WASR: (0-2),1,("GPIO0-GPIO44"),(1-15)
OK
Note: The range of GPIO depends on the type of
embedded module.
Please refer to embedded module Product Technical
Specification
and Customer Design Guideline for more
information.
AT+WASR=? 367H+WASR: (0-2),1,("GPIO0-GPIO44,GPO0-GPO5"),(1-
15)
OK
Note: This format is only for product supporting
both GPIO and
GPO. See embedded module Product Technical
Specification and
Customer Design Guideline.
368HAT+WASR=1,1,"GPIO20",10
Note: The auto shutdown feature is activated on
UART1 using GPIO20 and the wake-up time is set to
300μs
OK
369HAT+WASR=2,1
Note: Get the auto shutdown feature status of
UART1
370H+WASR:1,1,"GPIO20",10
OK
371HAT+WASR=0,1
Note: The auto shutdown feature is deactivated on
UART1
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Auto
shutdown +WASR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 135
Command
Responses
AT+WASR=1
372HNote: Enable the auto
shutdown feature with current
UART, GPIO, and timing
OK
AT+CFUN=1
Note: Reset the embedded module
OK
AT+WASR=2
Note: Get the auto shutdown feature status of all
UART
ports
373H+WASR:1,1,"GPIO20",10
OK
AT&F
Note: Restore factory settings
OK
AT+WASR=2
Note: Get the auto shutdown feature status of all
UART
ports
374H+WASR:0,1,"GPIO24",6
OK
Note: There is only one UART port listed because
currently only
UART1 supported the auto shutdown feature.
375HAT+WASR=1,1
Note: The auto shutdown feature is activated on
UART1 using default GPIO and t1
OK
376HAT+WASR=2,1
Note: Get the auto shutdown feature status of
UART1
AT+WASR=1
37H+WASR:1,1,"GPIO24",6
OK
+CME ERROR: 560
Note: Auto shutdown feature already enabled
AT+WASR=0
Note: The auto shutdown feature is deactivated on
all
UART ports
AT+WASR=0
OK
+CME ERROR: 560
Note: Auto shutdown feature already disabled
378HAT+WASR=1,2 +CME ERROR: 3
Note: <uart> out of range.
379HAT+WHCNF=0,2
380HAT+WHCNF=0,0
Note: Deactivate keypad
AT+CFUN=1
Note: A embedded module reset is needed to be
able
to use an IO for another purpose
381H+WHCNF: 0,1
Note: Keypad is activated by default
OK
OK
382HAT+WASR=1,1,"GPIO4",10
Note: The auto shutdown feature is activated on
UART1 using GPIO4 and the wake-up time is set to
300μs
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
Auto
shutdown +WASR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 136
Command
Responses
383HAT+WASR=2,1
Note: Get the auto shutdown feature status of
UART1
384H+WASR:1,1,"GPIO4",10
OK
385HAT+WASR=0,1
Note: The auto shutdown feature is deactivated on
UART1
AT+CFUN=1
Note: A embedded module reset is needed to be
able
to use an IO for another purpose
OK
386HAT+WHCNF=0,1
Note: Activate keypad
AT+WASR=1
Note: Enable auto shutdown feature with
current
parameters setting.
OK
+CME ERROR: 501
Note: GPIO allocation error because keypad and
auto shutdown
feature share the same GPIO.
6.24.6.
Notes
387HAfter the auto shutdown feature is enabled, the user is not
allowed to alter the GPIO, which is
allocated for the
auto shutdown feature status, using AT commands (such as +WIOM, +WIOR,
+WIOW) or Open ATฎ
IO APIs in any circumstance. If the user tries to change the status (value or
direction) of the
dedicated GPIO, an error will be returned.
38HOnce the auto shutdown mode is activated on the specified UART
(e.g. UART1), no AT command will
be received by the
embedded module (as DTR is set to low) through that UART port. When the auto
shutdown feature is
disabled with AT+WASR command, the dedicated GPIO pin (e.g. GPIO24 for
Fastrack Supreme
10/20) is free to be used.
389HDue to the limitation of the maximum value in <timing>,
the user must use a transceiver with the
wake-up time within
the allowable range of <timing> (30μs -
450μs).
390HCurrently, only UART1 can support the auto shutdown feature.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
IP
Stack Settings +WIPS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 137
6.25.
IP Stack Settings +WIPS
6.25.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command configures the IP stack.
6.25.2.
Syntax
Action command
391HAT+WIPS=[<param1>][,[<param2>][,[<param3>][,[<param4>][,[<param5>]
392H[,[<param6>][,[<param7>][,[<param8>][,[<param9>][,[<param10>]
393H[,[<param11>]]]]]]]]]]]
OK
Read command
AT+WIPS?
394H+WIPS:
<param1>,<param2>,<param3>,<param4>,<param5>,<param6>,
<param7>,<param8>,<param9>,<param10>,<param11>
OK
Test command
AT+WIPS=?
395H+WIPS: (list of supported <param1>s),
(list of supported
<param2>s),(list of supported <param3>s),
(list of supported
<param4>s),(list of supported <param5>s),
(list of supported
<param6>s),(list of supported <param7>s),
(list of supported
<param8>s),(list of supported <param9>s),
(list of supported
<param10>s),(list of supported <param11>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
IP
Stack Settings +WIPS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 138
6.25.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<param>:
description
range (default values)
<param1>
Maximum number of sockets [8-32] 16
<param2>
Maximum number of network buffers
[24-255] 48
<param3>
Maximum number of multicast group
entries
[0-255] 8
<param4>
Maximum number of route entries
[0-255] 8
<param5>
Maximum number of DNS resolver
queries
[0-8] 4
<param6>
DNS resolver cache size [0-255] 8
<param7>
ARP cache size [0-255] 8
<param8>
Number of PPP interfaces [0-10] 5
<param9>
Number of GPRS interfaces [0-10] 6
<param10>
Number of Ethernet interfaces [0-4]
1
<param11>
Number of IP tunnel interfaces
[0-10] 0
6.25.4.
Parameter Storage
The parameters are
stored in EEPROM without using the AT&W command. The default values can be
restored using
AT&F.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Global
Configuration Commands
IP
Stack Settings +WIPS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 139
6.25.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WIPS=?
Note: Possible values
396H+WIPS: (8-32),(24-255),(0-255),(0-255),(0-
8),(0-255),(0-255),(0-10),(0-10),(0-
10),(0-10)
OK
AT+WIPS?
Note : Read parameters values for IP stack
397H+WIPS: 16,48,8,8,4,8,8,5,6,1,0
OK
398HAT+WIPS=16,48,0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
39HNote: Configure IP stack
with params
(16,48,0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8)
OK
AT+WIPS?
Note: Ask for the current params values
40H+WIPS: 16,48,0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
OK
401HAT+WIPS=,,14
Note: Change only the 3rd parameter
OK
AT+WIPS?
Note : Ask for the current params values.
402H+WIPS: 16,48,14,1,2,3,4,5,6,8
OK
6.25.6.
Notes
403HIP stack is configured during the embedded module
initialisation. Hence, if the user uses this
command or AT&F
command, a reset is mandatory to take into account new parameters.
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 140
7.
Embedded module Status
Commands
7.1.
General Indications +WIND
7.1.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command allows controlling a general mechanism to send unsolicited
indications to the
application.
7.1.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WIND=<IndLevel>
OK
Read command
AT+WIND?
+WIND: <IndLevel>
OK
Test command
AT+WIND=?
+WIND: (list of supported
<IndLevel>s)
OK
404HFor
<event>=0,1,2,3,4,7,8,9,13,14,16:
Unsolicited response
+WIND: <event>
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Embedded
module Status Commands
General
Indications +WIND
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 141
For
<event>=5 and 6:
Unsolicited response
405H+WIND: <event>,<idx>
For
<event>=10:
Unsolicited response
406H+WIND:
<event>,<phonebook>,<status>[,<phonebook>,<status>[,<phonebook>,<status>[,<phoneboo
k>,<status>[,<phonebook>,<status>]]]]
For
<event>=11:
Unsolicited response
407H+WIND:
<event>,[<checksum>],[<checksum>],[<checksum>],[<checksum>]
,[<checksum>],[<checksum>]
For
<event>=12:
Unsolicited response
408H+WIND: <event>,<ext_it_name>[,<EdgeState>]
For
<event>=15:
Unsolicited response
409H+WIND: <event>[,1,"<Full
name>"][,2,"<Short name>"][,3,"<Local time
zone>"][,4,"<Universal
time and local time zone>"][,5,"<LSA
Identity>"][,6,"<Daylight
Saving time>"]
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Embedded
module Status Commands
General
Indications +WIND
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 142
7.1.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<IndLevel>:
indication levels
bit field (default value: 0)
bit set to 0: indication deactivated
bit set to 1: indication activated
0 no unsolicited "+WIND: <event>" will occur
1 (bit 0) activate hardware SIM insert / remove indications or
SIM presence after
software reset
2 (bit 1) activate calling party alert indication
4 (bit 2) activate idle state indication
8 (bit 3) activate end of embedded module initialization (after
PIN 1/CHV 1 code
entered) indication
16 (bit 4) activate new call identifier indication
32 (bit 5) activate call release indication
64 (bit 6) activate network service available indication
128 (bit 7) activate network lost indication
256 (bit 8) activate audio ON indication
512 (bit 9) activate SIM phonebooks reload status
1024 (bit 10) activate SIM phonebooks checksum indication
2048 (bit 11) activate interruption indication
4096 (bit12) activate hardware Rack Open/Closed Indication
8192 (bit13) activate NITZ indication
16384 (bit 14) activate SMS service ready indication
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Embedded
module Status Commands
General
Indications +WIND
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 143
<event>:
event identifier
0 the SIM presence pin has detected a "SIM removed"
1 the SIM presence pin has detected a "SIM inserted"
2 the calling party is alerting
3 410Hthe product is ready to process AT commands (except phonebooks,
AOC, SMS),
at init or after AT+CFUN=1
4 41Hthe product is ready to process all AT commands, end of
phonebook init or swap
(FDN to ADN)
5 a call <idx> has been created (after ATD or +CCWA
)
6 412Ha call <idx> has been released, after a NO CARRIER, a
"+CSSU: 5" indication, or
after the release of a call waiting
7 the network service is available for an emergency call
8 the network is lost
9 the audio channel is opened
10 reload status of each SIM phonebook after init phase (after
power on or SIM
insertion)
11 checksum of SIM phonebooks after initialization
12 an interruption has occurred
13 the rack has been detected as closed
14 the rack has been detected as opened
15 the embedded module has received a NITZ information message
from the
network
16 SMS and SMS CB services are initialized
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Embedded
module Status Commands
General
Indications +WIND
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 144
<idx>:
call identifier
integer value
<phonebook>:
phonebook memory storage
"SM" ADN
"FD" FDN
"ON" MSISDN
"SN" Service Number
"EN" Emergency Number
<status>:
phonebook status after
initialization
0 not reloaded from SIM (no change since last init or SIM
removal)
1 reloaded from SIM to internal memory (at least one entry has
changed)
<checksum>:
128-bit "fingerprint" of
the phonebook
413HThe checksums are presented in the
following order: SM, FD, ON, SN, EN, LD. If the
phonebook is not present in the SIM, the checksum is empty.
<ext_it_name>:
interruption identifier (as
mentioned in the embedded module Product Technical
Specification and Customer Design Guideline)
string type
<EdgeState>:
state of the edge in case of both
edge (the interruption happens with a high to low
and low to high edge) (please refer to +WIPC command
description)
0 interruption happens with high to low edge
1 interruption happens with low to high edge
<Full
name>: long alphanumerical format name
received from the NITZ message
string type
<Short
name>: short alphanumerical format name
received from the NITZ message
string type
<Local
time zone>: 414Hdifference, expressed in quarters of an hour, between the local
time and GMT.
signed integer
<Universal
time and
local
time zone>:
415Hindicates date, time and time zone
expressed in quarters of an hour, in format
Year/Month/Day,Hour:Min:SecondsฑTimeZone
416Hstring
("yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ssฑzz")
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Embedded
module Status Commands
General
Indications +WIND
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 145
<LSA
Identity>: localized Service Area identity of
the current cell in hexa format (3 bytes)
hexa string
<Daylight
Saving
Time>:
417Hwhen the local time zone is
compensated for DST (Day Saving time, or summertime),
the serving PLMN shall provide a DST parameter to indicate it.
The adjustment for
DST can be +1h or +2h.
range: 0-2
7.1.4.
Parameter Storage
The <IndLevel>
parameter is stored in EEPROM without using AT&W command. The default value
can be restored
using AT&F.
7.1.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WIND? +WIND: 0
OK
AT+WIND=255 OK
Note: The SIM has been removed
+WIND: 0
Note: The SIM presence pin has been detected as
"SIM removed"
Note: The SIM has been inserted
+WIND: 1
Note: The SIM presence pin has been detected as
"SIM inserted"
Note: The network service is available for an
emergency call
+WIND: 7
Note: The initialization has been completed +WIND: 4
Note: The embedded module received a
NITZ information message
418H+WIND: 15,1,"Cingular
419HExtend",2,"Cingular",3,"+08",4,"03/14/27,1
6:59:48+08",5,"123456",6,"2"
AT+WIND=2048 OK
Note: Activate the +WIND indications for
interruption
420H+WIND: 12,"INT0"
Note: An interruption occurred on INT0
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Embedded
module Status Commands
General
Indications +WIND
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 146
7.1.6.
Notes
The following table
indicates the correspondances between <IndLevel> values and "+WIND:
<event>[
]"
indications that are activated.
<IndLevel>
value corresponding <event>
1 0 and 1
2 2
4 3
8 4
16 5
32 6
64 7
128 8
256 9
512 10
1024 11
2048 12
4096 13 and 14
8192 15
16384 16
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Embedded
module Status Commands
Phone
Activity Status +CPAS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 147
7.2.
Phone Activity Status +CPAS
7.2.1.
Description
This command returns
the activity status of the mobile station.
7.2.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CPAS
+CPAS: <pas>
OK
Read command
None
Test command
AT+CPAS=?
+CPAS: (list of supported
<pas>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Embedded
module Status Commands
Phone
Activity Status +CPAS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 148
7.2.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<pas>:
phone activity status
0 ready (allow commands from TA/TE)
1 unavailable (does not allow commands)
2 unknown
3 ringing (ringer is active)
4 call in progress
5 asleep (low functionality)
7.2.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
7.2.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CPAS +CPAS: 0
Note: Current activity status OK
AT+CPAS=? +CPAS: (0-5)
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Embedded
module Status Commands
SIM
Holder Status +WSHS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 149
7.3.
SIM Holder Status +WSHS
7.3.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command allows to check at any time the status of the SIM card
holder.
7.3.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WSHS
+WSHS: <status>
OK
Read command
None
Test command
AT+WSHS=?
+WSHS: (list of supported
<status>s)
OK
7.3.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<status>:
SIM holder status
0 open
1 closed
7.3.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Embedded
module Status Commands
SIM
Holder Status +WSHS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 150
7.3.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WSHS=? 421H+WSHS: (0,1)
OK
AT+WSHS
+WSHS: 0
OK
Note: Request the current SIM holder state Note:
The SIM holder is open
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Embedded
module Status Commands
Indicator
Control +CIND
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 151
7.4.
Indicator Control +CIND
7.4.1.
Description
42HThis command is used to read or set the values of ME indicators.
If ME does not allow setting of
indicators or ME is
not currently reachable, "+CME ERROR: <err>" is returned.
7.4.2.
Syntax
Action command
None
Read command
AT+CIND?
423H+CIND:
<ind>,<ind>,<ind>,<ind>,<ind>,<ind>,<ind>
OK
Test command
AT+CIND=?
424H+CIND: (<descr>,(list of supported
<ind>s))[,(<descr>,(list of supported
<ind>s))[,
]]
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Embedded
module Status Commands
Indicator
Control +CIND
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 152
7.4.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<ind>:
ME indicator state for one
<descr> parameter
425Hinteger type value, which shall be
in range of corresponding <descr> parameter
0 indicator is OFF or in a state which can be identified as
"OFF" state
1 indicator is ON or in a state that is more substantial than
"OFF" state
2-5 426H2 is more substantial than 1, and so on.
<descr>:
ME indicator description
"battchg" battery charge level (0-5)
"signal" signal quality (0-5)
"service" service availability (0-1)
"message" message received (0-1)
"call" call in progress (0-1)
"roam" roaming indicator (0-1)
"smsfull" SMS memory storage status in the MT (0-2)
0: memory locations are available
1: memory full
2: One SMS has been received in the SC but the SMS storage where
this SMS is
to be stored is full.
7.4.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Embedded
module Status Commands
Indicator
Control +CIND
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 153
7.4.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CIND? 427H+CIND: 1,2,1,1,0,0,0
OK
428HNote: battchg: 1, signal: 2,
service: 1 - ME registered on the network,
message: 1 - a SMS has been received, call: 0
no call in progress, roam:
0 - not roaming, smsfull: 0 -SIM card is not full
of SMS.
AT+CIND=?
429H+CIND: ("battchg",(0-5)),("signal",
(0-5)),("service",(0-1)),("message",
(0-1)),("call",(0-1)),("roam",
(0-1)),("smsfull",(0-2))
Note: Read possible value for ME indicators OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Embedded
module Status Commands
Mobile
Equipment Event Reporting +CMER
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 154
7.5.
Mobile Equipment Event Reporting +CMER
7.5.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command enables or disables sending of unsolicited result codes in
the case of a key
press.
7.5.2.
Syntax
Action command
430HAT+CMER=[<mode>][,[<keyp>][,[<disp>][,[<ind>][,[<bfr>]]]]]
OK
Read command
AT+CMER?
431H+CMER: <mode>,<keyp>,<disp>,<ind>,<bfr>
OK
Test command
None
Unsolicited response
432H+CKEV: <key>,<press> (key press event report)
43H+CIEV: <indresp>,<value> (indicator event report)
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Embedded
module Status Commands
Mobile
Equipment Event Reporting +CMER
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 155
7.5.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mode>:
Processing of unsolicited result
codes
2 Buffer unsolicited result codes in the TA when TA-TE link is
reserved and flush them
to the TE after reservation (after +++ was entered). Otherwise
forward them directly
to the TE. (default value)
3 Forward unsolicited result codes to the TE by using a specific
inband technique:
while TA-TE link is reserved (i.e. TE is in online data mode by
CSD or GPRS call)
unsolicited result codes are replaced by a break (100ms) and
stored in a buffer. The
unsolicited result codes buffer is flushed to the TE after
reservation (after +++ was
entered). Otherwise, (the TE is not in online data mode) forward
them directly to the
TE.
<keyp>:
keypad event reporting mode
0 disabled (default value)
1 Keypad event reporting is routed using unsolicited code. Only
the key pressings not
caused by +CKPD are indicated
2 Keypad event reporting is routed using unsolicited code. All
key pressings are
indicated
<ind>:
indicator event reporting mode
0 disabled (default value)
1 Indicator event reporting using unsolicited result code. Only
the indicator events not
caused by +CIND shall be indicated by the TA to TE
2 Indicator event reporting using unsolicited result code. All
indicator events shall be
directed from TA to TE
<key>:
434Hkeyboard map is (5,5)
0 1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24
<press>:
key operation
1 key pressed
0 key released
<indresp>:
indicator order number (as
specified for +CIND)
<value>:
new value of the indicator
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Embedded
module Status Commands
Mobile
Equipment Event Reporting +CMER
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 156
<bfr>:
TA buffer of unsolicited result
codes mode
0 TA buffer defined within this command is flushed to the TE
default value
<disp>
display event reporting mode
0 disabled (default value)
7.5.4.
Parameter Storage
The <keyp> and
<ind> parameters are stored in EEPROM using AT&W command. The default
values
can be restored
using AT&F.
7.5.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
435HAT+CMER=,1
Note: Asks for key press event report
OK
436H+CKEV: 12,1
437H+CKEV: 12,0
Note: Key 12 has been pressed and released
438HAT+CMER=,,,1
Note: Asks for indicator event report
OK
439H+CMTI: "SM",10
40H+CIEV: 7,1
Note: SMS memory storage is full
AT+CMER? 41H+CMER: 2,1,0,1,0
OK
7.5.6.
Notes
42HAs Sierra Wireless OS does not manage the emulation of key
press, the values 1 and 2 of <keyp>
lead to the same
results.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Embedded
module Status Commands
Mobile
Equipment Control Mode +CMEC
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 157
7.6.
Mobile Equipment Control Mode +CMEC
7.6.1.
Description
43HThis command selects the equipment which operates ME keypad,
writes to ME display and sets ME
indicators. If
operation mode is not allowed by the ME, "+CME ERROR: <err>" is
returned.
7.6.2.
Syntax
Action command
4HAT+CMEC=<keyp>[,<disp>[,<ind>]]
OK
Read command
AT+CMEC?
45H+CMEC: <keyp>,<disp>,<ind>
OK
Test command
AT+CMEC=?
46H+CMEC: (list of supported <keyp>s),(list of supported
<disp>s),(list of supported
<ind>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Embedded
module Status Commands
Mobile
Equipment Control Mode +CMEC
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 158
7.6.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<keyp>:
ME keypad control mode
2 ME can be operated from both ME keypad and TE
<disp>:
ME display control mode
0 only ME can write to its display (+CDIS command can only be
used to read the
display)
<ind>:
ME indicators control mode
0 only ME can set the status of its indicators (+CIND command
can only be used to
read the indicators)
7.6.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
7.6.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CMEC=? 47H+CMEC: (2),(0),(0)
OK
48HAT+CMEC=2,0,0 OK
AT+CMEC? 49H+CMEC: 2,0,0
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Embedded
module Status Commands
Sierra
Wireless Status Request +WSTR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 159
7.7.
Sierra Wireless Status Request +WSTR
7.7.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command returns some operation status. It can be used to check the
state of the
initialization sequence and the network status.
7.7.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WSTR=<req
status>
450H+WSTR: <req status>,<value>
OK
Read command
None
Test command
AT+WSTR=?
+WSTR: (list of supported
<req status>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Embedded
module Status Commands
Sierra
Wireless Status Request +WSTR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 160
7.7.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<req
status>: requested status
1 initialization sequence status
2 network status
<value>:
current status
For
<req status>=1 For<req status>=2
0 not started no network
1 ongoing network available
2 finished
7.7.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
7.7.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WSTR=?
Note: Asks for the list of possible values
+WSTR: (1-2)
OK
Note: possible values are 1 and 2
AT+WSTR=1
Note: Selects the status 1 (INIT SEQUENCE)
451H+WSTR: 1,2
OK
Note: Initialization finished
AT+WSTR=2
Note: Selects the status 2 (NETWORK STATUS)
452H+WSTR: 2,1
OK
Note: The network is available
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Embedded
module Status Commands
Temperature
Monitoring Report +WTMR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 161
7.8.
Temperature Monitoring Report +WTMR
7.8.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command allows users to enable or disable the unsolicited report of
the protocol stack
status. The protocol stack will be switched off or on automatically as a result
of
protection on the
embedded module and its components against over-heating. This protection is
based on the Sierra
Wireless embedded module temperature monitoring mechanism.
Note: The +WTMR command is available only for the
Airprime Q26Extreme embedded module.
An unsolicited
response with <state>=0 is sent to indicate the protocol stack is being
switched off
when the CPU
temperature is increasing and reaches the threshold T2_H.
453HAn unsolicited response with <state>=1 is sent to indicate
the protocol stack is being switched on
when the CPU
temperature is decreasing to the threshold T2_L (while the protocol stack was
switched off
previously). In this state, the embedded module allows emergency calls only.
An unsolicited
response with <state>=2 is sent to indicate the protocol stack can
provide only limited
services when the
CPU temperature is increasing and reaches the threshold T1_H (while full service
was provided
previously). All activated PDP contexts and ongoing CS call will be deactivated
but ongoing
emergency CS calls
will be kept. In this state, the embedded module allows emergency calls
only.
An unsolicited
response with <state>=3 is sent to indicate the protocol stack is
providing full services
when the CPU
temperature is decreasing to the threshold T1_L or below.
Embedded module
temperature monitoring mechanism:
454HFour pre-defined threshold temperatures T1_L, T1_H, T2_L and
T2_H will be used in this
mechanism.
: Unsolicited report
to indicate the protocol stack states
45H 0, 1, 2, 3 : protocol stack states.
456HNormally, the embedded module will work with full services below
T1_L. When the embedded module
temperature reaches
the threshold T1_H or above, all activated PDP contexts and ongoing CS call
will be deactivated,
except emergency call. Then, only emergency calls are accepted.
457HIn order to prevent damage to the embedded module and its
components, the protocol stack will be
automatically
switched off when the temperature T2_H is reached. The stack will be switched
on
T2_H
T2_L
T1_H
T1_L
Temperature
1
0
2
1
0
2 2
3 3
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Embedded
module Status Commands
Temperature
Monitoring Report +WTMR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 162
again when the
temperature is down to T2_L. At this moment, only emergency call could be
issued.
Full services of the
embedded module are resumed once the temperature is at or below T1_L.
7.8.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WTMR=<mode>
458H[+WTMR: <mode>,<state>]
OK
Read command
AT+WTMR?
+WTMR: <mode>
OK
Test command
AT+WTMR=?
+WTMR: (list of supported
<mode>)
OK
Unsolicited Response
+WTMR: <state>
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Embedded
module Status Commands
Temperature
Monitoring Report +WTMR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 163
7.8.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mode>:
selected mode
0 unsolicited report off
1 unsolicited report on (default)
2 read current embedded module state
<state>:
Embedded module protocol stack
status
0 protocol stack is switched off
1 Emergency calls only. The protocol stack is switched on from
the state which is
switched off previously.
2 Emergency calls only. All currently activated packets calls
have been hanged-up and
ongoing CS call terminated except emergency CS calls.
3 Embedded module is in full services
7.8.4.
Parameter Storage
The <mode>
parameter is stored in EEPROM without using the AT&W command.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Embedded
module Status Commands
Temperature
Monitoring Report +WTMR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 164
7.8.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WTMR=?
Note : Get possible value
+WTMR: (0-2)
OK
459HNote : Three modes (0,1,2) are
available
AT+WTMR?
Note : Get current value
+WTMR: 1
OK
Note : Unsolicited report is enabled
+WTMR: 2
460HNote : Unsolicited report
(threshold temperature T1_H reached,
protocol stack with limited services)
461HAT+CGACT=1,1 +CME ERROR: 567
Note : Operation denied due to CPU over-heated
AT+WTMR=2 462H+WTMR: 2,2
OK
Note: Read current <state>.
AT+WTMR=0 OK
Note: Unsolicited report is disabled.
AT+WTMR=3 +CME ERROR: 3
Note: Incorrect <mode>.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Embedded
module Status Commands
Sierra
Wireless Critical Error Report +WCER
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 165
7.9.
Sierra Wireless Critical Error Report +WCER
7.9.1.
Description
This command is used
to enable/disable +WCER unsolicited result code, returned when a critical
hardware error
occurs on the embedded module.
Note: This command is not available for the
Airprime Q26Extreme embedded module.
7.9.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WCER=<mode>
OK
Read command
AT+WCER?
+WCER: <mode>
OK
Test command
AT+WCER=?
+WCER: (0-1)
OK
Unsolicited response
+WCER:
<errorCause>,<extendedValue>
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Embedded
module Status Commands
Sierra
Wireless Critical Error Report +WCER
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 166
7.9.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mode>:
request operation
0 disable Critical Error Report result code +WCER (default
value)
1 enable Critical Error Report unsolicited result code +WCER
<errorCause>:
hardware error code
string type; two bytes error cause in hexadecimal format (e.g.
"00C3" equals
195 in decimal);
range: "0000"-"1004"
<extendedValue>:
extended hardware error code
(additional information related to <errorCause>)
string type; two bytes extended error cause in hexadecimal
format;
range: "0000"-"FFFF"
7.9.4.
Parameter Storage
The <mode>
parameter is stored in EPROM without using the AT&W command.
7.9.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WCER=0 OK
AT+WCER=1
OK
Note: Enable Critical Error Report unsolicited
indication
+WCER:
"1000","0000"
Note: Critical error occurred on embedded module;
main error code is
0x1000, additional error code is 0x0000.
AT+WCER? +WCER: 1
OK
AT+WCER=? +WCER: (0-1)
OK
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 167
8.
Serial Port Commands
8.1.
Echo ATE
8.1.1.
Description
This command is used
to determine whether the embedded module echoes characters received by
an external
application (DTE) or not.
8.1.2.
Syntax
Action command
ATE[<n>]
OK
Read command
None
Test command
None
8.1.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<n>:
echo activation parameter
0 Characters are not echoed (default value if <n> omitted)
1 Characters are echoed.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Serial
Port Commands
Echo
ATE
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 168
8.1.4.
Parameter Storage
The <n> parameter is stored in EEPROM using AT&W
command.
8.1.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
ATE0
Note: Characters are not echoed
OK
Note: Done
ATE1
Note: Characters are echoed
OK
Note: Done
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Serial Port
Commands
Fixed
DTE Rate +IPR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 169
8.2.
Fixed DTE Rate +IPR
8.2.1.
Description
This command
specifies the data rate at which the DCE will accept commands.
8.2.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+IPR=<rate>
OK
Read command
AT+IPR?
+IPR: <rate>
OK
Test command
AT+IPR=?
463H+IPR: (list of auto-detectable <rate>s),(list of supported
<rate>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Serial
Port Commands
Fixed
DTE Rate +IPR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 170
8.2.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<rate>:
baud rates that can be used by the
DCE
0 enables autobauding
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200 default value
230400
460800
921600
8.2.4.
Parameter Storage
The <rate> parameter is stored in EEPROM using AT&W
command.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Serial
Port Commands
Fixed
DTE Rate +IPR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 171
8.2.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+IPR? +IPR: 9600
OK
Note: Current rate is 9600 bps
AT+IPR=? 464H+IPR:
(1200,2400,4800,9600,19200,38400,57600,115200,230400,460800,921600),
(0,300,600,1200,2400,4800,9600,19200,38400,57600,115200,230400,
460800,921600)
OK
465HNote: Possible values,
according to V25 ter recommendation: the first set of values indicates the
range
of auto-detectable baud rates .The second set of
values indicates the baud rates supported by the
DCE.
AT+IPR=38400 OK
Note: Disables autobauding and sets rate to 38400
bps
AT+IPR=0 OK
Note: Enables autobauding
8.2.6.
Notes
46HThe serial autobauding feature is supported, and covers the
following serial speeds (only):
1200, 2400, 4800,
9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200, 230400, 460800, 921600 bps.
Beyond those serial
speeds, correct operation of the embedded module is not guaranteed.
467HAny AT command issued by the DTE must
start with both capital A and T (or /) or both
lower case a and
t (or /), otherwise the DCE may return some garbage characters and
become
desynchronized. Should this happen, the DTE simply issues AT\r (at 2400 or
4800
bauds) once or twice
or just AT (at 9600 bauds) to resynchronize the embedded module.
468HThe DTE waits for 1ms after receiving
the last character of the AT response (which is always
\n or 0x0A) to
send a new AT command at either the same rate or a new rate. Should this
delay be ignored,
the DCE can become desynchronized. Once again, sending AT\r once or
twice or just AT
causes the DCE to recover.
Caution:
469H When starting up, if autobauding is enabled and
no AT command has yet been received, the
product sends all unsolicited responses (like
RING) at 9600 bauds.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Serial
Port Commands
DTE-DCE
Character Framing +ICF
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 172
8.3.
DTE-DCE Character Framing +ICF
8.3.1.
Description
This command is used
to determine the local serial port start-stop (asynchronous) character framing
used by the DCE.
8.3.2.
Syntax
Action command
470HAT+ICF=<format>[,<parity>]
OK
Read command
AT+ICF?
471H+ICF: <format>,<parity>
OK
Test command
AT+ICF=?
472H+ICF: (list of supported <format>s),(list of supported
<parity>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Serial
Port Commands
DTE-DCE
Character Framing +ICF
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 173
8.3.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<format>:
character framing format
1 8 data 2 stop
<parity>
parameter is ignored.
2 8 data 1 parity 1 stop
473Hif no <parity> provided, 3 is
used by default as <parity> value.
3 8 data 1 stop
<parity>
parameter is ignored.
default value
4 7 data 2 stop
<parity>
parameter is ignored.
5 7 data 1 parity 1 stop
474Hif no <parity> provided, 3 is
used by default as <parity> value.
6 7 data 1 stop
<parity>
parameter is ignored.
<parity>:
character framing parity
0 odd
1 even
2 mark
3 space
4 none (default value)
8.3.4.
Parameter Storage
The <format> and <parity> parameters are stored in
EEPROM using AT&W command. The default value can be
restored using AT&F.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Serial
Port Commands
DTE-DCE
Character Framing +ICF
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 174
8.3.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+ICF=? 475H+ICF: (1-6),(0-4)
OK
Note: Possible values
476HAT+ICF=2,0 OK
Note: New values
AT+ICF? 47H+ICF: 2,0
OK
Note: Current values
8.3.6.
Notes
478HAll framing settings of the serial interface (i.e 801, 8E1, 8S1,
8N1, 7N1, 7O1, 7E1, 7S1 and 7N2) are
supported for
autobaud mode.
If USB port is used:
479Hthe action command is supported for compatibility
reasons (but without effect),
the
response to the action command and the read command behaviour is the same as if
sent
on UART1 or UART2.
See the section Managing the USB feature of the "Appendixes to AT
Commands Interface
Guide" for the supported USB emulated serial port settings.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Serial
Port Commands
DTE-DCE
Local Flow Control +IFC
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 175
8.4.
DTE-DCE Local Flow Control +IFC
8.4.1.
Description
This command is used
to control the operation of local flow control between the DTE and DCE.
8.4.2.
Syntax
Action command
480HAT+IFC=<DCE_by_DTE>,<DTE_by_DCE>
OK
Read command
AT+IFC?
481H+IFC: <DCE_by_DTE>,<DTE_by_DCE>
OK
Test command
AT+IFC=?
482H+IFC: (list of supported <DCE_by_DTE>s),(list of supported
<DTE_by_DCE>s)
OK
8.4.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<DCE_by_DTE>:
local flow control parameter
0 none
2 RTS (default value)
<DTE_by_DCE>:
local flow control parameter
0 none
2 CTS (default value)
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Serial
Port Commands
DTE-DCE
Local Flow Control +IFC
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 176
8.4.4.
Parameter Storage
The <DCE_by_DTE> and <DTE_by_DCE> parameters are
stored in EEPROM using AT&W command.
8.4.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+IFC=? 483H+IFC: (0,2),(0,2)
OK
Note: Possible values
484HAT+IFC=0,0 OK
Note: New values
AT+IFC? 485H+IFC: 0,0
OK
8.4.6.
Notes
If USB port is used:
486Hthe action command is supported for
compatibility reasons (but without effect),
the
response to the action command is the same as if sent on UART1 or UART2 and the
value of the both
parameters is always 2.
487HWhen the <DTE_by_DCE> parameter is set to 0 (none), the
CTS is kept high all the time.
The valid pairs of
values for 'AT+IFC' action command are '0,0' and '2,2' as only 'Auto RTS CTS -
Hardware' flow
control or Flow control as none values are supported.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Serial
Port Commands
Result
Code Suppression ATQ
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 177
8.5.
Result Code Suppression ATQ
8.5.1.
Description
This command
determines whether the mobile equipment sends result codes or not.
8.5.2.
Syntax
Action command
ATQ[<n>]
[OK]
Read command
None
Test command
None
8.5.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<n>:
result code transmission parameter
0 DCE transmits result codes.
1 result codes suppressed and not transmitted (default value).
8.5.4.
Parameter Storage
The <n>
parameter is stored in EEPROM using AT&W command. The default value can be
restored
using AT&F.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Serial
Port Commands
Result
Code Suppression ATQ
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 178
8.5.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
ATQ0
Note: DCE transmits result codes
OK
Note: Command valid
ATQ1
Note: Result codes are suppressed and not
transmitted
Note: No response
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Serial
Port Commands
DCE
Response Format ATV
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 179
8.6.
DCE Response Format ATV
8.6.1.
Description
48HThis command determines whether the DCE response format uses or
not the header characters
<CR><LF>,
and whether the result codes are provided as numeric or verbose.
8.6.2.
Syntax
Action command
ATV<n>
OK
Read command
None
Test command
None
8.6.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<n>:
format control parameter
information
responses result code
0 <text><CR><LF> <numeric
code><CR>
1 (default
value)
<CR><LF>
<text><CR><LF>
<CR><LF>
<verbose code><CR><LF>.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Serial
Port Commands
DCE
Response Format ATV
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 180
8.6.4.
Parameter Storage
The <n>
parameter is stored in EEPROM using AT&W command. The default value can be
restored
using AT&F.
8.6.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
ATV0
Note: DCE transmits limited headers and trailers
and
numeric result codes
0
Note: Command is valid (0 means OK)
ATV1
Note: DCE transmits full headers and trailers and
verbose response text
OK
Note: Command valid
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Serial
Port Commands
Set DCD
Signal C
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 181
8.7.
Set DCD Signal C
8.7.1.
Description
This command
controls the Data Carrier Detect (DCD) signal.
8.7.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT&C[<n>]
OK
Read command
None
Test command
None
8.7.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<n>:
DCD signal control parameter
0 DCD always on
1 DCD matches the state of the remote embedded modules data
carrier (default
value).
8.7.4.
Parameter Storage
The <n> parameter is stored in EEPROM using AT&W
command. The default value can be restored using AT&F.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Serial
Port Commands
Set DCD
Signal C
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 182
8.7.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT&C0
Note: DCD always on
OK
Note: Command valid
AT&C1
Note: DCD matches state of the remote embedded
modules data carrier
OK
Note: Command valid
8.7.6.
Notes
489HSierra Wireless products slightly differ from V25ter
Recommendation. DCD signal ("Circuit 109") is
turned ON at the
same time the CONNECT message is sent, whereas the specification states that
the
DCD should be turned
ON after the CONNECT message was received.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Serial
Port Commands
Set DTR
Signal D
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 183
8.8.
Set DTR Signal D
8.8.1.
Description
This command
controls the Data Terminal Ready (DTR) signal.
8.8.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT&D[<n>]
OK
Read command
None
Test command
None
8.8.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<n>:
DTR signal control parameter
0 DTR signal is ignored.
1 Embedded module switches from data to command mode when DTR
switches from
ON to OFF.
2 490HUpon DTR switch from ON to OFF, the call is released (default
value).
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Serial
Port Commands
Set DTR
Signal D
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 184
8.8.4.
Parameter Storage
The <n> parameter is stored in EEPROM using AT&W command.
The default value can be restored using AT&F.
8.8.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT&D0
Note: The DTR signal is ignored
OK
Note: Command valid
AT&D1
Note: Embedded module switches from data to
command mode when DTR switches from ON to OFF
OK
Note: Command valid
AT&D2
491HNote: Upon DTR switch from
ON to OFF, the call is
released
OK
Note: Command valid
8.8.6.
Notes
DTR detection can be
done over UART or USB interface.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Serial
Port Commands
Set DSR
Signal S
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 185
8.9.
Set DSR Signal S
8.9.1.
Description
This command
controls the Data Set Ready (DSR) signal.
8.9.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT&S[<n>]
OK
Read command
AT&S?
&S: <n>
OK
Test command
AT&S=?
ERROR
8.9.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<n>:
DSR signal control parameter
0 DSR always ON
1 492HDSR OFF in command mode, DSR ON in data mode (default value)
8.9.4.
Parameter Storage
The <n>
parameter is stored in EEPROM using AT&W command. The default value can be restored
using AT&F.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Serial
Port Commands
Set DSR
Signal S
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 186
8.9.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT&S0
Note: DSR always valid
OK
AT&S1
493HNote: DSR always valid
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Serial
Port Commands
Sierra
Wireless Ring Indicator Mode +WRIM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 187
8.10.
Sierra Wireless Ring Indicator Mode +WRIM
8.10.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command sets the state of the Ring Indicator Mode.
8.10.2.
Syntax
Action command
494HAT+WRIM=<mode>[,<events_bit_field>[,<pulse_width>]]
OK
Read command
AT+WRIM?
+WRIM:
<mode>[,<events_bit_field>[,<pulse_width>]]
OK
Test command
AT+WRIM=?
495H+WRIM:
<mode>[,<events_bit_field>[,<pulse_width>]]
496H[+WRIM:
<mode>[,<events_bit_field>[,<pulse_width>]][
]]
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Serial
Port Commands
Sierra
Wireless Ring Indicator Mode +WRIM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 188
8.10.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mode>:
RI mode
0 up-down RI mode: no pulses are sent before unsolicited AT
response. Up-down
signals are sent when receiving an incoming call (default
value).
1 497Hpulse RI mode: an electrical pulse is sent on the Ring Indicator
signal ONLY for
selected event and/or unsolicited AT responses as specified in
<events_bit_field>, in order to lose no AT responses when
client tasks are in
sleep state.
498HWhen receiving incoming calls, electrical
pulses are sent on the RI signal. For
incoming IP packet event, the electrical pulse is sent just
before sending a
downloaded data packet (GPRS or CSD) if the remote client tasks
has dropped
down his RTS signal.
49HFor unsolicited AT response, the
electrical pulse is sent just before sending an
unsolicited AT response.
<events_bit_field>:
events for ring indication
mandatory in pulse RI mode (<mode> = 1)
bit set to 0: message disabled
bit set to 1: message enabled
bit 0 incoming IP packet
bit 1 50HRING, +CRING, +CCWA, +CLIP
bit 2 501H+CMT, +CMTI, +CDS, +CDSI
bit 3 502H+CBM, +CBMI
bit 4 503H+CME ERROR: 13, +CCED
The unsolicited response "+CME ERROR: 13" is sent out
only when there is a
SIM card problem.
bit 5 504H+CREG, +CIEV
bit 6 +WDCI
bit 7 +CCCM
bit 8 +CKEV
bit 9 +CSQ
bit 10 NO CARRIER
bit 11 505H+STCR, +STRIL, +STIN
bit 12 +WIND
bit 13 +CALA
bit 14 506H+WDIAGI, +WBCI
bit 15 +WLOC
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Serial
Port Commands
Sierra
Wireless Ring Indicator Mode +WRIM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 189
bit 16 for Open ATฎ
applications
507HIf this bit is set, RI pulse will
be sent when the unsolicited response initiated by
an Open ATฎ application is sent.
bit 17 +CGREG
bit 18 +CGEV
bit 19 +CSSU
bit 20 +CUSD
bit 21 508H+WBTUM, +WBTSM
bit 22 +CLAV
<pulse_width>:
RI pulse width in ms unit
used only in pulse RI mode (<mode>=1).
509HIf <pulse_width> parameter is
omitted, the last entered value will be used.
Default value is 0
0-18 510HPulse duration is some μs and may be increased up to 3ms,
due to overhead
interrupt processes.
19-5000 Pulse duration granularity is 18.46 ms. Then effective
pulse duration will be
rounded to the lowest multiple of 18.46.
Example:
<pulse_width>=19 --> pulse duration is 18.46ms
<pulse_width>= 100 --> pulse duration is 92.3ms
8.10.4.
Parameter Storage
The parameters are
stored in EEPROM without using AT&W command. The default value can be
restored using
AT&F.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Serial
Port Commands
Sierra
Wireless Ring Indicator Mode +WRIM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 190
8.10.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WRIM=?
Note : Ask for the list of possible values
+WRIM: 0
51H+WRIM: 1,(0-8388607),(0-5000)
OK
512HNote : Possible mode values 0,
1
AT+WRIM=0
Note : Select up-down RI mode
OK
Note : Up-down RI mode selected
513HAT+WRIM=1,71
514HNote: bit field (0
0)1000111
(0x47 or decimal 71) to
enable IP packets, RING, +CRING, +CCWA, +CLIP,
+CMT, +CMTI, +CDS, +CDSI, +WBCI, +WDCI
OK
AT+WRIM?
Note : Ask for the current value
515H+WRIM: 1,71,0
OK
Note : Current mode is pulse RI
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Serial
Port Commands
Back to
online mode AT0
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 191
8.11.
Back to online mode AT0
8.11.1.
Description
This command allows
to return to online data mode if a connection has been established and the ME
is in command mode.
8.11.2.
Syntax
Action command
ATO
OK
Read command
None
Test command
None
8.11.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
None.
8.11.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
8.11.5.
Examples
None.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Serial
Port Commands
Multi-flow
Management +WMFM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 192
8.12.
Multi-flow Management +WMFM
8.12.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command manages Multi-Flows:
opening
or closing ports
516Hassociating (or attaching, redirecting)
incoming data to ports.
517HBy default, only UART1 is opened, and GSM and GPRS (if
applicable) data direction is dynamic.
8.12.2.
Syntax
for
<type_of_action>=0
Action command
518HAT+WMFM=<type_of_action>,<mode>[,<port_id>]
519H[+WMFM:
<type_of_action>,<mode>,<port_id>,<state>[
]]
OK
for
<type_of_action>=1
Action command
520HAT+WMFM=<type_of_action>,<mode>[,<port_id>[,<data>]]
521H[+WMFM:
<type_of_action>,<mode>,<port_id>,<data>[
]]
OK
Read command
AT+WMFM?
52H+WMFM:
<type_of_action>,<mode>,<port_id>,<state>
523H[+WMFM:
<type_of_action>,<mode>,<port_id>,<state>[
]]
524H+WMFM: <type_of_action>,<mode>,<port_id>,<data>
525H[+WMFM:
<type_of_action>,<mode>,<port_id>,<data>[
]]
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Serial
Port Commands
Multi-flow
Management +WMFM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 193
8.12.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<type_of_action>:
managing mode
0 manage active physical ports
1 manage incoming data
<mode>:
requested operation according to
<type_of_action>:
0 close physical port
or
528Hset dynamic mode for incoming data
(data direction is set on ATD / ATA
commands for GSM, or ATD / +CGDATA commands for GPRS)
1 open physical port
or
attach incoming data to <port_id>
2 read state
<port_id>:
port identifier
1 UART1
1x DLC x on UART 1 (x : from 1 to 4)
2 UART2
2x DLC x on UART 2 (x : from 1 to 4)
3 USB
3x DLC x on USB (x: from 1 to 4)
4 529Hdynamic port (only in read mode, default value with
<type_of_action>=1)
80 Open ATฎ application
Test command
AT+WMFM=?
526H+WMFM: <type_of_action>,(list of supported
<mode>s),(list of supported
<port_id>s)[,(list of
supported <data>s)]
527H[+WMFM: <type_of_action>,(list of supported
<mode>s),(list of supported
<port_id>s)[,(list of
supported <data>s)][
]]
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Serial
Port Commands
Multi-flow
Management +WMFM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 194
<data>:
data type
0 GSM data
1 GPRS data
<state>:
physical port state
0 deactivated
1 activated
8.12.4.
Parameter Storage
The <state>
and <port_id> parameters are stored in EEPROM without using AT&W.
8.12.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WMFM=? 530H+WMFM: 0,(0-2),(1-3,80)
531H+WMFM: 1,(0-2),(1),(0,1)
OK
532HNote: To manage incoming
data, only UART 1 is available
53HAT+WMFM=0,2
534H+WMFM: 0,2,1,1
535H+WMFM: 0,2,2,0
536H+WMFM: 0,2,3,0
OK
Note: Read state of all ports Note: UART1 is opened
537HAT+WMFM=0,1,2
Note: Open UART2
OK
538HAT+WMFM=0,2,2
Note: Read UART2 state
539H+WMFM: 0,2,2,1
OK
540HAT+WMFM=1,2 541H+WMFM: 1,2,4,0
542H+WMFM: 1,2,4,1
OK
Note: Read attachments of ports to which data are
redirected
Note: GSM and GPRS data are dynamic
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Serial
Port Commands
Multi-flow
Management +WMFM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 195
Command
Responses
543HAT+WMFM=1,1,1,0
Note: Attach GSM data to UART1
OK
Note: GSM data are redirected to UART1
54HAT+WMFM=1,1,1,1
Note: Attach GPRS data to UART1
OK
Note: GPRS data are redirected to UART1
545HAT+WMFM=1,2,1 546H+WMFM: 1,2,1,0
547H+WMFM: 1,2,1,1
OK
Note: Read attachments of UART1 Note: GSM and
GPRS data are redirected to UART1
548HAT+WMFM=1,0,,0
Note: Set GSM data dynamic mode
OK
Note: GSM data are directed dynamically on call
setup
549HAT+WMFM=1,0,,1
Note: Set GPRS data dynamic mode
OK
Note: GPRS data are directed dynamically on
session setup
AT+WMFM? 50H+WMFM: 0,2,1,1
51H+WMFM: 0,2,2,1
52H+WMFM: 0,2,3,0
53H+WMFM: 1,2,4,0
54H+WMFM: 1,2,4,1
OK
AT+CMUX=0
Note: Launch 27.010 protocol on UART 2 and open 4
DLCs
OK
AT+WMFM=? 5H+WMFM: 0,(0-2),(1-3)
56H+WMFM: 1,(0-2),(1,21,22,23,24),(0,1)
OK
57HNote: To manage incoming
data, UART1, and DLC 1, 2, 3, 4 on
UART2 are available.
58HAT+WMFM=1,1,21,0
Note: Attach GSM data to DLC 1 on UART2
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Serial
Port Commands
Multi-flow
Management +WMFM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 196
8.12.6.
Notes
59HSince the UART2 port does not provide all the serial signals
(only RX/TX/RTS/CTS), it is not
recommended to use
this port for GSM or GPRS data mode.
The
response to AT+WMFM=? is dynamic according to the different UART states for
<type_of_action>=1
(depending on which port number is opened when the command is sent
to the embedded
module).
Only
the remote UART can be opened or closed (it is impossible to close UART1
sending
WMFM command trough
UART1)
560HWhen <port Id> attached to a data
flow allocated for incoming data is closed, the
management returns
to dynamic mode.
561HIn the "mode" parameter, 3
value is not allowed because used internally.
The
reading "Port: 80" state with +WMFM command always returns +CME
ERROR: 3
The
UART2 port is not available when the Bluetooth stack is started
562HWhen the redirection of the GPRS flow
is activated and two GPRS communications are
established, the
first GPRS flow is attached to the port specified by +WMFM command and
the second one is
not redirected
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Serial
Port Commands
Multiplexing
Mode +CMUX
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 197
8.13.
Multiplexing Mode +CMUX
8.13.1.
Description
This command is used
to manage (enable or disable) the 3GPP TS 27.010 [14] multiplexing protocol
control channel.
This command allows
the multiplexing of 4 logical channels on each UART and USB CDC/ACM.
Multiplexing can be
applied simultaneously to all UART and USB. The client application may handle,
by this means, up to
12 channels (4 logical multiplexed channels on each UART and USB).
When a CMUX session
is enabled on a specific port, the Sierra Wireless embedded module allows to
open 4 DLCs on this
port. These DLCs can be in the range of 1 to 4. This excludes DLC0 which is for
the control channel.
563HThe AT+CMUX? command returns a +CMUX response only on a DLC
port. On a physical port, only
OK response is
returned.
The AT+CMUX? command
returns the 27.010 MUX protocol configuration on the port on which this
command is sent.
8.13.2.
Syntax
Action command
564HAT+CMUX=<mode>[,<subset>[,<port_speed>[,<N1>[,<T1>[,<N2>[,<T2>[,<T3>]]]]]]]
OK
Read command
AT+CMUX?
565H[+CMUX:
<mode>,<subset>,<port_speed>,<N1>,<T1>,<N2>,<T2>,<T3>]
OK
Test command
AT+CMUX=?
56H+CMUX: (list of supported <mode>s),(list of supported
<subset>s),(list of supported
<port_speed>s),(list of
supported <N1>s),(list of supported <T1>s),(list of
supported <N2>s),(list of
supported <T2>s),(list of supported <T3>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Serial
Port Commands
Multiplexing
Mode +CMUX
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 198
8.13.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mode>:
multiplexer transparency mechanism
0 basic option
<subset>:
multiplexer control channel set up
567HA virtual channel may subsequently
be set up differently but if there is no settings
negotiation, the virtual channel will be set up according to the
control channel
<subset> setting.
0 UIH frames used only
<port_speed>:
transmission rate
1 9600 bit/s
2 19200 bit/s
3 38400 bit/s
4 57600 bit/s
5 115200 bit/s
6 230400 bit/s
7 460800 bit/s
8 921600 bit/s
<N1>:
maximum frame size
1-255 default value: 31
<T1>:
acknowledgement timer in units of
20 ms.
1-128 default value: 5 (100 ms)
<N2>:
maximum number of retransmission
0-255 default value: 3
<T2>:
response timer for the multiplexer
control channel in units of 20 ms.
<T2> must be longer than <T1>
1-128 default value: 15 (300 ms)
<T3>:
wake up response timer in units of
2 seconds
1-128 default value: 5 (10 s)
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Serial
Port Commands
Multiplexing
Mode +CMUX
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 199
8.13.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
8.13.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CMUX=?
568H+CMUX: (0),(0),(1-5),(1-255),
(1-128),(0-255),(1-128),(1-128)
Note: Get supported values OK
569HAT+CMUX=0,0,5,31,5,3,15,5 OK
Note: Enter multiplex mode
AT+CMUX? 570H+CMUX: 0,0,5,31,5,3,15,5
Note: Get current values OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Serial
Port Commands
Sierra
Wireless USB Configuration +WUSB
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 200
8.14.
Sierra Wireless USB Configuration +WUSB
8.14.1.
Description
The AT command
described into this document allows the customer to configure the USB
interface.
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command allows a user to:
Update
the device and configuration customization
Set
the USB classes to be used
8.14.2.
Syntax
Depending on the
context, several responses to the command are possible:
For
<Mode>=0
Action command
AT+WUSB=<Mode>
OK
For
<Mode>=1
Action command
AT+WUSB=<Mode>[,[<idVendor>][,[<iManufacturer>][,<iSerialNumber>]]]
OK
For
<Mode>=2
Action command
AT+WUSB=<Mode>,<StackId>[,[<idProduct>][,[<iProduct>][,[<bmAttributes>]
[,<bMaxPower>]]]]
OK
For
<Mode>=3
Action command
AT+WUSB=<Mode>,<Selection>[,<Function>]
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Serial
Port Commands
Sierra
Wireless USB Configuration +WUSB
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 201
For
<Mode>=4
Action command
AT+WUSB=<Mode>,<USBAlloc>
OK
Read command
AT+WUSB?
+WUSB:
1,<idVendor>,<iManufacturer>,<iSerialNumber>
+WUSB:
2,<StackId>,<idProduct>,<iProduct>,<bmAttributes>,<bMaxPower>
+WUSB:
3,<Selection>,<Function>
+WUSB: 4,<USBAlloc>
OK
Test command
AT+WUSB=?
+WUSB: 0
+WUSB:
1,<idVLen>,<iMLen>,<iSNLen>
+WUSB: 2,(list of supported
<StackId>s),<idPLen>,<iPLen>,(list of supported
<bmAttributes>s),(list of
supported <bMaxPower>s)
+WUSB: 3,(list of supported
<Selection>s),(list of supported <Function>s)
+WUSB: 4,(list of supported
<USBAlloc>s)
OK
8.14.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<Mode>:
Mode
0 Set the default values
1 Device customization
2 Configuration customization
3 USB firmware classes activation
4 USB resource allocation when the device starts (firmware or
Open ATฎ)
<idVendor>:
Vendor Id (assigned by the USB-IF)
When this parameter is not defined, the value taken into account
by the device
is: 0x114F. This value is a 16 bits value.
<iManufacturer>:
Index of string descriptor
describing manufacturer
When this parameter is not defined, the value taken into account
by the device
is: SIERRA WIRELESS. Maximum length = 126 characters
<iSerialNumber>:
USB serial number
When this parameter is not defined, the value taken into account
by the device
is the device Serial number (see +WMSN command). Maximum length=
126
characters
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Serial
Port Commands
Sierra
Wireless USB Configuration +WUSB
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 202
<StackId>:
USB Stack identifier
Currently only 0 (meaning UDEV0) is supported
<idProduct>:
Product ID (assigned by the
manufacturer)
When this parameter is not defined, the value taken into account
by the device
is 0x1234. This value is a 16 bits value.
<iProduct>:
Index of string descriptor
describing product
When this parameter is not defined, the value taken into account
by the device
is USB MODULE. Maximum length = 126 characters
<bmAttributes>:
Configuration characteristics
This parameter is taken into account at the next USB
enumeration. Note that
no values other than those listed below are accepted.
128 bus powered device and no remote wakeup
160 bus powered device and remote wakeup
192 self powered device and no remote wakeup
224 self powered device and remote wakeup
<bMaxPower>:
Maximum power consumption of the
USB device from the bus in this specific
configuration when the device is fully operational.
Expressed in 2 mA units (i.e., 50 = 100 mA).Range: [0-255] in
mA.
<Selection>:
<Function> selection state
A functional layer needs to be selected on the USB port before
using the USB
layer.
0 Deselected
1 Selected
<Function>:
The function in question.
UFLCDC USB Function Layer Communications Device Class (default
value)
<idVLen>:
<idVendor> parameter max
length
<iMLen>:
<iManufactuerer> parameter
max length
<iSNLen>:
<iSerialNumber> parameter max
length.
<idPLen>:
<idProduct> parameter max
length
<iPLen>:
<iProduct> parameter max
length
<USBAlloc>:
USB resource allocation at boot.
0 USB binding allowed by the firmware at boot (default value)
1 USB binding not allowed by the firmware at boot (used when an
Open ATฎ
application defines its own USB class)
8.14.4.
Parameter Storage
All parameters are
stored in non-volatile memory without sending &W command. &F command
has no
impact on these
values.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Serial
Port Commands
Sierra
Wireless USB Configuration +WUSB
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 203
8.14.5.
Examples
Command
Possible responses
AT+WUSB=? +WUSB: 1,4,126,126
+WUSB:
2,(0),4,126,(128,160,192,224),(0-255)
+WUSB:
3,(0-1),("UFLCDC")
+WUSB: 4,(0-1)
OK
AT+WUSB? +WUSB:
1,"114F","SIERRA
WIRELESS","A41010000101501"
+WUSB:
2,0,"1234","USB MODEM",192,20
+WUSB: 3,"UFLCDC"
+WUSB: 4,0
OK
Note: Default customization
AT+WUSB=2,0,"5000","MyProduct"
OK
Note: Device customization
AT+WUSB? +WUSB:
1,"114F","SIERRA
WIRELESS","A41010000101501"
+WUSB:
2,0,"5000","MyProduct",192,20
+WUSB: 3,"UFLCDC"
+WUSB: 4,0
OK
AT+WUSB=1,FFFF,MyCompanyName
OK
Note: Device customization
AT+WUSB? +WUSB:
1,"FFFF","MyCompanyName","A41010000101501"
+WUSB:
2,0,"5000","MyProduct",192,20
+WUSB: 3,"UFLCDC"
+WUSB: 4,0
OK
AT+WUSB=0 OK
Note: Set the default values
AT+WUSB? +WUSB:
1,"114F","SIERRA
WIRELESS","A41010000101501"
+WUSB:
2,0,"1234","USB MODEM",192,20
+WUSB: 3,"UFLCDC"
+WUSB: 4,0
OK
Note: Default customization
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Serial
Port Commands
Sierra
Wireless USB Configuration +WUSB
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 204
8.14.6.
Notes
To activate
the class UFLCDC, see +WMFM command
Deselect
UFLCDC deactivates the class, meaning that the associate port will be closed.
To
delete the device customization, AT+WUSB=1 command should be sent to the
device.
To delete the
configuration customization, AT+WUSB=2,0 command should be sent to the
device
Caution:
If the <idVendor> or
<idProduct> are modified, the Sierra Wireless Windows driver is not
usable. A
new driver corresponding to the customized
parameters is mandatory to use the CDC.
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 205
9.
Security Commands
9.1.
Enter PIN +CPIN
9.1.1.
Description
571HThis command is used to enter the ME passwords (PIN 1/CHV 1, PIN
2/CHV 2, PUK1, PUK2, etc.),
that are required
before any ME functionality can be used.
572HPIN 1/CHV 1 and PIN 2/CHV 2 are between 4 and 8 digits long,
PUK1 and PUK2 are only 8 digits
long.
573HAfter three unsuccessful attempts to enter the PIN, the PUK will
be required. PUK validation forces
the user to enter a
new PIN code as a second parameter and this will be the new PIN code if PUK
validation succeeds.
PIN 1/CHV 1 is then enabled if PUK1 is correct.
The application is
responsible for checking the PIN after each reset or power on if the PIN was
enabled.
9.1.2.
Syntax
Action command
574HAT+CPIN=<pin>[,<NewPin>]
OK
Read command
AT+CPIN?
+CPIN: <code>
Note: No OK
Test command
None
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Security
Commands
Enter
PIN +CPIN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 206
9.1.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<NewPin>:
Personal Identification Number
This parameter is required if the PIN state is SIM PUK.
four to eight digits number
<pin>:
Personal Identification Number
normally PIN 1/CHV 1
575HAccording to AT+CPIN?, the
<pin> parameter can be PUK 1, PH-SIM
PIN, PH-NET PIN, PH-NETSUB PIN, PH-SERVPROV PIN, PHCORPORATE
PIN
four to eight digits number
<code>:
SIM code status
READY ME is not writing for any password
SIM PIN PIN 1/CHV 1 is required
SIM PUK PUK1 is required
SIM PIN2 PIN 2/CHV 2 is required
SIM PUK2 PUK2 is required
PH-SIM PIN SIM lock (phone-to-SIM) is required
PH-NET PIN network personalization is required
PH-NETSUB PIN
network subset is required
PH- SERVPROV PIN
service provider is required
PH- CORPORATE PIN
corporate is required
9.1.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Security
Commands
Enter
PIN +CPIN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 207
9.1.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CPIN=1234
Note: Enter PIN
OK
Note: PIN code is correct
AT+CPIN=5678
Note: Enter PIN
+CME ERROR: 3
576HNote: Operation not allowed,
PIN previously entered
57HAT+CPIN=00000000,1234
Note: Enter PUK and new PIN
+CME ERROR: 16
Note: Incorrect PUK
578HAT+CPIN=12345678,1234
579HNote: Enter PUK and new PIN,
2nd attempt
OK
580HNote: PUK correct, new PIN
stored
The response
"+CME ERROR: 13" (SIM failure) is returned after 10 unsuccessful PUK
attempts. The
SIM card is then out
of order and must be replaced.
581HIf the user tries to do something which requires PIN 2/CHV 2,
the product will refuse the action with a
"+CME ERROR:
17" (SIM PIN2 required). The product then waits for SIM PIN 2/CHV 2 to be
given.
582HIf PIN 2/CHV 2 is blocked, SIM PUK2 is required instead of SIM
PIN 2/CHV 2.
583HFor example, the product needs PIN 2/CHV 2 to write in the fixed
dialing phonebook (FDN) , so if SIM
PIN 2/CHV 2
authentication has not been performed during the current session, SIM PIN 2/CHV
2 is
required
Command
Responses
AT+CPBS="FD"
Note: Choose FDN
OK
584HAT+CPBW=5,"01290917",129,"Jacky"
Note: Write in FDN at location 5
+CME ERROR: 17
Note: SIM PIN2 is required
AT+CPIN? +CPIN: SIM PIN2
Note: SIM PIN2 is required
AT+CPIN=5678
Note: Enter SIM PIN2
OK
585HAT+CPBW=2,"01290917",129,"Jacky"
Note: Write in FDN at location 5
OK
Note: Writing in FDN is allowed
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Security
Commands
Enter
PIN +CPIN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 208
9.1.6.
Notes
+CME ERROR: 553 is
returned when the PIN 1/CHV 1 code is tried to be changed using burned PUK
1 code.
+CME ERROR: 554 is
returned when the PIN 1/CHV 1 and PUK1 codes try to be entered when
theses codes are
burned.
.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Security
Commands
Enter
PIN2 +CPIN2
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 209
9.2.
Enter PIN2 +CPIN2
9.2.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command is used to validate the PIN 2/CHV 2 code or to validate the
PUK2 code (UNBLOCK
CHV2) and to define a new PIN 2/CHV 2 code.
This command is only
used when the last command executed resulted in PIN 2/CHV 2 authentication
failure.
586HPIN 2/CHV 2 length is between 4 and 8 digits, PUK2 length is 8
digits only.
587HAfter three unsuccessful attempts, PUK2 will be required. PUK2
validation forces the user to enter a
new PIN 2/CHV 2 code
as a second parameter and this will be the new PIN 2/CHV 2 code if PUK1
validation succeeds.
9.2.2.
Syntax
Action command
58HAT+CPIN2=<pin2>[,<NewPin2>]
OK
Read command
AT+CPIN2?
+CPIN2: <code>
Note: No OK
Test command
None
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Security
Commands
Enter
PIN2 +CPIN2
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 210
9.2.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<pin2>:
Personal Identification Number 2
four to eight digits number
<oper>:
Personal Unblocking Key 2 needed to
change the PIN2.
<Newpin2>
New Personal Identification Number
2
four to eight digits number
<code>:
SIM code status
READY no PIN2 is needed
SIM PIN2 PIN2 is required
SIM PUK2 PUK2 is required
9.2.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
9.2.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CPIN2=1234 OK
Note: Enter PIN2 Note: PIN2 code is correct
AT+CPIN2=5678 +CME ERROR: 3
Note: Enter PIN2 589HNote:
Operation not allowed, PIN2 previously entered
590HAT+CPIN2=00000000,1234
Note: Enter PUK2 and new PIN2
+CME ERROR: 16
Note: Incorrect Password (PUK2)
591HAT+CPIN2=12345678,1234
592HNote: Enter PUK2 and new
PIN2, 2nd attempt
OK
593HNote: PUK2 correct, new PIN2
stored
AT+CPIN2=1234 OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Security
Commands
PIN
Remaining Attempt Number +CPINC
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 211
9.3.
PIN Remaining Attempt Number +CPINC
9.3.1.
Description
594HThis Sierra Wireless proprietary command is used to get the
number of valid attempts for
PIN 1/CHV 1, PIN
2/CHV 2, PUK1 and PUK2 identifiers.
9.3.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CPINC
595H+CPINC: <n1>,<n2>,<k1>,<k2>
OK
Read command
AT+CPINC?
596H+CPINC: <n1>,<n2>,<k1>,<k2>
OK
Test command
AT+CPINC=?
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Security
Commands
PIN Remaining
Attempt Number +CPINC
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 212
9.3.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<n1>:
attempts left for PIN 1/CHV 1
range: 0-3
597H(0 = blocked, 3 = max)
<n2>:
attempts left for PIN 2/CHV 2
range: 0-3
598H(0 = blocked, 3 = max)
<k1>:
attempts left for PUK1
range: 0-10
59H(0 = blocked, 10 = max)
<k2>:
attempts left for PUK2
range: 0-10
60H(0 = blocked, 10 = max)
9.3.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
9.3.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CPINC 601H+CPINC: 2,3,10,10
Note: Get the number of attempts left
OK
Note: First PIN 1/CHV 1 attempt was a failure
AT+CPINC? 602H+CPINC: 2,3,10,10
OK
Note: Get current values Note: First PIN 1/CHV 1
attempt was a failure
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Security
Commands
Change
Password +CPWD
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 213
9.4.
Change Password +CPWD
9.4.1.
Description
603HThis command is used by the application to change a password
(PIN, call barring, NCK, etc.). The
facility values are
the same as for the +CLCK command with a "P2" facility to manage
"SIM PIN
2/CHV 2".
604HFor the network lock ("PN"), unlocking is forbidden
after 10 failed attempts to disable (unlock) the
network lock with an
incorrect password.
9.4.2.
Syntax
Action command
605HAT+CPWD=<fac>,<oldpwd>,<newpwd>
OK
Read command
None
Test command
AT+CPWD=?
606H+CPWD: list of supported (<fac>,<pwdlength>)s
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Security
Commands
Change
Password +CPWD
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 214
9.4.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<fac>:
facility P2 SIM P2
"PS" SIM lock facility with a 8 digits password
"SC" password change (user indicates old and new
password)
"AO" BAOC (Barr All Outgoing Calls)
"OI" BOIC (Barr Outgoing International Calls)
"OX" BOIC-exHC (Barr Outgoing International Calls
except to Home Country)
"AI" BAIC (Barr All Incoming Calls)
"IR" BIC-Roam (Barr Inc. When Roaming outside Home
Country)
"AB" All Barring services
"AG" All out Going barring services
"AC" All inComing barring services
"P2" PIN code 2/CHV2
"FD" SIM Fixed Dialing Numbers (FDN) memory feature
(PIN2 is
required as <password>)
"PN" Network lock with a 8 digits password (NCK)
"PU" Network Subset lock with a 8 digits password
(NSCK)
"PP" Service Provider lock with a 8 digits password
(SPCK).
"PC" Corporate lock with a 8 digits password (CCK)
<oldpwd>:
on 4 or up to 8 or 16 digits
according to the facility
<newpwd>:
new password specified for the
facility
string type [
.]
<pwdlength>:
maximum length of the password for
the facility
range: 4-16
9.4.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Security
Commands
Change
Password +CPWD
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 215
9.4.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CPWD=? 607H+CPWD: ("PS",8),("SC",8),("AO",4),
("OI",4),("OX",4),("AI",4),
("IR",4),("AB",4),("AG",4),
("AC",4),("P2",8),("FD",8),
("PN",8),("PU",8),("PP",8),
("PC",8)
OK
Note: Possible values 608HNote:
PIN 1/ CHV 1, PIN 2/CHV 2 must be on 8 digits
maximum (4 minimum). For call barring, on 4
digits
maximum.
609HAT+CPWD="SC",1234,5555
Note: Change PIN
OK
Note: PIN was correct
610HAT+CPWD="SC",1234,5555
Note: Change PIN
+CME ERROR: 16
Note: PIN was wrong
AT+CPIN=5555
Note: Enter PIN
OK
Note: PIN was correct
61HAT+CPWD="PN",12345678,00000000
Note: Change NCK
OK
Note: NCK changed for network lock
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Security
Commands
Facility
Lock +CLCK
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 216
9.5.
Facility Lock +CLCK
9.5.1.
Description
612HThis command is used by the application to lock, unlock or ask
for an ME or network facility.
9.5.2.
Syntax
Action command
613HAT+CLCK=<fac>,<mode>[,<password>[,<class>]]
614H[+CLCK: <status>,<class>[
]]
OK
Read command
TAT+CLCK?
615H+CLCK: (<fac>,<status>),[
]
OK
Test command
AT+CLCK=?
+CLCK: (list of supported
<fac>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Security
Commands
Facility
Lock +CLCK
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 217
9.5.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<fac>:
facility
"PS" SIM lock facility with a 8 digits password
"SC" PIN enabled (<mode>=1) / disabled
(<mode>=0)
"AO" BAOC (Barr All Outgoing Calls)
"OI" BOIC (Barr Outgoing International Calls)
"OX" BOIC-exHC (Barr Outgoing International Calls except
to Home Country)
"AI" BAIC (Barr All Incoming Calls)
"IR" BIC-Roam (Barr Incoming When Roaming outside Home
Country)
"AB" All Barring services
"AG" All out Going barring services
"AC" All inComing barring services
"FD" SIM Fixed Dialing Numbers (FDN) memory feature
(PIN 2/CHV 2 is required as
<password>)
"PN" Network lock with a 8 digits password (NCK)
"PU" Network Subset lock with a 8 digits password
(NSCK)
"PP" Service Provider lock with a 8 digits password
(SPCK).
"PC" Corporate lock with a 8 digits password (CCK)
<mode>:
requested operation
0 unlocks the facility
1 locks the facility
2 query status
<password>:
password code
616Hstring type, 4 to 8 digits
depending on <fac>
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Security
Commands
Facility
Lock +CLCK
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 218
<class>:
call class
617HThe combination of different
classes is not supported, it will only result in the
activation/deactivation/status request of all classes (7).
1 voice
2 data
4 fax
7 618Hvoice, data and fax (default value if omitted)
8 short messages
<status>:
facility lock status
0 not active
1 active
9.5.4.
Parameter Storage
The <mode> and
<password> parameters are stored in EEPROM and SIM (depending on
<fac>)
without using the
AT&W command.
9.5.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CLCK=? 619H+CLCK:
("PS","SC","AO","OI","OX","AI","IR","AB","A
G","AC","FD","PN","PU","PP","PC")
OK
620HAT+CLCK="SC",1,1234
621HNote: activate PIN locking,
1234 is PIN 1/CHV 1
OK
62HAT+CLCK="SC",2 +CLCK: 1
OK
AT+CLCK? 623H+CLCK:
("PS",0),("SC",1),("FD",0),("PN",0)
,("PU",0),("PP",0),("PC",0)
OK
9.5.6.
Notes
FDN locking is only
available after receiving the +WIND: 4 indication.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Security
Commands
Sierra
Wireless LoCK +WLCK
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 219
9.6.
Sierra Wireless LoCK +WLCK
All cases except
auto CNL
For auto CNL
9.6.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command allows the ME to be locked on a specific network operator.
9.6.2.
Syntax
Action command
624HAT+WLCK=<fac>,<passwd>,<NetId>[,<GID1>[,GID2]][,<CnlType>[,<CnlData>]]
OK
Read command
None
Test command
None
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Security
Commands
Sierra
Wireless LoCK +WLCK
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 220
9.6.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<fac>:
facility to be locked
"PS" SIM lock facility with a 8 digits password (PCK)
"PN" network lock with a 8 digits password (NCK)
"PU" network subset lock with a 8 digits password
(NSCK)
"PP" service provider lock with a 8 digits password
(SPCK)
"PC" corporate lock with a 8 digits password (CCK)
<CnlType>:
type of lock for cooperative
network list (CNL)
0 automatic (cooperative network list retrieved from EF-CNL SIM
file)
EF-CNL file must be present in SIM to use automatic mode.
1 manual (cooperative network list is given in the
<CnlData> parameter)
<CnlData>:
cooperative network list
same format as in EF-CNL SIM file (please refer to 625H[8] or 626H[9]) used only if
<CnlType> = 1
hexastring type
<passwd>:
password code
627Hstring type, 8 digits
<NetId>:
IMSI for SIM lock
(<fac>="PS")
operator in numeric format (MCC and MNC) for other locks (other
<fac> values)
<GID1>:
Group IDentifier level 1
mandatory for service provider lock (<fac>="PP")
and for corporate lock
(<fac>="PC")
<GID2>:
Group IDentifier level 2
mandatory for corporate lock (<fac>="PC")
9.6.4.
Parameter Storage
The lock action is
stored in EEPROM without using AT&W.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Security
Commands
Sierra
Wireless LoCK +WLCK
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 221
9.6.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
628HAT+WLCK="PN",12345678,20810 OK
629HNote: Activate network lock
on SFR (208,10) Note: Network lock activated
630HAT+WLCK="PS",12345678,208105923568974 OK
Note: Activate SIM lock Note: SIM lock activated
631HAT+WLCK="PU",12345678,2081035 OK
632HNote: Activate Network
Subset lock on SFR (208, 10, 35) Note: Network Subset lock activated
63HAT+WLCK="PP",12345678,20810,"E5" OK
634HNote: Activate Service
Provider lock on SFR (208, 10) and GID1 (0xE5). Note: Service Provider lock
activated
635HAT+WLCK="PC",12345678,20810,"E5","10"
OK
636HNote: Activate Corporate
lock on SFR (208, 10), GID1 (0xE5) and GID2
(0x10)
Note: Corporate lock activated
637HAT+WLCK="PN",12345678,20810,0 OK
638HNote: Activate Network lock
on SFR (208, 10) using cooperative
network list from SIM file EF-CNL (must be
present in SIM)
Note: Network lock activated on SFR and
cooperative
network list present in SIM
639HAT+WLCK="PN",12345678,20801,1,"02F802FFFFFF02F8
01FFFFFF"
OK
640HNote: Activate Network lock
on F ORANGE (208, 01) with manual cooperative
network list including SFR (208, 10) and Bouygtel
(208, 20)
641HNote: Network lock activated
on F ORANGE
(primary network), SFR and Bouygtel (cooperative
networks)
9.6.6.
Notes
Test SIM cards (with
MCC=001 & MNC=01) do not check these locks.
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 222
10.
Time Management Commands
10.1.
Clock Management +CCLK
10.1.1.
Description
This command is used
to set or get the current date and time of the ME real time clock.
10.1.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CCLK=<date
and time string>
OK
Read command
AT+CCLK?
+CCLK: <date and time
string>
OK
Test command
None
10.1.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<date
and time string>: 642Hstring format for date/time is: "yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ss"
643HValid years are 00 (for 2000) to 99
(for 2099). The seconds field is not
mandatory. Default date/time is "00/01/01,00:00:00"
(January 1st, 2000
/midnight).
10.1.4.
Parameter Storage
64HThe <date and time string> parameter is stored without
using AT&W command. If no back-up power
supply is connected
to the RTC pin, the date and time will be restored to the last value set with
+CCLK when the
embedded module is power cycled.
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Time
Management Commands
Clock
Management +CCLK
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 223
10.1.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
645HAT+CCLK="00/06/09,17:33:00"
646HNote: Set date to June 9th, 2000,
and time to 5:33 pm
OK
Note: Date/Time stored
647HAT+CCLK="00/13/13,12:00:00"
Note: Incorrect month entered
+CME ERROR: 3
AT+CCLK?
Note: Get current date and time
648H+CCLK: "00/06/09,17:34:23"
OK
649HNote: Current date is June
9th, 2000 current time is
5:34:23 pm
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Time
Management Commands
Alarm
Management +CALA
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 224
10.2.
Alarm Management +CALA
10.2.1.
Description
This command is used
to set date/time alarms in the ME. The maximum number of alarms is 16.
Note: The current date/time should be already set
with +CCLK command before using +CALA.
10.2.2.
Syntax
Action command
650HAT+CALA=[<date and time string>][,<index>]
OK
Read command
AT+CALA?
651H+CALA: <date and time string>,<index>
652H[+CALA: <date and time string>,<index>[
]]
OK
Test command
None
Unsolicited response
653H+CALA: <date and time string>,<index>
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Time
Management Commands
Alarm
Management +CALA
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 225
10.2.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<date
and time string>: 654Hstring format for date/time is: "yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ss"
65HValid years are 00 (for 2000) to 99
(for 2099). The seconds field is not
mandatory. Default date/time is "00/01/01,00:00:00"
(January 1st, 2000
/midnight).
<index>:
656Hoffset in the alarm list,
range: 1-16.
10.2.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
10.2.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
657HAT+CALA="00/06/08,15:25"
658HNote: Set an alarm for June
8th, 2000 at 3:25 pm
OK
659HAT+CALA="00/06/09,07:30"
60HNote: Set an alarm for June
9th, 2000 at 7:30 am
OK
AT+CALA?
Note: List all alarms
61H+CALA: "00/06/08,15:25:00",1
62H+CALA: "00/06/09,07:30:00",2
OK
63HNote: Two alarms are set
(index 1, 2)
64H+CALA: "00/06/08,15:25:00",1
Note: An alarm occurs (index 1)
65HAT+CALA="",2
Note: Delete alarm index 2
OK
Note: Alarm index 2 deleted
AT+CALA?
Note: List all alarms
OK
Note: No alarm
AT Commands Interface Guide for
Firmware 7.45
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 226
Index
A/, 21
AT, 20
AT0, 191
ATE, 167
ATI, 39
ATQ, 177
ATV, 179
ATZ, 101
C, 181
CALA, 224
CCLK, 222
CFUN, 92
CGMI, 23
CGMM, 25
CGMR, 37
CGSN, 35
CIND, 151
CLAE, 115
CLAN, 112
CLCK, 216
CMEC, 157
CMEE, 61
CMER, 154
CMUX, 197
CPAS, 147
CPIN, 205
CPIN2, 209
CPINC, 211
CPOF, 90
CPWD, 213
CSCS, 108
CSTA, 118
D, 183
DAC, 124
F, 99
GCAP, 47
ICF, 172
IFC, 175
IPR, 169
S, 185
V, 103
W, 97
W32K, 88
WASR, 132
WBHV, 72
WCCS, 105
WCER, 165
WCFM, 85
WCPS, 128
WCTM, 120
WDEBUG, 122
WDOP, 29
WDWL, 49
WFM, 81
WHCNF, 63
WHWV, 27
WIMEI, 31
WIND, 140
WIPS, 137
WLCK, 219
WMFM, 192
WMSN, 33
WOPEN, 51
WOPENRES, 60
WPCS, 110
WRIM, 187
WRST, 95
WSHS, 149
WSTR, 159
WSVN, 45
WTMR, 161
WUSB, 200
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079
019
February
18, 2011
Volume 2
AT
Commands Interface Guide
for
Firmware 7.45
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 2
Related
Documents
This interface
specification is based on the following recommendations:
[1] ETSI GSM 07.05:
Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2); Use of DTE-DCE
interface for Short
Message Service (SMS) and Cell Broadcast Service (CBS)
[2] ETSI GSM 07.07:
Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2); AT command set for GSM
Mobile Equipment (ME)
[3] ITU-T Recommendation
V.25 ter: Serial asynchronous automatic dialing and control
[4] ETSI GSM 03.40:
Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2); Technical implementation
of the Short Message
Service (SMS) Point-to-Point (PP)
[5] ETSI GSM 03.38:
Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2); Alphabets and
languagespecific
information
[6] ETSI GSM 04.80:
Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2): Mobile radio interface
layer 3, Supplementary
service specification, Formats and coding
[7] 3GPP 05.02: 3rd Generation Partnership Project; Technical Specification Group
GSM/EDGERadio
Access Network;
Multiplexing and multiple access on the radio path 3GPP TS 05.02
V6.9.2 (2001-04)
[8] 3GPP 24.008: Mobile
radio interface Layer 3 specification; Core network protocols; Stage 3
[9] 3GPP TS 11.11
Specification of the Subscriber Identity Module - Mobile Equipment (SIM-ME)
Interface
[10] 3GPP TS 05.08 Radio
subsystem link control
[11] 3GPP TS 23.040
Technical realization of the Short Message Service (SMS);
[12] 3GPP TS 22.042
Network Identity and Time Zone (NITZ) service description; Stage 1
[13] 3GPP TS 51.011
Specification of the Subscriber Identity Module - Mobile Equipment (SIM-ME)
interface
[14] 3GPP TS 27-010
Terminal Equipment to User Equipment (TE-UE) multiplexer protocol
[15] 3GPP 23.014 Support
of Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) signaling
[16] ISO 639 Langages
Codes
[17] 3GPP 27 060 Packet
domain; Mobile Station (MS) supporting Packet Switched services
[18] 3GPP TS 23.038
Alphabets and language-specific information
[19] 3GPP TS 27.005 Use of Data
Terminal Equipment - Data Circuit terminating Equipment (DTEDCE)
interface for Short
Message Service (SMS) and Cell Broadcast Service (CBS)
[20] ETSI GSM 11.14
Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+); Specification of the SIM
Application Toolkit for
the Subscriber Identity Module - Mobile Equipment (SIM - ME) interface
[21] 3GPP TS 23.003
Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+) (GSM); Universal Mobile
Telecommunications System
(UMTS); Numbering, addressing and identification
[22] ETSI GSM 02.24
Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+) (GSM);Description of
Charge Advice Information
(CAI)
[23] ETSI GSM 02.86
Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+) (GSM);Advice of Charge
(AoC) Supplementary
Services - Stage 1
[24] ETSI GSM 02.90
Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+) (GSM);Unstructured
Supplementary Service
Data (USSD) - Stage 1
[25] ETSI GSM 02.85
Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+) (GSM);Closed User
Group (CUG) Supplementary
Services - Stage 1
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 3
AT Commands Interface
Guide for Firmware 7.45
[26] 3GPP 27.007:Digital
cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+) (GSM); Universal Mobile
Telecommunications System
(UMTS);AT command set for 3GPP User Equipment (UE) (Release
1999)
[27] 3GPP
23.107:Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS);QoS Concept and
Architecture (Release
1999)
[28] 3GPP 24.008:
European digital cellular telecommunication system (Phase 2+). Mobile radio
interface layer 3
specification. (Release 1999)
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 4
Contents
Volume
2
11.GSM
NETWORK
COMMANDS............................................................................6
11.1. Signal Quality
+CSQ
.........................................................................................................6
11.2. Network
Registration +CREG
...........................................................................................8
11.3. Cell environment
description +CCED
.............................................................................12
11.4. Sierra Wireless
Multi-band Selection Command +WMBS
..............................................27
11.5. Registration
control +WREGC ........................................................................................30
11.6. Sierra Wireless
Location +WLOC
...................................................................................35
11.7. Sierra Wireless
Scan +WSCAN ......................................................................................39
11.8. Abort command
+WAC....................................................................................................41
11.9. Band Services
command +WUBS ..................................................................................43
11.10. Wireless Sevice
Management +WWSM
.........................................................................46
11.11. Wireless Power
Level +WPOW.......................................................................................48
12.CALL
CONTROL
COMMANDS.........................................................................52
12.1. Dial Command to a
specific number
D............................................................................52
12.2. Direct Dial
Command using phonebook index D
............................................................56
12.3. Direct Dial
Command using a phonebook entry name
D................................................59
12.4. Redial Last Telephone
Number
DL.................................................................................62
12.5. Answer a Call A
...............................................................................................................64
12.6. Hang-Up Command
H.....................................................................................................66
12.7. Sierra Wireless
Hang-up +WATH
...................................................................................68
12.8. Remote
disconnection.....................................................................................................70
12.9. Extended Error
Report +CEER
.......................................................................................71
12.10. Automatic Dialing
with DTR
%Dn....................................................................................73
12.11. Automatic Answer
S0
......................................................................................................75
12.12. Incoming Call
Bearer +CICB...........................................................................................77
12.13. Single Numbering
Scheme +CSNS
................................................................................79
12.14. Service Reporting
Control +CR.......................................................................................81
12.15. Cellular Result
Codes
+CRC...........................................................................................83
13.DATA
COMMANDS ...........................................................................................85
13.1. Using AT Commands
during a data
connection..............................................................85
13.2. Bearer Type
Selection +CBST........................................................................................86
13.3. DTE-DCE Local Rate
Reporting +ILRR
..........................................................................89
13.4. Radio Link
Protocol Parameters +CRLP.........................................................................92
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 5
AT Commands Interface
Guide for Firmware 7.45
13.5. Other Radio Link
Parameters
+DOPT.............................................................................94
13.6. Select Mode
+FCLASS
...................................................................................................96
13.7. Select Data
Compression
%C.........................................................................................98
13.8. V42 Bis Data
Compression
+DS...................................................................................100
13.9. V42 Bis Data
Compression Report
+DR.......................................................................102
13.10. Select Data Error
Correcting Mode \N
..........................................................................104
14.GPRS
COMMANDS
.........................................................................................106
14.1. GPRS Mobile
Station Class +CGCLASS......................................................................106
14.2. GPRS parameters
customization: +WGPRS
................................................................108
14.3. Define PDP Context
+CGDCONT.................................................................................118
14.4. GPRS Attach or
Detach
+CGATT.................................................................................121
14.5. PDP Context
Activate or Deactivate
+CGACT..............................................................123
14.6. Request GPRS IP
Service
D.........................................................................................125
14.7. Enter Data State
+CGDATA..........................................................................................127
14.8. GPRS Hang-Up
Command
GH.....................................................................................129
14.9. Network requested
PDP context
activation...................................................................130
14.10. Manual Response
to a Network Request for PDP Manual Context Activation
+CGANS
......................................................................................................................................131
14.11. Automatic
Response to a Network Request for PDP Context Activation +CGAUTO
..
.......................................................................................................................................133
14.12. Quality of
Service Profile (Minimum acceptable) +CGQMIN ........................................135
14.13. Quality of
Service Profile (Requested)
+CGQREQ.......................................................140
14.14. PDP Context
Modify +CGCMOD
..................................................................................145
14.15. GPRS network
registration status
+CGREG.................................................................147
14.16. GPRS Event
reporting +CGEREP
................................................................................150
14.17. Select Service
for MO SMS Messages
+CGSMS.........................................................153
14.18. Show PDP Address
+CGPADDR..................................................................................155
14.19. GSM/GPRS Tx Burst
Indication +WTBI........................................................................157
14.20. 3G Quality of
Service Profile (Requested)
+CGEQREQ...............................................160
14.21. 3G Quality of
Service Profile (Minimum acceptable) +CGEQMIN................................169
14.22. 3G Quality of
Service Profile (Negotiated)
+CGEQNEG...............................................177
14.23. Authentication
Protocol
AT+WPPP...............................................................................182
15.PLMN
COMMANDS
.........................................................................................185
15.1. Selection of
Preferred PLMN list
+CPLS.......................................................................185
15.2. Operator Selection
+COPS...........................................................................................188
15.3. Preferred Operator
List
+CPOL.....................................................................................192
15.4. Operator List
Management +WOLM
.............................................................................196
15.5. Read Operator Name
+WOPN......................................................................................199
15.6. Read Operator Name
+COPN ......................................................................................203
15.7. Automatic Time
Zone Update
+CTZU...........................................................................205
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 6
11. GSM
Network Commands
11.1.
Signal Quality +CSQ
11.1.1.
Description
This command is used
to read the received signal strength indication and the channel bit error rate
with or without a
SIM card inserted.
11.1.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CSQ
+CSQ: <rssi>,<ber>
OK
Read command
None
Test command
None
11.1.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<rssi>:
received signal strength
0 -113 dBm or less
1 -111 dBm
2 to 30 -109 to 53 dBm
31 -51dBm or greater
99 not known or not
detectable
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GSM
Network Commands
Signal
Quality +CSQ
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 7
<ber>:
channel bit error rate
0
7 as RXQUAL values in
the table GSM 05.08 [10]
99 not known or not
detectable
11.1.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
11.1.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CSQ +CSQ: 17,1
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GSM
Network Commands
Network
Registration +CREG
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 8
11.2.
Network Registration +CREG
11.2.1.
Description
This command is used
by the application to check the registration status of the product.
11.2.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CREG=<mode>
OK
<stat≠3>
: Nominal case
Read command
AT+CREG?
+CREG:
<mode>,<stat>[,<lac>,<cid>[,<AcT>]]
OK
<stat=3>:
Specific case
Read command
AT+CREG?
+CREG:
<mode>,<stat>[,<rejectCause>]
OK
Test command
AT+CREG=?
+CREG: (list of supported
<mode>s)
OK
<stat≠3>:
Nominal case
Unsolicited response
+CREG:
<stat>[,<lac>,<cid>[,<AcT>]]
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GSM
Network Commands
Network
Registration +CREG
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 9
<stat=3>
Specific case
Unsolicited response
+CREG:
<stat>[,<rejectCause>]
11.2.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mode>:
request operation
0 disable network
registration unsolicited result code (default value)
1 enable network
registration code result code +CREG: <stat>
2 enable network
registration and location information unsolicited result code
+CREG:
<stat>,<lac>,<ci>,<AcT> if there is a change of network
cell
<stat>:
network registration state
For <stat> = 1 or 5
(i.e the embedded module is registered on a network) the next
parameter couple is
returned if <mode> = 2
For <stat> = 3
(i.e. the network registration is denied) and if the customer application
has enabled, the denied
network registration cause with the +WBHV command, only
the <rejectCause>
parameter is returned with the meaning as explained in
<rejectCause> mode
0 not registered, ME is
not currently searching for a new operator
1 registered, home
network
2 not registered, ME
currently searching for a new operator
3 registration denied
4 unknown
5 registered, roaming
<lac>:
location area code
string type; two byte
location area code in hexadecimal format (e.g. "00C3" equals
195 in decimal)
<ci>:
cell ID
string type ; four byte
UTRAN/GERAN cell ID in hexadecimal format
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GSM
Network Commands
Network
Registration +CREG
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 10
<AcT>
access technology of the registered network
0 GSM
2 UTRAN
<rejectCause>
network registration denied cause
0 Illegal MS
1 Illegal ME
2 IMSI Unknown
3 Bad network
authentication
11.2.4.
Parameter Storage
The <mode>
parameter is stored in EPROM using AT&W command. The default value can be
restored using
AT&F.
11.2.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CREG? +CREG:
<mode>,<stat>
OK
AT+CREG=0
Note:
Disable network registration unsolicited result code
OK
Note:
Command valid
AT+CREG=1
Note:
Enable network registration
OK
Note:
Command valid
AT+CREG=2
Note:
Enable network registration unsolicited result code
registration
OK
Note:
Command valid
AT+CREG=? +CREG: (0-2)
OK
Note:
0,1,2 <mode> values are supported
AT+CREG?
Note:
Get the CREG status
+CREG:
2,1,"0006","00007D9A",0
OK
Note:
The embedded module is registered on the home
network
with the lac=0006 and the cell ID = 7D9A and
access
technology=0
+CREG: 3
Note:
The network indicates that the registration is denied
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GSM
Network Commands
Network
Registration +CREG
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 11
Command
Responses
AT+WBHV=5,1
Note:
Activate the mode to have the cause of the network reject
OK
AT+CREG?
Note:
Get the CREG status
+CREG:
2,1,"0006","00007D9A",0
OK
Note:
The embedded module is registered on the home
network
with the lac=0006 and the cell ID = 7D9A and
access
technology=0
+CREG: 3,1
Note:
The network indicates that the registration is denied
for an
Illegal ME reason.
11.2.6.
Notes
When the network
registration denied cause indication is enabled with the +WBHV command, the
<rejectCause>
parameter is used to return the network reject cause when the <stat>
parameter is
equal to 3. If the
enhanced mode is not enabled (with the +WBHV command), the <stat>
parameter
contains 3 to
indicate that the network registration is denied but without
<rejectCause> parameter. For
other <stat>
value, the nominal syntax is used.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GSM
Network Commands
Cell
environment description +CCED
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 12
11.3.
Cell environment description +CCED
11.3.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command retrieves the parameters of the main cell and of up to six
neighboring cells
for GSM or sixty-four neighboring cells for UTRA.
There are two
possible methods to provide these cell parameters:
On
request by the application or
Automatically
by the product every 5 seconds.
Automatic mode is
not supported during registration.
11.3.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CCED=<mode>[,<requested
dump>[,<CsqStep>]][,<Extend>]
[+CSQ: <rssi>,<ber>]
[+CCED:
[<AcT>][[,]<Main Cell dump>][,<GSM Neighbor 1 dump>[,<GSM
Neighbor 2
dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 3
dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 4 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 5 dump>[,<GSM
Neighbor 6
dump>]]]]]][[,]<Main Cell TA>][[,]<Neighbor 1
TA>][[,]<Neighbor 2
TA>][[,]<Neighbor 3
TA>][[,]<Neighbor 4 TA>][[,]<Neighbor 5 TA>][[,]<Neighbor 6
TA>]][,<UTRAN Neighbor 1
dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 2 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 3
dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 4
dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 5 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 6
dump>[,
]]]]]]][,<Active
Set 1 dump>[,<Active Set 2 dump>[,<Active Set 3
dump>[,<Active Set 4
dump>[,<Active Set 5 dump>[,<Active Set 6
dump>]]]]]]][,<MeasActiv
bitmap>]
OK
Read command
None
Test command
None
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GSM
Network Commands
Cell
environment description +CCED
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 13
Unsolicited response
[+CSQ: <rssi>,<ber>]
[+CCED:
[<AcT>][[,]<Main Cell dump>][,<GSM Neighbor 1 dump>[,<GSM
Neighbor 2
dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 3
dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 4 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 5 dump>[,<GSM
Neighbor 6
dump>]]]]]][[,]<Main Cell TA>]][,<UTRAN Neighbor 1
dump>[,<UTRAN
Neighbor 2 dump>[,<UTRAN
Neighbor 3 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 4 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor
5 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 6
dump>[,
]]]]]]][,<Active Set 1 dump>[,<Active Set 2
dump>[,<Active Set 3
dump>[,<Active Set 4 dump>[,<Active Set 5 dump>[,<Active Set
6
dump>]]]]]]][,<MeasActiv
bitmap>]
11.3.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mode>:
requested operation
0 one shot requested
the requested dump is
returned as intermediate response
1 automatic shots
requested
the requested dump is
returned by the embedded module as unsolicited response
2 stop automatic shots
<requested
dump>: requested cell parameter
If omitted, the last value
used for a CCED request is used, or 239 (if the command has
not been previously used)
1 Main Cell only
2G products:
+CCED: <Main Cell
dump>
3G products:
+CCED:
<AcT>,<Main Cell dump>
2 GSM Neighbors 1 to 6
2G products:
+CCED: <GSM Neighbor 1
dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 2 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 3
dump>[,<GSM
Neighbor 4 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 5 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 6
dump>]]]]]
3G products:
+CCED:
<AcT>,<GSM Neighbor 1 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 2 dump>[,<GSM
Neighbor 3
dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 4 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 5 dump>[,<GSM
Neighbor 6 dump>]]]]]
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GSM
Network Commands
Cell
environment description +CCED
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 14
3 Main Cell then GSM
Neighbors 1 to 6
2G products:
+CCED: <Main Cell dump>,<GSM
Neighbor 1 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 2
dump>[,<GSM
Neighbor 3 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 4 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 5
dump>[,<Neighbor 6
dump>]]]]]
3G products:
+CCED:
<AcT>,<Main Cell dump>,<GSM Neighbor 1 dump>[,<GSM
Neighbor 2
dump>[,<GSM
Neighbor 3 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 4 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 5
dump>[,<Neighbor 6
dump>]]]]]
4 Main Cell Timing
Advance
2G products:
+CCED: <Main Cell
TA>
3G products:
+CCED:
<AcT>[,<Main Cell TA>]
5 Main Cell, then Timing
Advance
2G products:
+CCED: <Main Cell
dump>[,<Main Cell TA>]
3G products:
+CCED:
<AcT>,<Main Cell dump>[,<Main Cell TA>]
6 GSM Neighbors 1 to 6,
then Timing Advance
2G products:
+CCED: <GSM Neighbor 1
dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 2 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 3
dump>[,<GSM
Neighbor 4 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 5 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 6
dump>]]]]][,<Main
Cell TA>]
3G products:
+CCED:
<AcT>,<GSM Neighbor 1 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 2 dump>[,<GSM
Neighbor 3
dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 4 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 5 dump>[,<GSM
Neighbor 6
dump>]]]]][,<Main Cell TA>]
7 +CCED response: Main
Cell, then GSM Neighbors 1 to 6, then Timing Advance
2G products:
+CCED: [<Main Cell
dump>][[,]<GSM Neighbor 1 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 2
dump>[,<GSM
Neighbor 3 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 4 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 5
dump>[,<GSM
Neighbor 6 dump>]]]]]][,<Main Cell TA>]
3G products:
+CCED: <AcT>,
[<Main Cell dump>][,<GSM Neighbor 1 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 2
dump>[,<GSM
Neighbor 3 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 4 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 5
dump>[,<GSM
Neighbor 6 dump>]]]]]][,<Main Cell TA>]
8 Main Cell RSSI
indications
+CSQ:
<rssi>,<ber>
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GSM
Network Commands
Cell
environment description +CCED
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 15
9 Main Cell only
2G products:
+CSQ:
<rssi>,<ber>
+CCED: <Main Cell
dump>
3G products:
+CSQ:
<rssi>,<ber>
+CCED: <AcT>,<Main
Cell dump>
10 GSM Neighbors 1 to 6
2G products:
+CSQ:
<rssi>,<ber>
+CCED: <GSM Neighbor 1
dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 2 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 3
dump>[,<GSM
Neighbor 4 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 5 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 6
dump>]]]]]
3G products:
+CSQ:
<rssi>,<ber>
+CCED:
<AcT>,<GSM Neighbor 1 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 2 dump>[,<GSM
Neighbor 3
dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 4 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 5 dump>[,<GSM
Neighbor 6 dump>]]]]]
11 Main Cell, then
Neighbors 1 to 6
2G products:
+CSQ:
<rssi>,<ber>
+CCED: [<Main Cell
dump>][[,]<GSM Neighbor 1 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 2
dump>[,<GSM
Neighbor 3 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 4 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 5
dump>[,<GSM
Neighbor 6 dump>]]]]]]
3G products:
+CSQ:
<rssi>,<ber>
+CCED:
<AcT>,[<Main Cell dump>][,<GSM Neighbor 1 dump>[,<GSM
Neighbor 2
dump>[,<GSM Neighbor
3 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 4 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 5
dump>[,<GSM
Neighbor 6 dump>]]]]]]
12 Timing Advance only
2G products:
+CSQ:
<rssi>,<ber>
+CCED: <Main Cell
TA>
3G products:
+CSQ:
<rssi>,<ber>
+CCED:
<AcT>,<Main Cell TA>
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GSM
Network Commands
Cell
environment description +CCED
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 16
13 Main Cell, then Timing
Advance
2G products:
+CSQ:
<rssi>,<ber>
+CCED: <Main Cell
dump>[,<Main Cell TA>]
3G products:
+CSQ:
<rssi>,<ber>
+CCED:
<AcT>,<Main Cell dump>[,<Main Cell TA>]
14 GSM Neighbors 1 to 6,
then Timing Advance
2G products:
+CSQ:
<rssi>,<ber>
+CCED: <GSM Neighbor 1
dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 2 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 3
dump>[,<GSM
Neighbor 4 dump>],<GSM Neighbor 5 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 6
dump>]]]]][,<Main
Cell TA>]
3G products:
+CSQ:
<rssi>,<ber>
+CCED:
<AcT>,<GSM Neighbor 1 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 2 dump>[,<GSM
Neighbor 3
dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 4 dump>],<GSM Neighbor 5 dump>[,<GSM
Neighbor 6
dump>]]]]][,<Main Cell TA>]
15 Main Cell, then
Neighbors 1 to 6, then Timing Advance
2G products:
+CSQ:
<rssi>,<ber>
+CCED: [<Main Cell
dump>][[,]<GSM Neighbor 1 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 2
dump>[,<GSM
Neighbor 3 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 4 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 5
dump>[,<GSM
Neighbor 6 dump>]]]]]][,<Main Cell TA>]
3G products:
+CSQ:
<rssi>,<ber>
+CCED:
<AcT>,[<Main Cell dump>][,<GSM Neighbor 1 dump>[,<GSM
Neighbor 2
dump>[,<GSM
Neighbor 3 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 4 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 5
dump>[,<GSM
Neighbor 6 dump>]]]]]][,<Main Cell TA>]
16 <requested dump>
1 + <requested dump> 2 + <requested dump> 4 + Neighbor1 to
Neighbor6 Timing Advance
(only available for mode= 0)
Neighbor1 to Neighbor6
Timing Advance are only available in IDLE mode.
2G products:
+CCED: [<Main Cell
dump>][[,]<GSM Neighbor 1 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 2
dump>[,<GSM
Neighbor 3 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 4 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 5
dump>[,<GSM
Neighbor 6 dump>]]]]]][,<Main Cell TA>][,<Neighbor 1
TA>][,<Neighbor
2TA>][,<Neighbor 3 TA>][,<Neighbor 4 TA>][,<Neighbor 5
TA>][,<Neighbor 6
TA>]
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GSM
Network Commands
Cell
environment description +CCED
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 17
32 UTRAN Neighbor 1 to x
(3G products only)
+CCED:
<AcT>,<UTRAN Neighbor 1 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 2 dump>[,<UTRAN
Neighbor 3
dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 4 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 5
dump>[,<UTRAN
Neighbor 6 dump>[,
]]]]]]
33 Main Cell then UTRAN
Neighbor 1 to x (3G products only)
+CCED:
<AcT>,<Main Cell dump>,<UTRAN Neighbor 1 dump>[,<UTRAN
Neighbor
2 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor
3 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 4 dump>[,<UTRAN
Neighbor 5
dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 6 dump>[,
]]]]]]
34 GSM Neighbors 1 to 6
then UTRAN Neighbor 1 to x (3G products only)
+CCED:
<AcT>,<GSM Neighbor 1 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 2 dump>[,<GSM
Neighbor 3
dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 4 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 5 dump>[,<GSM
Neighbor 6
dump>]]]]],<UTRAN Neighbor 1 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 2
dump>[,<UTRAN
Neighbor 3 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 4 dump>[,<UTRAN
Neighbor 5
dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 6 dump>[,
]]]]]]
35 Main Cell then GSM
Neighbors 1 to 6 then UTRAN Neighbor 1 to x (3G products
only)
+CCED:
<AcT>,<Main Cell dump>,<GSM Neighbor 1 dump>[,<GSM
Neighbor 2
dump>[,<GSM
Neighbor 3 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 4 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 5
dump>[,<GSM
Neighbor 6 dump>]]]]],<UTRAN Neighbor 1 dump>[,<UTRAN
Neighbor 2
dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 3 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 4
dump>[,<UTRAN
Neighbor 5 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 6 dump>[,
]]]]]]
64 Active Set 1 to 6 (3G
products only)
+CCED:
<AcT>,<Active Set 1 dump> [,<Active Set 2 dump>[,<Active
Set 3
dump>[,<Active Set
4 dump>[,<Active Set 5 dump>[,<Active Set 6 dump>]]]]]
65 Main Cell then Active
Set 1 to 6 (3G products only)
+CCED:
<AcT>,<Main Cell dump>,<Active Set 1 dump>[,<Active Set 2
dump>[,<Active Set
3 dump>[,<Active Set 4 dump>[,<Active Set 5 dump>[,<Active
Set 6 dump>]]]]]
97 Main Cell then UTRAN
Neighbors 1 to x then Active Set 1 to 6 (3G products only)
+CCED:
<AcT>,<Main Cell dump>,<UTRAN Neighbor 1 dump>[,<UTRAN
Neighbor
2 dump>[,<UTRAN
Neighbor 3 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 4 dump>[,<UTRAN
Neighbor 5 dump>[,<UTRAN
Neighbor 6 dump>[,
]]]]]],<Active Set 1
dump>[,<Active Set
2 dump>[,<Active Set 3 dump>[,<Active Set 4 dump>[,<Active
Set 5
dump>[,<Active Set 6 dump>]]]]]
99 Main Cell then GSM
Neighbors 1 to 6 then UTRAN Neighbors 1 to x then Active Set
1 to 6 (3G products only)
+CCED:
<AcT>,<Main Cell dump>,<GSM Neighbor 1 dump>[,<GSM
Neighbor 2
dump>[,<GSM
Neighbor 3 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 4 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 5
dump>[,<GSM
Neighbor 6 dump>]]]]],<UTRAN Neighbor 1 dump>[,<UTRAN
Neighbor 2
dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 3 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 4
dump>[,<UTRAN
Neighbor 5 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 6 dump>[,
]]]]]],<Active
Set 1
dump>[,<Active Set 2 dump>[,<Active Set 3 dump>[,<Active Set
4
dump>[,<Active Set
5 dump>[,<Active Set 6 dump>]]]]]
128 Measurement
Activities (3G products only)
+CCED:
<AcT>,<MeasActiv bitmap>
129 Main Cell then
Measurement Activities
+CCED:
<AcT>,<Main Cell dump>,<MeasActiv bitmap>
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GSM
Network Commands
Cell
environment description +CCED
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 18
161 Main Cell then UTRAN
Neighbors 1 to x then Measurement Activities (3G products
only)
+CCED:
<AcT>,<UTRAN Neighbor 1 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 2
dump>[,<UTRAN
Neighbor 3
dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 4 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 5
dump>[,<UTRAN
Neighbor 6 dump>[,
]]]]]],<Main Cell dump>,<MeasActiv bitmap>
193 Main Cell then Active
Set 1 to 6 then Measurement Activities (3G products only)
+CCED:
<AcT>,<Main Cell dump>,<Active Set 1 dump>[,<Active Set 2
dump>[,<Active Set
3 dump>[,<Active Set 4 dump>[,<Active Set 5 dump>[,<Active
Set 6
dump>]]]]],<MeasActiv bitmap>
225 Main Cell then UTRAN
Neighbors 1 to x then Active Set 1 to 6 then Measurement
Activities (3G products
only)
+CCED:
<AcT>,<Main Cell dump>,<UTRAN Neighbor 1 dump>[,<UTRAN
Neighbor
2 dump>[,<UTRAN
Neighbor 3 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 4 dump>[,<UTRAN
Neighbor 5
dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 6 dump>[,
]]]]]],<Active Set 1
dump>[,<Active Set
2 dump>[,<Active Set 3 dump>[,<Active Set 4 dump>[,<Active
Set 5
dump>[,<Active Set 6 dump>]]]]],<MeasActiv bitmap>
239 Main Cell then GSM
Neighbor 1 to 6 then Timing Advance then UTRAN Neighbors 1
to x then Active Set 1 to
6 then Measurement Activities (3G products only)
+CSQ:
<rssi>,<ber>
+CCED:
<AcT>,<Main Cell dump>,<GSM Neighbor 1 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor
2
dump>[,<GSM
Neighbor 3 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 4 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 5
dump>[,<GSM
Neighbor 6 dump>]]]]],[<Main Cell TA>],<UTRAN Neighbor 1
dump>[,<UTRAN
Neighbor 2 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 3 dump>[,<UTRAN
Neighbor 4
dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 5 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 6
dump>[,
]]]]]],<Active
Set 1 dump>[,<Active Set 2 dump>[,<Active Set 3
dump>[,<Active Set
4 dump>[,<Active Set 5 dump>[,<Active Set 6
dump>]]]]],<MeasActiv
bitmap>
<CsqStep>:
step required for the RSSI indications between two +CSQ
unsolicited responses
range: 1-5 (default
value: 1)
If not indicated, the
previous value is taken into account
<Extend>
This parameter (not mandatory) specify if the requested dump
must be extended or not
0 dump not extended
(default value)
1 dump extended
Note: This parameter will
be ignored when <AcT> = 2
<AcT>:
access technology of the registered network
0 GSM
2 UTRAN
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GSM
Network Commands
Cell
environment description +CCED
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 19
<Main
Cell dump>: This parameter gathers the following parameters for the Main
Cell parameters.
For <AcT>=0
Not extended dump
(<Extend> equals 0):
[<MCC>],[<MNC>],[<LAC>][,<CI>],[<BSIC>],[<BCCH
Freq>],[<RxLev>],[<RxLev
Full>],[<RxLev
Sub>],[<RxQual>],[<RxQual Full>],[<RxQual Sub>],[<Idle
TS>]
Extended dump
(<Extend> equals 1):
[<MCC>],[<MNC>],[<LAC>][,<CI>],[<BSIC>],[<BCCH
Freq>],[<RxLev>],[<RxLev
Full>],[<RxLev
Sub>],[<RxQual>],[<RxQual Full>],[<RxQual Sub>],[<Idle
TS>],[<C1>],[<C2>],[<MsTxPwrMaxCcch>]
For <AcT>=2
[<MCC>],[<MNC>],[<LAC>][,<CI>],[<RSCP>],[<EcNo>],
[<Scrambling
Code>],[<UARFCN>],[<R>],[<R2>],[<H>],
[<Squal>],[<Srxlev>]
<GSM
Neighbor x
dump>:
This parameter gathers
the following parameters for the Neighbor Cells parameters.
Not extended dump
(<Extend> equals 0):
[<MCC>],[<MNC>],[<LAC>][,<CI>],[<BSIC>],[<BCCH
Freq>],[<RxLev>],[<R>],[<R2>],[<H>],
[<Squal>],[<Srxlev>]
Extended dump
(<Extend> equals 1):
[<MCC>],[<MNC>],[<LAC>][,<CI>],[<BSIC>],[<BCCH
Freq>],[<RxLev>],[<C1>],[<C2>],[<MsTxPwrMaxCcch>],[<R>],[<R2>],
[<H>],
[<Squal>],[<Srxlev>]
x is between 1 and 6
<UTRAN
Neighbor x
dump>:
This parameter gathers
the following parameters for the UTRAN Neighbor Cells
parameters.
[<MCC>],[<MNC>],[<RSCP>],[<EcNo>],[<Scrambling
Code>],[<UARFCN>],[<R>],[<R2>],[<H>][<Squal>],
[<Srxlev>]
x is a set of candidate
cells for cell reselection (between 1 to 64)
<Neighbor
x TA>: Neighbor cell Timing Advance ( for 2G products only)
neighbors timing Advance
are not available in dedicated mode.
x is between 1 and 6
<MCC>:
Mobile Country Code
3 digits
<MNC>:
Mobile Network Code
2 or 3 digits
<LAC>:
Location Area Code
string type; two byte
location area code in hexadecimal format (e.g. 00C3 equals 195 in
decimal)
<CI>
: Cell Id
string type
Two bytes in hexadecimal
format for 2G products.
Four bytes in hexadecimal
format for 3G products.
If the Cell Id is not
available, this parameter is omitted.
<BSIC>:
Base Station Identity Code
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GSM
Network Commands
Cell
environment description +CCED
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 20
<BCCH
Freq>: Broadcast Control CHannel Freq absolute
The range depends of the
selected band:
P900 range: 1-124
E900 range: 1-124,
975-1023 and 0 for 1024
850 range: 128-251
DCS1800 range: 512-885
PCS1900 range:
512-810 for the
Q26Extreme or for the other embedded modules if it is not configured in
autoquadband (see the +WMBS command
description)
1536-1834 for embedded
modules other than Q26Extreme and if it is configured in
autoquadband (see +WMBS command
description). This is made to distinguish DCS and
PCS absolute frequency in
autoquadband.
<RxLev>:
RSSI level on BCCH channel, in idle mode. This parameter is
empty in dedicated mode.
0 -110 dBm or less
1 -110 dBm to -109 dBm
2 -109 dBm to -108 dBm
3-63 -108 dBm to -49 dBm
62 -49 dBm to -48 dBm
63 -48 dBm and greater
<RxLev
Full>: RSSI level on all TCH channel, in dedicated mode
<RxLev
Sub>: RSSI level on a subset of TCH channel, in dedicated mode
<RxQual>:
signal quality on BCCH channel, in idle mode
<RxQual
Full>: signal quality on all TCH channel, in dedicated mode
<RxQual
Sub>: signal quality on a subset of TCH channel, in dedicated mode
<Idle
TS>: Time Slot
<C1>:
Cell selection criteria. Only available in IDLE mode.
<C2>:
GSM cell reselection criteria. Only available in IDLE mode.
MsTxPwrMaxCcch
Power control level. The maximum TX power level, an MS may use
when accessing on a
Control Channel CCH.
Range: 0 to 31
Only available in IDLE
mode.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GSM
Network Commands
Cell
environment description +CCED
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 21
<RSCP>:
Received Signal Code Power
The power level in one
chip
<EcNo>:
Ratio of energy per modulating bit to the noise spectral density
This is the cell quality
and is equal to RSCP/RSSI
<Scrambling
code>: The downlink scrambling code of the serving cell for 3G network
only
0-511 Scrambling code of
the serving cell
Integer type
<UARFCN>:
UTRA absolute radio Frequency channel number
<R>:
ranking criteria for all types of cells (UTRA or GSM, based on
RSCP (3G cells) or RSSI
(2G cells))
only significant when
<AcT> = 2
<R2>:
ranking criteria for UTRA cells only (based on EcNo)
only significant when
<AcT> = 2
<H>:
ranking criteria when HCS is used.
only significant when
<AcT> = 2
<Squal>:
S criteria - Cell selection quality value (dB)
only significant when
<AcT> = 2
<Srxlev>:
S criteria Cell selection RX level value (dB)
only significant when
<AcT> = 2
<Active
Set x
dump>:
In dedicated mode, the
set of radio links assigned to the UE such that there will be no
more breaks of radio link
when the UE is moving from cell to cell (soft handover). This
parameter gathers the
following parameters for the Active Set parameters:
<Scrambling
Code>,<Rscp>
x is between 1 and 6
<MeasActiv
bitmap>:
This parameter gathers
the Intra frequencies, Inter frequencies, and GSM measurement
activities (bitwise)
Bit 0 0 GSM measurement
inactive (OFF)
1 GSM measurement active
(ON)
Bit 1 0 UTRAN Intra
frequencies measurement inactive (OFF)
1 UTRAN Intra frequencies
measurement active (ON)
Bit 2 0 UTRAN Inter
frequencies measurement inactive (OFF)
1 UTRAN Inter frequencies
measurement active (ON)
<Main
Cell TA>: Main Cell Timing Advance (significant only when <AcT>=0)
<rssi>:
received signal strength
0 -113 dBm or less
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GSM
Network Commands
Cell
environment description +CCED
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 22
1 -111 dBm
2 to 30 -109 to 53 dBm
31 -51dBm or greater
99 not known or not
detectable
<ber>:
channel bit error rate
This parameter is not
evaluated using +CCED command.
99 not known or not
detectable
Note:
For more details about parameters, please refer to 3GPP 05.02 Radio
Transmission and Reception
[7].
11.3.4.
Parameter Storage
None
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GSM
Network Commands
Cell
environment description +CCED
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 23
11.3.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CCED=0,3
Note:
Request main cell and neighbors 1 to 6
For 2G products
+CCED:
454,06,008c,6704,10,62,48,,,0,,,0,454,06,008c,,4,93,15
,454,06,008c,,3,670,11,454,06,008c,,2,691,8,454,06,008
c,7e1b,34,665,6,454,06,008c,,8,700,9,454,06,008c,62cd,
13,90,8
OK
For 3G products
+CCED: 2,454,06,20d0,00048329,-95,-
10,211,10737,0,0,0,0,0,454,06,0000,,5,26112,0,454,06,0
000,,10,15872,0,454,06,0000,,8,48130,0,454,06,0000,,8,
27392,0,454,06,0000,,2,28160,0,454,06,0000,,1,29696,0,
454,06,0000,,2,42498,0
OK
AT+CCED=0
Note:
Repeat last request
For 2G products
at+cced=0,3
+CCED:
454,06,008c,6704,10,62,48,,,0,,,0,454,06,008c,,4,93,15
,454,06,008c,,3,670,11,454,06,008c,,2,691,8,454,06,008
c,7e1b,34,665,6,454,06,008c,,8,700,9,454,06,008c,62cd,
13,90,8
OK
For 3G products
+CCED:
2,454,06,20d0,00048329,-95,-
10,211,10737,0,0,0,0,0,454,06,0000,,5,26112,0,454,06,0
000,,10,15872,0,454,06,0000,,8,48130,0,454,06,0000,,8,
27392,0,454,06,0000,,2,28160,0,454,06,0000,,1,29696,0,
454,06,0000,,2,42498,0
OK
AT+CCED=0,1
Note:
Only main cell request
For 2G products
+CCED: 454,06,008c,6704,10,62,46,,,0,,,0
OK
For 3G products
+CCED:
2,454,06,20d0,00048329,-96,-
6,211,10737,0,0,0,0,0
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GSM
Network Commands
Cell
environment description +CCED
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 24
Command
Responses
AT+CCED=0,1,,1
Note:
Only main cell request
For 2G products
+CCED:
454,06,008c,6704,10,62,45,,,0,,,0,45,45,5
OK
For 3G products
+CCED:
2,454,06,20d0,00048329,-97,-
10,211,10737,0,0,0,0,0
OK
AT+CCED=0,1
Note:
Call in progress:RXLev and RXQual are
empty,
RxLewFull, RxLevSub, RxQualFull and
RxQualSub
have data.
For 2G products
+CCED:
454,06,008c,6704,10,62,,41,42,,0,0,
OK
For 3G products
+CCED:
2,000,000,0000,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0
OK
Note:
For 3G products, the response of +CCED on main cell is invalid in dedicated
mode
AT+CCED=1,8,1
Note:
Request +CSQ response when the
<rssi>
is changed (step = 1)
For 2G products
OK
+CSQ: 25,99
+CSQ: 26,99
+CSQ: 25,99
+CSQ: 26,99
+CSQ: 25,99
For 3G products
OK
+CSQ: 8,99
+CSQ: 6,99
+CSQ: 8,99
+CSQ: 6,99
+CSQ: 8,99
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GSM
Network Commands
Cell
environment description +CCED
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 25
Command
Responses
AT+CCED=0,16
Note:
idle mode
For 2G products
+CCED:
454,06,008c,6704,10,62,,,,255,,,0,454,06,008c,65eb,4,9
3,15,454,06,008c,,3,670,11,454,06,008c,8503,2,691,9,45
4,06,008c,8504,8,700,9,2,2,2,2,2
OK
For 3G products
+CCED:
2,454,06,20d0,00048329,-98,-
11,211,10737,0,0,0,0,0,454,06,0000,,5,26112,0,454,06,0
000,,10,15872,0,454,06,0000,,8,48130,0,454,06,0000,,8,
27392,0,454,06,0000,,2,28160,0,454,06,0000,,1,29696,0,
454,06,0000,,2,42498,0,
OK
AT+CCED=0,16
Note:
Dedicated mode
For 2G products
+CCED:
454,06,008c,6704,10,62,,40,39,,0,0,,,,,,4,93,15,,,,,8,
700,10,,,,,3,670,11,,,,,2,691,8,1,,,,
OK
For 3G products
+CCED:
2,000,000,0000,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,,,,,5,26112,0,0,0,0,0
,0,,,,10,15872,0,0,0,0,0,0,,,,8,48130,0,0,0,0,0,0,,,,8
,27392,0,0,0,0,0,0,,,,2,28160,0,0,0,0,0,0,,,,1,29696,0
,0,0,0,0,0,,,,2,42498,0,0,0,0,0,0
OK
Note: For
3G products, the response of +CCED on main cell is invalid in dedicated
mode
AT+CCED=0,129
Note:
Request Main Cell then Measurement
Activities
For 2G products
+CME ERROR: 3
For 3G products
+CCED:
2,454,06,20d0,00048329,-97,-
11,211,10737,0,0,0,0,0,0
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GSM
Network Commands
Cell
environment description +CCED
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 26
Command
Responses
AT+CCED=0,3 For 2G products
+CCED:
454,06,008c,6704,10,62,48,,,0,,,0,454,06,008c,,4,93,15
,454,06,008c,,3,670,11,454,06,008c,,2,691,8,454,06,008
c,7e1b,34,665,6,454,06,008c,,8,700,9,454,06,008c,62cd,
13,90,8
OK
For 3G products
+CCED:
0,454,06,008c,00006704,0,15872,48,,,0,,,0,454,06,0000,
,0,23808,22,454,06,008c,,8,48130,18,454,06,008c,,2,458
26,15,454,06,008c,,0,23040,15,454,06,0000,,0,23552,13,
454,06,008c,,3,40450,7
OK
Note:
<Act>=0, the 3G product is registering to GSM (2G) network,
AT+CCED=0,32 For 2G products
+CME ERROR: 3
For 3G products
+CME ERROR: 30
Note:
The 3G product is registering to GSM (2G) network, UTRAN parameters are
not
available.
Note:
Whenever the commands 'AT+CCED=0,15' or 'AT+CCED=0,16' are issued, '+CME ERROR:
30' is
observed.
11.3.6.
Notes
When automatic shots
are selected, +CSQ responses are sent whenever the <rssi> difference
measured by the
product is equal to or greater than the <CsqStep> value. So, the
<rssi> level
between successive
+CSQ responses are equal to or greater than <CsqStep>.
Automatic shots are
supported in idle mode and during communication.
Values of MCC/MNC
are set to 0 in the case of "No service".
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GSM
Network Commands
Sierra
Wireless Multi-band Selection Command +WMBS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 27
11.4.
Sierra Wireless Multi-band Selection
Command
+WMBS
11.4.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command selects the GSM bands on which the embedded module
has to operate. This
command is allowed only if the selected bands are supported (please refer to
+WFM command). The
user can choose if the change is immediate or not:
either
the embedded module has to be reset to take this change into account (this is
the
default case)
or
the GSM stack restarts immediately on the specified band(s). In this mode, the
command
+WMBS is forbidden
during the initialization phase of the embedded module and during calls.
11.4.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WMBS=<Band>[,<Param>]
OK
Read command
AT+WMBS?
+WMBS:
<Band>,<ResetFlag>
OK
Test command
AT+WMBS=?
+WMBS: (list of supported
<Band>s),(list of supported <Param>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GSM
Network Commands
Sierra
Wireless Multi-band Selection Command +WMBS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 28
11.4.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<Band>:
band frequency configuration
0 mono-band mode 850 MHz
1 mono-band mode 900
extended MHz (900E)
2 mono-band mode 1800 MHz
3 mono-band mode 1900 MHz
4 dual-band mode 850/1900
MHz
5 dual-band mode 900E
(extended) / 1800 MHz
6 dual-band mode 900E
(extended) / 1900 MHz
7 quad-band mode 850/900E
(extended)/1800/1900 MHz
<Param>:
type of change
0 the embedded module
will have to be reset to start on specified band(s)
<ResetFlag> is set
to 1
default value if omitted
1 the change is effective
immediately: the GSM stack is restarted with
specified band(s)
<ResetFlag> is set
to 0
this mode is forbidden
while in communication and during embedded module
initialization
<ResetFlag>:
reset flag
0 the feature was not
modified since the last boot of the product
1 the feature has been
modified since the last boot of the product: it has to be
reset in order to take
the modification into account
11.4.4.
Parameter Storage
The <Band>
parameter is stored without using AT&W command.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GSM
Network Commands
Sierra
Wireless Multi-band Selection Command +WMBS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 29
11.4.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WMBS=? +WMBS:
(0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7),(0-1)
OK
Note:
All bands are available
AT+WMBS=0 OK
AT+WMBS? +WMBS: 0,1
OK
Note:
Embedded module has to be reset for change to be effective.
AT+WMBS=1,1 OK
AT+WMBS? +WMBS: 1,0
OK
Note:
Embedded module does not have to be reset for change to be
effective.
AT+WMBS=5,1 OK
Note:
Embedded module does not have to be reset for change to be
effective.
AT+WMBS=7,1 OK
Note:
Launch the autoquadband.
AT+WMBS? +WMBS: 7,0
OK
Note:
Embedded module does not have to be reset for change to be
effective
11.4.6.
Notes
To deactivate the
autoquadband, AT+WMBS=<Band>,<ResetFlag> with <Band> other
than 7 should
be sent to the
embedded module, which is applicable only for products other than Q26Extreme..
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GSM
Network Commands
Registration
control +WREGC
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 30
11.5.
Registration control +WREGC
11.5.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command is used by the application to disable GSM and GPRS
registration and
deregistration procedures on the network If the registration/deregistration procedure
is disabled, the
embedded module does not perform the procedure but considers itself as
attached/detached on
the network. The command +WREGC therefore has no impact on the response
to AT+CREG?.
After the +WREGC
mode is set to 1 (AT+WREGC=1), the embedded module enters the Spy Mode
immediately. During
the Spy Mode, MS is in IMSI detached state, for both GSM and GPRS, but keeps
monitoring serving
cell and all surrounding cells; only emergency call is allowed. Nevertheless,
network registration
can be achieved manually in a very short time (less than 1 second in most of
the
cases) once the Spy
Mode is deactivated by the command AT+WREGC=0.
Note:
This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.
11.5.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WREGC=<mode>
OK
Read command
AT+WREGC?
+WREGC: <mode>
OK
Test command
AT+WREGC=?
+WREGC: (list of supported
<mode>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GSM
Network Commands
Registration
control +WREGC
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 31
11.5.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mode>:
registration control mode
0 all registrations
enabled (default value); Spy Mode is deactivated
1 The Spy mode is
activated (GSM/GPRS registration disabled)
2 power down
deregistration disabled
3 power up registration
and power down deregistration disabled
11.5.4.
Parameter Storage
The <mode>
parameter is stored in EEPROM without using the AT&W command. The default
value
can be restored
using AT&F.
11.5.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WREGC=? +WREGC: (0-3)
OK
AT+WREGC=0
Note:
All registrations enabled
OK
AT+WREGC? +WREGC: 0
OK
Note:
All registrations enabled (Spy Mode deactivated)
AT+WREGC=1 OK
AT+CREG? +CREG: 2
+CREG: 1,2
OK
Note:
Spy Mode is entered immediately (emergency calls only)
AT+COPS=0 OK
AT+CREG? +CREG: 1,2
OK
Note:
Embedded module is not registered as Spy Mode is in
active
AT+WREGC=0 OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GSM
Network Commands
Registration
control +WREGC
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 32
Command
Responses
AT+CREG? +CREG: 1
+CREG: 1,1
OK
Note:
Spy Mode is deactivated immediately (full services are
available)
AT+WREGC=1 OK
+CREG: 2
AT+WGPRS=0,0 OK
AT+CFUN=1 OK
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 1
+CREG: 2
+WIND: 7
+CGREG: 2
+WIND: 4
Note:
Setting GPRS auto attachment is allowed even if Spy
Mode is
activated. But GPRS auto attachment will not be
performed
after restart.
AT+WREGC=0 OK
+CREG: 1
+CGREG: 1
AT+CFUN=1 OK
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 1
+CREG: 2
+WIND: 7
+CREG: 1
+CGREG: 1
+WIND: 4
Note:
When Spy Mode is deactivated, GPRS/GPRS registration
will be
performed immediately.
AT+WREGC=0 OK
AT+CGATT=1 OK
+CGREG: 1
AT+WREGC=1 OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GSM
Network Commands
Registration
control +WREGC
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 33
Command
Responses
AT+CGATT=1 +CGREG: 0
+CREG: 2
+CME ERROR: 148
+CGREG: 2
Note:
When Spy Mode is activated, GPRS attach failed.
AT+CGCLASS? +CGCLASS:
B"
OK
AT+WREGC=0 OK
+CREG: 1
+CGREG: 1
AT+CGCLASS="CG"
OK
+WIND: 8
+CREG: 0
AT+CGCLASS? +CGCLASS:
"CG"
OK
AT+WREGC=1 OK
+CGREG: 0
AT+CGCLASS="B"
OK
+WIND: 7
+CREG: 2
Note:
When Spy Mode is activated, CGCLASS can still be set
but the
embedded module will not perform network registration
according
to the selected CGCLASS.
AT+WREGC=0 OK
+CREG: 1
+CGREG: 1
Note:
Once the Spy Mode is deactivated, CGCLASS change is
performed,
the embedded module, registered in the network
according
to the CGCLASS is selected.
AT+WREGC? +WREGC: 0
OK
AT+WREGC=2 OK
AT+WREGC=1 +CME ERROR: 3
Note:
Spy Mode cannot be activated when the current <mode>
is 2 or
3
AT+WREGC=0 OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GSM
Network Commands
Registration
control +WREGC
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 34
Command
Responses
AT+WREGC=1 OK
+CREG: 2
Note:
Spy Mode is activated.
AT+WREGC=3 +CME ERROR: 3
Note:
<mode> cannot be set to 3 while Spy Mode is activated.
AT+WREGC=0 OK
+CREG: 1
+CGREG: 1
Note:
Spy Mode is deactivated.
AT+WREGC=3 OK
11.5.6.
Notes
Spy Mode has
precedence over other AT commands. When Spy Mode is activated, the AT
commands +WGPRS,
+COPS, +CGATT, and +CGCLASS will not be executed; an error will be
returned from the
embedded module if the operation cannot be performed. To activate the Spy Mode,
<mode> must
undergo the transition from 0 to 1. Similarly, to deactivate the Spy Mode,
<mode>
must undergo the
transition from 1 to 0.
<mode>
transitions Result
0 1, 2, 3
1 0
2 0, 3
3 0, 2
Allowed
1 2, 3
2 1
3 1
Not allowed
When Spy Mode is
activated and AT+WGPRS=0,0 is sent to enable the automatic GPRS attachment,
the latter will not
be performed at the next CPU restart. It will be performed at the next CPU
restart
once the Spy Mode is
deactivated (AT+WREGC=0).
When Spy Mode is
activated and AT command +COPS is sent to change the operator (PLMN)
selection mode, the
embedded module will try to find the home operator or the specified operator
depending on the
selected mode (automatic or manual) and performs GSM registration if found.
Since
Spy Mode is
activated, the registration is unable to perform and an error will be returned.
However,
the operator
selection will be performed once the Spy Mode is deactivated.
When Spy Mode is
activated, sending AT+CGATT=1 for GPRS attachment will not work unless the
Spy Mode is
deactivated.
When Spy Mode is activated
and AT command +CGCLASS is sent to set the GPRS mobile station
class, the operation
will not be performed successfully. However, the new class will be taken into
account once the Spy
Mode is deactivated.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GSM
Network Commands
Sierra
Wireless Location +WLOC
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 35
11.6.
Sierra Wireless Location +WLOC
11.6.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command can be used by the application to retrieve the following
local information:
MCC-MNC, LAC, CI, Network measurement, BCCH channel list, Timing Advance,
date and time.
Two methods exist
for the external application to get these information:
on
request of the application,
periodically
by the embedded module.
The location feature
has to be activated to get information (see +WFM command).
11.6.2.
Syntax
<mode>=0
Action command
AT+WLOC=<mode>
OK
<mode>=1
Action command
AT+WLOC=<mode>
+WLOC:
[<MCC-MNC>,][<LAC>,][<CI>,][<NetMeas>,][<BCCHlist>,][<TA>,][<Date
and Time>]
OK
<mode>=2
Action command
AT+WLOC=<mode>[,<time
period>]
OK
<mode>=3
Action command
AT+WLOC=<mode>[,<requested
dump>]
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GSM
Network Commands
Sierra
Wireless Location +WLOC
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 36
Read command
AT+WLOC?
+WLOC: <status>,<time
period>,<requested dump>
OK
Test command
AT+WLOC=?
OK
Unsollicited response
+WLOC:
[<MCC-MNC>,][<LAC>,][<CI>,][<NetMeas>,][<BCCHlist>,][<TA>,][<Date
and Time>]
11.6.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mode>:
requested operation
0 stop automatic shots
1 one shot requested
2 automatic shots
requested (every x seconds)
3 configuration of the
<dump> value
<time
period>: time period for automatic shots
range: 5-255 (multiple of
5, default value 5)
If omitted, the value
will be set to 5.
<requested
dump>: requested measurements
bitfield: 1-255 (default
value:255)
If omitted, the value
will be set to 255.
1 date and time will be
returned in the response
2 TA will be returned in
the response
4 BCCH will be returned
in the response
8 network measurements
will be returned in the response
16 CI will be returned in
the response
32 LAC will be returned
in the response
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GSM
Network Commands
Sierra
Wireless Location +WLOC
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 37
64 MNC-MCC will be
returned in the response
<MCC-MNC>:
MCC and MNC codes
3 bytes in hexadecimal
format (network coding)
<LAC>:
Location Area Code
string type; two byte location
area code in hexadecimal format (e.g. "00C3" equals
195 in decimal)
<CI>:
Cell Id
string type; two bytes in
hexadecimal format
If the Cell Id is not
available, this parameter is omitted.
<NetMeas>:
network measurements
16 bytes in hexadecimal
format
<BCCHlist>:
BCCH channel list
maximum 48 bytes (if
version V0 of GSM Rec 11.14 [20] )
129 bytes (if version V1
of GSM Rec 11.14 [20] )
The version number is
indicated in TERMINAL PROFILE information in EEPROM.
It is not
usercustomizable. It is configured at production-time.
<TA>:
timing advance
1 byte in hexadecimal
format
<Date
and Time>: date and time
7 bytes: date, time and
time zone in SIM ToolKit format
<status>:
automatic shot status
0 disabled
1 enabled
11.6.4.
Parameter Storage
The <mode>,
<time period> and <requested dump> parameters are stored without
using AT&W
command. The default
value of <mode> only can be restored using AT&F.
11.6.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WLOC=3,255
Note:
Set the information to display (255 -> complete
information)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GSM
Network Commands
Sierra
Wireless Location +WLOC
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 38
Command
Responses
AT+WLOC=1
Note:
Displays the local information once
+WLOC:
02f802,0006,7772,f13101b04cf51278
91138e95a846d160,8b49d08d0797c419e
272e10889a000009302170399020403c1
020a03c5020a03,00,010121111349ff
OK
AT+WLOC=2,10
Note:
Displays OK then the current local information
immediately
for the first time and then every 10
seconds.
OK
+WLOC:
02f802,0006,7772,ed3001af4cf492780
b040889c74acc23,8b49d08d0797c419e2
72e1
0889a000009302160399020503c1020a0
3c5020a03,00,010121111354ff
+WLOC:
02f802,0006,7772,f02d01ae4cf41278
4b03c889c846dba5,8b49d08d0797c
419e272e10889a0000093021703990
20403c1020a03c5020903,00,010121
111404ff
AT+WLOC? +WLOC: 1,10,255
OK
Note:
The location is in automatic mode, the period value is set to 10
seconds,
the configuration value is set to 255.
AT+WLOC=0
Note:
Stops the display of local information
OK
11.6.6.
Notes
If the data are not
valid at the requested time, the network measurement, BCCH list and Timing
Advance cannot be
displayed (",," is displayed instead).
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GSM
Network Commands
Sierra
Wireless Scan +WSCAN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 39
11.7. Sierra
Wireless Scan +WSCAN
11.7.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command displays the received signal strength indication for a
specified frequency
(in absolute format).
This command is not
allowed during communication.
Be sure that the
<freq> parameter corresponds to the selected bands (see +WMBS
command
description)
Note:
This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.
11.7.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WSCAN=<freq>
+WSCAN: <rssi>
OK
Read command
None
Test command
None
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GSM
Network Commands
Sierra
Wireless Scan +WSCAN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 40
11.7.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<freq>:
absolute frequency
The range depends of the
selected band:
P900
range: 1-124
E900
range: 1-124, 975-1023 and 0 for 1024
850
range: 128-251
DCS1800
range: 512-885
PCS1900
range:
Embedded
module and
configuration
<freq>
range for PCS
1900
Not Q26Extreme and not in
autoquadband
512-810
Not Q26Extreme and in
autoquadband
1536-1834
This is made to
distinguish DCS and PCS absolute frequency in
autoquadband for embedded
module which is not a Q26Extreme.
<rssi>: received
signal strength indication
0 -113 dBm or less
1 -111 dBm
2-30 -109 to -53 dBm
31 -51dBm or more
99 not known or not
detectable
11.7.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
11.7.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WSCAN=50
Note:
Request <rssi> of absolute frequency 50
+WSCAN: 23
OK
Note:
<rssi> is 23
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GSM
Network Commands
Abort
command +WAC
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 41
11.8.
Abort command +WAC
11.8.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
prorietary command allows SMS, SS and PLMN selection related commands to
be aborted.
11.8.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WAC
OK
Read command
AT+WAC?
OK
Test command
AT+WAC=?
OK
11.8.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
None
11.8.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GSM
Network Commands
Abort
command +WAC
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 42
11.8.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+COPS=?
Note:
Available PLMN
AT+WAC
Note:
Aborts the request of PLMN list
OK
Note:
PLMN list request aborted
AT+CCFC=0,2
Note:
Interrogation of status of Call Forwarding
service.
AT+WAC
Note:
Aborts the request of Interrogation of Call
Forwarding
service
+CME ERROR: 551
Note:
Interrogation of Call Forwarding service request abortion failure
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GSM
Network Commands
Band
Services command +WUBS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 43
11.9.
Band Services command +WUBS
11.9.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command selects the UMTS-FDD bands on which the embedded
module has to
operate. Multi-bands can be selected if the selected bands are supported by the
embedded module. The
user can choose if the change is immediate or not:
either
the embedded module has to be reset to take this change into account (this is
the
default case)
or
the 3G stack restarts immediately on the specified band(s). In this mode, the
command
+WUBS is forbidden
during the initialization phase of the embedded module and during calls.
Note:
This command is only available for the Q26Extreme product.
11.9.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WUBS=<Band>[,<Param>]
OK
Read command
AT+WUBS?
+WUBS:
<Band>,<ResetFlag>
OK
Test command
AT+WUBS=?
+WUBS: (list of supported
<Band>s),(list of supported <Param>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GSM
Network Commands
Band
Services command +WUBS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 44
11.9.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<Band>:
UMTS-FDD band frequency configuration (bit field)
bit set to 0: band not
selected
bit set to 1: band
selected
Multi-bands can be selected
by setting the corresponding bits to 1.
range: 1 1FF
Default value: 1 (Band I,
2100 MHz, selected)
Bit 0 Band I (2100 MHz)
Bit 1 Band II (1900 MHz)
Bit 2 Band III (1800 MHz)
Bit 3 Band IV (1700 MHz)
Bit 4 Band V (850 MHz)
Bit 5 Band VI (800 MHz)
Bit 6 Band VII (2600 MHz)
Bit 7 Band VIII (900 MHz)
Bit 8 Band IX (1800 MHz)
<Param>:
type of change
0 The embedded module
will have to be reset to start on specified band(s).
<ResetFlag> is set
to 1.
default value if omitted
1 The change is effective
immediately: the 3G stack is restarted with specified band(s).
<ResetFlag> is set
to 0.
This mode is forbidden
while in communication and during embedded module
initialization.
<ResetFlag>:
reset flag
0 The feature was not
modified since the last boot of the product.
1 The feature has been
modified since the last boot of the product: it has to be reset in
order to take the
modification into account.
Note: To
know the supported bands for individual embedded module, please refer to the
corresponding
product
specification (PTS).
11.9.4.
Parameter Storage
The <Band>
parameter is stored without using AT&W command.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GSM
Network Commands
Band
Services command +WUBS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 45
11.9.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WUBS=? +WUBS:
(1-1FF),(0-1)
OK
Note:
Only Band I, Band II and Band V are available
AT+WUBS="1"
OK
AT+WUBS? +WUBS:
"1",0
OK
Note:
Embedded module does not have to be reset for change to
be
effective.since default <Band> is Band I.
AT+WUBS="2",1
OK
Note:
Embedded module stack restarts immediately on the
specified
band(s)
AT+WUBS? +WUBS:
"2",0
OK
Note:
Embedded module does not have to be reset for change to
be
effective.
AT+WUBS="3"
OK
Note:
Select operating Band I and Band II.
AT+WUBS? +WUBS:
"3",1
OK
Note:
Embedded module has to be reset for change to be
effective.
AT+WUBS? +WUBS:
"3",0
OK
AT+CFUN=1 OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GSM
Network Commands
Wireless
Sevice Management +WWSM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 46
11.10.
Wireless Sevice Management +WWSM
11.10.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command is used by the application to select the cellular network
(Wireless Data
Service; WDA) to operate with the MT/TA. This command may be used when MT/TA
is asked to indicate
the networks in which it can operate.
Set command selects
to WDS side stack <mode> to be used by the TA. Read command shows
current setting and
test command displays side stacks available in the TA.
The selected
cellular network will be taken into account in the next embedded module reset.
Note:
This command is available only on 3G supported embedded module.
11.10.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WWSM=<mode>[,<prefer_nwk>]
OK
Read command
AT+WWSM?
+WWSM: <mode>[,<prefer_nwk>]
OK
Test command
AT+WWSM=?
+WWSM: (list of supported
<mode>s),(list of supported <prefer_nwk>s)
OK
11.10.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mode>:
cellular network to operate
0 GSM Digital Cellular
Systems (GERAN only)
1 UTRAN only
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GSM
Network Commands
Wireless
Sevice Management +WWSM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 47
2 3GPP Systems (both
GERAN and UTRAN) (default)
<prefer_nwk>:
preferred network (workable when <mode>=2)
If omitted, the default
value '0' will be used.
0 automatic (default)
1 GERAN preferred
2 UTRAN preferred
11.10.4.
Parameter Storage
The <mode> and
<prefer_nwk> parameters are stored in EEPROM without using AT&W. The
default
value can be
restored using AT&F.
11.10.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WWSM=? +WWSM:
(0,1,2),(0-2)
OK
Note: TA
operation available in three mode: GERAN only, UTRAN
only and
both GERAN+UTRAN
AT+WWSM?
Note:
Get the network status
+WWSM: 2,0
OK
Note:
Current mode = GERAN and UTRAN (UTRAN preferred)
AT+WWSM=2,1
Note:
Select 3GPP system, GERAN preferred
OK
Note:
Command valid
AT+WWSM=0
Note:
Select GERAN system
OK
Note:
Command valid
AT+WWSM=4 +CME ERROR: 3
Note:
Invalid parameter.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GSM
Network Commands
Wireless
Power Level +WPOW
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 48
11.11.
Wireless Power Level +WPOW
11.11.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command is used for production test purpose.
MS
Transmitted power measurement:
A burst signal is
repeatedly supplied from the embedded module with a constant power level on a
given channel.
The tester measures
transmitted signal level.
MS
Received signal power measurement:
The embedded module
performs a single power measurement of the signal received in the given
channel. Measurement
is performed with internal gain sets to the value corresponding to the given
input signal level.
Warning:
+WPOW command is intended for non-signalling measurement
purpose. Protocol stack must be
disabled
(using +CPOF, +CFUN or +WBHV).
Warning:
+WPOW is not compliant with nominal GSM-GPRS-EDGE protocol stack
operations: no GSM
network
registration or GSM call or GPRS- EDGE transfer can be carried on while using
+WPOW.
Warning:
Embedded module system clock is no longer synchronized with any
network. Therefore, GSM RF
frequency
accuracy is very rough (< 30 ppm).
Warning:
Be sure that the <Arfcn> parameter corresponds to the
selected bands (see +WMBS command
description).
11.11.2.
Syntax
For
<mode> = 0: Received signal power measurement
Action command
AT+WPOW=<mode>,<Arfcn>[,<Gain>]
[+WPOW: <SignalLevel>]
OK
For
<mode> = 1: Transmitted power measurement START
Action command
AT+WPOW=<mode>,<Arfcn>[,<Pcl>]
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GSM Network
Commands
Wireless
Power Level +WPOW
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 49
For
<mode> = 2: Transmitted power measurement STOP
Action command
AT+WPOW=<mode>
OK
Read command
AT+WPOW?
OK
Test command
AT+WPOW=?
OK
11.11.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mode>:
mode
0 received signal power
measurement
1 transmitted power
measurement START
2 transmitted power
measurement STOP
<Arfcn>:
Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (GSM radio channel
number)
(see GSM 05.05, Radio
transmission and reception).
GSM 900 / E GSM: range
[1023 : 975] U [124 : 0]
GSM 850: range [128 :
251]
DCS 1800: range [512 :
885]
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GSM
Network Commands
Wireless
Power Level +WPOW
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 50
PCS 1900:
Embedded
module and
configuration
<freq>
range for PCS 1900
Q26 Extreme 512-810
Not Q26 Extreme and
not in
autoquadband
512-810
Not Q26 Extreme and
in
autoquadband
1536-1834
In case of 2G products
configured in autoquadband (not Q26 Extreme one),
for PCS 1900 parameter
<freq> range [1536-1834] corresponds to
frequency range
[512-810]. This is made to distinguish DCS 1800 and PCS
1900 absolute frequency
in autoquadband for embedded module which is
not a Q26 Extreme.
<Pcl>:
power control level
when <Mode> = 1,
gives the GSM transmit Power Control Level.
(see GSM 05.05, Radio
transmission and reception)
GSM: range [5: 19], 5 is
maximum power (33 dBm ฑ 2 dBm)
DCS PCS: range [0 :
15], 0 is maximum power (30 dBm ฑ 2 dBm)
Note: If
<Pcl> is not specified, maximum power level is applied.
<Gain>:
when <Mode> = 0, gives the internal gain to be internally
used to perform
received signal
measurement. Its value expressed in terms of input signal
level.
Range is [38;110],
corresponding to [-110;-38] dBm.
Note: If
<Gain> parameter is not specified, an internal gain control
algorithm
applies the best suited gain for the input signal.
<SignalLevel>:
the measured signal level
Range is [-105;-38] dBm
11.11.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GSM
Network Commands
Wireless
Power Level +WPOW
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 51
11.11.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CPOF
Note:
Stop the Protocol stack before doing
measurement.
OK
AT+WPOW=0,62 +WPOW: -85
OK
AT+WPOW=0,62,97
+WPOW:
-100
OK
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 52
12.
Call Control Commands
12.1.
Dial Command to a specific number D
Emergency call
Normal call
12.1.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command allows an application to specify new Emergency Call
Codes.
According to 3GPP
specifications, only several numbers should be considered as emergency
numbers:
Without
a SIM: 112, 911, 000, 08, 110, 999, 118 and 119
With
a SIM: 112, 911 and numbers present in the EFECC SIM
file
All others numbers
will be considered as GSM numbers.
The ATD command is
used to set a voice, data or fax call. As per GSM 02.30, the dial command also
controls
supplementary services.
The following
Emergency Numbers are available without a SIM card:
000, 08, 110, 112,
118, 119, 911 and 999.
The following
Emergency Numbers are available with a SIM card:
when
EFECC file is missing from SIM: 112 and 911
when
SIM includes an EFECC file: 112, 911 and any Emergency Numbers available in the
EFECC file.
An optional field
can be filled for an emergency call: the Service Category. See the Notes
paragraph
(this field is not
supported on Q26Extreme product).
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Call
Control Commands
Dial
Command to a specific number D
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 53
12.1.2.
Syntax
Action command
ATD<nb>[<I>][<G>][;]
[Depending of GSM sequence]
OK / CONNECT <speed> / NO
CARRIER / BUSY / NO ANSWER
Read command
None
Test command
None
12.1.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<nb>:
destination phone number (ASCII string) or GSM sequence
0-9,*,#,+,A,B,C,D,P
<I>: CLIR
supplementary service subscription
If present, the CLIR
supplementary service subscription is overridden temporary for this
call only.
I activate (disable
presentation of own phone number to remote)
i deactivate (enable
presentation of own phone number to remote)
<G>:
CUG supplementary service information
If present, the CUG
supplementary service information is overridden temporary for this
call only.
G activate
g deactivate
; for
voice call
If omitted, the call will
be a data or a fax one.
<speed>:
data call connection speed in bps
300
1200
2400
4800
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Call
Control Commands
Dial
Command to a specific number D
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 54
9600
14400
12.1.4.
Parameter storage
None
12.1.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
ATD0123456789;
Note:
Call the 0123456789 number, voice call
OK
Note:
Call succeeds
ATD0123456789P123;
Note:
Call the 0123456789 number, voice call with a pause and
DTMF
sequence 123
OK
ATD0123456789
Note:
Call the 0123456789 number, data call
CONNECT 9600
Note:
Call succeeds
ATD*#21#
Note:
Check any call forwarding status
+CCFC: 0,7
OK
Note: No
call forwarding
ATD911#64;
Note:
Initiate an emergency call with the Service Category field
set to
automatically initiated eCall (see Notes)
OK
12.1.6.
Notes
If
a GPRS PPP session is already running, the setting of a CSD (GSM data call) is
not
supported.
For
an international number, the local international prefix does not need to be set
(usually 00)
but must be replaced
by the + character.
Example: to set up a
voice call to Sierra Wireless offices from another country, the AT
command is:
"ATD+33146290800;"
Note
that some countries may have specific numbering rules for their GSM handset
numbering.
When
the FDN phonebook has been activated (see +CLCK command), only numbers
beginning with the
digits of FDN phonebook entries can be called.
For example, if
014629" is entered in the FDN phonebook all the phone numbers beginning
with these 6 digits
can be called.
An
outgoing call attempt can be refused if the AOC service is active and credit
has expired
(NO CARRIER).
As
per GSM 02.30, GSM sequences may be controlled using dial commands. These
sequences can
contain *", #", but ;" is forbidden in the sequence. For
example, to invoke or
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Call
Control Commands
Dial
Command to a specific number D
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 55
suppress CLIR
service temporally, ATD*31#<nb>[;] and ATD#31#<nb>[;] can be used
(with ;
at the end, a voice
call will be launched).
If
the FDN phonebook is activated, the call forwarding sequences are allowed only
if they are
present in the FDN.
See
GSM Sequence List paragraph in the Appendixes to have the list of supported
sequences.
A
category can be filled for an emergency call. To use this specificity, the
following syntax
should be used:
ATD<nb>#<category>;
with <nb> is
the emergency call
<category> is
a bit field with the following explanation:
bit 1 Police
bit 2 Ambulance
bit 3 Fire Brigade
bit 4 Marine Guard
bit 5 Mountain
Rescue
bit 6 manually
initiated eCall
bit 7 automatically
initiated eCall
bit 8 is spare and
set to "0"
The <category>
range is [1-127]. If an out of range value is filled and if the <nb> is
an
emergency call, this
field is not taken into account by the embedded module and the
emergency call is
initiated (without this information).
If the <nb> number
is not an emergency number, the <category> field is not takent into
account and a normal
call is initiated by the embedded module.
If bit 6 and bit 7
are set to 1, the embedded module automatically set bit 6 to 0 and keep bit 7
to 1.
This field is not
supported by the Q26Extreme product. If the ATD<nb>#<category>
command
is sent to the
Q26Extreme product with <nb> as an emergency number, the Q26Extreme will
initiate an
emergency call without the category field.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Call
Control Commands
Direct
Dial Command using phonebook index D
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 56
12.2.
Direct Dial Command using phonebook index
D
12.2.1.
Description
This command allows
initiating an outgoing voice, data or fax call directly by indicating the index
of a
specific or current
phonebook entry.
12.2.2.
Syntax
Action command
ATD>[<mem>]<index>[<I>][<G>][;]
OK / CONNECT <speed> / NO
CARRIER / BUSY / NO ANSWER
Read command
None
Test command
None
12.2.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mem>:
phonebook memory storage
If omitted, the currently
selected phonebook is used.
SM ADN Abbreviated
Dialing Numbers (SIM phonebook)
FD FDN Fixed Dialing
Numbers (SIM restricted phonebook)
ON MSISDN (SIM own
numbers)
EN ECC Emergency Call
Codes (SIM or ME)
LD LND Last Number Dialed
MC Missed (unanswered
received) Calls list
ME ME (flash) phonebook
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Call
Control Commands
Direct
Dial Command using phonebook index D
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 57
MT combined ME and SIM
phonebook (ME+SM)
RC Received Calls list
SN SDN Service Dialing
Numbers (SIM special service numbers)
<index>:
phonebook entry index
integer type
The range depends of the
SIM capability (for ADN phonebook) and is (1-500) for flash
phonebook
<I>:
CLIR supplementary service subscription
If present, the CLIR
supplementary service subscription is overridden temporary for this
call only
I activate (disable
presentation of own phone number to remote)
i deactivate (enable
presentation of own phone number to remote)
<G>:
CUG supplementary service information
If present, the CUG
supplementary service information is overridden temporary for this
call only.
G activate
g deactivate
; for
voice call
If omitted, the call will
be a data or a fax one
<speed>:
data call connection speed in bps
300
1200
2400
4800
9600
14400
12.2.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Call
Control Commands
Direct
Dial Command using phonebook index D
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 58
12.2.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
ATD>1;
Note:
Call the 1st entry of current phonebook
OK
Note:
Call succeeds
ATD>ME1;
Note:
Call the 1st entry of flash phonebook
OK
Note:
Call succeeds
12.2.6.
Notes
When the FDN
phonebook has been activated (see +CLCK command), only direct dialing from FDN
phonebook entries is
available.
An outgoing call
attempt can be refused if the AOC service is active and credit has expired (NO
CARRIER).
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Call
Control Commands
Direct
Dial Command using a phonebook entry name D
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 59
12.3.
Direct Dial Command using a phonebook
entry
name D
12.3.1.
Description
This command allows
initiating an outgoing voice, data or fax call directly by indicating the entry
name
of a specific
phonebook.
12.3.2.
Syntax
Action command
ATD>[<mem>]<name>[<I>][<G>][;]
OK / CONNECT <speed> / NO
CARRIER / BUSY / NO ANSWER
Read command
None
Test command
None
12.3.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mem>:
phonebook memory storage
If omitted, the currently
selected phonebook is used.
SM ADN Abbreviated
Dialing Numbers (SIM phonebook)
FD FDN Fixed Dialing
Numbers (SIM restricted phonebook)
ON MSISDN (SIM own
numbers)
EN ECC Emergency Call
Codes (SIM or ME)
LD LND Last Number Dialed
MC Missed (unanswered
received) Calls list
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Call
Control Commands
Direct
Dial Command using a phonebook entry name D
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 60
ME ME phonebook
MT combined ME and SIM
phonebook (ME+SM)
RC Received Calls list
SN SDN Service Dialing
Numbers (SIM special service numbers)
<name>:
phonebook entry name
ASCII string (between
"")
The maximum number of
characters depends on SIM capability for all phonebooks
except ME (up to 30
characters).
<I>:
CLIR supplementary service subscription
If present, the CLIR
supplementary service subscription is overridden temporary for this
call only.
I activate (disable
presentation of own phone number to remote)
i deactivate (enable
presentation of own phone number to remote)
<G>:
CUG supplementary service information
If present, the CUG
supplementary service information is overridden temporary for this
call only.
G activate
g deactivate
; for
voice call
If omitted, the call will
be a data or a fax one.
<speed>:
data call connection speed in bps
300
1200
2400
4800
9600
14400
12.3.4.
Parameter storage
None
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Call
Control Commands
Direct
Dial Command using a phonebook entry name D
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 61
12.3.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
ATD>"John";
Note:
Call the number of the current phonebook entry which
name is
John
OK
Note:
Call succeeds
ATD>ME"John";
Note:
Call the number of the flash phonebook entry which
name is
John
OK
Note:
Call succeeds
12.3.6.
Notes
When the FDN
phonebook has been activated, only direct dialing from FDN phonebook entries is
available.
An outgoing call
attempt can be refused if the AOC service is active and credit has expired (NO
CARRIER).
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Call
Control Commands
Redial
Last Telephone Number DL
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 62
12.4.
Redial Last Telephone Number DL
12.4.1.
Description
This command is used
by the application to redial the last number used in the D command.
12.4.2.
Syntax
Action command
ATDL
<last number>
OK
Read command
None
Test command
None
12.4.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<last
number>: last number dialed followed by ";" for voice calls
only
string type
12.4.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Call
Control Commands
Redial
Last Telephone Number DL
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 63
12.4.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
ATDL
Note:
Redial last number
0146290800;
OK
Note:
Last call was a voice call.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Call
Control Commands
Answer
a Call A
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 64
12.5.
Answer a Call A
12.5.1.
Description
When the product
receives a call, it sets the Ring Indicator signal and sends the ASCII
"RING" or
"+CRING:
<type>" string to the application (+CRING if the cellular result
code +CRC is enabled).
Then it waits for
the application to accept the call with the ATA command.
12.5.2.
Syntax
Action command
ATA
OK
Read command
None
Test command
None
12.5.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
None.
12.5.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Call
Control Commands
Answer
a Call A
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 65
12.5.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
RING
Note:
Incoming call
ATA
Note:
Answer to this incoming call
OK
Note:
Call accepted
ATH
Note:
Disconnect call
OK
Note:
Call disconnected
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Call
Control Commands
Hang-Up
Command H
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 66
12.6.
Hang-Up Command H
12.6.1.
Description
The ATH (or ATH0)
command is used by the application to disconnect the remote user. In the case
of
multiple calls, all
calls are released (active, on-hold and waiting calls).
The Sierra Wireless
proprietary ATH1 command has been added to disconnect the current outgoing
call, only in
dialing or alerting state (i.e. ATH1 can be used only after the ATD command,
and before
its terminal
response (OK, NO CARRIER,
). It can be useful in the case of multiple calls.
12.6.2.
Syntax
Action command
ATH[<n>]
OK
Read command
None
Test command
None
12.6.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<n>:
disconnection type
0 ask for disconnection
1 ask for outgoing call
disconnection
12.6.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Call
Control Commands
Hang-Up
Command H
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 67
12.6.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
ATH
Note:
Ask for call disconnection
OK
Note:
Every call, if any, are released
ATH1
Note:
Ask for outgoing call disconnection
OK
Note:
Outgoing call, if any, is released
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Call
Control Commands
Sierra
Wireless Hang-up +WATH
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 68
12.7.
Sierra Wireless Hang-up +WATH
12.7.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command is used by the application to disconnect the remote user,
specifying a release
cause and the location. In the case of multiple calls, all calls are released
(active,
on-hold and waiting
calls).
12.7.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WATH=<RelCause>[,<location>]
OK
Read command
None
Test command
AT+WATH=?
+WATH= (list of supported
<RelCause>s),(list of supported <location>s)
OK
12.7.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<RelCause>:
release cause
range: 1-127
integer value
Please refer to section
"Failure Cause from 3GPP TS 24.008 recommendation"
in the Appendixes chapter
of this guide.
<location>:
release location
Please refer to ETSI GSM
24.008 [8] for values.
0 user
1 private network serving
the local user
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Call
Control Commands
Sierra
Wireless Hang-up +WATH
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 69
2 transit network
3 transit network
4 public network serving
the remote user
5 private network serving
the remote user
7 international network
10 network beyond
inter-working point
12.7.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
12.7.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WATH=? +WATH:
(1-127),(0-5,7,10)
OK
AT+WATH=31
Note:
Ask for disconnection with release
cause=normal
and location=USER
OK
Note:
All calls, if any, are released
AT+WATH=17,2
Note:
Ask for disconnection with release cause=user
busy and
location= public network serving the local
user
OK
Note:
All calls, if any, are released
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Call
Control Commands
Remote
disconnection
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 70
12.8.
Remote disconnection
This message is used
by the product to inform the application that an active call has been released
by
the remote user.
The product sends
"NO CARRIER" to the application and sets the
DCD signal.
In addition, for
AOC, the product can release the call if credit has expired (release cause 68
with
+CEER command).
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Call
Control Commands
Extended
Error Report +CEER
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 71
12.9.
Extended Error Report +CEER
12.9.1.
Description
This command gives
the cause of call release when the last call set up (originating or answering)
failed.
12.9.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CEER
+CEER: <report>
OK
Read command
None
Test command
None
12.9.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<report>:
call release cause (please refer to section "failure cause
from 3GPP TS 24.008
recommendation" in
Appendix)
12.9.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Call
Control Commands
Extended
Error Report +CEER
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 72
12.9.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
ATD123456789;
Note:
Outgoing voice call
NO CARRIER
Note:
Call setup failure
AT+CEER
Note:
Ask for release cause
+CEER: Error 41
OK
Note:
"Temporary failure"
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Call
Control Commands
Automatic
Dialing with DTR %Dn
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 73
12.10.
Automatic Dialing with DTR %Dn
12.10.1.
Description
This command enables
and disables:
automatic
dialing of the phone number stored in the first location of the ADN phonebook
(or
FDN phonebook, if it
is activated using +CLCK command),
automatic
sending of the short message (SMS) stored in the first location of the SIM.
The number is dialed
when DTR OFF switches to ON.
The short message is
sent when DTR OFF switches to ON.
12.10.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT%D<n>[;]
OK
Read command
AT%D?
%D: <n>
OK
Test command
None
12.10.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<n>:
automatic dialing mode
0 disables automatic DTR
number dialing/message transmission
1 enables automatic DTR
dialing if DTR switches from OFF to ON
Dials the phone number in
the first location of the ADN phonebook (or FDN
phonebook, if it is
activated using +CLCK command).
voice call (with semi-colon)
data or Fax call (without
semi-colon)
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Call
Control Commands
Automatic
Dialing with DTR %Dn
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 74
2 activates automatic DTR
short message transmission if DTR switches from OFF
to ON
Sends the short message
in the first location of the SIM (even if the current
selected SMS memory is
not SM in +CPMS command).
; for
voice call
If omitted, the call will
be a data or a fax one.
12.10.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
12.10.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT%D1;
Note:
Activates DTR voice number dialing
OK
Note:
Command has been executed
DTR is
OFF
DTR
switches ON
Note:
The number in the first location of the ADN is dialed
automatically
DTR
switches OFF
Note:
The product goes on-hook
OK
AT%D2
Note:
Activates DTR short message sending
OK
Note:
Command has been executed
DTR is
OFF
DTR
switches ON
Note:
The first short message is sent
+CMSS: 1
12.10.6.
Notes
If the first
location is empty:
AT%D1
and AT%D2 commands will receive an OK response,
the
DTR ON event will trigger a "+CME ERROR: 21" or a "+CMS ERROR:
321".
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Call
Control Commands
Automatic
Answer S0
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 75
12.11.
Automatic Answer S0
12.11.1.
Description
This command
determines and controls the product automatic answering mode.
12.11.2.
Syntax
Action command
ATS0=<value>
OK
Read command
ATS0?
<value>
OK
Test command
None
12.11.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<value>:
number of rings before automatic answer (3 characters padded
with zeros)
Values range is 0 to 255
(default value: 000).
12.11.4.
Parameter Storage
The <value>
parameter is stored in EEPROM using AT&W command. The default value can be
restored using
AT&F.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Call
Control Commands
Automatic
Answer S0
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 76
12.11.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
ATS0=2
Note:
Automatic answer after 2 rings
OK
ATS0?
Note:
Current value
002
OK
Note: 3
characters padded with zeros
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Call
Control Commands
Incoming
Call Bearer +CICB
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 77
12.12.
Incoming Call Bearer +CICB
12.12.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command is used to set the type of incoming calls when no incoming
bearer is specified
(see +CSNS).
Note:
Setting the +CICB command affects the current value of +CSNS.
12.12.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CICB=<mode>
OK
Read command
AT+CICB?
+CICB: <mode>
OK
Test command
AT+CICB=?
+CICB: (list of supported
<mode>s)
OK
12.12.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mode>:
default incoming call bearer
0 data
1 fax
2 speech (default value)
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Call
Control Commands
Incoming
Call Bearer +CICB
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 78
12.12.4.
Parameter Storage
The <mode>
parameter is stored in EEPROM using AT&W command. The default value can be
restored using
AT&F.
12.12.5.
Examples
Command Responses
AT+CICB=2
Note: If
no incoming bearer, force a voice call
OK
AT+CICB?
Note:
Get current value
+CICB: 2
OK
Note:
Default incoming bearer: voice call
AT+CICB=?
Note:
Test command
+CICB: (0-2)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Call
Control Commands
Single
Numbering Scheme +CSNS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 79
12.13.
Single Numbering Scheme +CSNS
12.13.1.
Description
This command selects
the bearer to be used when an MT single numbering scheme call is set up
(see +CICB).
Note:
Setting the +CSNS command affects the current value of +CICB.
12.13.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CSNS=<mode>
OK
Read command
AT+CSNS?
+CSNS: <mode>
OK
Test command
AT+CSNS=?
+CSNS: (list of supported
<mode>s)
OK
12.13.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mode>:
bearer to be used
0 voice (default value)
2 fax
4 data
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Call
Control Commands
Single
Numbering Scheme +CSNS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 80
12.13.4.
Parameter Storage
The <mode>
parameter is stored in EEPROM using AT&W command. The default value can be
restored using
AT&F.
12.13.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CSNS=0
Note:
Force a voice call
OK
AT+CSNS?
Note:
Get current value
+CSNS: 0
OK
Note:
Default incoming bearer: voice call
AT+CSNS=?
Note:
Test command
+CSNS: (0,2,4)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Call
Control Commands
Service
Reporting Control +CR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 81
12.14.
Service Reporting Control +CR
12.14.1.
Description
This command enables
a detailed type of service reporting in case of incoming or outgoing data
calls.
Before sending the
CONNECT response to the application, the product will specify the type of data
connection which has
been set up.
12.14.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CR=<mode>
OK
Read command
AT+CR?
+CR: <mode>
OK
Test command
AT+CR=?
+CR: (list of supported
<mode>s)
OK
Unsolicited response
+CR: <type>
12.14.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mode>:
extended reports activation
0 disable (default value)
1 enable
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Call
Control Commands
Service
Reporting Control +CR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 82
<type>:
type of call
ASYNC asynchronous
transparent
REL ASYNC asynchronous
non transparent
GPRS GPRS
12.14.4.
Parameter Storage
The <mode>
parameter is stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can
be
restored using
AT&F.
12.14.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CR=? +CR: (0,1)
OK
AT+CR=1 OK
Note:
Extended reports enabled Note: Command valid
AT+CR? +CR: 1
OK
ATD0612345678
Note:
CSD data call
+CR: ASYNC
CONNECT 9600
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Call
Control Commands
Cellular
Result Codes +CRC
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 83
12.15.
Cellular Result Codes +CRC
12.15.1.
Description
This command allows
more detailed ring information for an incoming call (voice or data). Instead of
the string
"RING", an extended string is used to indicate which type of call is
ringing.
12.15.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CRC=<mode>
OK
Read command
AT+CRC?
+CRC: <mode>
OK
Test command
AT+CRC=?
+CRC: (list of supported
<mode>s)
OK
Unsolicited response
+CRING:
<type>[,<PDP_type>[,<PDP_addr>]]
12.15.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mode>:
extended ring information mode
0 disable (default value)
1 enable
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Call
Control Commands
Cellular
Result Codes +CRC
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 84
<type>:
detailed ring information
ASYNC asynchronous transparent
REL ASYNC asynchronous
non transparent
VOICE voice
FAX fax
GPRS GPRS network request
for PDP context activation
<PDP_type>:
type of packet data protocol
"IP" Internet
Protocol (IETF STD 5)
"PPP" Point to
Point Protocol (IETF STD 51)
<PDP_addr>:
PDP address: identifies the MT in the address space applicable
to the PDP
string type
12.15.4.
Parameter Storage
The <mode>
parameter is stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can
be
restored using
AT&F.
12.15.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CRC=? +CRC: (0,1)
OK
AT+CRC=1 OK
Note:
Extended reports enabled Note: Command valid
AT+CRC? +CRC: 1
OK
+CRING: VOICE
Note:
Incoming voice call
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 85
13.
Data Commands
13.1.
Using AT Commands during a data
connection
To use AT commands
during a data connection (e.g. while the product is in online mode), it is
necessary to switch
to offline mode.
Switch
from online to offline mode
To switch from
online mode to offline mode, the "+++" sequence must be sent.
Following this, the
product gets back to
offline mode with an "OK" response, and a AT command can be sent.
This "+++"
sequence must be
sent with a guard time of 1s before and after the sequence.
Note:
The "+++" sequence will only work with the +ICF command using one of
the following settings:
- 8 data
bits, with no parity
- 7 data
bits, with even parity
Note:
This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.
Switch
from offline to online mode
Please refer to the
"O" command description.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Data
Commands
Bearer
Type Selection +CBST
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 86
13.2.
Bearer Type Selection +CBST
13.2.1.
Description
This command allows
to select a bearer type for outgoing and incoming data calls.
Note:
This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.
13.2.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CBST=[<speed>][,[<name>][,<ce>]]
OK
Read command
AT+CBST?
+CBST:
<speed>,<name>,<ce>
OK
Test command
AT+CBST=?
+CBST: (list of supported
<speed>s),(list of supported <name>s),(list of supported
<ce>s)
OK
13.2.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<speed>:
data call connection speed
used only for outgoing
calls
0 autobauding, modem
type: none (default value)
1 300 bps, modem type:
V.21
2 1200 bps, modem type:
V.22
3 1200/75 bps, modem
type: V.23
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Data
Commands
Bearer
Type Selection +CBST
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 87
4 2400 bps, modem type:
V.22bis
5 2400 bps, modem type:
V.26ter
6 4800 bps, modem type:
V.32
7 9600 bps, modem type:
V.32
8 specific
12 9600 bps, modem type:
V.34
14 14400 bps, modem type:
V.34
65 300 bps, modem type:
V.110
66 1200 bps, modem type:
V.110
68 2400 bps, modem type:
V.110
70 4800 bps, modem type:
V.110
71 9600 bps, modem type:
V.110
75 14400 bps, modem type:
V.110
<name>:
operating mode
0 no data compression is
provided and only asynchronous mode is supported
(default value)
<ce>:
connection element
0 transparent only
1 non transparent only
(default value)
2 transparent preferred
3 non transparent
preferred
13.2.4.
Parameter Storage
All parameters are
stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can be restored
using AT&F.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Data
Commands
Bearer
Type Selection +CBST
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 88
13.2.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CBST=? +CBST:
(0-8,12,14,65,66,68,70,71,75),
(0),(0-3)
OK
AT+CBST=7,0,1 OK
Note:
Select a bearer
AT+CBST?
Note:
Current values
+CBST: 7,0,1
OK
13.2.6.
Notes
For incoming calls,
if <ce> is set to "Transparent only" and the network offers
only "Non Transparent"
or vice versa, then
the call is released.
<ce> parameter
values 2 and 3 are equivalent to former values 100 and 101. These values are
managed for
compatibility purposes, but they may not be used in new code (2 as former 100,
and 3
as former 101).
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Data
Commands
DTE-DCE
Local Rate Reporting +ILRR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 89
13.3.
DTE-DCE Local Rate Reporting +ILRR
13.3.1.
Description
This command
controls whether a +ILRR unsolicited response is sent to the application with
the
current (negotiated
or renegotiated) DTE-DCE speed rate.
If enabled, the
unsolicited result code is transmitted in an incoming or outgoing data call,
after any
data compression
report, and before any connection indication (CONNECT).
Note:
This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.
13.3.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+ILRR=<value>
OK
Read command
AT+ILRR?
+ILRR: <value>
OK
Test command
AT+ILRR=?
+ILRR: (list of supported
<value>s)
OK
Unsolicited response
+ILRR: <rate>
13.3.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<value>:
local port rate report
0 disable (default value)
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Data
Commands
DTE-DCE
Local Rate Reporting +ILRR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 90
1 enable
<rate>:
current (negotiated or renegotiated) DTE-DCE speed rate
values in bps
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200
230400
460800
921600
13.3.4.
Parameter Storage
The <value>
parameter is stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can
be
restored using
AT&F.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Data Commands
DTE-DCE
Local Rate Reporting +ILRR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 91
13.3.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+ILRR=? +ILRR: (0,1)
OK
AT+ILRR=0 OK
Note:
Local port rate report disabled Note: Command valid
AT+ILRR=1 OK
Note:
Local port rate report enabled Note: Command valid
AT+ILRR? +ILRR: 1
OK
ATD0123456789
Note:
CSD call
+ILRR: 9600
CONNECT 9600
Note:
Data rate is 9600
13.3.6.
Notes
The +ILLR indication
is displayed on the data window.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Data
Commands
Radio
Link Protocol Parameters +CRLP
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 92
13.4.
Radio Link Protocol Parameters +CRLP
13.4.1.
Description
This command
modifies the radio link protocol parameters used for non transparent data
transmission.
Note:
This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.
13.4.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CRLP=[<iws>][,[<mws>][,[<T1>][,[<N2>][,[<ver>]]]]]
OK
Read command
AT+CRLP?
+CRLP:
<iws>,<mws>,<T1>,<N2>,<ver>
OK
Test command
AT+CRLP=?
+CRLP: (list of supported
<iws>s),(list of supported <mws>s),(list of supported
<T1>s),(list of supported
<N2>s),(list of supported <ver>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Data
Commands
Radio
Link Protocol Parameters +CRLP
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 93
13.4.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<iws>:
down window size
range: 0-61 (default
value: 61)
<mws>:
up window size
range: 0-61 (default
value: 61)
<T1>:
acknowledgement timer in units of 10 ms
range: 40-255 (default
value: 48)
<N2>:
retransmission attempts
range: 1-255 (default
value 6)
<ver>:
RLP version number
0 V42bis not supported
1 V42bis supported
(default value)
13.4.4.
Parameter Storage
Parameters are
stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can be restored
using AT&F.
13.4.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CRLP=? +CRLP:
(0-61),(0-61),(40-255),(1-255),(0,1)
OK
AT+CRLP=61,61,48,6,0
OK
Note:
Set new parameters
AT+CRLP? +CRLP:
61,61,48,6,0
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Data
Commands
Other
Radio Link Parameters +DOPT
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 94
13.5.
Other Radio Link Parameters +DOPT
13.5.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command modifies additional radio link protocol parameters.
Note:
This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.
13.5.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+DOPT=[<reset_allowed>][,<dtx_allowed>]
OK
Read command
AT+DOPT?
<reset_allowed>,<dtx_allowed>
OK
Test command
AT+DOPT=?
(list of supported <reset_allowed>s),(list
of supported <dtx_allowed>s)
OK
13.5.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<reset_allowed>:
behaviour in case of bad radio link
0 data communication is
hung up in case of bad radio link
1 data communication is
held, even if the radio link is bad; there is a possibility of
losing data (default
value)
<dtx_allowed>:
power mode
0 normal mode
1 economic battery mode,
not supported by all networks (default value)
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Data
Commands
Other
Radio Link Parameters +DOPT
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 95
13.5.4.
Parameter Storage
Parameters are
stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can be restored
using AT&F.
13.5.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+DOPT=? (0,1),(0,1)
OK
AT+DOPT=1 OK
Note:
Second parameter is omitted
AT+DOPT=1,1 OK
Note:
Set new parameters
AT+DOPT? 1,1
OK
AT+DOPT=,0
Note:
First parameter is omitted
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Data
Commands
Select
Mode +FCLASS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019
Volume 2 February 18, 2011 96
13.6.
Select Mode +FCLASS
13.6.1.
Description
This command sets
the product to a particular operating mode (data or fax).
Note:
This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.
13.6.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+FCLASS=<n>
OK
Read command
AT+FCLASS?
+FCLASS: <n>
OK
Test command
AT+FCLASS=?
+FCLASS: (list of supported
<n>s)
OK
13.6.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<n>:
operating mode
0 data (default value)
1 fax class 1
2 fax class 2
13.6.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Data
Commands
Select
Mode +FCLASS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 97
13.6.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+FCLASS=? +FCLASS:
(0,1,2)
OK
Note:
Test command Note: All operating modes supported
AT+FCLASS=1 OK
Note:
Fax class 1 mode requested Note: Command valid
AT+FCLASS? +FCLASS: 1
OK
Note:
Current value Note: Command valid
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Data
Commands
Select
Data Compression %C
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 98
13.7.
Select Data Compression %C
13.7.1.
Description
This command enables
or disables data compression negotiation.
Note:
This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.
13.7.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT%C[<n>]
OK
Read command
AT%C?
<n>
OK
Test command
None
13.7.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<n>:
compression mode
0 no compression (default
value)
2 V42 compression if
supported
13.7.4.
Parameter Storage
<n> is stored
in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can be restored using
AT&F.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Data
Commands
Select
Data Compression %C
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 99
13.7.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT%C2 OK
AT%C? 2
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Data
Commands
V42 Bis
Data Compression +DS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 100
13.8.
V42 Bis Data Compression +DS
13.8.1.
Description
This command enables
or disables V42bis data compression. Note that the product only allows the
MNP2 protocol.
Note:
This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.
13.8.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+DS=[<dir>][,[<neg>][,[<P1>][,[<P2>]]]]
OK
Read command
AT+DS?
+DS:
<dir>,<neg>,<P1>,<P2>
OK
Test command
AT+DS=?
+DS: (list of supported
<dir>s),(list of supported <neg>s),(list of supported
<P1>s),(list of supported
<P2>s)
OK
13.8.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<dir>:
desired direction(s) of operation for the data compression
feature, from the DTE point of
view
0 negotiated
1 transmit only
2 receive only
3 both directions, accept
any direction (default value)
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Data
Commands
V42 Bis
Data Compression +DS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 101
<neg>:
specifies whether the DCE may continue to operate or not if the
desired result is not
obtained
0 do not disconnect if
V42bis is not negotiated by the remote DCE as specified in <dir>
(default value)
1 disconnect if V42bis is
not negotiated by the remote DCE as specified in <dir>
<P1>:
maximum number of dictionary entries that may be negotiated
range: 512-2048 (default
value: 2048)
<P2>:
maximum string length to be negotiated
range: 6-250 (default
value: 20)
13.8.4.
Parameter Storage
All parameters are
stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can be restored
using AT&F.
13.8.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+DS=? +DS:
(0-3),(0,1),(512-2048),(6-250)
OK
AT+DS=3,0,2048,250
OK
Note:
Set new parameters
AT+DS? +DS:
3,0,2048,250
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Data
Commands
V42 Bis
Data Compression Report +DR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 102
13.9.
V42 Bis Data Compression Report +DR
13.9.1.
Description
This command
enables/disables the +DR intermediate result code that represents the current
DCEDCE
data compression
type. This intermediate result code, if enabled, is issued before the final
result
code, after the
service report control +CR and before the +ILRR intermediate report.
Note:
This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.
13.9.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+DR=<status>
OK
Read command
AT+DR?
+DR: <status>
OK
Test command
AT+DR=?
+DR: (list of supported
<status>s)
OK
Intermediate response
+DR: <direction>
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Data
Commands
V42 Bis
Data Compression Report +DR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 103
13.9.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<status>:
status fo the V42bis use
0 disabled (default
value)
1 enabled
<direction>:
DCE-DCE data compression type
NONE data compression is
not in use
V42B V42bis is in use in
both directions
V42B RD V42bis is in use
in receive direction only
V42B TD V42bis is in use
in transmit direction only
13.9.4.
Parameter Storage
The <status>
parameter is stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can
be
restored using
AT&F.
13.9.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+DR=? +DR: (0,1)
OK
AT+DR=1 OK
Note:
Reporting enabled
AT+DR? +DR: 1
OK
ATD0123456789
Note:
outgoing data call
+DR: V42B
CONNECT 9600
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Data
Commands
Select
Data Error Correcting Mode \N
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 104
13.10.
Select Data Error Correcting Mode \N
13.10.1.
Description
This command
controls the preferred error correcting mode for a data connection. It can only
be used
for transparent data
transmission.
Note:
This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.
13.10.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT\N[<n>]
OK
Read command
AT\N?
<n>
OK
Test command
None
13.10.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<n>:
error correction mode
0 disables error
correcting mode (default value)
5 selects MNP error
correcting mode
13.10.4.
Parameter Storage
The <n>
parameter is stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can
be
restored using
AT&F.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Data
Commands
Select
Data Error Correcting Mode \N
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 105
13.10.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT\N0 OK
Note: No
error correction
AT\N? 0
OK
13.10.6.
Notes
+E prefixed V25ter
commands are not used.
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 106
14.
GPRS Commands
14.1.
GPRS Mobile Station Class +CGCLASS
14.1.1.
Description
This command is used
to set the MT to operate according to the specified GPRS mobile class.
Note:
"A" class is not indicated for the Q26 Extreme.
Note:
Class A is only for 3G product.
14.1.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CGCLASS=<class>
OK
Read command
AT+CGCLASS?
+CGCLASS: <class>
OK
Test command
AT+CGCLASS=?
+CGCLASS: (list of supported
<class>s)
OK
14.1.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<class>:
GPRS mobile class (in descending order of functionality)
"A" class A in
3G only mode
"B" class B
"CG" class C in
GPRS only mode
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
GPRS
Mobile Station Class +CGCLASS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 107
"CC" class C in
circuit switched only mode (lowest)
14.1.4.
Parameter Storage
The parameters are
stored in EEPROM without using the AT&W command.
14.1.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CGCLASS=? +CGCLASS:
("CG","CC","B")
OK
AT+CGCLASS="CC"
Note:
Enter GSM mode
OK
AT+CGCLASS? +CGCLASS:
"CC"
OK
14.1.6.
Notes
If the MT is GPRS
attached, when the action command is issued with a <class>="CC"
specified, a
GPRS detach request
is sent to the network.
If the MT is GSM
attached, when the action command is issued with a <class>="CG"
specified, a
GSM detach request
is sent to the network.
During switch-On in
CG class, the MS always performs an automatic GPRS attach (the ATTACHSTATUS
parameter of +WGPRS
is ignored).
If the MS is not
already GPRS attached, when switching from B/CC class to CG class then no
automatic GPRS
attach is performed.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
GPRS
parameters customization: +WGPRS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 108
14.2.
GPRS parameters customization: +WGPRS
14.2.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command modifies some Sierra Wireless GPRS parameters:
the
ATTACH-STATUS (the ME does or not perform automatically a GPRS attachment after
initialization),
the
PDP-INIT-STATUS (activates automatically or not some defined PDP contexts after
initialization),
the
user-defined multislot class. This parameter represents the GPRS or EGPRS class
chosen by the user
to perform power saving (by reducing TX /uplink time slots).
In addition, this
command allows to:
set
automatically "ACTIVABLE" some defined PDP contexts after
initialization,
set
some parameters for PALMฎ OS software: PPP Silent Mode,
return
network technology capabilities, such as GPRS/EGPRS for GERAN, or
HSDPA/HSUPA for
UTRAN, on the registered network.
(PPP waits for PPP
Client to start the dialog) and Slow CONNECT (due to the delay of the
processing
of PALMฎ OS,
the CONNECT is sent one second after the dialing command request)
The Sierra Wireless
embedded module must be rebooted to activate the new setup except for
<mode> 3, 5, 6
and 7 (please refer to 14.2.3 "Defined Values" paragraph).
When the
GPRS/EGPRS/HSDPA/HSUPA network technology capability and (modulation &)
coding
scheme indication is
enabled (with + WGPRS AT command), under the following conditions, an
unsolicited response
+WGPRSIND will be returned by the embedded module:
each
time GPRS or EGPRS technologies availability is detected on the used network,
even if
the Sierra Wireless
embedded modules is only GPRS capable
each
time HSDPA or HSUPA technology availability is detected on the used network due
to
intra PLMN handover
(UMTS<->GSM) or inter system handover (for 3G supported embedded
module only)
the
(modulation &) coding scheme used at the beginning of each transfer (for
GPRS/EGPRS
technology only)
each
time the (modulation &) coding scheme are modified during the transfer (for
GPRS/EGPRS
technology only)
The (E)GPRS
multislot class is not configurable at the 2nd chip
used in Q26Extreme embedded
module. Whatever the
(E)GPRS multislot class set via the WGRPS AT command, the module is
configured in
(E)GPRS Class 12.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
GPRS
parameters customization: +WGPRS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 109
14.2.2.
Syntax
For
<mode>=9, <parameter>=1:
Action command
AT+WGPRS=<mode>[,[<parameter>][,<parameter2>]]
OK
For
<mode>=9, <parameter>=2:
Action command
AT+WGPRS=<mode>[,[<parameter>][,<parameter2>]]
+WGPRSIND:
<techno>[,[<up_cs_ts0>],[<up_cs_ts1>],[<up_cs_ts2>],
[<up_cs_ts3>],[<up_cs_ts4>],[<up_cs_ts5>],[<up_cs_ts6>],
[<up_cs_ts7>],[<down_cs_ts0>],[<down_cs_ts1>],[<down_cs_ts2>],
[<down_cs_ts3>],[<down_cs_ts4>],[<down_cs_ts5>],[<down_cs_ts6>],
[<down_cs_ts7>]]
OK
For
all other cases:
Action command
AT+WGPRS=<mode>[,[<parameter>][,[<cid>],[<class>]]]
OK
Read command
AT+WGPRS?
+WGPRS:
<mode>[,<response>[,<cid>]]
[+WGPRS:
<mode>[,<response>[,<cid>]] [
]]
OK
Test command
AT+WGPRS=?
+WGPRS: (list of supported
<mode>s),(list of supported <parameter>s),(list of
supported <cid>s),(list of
supported <class>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
GPRS
parameters customization: +WGPRS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 110
Unsolicited response
+WGPRSIND:
<techno>[,[<up_cs_ts0>],[<up_cs_ts1>],[<up_cs_ts2>],
[<up_cs_ts3>],[<up_cs_ts4>],[<up_cs_ts5>],[<up_cs_ts6>],
[<up_cs_ts7>],[<down_cs_ts0>],[<down_cs_ts1>],[<down_cs_ts2>],
[<down_cs_ts3>],[<down_cs_ts4>],[<down_cs_ts5>],[<down_cs_ts6>],
[<down_cs_ts7>]]
14.2.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mode>:
Sierra Wireless GPRS parameter
0 ATTACH-STATUS (the ME
DOES NOT perform automatically a GPRS
attachment after
initialization)
only <parameter> is
used
1 PDP-INIT-STATUS
(declares some PDP contexts liable to be activated
automatically after
initialization by <mode>=2)
only <parameter> is
used
2 sets ACTIVABLE
automatically after init a define PDP context
only <parameter>
and <cid> are used
3 PPP silent mode (PPP
waits for PPP Client to start the dialog)
only <parameter> is
used
4 definition of the GPRS
multislot class. This parameter represents the GPRS or
EGPRS class chosen by the
user to perform power saving (by reducing TX
/uplink time slots).
only <class> is
used
5 Slow CONNECT for PALMฎ
OS (due to the delay of the processing of PALMฎ
OS, the CONNECT is sent
one second after the dialing command request)
only <parameter> is
used
6 PPP Filtering
only <parameter> is
used
7 Automatic GPRS roaming
inter-operator (ME automatically reattaches itself to the
network and reactivates
its PDP context by changing of operator when reaching
border areas)
only <parameter> is
used
8 Definition of the EGPRS
multislot class (available for EGPRS compatible Sierra
Wireless embedded
modules)
only <class> is
used
9 GPRS/EGPRS/HSDPA/HSUPA
network technology capability indication or
together with (modulation
&) coding scheme indication
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
GPRS
parameters customization: +WGPRS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 111
<parameter>:
requested operation for <mode> (except for <mode>=4
and 8)
0 disabled
1 enabled
2 for <mode>=9 only
GERAN: read GPRS/EGPRS
network technology capability or together with
(modulation &) coding
scheme
UTRAN: read HSDPA/HSUPA
network technology capability
<parameter2>:
requested kind of information for <mode>=9 and
<parameter>=1 or 2
If omitted, the value will
be set to 0
0 enable only
GPRS/EGPRS/HSDPA/HSUPA network capability indication
1 enable GPRS/EGPRS
network capability and (modulation &) coding scheme
indication
2 read GPRS/EGPRS network
technology capability or together with (modulation
&) coding scheme
<cid>:
PDP context identifier
range: 1-4
integer type
<class>:
GPRS or EGPRS multislot class number. Please refer to [6] and
table in "Notes"
section for more
information
0 deactivate EGPRS mode
(in order to establish GPRS TBF)
only available for EGPRS
enabled embedded modules and <mode>=8
2 multislot class 2
8 multislot class 8
10 multislot class 10
<response>:
This parameter is returned in "AT+WGPRS?" response.
for
<mode>=0,1,2,3,5,6 and 7: <response>=<parameter>
for
<mode>=4 and 8: <response>=<class>
<techno>:
technologies available on the used network
0 neither GPRS nor EGPRS
features supported
1 only GPRS feature
supported
2 EGPRS feature supported
3 3G Release 99 supported
4 HSDPA supported
5 HSUPA supported
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
GPRS
parameters customization: +WGPRS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 112
6 HSUPA and HSDPA
supported
<up_cs_tsX>:
coding scheme (CS) or modulation & coding scheme (MCS) used
in uplink for each
timeslot. Applicable to
GPRS and EGPRS only
0 CS1 (GPRS)
1 CS2 (GPRS)
2 CS3 (GPRS)
3 CS4 (GPRS)
4 MCS1 (EGPRS)
5 MCS2 (EGPRS)
6 MCS3 (EGPRS)
7 MCS4 (EGPRS)
8 MCS5 (EGPRS)
9 MCS6 (EGPRS)
10 MCS7 (EGPRS)
11 MCS8 (EGPRS)
12 MCS9 (EGPRS)
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
GPRS
parameters customization: +WGPRS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 113
<down_cs_tsX>:
coding scheme (CS) or modulation & coding scheme (MCS) used
in downlink for
each timeslot. Applicable
to GPRS and EGPRS only
0 CS1 (GPRS)
1 CS2 (GPRS)
2 CS3 (GPRS)
3 CS4 (GPRS)
4 MCS1 (EGPRS)
5 MCS2 (EGPRS)
6 MCS3 (EGPRS)
7 MCS4 (EGPRS)
8 MCS5 (EGPRS)
9 MCS6 (EGPRS)
10 MCS7 (EGPRS)
11 MCS8 (EGPRS)
12 MCS9 (EGPRS)
14.2.4.
Parameter Storage
The <cid> and
<class> parameters are stored in EEPROM without using the AT&W
command.
The unsolicited
network availability and (modulation &) coding scheme indication
configuration is not
stored in EEPROM,
even when using AT&W command.
14.2.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WGPRS=?
Note:
Request ranges of values for a GPRS compatible
Sierra
Wireless embedded module
+WGPRS:
(0-7,9),(0-2),(0-4),(2,8,10)
OK
AT+WGPRS=?
Note:
Request ranges of values for an EGPRS compatible
Sierra
Wireless embedded module
+WGPRS:
(0-9),(0-2),(0-4),(0,2,8,10)
OK
AT+WGPRS=2,1,3
Note:
Set <cid>=3 to be automatically activated after
initialization
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
GPRS
parameters customization: +WGPRS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 114
Command
Responses
AT+WGPRS=7,1
Note:
Set automatic re-attachment to the network and
reactivation
of PDP context in case of change of operator for
MCC/MNC
OK
AT+WGPRS=4,,,8
Note:
Choose GPRS multislot class 8
OK
AT+WGPRS=8,,,10
Note:
Choose EGPRS multislot class 10
OK
Note:
Choose EGPRS multislot class for an EGPRS
compatible
Sierra Wireless embedded module other than
Q26Extreme.
+CME ERROR: 3
Note:
Choose EGPRS multislot class for Q26Extreme
embedded
module
AT+WGPRS=9,2
Note:
Read the GPRS/EGPRS/HSDPA/HSUPA network
technology
capability indication
+WGPRSIND: 0
OK
Note:
Neither GPRS nor EGPRS features supported
AT+WGPRS=9,2
Note:
Read the GPRS/EGPRS/HSDPA/HSUPA network
technology
capability indication
+WGPRSIND: 3
OK
Note:
Neither HSDPA nor HSUPA supported (3G R99 only)
AT+WGPRS=9,1
Note :
Activate GPRS/EGPRS/HSDPA/HSUPA network
technology
capability indication
OK
+WGPRSIND: 1
Note:
Immediate unsolicited response after activation
+WGPRSIND: 2
Note:
Immediate unsolicited response after the network
technology
capability changed
AT+WGPRS=9,1,1
Note :
Activate GPRS/EGPRS network technology capability
and
(modulation &) coding schemes indication
OK
Note:
EGPRS capabilities detected and changed +WGPRSIND: 1,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
+WGPRSIND: 2,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
Note:
Immediate unsolicited response after the network
technology
capability changed
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
GPRS
parameters customization: +WGPRS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 115
Command
Responses
AT+CGDCONT=1,"IP","internet"
ATD*99***1#
Note:
Request the GPRS IP service
OK
+WGPRSIND: 2,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,7,0
+WGPRSIND: 2,,,,,,,0,,,,,,,,7,0
+WGPRSIND: 2,,,,,,,0,,,,,,,,4,0
+WGPRSIND:
2,,,,,,,7,,,,,,9,10,9,0
+WGPRSIND:
2,,,,,,,7,,,,,,0,0,0,10
+WGPRSIND:
2,,,,,,,0,,,,,,0,0,0,10
+WGPRSIND:
2,,,,,,,0,,,,,,9,9,9,9
+WGPRSIND:
2,,,,0,,,,,,0,0,4,4,,,
+WGPRSIND:
2,,,,,,,,7,,0,0,4,4,,,
+WGPRSIND:
2,,,,,,,,0,,0,0,4,4,,,
Note:
Immediate unsolicited response after each time the
(modulation
&) coding scheme are modified during the transfer
AT+WGPRS=9,2
Note :
Read GPRS/EGPRS network capability indication
+WGPRSIND: 2
OK
AT+WGPRS=9,2,1
Note :
Read the current GPRS/EGPRS network capability
and
(modulation &) coding schemes
+WGPRSIND:
2,,,,,,,,0,,0,0,4,4,,,
OK
AT+WGPRS?
Note:
Read values for non EGPRS compatible embedded
module
+WGPRS: 0,1
+WGPRS: 1,0
+WGPRS: 2,0,1
+WGPRS: 2,1,3
+WGPRS: 3,0
+WGPRS: 4,8
+WGPRS: 5,0
+WGPRS: 6,0
+WGPRS: 7,1
+WGPRS: 9,1,1
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
GPRS
parameters customization: +WGPRS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 116
Command
Responses
AT+WGPRS?
Note:
Read values for EGPRS compatible embedded
module.
EGPRS class is 10.
+WGPRS: 0,1
+WGPRS: 1,0
+WGPRS: 2,0,1
+WGPRS: 2,1,3
+WGPRS: 3,0
+WGPRS: 4,8
+WGPRS: 5,0
+WGPRS: 6,0
+WGPRS: 7,1
+WGPRS: 8,10
Note:
CPU.EGPRS class is 10.
+WGPRS: 9,1,1
Note:
GPRS/EGPRS service indication activated.
OK
14.2.6.
Notes
Additional
information for <class>:
Multislot
class Maximum number of slots Minimum number of slots Type of MS
Rx Tx Sum Tta Ttb Tra Trb
2 2 1 3 3 2 3 1 1
8 4 1 5 3 1 2 1 1
10 4 2 5 3 1 2 1 1
12 4 4 5 2 1 2 1 1
Type 1 MS are not
required to transmit and receive at the same time.
When the embedded
module is set in the "CG" class, the ME always automatically performs
a GPRS
attachment after
init, so AT+WGPRS? always gives +WGPRS: 0,0 for the parameter 0.
Additional
information for <mode>= 9:
When
the user enables the GPRS/EGPRS/HSDPA/HSUPA network availability and
(modulation &)
coding scheme indication, the embedded module returns OK response, and it
sends immediately an
unsolicited response.
The
unsolicited responses are sent to all ports.
When
the GPRS/EGPRS/HSDPA/HSUPA network technology capability and (modulation &)
coding scheme
indication is enabled (with + WGPRS AT command), under the following
conditions, an
unsolicited response +WGPRSIND will be returned by the embedded module:
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
GPRS
parameters customization: +WGPRS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 117
each time GPRS or EGPRS
technologies availability are detected on the used network,
even if the Sierra
Wireless embedded modules is only GPRS capable
each time HSDPA or HSUPA
technology availability is detected on the used network due
to intra PLMN handover
(UMTS<->GSM) or inter system handover (for 3G supported
embedded module
only)
the (modulation &)
coding scheme used at the beginning of each transfer (for
GPRS/EGPRS
technology only)
each time the (modulation
&) coding scheme are modified during the transfer (for
GPRS/EGPRS
technology only)
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
Define
PDP Context +CGDCONT
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 118
14.3.
Define PDP Context +CGDCONT
14.3.1.
Description
This command
specifies PDP context parameter values for a PDP context identified by the
local
context
identification parameter.
Four PDP contexts
can be defined through Sierra Wireless OS.
14.3.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CGDCONT=<cid>[,<PDP_type>[,<APN>[,<PDP_addr>[,<d_comp>[,<h_comp>]]]]]
OK
Read command
AT+CGDCONT?
+CGDCONT:
<cid>,<PDP_type>,<APN>,<PDP_addr>,<d_comp>,<h_comp>
[+CGDCONT:
<cid>,<PDP_type>,<APN>,<PDP_addr>,<d_comp>,<h_comp>
[
]]
OK
Test command
AT+CGDCONT=?
+CGDCONT: (list of supported
<cid>s),<PDP_type>,,,(list of supported
<d_comp>s),(list of
supported <h_comp>s)
[+CGDCONT: (list of supported
<cid>s),<PDP_type>,,,(list of supported
<d_comp>s),(list of
supported <h_comp>s)[
]]
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
Define
PDP Context +CGDCONT
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 119
14.3.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<cid>:
PDP context identifier
range: 1-4
integer type
<PDP_type>:
type of packet data protocol
"IP" Internet
Protocol (IETF STD 5)
"PPP" Point to
Point Protocol (IETF STD 51)
<APN>:
access point name: logical name that is used to select the GGSN
or the external
packet data network.
string type
If the value is null or
omitted, then the subscription value will be
requested
<PDP_addr>:
PDP address: identifies the MT in the address space applicable
to the PDP
If the value is null or
omitted, then a value may be provided by the TE during the PDP
startup procedure or a
dynamic address will be requested.
The read form of the
command will return the null string even if an address has been
allocated during the PDP
startup procedure. The allocated address may be read
using the +CGPADDR
command.
string type
<d_comp>:
PDP data compression mode
0 OFF (default value)
1 ON
<h_comp>:
PDP header compression mode
0 OFF (default value)
1 ON
14.3.4.
Parameter Storage
The parameters are
stored in EEPROM without using the AT&W command.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
Define
PDP Context +CGDCONT
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 120
14.3.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CGDCONT=? +CGDCONT:
(1-4),"IP",,,(0-1),(0-1)
+CGDCONT:
(1-4),"PPP",,,0,0
OK
AT+CGDCONT=1,"IP","internet"
OK
AT+CGDCONT? +CGDCONT: 1,
"IP", "internet",,0,0
OK
AT+CGDCONT=1
Note:
Delete <cid>=1
OK
AT+CGDCONT? OK
14.3.6.
Notes
The data compression
algorithm provided in SNDCP is V.42bis.
Due to Sierra
Wireless choice, 4 PDP contexts can be specified with only one activated at the
same
time.
A special form of
the set command, AT+CGDCONT=<cid> causes the values for context number
<cid> to
become undefined.
The embedded module
supports only the PAP protocol for legacy products.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
GPRS
Attach or Detach +CGATT
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 121
14.4.
GPRS Attach or Detach +CGATT
14.4.1.
Description
This command is used
to attach the MT to, or detach the MT from the GPRS service. After the
command has
completed, the MT remains in V.25 ter command state [3]. If the MT is already
in the
requested state, the
command is ignored and the OK response is returned.
Any active PDP
contexts will be automatically deactivated when the attachment state changes to
detached.
14.4.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CGATT=<state>
OK
Read command
AT+CGATT?
+CGATT: <state>
OK
Test command
AT+CGATT=?
+CGATT: (list of supported
<state>s)
OK
14.4.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<state>:
state of GPRS attachment
0 detached
1 attached
2 combined detach (GPRS
and GSM detach in the same network request)
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
GPRS
Attach or Detach +CGATT
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 122
14.4.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
14.4.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CGATT=1 OK
AT+CGATT? +CGATT: 1
OK
AT+CGATT=? +CGATT: (0-2)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
PDP
Context Activate or Deactivate +CGACT
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 123
14.5.
PDP Context Activate or Deactivate +CGACT
14.5.1.
Description
This command is used
to activate or deactivate the specified PDP context(s). After the command has
completed, the MT
remains in V.25ter command state. If any PDP context is already in the
requested
state, the state for
that context remains unchanged.
14.5.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CGACT=<state>[,<cid>[,<cid>[,
]]]
OK
Read command
AT+CGACT?
+CGACT:
<cid>,<state>
[+CGACT:
<cid>,<state>[
]]
OK
Test command
AT+CGACT=?
+CGACT: (list of supported
<state>s)
OK
14.5.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<state>:
state of PDP context activation
0 deactivated
1 activated
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
PDP
Context Activate or Deactivate +CGACT
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 124
<cid>:
PDP context identifier
range: 1-4
integer type
14.5.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
14.5.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CGDCONT=1,"IP","APN"
OK
AT+CGACT=1,1 OK
AT+CGACT? +CGACT: 1,1
OK
AT+CGACT=? +CGACT: (0-1)
OK
AT+CGACT=0
Note:
deactivate all contexts
OK
AT+CGACT=1
Note:
activate first possible context
OK
14.5.6.
Notes
Before the
activation of the context, the MT has to attach itself to the GPRS network, if
necessary.
If a GPRS PPP
session is already running, the setting of a CSD (GSM data call) is not
supported.
If the MT is not
GPRS attached when the activation form of the command is executed, the MT first
performs a GPRS
attach and then attempts to activate the specified contexts. If the attach
fails, then
the MT responds with
ERROR. Or if extended error responses are enabled, with the appropriate
failure-to-attach
error message.
If no <cid>s
are specified, the activation form of the command activates the first possible
within the
defined contexts. If
no <cid>s are specified, the deactivation form of the command deactivates
all
active contexts.
One PDP context can
be activated through Sierra Wireless OS at the same time.
When
"AT+CGACT?" is sent, only the status of defined and valid PDP
contexts are listed. The line
"+CGACT:
0,0", which appears in the previous software version, is not returned from
OS 6.61.
Activation of
multiple PDP contexts with a single command is successful only when all
specified CIDs
are valid. If not an
error is returned.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
Request
GPRS IP Service D
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 125
14.6.
Request GPRS IP Service D
14.6.1.
Description
This command causes
the MT to perform whatever actions are necessary to establish communication
between the TE and
the external PDN.
The V.25ter
"D" (Dial) command causes the MT to enter the V.25ter online data
state and, with the
TE, to start the
specified layer 2 protocol. The MT returns CONNECT to confirm acceptance of the
command prior to
entering the V.25ter online data state. No further commands may follow on the
AT
command line.
The detailed
behavior after the online data state has been entered is described briefly in
clause 9, for
IP, of GSM
07.60.[17] GPRS attachment and PDP context activation procedures may take place
prior
to or during the PDP
startup if they have not already been performed using the +CGATT and
+CGACT commands.
14.6.2.
Syntax
Action command
ATD*<GPRS_SC_IP>[***<cid>]#
CONNECT
Read command
None
Test command
None
14.6.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<GPRS_SC_IP>:
GPRS Service Code for IP
digit string (value 99),
which identifies a request to use the GPRS with IP (PDP types
IP and PPP)
<cid>:
PDP context identifier
range: 1-4
integer type
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
Request
GPRS IP Service D
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 126
14.6.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
14.6.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
ATD*99***1# CONNECT
14.6.6.
Notes
If <cid> is
supported, its usage is the same as in the +CGDATA command. The +CGDCONT,
+CGQREQ, etc.
commands may then be used in the embedded module initialization AT command
string to set values
for PDP type, APN, QoS etc
If <cid> is
not supported or is supported but omitted, the MT attempts to activate the
context using the
'Empty PDP type'
(3GPP TS 24.008, refer to [8]). No PDP address or APN is
sent in this case and
only one PDP context
subscription record is present in the HLR for this subscriber.
If a GPRS PPP
session is already running, the setting of a CSD (GSM data call) is not
supported.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
Enter
Data State +CGDATA
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 127
14.7.
Enter Data State +CGDATA
14.7.1.
Description
This command causes
the MT to perform the necessary actions to set up communication between the
TE and the network.
This may include performing a GPRS attach and one PDP context activation.
GPRS attachment and
PDP context activation procedures may take place prior to or during the PDP
startup if they have
not already been performed using the +CGATT and +CGACT commands.
If the activation is
successful, data transfer may proceed.
After data transfer
and layer 2 protocol termination procedure completion, the V.25ter command
state
is re-entered and
the MT returns the final result code OK.
14.7.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CGDATA[=<cid>]
CONNECT
Read command
None
Test command
AT+CGDATA=?
+CGDATA:
OK
14.7.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<cid>:
PDP context identifier
range: 1-4
integer type
14.7.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
Enter
Data State +CGDATA
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 128
14.7.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CGDATA=? +CGDATA:
"PPP"
OK
AT+CGDATA=1 CONNECT
14.7.6.
Notes
If no <cid> is
given, the MT attempts to activate the context with available information. The
other
context parameters
are set to their default values (no APN, default QoS parameters, dynamic IP
address requested).
In case of abnormal
termination or start up, the V.25ter command state is reentered and the MT
returns the final
result code NO CARRIER or, if enabled, "+CME ERROR". Attach, activate
and other
errors may be
reported.
This command has the
same effects as ATD*99***.
If a GPRS PPP
session is already running, the setting of a CSD (GSM data call) is not
supported.
This command may be
used in both normal and embedded module compatibility modes.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
GPRS
Hang-Up Command GH
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 129
14.8.
GPRS Hang-Up Command GH
14.8.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command is used by the application to release current GPRS
resources (Uplink
and/or Downlink Temporary Block Flow).
The command does not
affect an active voice call but interrupts any GPRS uplink or downlink transfer
without deactivating
the used PDP context.
14.8.2.
Syntax
Action command
ATGH
OK
Read command
None
Test command
None
14.8.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
None.
14.8.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
14.8.5.
Examples
None.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
Network
requested PDP context activation
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 130
14.9.
Network requested PDP context activation
In this mode of
operation, the MT behaves like an answering modem and accepts the normal
V.25ter
commands associated
with answering a call. If GPRS-specific configuration commands are required,
they may be sent to
the MT as part of the modem initialization commands.
The +CGAUTO command
is used to select modem compatibility mode.
Note:
This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.
14.9.1.
Automatic response to a network request for PDP
context
activation 'S0'
The V.25ter
"S0" (Automatic answer) command may be used to turn off and on the
automatic
response to a
network request for a PDP context activation.
When the
"ATS0=n" (n>0) command is received, the MT attempts to perform a
GPRS attach if it is not
already attached.
Failure will result in ERROR being returned to the TE. Subsequently, the MT will
announce a network
request for PDP context activation by issuing the unsolicited result code RING
to
the TE, followed by
the intermediate result code CONNECT. The MT then enters V.25ter online data
state and follows
the same procedure as it would after having received a "AT+CGANS=1"
with no
<cid> value
specified.
Note:
The "ATS0=n" (n=0) command does not perform an automatic GPRS detach.
14.9.2.
Manual acceptance of a network request for PDP
context
activation 'A'
The V.25ter
"A" (Answer) command may be used to accept a network request for a
PDP context
activation announced
by the unsolicited result code RING. The MT responds with CONNECT, enters
V.25ter online data
state and follows the same procedure as it would after having received a
"AT+CGANS=1"
with no <cid> value specified. It is an error to issue the "A"
command when there is
no outstanding
network request.
14.9.3.
Manual rejection of a network request for PDP
context
activation "H"
The V.25ter
"H" or "H0" (On-hook) command may be used to reject a network
request for PDP
context activation
announced by the unsolicited result code RING. The MT responds with OK.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
Manual
Response to a Network Request for PDP Manual
Context
Activation +CGANS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 131
14.10.
Manual Response to a Network Request for
PDP
Manual Context Activation +CGANS
14.10.1.
Description
This command
requests the MT to respond to a network request for GPRS PDP context activation
which has been
signaled to the TE by the RING or +CRING unsolicited result code.
PDP context
activation procedures take place prior to or during the PDP startup.
14.10.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CGANS[=<response>[,<cid>]]
OK
Read command
None
Test command
AT+CGANS=?
+CGANS: (list of supported
<response>s)
OK
14.10.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<response>:
response to the request
integer type
0 reject the request
If <response> is
omitted it is assumed to be 0.
1 accept and request that
the PDP context be activated
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
Manual
Response to a Network Request for PDP Manual
Context
Activation +CGANS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 132
<cid>:
PDP context identifier
range: 1-4
integer type
14.10.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
14.10.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
RING
AT+CGANS=1,1 OK
AT+CGANS=? +CGANS: (0,1)
OK
14.10.6.
Notes
One <cid> may
be specified in order to provide the values needed for the context activation
request.
During the PDP startup
procedure the MT has the PDP type and the PDP address provided by the
network in the
Request PDP Context Activation message.
If a <cid> is
given, its information must match with the PDP type and PDP address in the
network
request as follows:
The
PDP type must match exactly.
The
PDP addresses are considered to match if they are identical or if the address
in the
context definition
is unspecified.
If any of this
information is in conflict, the command will fail.
The context is
activated using the values for PDP type and PDP address provided by the
network,
together with the
other information found in the PDP context definition.
After data transfer
is complete, and the layer 2 protocol termination procedure has completed
successfully, the
V.25ter command state is re-entered and the MT returns the final result code
OK.
In the event of an
erroneous termination or a failure to startup, the V.25ter command state is
reentered
and the MT returns
the final result code NO CARRIER or, if enabled, +CME ERROR. Attach,
activate and other
errors may be reported. It is also an error to issue the +CGANS command when
there is no
outstanding network request.
This command may be
used in both normal and embedded module compatibility modes.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
Automatic
Response to a Network Request for PDP Context
Activation
+CGAUTO
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 133
14.11.
Automatic Response to a Network Request for
PDP
Context Activation +CGAUTO
14.11.1.
Description
This command
disables or enables an automatic positive response (auto answer) to the receipt
of a
"Request PDP
Context Activation" message from the network. It also provides control
over the use of
the V.25ter basic
commands "S0", "A" and "H" for handling network
requests for PDP context
activation. The
setting does not affect the issuing of the unsolicited result code RING or
+CRING.
14.11.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CGAUTO=<n>
OK
Read command
AT+CGAUTO?
+CGAUTO: <n>
OK
Test command
AT+CGAUTO=?
+CGAUTO: (list of supported
<n>s)
OK
14.11.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<n>:
automatic response mode
0 turn off automatic
response for GPRS only
GPRS network requests are
manually accepted or rejected by the +CGANS
command.
1 turn on automatic
response for GPRS only
GPRS network requests are
automatically accepted.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
Automatic
Response to a Network Request for PDP Context
Activation
+CGAUTO
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 134
2 embedded module
compatibility mode, GPRS only
Automatic acceptance of
GPRS network requests is controlled by the "S0"
command. Manual control
uses the "A" and "H" commands, respectively, to
accept and reject GPRS
requests (+CGANS may also be used). Incoming circuit
switched calls can be
neither manually nor automatically answered.
3 embedded module
compatibility mode, GPRS and circuit switched calls (default
value)
Automatic acceptance of
both GPRS network requests and incoming circuit
switched calls is controlled
by the "S0" command. Manual control uses the "A"
and "H"
commands, respectively, to accept and reject GPRS requests (+CGANS
may also be used).
14.11.4.
Parameter Storage
The <n>
parameter is stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can
be
restored using
AT&F.
14.11.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CGAUTO=? +CGAUTO: (0-3)
OK
AT+CGAUTO=2 OK
AT+CGAUTO? +CGAUTO: 2
OK
14.11.6.
Notes
In class C GPRS the
embedded module cannot simultaneously receive GPRS and GSM incoming
calls.
When the AT+CGAUTO=0
command is received, the MT will not perform a GPRS detach if it is
attached.
Subsequently, when the MT announces a network request for PDP context
activation by
issuing the
unsolicited result code RING or +CRING, the TE may manually accept or reject
the
request by issuing
the +CGANS command or may simply ignore the network request.
When the AT+CGAUTO=1
command is received, the MT will attempt to perform a GPRS attach if it is
not already
attached. Failure will result in ERROR or, if enabled, "+CME ERROR:
<err>" being
returned to the TE.
Subsequently, when the MT announces a network request for PDP context
activation by
issuing the unsolicited result code RING or +CRING to the TE, this is followed
by the
intermediate result
code CONNECT. The MT then enters V.25ter online data state and follows the
same procedure as it
would after having received an AT+CGANS=1 with <cid> values specified.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
Quality
of Service Profile (Minimum acceptable) +CGQMIN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 135
14.12.
Quality of Service Profile (Minimum
acceptable)
+CGQMIN
14.12.1.
Description
This command allows
the TE to specify a minimum acceptable profile which is checked by the MT
against the negotiated
profile returned in the "Activate PDP Context Accept" message.
14.12.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CGQMIN=<cid>[,<precedence>[,<delay>[,<reliability>[,<peak>[,<mean>]]]]]
OK
Read command
AT+CGQMIN?
+CGQMIN:
<cid>,<precedence>,<delay>,<reliability>,<peak>,<mean>
[+CGQMIN:
<cid>,<precedence>,<delay>,<reliability>,<peak>,<mean>
[
]]
OK
Test command
AT+CGQMIN=?
+CGQMIN: <PDP_type>,(list
of supported <precedence>s),(list of supported
<delay>s),(list of
supported <reliability>s),(list of supported <peak>s),(list of
supported <mean>s)
[+CGQMIN: <PDP_type>,(list
of supported <precedence>s),(list of supported
<delay>s),(list of
supported <reliability>s),(list of supported <peak>s),(list of
supported <mean>s)[
]]
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
Quality
of Service Profile (Minimum acceptable) +CGQMIN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 136
14.12.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<cid>:
PDP context identifier
range: 1-4
integer type
<precedence>:
precedence class
integer type
0 subscribed precedence
(subscribed by the Network by default if value is omitted)
1 high priority (service
commitments shall be maintained ahead of precedence
classes 2 and 3)
2 normal priority
(service commitments shall be maintained ahead of precedence
class 3.)
3 low priority (service
commitments shall be maintained after precedence classes 1
and 2)
<delay>:
delay class (see <delay> table
below)
0 subscribed
1 delay class 1
2 delay class 2
3 delay class 3
4 delay class 4
<reliability>:
reliability class (octet 3) (see <reliability> table
below)
0 subscribed reliability
class
1 unused. If received, it
shall be interpreted as '010'
2 unacknowledged GTP;
acknowledged LLC and RLC, protected data
3 unacknowledged GTP and
LLC; acknowledged RLC, protected data
4 unacknowledged GTP,
LLC, and RLC, protected data
5 unacknowledged GTP,
LLC, and RLC, unprotected data
<peak>:
peak throughput class
integer type
0 subscribed
1 up to 1 000 (8 kbits/s)
2 up to 2 000 (16
kbits/s)
3 up to 4 000 (32
kbits/s)
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
Quality
of Service Profile (Minimum acceptable) +CGQMIN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 137
4 up to 8 000 (64
kbits/s)
5 up to 16 000 (128
kbits/s)
6 up to 32 000 (256
kbits/s)
7 up to 64 000 (512
kbits/s)
8 up to 128 000 (1 024
kbits/s)
9 up to 256 000 (2 048
kbits/s)
<mean>:
mean throughput class
range: 0-31
integer type
14.12.4.
Parameter Storage
The parameters are
stored in EEPROM without using the AT&W command.
14.12.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CGQMIN=? +CGQMIN:"IP",(0-3),(0-4),(0-5),(0-9),(0-31)
+CGQMIN:"PPP",(0-3),(0-4),(0-5),(0-9),(0-31)
OK
AT+CGDCONT=1,"IP","APN"
OK
AT+CGQMIN=1,1,4,5,2,31
OK
AT+CGQMIN? +CGQMIN:
1,1,4,5,2,31
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
Quality
of Service Profile (Minimum acceptable) +CGQMIN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 138
14.12.6.
Notes
A special form of
the set command, AT+CGQMIN=<cid> causes the minimum acceptable profile
for
context number
<cid> to become undefined. In this case no check is made against the
negotiated
profile.
Detailed information
regarding the parameters:
<delay>
delay
(maximum values)
SDU size:
128 bytes SDU size: 1024 bytes
Delay
Class
mean
transfert
delay
(sec)
95 percentile
delay
mean
transfert
delay
(sec)
95
percentile
delay
0 subscribes subscribed by
the Nwk / default if value
is omitted
1 (Predictive) < 0.5
< 1.5 < 2 < 7
2 (Predictive) < 5 <
25 < 15 < 75
3 (Predictive) < 50 <
250 < 75 < 375
4 (Best effort) unspecified
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
Quality
of Service Profile (Minimum acceptable) +CGQMIN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 139
<reliability>
Reliability
Class
GTP Mode
LLC Frame
Mode
LLC Data
Protection
RLC Block
Mode
Traffic
Type
0 subscribed subscribed
by the Nwk / default if value is omitted
1 unacknowledged
acknowledged protected acknowledged non real-time
traffic, errorsensitive
application that
can cope with
infrequent data
loss.
2 unacknowledged acknowledged
protected acknowledged non real-time
traffic, errorsensitive
application that
can cope with
infrequent data
loss.
3 unacknowledged
unacknowledged protected acknowledged non real-time
traffic, errorsensitive
application that
can cope with
data
loss,GMM/SM,and
SMS.
4 unacknowledged
unacknowledged protected unacknowledged real-time traffic,
error sensitive
application that
can cope with
data loss.
5 unacknowledged
unacknowledged unprotected unacknowledged real-time traffic,
error non sensitive
application that
can cope with
data loss.
For real-time traffic,
the QoS profile also requires appropriate settings for delay and throughput.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
Quality
of Service Profile (Requested) +CGQREQ
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 140
14.13.
Quality of Service Profile (Requested)
+CGQREQ
14.13.1.
Description
This command allows
the TE to specify a Quality of Service Profile that is used when the MT sends
an Activate PDP
Context Request message to the network.
14.13.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CGQREQ=[<cid>[,<precedence>[,<delay>[,<reliability>[,<peak>[,<mean>]]]]]]
OK
Read command
AT+CGQREQ?
+CGQREQ:
<cid>,<precedence>,<delay>,<reliability>,<peak>,<mean>
[+CGQREQ:
<cid>,<precedence>,<delay>,<reliability>,<peak>,<mean>[
]]
OK
Test command
AT+CGQREQ=?
+CGQREQ: <PDP_type>,(list
of supported <precedence>s),(list of supported
<delay>s),(list of
supported <reliability>s),(list of supported <peak>s),(list of
supported <mean>s)
[+CGQREQ: <PDP_type>,(list
of supported <precedence>s),(list of supported
<delay>s),(list of
supported <reliability>s),(list of supported <peak>s),(list of
supported <mean>s)[
]]
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
Quality
of Service Profile (Requested) +CGQREQ
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 141
14.13.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<cid>:
PDP context identifier
range: 1-4
integer type
<precedence>:
precedence class
integer type
0 subscribed precedence
(subscribed by the Network by default if value is omitted)
1 high priority (service
commitments shall be maintained ahead of precedence classes 2
and 3)
2 normal priority
(service commitments shall be maintained ahead of precedence class 3.)
3 low priority (service
commitments shall be maintained after precedence classes 1 and 2)
<delay>:
delay class (see <delay> table
below)
0 subscribed
1 delay class 1
2 delay class 2
3 delay class 3
4 delay class 4
<reliability>:
reliability class (octet 3) (see <reliability> table
below)
0 subscribed reliability
class
1 unused. If received, it
shall be interpreted as '010'
2 unacknowledged GTP;
acknowledged LLC and RLC, protected data
3 unacknowledged GTP and
LLC; acknowledged RLC, protected data
4 unacknowledged GTP,
LLC, and RLC, protected data
5 unacknowledged GTP,
LLC, and RLC, unprotected data
<peak>:
peak throughput class
integer type
0 subscribed
1 up to 1 000 (8 kbits/s)
2 up to 2 000 (16
kbits/s)
3 up to 4 000 (32
kbits/s)
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
Quality
of Service Profile (Requested) +CGQREQ
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 142
4 up to 8 000 (64
kbits/s)
5 up to 16 000 (128
kbits/s)
6 up to 32 000 (256
kbits/s)
7 up to 64 000 (512
kbits/s)
8 up to 128 000 (1 024
kbits/s)
9 up to 256 000 (2 048
kbits/s)
<mean>:
mean throughput class
integer type
0 subscribed by the Nwk /
default if value is omitted
1 100 (~0.22 bit/s)
2 200 (~0.44 bit/s)
3 500 (~1.11 bit/s)
4 1 000 (~2.2 bit/s)
5 2 000 (~4.4 bit/s)
6 5 000 (~11.1 bit/s)
7 10 000 (~22 bit/s)
8 20 000 (~44 bit/s)
9 50 000 (~111 bit/s)
10 100 000 (~0.22
kbits/s)
11 200 000 (~0.44
kbits/s)
12 500 000 (~1.11
kbits/s)
13 1 000 000 (~2.2
kbits/s)
14 2 000 000 (~4.4
kbits/s)
15 5 000 000 (~11.1
kbits/s)
16 10 000 000 (~22
kbits/s)
17 20 000 000 (~44
kbits/s)
18 50 000 000 (~111
kbits/s)
31 Best effort
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
Quality
of Service Profile (Requested) +CGQREQ
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 143
14.13.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
14.13.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CGQREQ=? +CGQREQ:"IP",(0-3),(0-4),(0-5),(0-9),(0-31)
+CGQREQ:"PPP",(0-3),(0-4),(0-5),(0-9),(0-31)
OK
AT+CGDCONT=1,"IP","APN"
OK
AT+CGQREQ=1,1,4,5,2,31
OK
AT+CGQREQ? +CGQREQ:
1,1,4,5,2,31
OK
14.13.6.
Notes
A special form of
the set command, AT+CGQREQ=<cid> causes the requested profile for context
number <cid>
to become undefined.
Detailed information
regarding the parameters:
<delay>
delay
(maximum values)
SDU size:
128 bytes SDU size: 1024 bytes
Delay
Class
mean transfert
delay
(sec)
95
percentile
delay
mean
transfert
delay
(sec)
95
percentile
delay
0 subscribes subscribed
by the Nwk / default if value is omitted
1 (Predictive) < 0.5
< 1.5 < 2 < 7
2 (Predictive) < 5
< 25 < 15 < 75
3 (Predictive) < 50
< 250 < 75 < 375
4 (Best effort)
unspecified
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
Quality
of Service Profile (Requested) +CGQREQ
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 144
<reliability>
Reliability
Class
GTP Mode
LLC Frame
Mode
LLC Data
Protection
RLC Block
Mode
Traffic
Type
0 subscribed subscribed
by the Nwk / default if value is omitted
1 unacknowledged
acknowledged protected acknowledged non real-time
traffic, errorsensitive
application that
can cope with
infrequent data
loss.
2 unacknowledged
acknowledged protected acknowledged non real-time
traffic, errorsensitive
application that
can cope with
infrequent data
loss.
3 unacknowledged
unacknowledged protected acknowledged non real-time
traffic, errorsensitive
application that
can cope with
data
loss,GMM/SM,and
SMS.
4 unacknowledged
unacknowledged protected unacknowledged real-time traffic,
error sensitive
application that
can cope with
data loss.
5 unacknowledged
unacknowledged unprotected unacknowledged real-time traffic,
error non sensitive
application that
can cope with
data loss.
For real-time traffic,
the QoS profile also requires appropriate settings for delay and throughput.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
PDP
Context Modify +CGCMOD
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 145
14.14.
PDP Context Modify +CGCMOD
14.14.1.
Description
This command is used
to modify the specified PDP context with respects to QoS profiles. After the
command has
completed, the MT returns to V.25ter online data state.
14.14.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CGCMOD[=<cid>[,<cid>[,
]]]
OK
Read command
None
Test command
AT+CGCMOD=?
+CGCMOD: (list of <cid>s
associated with active contexts)
OK
14.14.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<cid>:
PDP context identifier
range: 1-4
integer type
14.14.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
PDP
Context Modify +CGCMOD
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 146
14.14.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CGDCONT=1,"IP","APN"
OK
AT+CGACT=1,1 OK
AT+CGCMOD=1 OK
AT+CGCMOD=? +CGCMOD: (1)
OK
AT+CGCMOD
Notes:
Modify all the active contexts
OK
14.14.6.
Notes
Once the PDP context
is activated, this command can only be used to modify the QoS which is set by
the command +CGQREQ.
It cannot be used to modify the minimum acceptable QoS (set by
+CGQMIN).
If no <cid>s
are specified the activation form of the command modifies all active contexts.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
GPRS
network registration status +CGREG
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 147
14.15.
GPRS network registration status +CGREG
14.15.1.
Description
This command
controls the presentation of an unsolicited result code +CGREG when there is a
change in the MT's
GPRS network registration status or when there is a change of the network cell.
14.15.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CGREG=<n>
OK
Read command
AT+CGREG?
+CGREG:
<n>,<stat>[,<lac>,<ci>[,<AcT>]]
OK
Test command
AT+CGREG=?
+CGREG: (list of supported
<n>s)
OK
Unsolicited response
+CGREG:
<stat>[,<lac>,<ci>[,<AcT>]
14.15.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<n>:
unsolicited result code activation mode
0 disable network
registration unsolicited result code (default value)
1 enable network
registration unsolicited result code +CGREG: <stat>
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
GPRS
network registration status +CGREG
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 148
2 enable network
registration and location information unsolicited result code
+CGREG:
<stat>[,<lac>,<ci>[,<AcT>]]
<stat>:
network registration state
For <stat> = 1 or 5
(i.e. the embedded module is registered on a network), the next
parameter couple is
returned if <mode> = 2
0 not registered, ME is
not currently searching for a new operator to register to
1 registered, home
network
2 not registered, but ME
is currently searching for a new operator to register to
3 registration denied
4 unknown
5 registered, roaming
<lac>:
string type;
two byte location area
code in hexadecimal format (e.g. "00C3" equals 195 in
decimal)
<ci>:
string type;
four byte UTRAN/GERAN
cell ID in hexadecimal format
<AcT>:
access technology of the registered network
0 GSM
2 UTRAN
14.15.4.
Parameter Storage
The <n>
parameter is stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can
be
restored using
AT&F.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
GPRS
network registration status +CGREG
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 149
14.15.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CGREG=0
Note:
Disable network registration unsolicited result code
OK
Note:
Command valid
AT+CGREG=1
Note:Enable
network registration
OK
+CGREG: 0
Note:
Command valid
AT+CGREG=2
Note:
Enable network registration unsolicited result code
registration
OK
+CGREG: 0
Note:
Command valid
AT+CGREG=? +CGREG: (0-2)
OK
Note:
0,1,2 <n> values are supported
AT+CGATT=1 OK
+CGREG:
1,"20D0","00048329",2
AT+CGREG?
Note:
Get the CGREG status
+CGREG:
2,1,"20D0","00048329",2
OK
Note:
The embedded module is registered on the home
network
with the lac=20D0 and the cell ID = 00048329 and
access
technology=2
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
GPRS
Event reporting +CGEREP
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 150
14.16.
GPRS Event reporting +CGEREP
14.16.1.
Description
This command enables
or disables sending of +CGEV unsolicited result codes from MT to TE in the
case of certain
events occurring in the GPRS MT or the network.
14.16.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CGEREP=<mode>[,<bfr>]
OK
Read command
AT+CGEREP?
+CGEREP: <mode>,<bfr>
OK
Test command
AT+CGEREP=?
+CGEREP: (list of supported
<mode>s),(list of supported <bfr>s)
OK
If
<event>=ME REJECT
Unsolicited response
+CGEV: <event>
<PDP_type>, <PDP_addr>
If
<event>= NW REACT or NW DEACT or ME DEACT
Unsolicited response
+CGEV: <event>
<PDP_type>, <PDP_addr>[,<cid>]
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
GPRS
Event reporting +CGEREP
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 151
If
<event>=NW DETACH or ME DETACH
Unsolicited response
+CGEV: <event>
If
<event>= NW CLASS or ME CLASS
Unsolicited response
+CGEV: <event>
<class>
14.16.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mode>:
buffer unsolicited result mode
0 disable buffer
unsolicited result codes (default value)
2 enable buffer
unsolicited result codes
<bfr>:
handling method for buffered result codes
0 MT buffer of
unsolicited result codes defined within this command is cleared
when <mode>=2 is
entered.
<event>:
GPRS event
ME REJECT A network
request for PDP context activation occurred when the MT was
unable to report it to
the TE with a +CRING unsolicited result code and was
automatically rejected.
NW REACT The network has
requested a context reactivation. The <cid> that was used to
reactivate the context is
provided if known to the MT.
NW DEACT The network has
forced a context deactivation. The <cid> that was used to
activate the context is
provided if known to the MT.
ME DEACT The mobile
equipment has forced a context deactivation. The <cid> that was
used to activate the
context is provided if known to the MT.
NW DETACH The network has
forced a GPRS detach. This implies that all active contexts
have been deactivated.
These are not reported separately.
ME DETACH The mobile
equipment has forced a GPRS detach. This implies that all active
contexts have been
deactivated. These are not reported separately.
NW CLASS The network has
forced a change of MS class. The highest available class is
reported.
ME CLASS The mobile
equipment has forced a change of MS class. The highest available
class is reported.
<PDP_type>:
type of packet data protocol
"IP" Internet
Protocol (IETF STD 5)
"PPP" Point to
Point Protocol (IETF STD 51)
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
GPRS
Event reporting +CGEREP
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 152
<PDP_addr>:
PDP address
identifies the MT in the
address space applicable to the PDP
string type
<cid>:
PDP context identifier
range: 1-4
integer type
14.16.4.
Parameter Storage
The <mode>
parameter is stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can
be
restored using
AT&F.
14.16.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CGEREP=? +CGEREP:
(0,2),(0)
OK
AT+CGEREP=2 OK
AT+CGEREP? +CGEREP: 2,0
OK
+CGEV: ME DEACT "IP",
"10.15.139.22",1
Note:
PDP context deactivation
AT Commands Interface Guide
for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
Select
Service for MO SMS Messages +CGSMS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 153
14.17.
Select Service for MO SMS Messages
+CGSMS
14.17.1.
Description
This command is used
to specify the service or service preference that the MT will use to send MO
SMS messages.
14.17.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CGSMS=<service>
OK
Read command
AT+CGSMS?
+CGSMS: <service>
OK
Test command
AT+CGSMS=?
+CGSMS: (list of supported
<service>s)
OK
14.17.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<service>:
service or service preference to be used
0 GPRS
1 circuit switched
(default value)
2 GPRS preferred (use
circuit switched if GPRS is not available)
3 circuit switched
preferred (use GPRS if circuit switched not available)
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
Select
Service for MO SMS Messages +CGSMS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 154
14.17.4.
Parameter Storage
The parameters are
stored in EEPROM without using the AT&W command.
14.17.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CGSMS=? +CGSMS: (0-3)
OK
AT+CGSMS=0 OK
AT+CGSMS? +CGSMS: 0
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
Show
PDP Address +CGPADDR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 155
14.18.
Show PDP Address +CGPADDR
14.18.1.
Description
This command returns
a list of PDP addresses for the specified context identifiers.
14.18.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CGPADDR[=<cid>[,<cid>[,
]]]
+CGPADDR:
<cid>,<PDP_addr>
[+CGPADDR:
<cid>,<PDP_addr>[
]]
OK
Read command
None
Test command
AT+CGPADDR=?
+CGPADDR: (list of defined
<cid>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
Show
PDP Address +CGPADDR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 156
14.18.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<PDP_addr>:
PDP address: identifies the MT in the address space applicable
to the PDP
string type
The address may be static
or dynamic. For a static address, it will be the one set by
the +CGDCONT command when
the context was defined.
For a dynamic address, it
will be the one assigned during the last PDP context
activation that used the
context definition referred to by <cid>. <PDP_addr> is
omitted if none is
available.
<cid>:
PDP context identifier
range: 1-4
integer type
If no <cid> is
specified, the addresses for all defined contexts are returned.
14.18.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
14.18.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CGPADDR=? +CGAPDDR:
(1,2,4)
OK
AT+CGPADDR=2 +CGPADDR=2,"10.3.73.151"
OK
AT+CGPADDR +CGPADDR: 1,
+CGPADDR:
2,"10.3.73.151"
+CGPADDR: 4,
OK
Note:
Context 2 is active
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
GSM/GPRS
Tx Burst Indication +WTBI
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 157
14.19.
GSM/GPRS Tx Burst Indication +WTBI
14.19.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command allows enable/disable GSM/GPRS Tx Burst Indication. This
is to use a GPIO pin
toggle to inform customer application of coming GPRS Tx burst.
Note:
This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.
14.19.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WTBI=<mode>
OK
Read command
AT+WTBI?
+WTBI:<mode>
OK
Test command
AT+WTBI=?
+WTBI: (list of supported
<mode>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
GSM/GPRS
Tx Burst Indication +WTBI
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 158
14.19.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mode>:
enable/disable the Tx burst indication.
0 disable
Note: A
reset is needed to take into account the deactivation
1 enable
Note: A
reset is not needed to take into account the activation
14.19.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
14.19.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WTBI=? +WTBI: (0,1)
OK
AT+WTBI? +WTBI: 0
OK
AT+WTBI=1
Note:
Enable the Tx Burst indication
OK
AT+WTBI? +WTBI: 1
OK
AT+WTBI=2 +CME ERROR: 3
Note:
Index out of range
14.19.6.
Notes
14.19.6.1.
Functional description
Burst Indication is
provided by the mean of an output (GPIO) signal changing of state before and
after
each GSM, GPRS or
EDGE TX burst.
Before TX burst
rising, a time anticipation is applied to Burst Indication GPIO state change.
This
allows enough time
for application to switch off peripherals properly.
After TX burst
falling, a time delay is applied to Burst Indication GPIO state change. This
ensures
current consumption
peak required by GSM, GPRS or EDGE activity to be completely finished.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
GSM/GPRS
Tx Burst Indication +WTBI
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 159
14.19.6.2.
Timing Overview
Time distribution of
power supply between application peripherals and GSM, GPRS or EDGE
depends on network
configuration and traffic. Typical cases and time ranges are derived from GSM
frame interrupt
period (4.615 ms) and GPRS slot allocation, as shown hereafter.
GPRS class 8
(4RX/1TX)
GPRS class 6
(3RX/2TX)
GSM/ GPRS class
1(1RX/1TX)
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
3G
Quality of Service Profile (Requested) +CGEQREQ
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 160
14.20.
3G Quality of Service Profile (Requested)
+CGEQREQ
14.20.1.
Description
This command allows
the TE to specify a UMTS Quality of Service Profile that is used when the MT
sends an Activate
PDP Context Request message to the network.
The set command
specifies a profile for the context identified by the (local) context
identification
parameter, <cid>.
The specified profile will be stored in the MT and sent to the network only at
activation or
MS-initiated modification of the related context. Since this is the same
parameter that is
used in the +CGDCONT
and +CGDSCONT commands, the +CGEQREQ command is effectively an
extension to these
commands. The QoS profile consists of a number of parameters, each of which
may be set to a
separate value.
A special form of
the set command, +CGEQREQ=<cid> causes the requested
profile for context
number <cid> to
become undefined.
The read command
returns the current settings for each defined context.
The test command
returns values supported as a compound value. If the MT supports several PDP
types, the parameter
value ranges for each PDP type are returned on a separate line.
14.20.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CGEQREQ=[<cid>[,<Traffic
class>[,<Maximum bitrate UL>[,<Maximum bitrate
DL>[,<Guaranteed
bitrate UL>[,<Guaranteed bitrate DL>[,<Delivery
order>[,<Maximum
SDU
size>[,<SDU error ratio>[,<Residual bit error
ratio>[,<Delivery of erroneous
SDUs>[,<Transfer
delay>[,<Traffic handling priority>[,<Source statistics
descriptor>[,<Signalling
indication>]]]]]]]]]]]]]]]
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
3G
Quality of Service Profile (Requested) +CGEQREQ
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 161
Read command
AT+CGEQREQ?
+CGEQREQ:
<cid>,<Traffic class>,<Maximum bitrate UL>,<Maximum
bitrate
DL>,<Guaranteed bitrate
UL>,<Guaranteed bitrate DL>,<Delivery order>,<Maximum SDU
size>,<SDU error
ratio>,<Residual bit error ratio> ,<Delivery of erroneous
SDUs>,<Transfer
delay>,<Traffic handling priority>,<Source statistics
descriptor>,<Signalling
indication>
[<CR><LF>+CGEQREQ:
<cid>,<Traffic class>,<Maximum bitrate UL>,<Maximum
bitrate
DL>,<Guaranteed bitrate
UL>,<Guaranteed bitrate DL>,<Delivery order>,<Maximum SDU
size>,<SDU error
ratio>,<Residual bit error ratio>,<Delivery of erroneous
SDUs>,<Transfer
delay>,<Traffic handling priority>,<Source statistics
descriptor>,<Signalling
indication>[
]]
OK
Test command
AT+CGEQREQ=?
+CGEQREQ: <PDP_type>,(list
of supported <Traffic class>s),(list of supported
<Maximum bitrate
UL>s),(list of supported <Maximum bitrate DL>s),(list of supported
<Guaranteed bitrate
UL>s),(list of supported <Guaranteed bitrate DL>s),(list of
supported <Delivery
order>s),(list of supported <Maximum SDU size>s),(list of
supported <SDU error
ratio>s) ,(list of supported <Residual bit error
ratio>s),(list of supported
<Delivery of erroneous SDUs>s),(list of supported
<Transfer delay>s),(list
of supported <Traffic handling priority>s) ,(list of
supported <Source statistics
descriptor>s) ,(list of supported <Signalling
indication>s)
[<CR><LF>+CGEQREQ:
<PDP_type>,(list of supported <Traffic class>s) ,(list of
supported <Maximum bitrate
UL>s),(list of supported <Maximum bitrate DL>s),(list of
supported <Guaranteed bitrate
UL>s),(list of supported <Guaranteed bitrate
DL>s),(list of supported
<Delivery order>s),(list of supported <Maximum SDU
size>s),(list of supported
<SDU error ratio>s),(list of supported <Residual bit
error ratio>s),(list of
supported <Delivery of erroneous SDUs>s),(list of supported
<Transfer delay>s),(list
of supported <Traffic handling priority>s) ,(list of
supported <Source statistics
descriptor>s) ,(list of supported <Signalling
indication>s)[
]]
OK
14.20.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<cid>:
a particular PDP context definition (see +CGDCONT
and +CGDSCONT command)
integer type
<Traffic
class>: type of application for which the UMTS bearer service is
optimised (please refer to Table
1: UMTS QoS classes)
integer type
0 conversational
1 streaming
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
3G
Quality of Service Profile (Requested) +CGEQREQ
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 162
2 interactive
3 background
4 subscribed value
(default value)
<Maximum
bitrate UL>: maximum number of kbits/s delivered to UMTS (up-link traffic) at
a SAP
integer type
if the parameter is set
to "0", the subscribed value will be requested
this parameter should be
provided if the Traffic class is specified as conversational or
streaming
0 subscribed maximum bit
rate for uplink (default)
65535 0 kbps
1 63 in 1 kbps
increment
64 568 in 8 kbps
increments
576 - 8640 in 64 kbps
increments
<Maximum
bitrate DL>: maximum number of kbits/s delivered by UMTS (down-link traffic)
at a SAP
integer type
if the parameter is set
to "0", the subscribed value will be requested
this parameter should be
provided if the Traffic class is specified as conversational or
streaming
0 subscribed maximum bit
rate for downlink (default value)
65535 0 kbps
1 63 in 1 kbps
increment
64 568 in 8 kbps
increments
576 - 8640 in 64 kbps
increments
8640 16000 in 100 kbps
increments
<Guaranteed
bitrate UL>: guaranteed number of kbits/s delivered to UMTS (up-link traffic)
at a SAP (provided that
there is data to deliver)
integer type
if the parameter is set
to '"0", the subscribed value will be requested
this parameter should be
provided if the Traffic class is specified as conversational or
streaming
Note:
The Guaranteed bit rate for uplink value is ignored if the Traffic Class is
Interactive
class or Background class, or Maximum bit rate for uplink is set to 0
kbps.
0 subscribed maximum bit
rate for uplink (default value)
65535 0 kbps
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
3G
Quality of Service Profile (Requested) +CGEQREQ
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 163
1 63 in 1 kbps
increment
64 568 in 8 kbps
increments
576 - 8640 in 64 kbps
increments
<Guaranteed
bitrate DL>: guaranteed number of kbits/s delivered by UMTS (down-link
traffic) at a SAP (provided
that there is data to
deliver)
integer type
if the parameter is set
to "0", the subscribed value will be requested
this parameter should be
provided if the Traffic class is specified as conversational or
streaming
Note:
The Guaranteed bit rate for downlink value is ignored if the Traffic Class is
Interactive
class or Background class, or Maximum bit rate for downlink is set
to 0
kbps.
0 subscribed maximum bit
rate for downlink (default value)
65535 0 kbps
1 63 in 1 kbps
increment
64 568 in 8 kbps
increments
576 8640 in 64 kbps
increments
8640 - 16000 in 100 kbps
increments
<Delivery
order>: indicates whether the UMTS bearer shall provide in-sequence SDU
delivery or not
integer type
0 no
1 yes
2 subscribed value
(default value)
<Maximum
SDU size>: maximum allowed SDU size in octets
integer type
if the parameter is set
to "0", the subscribed value will be requested
0 subscribed maximum SDU
size (default value)
10 1500 in 10 octets
increments
1502
1510
1520
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
3G
Quality of Service Profile (Requested) +CGEQREQ
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 164
<SDU
error ratio>: target value for the fraction of SDUs lost or detected as
erroneous. SDU error ratio is
defined only for
conforming traffic. The value is specified as "mEe".
string type
Example: a target SDU
error ratio of 110-3 would be specified as '1E3' (e.g.
AT+CGEQREQ=
,"1E3",
)
"0E0" 0,
subscribed SDU error ratio (default value)
"1E2" 110-2
"7E3" 710-3
"1E3" 110-3
"1E4" 110-4
"1E5" 110-5
"1E6" 110-6
<Residual
bit error ratio>: target value for the undetected bit error ratio in the delivered
SDUs. If no error detection is
requested, Residual bit
error ratio indicates the bit error ratio in the delivered SDUs. The
value is specified as
'mEe'.
string type
Example: a target
residual bit error ratio of 510-3 would be specified as '5E3'
(e.g.
AT+CGEQREQ=
,"5E3",
)
"0E0" 0,
subscribed residual BER (default value)
"5E2" 510-2
"1E2" 110-2
"5E3" 510-3
"4E3" 410-3
"1E3" 110-3
"1E4" 110-4
"1E5" 110-5
"1E6" 110-6
"6E8" 610-8
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
3G
Quality of Service Profile (Requested) +CGEQREQ
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 165
<Delivery
of erroneous
SDUs>:
indicates whether SDUs
detected as erroneous shall be delivered or not
integer type
0 no
1 yes
2 no detect
3 subscribed value (default
value)
<Transfer
delay>: targeted time between request to transfer an SDU at one SAP to
its delivery at the other
SAP, in milliseconds
integer type
Note:
The transfer delay value is ignored, if the Traffic Class is Interactive class
or
Background
class.
0 subscribed transfer
delay (default value)
10 150 in 10 ms
increments
200 950 in 50 kbps
increments
1000 4000 in 100 ms
increments
<Traffic
handling
priority>:
relative importance for
handling of all SDUs belonging to the UMTS bearer compared to
the SDUs of other bearers
integer type
Note:
The transfer delay value is ignored if the Traffic Class is Conversation,
Streaming
class or Background class.
0 subscribed transfer
delay (default value)
1 priority level 1
2 priority level 2
3 priority level 3
<Source
statistics
descriptor>:
characteristics of the
source of the submitted SDUs for a PDP context
integer type
this parameter should be
provided if the Traffic Class is specified as conversation or
streaming
this parameter is ignored
if the Traffic Class is Interactive class or Background class
0 characteristics of SDUs
is unknown (default value)
1 characteristics of SDUs
corresponds to a speech source
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
3G
Quality of Service Profile (Requested) +CGEQREQ
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 166
<Signalling
Indication>: signaling content of submitted SDUs for a PDP context
integer type
this parameter should be
provided if the Traffic Class is specified as interactive
this parameter is ignored
if the Traffic Class is Conversational class, Streaming class
or Background class
0 PDP context is not
optimized for signalling (default value)
1 PDP context is
optimized for signalling <PDP_type>: (see +CGDCONT command)
<PDP
type> (Packet Data Protocol type) a string parameter which specifies
the type of packet data
protocol
"IP" internet
protocol
"PP" point to
point protocol
14.20.4.
Parameter Storage
The parameters are
stored in EEPROM without using AT&W command. Default values can be
restored using
AT&F.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
3G
Quality of Service Profile (Requested) +CGEQREQ
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 167
14.20.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CGEQREQ=?
Note:
Test command
+CGEQREQ:
"IP",(0-4),(0-8640,65535),(0-
16000,65535),(0-8640,65535),(0-
16000,65535),(0-2),(0,10-
1500,1502,1510,1520),("0E0","1E1","1E2","7E3
","1E3","1E4","1E5","1E6"),("0E0","5E2","1E2
","5E3","4E3","1E3","1E4","1E5","1E6","6E8")
,(0-3),(0,10-4000),(0-3),(0-1),(0-1)
+CGEQREQ:
"PPP",(0-4),(0-8640,65535),(0-
16000,65535),(0-8640,65535),(0-
16000,65535),(0-2),(0,10-
1500,1502,1510,1520),("0E0","1E1","1E2","7E3
","1E3","1E4","1E5","1E6"),("0E0","5E2","1E2
","5E3","4E3","1E3","1E4","1E5","1E6","6E8")
,(0-3),(0,10-4000),(0-3),(0-1),(0-1)
OK
AT+CGDCONT=1,"IP","internet";
+CGDCONT=2,"IP","abc.com"
OK
AT+CGEQREQ?
Note:
Read command
+CGEQREQ:
1,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0,0,0
+CGEQREQ:
2,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0,0,0
OK
AT+CGEQREQ=1,3,0,128,0,0,2,1500,"0E0",
"0E0",3,0,0,0,0
Note:
Specifies a 3G QoS profile for PDP context #1
OK
AT+CGEQREQ?
Note:
Read command
+CGEQREQ:
1,3,0,128,0,0,2,1500,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0,0,0
+CGEQREQ:
2,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0,0,0
OK
AT+CGEQREQ=1
Note:
Undefined 3G QoS profile for PDP context #1
OK
AT+CGEQREQ?
Note:
Undefined 3G QoS profile for PDP context #1
+CGEQREQ:
1,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0,0,0
+CGEQREQ:
2,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0,0,0
OK
AT+CGEQREQ=3,3,32,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0
",3,0,0
Note:
Specifies a 3G QoS profile for PDP context #3 which
is not
defined yet
+CME ERROR: 3
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
3G
Quality of Service Profile (Requested) +CGEQREQ
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 168
14.20.6.
Notes
Traffic
class Conversational
class
conversational
RT
Streaming
class
streaming
RT
Interactive
class
Interactive
best
effort
Background
Background
best
effort
Fundamental
characteristics
Preserve time
relation (variation)
between information
entities of the
stream
Conversational
pattern (stringent
and low delay )
Preserve time
relation (variation)
between information
entities of the
stream
Request response
pattern
Preserve payload
content
Destination is not
expecting the data
within a certain time
Preserve payload
content
Example of the
application
voice streaming video Web
browsing background
download of emails
Table 1:
UMTS QoS classes
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
3G
Quality of Service Profile (Minimum acceptable)
+CGEQMIN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 169
14.21.
3G Quality of Service Profile (Minimum
acceptable)
+CGEQMIN
14.21.1.
Description
This command allows
the TE to specify a minimum acceptable profile, which is checked by the MT
against the
negotiated profile returned in the Activate/Modify PDP Context Accept message.
The set command
specifies a profile for the context identified by the (local) context
identification
parameter, <cid>.
The specified profile will be stored in the MT and checked against the
negotiated
profile only at
activation or MS-initiated modification of the related context. Since this is
the same
parameter that is
used in the +CGDCONT and +CGDSCONT commands, the +CGEQMIN command
is effectively an
extension to these commands. The QoS profile consists of a number of
parameters,
each of which may be
set to a separate value.
A special form of
the set command, +CGEQMIN= <cid> causes the minimum acceptable profile
for
context number <cid> to
become undefined. In this case, no check is made against the negotiated
profile.
The read command
returns the current settings for each defined context.
The test command
returns values supported as a compound value. If the MT supports several PDP
types, the parameter
value ranges for each PDP type are returned on a separate line.
14.21.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CGEQMIN=[<cid>[,<Traffic
class>[,<Maximum bitrate UL>[,<Maximum bitrate
DL>[,<Guaranteed
bitrate UL>[,<Guaranteed bitrate DL>[,<Delivery
order>[,<Maximum
SDU
size>[,<SDU error ratio>[,<Residual bit error
ratio>[,<Delivery of erroneous
SDUs>[,<Transfer
delay>[,<Traffic handling priority>[,<Source statistics
descriptor>[,<Signalling
indication>]]]]]]]]]]]]]]]
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
3G
Quality of Service Profile (Minimum acceptable)
+CGEQMIN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 170
Read command
AT+CGEQMIN?
+CGEQMIN:
<cid>,<Traffic class>,<Maximum bitrate UL>,<Maximum
bitrate
DL>,<Guaranteed bitrate
UL>,<Guaranteed bitrate DL>,<Delivery order>,<Maximum SDU
size>,<SDU error
ratio>,<Residual bit error ratio> ,<Delivery of erroneous
SDUs>,<Transfer
delay>,<Traffic handling priority>,<Source statistics
descriptor>,<Signalling
indication>
[<CR><LF>+CGEQMIN:
<cid>,<Traffic class>,<Maximum bitrate UL>,<Maximum
bitrate
DL>,<Guaranteed bitrate
UL>,<Guaranteed bitrate DL>,<Delivery order>,<Maximum SDU
size>,<SDU error
ratio>,<Residual bit error ratio>,<Delivery of erroneous
SDUs>,<Transfer
delay>,<Traffic handling priority>,<Source statistics
descriptor>,<Signalling
indication>[
]]
OK
Test command
AT+CGEQMIN=?
+CGEQMIN: <PDP_type>,(list
of supported <Traffic class>s),(list of supported
<Maximum bitrate
UL>s),(list of supported <Maximum bitrate DL>s),(list of supported
<Guaranteed bitrate
UL>s),(list of supported <Guaranteed bitrate DL>s),(list of
supported <Delivery
order>s),(list of supported <Maximum SDU size>s),(list of
supported <SDU error
ratio>s) ,(list of supported <Residual bit error
ratio>s),(list of supported
<Delivery of erroneous SDUs>s),(list of supported
<Transfer delay>s),(list
of supported <Traffic handling priority>s) ,(list of
supported <Source statistics
descriptor>s) ,(list of supported <Signalling
indication>s)
[<CR><LF>+CGEQMIN:
<PDP_type>,(list of supported <Traffic class>s) ,(list of
supported <Maximum bitrate
UL>s),(list of supported <Maximum bitrate DL>s),(list of
supported <Guaranteed bitrate
UL>s),(list of supported <Guaranteed bitrate
DL>s),(list of supported
<Delivery order>s),(list of supported <Maximum SDU
size>s),(list of supported
<SDU error ratio>s),(list of supported <Residual bit
error ratio>s),(list of
supported <Delivery of erroneous SDUs>s),(list of supported
<Transfer delay>s),(list
of supported <Traffic handling priority>s) ,(list of
supported <Source statistics
descriptor>s) ,(list of supported <Signalling
indication>s)[
]]
OK
14.21.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<cid>:
a particular PDP context definition (see +CGDCONT
and +CGDSCONT commands)
integer type
<Traffic
class>: type of application for which the UMTS bearer service is
optimized. Please refer to Table 1:
UMTS QoS classes for more
information on QoS classes
integer type
0 conversational
1 streaming
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
3G
Quality of Service Profile (Minimum acceptable)
+CGEQMIN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 171
2 interactive
3 background
4 subscribed value
(default value)
<Maximum
bitrate
UL>:
maximum number of kbits/s
delivered to UMTS (up-link traffic) at a SAP
integer type
if the parameter is set
to "0", the subscribed value will be requested
this parameter should be
provided if the Traffic class is specified as conversational or
streaming
0 subscribed maximum bit
rate for uplink (default value)
65535 0 kbps
1 63 in 1 kbps
increment
64 568 in 8 kbps
increments
576 - 8640 in 64 kbps
increments
<Maximum
bitrate
DL>:
maximum number of kbits/s
delivered by UMTS (down-link traffic) at a SAP
integer type
if the parameter is set
to "0", the subscribed value will be requested
this parameter should be
provided if the Traffic class is specified as conversational or
streaming
0 subscribed maximum bit
rate for downlink (default value)
65535 0 kbps
1 63 in 1 kbps
increment
64 568 in 8 kbps
increments
576 - 8640 in 64 kbps
increments
8640 - 16000 in 100 kbps
increments
<Guaranteed
bitrate
UL>:
guaranteed number of
kbits/s delivered to UMTS (up-link traffic) at a SAP (provided that
there is data to deliver)
integer type
if the parameter is set
to '"0", the subscribed value will be requested
this parameter should be
provided if the Traffic class is specified as conversational or
streaming.
Note:
The Guaranteed bit rate for uplink value is ignored if the Traffic Class is
Interactive
class or Background class, or Maximum bit rate for uplink is set to 0
kbps.
0 subscribed maximum bit
rate for uplink (default value)
65535 0 kbps
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
3G
Quality of Service Profile (Minimum acceptable)
+CGEQMIN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 172
1 63 in 1 kbps
increment
64 568 in 8 kbps
increments
576 - 8640 in 64 kbps
increments
<Guaranteed
bitrate
DL>:
guaranteed number of
kbits/s delivered by UMTS (down-link traffic) at a SAP (provided that
there is data to deliver)
integer type
if the parameter is set
to "0", the subscribed value will be requested
this parameter should be
provided if the Traffic class is specified as conversational or
streaming.
Note:
The Guaranteed bit rate for downlink value is ignored if the Traffic Class is
Interactive
class or Background class, or Maximum bit rate for downlink is set to
0 kbps.
0 subscribed maximum bit
rate for downlink (default value)
65535 0 kbps
1 63 in 1 kbps
increment
64 568 in 8 kbps
increments
576 8640 in 64 kbps
increments
8640 - 16000 in 100 kbps
increments
<Delivery
order>: indicates whether the UMTS bearer shall provide in-sequence SDU
delivery or not
integer type
0 no
1 yes
2 subscribed value
(default value)
<Maximum
SDU size>: maximum allowed SDU size in octets
integer type
if the parameter is set
to "0", the subscribed value will be requested
0 subscribed maximum SDU
size (default value)
10 1500 in 10 octets
increments
1502
1510
1520
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
3G
Quality of Service Profile (Minimum acceptable)
+CGEQMIN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 173
<SDU
error ratio>: target value for the fraction of SDUs lost or detected as
erroneous. SDU error ratio is
defined only for
conforming traffic. The value is specified as "mEe".
string type
Example: a target SDU
error ratio of 110-3 would be specified as "1E3" (e.g.
AT+CGEQMIN=
,"1E3",
).
"0E0" means subscribed value.
"0E0" 0,
subscribed SDU error ratio (default value)
"1E2" 110-2
"7E3" 710-3
"1E3" 110-3
"1E4" 110-4
"1E5" 110-5
"1E6" 110-6
<Residual
bit error
ratio>:
target value for the
undetected bit error ratio in the delivered SDUs. If no error
detection is requested,
Residual bit error ratio indicates the bit error ratio in the
delivered SDUs. The value
is specified as 'mEe'.
string type
Example: a target
residual bit error ratio of 510-3 would be specified as
"5E3" (e.g.
AT+CGEQMIN=
,"5E3",
)
"0E0" 0,
subscribed residual BER (default value)
"5E2" 510-2
"1E2" 110-2
"5E3" 510-3
"4E3" 410-3
"1E3" 110-3
"1E4" 110-4
"1E5" 110-5
"1E6" 110-6
"6E8" 610-8
<Delivery
of erroneous
SDUs>:
indicates whether SDUs
detected as erroneous shall be delivered or not
integer type
0 no
1 yes
2 no detect
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
3G
Quality of Service Profile (Minimum acceptable)
+CGEQMIN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 174
3 subscribed value
(default value)
<Transfer
delay>: targeted time between request to transfer an SDU at one SAP to
its delivery at the
other SAP, in
milliseconds
integer type
Note:
The transfer delay value is ignored, if the Traffic Class is Interactive class
or
Background class.
0 subscribed transfer
delay (default value)
10 150 in 10 ms
increments
200 950 in 50 ms
increments
1000 4000 in 100 ms
increments
<Traffic
handling
priority>:
relative importance for
handling of all SDUs belonging to the UMTS bearer
compared to the SDUs of
other bearers
integer type
Note:
The Traffic handling priority value is ignored, if the Traffic Class is
Conversation,
Streaming class or Background class
0 subscribed traffic
delay (default value)
1 priority level 1
2 priority level 2
3 priority level 3
<Source
statistics
descriptor>
characteristics of the
source of the submitted SDUs for a PDP context
integer type
this parameter should be provided
if the Traffic Class is specified as
conversation or streaming
this parameter is ignored
if the Traffic Class is Interactive class or Background
class
0 characteristics of SDUs
is unknown (default value)
1 characteristics of SDUs
corresponds to a speech source
<Signalling
indication>: signaling content of submitted SDUs for a PDP context
integer type
this parameter should be
provided if the Traffic Class is specified as interactive
this parameter is ignored
if the Traffic Class is Conversational class, Streaming
class or Background class
0 PDP context is not
optimized for signalling (default value)
1 PDP context is
optimized for signalling <PDP_type>: (see +CGDCONT
command)
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
3G
Quality of Service Profile (Minimum acceptable)
+CGEQMIN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 175
<PDP
type> (Packet Data Protocol type) a string parameter which specifies
the type of
packet data protocol
"IP" internet
protocol
"PP" point to
point protocol
14.21.4.
Parameter Storage
The parameters are
stored in EEPROM without using AT&W command. Default values can be
restored using
AT&F.
14.21.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CGEQMIN=?
Note:
Test command
+CGEQMIN:
"IP",(0-4),(0-8640,65535),(0-
16000,65535),(0-8640,65535),(0-16000,65535),(0-
2),(0,10-
1500,1502,1510,1520),("0E0","1E1","1E2","7E3","
1E3","1E4","1E5","1E6"),("0E0","5E2","1E2","5E3
","4E3","1E3","1E4","1E5","1E6","6E8"),(0-
3),(0,10-4000),(0-3),(0-1),(0-1)
+CGEQMIN:
"PPP",(0-4),(0-8640,65535),(0-
16000,65535),(0-8640,65535),(0-16000,65535),(0-
2),(0,10-
1500,1502,1510,1520),("0E0","1E1","1E2","7E3","
1E3","1E4","1E5","1E6"),("0E0","5E2","1E2","5E3
","4E3","1E3","1E4","1E5","1E6","6E8"),(0-
3),(0,10-4000),(0-3),(0-1),(0-1)
OK
AT+CGDCONT=1,"IP","internet";+CGDCONT
=2,"IP","abc.com"
OK
AT+CGEQMIN?
Note:
Read command
+CGEQMIN:
1,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0,0,0
+CGEQMIN:
2,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0,0,0
OK
AT+CGEQMIN=1,3,32,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E
0",3,0,0,0,0
Note:
Set the minimum 3G QoS for Cid=1, Traffic class =
background,
Maximum bitrate UL = 32kbit/s, and all
other
parameters set to subscribed value
OK
AT+CGEQMIN?
Note:
Read command
+CGEQMIN:
1,3,32,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0,0,0
+CGEQMIN:
2,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0,0,0
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
3G
Quality of Service Profile (Minimum acceptable)
+CGEQMIN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 176
Command
Responses
AT+CGEQMIN=1
Note:
Undefined 3G QoS profile (minimum acceptable)
for PDP
context #1
OK
AT+CGEQMIN?
Note:
Read command
+CGEQMIN:
1,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0,0,0
+CGEQMIN:
2,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0,0,0
OK
AT+CGEQMIN=3,3,32,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E
0",3,0,0,0,0
Note:
Specifies a 3G QoS profile (minimum acceptable)
for PDP
context #3 which is not defined yet
+CME ERROR: 3
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
3G
Quality of Service Profile (Negotiated) +CGEQNEG
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 177
14.22.
3G Quality of Service Profile (Negotiated)
+CGEQNEG
14.22.1.
Description
This command allows
the TE to retrieve the negotiated QoS profiles returned in the Activate PDP
Context Accept
message.
The execution
command returns the negotiated QoS profile for the specified context
identifiers,
<cid>s. The
QoS profile consists of a number of parameters, each of which may have a
separate
value.
The test command
returns a list of <cid>s associated with active contexts.
14.22.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CGEQNEG=[<cid>[,<cid>[,
]]]
+CGEQNEG:
<cid>,<Traffic class>,<Maximum bitrate UL>,<Maximum
bitrate
DL>,<Guaranteed bitrate
UL>,<Guaranteed bitrate DL>,<Delivery order>,<Maximum SDU
size>,<SDU error
ratio>,<Residual bit error ratio> ,<Delivery of erroneous
SDUs>,<Transfer
delay>,<Traffic handling priority>
[<CR><LF>+CGEQNEG:
<cid>,<Traffic class>,<Maximum bitrate UL>,<Maximum
bitrate
DL>,<Guaranteed bitrate
UL>,<Guaranteed bitrate DL>,<Delivery order>,<Maximum SDU
size>,<SDU error
ratio>,<Residual bit error ratio>,<Delivery of erroneous
SDUs>,<Transfer
delay>,<Traffic handling priority>[
]]
OK
Read command
None
Test command
AT+CGEQNEG=?
+CGEQNEG: (list of <cid>s
associated with active contexts)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
3G
Quality of Service Profile (Negotiated) +CGEQNEG
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 178
14.22.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<cid>:
a particular PDP context definition (see +CGDCONT
and +CGDSCONT commands)
integer type
<Traffic
class>: type of application for which the UMTS bearer service is
optimised. Please refer to Table 1:
UMTS QoS classes for more
information on QoS classes
integer type
0 conversational
1 streaming
2 interactive
3 background
<Maximum
bitrate
UL>:
maximum number of kbits/s
delivered to UMTS (up-link traffic) at a SAP
integer type
range: 0 to 8640 kbps
<Maximum
bitrate
DL>:
maximum number of kbits/s
delivered by UMTS (down-link traffic) at a SAP
integer type
range: 0 to 16000 kbps
<Guaranteed
bitrate
UL>:
guaranteed number of
kbits/s delivered to UMTS (up-link traffic) at a SAP (provided that
there is data to deliver)
integer type
range: 0 to 8640 kbps
<Guaranteed
bitrate
DL>:
guaranteed number of
kbits/s delivered by UMTS (down-link traffic) at a SAP (provided that
there is data to deliver)
integer type
range: 0 to 16000 kbps
<Delivery
order>: parameter indicates whether the UMTS bearer shall provide
in-sequence SDU delivery or
not
integer type
0 no
1 yes
<Maximum
SDU size>: maximum allowed SDU size in octets
integer type
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
3G
Quality of Service Profile (Negotiated) +CGEQNEG
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 179
<SDU
error ratio>: target value for the fraction of SDUs lost or detected as
erroneous. SDU error ratio is
defined only for
conforming traffic. The value is specified as "mEe".
string type
Example: a target SDU
error ratio of 110-3 would be specified as '1E3' (e.g.
AT+CGEQNEG=
,"1E3",
).
"0E0" 0,
subscribed SDU error ratio (default value)
"1E2" 110-2
"7E3" 710-3
"1E3" 110-3
"1E4" 110-4
"1E5" 110-5
"1E6" 110-6
<Residual
bit error
ratio>:
target value for the
undetected bit error ratio in the delivered SDUs. If no error
detection is requested,
Residual bit error ratio indicates the bit error ratio in the
delivered SDUs. The value
is specified as 'mEe'.
string type
Example: a target
residual bit error ratio of 510-3 would be specified as '5E3'
(e.g.
AT+CGEQNEG=
,"5E3",
).
"0E0" 0,
subscribed residual BER (default value)
"5E2" 510-2
"1E2" 110-2
"5E3" 510-3
"4E3" 410-3
"1E3" 110-3
"1E4" 110-4
"1E5" 110-5
"1E6" 110-6
"6E8" 610-8
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
3G
Quality of Service Profile (Negotiated) +CGEQNEG
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 180
<Delivery
of erroneous
SDUs>:
parameter indicates
whether SDUs detected as erroneous shall be delivered or not
integer type
0 no
1 yes
2 no detect
<Transfer
delay>: targeted time between request to transfer an SDU at one SAP to
its delivery at the
other SAP, in milliseconds
integer type
range: 10 4000 ms
<traffic
handling
priority>:
relative importance for
handling of all SDUs belonging to the UMTS bearer
compared to the SDUs of
other bearers
integer type
1 priority level 1
2 priority level 2
3 priority level 3
14.22.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
14.22.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CGEQNEG=?
Note:
Test command
+CGEQNEG:
"IP",(0-4),(0-8640,65535),(0-
16000,65535),(0-8640,65535),(0-
16000,65535),(0-2),(0,10-
1500,1502,1510,1520),("0E0","1E1","1E2","7E3",
"1E3","1E4","1E5","1E6"),("0E0","5E2","1E2","5
E3","4E3","1E3","1E4","1E5","1E6","6E8"),(0-
3),(0,10-4000),(0-3),(0-1),(0-1)
+CGEQMIN:
"PPP",(0-4),(0-8640,65535),(0-
16000,65535),(0-8640,65535),(0-
16000,65535),(0-2),(0,10-
1500,1502,1510,1520),("0E0","1E1","1E2","7E3",
"1E3","1E4","1E5","1E6"),("0E0","5E2","1E2","5
E3","4E3","1E3","1E4","1E5","1E6","6E8"),(0-
3),(0,10-4000),(0-3),(0-1),(0-1)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
3G
Quality of Service Profile (Negotiated) +CGEQNEG
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 181
Command
Responses
AT+CGDCONT=1,"IP","internet";
+CGDCONT=2,"IP","abc.com"
OK
AT+CGEQMIN?
Note:
Read command
+CGEQMIN:
1,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0,0,0
+CGEQMIN:
2,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0,0,0
OK
AT+CGEQMIN=1,3,32,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0",
"0E0",3,0,0,0,0
Note:
Set the minimum 3G QoS for Cid=1, Traffic
class =
background, Maximum bitrate UL = 32kbit/s,
and all
other parameters set to subscribed value
OK
AT+CGEQMIN?
Note:
Read command
+CGEQMIN:
1,3,32,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0,0,0
+CGEQMIN:
2,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0,0,0
OK
AT+CGEQMIN=1
Note:
Undefined 3G QoS profile (minimum
acceptable)
for PDP context #1
OK
AT+CGEQMIN?
Note:
Read command
+CGEQMIN:
1,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0,0,0
+CGEQMIN:
2,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0,0,0
OK
AT+CGEQMIN=3,3,32,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0",
"0E0",3,0,0,0,0
Note:
Specifies a 3G QoS profile (minimum
acceptable)
for PDP context #3 which is not defined
yet
+CME ERROR: 3
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
Authentication
Protocol AT+WPPP
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 182
14.23.
Authentication Protocol AT+WPPP
14.23.1.
Description
This command will
set the authentication protocol. Three options are possible:
No
protocol: No user name and password is used. The PPP connection is
established
without
authentication.
PAP
Protocol: This is a simple authentication protocol used to authenticate
a user before the
network access. The
user name and password are sent in plain text for the authentication.
CHAP
protocol: This protocol periodically verifies the identity of the client
by using a threeway
handshake. This
happens when the link is established, and may happen again at any
time. The
verification is based on a shared secret (such as the client user's and
password).
The shared password
is encrypted before it is sent.
PAP is the default
authentication protocol.
14.23.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WPPP=<auth>,[<cid>],[<username],[<password>]
OK
Read command
AT+WPPP?
+WPPP:
<auth>,[<cid>],[<username>],[<password>]
OK
Test command
AT+WPPP=?
+WPPP: <list of supported
<auth>s>,[<list of supported <cid>s>]
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
Authentication
Protocol AT+WPPP
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 183
14.23.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<auth>
types of authentication supported
0 none
1 PAP (default)
2 CHAP
<cid>:
PDP context identifier used in CGDCONT. If omitted, this
configuration will be for all
PDP contexts.
range: 1-4
integer type
<username>:
username for CHAP or PAP
string type, maximum of
50 characters
For modules different
from Airprime Q26Extreme, If omitted, username will be retrieved
either from PPP
connection or Open ATฎ application.
Note:
This parameter is mandatory for Airprime Q26Extreme module.
<password>:
password for CHAP or PAP
string type, maximum of
50 characters
For modules different
from Airprime Q26Extreme, If omitted, password will be retrieved
either from PPP
connection or Open ATฎ application.
Note:
This parameter is mandatory for Airprime Q26Extreme module.
14.23.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
GPRS
Commands
Authentication
Protocol AT+WPPP
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 184
14.23.5.
Examples
Command Responses
AT+WPPP=? +WPPP:
(0-2),(1-4)
OK
AT+WPPP=2 OK
AT+WPPP=2,1,"myusername","mypassword"
OK
Note:
Configure PDP context Cid=1 with CHAP protocol and set
username
and password.
AT+WPPP? +WPPP:
2,1,"myusername","mypassword"
OK
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 185
15.
PLMN Commands
15.1.
Selection of Preferred PLMN list +CPLS
15.1.1.
Description
This command is used
to select one PLMN selector with access technology listed in the SIM card that
is used by +CPOL
command.
15.1.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CPLS=<list>
OK
Read command
AT+CPLS?
+CPLS: <list>
OK
Test command
AT+CPLS=?
+CPLS: (list of supported
<list>s)
OK
15.1.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<list>:
preferred PLMN list
0 user controlled PLMN
selector with access technology EF_PLMNwAct
If this file is not found
EF_PLMNSel will be selected.
1 operator controlled
PLMN selector with access technology EF_OPLMNwAct
2 home PLMN selector with
access technology EF_HPLMNwAct
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
PLMN
Commands
Selection
of Preferred PLMN list +CPLS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 186
15.1.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
15.1.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CPLS?
Note:
Ask for selection of the SIM file
+CPLS: 1
OK
Note:
EF_OPLMNwAct is selected
AT+CPLS=0
Note:
Selection of EF_PLMNwAct
OK
Note: If
EF_PLMNwAct is not present, EF_PLMNsel will be
selected
AT+CPLS=1
Note:
Selection of EF_OPLMNwAct
+CME ERROR: 3
Note:
EF_OPLMNwAct is not present
AT+CPLS=?
Note:
Get possible values
+CPLS: (0,1,2)
OK
Note:
The 3 files with Access technology are present and
can be
selected
AT+CPLS=?
Note:
Get possible values
+CPLS: (0)
OK
Note:
Only EF_PLMNwAct or EF_PLMNsel can be selected
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
PLMN
Commands
Selection
of Preferred PLMN list +CPLS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 187
15.1.6.
Notes
PLMN Sel
PLMNwAct OPLMNwAct HPLMNwAct <list> default
value
X 0
X 0
X 1
X 2
X X 0
X X 0
X X 0
X X X 0
X X X 0
X X 0
X X 0
X X 1
The <list>
default value is linked to the SIM file allocation.
The priority is 0
> 1 > 2.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
PLMN
Commands
Operator
Selection +COPS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 188
15.2.
Operator Selection +COPS
Or:
15.2.1.
Description
There are three
possible ways of selecting an operator (PLMN):
The
product is in manual mode. It then tries to find the operator specified by the
application
and if found, tries
to register.
The
product is in automatic mode. It then tries to find the home operator and if
found, tries to
register. If not
found, the product automatically searches for another network.
The
product enters into manual/automatic mode. It tries to find an operator
specified by the
application (as in
manual mode). If this attempt fails it enters automatic mode. If this is
successful, the
operator specified by the application is selected. The mobile equipment then
enters into
automatic mode.
Note:
The read command returns the current mode and the current selected operator. In
manual mode, this
PLMN may
not be the one set by the application (as it is in the search phase).
Note:
The access technology selected parameter, <AcT>, should only be used in
terminals capable to
register
to more than one access technology.
The
access technology selected parameter, <AcT>, is not applicable in
automatic mode (<mode>=0)
Note:
These commands are not allowed during communication.
15.2.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+COPS=<mode>[,<format>[,<oper>[,<AcT>]]]
OK
Read command
AT+COPS?
+COPS:
<mode>[,<format>,<oper>[,<AcT>]]
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
PLMN
Commands
Operator
Selection +COPS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 189
Test command
AT+COPS=?
+COPS: [list of supported
(<stat>,long alphanumeric <oper>,short
alphanumeric
<oper>,numeric <oper>[,<AcT>])s]
OK
15.2.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mode>:
network registration mode
0 automatic (default
value)
1 manual (<oper>
shall be present and <AcT> field is optional)
2 deregistration; ME will
be unregistered until <mode>=0 or 1 is selected
3 set only <format>
(for read command AT+COPS?)
4 manual/automatic
(<oper> shall be present), if manual selection fails, automatic
mode is entered.
<format>:
format of <oper> field
0 long alphanumeric
format <oper>
1 short alphanumeric format
<oper>
2 numeric <oper>
(default value)
<stat>:
status of <oper> field
0 unknown
1 available
2 current
3 forbidden
<oper>:
operator identifier (MCC/MNC in numeric format only for operator
selection)
The long alphanumeric
format can be up to 16 characters long (for operator names
description see
"Operator names" section in the present document
"Appendixes";
field is
"Name"). The short alphanumeric format can be up to 10 characters
long.
<AcT>:
access technology selected
0 GSM
2 UTRAN
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
PLMN
Commands
Operator
Selection +COPS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 190
15.2.4.
Parameter Storage
The <format>
and <mode> parameters are stored in EEPROM using AT&W command. The
default
values can be restored
using AT&F.
Note:
The AT+COPS parameter storage information is not applicable for mode 2.
15.2.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+COPS?
Note:
Ask for current PLMN
+COPS: 0,2,45400,2
OK
Note:
Home PLMN is HK CSL with access technology UTRAN
AT+COPS=?
Note:
Ask for PLMN list
+COPS:
(3,"SmarToneVodafone","SMCVoda","
45406",2),
(0,"SUNDAY","SUNDAY",
"45419",2),(2,"HK
CSL","CSL", "45400",2),(0,"3
HK","3","45403",2)
OK
Note:
Home PLMN is CSL, SMC-Voda, Sunday and 3 networks have
been
detected
AT+COPS=1,2,45400,2
Note:
Ask for registration on SFR network
+CME ERROR: 32
Note:
Network not allowed emergency calls only
AT+COPS=1,2,45406,2
Note:
Ask for registration on UK Orange network
+CME ERROR: 529
Note:
Selection failed emergency calls only
AT+COPS=0
Note:
Ask for registration in automatic mode
OK
Note:
Successful
AT+COPS=3,0
Note:
Set <format> to long alphanumeric
OK
Note:
Successful
AT+COPS?
Note:
Ask for current PLMN
+COPS: 0,0,"HK CSL",2
OK
Note:
Home PLMN is HK CSL
AT+COPS=2
Note:
Ask for deregistration from network
OK
Note:
Successful
AT+COPS?
Note:
Ask for current PLMN
+COPS: 2
OK
Note: ME
is unregistered until <mode>=0 or 1 is selected
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
PLMN
Commands
Operator
Selection +COPS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 191
15.2.6.
Notes
If
an incoming call occurs during a PLMN list request, the operation is aborted
(+CME
ERROR: 520) and the
unsolicited RING appears.
If
SPN (Service Provider Name) is present in the SIM, it will be returned in both
long and short
alphanumeric
<oper> fields. The string in the "short" field will be the SPN
truncated to the
appropriate number
of characters (10).
The
fact that the network supports emergency call (+CME ERROR: 547) does not imply
that
emergency call
without SIM is working. The only way to verify this state, is to do ATD112.
If
the PLMN is unknown (meaning not present in the ROM table (see +COPN command),
not
present in FLASH
(see +WOLM command), and also not present in SIM (E-ONS, ONS...)),
the returned long
name is formatted like "MCC XXX MNC YY(Y)" and the returned short
name is formatted
like "XXX YY(Y)" where XXX is the MCC (3-digits) and YY(Y) is the MNC
(2-digits or
3-digits).
Selection
of <AcT> does not limit the capability to cell reselections. Though an
attempt may
be made to select an
access technology, the phone may still reselect a cell in another access
technology.
The
operation not allowed error (+CME ERROR: 3) may be returned for AT+COPS=? if
the
protocol stack is
currently busy with a different process like an automatic scan.
On
2G (GSM/GPRS/EDGE) embedded modules, AT+COPS? will not return the current
PLMN if the GPRS
module class is "CG" (GPRS only) or if a GPRS only SIM is used.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
PLMN
Commands
Preferred
Operator List +CPOL
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 192
15.3.
Preferred Operator List +CPOL
15.3.1.
Description
This command is used
to edit (or update) the SIM preferred list of networks. This list is read in the
SIM
file selected by
+CPLS command.
15.3.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CPOL=[<index>][,<format>[,<oper>[,<GSM_AcT>,<GSMcomp_Act>,<Utran_Act>]]]
OK
Read command
AT+CPOL?
+CPOL:
<index>,<format>,<oper>[,<GSM_AcT>,<GSMcomp_Act>,<Utran_Act>]
[+CPOL: <index>,<format>,<oper>[,<GSM_AcT>,<GSMcomp_Act>,<Utran_Act>][
]]
OK
Test command
AT+CPOL=?
+CPOL: (list of supported
<index>s),(list of supported <format>s)
OK
15.3.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<format>:
format for <oper> parameter
0 long alphanumeric
format for <oper>
1 short alphanumeric
format for <oper>
2 numeric format for
<oper>
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
PLMN
Commands
Preferred
Operator List +CPOL
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 193
<oper>:
operator identifier
character string or
integer (see <format>)
<GSM_AcT>:
GSM access technology
<GSMcomp_Act>:
GSM compact access technology
<Utran_Act>:
0 access technology not
selected
1 access technology
selected
15.3.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
15.3.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CPOL?
Note:
Ask for preferred list of networks with only EF_PLMNsel
present
+CPOL: 1,2,26201
+CPOL: 6,2,20810
OK
Note:
Preferred list of networks in numeric format (read in
EF_PLMNsel)
AT+CPOL?
Note:
Ask for preferred list of networks with EF_PLMNwAct
selected
and present
+CPOL: 1,2,26201,1,0,0
+CPOL: 6,2,20810,1,0,0
OK
Note:
Preferred list of networks in numeric format (read in
EF_PLMNwAct)
GSM
access technology selected
GSM
compact access technology not selected
Utran
access technology not selected
AT+CPOL=,0
Note:
Select long alphanumeric format
OK
AT+CPOL?
Note:
Ask for preferred list of networks with only EF_PLMNsel
present
+CPOL:
1,0,"D1-TELEKOM"
+CPOL: 6,0,"F SFR"
OK
Note:
Preferred list of networks in long alphanumeric format
AT+CPOL=7,2,20801
Note:
Add a network to the list
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
PLMN
Commands
Preferred
Operator List +CPOL
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 194
Command
Responses
AT+CPOL?
Note:
Ask for preferred list of networks with only EF_PLMNsel
present
+CPOL:
1,0,"D1-TELEKOM"
+CPOL: 6,0,"F SFR"
+CPOL: 7,0,"Orange F"
OK
Note:
Preferred list of networks in long alphanumeric format
AT+CPOL=7
Note:
Delete 7th location
OK
AT+CPOL?
Note:
Ask for preferred list of networks with only EF_PLMNsel
present
+CPOL:
1,0,"D1-TELEKOM"
+CPOL: 6,0,"F SFR"
OK
Note:
Preferred list of networks in long alphanumeric format
AT+CPOL=8,2,77777
Note:
Add a new network to the list with only EF_PLMNsel
present
OK
AT+CPOL=8,2,77777,0,0,1
Note:
Add a new network to the list with EF_PLMNwact present
OK
Note:
Access technology UTRAN is selected
AT+CPOL=8,2,77777
Note:
Add a new network to the list with EF_PLMNwact present
OK
Note:
Default access technology GSM is selected
AT+CPOL?
Note:
Ask for preferred list of networks with only EF_PLMNsel
present
+CPOL:
1,0,"D1-TELEKOM"
+CPOL: 6,0,"F SFR"
+CPOL: 8,2,77777
OK
Note:
Preferred list of networks in long alphanumeric format
but 8th
entry is unknown so the product returns it in the
numeric
format
AT+CPOL=9,0,"Orange
F"
Note:
Add a new network to the list (text format)
OK
AT+CPOL?
Note:
Ask for preferred list of networks with only EF_PLMNsel
present
+CPOL:
1,0,"D1-TELEKOM"
+CPOL: 6,0,"F SFR"
+CPOL: 8,2,77777
+CPOL: 9,0,"Orange F"
OK
Note:
Preferred list of networks in long.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
PLMN
Commands
Preferred
Operator List +CPOL
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 195
Command
Responses
AT+CPOL=? +CPOL:
(1-16),(0-2)
OK
Note:
The EF can accept 16 records, and supported format
are 0,1
or 2.
15.3.6.
Notes
The different
possibilities are:
AT+CPOL=<index>,
to delete an entry.
AT+CPOL=,<format>,
to set the format used by the read command (AT+CPOL?).
AT+CPOL=,<format>,<oper>,
to put <oper> in the next free location.
AT+CPOL=<index>,<format>,<oper>,
to write <oper> in the <format> at the <index>.
AT+CPOL=<index>,<format>,<oper>,<GSM_AcT>,<GSMcp_Act>,<Utran_Act>,
to write
<oper> in the
<format> at the <index> giving the access technology (in the case
of
EF_PLMNwact, EF_HPLMNwact
or EF_OPLMNwact is present).
Note: If
access technology parameters are not given, the GSM access technology will be
chosen.
Note:
The supported formats are those of the +COPS command. The length of this list
is limited to 700
entries
for EF_PLMNsel, EF_PLMNwAct, EF_OPLMNwAct and EF_HPLMNwAct.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
PLMN
Commands
Operator
List Management +WOLM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 196
15.4.
Operator List Management +WOLM
15.4.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command allows a new or modified operator to be added to the
PLMN list. At most
10 PLMNs can be created and stored in the flash memory.
Note that if two
entries with the same network (MCC+MNC), but having different names, are entered,
the first one will
be taken into account to have the name.
15.4.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WOLM=<mode>,<loc>[,<NumOper>,<short
name>,<long name>]
OK
Read command
AT+WOLM?
+WOLM:
<loc>,<NumOper>,<short name>,<long name>
[+WOLM:
<loc>,<NumOper>,<short name>,<long name>[
]]
OK
Test command
AT+WOLM=?
OK
15.4.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mode>:
request operation
0 delete
1 write
2 read
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
PLMN
Commands
Operator
List Management +WOLM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 197
<loc>:
location
If this parameter is not
filled with <mode>=1, the location will be the first empty.
<NumOper>:
operator in numeric format: MCC and MNC
<short
name>: the short name of the PLMN
<long
name>: the long name of the PLMN
15.4.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
PLMN
Commands
Operator
List Management +WOLM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 198
15.4.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WOLM=1,1,20812,"WM","WM
PLMN"
Note:
Add a new PLMN at location 1
OK
AT+WOLM=2,1 +WOLM:
1,20812,"WM","WM PLMN"
Note:
Read the PLMN at location 1 OK
AT+WOLM=2,11
Note:
Read the PLMN at location 11
+CME ERROR: 21
Note:
Invalid index
AT+WOLM=1,1,20812,"WM1","WM1
PLMN"
Note:
Modify an existing PLMN
OK
Note:
Done
AT+WOLM=?
Note:
Test command
OK
AT+WOLM?
Note:
Interrogate current list
+WOLM:
1,20812,"WM1","WM1 PLMN"
OK
Note:
List of the created PLMNs in flash
AT+WOLM=1,,20813,"PLMN2","PLMN2
LONG"
Note:
Add a new PLMN at available location
OK
or
+CME ERROR: 20
Note:
<Err> returns if no more PLMNs can be added
AT+WOLM=0,1
Note:
Delete an entry at location 1
OK
AT+WOLM=0,11
Note:
Delete an entry at location 11
+CME ERROR: 21
Note:
Invalid index
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
PLMN
Commands
Read
Operator Name +WOPN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 199
15.5.
Read Operator Name +WOPN
15.5.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command allows to:
read
the operator name in long alphanumeric format from the numeric format,
read
the operator name in short alphanumeric format from the numeric format,
erase
NITZ PLMN names stored in flash memory,
configure
the method used for getting PLMN names.
15.5.2.
Syntax
For
<mode>=0 or 1:
Action command
AT+WOPN=<mode>,<NumOper>[,<lac>]
+WOPN=<mode>,<AlphaOper>
OK
For
<mode>=3:
Action command
AT+WOPN=<mode>,0
OK
For
<mode>=4:
Action command
AT+WOPN=<mode>[,<PlmnMethod>]
[+WOPN: <PlmnMethod>]
OK
Read command
None
Test command
AT+WOPN=?
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
PLMN
Commands
Read
Operator Name +WOPN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 200
OK
15.5.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mode>:
requested operation
0 print operator name
using long alphanumeric format
1 print operator name
using short alphanumeric format
2 reserved for later use
3 erase NITZ PLMN list if
<NumOper>=0
4 read or write the
method used for getting PLMN names
read access if
<PlmnMethod> omitted.
write access if
<PlmnMethod> provided.
<NumOper>:
operator identifier in numeric format (MCC/MNC)
integer type
<AlphaOper>:
operator identifier in long or short alphanumeric format (refer
to section "Operator
names" of the
Appendixes of the present document for operator names description)
string type
<lac>:
location Area Code
string type; two byte
location area code in hexadecimal format (e.g. "00C3" equals
195 in decimal)
if it is not entered,
current LAC will be used (0 if limited service)
<PlmnOns>:
method for getting PLMN name
bit field (default value:
31)
bit set to 0: method
deactivated
bit set to 1: method
activated
Bit 0 E-ONS
Bit 1 CPHS
Bit 2 SPN
Bit 3 NITZ
Bit 4 Flash
15.5.4.
Parameter Storage
The
<PlmnMethod> parameter is stored in EEPROM without using AT&W
command.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
PLMN
Commands
Read
Operator Name +WOPN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 201
15.5.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WOPN=0,20801
Note:
Give an operator in numeric format
+WOPN: 0,"Orange F"
OK
Note:
Alphanumeric answer
AT+WOPN=3,0
Note:
Erase NITZ PLMN names stored in flash memory
OK
AT+WOPN=4 +WOPN: 31
Note:
Read from EEPROM which method will be used for
PLMN
names.
OK
AT+WOPN=4,0
Note:
Write to EEPROM which method will be used for PLMN
names.
OK
15.5.6.
Notes
With E-ONS (Enhanced
Operator Name Service) feature, <lac> is an optional parameter to read
names from OPL/PNN
SIM files.
When the embedded
module receives a NITZ (Network Information and Time Zone) message with
Long Name and/or
Short Name information, an entry with registered PLMN and names in message is
created in the flash
memory. These names will then be used with +COPS, +COPN, +WOPN, +CPOL
commands with the
priority order defined in 3GPP TS 22.101. The embedded module supports only
network names with
the default GSM alphabet coding scheme.
The priority order
is:
1 - E-ONS First entry if
on Home PLMN, or existing matching entry in OPL/PNN SIM files
2 - CPHS
if on Home PLMN, use SIM
file CPHS ONS (0x6F14) for Long Name if present and
SIM file CPHS SONS
(0x6F18) for short name if present (if not, reuse SIM file CPHS
ONS)
3 - SPN If on Home PLMN,
use SIM file SPN (0x6F46) if present
4 - NITZ If there is a
matching entry in the list of names received so far, use it.
5 - FLASH If there is a
matching entry in flash PLMN list (created by +WOLM), use it.
6 - ROM PLMN names in ROM
defined according to MoU SE.13 and NAPRD Operator Names
documents
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
PLMN
Commands
Read
Operator Name +WOPN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 202
For details, please
refer to the following diagram:
Once a long name is
found following this priority order, it is given as response to AT command.
Refer to 3GPP TS
24.008 [8], 3GPP TS 23.040 [11],
3GPP TS 22.042 [12] and COMMON PCN
HANDSET SPECIFICATION
CPHS Phase 2 v4.2 for more information.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
PLMN
Commands
Read
Operator Name +COPN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 203
15.6.
Read Operator Name +COPN
15.6.1.
Description
This command returns
the list of all operator names (in numeric and alphanumeric format) stored in
the embedded module.
15.6.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+COPN
+COPN:
<NumOper>,<AlphaOper>
[+COPN:
<NumOper>,<AlphaOper>[
]]
OK
Read command
None
Test command
AT+COPN=?
OK
15.6.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<NumOper>:
operator in numeric format
<AlphaOper>:
operator in long alphanumeric format (see section "Operator
names" of the
Appendixes for operator
names description)
15.6.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface Guide
for
Firmware 7.45
PLMN
Commands
Read
Operator Name +COPN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 204
15.6.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+COPN
Note:
Ask for list of all networks
+COPN: 20201"GR
COSMOTE"
+COPN: 20205"vodafone
GR"
+COPN: 20209"GR
Q-TELECOM"
+COPN: 20210"TIM GR"
...
OK
AT+COPN=? OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
PLMN
Commands
Automatic
Time Zone Update +CTZU
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 205
15.7.
Automatic Time Zone Update +CTZU
15.7.1.
Description
This command is used
to enable or disable automatic time zone update via NITZ.
15.7.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CTZU=<Mode>
OK
Read command
AT+CTZU?
+CTZU: <Mode>
OK
Test command
AT+CTZU=?
+CTZU: (list of supported
<Mode>s)
OK
15.7.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<Mode>:
requested operation
0 disable automatic time
zone update via NITZ (default value)
1 enable automatic time
zone update via NITZ
15.7.4.
Parameter Storage
The <Mode>
parameter is stored in EEPROM without using AT&W command. The default value
can
be restored using
AT&F.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
PLMN
Commands
Automatic
Time Zone Update +CTZU
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 206
15.7.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CTZU=? +CTZU: (0-1)
OK
AT+CTZU? +CTZU: 0
OK
AT+CTZU=1 OK
Note:
enable the automatic time zone update
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 207
Index
A, 64
C, 98
CBST, 86
CCED, 12
CEER, 71
CGACT, 123
CGANS, 131
CGATT, 121
CGAUTO, 133
CGCLASS, 106
CGCMOD, 145
CGDATA, 127
CGDCONT, 118
CGEQMIN, 169
CGEQNEG, 177
CGEQREQ, 160
CGEREP, 150
CGPADDR, 155
CGQMIN, 135
CGQREQ, 140
CGREG, 147
CGSMS, 153
CICB, 77
COPN, 202
COPS, 187
CPLS, 184
CPOL, 191
CR, 81
CRC, 83
CREG, 8
CRLP, 92
CSNS, 79
CSQ, 6
CTZU, 204
D, 52
DL, 62
Dn, 73
DOPT, 94
DR, 102
DS, 100
FCLASS, 96
GH, 129
H, 66
ILRR, 89
N, 104
S0, 75, 130
WAC, 41
WATH, 68
WGPRS, 108
WLOC, 35
WMBS, 27
WOLM, 195
WOPN, 198
WPOW, 48
WPPP, 182
WREGC, 30
WSCAN, 39
WTBI, 157
WUBS, 43
WWSM, 46
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079
019
February
18, 2011
Volume 3
AT
Commands Interface Guide
for
Firmware 7.45
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 2
Related
Documents
This interface
specification is based on the following recommendations:
[1] ETSI GSM 07.05:
Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2); Use of DTE-DCE
interface for Short
Message Service (SMS) and Cell Broadcast Service (CBS)
[2] ETSI GSM 07.07:
Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2); AT command set for GSM
Mobile Equipment (ME)
[3] ITU-T Recommendation
V.25 ter: Serial asynchronous automatic dialing and control
[4] ETSI GSM 03.40:
Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2); Technical implementation
of the Short Message
Service (SMS) Point-to-Point (PP)
[5] ETSI GSM 03.38:
Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2); Alphabets and
languagespecific
information
[6] ETSI GSM 04.80:
Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2): Mobile radio interface
layer 3, Supplementary
service specification, Formats and coding
[7] 3GPP 05.02: 3rd Generation Partnership Project; Technical Specification Group
GSM/EDGERadio
Access Network;
Multiplexing and multiple access on the radio path 3GPP TS 05.02
V6.9.2 (2001-04)
[8] 3GPP 24.008: Mobile
radio interface Layer 3 specification; Core network protocols; Stage 3
[9] 3GPP TS 11.11
Specification of the Subscriber Identity Module - Mobile Equipment (SIM-ME)
Interface
[10] 3GPP TS 05.08 Radio
subsystem link control
[11] 3GPP TS 23.040
Technical realization of the Short Message Service (SMS);
[12] 3GPP TS 22.042
Network Identity and Time Zone (NITZ) service description; Stage 1
[13] 3GPP TS 51.011
Specification of the Subscriber Identity Module - Mobile Equipment (SIM-ME)
interface
[14] 3GPP TS 27-010
Terminal Equipment to User Equipment (TE-UE) multiplexer protocol
[15] 3GPP 23.014 Support
of Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) signaling
[16] ISO 639 Langages
Codes
[17] 3GPP 27 060 Packet
domain; Mobile Station (MS) supporting Packet Switched services
[18] 3GPP TS 23.038
Alphabets and language-specific information
[19] 3GPP TS 27.005 Use of Data
Terminal Equipment - Data Circuit terminating Equipment (DTEDCE)
interface for Short
Message Service (SMS) and Cell Broadcast Service (CBS)
[20] ETSI GSM 11.14
Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+); Specification of the SIM
Application Toolkit for
the Subscriber Identity Module - Mobile Equipment (SIM - ME) interface
[21] 3GPP TS 23.003
Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+) (GSM); Universal Mobile
Telecommunications System
(UMTS); Numbering, addressing and identification
[22] ETSI GSM 02.24
Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+) (GSM);Description of
Charge Advice Information
(CAI)
[23] ETSI GSM 02.86
Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+) (GSM);Advice of Charge
(AoC) Supplementary
Services - Stage 1
[24] ETSI GSM 02.90
Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+) (GSM);Unstructured
Supplementary Service
Data (USSD) - Stage 1
[25] ETSI GSM 02.85
Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+) (GSM);Closed User
Group (CUG) Supplementary
Services - Stage 1
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 3
AT Commands Interface
Guide for Firmware 7.45
[26] 3GPP 27.007:Digital
cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+) (GSM); Universal Mobile
Telecommunications System
(UMTS);AT command set for 3GPP User Equipment (UE) (Release
1999)
[27] 3GPP
23.107:Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS);QoS Concept and
Architecture (Release
1999)
[28] 3GPP 24.008:
European digital cellular telecommunication system (Phase 2+). Mobile radio
interface layer 3
specification. (Release 1999)
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 4
Contents
Volume
3
16.PHONEBOOKS
COMMANDS..............................................................................6
16.1. Select Phonebook
Memory Storage
+CPBS.....................................................................6
16.2. Contact Selector
+WCOS..................................................................................................9
16.3. Write Phonebook
Entry +CPBW
.....................................................................................11
16.4. Read Phonebook
Entries +CPBR ...................................................................................17
16.5. Find Phonebook
Entries +CPBF
.....................................................................................22
16.6. Phonebook Phone
Search +CPBP .................................................................................26
16.7. Move Action in
Phonebook +CPBN
................................................................................31
16.8. Create and Delete
a Phonebook Group
+WPGW...........................................................36
16.9. Read a Phonebook
Group +WPGR
................................................................................38
16.10. Settings of a
Group +WPGS
...........................................................................................43
16.11. Delete Calls Phonebook
+WDCP....................................................................................45
16.12. Subscriber Number
+CNUM
...........................................................................................47
16.13. Set Voice Mail
Number +CSVM......................................................................................49
16.14. Avoid Phonebook
Init +WAIP
..........................................................................................51
17.SHORT
MESSAGE COMMANDS......................................................................53
17.1. Select Message
Service +CSMS
....................................................................................53
17.2. New Message
Indication +CNMI.....................................................................................55
17.3. Set Text Mode
Parameters
+CSMP................................................................................62
17.4. Preferred Message
Format +CMGF................................................................................65
17.5. Preferred Message
Storage
+CPMS...............................................................................67
17.6. Service Center
Address +CSCA
.....................................................................................70
17.7. Show Text Mode
Parameters +CSDH
............................................................................72
17.8. More Messages to
Send +CMMS
...................................................................................74
17.9. Send Message
+CMGS...................................................................................................76
17.10. Write Message to
Memory +CMGW
...............................................................................79
17.11. Send Message From
Storage
+CMSS............................................................................82
17.12. Read Message
+CMGR
..................................................................................................84
17.13. List Message +CMGL......................................................................................................89
17.14. Delete Message
+CMGD
................................................................................................95
17.15. New Message Acknowledgement
+CNMA .....................................................................98
17.16. Message Status
Modification
+WMSC..........................................................................101
17.17. Un-change SMS
Status +WUSS...................................................................................103
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 5
AT Commands Interface
Guide for Firmware 7.45
17.18. Message
Overwriting +WMGO .....................................................................................105
17.19. Copy Messages
+WMCP..............................................................................................107
17.20. Save Settings
+CSAS ...................................................................................................110
17.21. Restore Settings
+CRES...............................................................................................111
17.22. Select Cell
Broadcast Message Types +CSCB ............................................................112
17.23. Cell Broadcast
Message Identifiers +WCBM
................................................................115
18.SIM
COMMANDS.............................................................................................117
18.1. Card
Identification
+CCID..............................................................................................117
18.2. Request IMSI +CIMI
......................................................................................................119
18.3. Generic SIM Access
+CSIM..........................................................................................121
18.4. Restricted SIM
Access +CRSM
....................................................................................124
18.5. Write Language
Preference
+WLPW............................................................................127
18.6. Read Language
Preference
+WLPR.............................................................................130
19.SIM
TOOLKIT COMMANDS ............................................................................133
19.1. Overview of SIM
Application ToolKit
.............................................................................133
19.2. SIM ToolKit Set
Facilities +STSF..................................................................................136
19.3. SIM ToolKit
Indication +STIN
........................................................................................139
19.4. SIM ToolKit Get
Information +STGI ..............................................................................142
19.5. SIM ToolKit Give
Response
+STGR.............................................................................152
19.6. SIM ToolKit
Control Response +STCR.........................................................................157
19.7. SIM ToolKit
Indication +STRIL
......................................................................................159
20.SUPPLEMENTARY
SERVICES COMMANDS ................................................161
20.1. List Current Calls
+CLCC..............................................................................................161
20.2. Call Related
Supplementary Services
+CHLD..............................................................164
20.3. Calling Line Identification
Presentation
+CLIP..............................................................167
20.4. Calling Line
Identification Restriction
+CLIR.................................................................170
20.5. Connected Line
Identification Presentation
+COLP......................................................172
20.6. Supplementary
Service Notifications +CSSN
...............................................................175
20.7. Unstructured
Supplementary Service Data +CUSD .....................................................179
20.8. Call Forwarding
+CCFC
................................................................................................182
20.9. Call Waiting
+CCWA.....................................................................................................186
20.10. Keypad Control
+CKPD.................................................................................................189
20.11. Advice Of Charge
+CAOC ............................................................................................191
20.12. Accumulated Call
Meter +CACM
..................................................................................193
20.13. Accumulated Call
Meter Maximum+CAMM ..................................................................195
20.14. Price per UNIT
and Currency Table
+CPUC.................................................................197
20.15. Closed User Group
+CCUG..........................................................................................199
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 6
16.
Phonebooks Commands
16.1.
Select Phonebook Memory Storage +CPBS
16.1.1.
Description
This command selects
phonebook memory storage.
Please refer to
Recommendation 3GPP 11.11 [9] for more details.
16.1.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CPBS=<storage>[,<pin2>]
OK
Read command
AT+CPBS?
+CPBS:
<storage>,<used>,<total>
OK
Test command
AT+CPBS=?
+CPBS: (list of supported
<storage>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Phonebooks
Commands
Select
Phonebook Memory Storage +CPBS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 7
16.1.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<storage>:
phonebook memory storage
"SM" ADN
Abbreviated Dialing Numbers (SIM phonebook)
"FD" FDN Fixed
Dialing Numbers (SIM restricted phonebook)
"ON" MSISDN
(SIM own numbers)
"EN" ECC
Emergency Call Codes (SIM or ME)
"LD" LND Last
Number Dialed
"MC" ME missed
(unanswered received) calls list
"ME" ME
phonebook
"MT" combined
ME and SIM phonebook (ME+SM)
"RC" ME
received calls list
"SN" SDN
Service Dialing Numbers (SIM special service numbers)
<pin2>:
Personal Identification Number 2.
<used>:
used locations in selected memory
integer type
<total>
: total number of locations in selected memory
integer type
16.1.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Phonebooks
Commands
Select
Phonebook Memory Storage +CPBS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 8
16.1.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CPBS="SM"
OK
Note:
Select ADN phonebook Note: ADN phonebook is selected
AT+CPBS=? +CPBS:
("SM","LD","MC","ON","ME","RC","MT","SN","EN")
Note:
Possible values OK
AT+CPBS? +CPBS:
"SM",10,20
OK
Note:
Get current phonebook memory storage Note: ADN phonebook selected, 10 locations
used, 20 locations
available
16.1.6.
Notes
On ADN and FDN
activation: when FDN has been activated with the +CLCK command, the selection
of ADN phonebook is
possible only if ADN status bit3 is set to 1 (EF file "readable and
updatable
when
invalidated").
Selection of ADN
phonebook when FDN is active is SIM dependent.
Selection of
"FD" phonebook with <pin2>, when <pin2> is already
verified, will give "+CME ERROR:
3".
The previously
selected phonebook remains the same when the embedded module is switched on or
reset, even if a new
SIM card is inserted. However, in the case when the replacement SIM card does
not contain any
selected phonebook, the ADN phonebook is selected.
The maximum number
of entries for ME phonebook is set to 500.
When the SIM is not
present, the following emergency numbers are available: 000, 08, 112, 110, 118,
119, 911, 999.
When a SIM is
present, the following emergency numbers are available: 112, 911, emergency
numbers from ECC SIM
files (if existing).
The following
emergency numbers are stored in EEPROM:
112
911
999
08
So, "EN"
will be available even if ECC SIM file is not present.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Phonebooks
Commands
Contact
Selector +WCOS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 9
16.2.
Contact Selector +WCOS
16.2.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command allows extended contact display to be enabled\disabled.
16.2.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WCOS=<mode>
OK
Read command
AT+WCOS?
+WCOS: <mode>
OK
Test command
AT+WCOS=?
+WCOS: (list of supported
<mode>s)
OK
16.2.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mode>:
extended contact mode
0 select the SIM contacts
(default mode)
1 select the extended
contacts for phonebook entries
2 reserved
Customer application
should not use this value.
16.2.4.
Parameter Storage
The <mode> parameter
is stored in EEPROM.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Phonebooks
Commands
Contact
Selector +WCOS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 10
16.2.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WCOS=?
Note:
Possible values ?
+WCOS: (0-2)
OK
Note:
Possible responses
AT+WCOS=1
Note:
Extended contact selected
OK
AT+WCOS?
Note:
Test command
+WCOS: 1
OK
Note:
Extended contact selected
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Phonebooks
Commands
Write
Phonebook Entry +CPBW
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 11
16.3.
Write Phonebook Entry +CPBW
16.3.1.
Description
This command writes
a phonebook entry in an index location number of the current phonebook
memory storage.
16.3.2.
Syntax
Depending on the
context several possibilities:
The
entry is stored in the ADN phonebook and AT+WCOS=0:
Action command
AT+CPBW=[<index>][,<number>[,<type>[,<text>]]]
OK
The
entry is stored in the ADN phonebook and AT+WCOS=1:
Action command
AT+CPBW=<index>[,<number>[,<type>[,<text>[,<phb_group>]]]]
OK
The
entry is stored in the ME phonebook and AT+WCOS=0:
Action command
AT+CPBW=<index>[,<number>[,<type>[,<text>]]]
OK
The
entry is stored in the ME phonebook and AT+WCOS=1:
Action command
AT+CPBW=<index>[,<number>[,<type>[,<text>[,<contact>[,<phb_group>]]]]]
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Phonebooks
Commands
Write
Phonebook Entry +CPBW
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 12
Read command
None
Test command
AT+CPBW=?
+CPBW: (list of supported
<index>s),[<nlength>],(list of supported
<type>s),[<tlength>]
OK
16.3.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<index>:
location in memory storage
range of possible values
depending on the capacity of the phonebook memory
integer type
<number>:
phone number in ASCII format
string type
<type>:
TON/NPI (type of address octet in integer format); default 145
when dialing string
includes international
access code character +, otherwise 129
129 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national / international unknown
145 ISDN / telephony numbering
plan, international number
161 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national number
128-255 other values
(refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])
<text>:
associated contact name
string type (see Note below)
SIM dependant for the ADN
phonebook (use AT+CPBW=?)
<phb_group>:
phonebook group number in which the entry should be saved
range value (1-10)
<nlength>:
max length of field <number>
integer type
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Phonebooks
Commands
Write
Phonebook Entry +CPBW
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 13
<tlength>:
max length of field <text>
integer type
<contact>:
This parameter gathers the following parameters:
<num_Mobile>,
<num_Work>, <num_Fax>, <num_Data>, <Email>,
<Address>
<num_Mobile>:
phone number (dedicated for mobile phone number for example)
up to 20 digits
<num_Work>:
phone number (dedicated for work phone number for example)
up to 20 digits
<num_Fax>:
phone number (dedicated for fax phone number for example)
up to 20 digits
<num_Data>:
phone number (dedicated for data phone number for example)
up to 20 digits
<Email>:
e-mail address
string type
up to 56 characters
<Address>:
mail address
string type
up to 56 characters
Note:
For the <text> parameter all strings starting with "80" ,
"81" or "81" are considered in UCS2 format.
The
+CSCS (Select Character Set) command does not affect the format for phonebook
entries.
16.3.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
16.3.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CPBS="SM"
Note:
ADN phonebook
OK
AT+CPBS?
Note:
Get current memory storage
+CPBS:"SM",1,10
OK
Note:
ADN phonebook is selected, 1 location is used and 10
locations
are available
AT+WCOS=0
Note:
Phonebook not extended
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Phonebooks
Commands
Write
Phonebook Entry +CPBW
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 14
Command
Responses
AT+CPBW=?
Note:
Test command
+CPBW: (1-50),20,(128-255),10
OK
Note: 50
locations, phone number = 20 digits max, TON/NPI = 128-
255,
text length = 10 character max
AT+CPBW=5,"112",129,"SOS"
Note:
Write at location 5
OK
Note:
Location 5 written
AT+CPBR=5
Note:
Read the entry at location 5
+CPBR:
5,"112",129,"SOS"
OK
AT+CPBS?
Note:
Get current memory storage
+CPBS: "SM",2,10
OK
Note:
ADN phonebook is selected, 2 locations are used and 10
locations
are available
AT+CPBW=5,"01290917",129,"Jacky"
Note:
Overwrite location 5
OK
Note:
Location 5 overwritten
AT+CPBW=6,"01292349",129,"8000410042"
OK
Note:
Write location 6 (UCS2 format for the<text> field) Note: Location 6 is
written
AT+CPBW=8,"01292349",129,"80xyz"
Note:
Write location
OK
Note:
Location 8 is written. The string has a wrong UCS2 format, it
is
therefore considered as an ASCII string.
AT+CPBW=5,"01290917",129,"Jacky",1
+CME
ERROR: 3
Note:
Write an extended entry Note: Error because +WCOS: 0
AT+WCOS=1
Note:
Phonebook extended
OK
AT+CPBW=5,""01290917"",129,"Jacky",1
Note:
Write an extended entry
OK
AT+WCOS=0
Note:
Phonebook not extended
OK
AT+CPBS="ME"
Note: ME
phonebook
OK
AT+CPBS?
Note:
How many entries are used ?
+CPBS: "ME",2,500
Note: in
ME phonebook, 2 locations are used out of 500 available
locations
AT+CPBW=1,"0123456798",129,"first
entry"
Note:
Write an not extended entry
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Phonebooks
Commands
Write
Phonebook Entry +CPBW
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 15
Command
Responses
AT+CPBR=1
Note:
Read the first entry
+CPBR:
1,"0123456798",129,"first entry"
OK
AT+WCOS=1
Note:
Phonebook extended
OK
AT+CPBW=1,"0123456798",129,"first
entry"
Note:
Write an entry not extended
OK
AT+CPBW=2,"9876543210",129,"secondentry"
,"6543210987",129
Note:
Write an entry extended
OK
AT+CPBR=1,2
Note:
Read entry 1 and 2
+CPBR:
1,"0123456798",129,"first
entry","",128,"",128,"",128,"",128,"","",0
+CPBR:
2,"9876543210",129,"second
entry","6543210987",129,"",128,"",128,"",128
,"","",0
OK
AT+CPBW=13,"+331290909",145,"Fred","0141
284549",129,"0600003210",129,"0141280000
",129,"019876543210",
129,"fred@mail_address.com",
"Becker
Street
London",1
Note:
Write location with Contact and Phonebook Group nฐ1
OK
Note:
Location 13 is written
AT+CPBW=,"+33145221100",145,"SOS"
Note:
Write at the first location available
OK
Note:
First location available is written
AT+CPBS="SM"
Note:
ADN phonebook
OK
AT+WCOS? +WCOS: 1
OK
Note:
Extended phonebook
AT+CPBW=1
Note:
Delete entry at first location
OK
AT+CPBW=1,"0123456",,"test",1
Note:
Add an extended entry in SIM with group number (1)
OK
AT+CPBR=1 +CPBR:1,"0123456",129,"test",1
OK
AT+CPBW=1,,,No
number
Note :
Write an empty number. The TON/NPI is omitted
OK
AT+CPBW=2,7654321,161,test2,1
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Phonebooks
Commands
Write
Phonebook Entry +CPBW
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 16
Command
Responses
AT+CPBR=2 +CPBR:2,"7654321",161,"test2",1
OK
16.3.6.
Notes
This
command is not allowed when the fixed dialing phonebook (FDN) is locked.
Moreover,
when the FDN is
unlocked, PIN2 is required to write in the FDN phonebook. If PIN2
authentication has
been performed during the current session, the +CPBW command with
FDN is allowed.
"RC"
and "MC" phonebooks can only be erased by using +CPBW. Adding field
and/or
modifying field is
not allowed for these phonebooks.
This
command is not allowed for "EN", "LD", "MC",
"RC", "MT", "SN" phonebooks, which can
not be written.
If
the AT+WCOS=1 command was used, the request would include the Contact
structure.
When
an empty number is written, the <type> parameter should be omitted. When
this entry
is read, the
<type> in the response is equal to 128 (unknown) (see +CPBR
command).
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Phonebooks
Commands
Read
Phonebook Entries +CPBR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 17
16.4.
Read Phonebook Entries +CPBR
16.4.1.
Description
This command returns
phonebook entries for a range of locations from the current phonebook
memory storage
selected with +CPBS.
16.4.2.
Syntax
Depending on the
context several possibilities:
The
entry is stored in the ADN phonebook and AT+WCOS=0:
Action command
AT+CPBR=<first_entry>[,<last_entry>]
+CPBR:
<loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>
[+CPBR:
<loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>[
]]
OK
The
entry is stored in the ADN phonebook and AT+WCOS=1:
Action command
AT+CPBR=<first_entry>[,<last_entry>]
+CPBR:
<loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>,<phb_group>
[+CPBR:
<loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>,<phb_group>[
]]
OK
The
entry is stored in the ME phonebook and AT+WCOS=0:
Action command
AT+CPBR=<first_entry>[,<last_entry>]
+CPBR:
<loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>
[+CPBR:
<loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>[
]]
OK
The
entry is stored in the ME phonebook and AT+WCOS=1:
Action command
AT+CPBR=<first_entry>[,<last_entry>]
+CPBR:<loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>,<contact>,<phb_group>
[+CPBR:<loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>,<contact>,<phb_group>[
]]
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Phonebooks
Commands
Read
Phonebook Entries +CPBR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 18
Read command
None
Test command
AT+CPBR=?
+CPBR: (list of supported
<loc>s),<nlength>,<tlength>
OK
16.4.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<first_entry>:
first location (or range of locations) where to read phonebook
entry
<last_entry>:
last location (or range of locations) where to read phonebook
entry
<type>:
TON/NPI Type of address octet (refer GSM 04.08 subclause
10.5.4.7 [6])
integer type
129 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national / international unknown
145 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, international number
161 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national number
128-255 other values
(refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])
<nlength>:
value indicating the maximum length of field <num>
integer type
<tlength>:
value indicating the maximum length of field <name>
integer type
<loc>:
phonebook index
integer type
<phb_group>:
phonebook group
range value (1-10)
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Phonebooks
Commands
Read
Phonebook Entries +CPBR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 19
<num>:
phone number
string type
<name>:
name associated with the phone number
up to 30 ASCII characters
or 13 UCS2
<contact>:
this parameter gathers the following parameters:
<num_Mobile>,
<num_Work>, <num_Fax>, <num_Data>,
<Email>,<Address>
<num_Mobile>:
phone number (dedicated for mobile phone number for example)
up to 20 digits
<num_Work>:
phone number (dedicated for work phone number for example)
up to 20 digits
<num_Fax>:
phone number (dedicated for fax phone number for example)
up to 20 digits
<num_Data>:
phone number (dedicated for data phone number for example)
up to 20 digits
<Email>:
e-mail address
string type
up to 56 characters
<Address>:
mail address
string type
up to 56 characters
16.4.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
16.4.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CPBR=? +CPBR:
(1-50),20,10
OK
Note:
Test command Note: 50 locations (from 1 to 50), max length for phone number is
20
digits, 10 characters max for name
AT+WCOS? +WCOS: 0
OK
Note:
Test command Note: Contact not selected
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Phonebooks
Commands
Read
Phonebook Entries +CPBR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 20
Command
Responses
AT+CPBR=12,14 +CPBR:
12,"112",129,"Emergency"
+CPBR:
13,"+331290909",145,"Fred"
+CPBR:
14,"0146290808",129,"Zazi"
OK
Note:
Read entries from 12 to 14 Note: Display locations 12,13,14 with location,
number, type
(TON/NPI),
name
AT+CPBR=10 +CPBR:
10,"0146290921",129,"Rob"
OK
Note:
Read entry 10 Note: Display location 10
AT+CPBR=11 +CPBR:
11,"0146290921",129,"8000010002FFFF"
OK
Note:
Read entry 11 (UCS2 format) Note: Display location 11
AT+CPBS="ME"
Note:
Flash memory
OK
AT+WCOS=1 OK
Note:
Contact selected
AT+CPBR=13 +CPBR:
13,"+331290909",145,"Fred","0141284549",129,
"0600003210",129
,"0141280000",129,"019876543210",129,"fred@m
ail_address.com","Becker
Street London",1
OK
Note:
Read entry Note: Display location 13 with location, number, type (TON/NPI),
name and
contact and phonebook group nฐ1
AT+CPBS="SM"
Note:
ADN phonebook
OK
AT+CPBR=1 +CPBR=1,"0123456",129,"test"
OK
AT+WCOS=0 OK
AT+CPBW=1,,,No
number OK
AT+CPBR=1 +CPBR:
1,,128,No number
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Phonebooks
Commands
Read
Phonebook Entries +CPBR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 21
16.4.6.
Notes
For
all phonebook read commands (+CPBR, +CPBF, +CPBN, +CPBP, +CNUM), the
TON/NPI MSB of each
number is set to 1 (ex: a TON/NPI stored as 17 is displayed as 145).
If
the AT+WCOS=1 command was used, the response will include <Contact>
structure.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Phonebooks
Commands
Find
Phonebook Entries +CPBF
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 22
16.5.
Find Phonebook Entries +CPBF
16.5.1.
Description
This command returns
phonebook entries with alphanumeric fields starting with a given pattern. The
AT+CPBF=""
command can be used to display all phonebook entries sorted in alphabetical
order.
This command is not
allowed for "LD", "RC", "MC" phonebooks and for
the "EN" phonebook, which
does not contain
alphanumeric fields.
It is possible to
use this command with UCS2 strings. If a wrong UCS2 format is entered, the
string is
considered as an
ASCII string.
16.5.2.
Syntax
Depending on the
context several responses to the command are possible:
The
entry is stored in the ADN phonebook and AT+WCOS=0:
Action command
AT+CPBF=<string>
+CPBF:
<loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>
OK
The
entry is stored in the ADN phonebook and AT+WCOS=1
Action command
AT+CPBF=<string>
+CPBF:
<loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>,<phb_group>
OK
The
entry is stored in the ME phonebook and AT+WCOS=0
Action command
AT+CPBF=<string>
+CPBF:
<loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Phonebooks
Commands
Find
Phonebook Entries +CPBF
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 23
The
entry is stored in the ME phonebook and AT+WCOS=1
Action command
AT+CPBF=<string>
+CPBF:
<loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>,<contact>,<phb_group>
OK
Read command
None
Test command
AT+CPBF=?
+CPBF:
[<nlength>],[<tlength>],[<glength>],[<slength>],[<elength>]
OK
16.5.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<string>:
searched pattern string (depends on the format of data stored in
the phonebooks)
<loc>:
location number (20 digits max)
<num>:
phone number (20 digits max)
<type>:
TON/NPI Type of address octet (refer GSM 04.08 subclause
10.5.4.7 [6])
integer type
129 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national / international unknown
145 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, international number
161 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national number
128-255 other values
(refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])
<phb_group>:
phonebook group
range value (1-10)
<name>:
name associated with the phone number .
up to 30 ASCII characters
or 13 UCS2
<contact>:
this parameter gathers the following parameters:
<num_Mobile>,
<num_Work>, <num_Fax>, <num_Data>,
<Email>,<Address>
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Phonebooks
Commands
Find
Phonebook Entries +CPBF
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 24
<num_Mobile>:
phone number (dedicated for mobile phone number for example)
up to 20 digits
<num_Work>:
phone number (dedicated for work phone number for example)
up to 20 digits
<num_Fax>:
phone number (dedicated for fax phone number for example)
up to 20 digits
<num_Data>:
phone number (dedicated for data phone number for example)
up to 20 digits
<Email>:
e-mail address
string type
up to 56 characters
<Address>:
mail address
string type
up to 56 characters
16.5.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
16.5.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CPBF=? +CPBF: 20,14
OK
Note:
Test command Note: Max length for phone number is 20 digits, 14 characters for
the text
AT+CPBF="E"
+CPBF:
12,"112",129,"Emergency"
+CPBF:
15,"+331290101",145,"Eric"
OK
Note:
Read entries with "E" Note: Display locations with text field
starting with "E"
AT+CPBF="H"
Note:
Read entries with "H"
+CME ERROR: 22
Note: No
entry found
AT+CPBF="800001"
+CPBF:
11,"0146290921",129,"8000010002FFFF"
OK
Note:
Read entries starting with 0001 UCS2
character
Note:
Display locations with text field starting with 0001 UCS2 character
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Phonebooks
Commands
Find
Phonebook Entries +CPBF
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 25
Command
Responses
AT+CPBF="8045C"
Note:
Read entries with "8045C" (ASCII format)
+CME ERROR: 22
Note: No
entry found. The string has a wrong UCS2 format, it is therefore
considered
as an ASCII string
AT+CPBS="SM"
Note:
ADN phonebook
OK
AT+WCOS=0
Note:
Phonebook not extended
OK
AT+CPBF="Test"
Note: Read
entries with "Test"
+CPBF:
1,"0123456789",129,"Test ADN"
Note:
Display locations with text field starting with "Test"
AT+WCOS=1
Note:
Phonebook extended
OK
AT+CPBF="Test"
Note:
Read entries with "Test"
+CPBF:
1,"0123456789",129,"Test ADN",0
Note:
Display locations with text field starting with "Test" extended entry
AT+CPBS="ME"
Note:
Flash phonebook
OK
AT+WCOS=0
Note:
Phonebook not extended
OK
AT+CPBF="Test"
Note:
Read entries with "Test"
+CPBF:
1,"0123456789",129,"Test ME"
Note:
Display locations with text field starting with "Test"
AT+WCOS=1
Note:
Phonebook extended
OK
AT+CPBF="Test"
+CPBF:
1,"0123456789",129,"Test
ME","9876543210",129,"",128,"",128,"",128,"e_mail@ma
il_address.com",
"post address",0
Note:
Read entries with "Test" Note: Display locations with text field
starting with "Test", extended entry
AT+WCOS=0 OK
AT+CPBW=1,"",,"No
number" OK
AT+CPBF="No
number" +CPBF: 1,"",128,"No number"
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Phonebooks
Commands
Phonebook
Phone Search +CPBP
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 26
16.6.
Phonebook Phone Search +CPBP
16.6.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command orders the product to search in the phonebook for an item
with the same phone
number as provided in the parameter.
If two different
entries of the selected phonebook have the same number, the entry returned by
+CPBP command is the
first one written using +CPBW command..
16.6.2.
Syntax
Depending on the
context several responses to the command are possible:
The
entry is stored in the ADN phonebook and AT+WCOS=0:
Action command
AT+CPBP=<number>
+CPBP:
<index>,<number>,<type>,<text>
OK
The
entry is stored in the ADN phonebook and AT+WCOS=1
Action command
AT+CPBP=<number>
+CPBP:
<index>,<number>,<type>,<text>,<phb_group>
OK
The
entry is stored in the ME phonebook and AT+WCOS=0
Action command
AT+CPBP=<number>
+CPBP:
<index>,<number>,<type>,<text>
OK
The
entry is stored in the ME phonebook and AT+WCOS=1
Action command
AT+CPBP=<number>
+CPBP:
<index>,<number>,<type>,<text>,<contact>,<phb_group>
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Phonebooks
Commands
Phonebook
Phone Search +CPBP
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 27
Read command
None
Test command
AT+CPBP=?
+CPBP: (list of supported
<index>s),<nlength>,<tlength>
OK
16.6.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<index>:
location in memory storage
range of possible values
depending on the capacity of the phonebook memory
integer type
<number>:
phone number in ASCII format
string type
<type>:
TON/NPI Type of address octet (refer GSM 04.08 subclause
10.5.4.7 [6])
integer type
129 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national / international unknown
145 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, international number
161 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national number
128-255 other values
(refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Phonebooks
Commands
Phonebook
Phone Search +CPBP
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 28
<text>:
associated contact name
string type (see note
below)
SIM dependant for the ADN
phonebook (use AT+CPBW=?)
<phb_group>:
phonebook group number
range value (1-10)
<nlength>:
max length of field <number>
integer type
<tlength>:
max length of field <text>
integer type
<contact>:
this parameter gathers the following parameters:
<num_Mobile>,
<num_Work>, <num_Fax>, <num_Data>,
<Email>,<Address>
<num_Mobile>:
phone number (dedicated for mobile phone number for example)
up to 20 digits
<num_Work>:
phone number (dedicated for work phone number for example)
up to 20 digits
<num_Fax>:
phone number (dedicated for fax phone number for example)
up to 20 digits
<num_Data>:
phone number (dedicated for data phone number for example)
up to 20 digits
<Email>:
e-mail address
string type
up to 56 characters
<Address>:
mail address
string type
up to 56 characters
16.6.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Phonebooks
Commands
Phonebook
Phone Search +CPBP
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 29
16.6.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CPBP=?
Note:
Test command
+CPBP: (1-50),20,10
OK
Note: 50
locations (from 1 to 50), max length for phone number is
20
digits, max length for text is 10 characters
AT+CPBP="+331290101"
+CPBP:
15,"+331290101",145,"Eric"
OK
Note:
Search entries corresponding to this phone
number
Note:
Display the entry corresponding to the specified phone
number
AT+CPBP="01290202"
Note:
Search entries corresponding to this phone
number
+CPBP:
15,"+331290202",145,"David"
OK
Note:
Display the entry corresponding to the specified phone
number
AT+CPBP="+331288575"
+CPBP:
15,"+331290101",145,"8045682344FFFF"
OK
Note:
Search entries corresponding to this phone
number
Note:
Display the entry corresponding to the specified phone
number
(UCS2 format)
AT+CPBS="SM"
Note: ADN
phonebook
OK
AT+WCOS=0
Note:
Phonebook not extended
OK
AT+CPBP="0123456789"
Note:
Search entries corresponding to this phone
number
+CPBP:
1,"0123456789",129,"Test ADN"
OK
Note:
Display the entry corresponding to the specified phone
number
AT+WCOS=1
Note:
Phonebook extended
OK
AT+CPBP="0123456789"
Note:
Search entries corresponding to this phone
number
+CPBP:
1,"0123456789",129,"Test ADN",0
OK
AT+CPBS="ME"
Note: ME
phonebook
OK
AT+WCOS=0
Note:
Phonebook not extended
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Phonebooks
Commands
Phonebook
Phone Search +CPBP
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 30
Command
Responses
AT+CPBP="0123456789"
Note:
Search entries corresponding to this phone
number
+CPBP:
1,"0123456789",129,"Test ME"
OK
AT+WCOS=1
Note:
Phonebook extended
OK
AT+CPBP="0123456789"
Note:
Search entries corresponding to this phone
number
+CPBP:
1,"0123456789",129,"Test
ME","9876543210",129,"",128,"",128,"",128,"e
_mail@somewhere.com","postal
address",0
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide
for
Firmware 7.45
Phonebooks
Commands
Move
Action in Phonebook +CPBN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 31
16.7.
Move Action in Phonebook +CPBN
16.7.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command performs a forward or backward move in the phonebook (in
alphabetical order).
It is not allowed for the "EN" phonebook which does not contain
alphanumeric
fields.
16.7.2.
Syntax
Depending on the
context, several responses to the command are possible:
The
entry is stored in the ADN phonebook and AT+WCOS=0:
Action command
AT+CPBN=<mode>
+CPBN:
<index>,<number>,<type>,<name>
OK
The
entry is stored in the ADN phonebook and AT+WCOS=1
Action command
AT+CPBN=<mode>
+CPBN:
<index>,<number>,<type>,<name>,<phb_group>
OK
The
entry is stored in the ME phonebook and AT+WCOS=0
Action command
AT+CPBN=<mode>
+CPBN:
<index>,<number>,<type>,<name>
OK
The
entry is stored in the ME phonebook and AT+WCOS=1
Action command
AT+CPBN=<mode>
+CPBN:
<index>,<number>,<type>,<name>,<contact>,<phb_group>
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Phonebooks
Commands
Move
Action in Phonebook +CPBN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 32
Read command
None
Test command
AT+CPBN=?
+CPBN: (list of supported
<mode>s)
OK
16.7.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mode>:
requested entry to be displayed
0 first item
1 last item
2 next valid item in
alphabetical order
3 previous valid item in
alphabetical order
4 last item read (usable
only if a read operation has been performed on the current
phonebook)
5 last item written
(usable only if a write operation has been performed on the
current phonebook)
<index>:
location in memory storage
range of possible values
depending on the capacity of the phonebook memory
integer type
<number>:
phone number in ASCII format
string type
<type>:
TON/NPI Type of address octet (refer GSM 04.08 subclause
10.5.4.7 [6])
integer type
129 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national / international unknown
145 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, international number
161 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national number
128-255 other values
(refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Phonebooks
Commands
Move
Action in Phonebook +CPBN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 33
<phb_group>:
phonebook group number
range :1-10
<name>:
name of the group.
up to 30 ASCII characters
or 13 UCS2
<contact>:
this parameter gathers the following parameters:
<num_Mobile>,
<num_Work>, <num_Fax>, <num_Data>,
<Email>,<Address>
<num_Mobile>:
phone number (dedicated for mobile phone number for example)
up to 20 digits
<num_Work>:
phone number (dedicated for work phone number for example)
up to 20 digits
<num_Fax>:
phone number (dedicated for fax phone number for example)
up to 20 digits
<num_Data>:
phone number (dedicated for data phone number for example)
up to 20 digits
<Email>:
e-mail address
string type
up to 56 characters
<Address>:
mail address
string type
up to 56 characters
16.7.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
16.7.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CPBN=? +CPBN: (0-5)
OK
Note:
Possible modes
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Phonebooks
Commands
Move
Action in Phonebook +CPBN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 34
Command
Responses
AT+CPBS="SM"
Note:
ADN phonebook
OK
AT+WCOS=0
Note:
Phonebook not extended
OK
AT+CPBN=0 +CPBN:
15,"+331290101",145,"Eric"
OK
Note:
Read the first location Note: Display the first location
AT+WCOS=1
Note:
Phonebook extended
OK
AT+CPBN=2 +CPBN:
5,"+33147658987",145,"Frank",0
OK
Note:
Read the next location Note: Display the second location, extended entry
AT+CPBN=2
Note:
Read the next location
+CPBN:
6,"+331290302",145,"Marc",0
OK
Note:
Display the third location, extended entry
AT+WCOS=0
Note:
Phonebook not extended
OK
AT+CPBN=3 +CPBN:
5,"+33147658987",145,"Frank"
OK
Note:
Read the previous location Note: Display the second location
AT+CPBN=1
Note:
Read the last location
+CPBN:
6,"+331290302",145,"Marc"
OK
Note:
Display the last location
AT+CPBN=2
Note:
Read the next location
+CPBN: 15,"+331290101",145,"Eric"
OK
Note:
Display the first location
AT+CPBF="Er"
Note:
Find "Er" in phonebook
+CPBF:
15,"+331290101",145,"Eric"
OK
Note:
Display the location
AT+CPBN=2
Note:
Read the next location
+CPBN:
5,"+33147658987",145,"Frank"
OK
Note:
Display the following location
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Phonebooks
Commands
Move
Action in Phonebook +CPBN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 35
Command
Responses
AT+CPBF="Er"
Note:
Find "Er" in phonebook
+CPBF:
15,"+331290101",145,"Eric"
OK
Note:
Display the location
AT+CPBN=4
Note:
Get the last location read
+CPBN:
15,"+331290101",145,"Eric"
OK
Note:
Display the last location read
AT+CPBW=,"0146290800",129,"WM"
Note:
Write an item at the first location available
OK
Note: No
information about this location
AT+CPBN=4
Note:
Get the last location read
+CPBN:
15,"+331290101",145,"Eric"
OK
Note:
Display the last location read
AT+CPBN=5
Note:
Display the last item written with its
location
+CPBN:
38,"0146290800",129,"WM"
OK
Note:
Display the last item written with its
location
AT+CPBN=4
Note:
Get the last item read
+CPBN:
38,"0146290800,129,"WM"
OK
Note:
Now the last item read is the last written item too
AT+CPBF="800041FFFF"
Note:
Find"800041" in phonebook
+CPBF:
15,"+3312345",145,"8000414339FFFF"
OK
Note:
Display this location
AT+CPBN=4
Note:
Get the last location read
+CPBN:
15,"+3312345",145,"8000414339FFFF"
OK
Note:
Display the last location read Please note that the
AT+CPBN=5
command is useful after an AT+CPBW command
used
without a location.
16.7.6.
Notes
The AT+CPBN=5
command is useful after an AT+CPBW command used without a location.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Phonebooks
Commands
Create
and Delete a Phonebook Group +WPGW
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 36
16.8.
Create and Delete a Phonebook Group
+WPGW
16.8.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command creates or deletes a phonebook group.
16.8.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WPGW=<phb_group>[,<name>]
OK
Read command
None
Test command
AT+WPGW=?
+WPGW: (list of supported
<index>s),<tlength>
OK
16.8.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<phb_group>:
phonebook group number
range value (1-10)
<name>:
name of the group.
up to 30 ASCII characters
or 13 UCS2
<tlength>:
value indicating the maximum length of field <name>
integer type
16.8.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Phonebooks
Commands
Create
and Delete a Phonebook Group +WPGW
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 37
16.8.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WPGW=?
Note:
Test command
+WPGW: (1-10),30
OK
Note: 10
possible groups, group name can be 30 characters max
AT+WPGW=1,"group
1"
Note:
Create group #1
OK
Note:
Group 1 created
AT+WPGW=1,"phb
group1"
Note:
Rename group #1
OK
Note:
Group 1 renamed
AT+WPGW=1 OK
Note:
Erase group #1
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Phonebooks
Commands
Read a
Phonebook Group +WPGR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 38
16.9.
Read a Phonebook Group +WPGR
16.9.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command reads the phonebook group entries, the phonebook group
name or the number
of entries used in a group.
16.9.2.
Syntax
Depending on the
mode, several syntaxes are available for the action command:
<mode>=
1, 2
Action command
AT+WPGR=<mode>[,<group
index>]
+WPGR: <group
index>,<group name>
[+WPGR: <group
index>,<group name>[
]]
OK
<mode>=
3
Action command
AT+WPGR=<mode>,<group
index>
+WPGR:
<loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>[,<contact>][,<phb_group>]
[+WPGR:
<loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>[,<contact>][,<phb_group>][
]]
OK
Note:
The response syntax is the same as +CPBR (refer to +CPBR command
for more details.
<Contact>
field is returned only if the entry is stored in ME phone book
<mode>
= 4
Action command
AT+WPGR=<mode>,<index>
+WPGR: <used>/<total>
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Phonebooks
Commands
Read a
Phonebook Group +WPGR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 39
Read command
None
Test command
AT+WPGR=?
+WPGR: (list of supported
<mode>s),(list of supported <group index>s)
OK
16.9.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mode>:
phonebook group read mode
1 read the name of one
phonebook group
2 read the names of all
phonebook groups
3 list all entries of one
phonebook group (in alphabetical order)
4 read the number of used
entries in a phonebook group
<used>:
number of used entries in a phonebook group
integer type
<total>:
number of available entries in a phonebook group
integer type
<group
name>: phonebook group name
string type
<group
index>: phonebook group index
integer type
range value (1-10)
<loc>:
phonebook index
integer type
<phb_group>:
phonebook group number
range value (1-10)
<num>:
phone number
string type
<name>:
name associated with the phone number .
up to 30 ASCII characters
or 13 UCS2
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Phonebooks
Commands
Read a
Phonebook Group +WPGR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 40
<type>:
TON/NPI Type of address octet (refer GSM 04.08 subclause
10.5.4.7 [6])
integer type
129 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national / international unknown
145 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, international number
<number> includes
the international access code character "+"
161 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national number
128-255 other values
(refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])
<contact>:
this parameter gathers the following parameters:
<num_Mobile>,
<num_Work>, <num_Fax>, <num_Data>,
<Email>,<Address>
<num_Mobile>:
phone number (dedicated for mobile phone number for example)
up to 20 digits
<num_Work>:
phone number (dedicated for work phone number for example)
up to 20 digits
<num_Fax>:
phone number (dedicated for fax phone number for example)
up to 20 digits
<num_Data>:
phone number (dedicated for data phone number for example)
up to 20 digits
<Email>:
e-mail address
string type
up to 56 characters
<Address>:
mail address
string type
up to 56 characters
16.9.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Phonebooks
Commands
Read a
Phonebook Group +WPGR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019
Volume 3 February 18, 2011 41
16.9.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WPGR=?
Note:
Test command
+WPGR: (1-4),(1-10)
OK
Note: 10
possible groups
AT+WPGR=1,1 +WPGR:
1,"group 1"
Note:
Read the name of phonebook group 1 OK
AT+WPGR=2 +WPGR:
1,"group 1"
+WPGR: 2,"group 2"
Note:
Read the names of all phonebook groups OK
AT+WCOS=0
Note:
Phonebook not extended
OK
AT+WPGR=3,1 +WPGR:
2,"+33567891234",145,"Elvis"
+WPGR:
31,"+331290909",145,"Fred"
+WPGR:
1,"+33123456789",145,"John"
+WPGR: 33,,128,No number
+WPGR: 32,"0123456789",129,"Test"
OK
Note:
Lists all entries of phonebook group 1 Note: SIM entries: index 1 and 2; Flash
entries: index 31 and
32
(The SIM
supports 30 entries in this example)
AT+WCOS=1
Note:
Phonebook extended
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Phonebooks
Commands
Read a
Phonebook Group +WPGR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 42
Command
Responses
AT+WPGR=3,1 +WPGR:
2,"+33567891234",145,"Elvis",1
+WPGR:
31,"+331290909",145,"Fred","0141284549",1
29,"0600003210",129,"0141280000",
129,"019876543210",129,"fred@mail_address
.com","Becker Street
London",1
+WPGR:
1,"+33123456789",145,"John",1
+WPGR: 33,,128,No
number,"",128,"",12
8,"",128,"",128,"","",1
+WPGR:
32,"0123456789",129,"Test","0141284549",1
29,"0600003210",129,
"0141280000",129,
"6549873210",129,"test@mail_address.com",
"",1
OK
Note:
Lists all entries of phonebook group 1
The
entries list displayed with AT+WPGR=3,1 contains
records
from both ME and SIM phonebook (MT phonebook).
Note:
SIM entries: index 1 and 2; Flash entries: index 31 and
32 (The
SIM supports 30 entries in this example)
AT+WPGR=4,1 +WPGR: 5/100
OK
Note:
Read the number of used entries in the phonebook
group 1
Note: 4
entries are used from the 100 possible entries
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Phonebooks
Commands
Settings
of a Group +WPGS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 43
16.10.
Settings of a Group +WPGS
16.10.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command sets the parameters for a group.
16.10.2.
Syntax
Depending on the
mode, several syntaxes are available for the action command:
<mode>=
0
Action command
AT+WPGS=<mode>,<group
index>
+WPGS: <restrict call>
OK
<mode>=
1
Action command
AT+WPGS=<mode>,<group
index>,<restrict call>
OK
Read command
None
Test command
AT+WPGS=?
+WPGS: (list of supported
<mode>s),(list of supported <group index>s),(list of
supported <restrict
call>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Phonebooks
Commands
Settings
of a Group +WPGS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019
Volume 3 February 18, 2011 44
16.10.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mode>:
requested operation
0 read group settings
1 write group settings
<group
index>: index of a group
<restrict
call>: call restriction mode
0 all refused - incoming
call is forwarded to the voice mailbox or rejected like busy
line (depends on network
operator)
1 all accepted - incoming
call is received (RING message is displayed)
16.10.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
16.10.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WPGS=1,1,1
Note:
Set restrict call to "All Accepted"
OK
AT+WPGS=0,1 +WPGS: 1
OK
Note:
Command reads group 1 settings Note: Group 1 all accepted
AT+WPGS=? +WPGS:
(0-1),(1-10),(0-1)
Note:
Test command OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Phonebooks
Commands
Delete
Calls Phonebook +WDCP
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 45
16.11.
Delete Calls Phonebook +WDCP
16.11.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command allows to delete the calls listed in some phonebooks.
16.11.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WDCP=<mem>
OK
Read command
None
Test command
AT+WDCP=?
+WDCP: (list of supported
<mem>s)
OK
16.11.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mem>:
type of phonebook
"LD" SIM (ME
extended) last dialing phonebook
"MC" ME missed
calls list phonebook
"RC" ME
received calls list phonebook
16.11.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Phonebooks
Commands
Delete
Calls Phonebook +WDCP
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 46
16.11.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WDCP=? +WDCP:
("LD","MC","RC")
OK
Note:
Possible values? Note: Identifiers of the phonebooks supporting a list of calls
AT+WDCP="LD"
Note:
Delete all the content of Last Dialing phonebook.
OK
Note:
Last Dialing phonebook is now empty.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Phonebooks
Commands
Subscriber
Number +CNUM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 47
16.12.
Subscriber Number +CNUM
16.12.1.
Description
This command returns
the subscriber MSISDN(s). If the subscriber has several MSISDNs for various
services, each
MSISDN is returned in a separate line.
16.12.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CNUM
+CNUM: <alpha1>,<number1>,<type1>
[+CNUM: <alpha2>,<number2>,<type2>[
]]
OK
Read command
None
Test command
AT+CNUM=?
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Phonebooks
Commands
Subscriber
Number +CNUM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 48
16.12.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<alphai>:
optional alphanumeric string associated with <numberi>
<numberi>: phone
number in ASCII format
string type
<typei>: TON/NPI
Type of address octet (refer GSM 04.08 subclause 10.5.4.7 [6])
integer type
129 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national / international unknown
145 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, international number
161 ISDN / telephony numbering
plan, national number
128-255 other values
(refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])
16.12.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
16.12.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CNUM +CNUM:
"Phone","0612345678",129
+CNUM:
"Fax","0687654321",129
+CNUM:
"80001002FFFF","+0183773",145
OK
Note:
Get MSISDN(s) Note: Last number is in UCS2 format
AT+CNUM=? OK
AT+CPBS="ON"
OK
AT+CPBW=4,"0146278478",161,"Cell"
OK
AT+CNUM +CNUM:
"Phone","0612345678",129
+CNUM:
"Fax","0687654321",129
+CNUM:
"80001002FFFF","+0183773",145
+CNUM: "Cell","0146278478",161
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Phonebooks
Commands
Set
Voice Mail Number +CSVM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 49
16.13.
Set Voice Mail Number +CSVM
16.13.1.
Description
This command allows
to set/get and enable/disable the voice mail number in memory.
Note:
This command is used to specifically manage the ME Memory stored Voicemail
Numbers. Any
actions
related to the SIM stored Voicemail Numbers (from the CPHS SIM Storage) MUST be
managed
through AT+CPHS=2,2.
16.13.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CSVM=<mode>[,<number>[,<type>]]
OK
Read command
AT+CSVM?
+CSVM:
<mode>,<number>,<type>
OK
Test command
AT+CSVM=?
+CSVM: (list of supported
<mode>s),(list of supported <type>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Phonebooks
Commands
Set
Voice Mail Number +CSVM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 50
16.13.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mode>:
voice mail number mode
0 disable the voice mail
number (default value)
1 enable the voice mail
number
<number>:
phone number in ASCII format
string type
<type>:
TON/NPI for <number>; default 145 when dialing string
includes international access
code character
"+", otherwise 129
129 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national / international unknown
145 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, international number
161 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national number
128-255 other values
(refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])
16.13.4.
Parameter Storage
All parameters are
stored in EEPROM. The default value can be restored using AT&F.
16.13.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CSVM=?
Note:
Possible values?
+CSVM: (0-1),(128-255)
OK
Note:
Activation/deactivation and format 128-255 are supported
AT+CSVM=0,"888",129
Note:
Disable Voice Mail number and change value to
"888".
OK
AT+CSVM?
Note:
Get mail number
+CSVM: 1,"888",129
OK
Note:
Voice mail number "888" is activated
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Phonebooks
Commands
Avoid
Phonebook Init +WAIP
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 51
16.14.
Avoid Phonebook Init +WAIP
16.14.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command allows the initialization of all phonebooks to be inhibited
during subsequent
boots.
16.14.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WAIP=<mode>
OK
Read command
AT+WAIP?
+WAIP: <mode>
OK
Test command
AT+WAIP=?
+WAIP: (list of supported
<mode>s)
OK
16.14.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mode>:
phonebook initialization mode
0 normal initialization
(default value)
1 no phonebook
initialization
16.14.4.
Parameter Storage
The <mode>
parameter is stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can
be
restored using
AT&F.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Phonebooks
Commands
Avoid
Phonebook Init +WAIP
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 52
16.14.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WAIP=? +WAIP: (0,1)
OK
Note:
Query possible values Note: Disable / enable
AT+WAIP=1
Note:
Inhibit initialization of phonebooks (next boot)
OK
Note: no
answer
AT+WAIP?
Note:
Get current value
+WAIP: 1
OK
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 53
17.
Short message Commands
17.1.
Select Message Service +CSMS
17.1.1.
Description
This command defines
the availability of the SMS services and the SMS AT commands version.
The supported
services are originated (SMS-MO), terminated short message (SMS-MT) or Cell
Broadcast Message
(SMS-CB) services.
17.1.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CSMS=<service>
+CSMS:
<mt>,<mo>,<bm>
OK
Read command
AT+CSMS?
+CSMS:
<service>,<mt>,<mo>,<bm>
OK
Test command
AT+CSMS=?
+CSMS: (list of supported
<service>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
Select
Message Service +CSMS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 54
17.1.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<service>:
selected service
0 SMS AT commands are
compatible with GSM 07.05 [1] phase 2 version 4.7.0.
(default value)
1 SMS AT commands are
compatible with GSM 07.05 [1] phase 2+ version.
<mt>:
SMS-MT support
0 SMS-MT not supported
1 SMS-MT supported
<mo>:
SMS-MO support
0 SMS-MO not supported
1 SMS-MO supported
<bm>:
SMS-CB support
0 SMS-CB not supported
1 SMS-CB supported
17.1.4.
Parameter Storage
The <service>
parameter is stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can
be
restored using
AT&F.
17.1.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CSMS=0
Note:
SMS AT command phase 2 version 4.7.0
+CSMS: 1,1,1
OK
Note:
SMS-MO, SMS-MT and SMS-CB supported
AT+CSMS?
Note:
Get current values
+CSMS: 0,1,1,1
OK
AT+CSMS=?
Note:
Possible services
+CSMS: (0,1)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
New
Message Indication +CNMI
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 55
17.2.
New Message Indication +CNMI
17.2.1.
Description
This command selects
the procedure for message reception from the network.
17.2.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CNMI=<mode>,<mt>,<bm>,<ds>,<bfr>
OK
Read command
AT+CNMI?
+CNMI:
<mode>,<mt>,<bm>,<ds>,<bfr>
OK
Test command
AT+CNMI=?
+CNMI: (list of supported
<mode>s),(list of supported <mt>s),(list of supported
<bm>s),(list of supported
<ds>s),(list of supported <bfr>s)
OK
For
<mt>=1
Unsolicited response
+CMTI: <mem>,<index>
For
<mt>=2 and PDU mode
Unsolicited response
+CMT:
[<alpha>],<length>
<pdu>
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
New
Message Indication +CNMI
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 56
For
<mt>=2 and text mode
Unsolicited response
+CMT:
<oa>,[<alpha>],<scts>[,<tooa>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,<sca>,<tosca>,<length>]
<data>
For
<bm>=1
Unsolicited response
+CBMI: <mem>,<index>
For
<bm>=2 and PDU mode
Unsolicited response
+CBM: <length>
<pdu>
For
<bm>=2 and text mode
Unsolicited response
+CBM:
<sn>,<mid>,<dcs>,<page>,<pages>
<data>
For
<ds>=1 and PDU mode
Unsolicited response
+CDS: <length>
<pdu>
For
<ds>=1 and text mode
Unsolicited response
+CDS:
<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st>
For
<ds>=2
Unsolicited response
+CDSI: <mem>,<index>
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
New
Message Indication +CNMI
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 57
17.2.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mode>:
processing of unsolicited result codes (see Note below)
0 same processing as
<mode>=2
1 same processing as
<mode>=2
2 Buffer unsolicited
result codes in the TA when TA-TE link is reserved and flush
them to the TE after
reservation.
Otherwise forward them
directly to the TE
3 Forward unsolicited
result codes to the TE by using a specific inband technique:
while TA-TE link is
reserved (i.e. TE is in online data mode by CSD or GPRS call)
unsolicited result codes
are replaced by a break (100ms) and stored in a buffer.
The unsolicited result
codes buffer is flushed to the TE after reservation (after +++
was entered). Otherwise,
(the TE is not in online data mode) forward them directly
to the TE
<mt>:
result code indication routing for SMS-DELIVER indications
0 no SMS-DELIVER
indications are routed
1 SMS-DELIVERs are routed
using unsolicited code +CMTI (default value)
2 SMS-DELIVERs (except
class 2 messages) are routed using unsolicited code
+CMT
3 Class 3 SMS-DELIVERS
are routed directly using code in <mt>=2
Other classes messages
result in indication <mt>=1
<bm>:
rules for storing the received CBMs (Cell Broadcast Message)
types.
They also depend on the
coding scheme (text or PDU) and the setting of Select CBM
Types (see +CSCB command).
0 no CBM indications are
routed to the TE (default value).
The CBMs are stored.
1 The CBM is stored and
an indication of the memory location is routed to the
customer application
using unsolicited result code +CBMI.
2 New CBMs are routed
directly to the TE using unsolicited result code +CBM.
3 Class 3 CBMs: as
<bm>=2.
Other classes CBMs: as
<bm>=1.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
New
Message Indication +CNMI
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 58
<ds>:
SMS-STATUS-REPORTs routing
0 no SMS-STATUS-REPORTs
are routed (default value)
1 SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are
routed using unsolicited code +CDS.
2 SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are
stored and routed using the unsolicited result code
+CDSI.
<bfr>:
TA buffer of unsolicited result codes mode
0 TA buffer defined
within this command is flushed to the TE when <mode> = 1 to 3
is entered (OK response
shall be given before flushing the codes).
Default value
1 TA buffer of
unsolicited result codes defined within this command is cleared when
<mode> 1
3 is
entered.
<mem>:
memory storage
"SM" SMS
message storage in SIM (default value)
"ME" SMS
message storage in Flash
"SR" status
report message storage (in SIM if the EF-SMR file exists, otherwise in the
ME non volatile memory)
"BM" CBM
message storage (in volatile memory)
<length>:
text mode (AT+CMGF=1): number of characters
PDU mode (AT+CMGF=0):
length of the TP data unit in bytes
integer type
<alpha>:
associated phonebook name
string type
<scts>:
service center timestamp
string format:
"yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ssฑzz"
(Year/Month/Day,Hour:Min:SecondsฑTimeZone)
<oa>:
originator address
string type
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
New
Message Indication +CNMI
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 59
<tooa>:
type of address of <oa>; when first character of
<oa>is + default is 145, otherwise
default is 129 (refer GSM
04.08 subclause 10.5.4.7 [6])
integer type
129 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national / international unknown
145 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, international number
161 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national number
128-255 other values
(refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])
<fo>:
first byte of SMS-DELIVER or SMS-STATUS-REPORT, for further
information refer to
document [1]
integer type
<pid>:
protocol identifier
integer type
<dcs>:
data coding scheme, coded like in document [5]
integer type
<sca>:
service center address
string type
<tosca>:
type of address of <sca>; when first character of
<sca>is + default is 145, otherwise
default is 129 (refer GSM
04.08 subclause 10.5.4.7 [6])
integer type
129 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national / international unknown
145 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, international number
161 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national number
128-255 other values
(refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])
<data>:
SMS user data in text mode
string type
<pdu>:
SMS user data in PDU mode
string type (hexadecimal
format)
<index>:
place of storage in memory
integer type
<sn>:
CBM serial number
integer type
<mid>:
CBM message identifier
integer type
<page>:
CBM page parameter bits 4-7
integer type
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
New
Message Indication +CNMI
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 60
<pages>:
CBM page parameter bits 0-3
integer type
<mr>:
message reference
integer type
<ra>:
recipient address
string type
<tora>:
type of address of <ra>; when first character of
<ra>is + default is 145, otherwise
default is 129 (refer GSM
04.08 subclause 10.5.4.7 [6])
integer type
129 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national / international unknown
145 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, international number
161 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national number
128-255 other values
(refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])
<dt>:
discharge time
string format:
"yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ssฑzz"(Year [00-99],
Month [01-12], Day [01-31],
Hour, Minute, Second and
Time Zone [quarters of an hour])
<st>:
status of a SMS-STATUS-REPORT
integer type
Note:
Please refer to document [4] (ETSI GSM 03.40: Digital
cellular
telecommunications
system (Phase 2); Technical implementation of the
Short
Message Service (SMS) Point-to-Point (PP)) for detailed description
and
possible values.
Note:
Only <mode>=2 and 3 are supported.
Any
other value for <mode> (0 or 1) is accepted (return code will be OK), but
the processing of
unsolicited
result codes will be the same as with <mode>=2.
17.2.4.
Parameter Storage
The
<mode>,<mt>,<bm>,<ds> and <bfr> parameters are
stored in EEPROM using the AT+CSAS
command. The default
values can be restored using AT&F.
17.2.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CNMI=2,1,0,0,0
Note:
<mt>=1
OK
+CMTI: "SM",1
Note:
Message received
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
New
Message Indication +CNMI
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 61
Command
Responses
AT+CNMI=2,2,0,0,0
Note:
<mt>=2
OK
+CMT:
"123456","98/10/01,12:3000+00",129,4,32,240,"15
379",129,5
Note:
Message received
AT+CNMI=2,0,0,1,0
Note:
<ds>=1
OK
AT+CMGS="+33146290800"<CR>
Happy Birthday
!<ctrl-Z>
Note:
Send a message in text mode
+CMGS: 7
OK
Note:
Successful transmission
+CDS:
2,116,"+33146290800",145,"98/10/01,12:30:07+04"
,"98/10/0112:30:08+04",0
Note:
Message was correctly delivered
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
Set
Text Mode Parameters +CSMP
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 62
17.3.
Set Text Mode Parameters +CSMP
17.3.1.
Description
This command is used
to select a value for <vp>, <pid>, and <dcs> and configure
the text mode.
17.3.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CSMP=<fo>,<vp>,<pid>,<dcs>
OK
Read command
AT+CSMP?
+CSMP:
<fo>,<vp>,<pid>,<dcs>
OK
Test command
None
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
Set Text
Mode Parameters +CSMP
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 63
17.3.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<fo>:
see Note below
<vp>:
validity period
In text mode is only
coded in "relative" format.
default value 167 (24
hours)
This means that one byte
can describe different values.
0 to 143 (VP + 1) x 5
minutes (up to 12 hours)
144 to 167 12 hours + (
(VP 143) x 30 minutes )
168 to 196 (VP 166) x 1
day
197 to 255 (VP 192) x 1
week
<pid>:
protocol Id (please refer to [1])
string type
<dcs>:
data encoding scheme (please refer to [1])
integer type
Note:
The <fo> byte comprises 6 fields:
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
RP UDHI SRR VPF RD Mit
RP: Reply
Path, not used in text mode
UDHI: User
Data Header Information
b6=1 if the beginning of
the User Data field contains a Header in addition to the short
message. This option is
not supported in +CSMP command, but can be used in PDU
mode (+CMGS).
SRR: Status
Report Request.
b5=1 if a status report
is requested. This mode is supported.
VPF: Validity
Period Format
b4=0 & b3=0 ->
<vp> field is not present
b4=1 & b3=0 ->
<vp> field is present in relative format
Others formats (absolute
& enhanced) are not supported.
RD: Reject
Duplicates
b2=1 to instruct the SC
to reject an SMS-SUBMIT for an SM still held in the SC which
has the same <mr>
and the same <da> as the previously submitted SM from the
same <oa>.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
Set
Text Mode Parameters +CSMP
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 64
MTI: Message
Type Indicator
b1=0 & b0=0 ->
SMS-DELIVER (in the direction SC to MS)
b1=0 & b0=1 ->
SMS-SUBMIT (in the direction MS to SC)
17.3.4.
Parameter Storage
The <vp>
parameter is stored in E2P using the AT+CSAS command. The default value can be
restored using
AT&F.
17.3.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CSMP?
Note:
Current values
+CSMP: 0,0,0,0
OK
Note: No
validity period <dcs>= PCCP437 alphabet (8 bits _ 7
bits)
AT+CSMP=17,23,64,244
Note:<vp>
= 23 (2 hours, relative format)
<dcs>
= GSM 8 bits alphabet. Remind to enter <fo> value
in
decimal notation.
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
Preferred
Message Format +CMGF
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 65
17.4.
Preferred Message Format +CMGF
17.4.1.
Description
This command allows
to select the preferred message format. The message formats supported are
text mode and PDU
mode.
17.4.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CMGF=<mode>
OK
Read command
AT+CMGF?
+CMGF=<mode>
OK
Test command
AT+CMGF=?
+CMGF: (list of supported
<mode>s)
OK
17.4.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mode>
: PDU or text mode
0 PDU mode
1 text mode (default
value)
17.4.4.
Parameter Storage
The <mode>
parameter is stored in EEPROM using AT&W.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
Preferred
Message Format +CMGF
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 66
17.4.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CMGF?
Note :
Current message format
+CMGF:1
OK
Note:
Text mode
AT+CMGF=?
Note:
Possible message format
+CMGF: (0,1)
OK
Note:
Text or PDU modes are available
AT+CMGF=0
Note:
Set PDU mode
OK
Note:
PDU mode valid
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
Preferred
Message Storage +CPMS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 67
17.5.
Preferred Message Storage +CPMS
17.5.1.
Description
This command allows
the message storage area to be selected (for reading, writing).
17.5.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CPMS=<mem1>,[,<mem2>,[<mem3>]]
+CPMS:
<used1>,<total1>,<used2>,<total2>,<used3>,<total3>
OK
Read command
AT+CPMS?
+CPMS:
<used1>,<total1>,<used2>,<total2>,<used3>,<total3>
OK
Test command
AT+CPMS=?
+CPMS: (list of supported
<mem1>s,list of supported <mem2>s,list of supported
<mem3>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
Preferred
Message Storage +CPMS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 68
17.5.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mem1>:
memory used to list, read and delete messages.
"SM" SMS
message storage in SIM (default value)
"ME" SMS
message storage in Flash
"SR" status
report message storage (in SIM if the EF-SMR file exists, otherwise in the
ME non volatile memory)
"BM" CBM
message storage (in volatile memory)
<mem2>:
memory used to write and send messages
"SM" SMS
message storage in SIM (default value)
"ME" SMS
message storage in Flash
<mem3>:
memory to which received SMS are preferred to be stored
"SM" SMS
message storage in SIM (default value)
"ME" SMS
message storage in Flash
<used1>:
used capacity of <mem1>
<used2>:
used capacity of <mem2>
<used3>:
used capacity of <mem3>
<total1>:
total capacity of <mem1>
<total2>:
total capacity of <mem2>
<total3>:
total capacity of <mem3>
17.5.4.
Parameter Storage
Parameters are
stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. Default values can be restored
using
AT&F.
17.5.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CPMS=? +CPMS:
(("SM","ME","BM","SR"),("SM","ME"),("SM","ME"))
OK
Note:
Possible message storages Note: Read, list, delete: SMS or SMS Status Report
Write,
send: SMS
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
Preferred
Message Storage +CPMS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 69
Command
Responses
AT+CPMS? +CPMS:
"SM",3,10,"SM",3,10,"SM",3,10
OK
Note:
Read Note: Read, write, SMS from/to SIM. 3 SMS are stored in SIM. 10 is the
total
memory available in SIM
AT+CPMS="SM","ME","SM"
Note:
Select SM for reading, ME for writing and SM
for
storing
+CPMS: 3,10,3,99,3,10
OK
AT+CPMS? +CPMS:
"SM",3,10,"ME",3,99,"SM",3,10
OK
Note:
Read Note: Read, store, SMS from/to flash, write SMS to flash. 3 SMS are
stored
in flash. 99 is the total memory available in flash
+CMTI: "SM",4
Note:
Receive a SMS stored in SIM at location 4
AT+CPMS="ME","ME","ME"
Note:
Select ME for reading, ME for writing and ME
for
storing
+CPMS: 3,99,3,99,3,99
OK
AT+CPMS? +CPMS:
"ME",3,99,"ME",3,99,"ME",3,99
OK
Note:
Read Note: Read, write, store SMS from/to flash. 3 SMS are stored in flash.
99 is
the total memory available in flash
+CMTI: "ME",4
Note:
Receive a SMS stored in flash at location 4
AT+CPMS="AM"
Note:
Select wrong message storage
+CMS ERROR: 302
AT+CPMS="SM"
Note:
Select SM for reading, writing and storing
memory
are not changed
+CPMS: 4,10,4,99,4,99
OK
AT+CPMS?
Note:
Read
+CPMS:
"SM",4,10,"ME",4,99,"ME",4,99
OK
Note:
Read SMS from SIM; write, store SMS from/to flash
17.5.6.
Notes
When <mem1> is
selected, all the following +CMGL, +CMGR and +CMGD commands are related to
the type of SMS
stored in this memory.
The maximum number
of SMS in flash is 99.
When the embedded
module is switched on, <mem1>, <mem2> and <mem3> are
initialized to SM.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
Service
Center Address +CSCA
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 70
17.6.
Service Center Address +CSCA
17.6.1.
Description
This command is used
to indicate to which service center the message must be sent.
The product has no
default value for this address. If the application tries to send a message
without
having indicated the
service center address, an error will be generated.
Therefore, the
application must indicate the SC address when initializing the SMS. This
address is
then permanently
valid. The application may change it if necessary.
17.6.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CSCA=<sca>[,<tosca>]
OK
Read command
AT+CSCA?
+CSCA: <sca>[,<tosca>]
OK
Test command
None
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
Service
Center Address +CSCA
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 71
17.6.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<sca>:
service center address
<tosca>:
type of address of <sca>; when first character of
<sca>is + default is 145, otherwise
default is 129 (refer GSM
04.08 subclause 10.5.4.7 [6])
129 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national / international unknown
145 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, international number
161 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national number
128-255 other values
(refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])
17.6.4.
Parameter Storage
The <sca>
parameter is stored in EEPROM using the CSAS command.
17.6.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CSCA="0696741234"
Note:
Service center initialization
OK
AT+CSCA? +CSCA:
"0696741234",129
OK
AT+CSCA="0696745678",161
OK
AT+CSCA? +CSCA:
"0696745678",161
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
Show
Text Mode Parameters +CSDH
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 72
17.7.
Show Text Mode Parameters +CSDH
17.7.1.
Description
This command gives
additional information on text mode result codes. This information can be found
in the description
of the +CMT, +CMGR, +CMGL commands and responses.
17.7.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CSDH=<n>
OK
Read command
AT+CSDH?
+CSDH: <n>
OK
Test command
AT+CSDH=?
+CSDH: (list of supported
<n>s)
OK
17.7.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<n>:
show text mode
0 do not show header
values (default value)
1 show the values in
result codes
17.7.4.
Parameter Storage
The <n>
parameter is stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can
be
restored using
AT&F.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
Show
Text Mode Parameters +CSDH
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 73
17.7.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CSDH=0
Note:
Set value to "do not show"
OK
AT+CSDH?
Note:
Current value
+CSDH: 0
OK
Note: Do
not show header values
AT+CSDH=? +CSDH: (0,1)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
More
Messages to Send +CMMS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 74
17.8.
More Messages to Send +CMMS
17.8.1.
Description
This command allows
to keep the link opened while sending several short messages within a short
delay.
17.8.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CMMS=<mode>
OK
Read command
AT+CMMS
+CMMS: <mode>
OK
Test command
AT+CMMS=?
+CMMS: (list of supported
<mode>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
More
Messages to Send +CMMS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 75
17.8.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mode>:
operating mode
0 disable feature
1 keeps link opened while
messages are sent
If the delay between two
messages exceeds 5 seconds, the link is closed and the
mode is reset to 0: the
feature is disabled.
2 keeps link opened while
messages are sent
If the delay between two
messages exceeds 5 seconds, the link is closed but the
mode remains set to 2:
the feature is still enabled.
17.8.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
17.8.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CMMS=? +CMMS: (0-2)
OK
AT+CMMS=2 OK
Note:
Feature is enabled, link is open
AT+CMMS? +CMMS: 2
OK
17.8.6.
Notes
The
delay of 5 seconds complies with Recommandation 3GPP TS 27.005 [19].
Before
sending the last SMS in the link, use AT+CMMS=0 command. This command will
indicate that the
next SMS will be the last one.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
Send
Message +CMGS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 76
17.9.
Send Message +CMGS
17.9.1.
Description
This command allows
the user application to send short messages to the network. The text can
contain all existing
characters except <ctrl-Z> and <ESC> (ASCII 27).This command can be
aborted
using the
<ESC> character when entering text.
In PDU mode, only
hexadecimal characters are used
("0"
"9","A"
"F").
17.9.2.
Syntax
In
text mode:
Action command
AT+CMGS=<da>[,<toda>]<CR>
> "text
to be sent <Ctrl-Z>"
+CMGS: <mr>
OK
In
PDU mode :
Action command
AT+CMGS=<length><CR>
> "PDU
to be sent <Ctrl-Z>"
+CMGS: <mr>
OK
Read command
None
Test command
None
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
Send
Message +CMGS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 77
17.9.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<da>:
destination address
string type
<toda>:
type of address of da
<length>:
text mode (AT+CMGF=1): number of characters
PDU mode (AT+CMGF=0):
length of the TP data unit in bytes
integer type
<mr>:
message reference
integer type
17.9.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
17.9.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CMGS="+33146290800"<CR>
>
Please call me
soon, Fred. <ctrl-Z>
Note:
Send a message in text mode
+CMGS: <250>
OK
Note:
Successful transmission
AT+CMGS=<length><CR>
Note:
Send a message in PDU mode (1/3)
>
<pdu>
Note:
Enter message in PDU mode (2/3)
<ctrl-Z>
Note:
End the message (3/3)
+CMGS: <251>
OK
Note:
Successful transmission
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
Send
Message +CMGS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 78
17.9.6.
Notes
The message
reference, <mr>, which is returned to the application is allocated by the
product. This
number begins with 0
and is incremented by one for each outgoing message (successful and failure
cases); it is cyclic
on one byte (0 follows 255).
This number is not a
storage number outgoing messages are not stored.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
Write
Message to Memory +CMGW
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 79
17.10.
Write Message to Memory +CMGW
17.10.1.
Description
This command stores
a message in memory (either SMS-SUBMIT or SMS-DELIVERS). The memory
location
<index> is returned (no choice possible as with phonebooks +CPBW).
Text or PDU is
entered as described for the Send Message +CMGS command.
17.10.2.
Syntax
Depending on the
mode, two syntax commands are available.
In
text mode:
Action command
AT+CMGW=<oa/da>[,<tooa/toda>[,<stat>]]<CR>
> enter text <ctrl-Z /
ESC>
OK
In
PDU mode:
Action command
AT+CMGW=<length>[,<stat>]<CR>
> give PDU <ctrl-Z /
ESC>
OK
Read command
None
Test command
None
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
Write
Message to Memory +CMGW
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 80
17.10.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<oa/da>:
originating or destination Address Value
string format.
<toda>:
type of address of <da>; when first character of
<da> is + default is 145, otherwise
default is 129 (refer GSM
04.08 subclause 10.5.4.7 [6])
129 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national / international unknown
145 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, international number
161 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national number
128-255 other values
(refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])
<tooa>:
type of address of <oa>; when first character of
<oa>is + default is 145, otherwise
default is 129 (refer GSM
04.08 subclause 10.5.4.7 [6])
129 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national / international unknown
145 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, international number
161 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national number
128-255 other values
(refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])
<stat>:
status of message in memory (PDU mode)
0 received unread
messages
1 received read messages
2 stored unsent messages
3 stored sent messages
<stat>:
status of message in memory (text mode)
"REC
UNREAD"
received unread messages
"REC READ"
received read messages
"STO UNSENT"
stored unsent messages (default if omited)
"STO SENT"
stored sent messages
<length>:
length of the actual data unit in bytes
integer type
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
Write
Message to Memory +CMGW
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 81
17.10.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
17.10.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CMGW="+33146290800"<CR>
>
Hello how are
you ?<ctrl-Z>
Note:
Write a message in text mode
+CMGW: 4
OK
Note:
Message stored in index 4
AT+CMGW=<length><CR>
Note:
Write a message in PDU mode (1/3)
>
<pdu>
Note: Enter
message in PDU mode (2/3)
<ctrl-Z>
Note:
End the message (3/3)
+CMGW: <index>
OK
Note:
Message stored in <index>
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
Send
Message From Storage +CMSS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 82
17.11.
Send Message From Storage +CMSS
17.11.1.
Description
This command sends a
message stored at a specific location from preferred message storage
<mem2>
(defined by the +CPMS command) to the network.
17.11.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CMSS=<index>[,<da>[,<toda>]]
+CMSS: <mr>
OK
Read command
None
Test command
None
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
Send
Message From Storage +CMSS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 83
17.11.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<da>:
destination address, coded like GSM 03.40 [4]TP-DA
<index>:
place of storage in memory
<toda>:
type of address of <da>; when first character of
<da>is + default is 145, otherwise
default is 129 (refer GSM
04.08 subclause 10.5.4.7 [6])
129 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national / international unknown
145 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, international number
161 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national number
128-255 other values
(refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])
<mr>:
message reference
integer type
17.11.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
17.11.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CMGW=0660123456
>
Today is my
birthday <ctrl-Z>
+CMGW: 5
OK
Note:
Message stored with index 5
AT+CMSS=5,0680654321
Note:
Send the message 5 to a different destination
number
+CMSS: <157>
OK
Note:
Successful transmission
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
Read
Message +CMGR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 84
17.12.
Read Message +CMGR
17.12.1.
Description
This command allows
the application to read stored messages. The messages are read from the
memory selected by
the +CPMS command.
17.12.2.
Syntax
Depending on the
mode, several responses are possible.
For
SMS-DELIVER and text mode:
Action command
AT+CMGR=<index>
+CMGR:
<stat>,<oa>,[<alpha>,]<scts>[,<tooa>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,<sca>,<tosca>,<length>]
<data>
OK
For
SMS-SUBMIT and text mode:
Action command
AT+CMGR=<index>
+CMGR:
<stat>,<da>,[<alpha>,][,<toda>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,[<vp>],<sca>,<tosca>,<length>]
<data>
OK
For
SMS-STATUS-REPORT and text mode:
Action command
AT+CMGR=<index>
+CMGR:
<stat>,<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st>
OK
For
PDU mode:
Action command
AT+CMGR=<index>
+CMGR:
<stat>,[<alpha>],<length>
<pdu>
OK
AT Commands Interface Guide
for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
Read
Message +CMGR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 85
Read command
None
Test command
None
17.12.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<da>:
destination address
string type
<toda>:
type of address of <da>.
129 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national / international unknown
145 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, international number
161 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national number
128-255 other values
(refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])
<dcs>:
data coding scheme, coded like in document [5]
integer type
<dt>:
discharge time
string format:
"yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ssฑzz"(Year [00-99],
Month [01-12], Day [01-31],
Hour, Minute, Second and
Time Zone [quarters of an hour])
<oa>:
originator address
string type
<tooa>:
type of address of <oa>
129 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national / international unknown
145 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, international number
161 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national number
128-255 other values
(refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])
<scts>:
service center timestamp
string format:
"yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ssฑzz"
(Year/Month/Day,Hour:Min:SecondsฑTimeZone)
<fo>:
first byte of SMS-DELIVER, SMS-SUBMIT or SMS-STATUS-REPORT, for
further
information refer to
document [1]
integer type
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
Read
Message +CMGR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 86
<pid>:
protocol identifier
integer type
<index>:
place of storage in memory
integer type
<length>:
text mode (AT+CMGF=1): number of characters
PDU mode (AT+CMGF=0):
length of the TP data unit in bytes
integer type
<mr>:
message reference
integer type
<pdu>:
SMS user data in PDU mode
string type (hexadecimal
format)
<ra>:
recipient address
string type
<sca>:
service center address
string type
<st>:
status of a SMS-STATUS-REPORT
integer type
<stat>:
status of message in memory (PDU mode)
0 received unread
messages
1 received read messages
2 stored unsent messages
3 stored sent messages
<stat>:
status of message in memory (text mode)
"REC
UNREAD"
received unread messages
"REC READ"
received read messages
"STO UNSENT"
stored unsent messages
"STO SENT"
stored sent messages
<tora>:
type of address of <ra>
129 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national / international unknown
145 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, international number
161 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national number
128-255 other values
(refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
Read
Message +CMGR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 87
<tosca>:
type of address of <sca>
129 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national / international unknown
145 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, international number
161 ISDN / telephony numbering
plan, national number
128-255 other values
(refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])
<alpha>:
associated phonebook name
string type
<data>:
SMS user data in text mode
string type
<vp>:
validity period
In text mode is only
coded in "relative" format.
This means that one byte
can describe different values.
0 to 143 (VP + 1) x 5
minutes (up to 12 hours)
144 to 167 12 hours + (
(VP 143) x 30 minutes )
168 to 196 (VP 166) x 1
day
197 to 255 (VP 192) x 1
week
17.12.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
17.12.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
+CMTI: "SM",1
Note:
New message received
AT+CMGR=1
Note:
Read the message
+CMGR: "REC
UNREAD","0146290800","98/10/01,18:22:11+00"
ABCdefGHI
OK
AT+CMGR=1 +CMGR:
"REC
READ","0146290800","98/10/01,18:22:11+00"
ABCdefGHI
OK
Note:
Read the message again Note: Message is read now
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
Read
Message +CMGR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 88
Command
Responses
AT+CMGR=2 OK
Note:
Location empty
AT+CMGF=0;+CMGR=1
+CMGR:
2,,26
07913366003000F3040B913366920547F4001300119041
2530400741AA8E5A9C5201
OK
Note: In
PDU mode Note: Message is stored but unsent, no <alpha>field
AT+CMGF=1;+CPMS="SR";+CNMI=,,,2
Note:
Reset to text mode, set read memory to "SR",
and
allow storage of further SMS Status Report into
"SR"
memory
OK
AT+CMSS=3
Note:
Send an SMS previously stored
+CMSS: 160
OK
+CDSI: "SR",1
Note:
New SMS Status Report stored in "SR" memory at index 1
AT+CMGR=1 +CMGR:
"REC
UNREAD",6,160,"+33612345678",129,"01/05/31,15:
15:09+00","01/05/31,15:15:09+00",0
Note:
Read the SMS Status Report OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
List
Message +CMGL
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 89
17.13.
List Message +CMGL
17.13.1.
Description
This command allows
the application to read stored messages by indicating the type of the message
to read. The
messages are read from the memory selected by the +CPMS command.
17.13.2.
Syntax
Depending on the
mode, several responses are possible.
For
SMS-DELIVER or SMS-SUBMIT and text mode
Action command
AT+CMGL=<stat>
+CMGL:
<index>,<stat>,<da/oa>,[<alpha>],[<scts>,<tooa/toda>,<length>]
<data>
[+CMGL:
<index>,<stat>,<da/oa>,[<alpha>],[<scts>,<tooa/toda>,<length>]
<data>[
]]
OK
For
SMS-STATUS-REPORT and text mode
Action command
AT+CMGL=<stat>
+CMGL:
<index>,<stat>,<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st>
[+CMGL:
<index>,<stat>,<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st>[
]]
OK
For
PDU mode
Action command
AT+CMGL=<stat>
+CMGL:
<index>,<stat>,[<alpha>],<length>
<pdu>
[+CMGL:
<index>,<stat>,[<alpha>],<length>
<pdu>[
]]
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
List
Message +CMGL
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 90
Read command
AT+CMGL?
ERROR
Test command
AT+CMGL=?
+CMGL: (""REC
UNREAD"",""REC READ"",""STO
UNSENT"",""STO
SENT"",""ALL"")
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
List
Message +CMGL
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 91
17.13.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<da>:
destination address
string type
<toda>:
type of address of <da>
129 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national / international unknown
145 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, international number
161 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national number
128-255 other values
(refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])
<dt>:
discharge time
string format:
"yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ssฑzz"(Year [00-99],
Month [01-12], Day [01-31],
Hour, Minute, Second and
Time Zone [quarters of an hour])
<oa>:
originator address
string type
<tooa>:
type of address of <oa>
129 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national / international unknown
145 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, international number
161 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national number
128-255 other values (refer
GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])
<scts>:
service center timestamp
string format:
"yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ssฑzz"
(Year/Month/Day,Hour:Min:SecondsฑTimeZone)
<fo>:
first byte of SMS-DELIVER, SMS-SUBMIT or SMS-STATUS-REPORT, for
further
information refer to
document [1]
integer type
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
List
Message +CMGL
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 92
<pid>:
protocol identifier
integer type
<index>:
place of storage in memory
integer type
<length>:
text mode (AT+CMGF=1): number of characters
PDU mode (AT+CMGF=0):
length of the TP data unit in bytes
integer type
<mr>:
message reference
integer type
<ra>:
recipient address
string type
<sca>:
service center address
string type
<st>:
status of a SMS-STATUS-REPORT
integer type
<stat>:
status of message in memory (PDU mode)
0 received unread
messages
1 received read messages
2 stored unsent messages
3 stored sent messages
<stat>:
status of message in memory (text mode)
"REC
UNREAD"
received unread messages
"REC READ"
received read messages
"STO UNSENT"
stored unsent messages
"STO SENT"
stored sent messages
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
List
Message +CMGL
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 93
<tora>:
type of address of <ra>
129 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national / international unknown
145 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, international number
161 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national number
128-255 other values
(refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])
<alpha>:
associated phonebook name
string type
17.13.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
17.13.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CMGL="REC
UNREAD" +CMGL: 1,"REC UNREAD","0146290800",,
I will be late
+CMGL: 3,"REC
UNREAD","46290800",,
See you tonight !
OK
Note:
List unread messages in text mode Note: 2 messages are unread, these messages
will then have their status
changed
to "REC READ"
AT+CMGL="REC
READ" +CMGL: 1,"REC READ","0146290800",,
I will be late
+CMGL: 2,"REC
READ","0146290800",,
Keep cool
+CMGL: 3,"REC
READ","46290800",,
See you tonight!
Note:
List read messages in text mode OK
AT+CMGL="STO
SENT"
Note:
List stored and sent messages in text
mode
OK
Note: No
message found
AT+CMGL=1 +CMGL: 1,1,,26
07913366003000F3040B913366920547F400130011904125
30400741AA8E5A9C5201
Note:
List read messages in PDU mode OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
List
Message +CMGL
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 94
17.13.6.
Notes
For SMS status
reports, only "ALL" / 4 and "READ" / 1 values of the
<stat> parameter will list
messages; other
values will only return OK.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
Delete
Message +CMGD
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 95
17.14.
Delete Message +CMGD
17.14.1.
Description
This command is used
to delete one or several messages from preferred message storage
("BM"
SMS-CB "RAM
storage", "SM" SMSPP storage "SIM storage" or
"SR" SMS Status-Report storage).
Refer also to +CPMS
command.
17.14.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CMGD=<index>[,<DelFlag>]
OK
Read command
None
Test command
None
17.14.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<index>:
Index of the message to be deleted
(If <DelFlag> = 0)
1-20 if the preferred
message storage is "BM"
If <DelFlag> is
> 0, <index> is ignored.
SIM values If the
preferred message storage is "SM" or "SR".
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
Delete
Message +CMGD
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 96
<DelFlag>:
message deletion mode
0 delete message at
location <index> (default value )
If <DelFlag> is
omitted, the default value is used.
a
1 delete all READ
messages
2 delete all READ and
SENT messages
3 delete all READ, SENT
and UNSENT messages
4 delete all messages
17.14.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
17.14.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
+CMTI:"SM",3
Note:
New message received
AT+CMGR=3 +CMGR:
"REC
UNREAD","0146290800","98/10/01,18:19:20+00"<CR><LF>
Note:
Message received!
Note:
Read it Note: Unread message received from 0146290800 on the 10/01/1998 at
18H19m
20s
AT+CMGD=3
Note:
Delete it
OK
Note:
Message deleted
AT+CMGD=1,0 OK
Note:
The message from the preferred message storage at the location 1 is
deleted
AT+CMGD=1,1 OK
Note:
All READ messages from the preferred message storage are deleted
AT+CMGD=1,2 OK
Note:
All READ messages and SENT mobile originated messages are
deleted
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
Delete
Message +CMGD
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 97
Command
Responses
AT+CMGD=1,3 OK
Note:
All READ, SENT and UNSENT messages are deleted
AT+CMGD=1,4 OK
Note:
All messages are deleted
17.14.6.
Notes
When the preferred
message storage is "SR", as SMS status reports are assumed to have a
"READ"
status, if <DelFlag>
is greater than 0, all SMS status reports will be deleted.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
New
Message Acknowledgement +CNMA
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 98
17.15.
New Message Acknowledgement +CNMA
17.15.1.
Description
This command enables
the acknowledgement of the reception of a new message routed directly to
the TE.
In
TEXT mode, only positive acknowledgement to the network (RP-ACK) is possible.
In
PDU mode, either positive (RP-ACK) or negative (RP-ERR) acknowledgement to the
network is possible.
Acknowledge with
+CNMA is possible only if the +CSMS parameter is set to 1 (AT+CSMS=1) when a
+CMT or +CDS
indication is shown (see +CNMI command).
If no
acknowledgement is given within the network timeout, an RP-ERR is sent to the
network, the
<mt> and
<ds> parameters of the +CNMI command are then reset to zero (do not show
new
message indication).
17.15.2.
Syntax
Depending on the
mode, two syntaxes are available:
text
mode
Action command
AT+CNMA
OK
PDU
mode
Action command
AT+CNMA[=<n>[,<length>[<CR>
PDU is entered <ctrl-Z/ESC>]]]
OK
Read command
AT+CNMA?
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
New
Message Acknowledgement +CNMA
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 99
Test command
AT+CNMA=?
OK
17.15.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<n>:
type of acknowledgement in PDU mode
0 send RP-ACK without PDU
(same as TEXT mode)
1 send RP-ACK with
optional PDU message
2 send RP-ERR with
optional PDU message
<length>:
length of the PDU message
Please refer to GSM 03.40
Recommendation [4] for other PDU negative
acknowledgement codes.
17.15.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
17.15.5.
Examples
Example of
acknowledgement of a new message in TEXT mode:
Command
Responses
AT+CSMS=1
Note:
SMS AT commands compatible with GSM 07.05
Phase 2
+ version [1]
OK
AT+CMGF=1
Note:
Set TEXT mode
OK
Note:
TEXT mode valid
AT+CNMI=2,2,0,0,0
Note:
<mt>=2
OK
+CMT:
"123456","98/10/01,12:30
00+00",129,4,32,240,"15379",129,5
Received message
Note:
Message received
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
New
Message Acknowledgement +CNMA
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 100
Command
Responses
AT+CNMA
Note:
Acknowledge the message received
OK
Note:
Send positive acknowledgement to the network
AT+CNMA
Note:
Try to acknowledge again
+CMS ERROR: 340
Note: No
+CNMA acknowledgment expected
Example of
acknowledgement of a new message in PDU mode:
Command
Responses
AT+CSMS=1
Note:
SMS AT commands compatible with GSM 07.05
Phase 2
+ version
OK
AT+CMGF=0
Note:
Set PDU mode
OK
Note:
PDU mode valid
AT+CNMI=2,2,0,0,0
Note:
<mt>=2
OK
+CMT:
,2907913366003000F1240B913366920547F300000
03003419404800B506215D42ECFE7E17319
Note:
Message received
AT+CNMA=2,2<CR>>00D3
<Ctrl-Z>
Note:
Negative ACK to the SMS. Reason is: memory
capacity
exceeded
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
Message
Status Modification +WMSC
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 101
17.16.
Message Status Modification +WMSC
17.16.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command allows the manipulation of a message status. The
accepted status
changes are from READ to NOT READ and vice versa, and from SENT to NOT
SENT and vice versa.
17.16.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WMSC=<loc>,<status>
OK
Read command
None
Test command
None
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
Message
Status Modification +WMSC
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 102
17.16.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<loc>:
location number of the stored message
integer type
<stat>:
status of message in memory (PDU mode)
0 received unread
messages
1 received read messages
2 stored unsent messages
3 stored sent messages
<stat>:
status of message in memory (text mode)
"REC
UNREAD"
received unread messages
"REC READ"
received read messages
"STO UNSENT"
stored unsent messages (default if ommited)
"STO SENT"
stored sent messages
17.16.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
17.16.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CMGR=2 +CMGR:
"REC
READ","+336290918",,"99/05/0114:19:44+04"
Hello All of you !
OK
AT+WMSC=2,"REC
UNREAD" OK
AT+CMGR=2 +CMGR:
"REC
UNREAD","+336290918",,"99/05/01
14:19:44+04"
Hello All of you !
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short message
Commands
Un-change
SMS Status +WUSS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 103
17.17.
Un-change SMS Status +WUSS
17.17.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command is used to keep the SMS Status to UNREAD after +CMGR
or +CMGL.
17.17.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WUSS=<mode>
OK
Read command
AT+WUSS?
+WUSS: <mode>
OK
Test command
AT+WUSS=?
+WUSS: (list of supported
<mode>s)
OK
17.17.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mode>:
SMS status change mode
1 the SMS status will not
change
0 the SMS status will
change (default value)
17.17.4.
Parameter Storage
The <mode>
parameter is stored in EEPROM. The default value can be restored using
AT&F.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
Un-change
SMS Status +WUSS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 104
17.17.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WUSS=? +WUSS: (0-1)
OK
AT+WUSS=1 OK
+CMTI: "SM",10
Note:
SMS has been received in index 10
AT+CMGR=10 +CMGR:
"REC
UNREAD","+33660669023",,"03/02/13,18:36:35+00"
Do you want to change state ?
OK
AT+CMGR=10 +CMGR:
"REC
UNREAD","+33660669023",,"03/02/13,18:36:35+00"<CR><LF>
Do you want to change state ?
OK
Note:
The state hasnt be updated
AT+WUSS=0 OK
+CMTI: "SM",11
Note:
SMS has been received in index 11
AT+CMGR=11 +CMGR:
"REC
UNREAD","+33660669023",,"03/02/13,18:56:55+00"
It is me again.
OK
AT+CMGR=11 +CMGR:
"REC
UNREAD","+33660669023",,"03/02/13,18:56:55+00"<CR><LF>
It is me again.
OK
Note:
The state has been updated
AT+WUSS? +WUSS: 0
OK
AT+CMGR=10 +CMGR:
"REC READ","+33660669023",,
"03/02/13,18:56:55+00"
AT+WUSS? +WUSS: 0
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
Message
Overwriting +WMGO
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 105
17.18.
Message Overwriting +WMGO
17.18.1.
Description
The Sierra Wireless
proprietary +WMGO command is used to specify a location in the SIM or Flash
memory, for the next
SMS storing with +CMGW command. The defined location is used only once:
+WMGO has to be used
again to perform another overwrite.
17.18.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WMGO=<loc>
OK
Read command
AT+WMGO?
+WMGO:
<loc>
OK
Test command
AT+WMGO=?
+WMGO: (list of supported
<loc>s)
OK
17.18.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<loc>:
location number of the SMS to write or overwrite
Number depends of the SIM
or Flash memory capacity.
17.18.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
Message
Overwriting +WMGO
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 106
17.18.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CPMS?
Note:
Check the storage area
+CPMS:
"SM",3,10,"SM",3,10,"SM",3,10
OK
AT+CMGW="+33146290800"<CR>
Hello how are
you ?<ctrl-Z>
Note:
Write a message in text mode
+CMGW: 4
OK
Note:
Message stored in index 4 in the SIM
AT+WMGO=? +WMGO: (1-10)
OK
Note:
Possible values for the SIM
AT+CMGW=4 OK
AT+CMGW="+33146290000"<CR>
You are
overwritten
<ctrl-Z>
+CMGW: 4
OK
Note:
New Message stored in index 4
17.18.6.
Notes
If
the external application specifies a free location, and an incoming message is
received
before the +CMGW
command occurs, the product may store the incoming message at the
specified available
location. If the user then issues an +CMGW command without changing
the location with
another +WMGO, the received message will be overwritten.
The
location number is not kept over a software reset.
If
the storage area is changed with the +CPMS command, the value of WMGO will be
reset to
0.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
Copy
Messages +WMCP
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 107
17.19.
Copy Messages +WMCP
17.19.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command copies the SMS from the SIM to the Flash or from the
Flash to the SIM.
17.19.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WMCP=<mode>[,<loc>]
OK
Read command
AT+WMCP?
OK
Test command
AT+WMCP=?
+WMCP: (list of supported
<mode>s),(list of supported <loc>s)
OK
17.19.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mode>:
copy mode
0 from the SIM to the
Flash
1 from the Flash to the
SIM
<loc>:
location of the SMS to copy (mandatory for <mode>=1)
If this location is not
defined, all the SMS will be copied.
The SMS copied will have
the first free location.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
Copy
Messages +WMCP
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 108
17.19.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
17.19.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WMCP=? +WMCP: 0,(1-12)
+WMCP: 1,(1-99)
OK
Note:
The location of the SMS which can be copied from the SIM
to the
flash is 1 to 12 (maximum available in the SIM). The
location
of the SMS which can be copied from the flash to the
SIM is 1
to 99 (the maximum available in the flash).
AT+CPMS?
Note:
Read the SMS storage
+CPMS:
"SM",3,10,"ME",0,99,"SM",3,10
OK
Note:
Read, write
SMS from/to SIM. 3 SMS are stored in SIM.
10 is
the total memory available in SIM. No SMS in Flash.
AT+CMGR=1 +CMGR:
"REC UNREAD","0146290800",
"98/10/01,18:22:11+00",<CR><LF>
My test message: SMS in the SIM
at
location 1
Note:
Read the first SMS from the SIM OK
AT+WMCP=0,1
Note: Copy
the SMS at location 1 in the SIM to the Flash
OK
AT+CPMS?
Note:
Read the SMS storage
+CPMS:
"SM",3,10,"ME",1,99,"SM",3,10
OK
Note:
Read, write
SMS from/to SIM. 3 SMS are stored in SIM.
10 is
the total memory available in SIM. 1 SMS in Flash.
AT+CPMS="ME","ME","ME"
Note:
Select ME for reading, ME for writing and ME for
storing
+CPMS: 1,99,1,99,1,99
OK
AT+CMGR=1 +CMGR:
"REC READ","0146290800",
"98/10/01,18:22:11+00",<CR><LF>
My test message: SMS in the SIM
at
location 1
Note:
Read the first SMS from the Flash OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
Copy
Messages +WMCP
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 109
Command
Responses
AT+CMGW="+33146290800"<CR>
Other test
message: SMS in the Flash
at location
2<ctrl-Z>
+CMGW: 2
OK
Note:
Write a message in text mode Note: Message stored in index 2 in the flash
AT+CPMS? +CPMS:
"ME",2,99,"ME",2,99,"ME",2,99
OK
Note:
Read the SMS storage Note: Read, write
SMS from/to the flash. 2 SMS are stored
in
the
flash
AT+WMCP=1,2
Note:
Copy the SMS at location 2 in the flash to the SIM
OK
AT+CPMS="SM","ME","SM"
Note:
Select SM for reading, ME for writing and SM for
storing
+CPMS: 4,10,2,99,4,10
OK
AT+CMGR=4 +CMGR:
"REC UNREAD","+33146290800",
"98/10/01,18:22:11+00",<CR><LF>
Other test message: SMS in the
Flash at
location 2
Note:
Read the first SMS from the SIM OK
AT+CPMS="ME"
Note:
Select ME for reading
+CPMS: 2,99,2,99,4,10
OK
AT+CMGD=0,4
Note:
Erase all the SMS stored in the Flash
OK
AT+CPMS?
Note:
Read the SMS storage
+CPMS: "ME",0,99,"ME",0,99,"SM",4,10
OK
Note: No
SMS is stored in the flash.
AT+WMCP=0
Note:
Copy all the SMS from the SIM to the Flash
OK
AT+CPMS?
Note:
Read the SMS storage
+CPMS:
"ME",4,99,"ME",4,99,"SM",4,10
OK
Note: 4
SMS are stored in the flash.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
Save
Settings +CSAS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 110
17.20.
Save Settings +CSAS
17.20.1.
Description
All settings
specified by the +CSCA, +CNMI and +CSMP commands are stored in EEPROM if the
SIM card is a Phase
1 card or in the SIM card if it is a Phase 2 SIM card.
17.20.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CSAS
OK
Read command
None
Test command
None
17.20.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
None.
17.20.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
17.20.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CSAS
Note:
Store +CSCA and +CSMP parameters
OK
Note:
Parameters saved
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
Restore
Settings +CRES
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 111
17.21. Restore
Settings +CRES
17.21.1.
Description
All settings
specified in the +CSCA and +CSMP commands are restored from EEPROM if the SIM
card is Phase 1 or
from the SIM card if it is a Phase 2 one.
17.21.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CRES
OK
Read command
None
Test command
None
17.21.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
None.
17.21.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
17.21.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CRES
Note:
Restore +CSCA and +CSMP parameters
OK
Note:
Parameters restored
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
Select
Cell Broadcast Message Types +CSCB
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 112
17.22.
Select Cell Broadcast Message Types +CSCB
17.22.1.
Description
This command selects
which types of CBMs are to be received by the ME. It is allowed in both PDU
and text modes.
17.22.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CSCB=<mode>[,[<mids>,[,<dcs>]]]
OK
Read command
None
Test command
None
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
Select
Cell Broadcast Message Types +CSCB
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 113
17.22.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mode>:
please refer to [1]
0 activation of CBM
reception
<mids>:
message Identifiers
Indicates to which type
of message identifiers the ME should listen.
<dcs>:
data coding schemes, please refer to [1]
string type
0 German
1 English Italian
2 French
3 Spanish Dutch
4 Swedish
5 Danish
6 Portuguese Finnish
7 Norwegian Greek
8 Turkish
9 Hungarian Polish
10 Czech
11 German
12 English Italian
13 French
14 Spanish Dutch
32 Swedish
Note:
The <bm> parameter of +CNMI command controls the message indication. The
activation of CBM
reception
(<mode>=0) can select only specific Message Identifiers (list in
<mids>) for specific
Languages
(list in <dcss>), but the deactivation stops any reception of CBMs (only
AT+CSCB=1 is
allowed).
17.22.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
Select
Cell Broadcast Message Types +CSCB
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 114
17.22.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CSCB=0,"15-17,50,86",""
Note:
Accept SMS-CB types, 15,16,17,50 and 86 in any
language
OK
Note:
CBMs can be received
+CBM: 1000112233445566778899
Note:
CBM length of a received Cell Broadcast message (SMSCB),
CBM
bytes in PDU mode)
AT+CSCB=1
Note:
Deactivate the reception of CBMs
OK
Note:
CBM reception is completely stopped
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
Cell
Broadcast Message Identifiers +WCBM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 115
17.23.
Cell Broadcast Message Identifiers +WCBM
17.23.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command is used to read the EF-CBMI SIM file. The EF-CBMI file is
not used with the
+CSCB command.
The application should
read this file (using AT+WCBM?) and combine the Message Identifiers with
those required by
the application.
17.23.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WCBM=<mids>
OK
Read command
AT+WCBM?
+WCBM: <mids>
OK
Test command
None
17.23.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mids>:
message Identifiers
Indicates to which type
of message identifiers the ME should listen.
17.23.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Short
message Commands
Cell
Broadcast Message Identifiers +WCBM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 116
17.23.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WCBM="10,100,1000,10000"
Note:
Write 4 messages identifiers in EF-CBMI
OK
Note:
CBMIs are stored in EF-CBMI
AT+WCBM?
Note:
Read the CBMIs in EF-CBMI
+WCBM: "10,100,1000,100000"
OK
Note: 4
CBMIs are stored in EF-CBMI
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 117
18. SIM
Commands
18.1.
Card Identification +CCID
18.1.1.
Description
This command orders
the product to read the EF-CCID file on the SIM card.
18.1.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CCID
+CCID: <CCID>
OK
Read command
AT+CCID?
+CCID: <CCID>
OK
Test command
AT+CCID=?
OK
18.1.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<CCID>:
identification number for the SIM (20 digit)
18.1.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface Guide
for
Firmware 7.45
SIM
Commands
Card
Identification +CCID
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 118
18.1.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CCID
Note:
Get card ID
+CCID:
"123456789AB111213141"
OK
Note:
EF-CCID is present, hexadecimal format
AT+CCID?
Note:
Get current value
+CCID:
"123456789AB111213141"
OK
Note:
Same result as +CCID
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
SIM
Commands
Request
IMSI +CIMI
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 119
18.2.
Request IMSI +CIMI
18.2.1.
Description
This command is used
to read and identify the IMSI of the SIM card.
18.2.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CIMI
<IMSI>
OK
Read command
None
Test command
None
18.2.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<IMSI>:
IMSI of the SIM card
15 digits number
18.2.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
SIM
Commands
Request
IMSI +CIMI
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 120
18.2.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CIMI
Note:
Read the IMSI
208200120320598
OK
Note:
IMSI value (15 digits), starting with MCC (3 digits) /
MNC (2
digits, 3 for PCS 1900)
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
SIM
Commands
Generic
SIM Access +CSIM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 121
18.3.
Generic SIM Access +CSIM
18.3.1.
Description
This command allows
direct control of the SIM by a distant application on the TE. The
<command> is
sent without any
modification to the SIM. In the same manner the SIM <response> is sent
back by the
ME unchanged.
The user must then
pay attention to processing SIM information within the frame specified by GSM
as
specified in
recommendation 3GPP 11.11 [9] (or 3GPP 51.011 [13]).
If operation mode is
not allowed by the ME, a "+CME ERROR: <err>" is returned.
Between two
successive +CSIM commands, there is no locking of the interface between the SIM
and
the GSM application.
Since in this situation some command types and parameters can modify wrong
SIM files, some
operations, described below, are not allowed for the CSIM command. However, it
is
possible to process
them with the CRSM command.
18.3.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CSIM=<length>,<command>
+CSIM:
<length>,<response>
OK
Read command
AT+CSIM?
OK
Test command
AT+CSIM=?
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
SIM
Commands
Generic
SIM Access +CSIM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 122
18.3.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<length>:
Length of the characters that are sent to TE in <command>
or <response> (two
times the actual length
of the command or response). For command sent to TE, this
value must be in the
range [ 10 522 ], else a "+CME ERROR: 3" is returned.
integer type
<command>:
Command passed on by the MT to the SIM in the format as
described in 3GPP 11.11
[9] (or 3GPP
51.011 [13]) (hexadecimal character format; see the +CSCS
command).
The supported commands
are :
READ BINARY
READ RECORD
FETCH
STATUS
SELECT
SEEK
TERMINAL RESPONSE
ENVELOPE
TERMINAL RESPONSE
hexadecimal type
Second Byte Value not
supported:
Due to the absence of
locking protection, a "+CME ERROR: 3" is returned for the
following instructions (
See CRSM commands):
D6 :
UPDATE BINARY
DC :
UPDATE RECORD
32 :
INCREASE
44 :
REHABILITATE
04 :
INVALIDATE
88 : RUN
GSM ALGORITHM
20 :
VERIFY CHV
24 :
CHANGE CHV
26 :
DISABLE CHV
28 :
ENABLE CHV
2C :
UNBLOCK CHV
FA :
SLEEP
C0 : GET
RESPONSE
Second Byte Value
warning:
Due to the absence of
locking, the right response may not be returned for the
following instructions
(See CRSM commands).
C2 :
ENVELOPE
A2 :
SEEK
A4 : SELECT
Fifth Byte Value
Restriction:
For the following
instructions (Second Byte):
A4 :
SELECT
10 :
TERMINAL PROFILE
C2 :
ENVELOPE
14 :
TERMINAL RESPONSE
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
SIM
Commands
Generic
SIM Access +CSIM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 123
A2 :
SEEK
the user must make sure
that the value of the fifth Byte of the instruction corresponds
of the length of bytes
(data starting from 6th byte) which follow it.
The value of the Fifth
Byte must be equal of the value: <length>/2 5, else the
command is not send to
the SIM and "CME ERROR: 3" is returned.
<response>:
Response to the command passed on by the SIM to the MT in the
format as
described in 3GPP 11.11 [9] (or 3GPP
51.011 [13]) (hexadecimal character format;
refer to CSCS).
hexadecimal type
18.3.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
18.3.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CSIM=14,"A0A40000027F20"
Note:
Select DF Telecom (7F20)
+CSIM: 4,"9F16"
OK
Note :
Command correctly treated with length 16 for
response
data
AT+CSIM? OK
AT+CSIM=? OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
SIM
Commands
Restricted
SIM Access +CRSM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 124
18.4.
Restricted SIM Access +CRSM
18.4.1.
Description
By using this
command instead of Generic SIM Access +CSIM, the application has easier but
more
limited access to
the SIM database. This command transmits the SIM <command> and its
required
parameters to the
MT.
As response to the
command, the MT sends the actual SIM information parameters and response
data. The MT error
result code "+CME ERROR: <err>" may be returned when the
command cannot
be passed to the
SIM, but failure in the execution of the command in the SIM is reported in the
response parameters.
As with the +CSIM
command, there is no locking between two successive commands. The user
should be aware of
the precedence of the GSM application commands over the TE commands.
18.4.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CRSM=<command>[,<fileid>[,<P1>,<P2>,<P3>[,<data>]]]
+CRSM:
<sw1>,<sw2>[,<response>]
OK
Read command
AT+CRSM?
OK
Test command
AT+CRSM=?
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
SIM
Commands
Restricted
SIM Access +CRSM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 125
18.4.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<command>:
command passed on by the MT to the SIM (all other values are
reserved); refer to
3GPP 11.11 [9] (or 3GPP
51.011 [13]).
integer type (see Note 1 below)
176 READ BINARY
178 READ RECORD
192 GET RESPONSE
242 STATUS
<fileid>:
identifier of an elementary data file on SIM
mandatory for every
command except STATUS
integer type (see Note 2 below)
<P1>,
<P2>, <P3>: parameters passed on by the MT to the SIM
These parameters are
mandatory for every command, except GET RESPONSE and
STATUS. The values are
described in 3GPP 11.11 [9] (or 3GPP 51.011 [13]).
integer type
<data>:
information which is to be written to the SIM (hexadecimal
character format; refer to
+CSCS)
hexadecimal type
<sw1>,
<sw2>: information from the SIM about the execution of the actual
command
These parameters are
delivered to the TE in both cases, on successful or failed
execution of the command.
integer type
<response>:
response to successful completion of the command previously
issued (hexadecimal
character format; refer
to +CSCS)
STATUS and GET RESPONSE
return data, which gives information about the
current elementary data
field. This information includes the file type and size (refer to
3GPP [9] 11.11
(or 3GPP 51.011 [13]). After the READ BINARY or READ RECORD
command, the requested
data will be returned.
hexadecimal type
Note:
The MT internally executes all commands necessary for selecting the desired
file, before performing
the
actual command.
Note:
The range of valid file identifiers depends on the actual SIM and is defined in
3GPP 11.11 [9] (or
3GPP
51.011 [13]). Optional files may not be present at all. This value must be
in the range [0
65535]
else a "+CME ERROR: 3" is returned.
18.4.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
SIM
Commands
Restricted
SIM Access +CRSM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 126
18.4.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CRSM=178,28474,1,4,28
Note :
READ RECORD on EF-ADN (1st entry) with length 28
+CRSM:
144,0,"74657374FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF07811
032466587F9FFFFFFFFFFFF"
OK
Note :
SIM response : 9000 with the data stored in SIM
AT+CRSM? OK
AT+CRSM=? OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
SIM
Commands
Write
Language Preference +WLPW
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 127
18.5.
Write Language Preference +WLPW
18.5.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command writes a Language Preference value in EF-LP.
18.5.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WLPW=<index>,<value>
OK
Read command
None
Test command
None
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
SIM
Commands
Write
Language Preference +WLPW
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 128
18.5.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<index>:
offset in the available languages range (SIM dependent)
integer value
<value>:
example of values for languages (Please refer to [18])
0 German
1 English
2 Italian
3 French
4 Spanish
5 Dutch
6 Swedish
7 Danish
8 Portuguese
9 Finnish
10 Norwegian
11 Greek
12 Turkish
13 Hungarian
14 Polish
32 Czech
33 Hebrew
34 Arabic
35 Russian
18.5.4.
Parameter Storage
None
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
SIM
Commands
Write
Language Preference +WLPW
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 129
18.5.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WLPW=1,5
Note:
Writes Language Preference equal to 5 with
index 1
OK
Note:
EF-LP correctly updated
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
SIM
Commands
Read
Language Preference +WLPR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 130
18.6.
Read Language Preference +WLPR
18.6.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command reads a Language Preference value of EF-LP. The first
indices should have
the highest priority.
18.6.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WLPR=<index>
+WLPR: <value>
OK
Read command
AT+WLPR?
+WLPR: <nb>
OK
Test command
None
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
SIM
Commands
Read
Language Preference +WLPR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 131
18.6.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<index>:
offset in the available languages range (SIM dependent)
integer value
<nb>:
number of non empty Language Preferences in EF-LP (SIM
dependent)
integer value
<value>:
example of values for languages, please refer to [18] for more
information.
0 German
1 English
2 Italian
3 French
4 Spanish
5 Dutch
6 Swedish
7 Danish
8 Portuguese
9 Finnish
10 Norwegian
11 Greek
12 Turkish
13 Hungarian
14 Polish
32 Czech
33 Hebrew
34 Arabic
35 Russian
18.6.4.
Parameter Storage
None
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
SIM
Commands
Read
Language Preference +WLPR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 132
18.6.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WLPR? +WLPR: 4
OK
Note:
Four language preferences are available in EF-LP
AT+WLPR=1
Note:
Read first EF-LP index value
+WLPR: 5
OK
Note:
Language preference is 5
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 133
19. SIM
ToolKit Commands
19.1.
Overview of SIM Application ToolKit
19.1.1.
Summary
SIM ToolKit, also
known as "SIM Application ToolKit" introduces functionalities, which
open the way to
a broad range of
value added services.
The principle is to
allow service providers to develop new applications (e.g. for banking,
travel, ticket
booking, etc.) for
subscribers and to download them into the SIM.
This solution allows
new services to be accessible to the user by adding new SIM-based applications
without modifying
the embedded module.
19.1.2.
Functionality
SIM ToolKit refers
to the functionalities described in the GSM Technical specification 11.14 [20].
It introduces twenty
five commands for the SIM. Three classes of increasing ToolKit functionalities
have been defined,
with class 1 offering a subset of commands and class 3 offering the full range
of
commands (Please
refer to section "Support of SIM ToolKit by the M.E." in the
Appendixes).
The SIM Application
ToolKit supports:
profile
download,
proactive
SIM,
data
download into SIM,
menu
selection,
call
control by SIM.
19.1.3.
Profile Download
The profile download
instruction is sent by the customer application to the SIM as part of the
initialization. It
is used to indicate which SIM Application ToolKit features are supported by the
customer
application.
The AT command used
for this operation is +STSF (SIM ToolKit Set Facilities).
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
SIM
ToolKit Commands
Overview
of SIM Application ToolKit
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 134
19.1.4.
Proactive SIM
A proactive SIM
provides a mechanism whereby the SIM can ask the customer application to
perform
certain actions.
These actions
include:
display
menu,
display
given text,
get
user input,
send
a short message,
play
the requested tone,
set
up a call,
provide
location information.
This mechanism
allows SIM applications to generate powerful menu-driven sequences on the
customer application
and to use services available in the network.
The commands used
for this operation are:
+STIN
(SIM ToolKit Indication),
+STGI
(SIM ToolKit Get Information),
+STGR
(SIM ToolKit Give Response).
19.1.5.
Data Download to SIM
Data downloading to
the SIM (SMS, phonebook
) allows
data or programs (Java applets) received
by SMS or by Cell
Broadcast to be transferred directly to the SIM Application.
This feature does
not need any AT command. It is transparent to the customer application.
19.1.6.
Menu Selection
A set of menu items
is supplied by the SIM Application ToolKit. The menu selection command can
then be used to
signal to the SIM Application which menu item is selected.
The commands used
for this operation are +STIN, +STGI and +STGR.
19.1.7.
Call control by SIM
The call control mechanism
allows the SIM to check all dialed numbers, supplementary service
control strings and
USSD strings before connecting to the network. This gives the SIM the ability
to
allow, bar or modify
the string before the operation starts.
The commands used for
this operation are:
+STCR
(SIM ToolKit Control Response),
+STGR
(SIM ToolKit Give Response).
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
SIM
ToolKit Commands
Overview
of SIM Application ToolKit
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 135
19.1.8.
Messages exchanged during a SIM ToolKit
operation
The following figure
shows the SIM ToolKit commands and unsolicited results that are exchanged.
SIERRA WIRELESS
Embedded
Module
Customer
Application
AT+STSF=X,XXXXXXXX
+STIN: X
AT+STGI=X
+STGI response
AT+STGR=X,XXXXXX
STEP 1:
Configuration and Activation
STEP 2:
SIM sends proactive
command
STEP 3:
Customer application gets all the
information.
Step 4:
User response is sent to the SIM.
+STCR: X
On the first step,
the customer application informs the Sierra Wireless product which facilities
are
supported. This
operation is performed with the +STSF (SIM ToolKit Set Facilities) command,
which
also allows to
activate or deactivate the SIM ToolKit functionality.
On the second step,
an unsolicited result +STIN (SIM ToolKit indication) is sent by the product,
indicating to the
customer application which command type the SIM Application ToolKit is running
on
the SIM card. The
last SIM ToolKit indication can be requested by the AT+STIN? command.
On the third step,
the customer application uses the +STGI (SIM ToolKit Get Information) command
to
get all the
information about the SIM ToolKit command, returned by a +STIN message.
On the fourth step,
the customer application uses the +STGR (SIM ToolKit Give Response) to send
its response (if
any) to the SIM ToolKit Application.
The +STCR (SIM
ToolKit Control response) indication is an unsolicited result sent by the SIM
when
Call control
functionality is activated and before the customer application has performed
any outgoing
call, SMS, SS, or
USSD.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
SIM
ToolKit Commands
SIM
ToolKit Set Facilities +STSF
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 136
19.2.
SIM ToolKit Set Facilities +STSF
19.2.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command allows SIM ToolKit facilities to be activated, deactivated
or
configured.
The activation or
deactivation of the SIM ToolKit functionalities requires the use of the +CFUN
(Set
phone functionality)
command to reset the product. This operation is not necessary if PIN is not
entered yet.
19.2.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+STSF=<mode>[,[<Config>][,[<Timeout>][,<AutoMode>]]]
OK
Read command
AT+STSF?
+STSF:
<mode>,<Config>,<Timeout>,<AutoMode>
OK
Test command
AT+STSF=?
+STSF: (list of supported
<mode>s),(list of supported <Config>s),
(list of supported
<Timeout>s),(list of supported <AutoMode>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
SIM
ToolKit Commands
SIM
ToolKit Set Facilities +STSF
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 137
19.2.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mode>:
SIM ToolKit functionalities activation mode
0 deactivates the SIM
ToolKit functionalities.
1 activates the SIM
ToolKit functionalities (default value)
2 configures the SIM
ToolKit functionalities.
<Config>:
SIM ToolKit terminal profile
This parameter gives the
list of the SIM Application ToolKit facilities that are
supported by the customer
application.
Some bits of the first
nine bytes are related to the product only and not to the
customer application. The
product automatically sets these bits to either 0 or 1
whatever the user enters
with the +STSF command.
Each facility is coded on
1 bit:
bit
= 1: facility is supported by the customer application.
bit
= 0: facility is not supported by the customer application.
Please refer to section
"Structure of Terminal Profile" in the Appendixes for more
information.
range:
320060C01F0100471C-FFFFFFFF7F01005F3E
default value:
3F6BFFFF1F0100573E
<Timeout>:
timeout for user responses (in units of 10 seconds).
This parameter sets the
maximum time for the user action (e.g. to select an item or to
input a text).
range: 1-255 (default
value:1)
<AutoMode>:
automatic modes; auto response and silent mode
When autoresponse is
activated, the +STIN indication for "Play Tone", "Display
Text",
"Refresh", "Send SS", "Send SMS" or "Send
USSD" is automatically followed
by the corresponding
+STGI response.
When the silent mode is
activated, the autoresponse mode is activated and no +STIN
and no +STGI indications
are returned by the embedded module
0 no auto mode activated
1 auto response mode
activated
2 silent mode activated
(default value)
19.2.4.
Parameter Storage
All parameters are
stored in EEPROM without using AT&W.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
SIM
ToolKit Commands
SIM
ToolKit Set Facilities +STSF
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 138
19.2.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+STSF=?
Note:
Test command SIM ToolKit Set Facilities
+STSF:
(0-2),(320060C01F0100471CFFFFFFFF7F01005F3E)),(
1-255),(0-2)
OK
AT+STSF? +STSF: 0,"
1F6BFFFF1F0100573E ",3,2
Note: No
activation of SIM ToolKit functionality
AT+STSF=2,
"FFFFFFFF7F01005F3E",,0
Note:
Set all SIM ToolKit facilities (class 3).
OK
AT+STSF=1
Note:
Activation of SIM ToolKit functionality
OK
AT+CFUN=1 OK
Note:
Reboot embedded module.
AT+STSF? +STSF:
1,"FFFFFFFF7F01005F3E",3,0
OK
Note:
SIM ToolKit functionality activated with all facilities
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
SIM
ToolKit Commands
SIM
ToolKit Indication +STIN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 139
19.3.
SIM ToolKit Indication +STIN
19.3.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command allows the customer application to identify the proactive
command sent via a
mechanism of unsolicited SIM ToolKit indications.
The last SIM ToolKit
indication sent by the SIM can be requested by the AT+STIN? command. This
command is only
usable between the sending of the STIN indication by the SIM (see Messages
exchanged during a
SIM ToolKit operation step 2) and the response of the user with the +STGI
command.
19.3.2.
Syntax
Action command
None
Read command
AT+STIN?
+STIN: <CmdType>
OK
Test command
AT+STIN=?
OK
Unsolicited response
+STIN: <CmdType>
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
SIM
ToolKit Commands
SIM
ToolKit Indication +STIN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 140
19.3.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<CmdType>:
type of proactive command or error sent by the SIM
0 "Setup Menu"
1 "Display
Text"
2 "Get Inkey"
3 "Get Input"
4 "Setup Call"
5 "Play Tone"
(*)
6 "Sel Item"
7 "Refresh" (*)
8 "Send SS" (*)
9 "Send SMS"
(*)
10 "Send USSD"
(*)
11 "SETUP EVENT
LIST"
12 a "SET UP IDLE
MODE TEXT"
13 a "SEND
DTMF"
14 a "LANGUAGE
NOTIFICATION"
93 "SMS-PP Data
Download" failed due to SIM BUSY
94 "SMS-PP Data
Download" failed due to SIM ERROR
98 timeout when no
response from user
99 "End
Session"
(*)if the automatic
response parameter is activated, this indication is followed by the
corresponding
+STGI response.
19.3.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
SIM
ToolKit Commands
SIM
ToolKit Indication +STIN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 141
19.3.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
+STIN: 0
Note:
"Setup Menu" proactive command has been sent by the SIM.
AT+STIN?
Note:
Ask for the last SIM ToolKit indication sent by
the SIM
+STIN: 0
OK
Note:
The last SIM ToolKit indication was a "Setup Menu"
AT+STGI=0 +STGI:
"Toolkit Menu"+STGI: 1,4,"Item 1",0
+STGI: 2,4,"Item 2",0
OK
+STGI: 99
Note:
Display the SIM ToolKit application menu
AT+STIN?
Note:
Ask for the last SIM ToolKit indication sent by
the SIM
+CME ERROR: 4
Note:
Operation not supported, the +STGI command has been
already
used
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
SIM
ToolKit Commands
SIM
ToolKit Get Information +STGI
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 142
19.4.
SIM ToolKit Get Information +STGI
19.4.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command allows to get the information (e.g. text to display, menu
information,
priorities
) of a proactive command sent by the SIM.
The information is
returned only after receiving a SIM ToolKit indication (+STIN).
19.4.2.
Syntax
Depending on the
value of the <CmdType> parameter several response syntaxes are available:
For
<CmdType>=0: get information about "Setup Menu" (No action
expected from SIM).
Action command
AT+STGI=<CmdType>
+STGI: <Alpha Identifier
menu>
+STGI:
<Id>,<NbItems>,<AlphaId
Label>,<HelpInfo>[,<NextActionId>]
[+STGI:
<Id>,<NbItems>,<AlphaId Label>,<HelpInfo>[,<NextActionId>]
[
]]
OK
For
<CmdType>=1: get information about "Display Text" (No action
expected from SIM).
Action command
AT+STGI=<CmdType>
+STGI:
<Prior>,<Text>,<ClearMode>
OK
For
<CmdType>=2: get information about "Get Inkey" (SIM expects key
pressed sent using
+STGR)
Action command
AT+STGI=<CmdType>
+STGI:
<InkeyFormat>,<HelpInfo>[,<TextInfo>]
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
SIM
ToolKit Commands
SIM
ToolKit Get Information +STGI
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 143
For
<CmdType>=3: get information about "Get Input" (SIM expects
key input sent using
+STGR)
Action command
AT+STGI=<CmdType>
+STGI:
<InputFormat>,<EchoMode>,<SizeMin>,<SizeMax>,<HelpInfo>[,<TextInfo>,
<DefaultText>]
OK
For
<CmdType>=4: get information about "Setup Call" (If
<Class> is omitted, call is
processed as a voice
call)
Action command
AT+STGI=<CmdType>
+STGI:
<Type>,<CalledNb>,<SubAddress>,<Class>,<AlphaId>,<AlphaId2>
OK
For
<CmdType>=5: get information about "Play Tone" (No action)
Action command
AT+STGI=<CmdType>
+STGI:
<ToneType>[,<TimeUnit>,<TimeInterval>,<TextInfo>]
OK
For
<CmdType>=6: get information about "Sel Item" (SIM expects an
item choice sent using
+STGR)
Action command
AT+STGI=<CmdType>
+STGI:
<PresetStyle>,<PresetChoice>,<DefaultItem>, <Alpha
Identifier menu>
+STGI:
<Id>,<NbItems>,<AlphaId
Label>,<HelpInfo>[,<NextActionId>]
[+STGI:
<Id>,<NbItems>,<AlphaId
Label>,<HelpInfo>[,<NextActionId>]
[
]]
OK
For
<CmdType>=7: get information about "Refresh" (No action,
"Refresh" done automatically
by product).
Action command
AT+STGI=<CmdType>
+STGI: <RefreshType>
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
SIM
ToolKit Commands
SIM
ToolKit Get Information +STGI
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 144
For
<CmdType>=8: get information about "Send SS" (No action,
"Send SS" done
automatically by
product).
Action command
AT+STGI=<CmdType>
+STGI: <TextInfo>
OK
For
<CmdType>=9: get information about "Send SMS" (No action,
"Send SMS" done
automatically by
product).
Action command
AT+STGI=<CmdType>
+STGI: <TextInfo>
OK
For
<CmdType>=10: get information about "Send USSD" proactive
command. (No action,
"Send
USSD" done automatically by product)
Action command
AT+STGI=<CmdType>
+STGI: <TextInfo>
OK
For
<CmdType>=11: get information about "Setup Event List".
Action command
AT+STGI=<CmdType>
+STGI: <Evt>
OK
For
<CmdType>=12: get information about "Setup Idle Mode Text".
Action command
AT+STGI=<CmdType>
+STGI: <Text>
OK
For
<CmdType>=13: get information about "Send DTMF".
Action command
AT+STGI=<CmdType>
+STGI: <TextInfo>
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
SIM
ToolKit Commands
SIM
ToolKit Get Information +STGI
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 145
For
<CmdType>=14: get information about "Language Notification".
Action command
AT+STGI=<CmdType>
+STGI:
<Specific>[,<Code>]
OK
Read command
None
Test command
AT+STGI=?
+STGI: (list of supported
<CmdType>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
SIM
ToolKit Commands
SIM
ToolKit Get Information +STGI
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 146
19.4.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<Alpha
Identifier menu>: alpha identifier of the main menu
string type
<Id>:
menu item Identifier
range: 1-255
<NbItems>:
number of items in the main menu
range: 1-255
<AlphaId
Label>: alpha identifier label of items
string type (ASCII
format)
<HelpInfo>:
help information availability
0 not available
1 available
<NextActionId>:
next proactive command identifier
integer type
<Prior>:
display priority
0 normal
1 high
<Text>:
text to display
string type (ASCII
format)
<ClearMode>:
message clearing mode
0 clear message after a
delay (3 seconds)
1 wait for user to clear
message
<InkeyFormat>:
"Get Inkey" format
0 Digit (0-9, *, #,and +)
1 SMS alphabet default
2 UCS2
3 Yes/No (y and n)
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
SIM
ToolKit Commands
SIM
ToolKit Get Information +STGI
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 147
<Textinfo>:
text information
string type (ASCII format)
<InputFormat>:
"Get Input" format
0 digit (0-9, *, #,and +)
1 SMS alphabet default
2 UCS2
3 unpacked format
4 packed format
<EchoMode>:
echo mode
0 off
1 on
<SizeMin>:
minimum length of input
range: 1-255
<SizeMax>:
maximum length of input
range: 1-255
<DefaultText>:
default input text
string type (ASCII
format)
<Type>:
call behaviour
0 set up call but only if
not currently busy on another call
1 set up call, putting
all other calls (if any) on hold
2 set up call,
disconnecting all other calls (if any)
<CalledNb>:
called party number
string type (ASCII
format)
<SubAdress>:
called party sub-address
string type (ASCII
format)
<Class>:
call class
0 voice call
1 data call
2 fax call
<Alpha
Id>: text information for user confirmation phase
string type (ASCII format)
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
SIM
ToolKit Commands
SIM
ToolKit Get Information +STGI
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 148
<Alpha
Id2>: text information for call set-up phase and calling phase
string type (ASCII format)
<ToneType>:
tone type
0 dial
1 busy
2 congestion
3 radio ack
4 dropped
5 error
6 call waiting
7 ringing
8 general beep
9 positive beep.
10 negative beep.
<TimeUnit>:
time unit for < TimeInterval>
0 minutes
1 seconds
2 tenths of seconds
<TimeInterval>:
time required for tone playing expressed in <TimeUnit>
range: 1-255
<PresentStyle>:
presentation type
0 unspecified
1 specified in
<PresentChoice>
<PresentChoice>:
presentation choice for <PresentStyle>=1
0 choice of data values
1 choice of navigation options
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
SIM
ToolKit Commands
SIM
ToolKit Get Information +STGI
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 149
<DefaultItem>:
default item identifier
range: 1-255
<RefreshType>:
refresh type
0 SlM initialization and
full file change notification
1 file change
notification
2 SIM initialization and
file change notification
3 SIM initialization
4 SIM reset
<Evt>:
setup event list
1 reporting asked for
"Idle Screen"
2 reporting asked for
"User Activity"
3 reporting asked for
"Idle Screen" and "User Activity"
4 cancellation of
reporting event
<Specific>:
language notification type
0 non specific
1 specific
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
SIM
ToolKit Commands
SIM
ToolKit Get Information +STGI
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 150
<Code>:
2 character code for the language
The number indicated
after the name refers to numeric value for the language in
ISO 639 [16].
If non-specific, no
<Code> will be defined.
See Notes for UCS2
format texts.
"de" German (0)
"en" English
(1)
"it" Italian
(2)
fr" French (3)
"es" Spanish
(4)
"nl " Dutch (5)
"sv" Swedish
(6)
"da" Danish (7)
"pt" Portuguese
(8)
"fi" Finnish
(9)
"no" Norwegian
(10)
"el" Greek (11)
"tr" Turkish
(12)
"hu" Hungarian
(13)
"pl" Polish
(14)
"cs" Czech (32)
"he" Hebrew
(33)
"ar" Arabic
(34)
"ru" Russian
(35)
"is" Icelandic
(36)
19.4.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
SIM
ToolKit Commands
SIM
ToolKit Get Information +STGI
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 151
19.4.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
+STIN: 0
Note:
"Setup Menu" proactive command has been sent by the SIM.
AT+STGI=0 +STGI:
"SIM TOOLKIT MAIN MENU"
+STGI: 1,3,"BANK",0
+STGI: 2,3,"QUIZ",0
+STGI: 3,3,"WEATHER",0
OK
Note:Get
information about the main menu Note: Main menu contains 3 items
19.4.6.
Notes
For the UCS2 format,
texts are displayed in Hexa ASCII format. Example: when the SIM sends a
TextString
containing 0x00 0x41, the text displayed is "0041". (For details see
section "3.6 Coding of
Alpha fields in the
SIM for UCS2" of the Appendixes)
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
SIM
ToolKit Commands
SIM
ToolKit Give Response +STGR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 152
19.5.
SIM ToolKit Give Response +STGR
19.5.1.
Description
This command allows
the application/user to select an item in the main menu, or to answer the
following proactive
commands:
GET
INKEY key pressed by the user
GET
INPUT message entered by the user
SELECT
ITEM selected item
SETUP
CALL user confirmation
DISPLAY
TEXT user confirmation to clear the message
SETUP
EVENT LIST reporting events
SETUP
IDLE MODE TEXT reporting events
It is also possible
to terminate the current proactive command session by sending a Terminal
Response to the SIM,
with the following parameters:
BACKWARD
MOVE process a backward move
BEYOND
CAPABILITIES command beyond ME capabilities
UNABLE
TO PROCESS ME is currently unable to process
NO
RESPONSE no response from the user
END SESSION
user abort
19.5.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+STGR=<CmdType>[,<Result>[,<Data>]]
[> <input
text> <ctrl-Z/ESC>]
OK
Read command
None
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
SIM
ToolKit Commands
SIM
ToolKit Give Response +STGR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 153
Test command
AT+STGR=?
OK
19.5.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<CmdType>:
command type
0 item selection in the
main menu
1 user confirmation to
clear a "DISP TEXT"
2 response for a
"GET INKEY"
3 response for a
"GET INPUT"
4 response for a
"SETUP CALL"
6 response for a
"SEL ITEM"
11 response for a
"SETUP EVENT LIST"
12 response for a
"SETUP IDLE MODE TEXT"
95 send "BACKWARD
MOVE" to SIM
96 send "BEYOND
CAPABILITIES" to SIM
97 send "UNABLE TO
PROCESS" to SIM
98 send "NO
RESPONSE" to SIM
99 send "END
SESSION" to SIM
Values
when <CmdType>=0 (Select an item from the main menu)
<Result>:
user action
1 item selected by the
user
2 help information
required by user
<Data>:
item identifier of the item selected by the user
integer type
Values
when <CmdType>=1 (Select an item from the main menu)
None.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
SIM
ToolKit Commands
SIM
ToolKit Give Response +STGR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 154
Values
when <CmdType>=2 (GET INKEY, see Notes)
<Result>:
user action
0 session ended by user
1 response given by the
user
2 help information
required by user
<Data>:
key pressed by the user
string type
Values
when <CmdType>=3 (GET INPUT, see Notes)
<Result>:
user action
0 session ended by user
1 response given by the
user
2 help information
required by user
<input
text>: text sent by user
string type
Values
when <CmdType>=4 (SETUP CALL)
<Result>:
user action
0 user refuses the call
1 user accepts call
2 user accepts call; call
is started by applicative software
Values
when <CmdType>=6 (SELECT ITEM)
<Result>:
user action
0 session terminated by
the user
1 Item selected by the
user
2 help information
required by the user
3 return to the back item
<Data>:
item identifier selected by the user
integer type
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
SIM
ToolKit Commands
SIM
ToolKit Give Response +STGR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 155
Values
when <CmdType>=11 (SETUP EVENT LIST)
<Result>:
user action
1 user selects idle
screen
2 user selects user
activity
Values
when <CmdType>=12 (SETUP IDLE MODE TEXT)
<Result>:
user action
0 user successfully
integrates the idle mode text
1 user is not able to
successfully integrate the idle mode text
For
all other cases, no values are needed.
19.5.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
19.5.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
+STIN: 0
Note:
The main menu has been sent from the SIM.
AT+STGI=0 +STGI:
1,3,"BANK",0
+STGI: 2,3,"QUIZ",0
+STGI: 3,3,"WEATHER",0
OK
Note:
Get information about the main menu Note:The main menu contains 3 items
AT+STGR=0,1,1 OK
+STIN: 6
Note:
The item 2 of the main menu has been selected.
+STIN: 4
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
SIM
ToolKit Commands
SIM
ToolKit Give Response +STGR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 156
Command
Responses
AT+STGI=4 +STGI:
0,"0146290800","",0
OK
AT+STGR=4,2 OK
ATD0146290800 OK
+STIN: 99
AT+STGI=6
Note:
Get information about the BANK menu
+STGI: 1,"BANK"
+STGI: 1,2,"PERSONAL
ACCOUNT ENQUIRY",1
+STGI: 2,2,"NEWS",0
OK
Note:
The BANK menu contains two items.
AT+STGR=6,1,1 OK
Note:
Select Item 1
+STIN: 99
Note:
End of session
19.5.6.
Notes
For
a GET INKEY with format set to "Yes/No", the data shall contain:
the value "y"
when the answer is "positive",
the value "n"
when the answer is "negative".
For
inputs in UCS2 format, the data are entered in ASCII format.
Example: For
"8000410042FFFF" entered, the SIM receives 0x00 0x41 0x00 0x42 with
UCS2
DCS. (about the
different UCS2 syntaxes, please refer to section "Coding of Alpha fields
in
the SIM for
UCS2" of the Appendixes to AT Commands Interface Guide).
Comments
upon Terminal Responses:
For the SETUP MENU
Proactive Command, it is only possible to send a Terminal
Response after the
"+STIN: 0" indication, not after a "AT+STGI=0" request. For
the other
Proactive Commands,
it is possible to send a Terminal Response after the "+STIN"
indication or after
the "+STGI" command.
All of the Terminal
Responses are not possible with all of the Proactive Commands.
Compatibility
between available Terminal Responses and Proactive Commands is given
in section
"Support of SIM ToolKit by the M.E." of the Appendixes to AT Commands
Interface Guide. If
a Terminal Response is attempted during a incompatible Proactive
Command session, a
"+CME ERROR: 3" will be returned.
If
AT+STGR=4,2 command is sent to confirm a STK Setup Call, the applicative
software must
send the ATD command
(using the call number given by AT+STGI=4 command) within a
timeout value to
define (check existing internal STK timeouts).
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
SIM
ToolKit Commands
SIM
ToolKit Control Response +STCR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 157
19.6.
SIM ToolKit Control Response +STCR
19.6.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary unsolicited response allows the customer application to identify
"Call
Control" and
"SMS Control" responses when an outgoing call is initiated or an
outgoing SMS is sent
and the call control
facility is activated. This is also applicable to SS calls.
19.6.2.
Syntax
Action command
None
Read command
None
Test command
None
Unsolicited response
+STCR:
<Result>[,<Number>,<MODestAddr>,<TextInfo>]
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
SIM
ToolKit Commands
SIM
ToolKit Control Response +STCR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 158
19.6.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<Result>:
SIM response to the operation
0 control response not
allowed
1 control response with
modification
<Number>:
called number, Service Center Address or SS String
string type (ASCII
format)
<MODestAddr>:
MO destination address
string type (ASCII
format)
<TextInfo>:
text information
string type (ASCII
format)
19.6.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
19.6.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
+STIN: 9
Note:
"Send SMS" proactive command has been sent by the SIM.
AT+STGI=9
Note:
get information about "Send SMS
+STGI: "Send SM"
+STCR:
1,"+112233445566779","+012345679"
OK
Note:
The Send SMS was allowed with modifications. The SC
address
was changed from +012345679 to +112233445566779
+STIN: 99
Note:
End of session
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
SIM
ToolKit Commands
SIM
ToolKit Indication +STRIL
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 159
19.7.
SIM ToolKit Indication +STRIL
19.7.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command allows the customer application to exchange SIM ToolKit
messages directly
with the SIM card, using the unsolicited indication +STRIL to get the full
command
string.
19.7.2.
Syntax
Action command
None
Read command
None
Test command
None
Unsolicited response
+STRIL:
<CmdTreated>,<Command string>
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
SIM
ToolKit Commands
SIM
ToolKit Indication +STRIL
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 160
19.7.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<CmdTreated>:
0 the command must be
treated by the application
1 the command is already
treated by the embedded module
<Command
string>: SIM command string in hexadecimal format
string type
19.7.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 161
20.
Supplementary Services
Commands
20.1.
List Current Calls +CLCC
20.1.1.
Description
This command is used
to return a list of current calls.
20.1.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CLCC
[+CLCC: <id>,<dir>,<stat>,<mode>,<mpty>[,<number>,<type>[,<alpha>]]][
]
OK
Read command
AT+CLCC?
OK
Test command
AT+CLCC=?
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Supplementary
Services Commands
List
Current Calls +CLCC
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 162
20.1.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<id>:
call identification
integer type
range: 1-7
<dir>:
call direction
0 mobile originated (MO)
call
1 mobile terminated (MT)
call
<stat>:
call state
0 active
1 held
2 dialing (MO call)
3 alerting (MO call)
4 incoming call (MT call)
5 waiting call (MT call)
<mode>:
teleservice
0 voice
1 data
2 fax
9 unknown
<mpty>:
multiparty
0 call is not one of
multiparty (conference) call parties
1 call is one of
multiparty (conference) call parties
<number>:
phone number in format specified by <type>
string type
<type>:
TON/NPI Type of address octet (refer GSM 04.08 subclause
10.5.4.7 [6])
integer type
129 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national / international unknown
145 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, international number
161 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national number
128-255 other values
(refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Supplementary
Services Commands
List
Current Calls +CLCC
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 163
<alpha>:
phonebook number entry
optional alphanumeric
representation of <number>, corresponding to the
entry found in phonebook.
(for UCS2 format see commands examples
+CLIP, +CCWA or +COLP)
string type
20.1.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
20.1.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
RING
Note:
Incoming call
AT+CLCC +CLCC:
1,1,4,0,0,"0123456789",129
OK
ATA OK
Note:
Answering the call
AT+CLCC +CLCC:
1,1,1,0,0,"0123456789",129
OK
ATH
Note:
Releasing the call
OK
ATD0123456789;
Note:
Outgoing call
AT+CLCC +CLCC:
1,0,2,0,0,"0123456789",129
Note:
Before the called party is ringing OK
AT+CLCC +CLCC:
1,0,3,0,0,"0123456789",129
Note:
The called party is ringing OK
OK
Note:
Response to dial command
AT+CLCC +CLCC:
1,0,0,0,0,"0123456789",129
Note:
The call is being answered OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Supplementary
Services Commands
Call
Related Supplementary Services +CHLD
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 164
20.2.
Call Related Supplementary Services +CHLD
20.2.1.
Description
This command is used
to manage call hold and multiparty conversation (conference call). Calls can
be put on hold,
recovered, released or added to a conversation.
Call hold and
multiparty are only applicable to teleservice 11 (speech telephony).
20.2.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CHLD=<n>
OK
Read command
AT+CHLD?
OK
Test command
AT+CHLD=?
+CHLD: (list of supported
<n>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Supplementary
Services Commands
Call
Related Supplementary Services +CHLD
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 165
20.2.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<n>:
call related services
0 release all held calls
or set User Determined User Busy (UDUB) for a waiting call.
1 release all active
calls (if any exist) and accepts the other (held or waiting) call.
1X release a specific
call X (active, held or waiting).
2 place all active calls
(if any exist) on hold and accepts the other (held or waiting)
call.
2X place all active calls
on hold except call X with which communication is
supported.
3 add a held call to the
conversation.
4 connect the two calls
and disconnect the subscriber from both calls (Explicit Call
Transfer).
20.2.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Supplementary
Services Commands
Call
Related Supplementary Services +CHLD
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 166
20.2.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CHLD=?
+CHLD: (0-4,11-17,21-27)
OK
ATD0123456789; OK
+WIND: 5,1
AT+CLCC
+CLCC:
1,0,0,0,0,"0123456789",129
OK
+WIND: 5,2
Note:
incoming call in waiting state
AT+CLCC
Note:
Com id 1 is active, com id 2 is in waiting state
+CLCC:
1,0,0,0,0,"0123456789",129
+CLCC: 2,1,5,0,0
OK
AT+CHLD=2 OK
AT+CLCC +CLCC:
1,0,1,0,0,"0123456789",129
+CLCC: 2,1,0,0,0
OK
Note:
Com id 1 is held, com id 2 is active
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Supplementary
Services Commands
Calling
Line Identification Presentation +CLIP
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 167
20.3.
Calling Line Identification Presentation +CLIP
20.3.1.
Description
This command enables
the Calling Line Identification Presentation supplementary service. When
presentation of the
CLI is enabled (and the calling subscriber allows the function), +CLIP
unsolicited
response is returned
after every RING (or +CRING) result code.
20.3.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CLIP=<n>
OK
Read command
AT+CLIP?
+CLIP: <n>,<m>
OK
Test command
AT+CLIP=?
+CLIP: (list of supported
<n>s)
OK
Unsolicited response
+CLIP:
<number>,<type>[,<subaddr>,<satype>[,[<alpha>][,<CLI
validity>]]]
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Supplementary
Services Commands
Calling
Line Identification Presentation +CLIP
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 168
20.3.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<n>:
CLIP mode in the TA
0 disable (default value)
1 enable
<m>:
subscriber CLIP service status in the network
0 CLIP not provisioned
1 CLIP provisioned
2 unknown (no network
)
<number>:
phone number
string type
<type>:
TON/NPI type of address octet for <number>. (refer to GSM
04.08 subclause
10.5.4.7 [6])
integer type
129 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national / international unknown
<number> does not
include the international access code character "+"
145 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, international number
<number> includes
the international access code character "+"
161 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national number
128-255 other values
(refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])
<subaddr>
not supported
<satype>:
not supported
<alpha>:
phonebook name associated with <number>
string type
<CLI
validity>: not supported
20.3.4.
Parameter Storage
The <n>
parameter is stored in EEPROM using AT&W command. The default value can be
restored
using AT&F.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Supplementary
Services Commands
Calling
Line Identification Presentation +CLIP
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 169
20.3.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CLIP=1
Note:
Enable CLIP
OK
AT+CLIP?
Note:
Ask for current functionality
+CLIP:1,1
OK
Note:
CLIP is enabled and provisioned
RING
Note:
Incoming call
+CLIP:
"0146290800",129,1,,"FRED"
Note:
Incoming call with number and name presentation
RING
Note:
Incoming call
+CLIP:
"0146290800",129,1,,"8000204212FFFF"
Note:
Incoming call with number and name presentation (UCS2
format)
RING
Note:
Incoming call
+CLIP:
"0146290800",161
Note:
Incoming call not found in any phonebook
AT+CLIP=? +CLIP: (0-1)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Supplementary
Services Commands
Calling
Line Identification Restriction +CLIR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 170
20.4.
Calling Line Identification Restriction +CLIR
20.4.1.
Description
This command enables
the Calling Line Identification Restriction supplementary service.
20.4.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CLIR=<n>
OK
Read command
AT+CLIR?
+CLIR: <n>,<m>
OK
Test command
AT+CLIR=?
+CLIR: (list of supported
<n>s)
OK
20.4.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<n>:
CLIR mode for outgoing calls
0 Presentation indicator
is used according to the subscription of the CLIR service.
(default value)
1 CLIR invocation
2 CLIR suppression
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Supplementary
Services Commands
Calling
Line Identification Restriction +CLIR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 171
<m>:
subscriber CLIR status in the network
0 CLIR not provisioned
1 CLIR provisioned in
permanent mode
2 unknown (no network
)
3 CLIR temporary mode
presentation restricted
4 CLIR temporary mode
presentation allowed
20.4.4.
Parameter Storage
The <n>
parameter is stored in EEPROM witghout using AT&W command.
20.4.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CLIR=2 OK
AT+CLIR?
Note:
Ask for current functionality
+CLIR: 2,4
OK
AT+CLIR=? +CLIR: (0-2)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Supplementary
Services Commands
Connected
Line Identification Presentation +COLP
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 172
20.5.
Connected Line Identification Presentation
+COLP
20.5.1.
Description
This command enables
the COnnected Line identification Presentation supplementary service. This
can be useful for
call forwarding of the connected line. When presentation of the connected line
identification is
enabled (and the calling subscriber allows the function), +COLP unsolicited
response
is returned in
response of an ATD command.
20.5.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+COLP=<n>
OK
Read command
AT+COLP?
+COLP: <n>,<m>
OK
Test command
AT+COLP=?
+COLP: (list of supported
<n>s)
OK
Unsolicited response
+COLP:
<number>,<type>[,<subaddr>,<satype>[,<alpha>]]
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Supplementary
Services Commands
Connected
Line Identification Presentation +COLP
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 173
20.5.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<n>:
parameter sets/shows the result code presentation status in the
TA
0 disable (default value)
1 enable
<m>:
parameter shows the subscriber COLP service status in the
network
0 COLP not provisioned
1 COLP provisioned
2 unknown (no network)
<number>:
phone number
string type
<type>:
TON/NPI Type of address octet for <number> (refer GSM
04.08 subclause 10.5.4.7
[6])
integer type
129 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national / international unknown
<number> does not
include the international access code character "+"
145 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, international number
<number> includes
the international access code character "+"
161 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national number
128-255 other values
(refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])
<subaddr>
subaddress
string type
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Supplementary
Services Commands
Connected
Line Identification Presentation +COLP
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 174
<satype>:
TON/NPI Type of address octet for <subaddr> (refer GSM
04.08 subclause 10.5.4.7
[6])
integer type
129 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national / international unknown
<subaddr> does not
include the international access code character "+"
145 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, international number
<subaddr> includes
the international access code character "+".
161 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national number
128-255 other values
(refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])
<alpha>:
phonebook name associated with <number>
string type
20.5.4.
Parameter Storage
The <n>
parameter is stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can
be
restored using
AT&F.
20.5.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+COLP=1
Note:
Activate COLP
OK
AT+COLP?
Note:
Ask for current functionality
+COLP:1,1
OK
Note:
COLP is enabled and provisioned
ATD146290800; +COLP:
"0146290800",129,,"SIERRA WIRELESS"
or
+COLP:
"0146290800",129,1,,"8000204212FFFF"
OK
Note:
Outgoing call Note:
"8000204212FFFF":
UCS2 format
Connected
outgoing line number and name presentation
AT+COLP=? +COLP: (0-1)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Supplementary
Services Commands
Supplementary
Service Notifications +CSSN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 175
20.6.
Supplementary Service Notifications +CSSN
20.6.1.
Description
This command allows
to configure the supplementary service related network initiated notifications.
20.6.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CSSN=<n>,<m>
OK
Read command
AT+CSSN?
+CSSN: <n>,<m>
OK
Test command
AT+CSSN=?
+CSSN: (list of supported
<n>s),(list of supported <m>s)
OK
Intermediate response
+CSSI:
<code1>[,<index>]
Note: +CSSI
becomes a unsolicited response in the case of +WBHV: 2,1.
Unsolicited response
+CSSU:
<code2>[,<index>[,<number>,<type>]]
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Supplementary
Services Commands
Supplementary
Service Notifications +CSSN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 176
20.6.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<n>:
MO supplementary service notification
0 disable (default value)
1 enable
When a supplementary
service notification is received after a mobile
originated call setup,
intermediate result code +CSSI is sent before any
other MO call setup
result codes.
<m>:
MT supplementary service notification
0 disable (default value)
1 enable
When a supplementary
service notification is received during a call,
unsolicited result code +CSSU
is sent.
<code1>:
manufacturer specific service code
0 unconditional call
forwarding is active
1 some of the conditional
call forwarding are active
2 call has been forwarded
3 call is waiting
4 Closed User Group call,
with CUG <index>
5 outgoing calls are
barred
6 incoming calls are
barred
7 CLIR suppression
rejected
8 call has been deflected
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Supplementary
Services Commands
Supplementary
Service Notifications +CSSN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 177
<code2>:
service code
0 forwarded call (MT call
setup)
1 closed user Group call,
with CUG <index>
2 call has been put on
hold (during a voice call, <number> & <type> fields may
be present)
3 call has been retrieved
(during a voice call, <number> & <type> fields may
be present)
4 multiparty call entered
(during a voice call, <number> & <type> fields may
be present)
5 call on hold has been
released (during a voice call)
7 call is being connected
(alerting) with the remote party in alerting state in
Explicit Call Transfer
operation (during a voice call)
8 call has been connected
with the other remote party in Explicit Call Transfer
operation (during a voice
call, <number> & <type> fields may be present)
9 this is a deflected
call (MT call setup)
10 additional incoming
call forwarded
<index>:
closed user group
string type
<number>:
phone number
string type
<type>:
TON/NPI Type of address octet of <number> (refer GSM 04.08
subclause
10.5.4.7 [6])
integer type
129 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national / international unknown
145 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, international number
161 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national number
128-255 other values
(refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])
20.6.4.
Parameter Storage
The <n> and
<m> parameters are stored in EEPROM using AT&W command. The default
value can
be restored using
AT&F command.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Supplementary
Services Commands
Supplementary
Service Notifications +CSSN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 178
20.6.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CSSN=? +CSSN:
(0-1),(0-1)
OK
AT+CSSN? +CCSN: 0,0
OK
AT+CSSN=0,1 OK
ATD0123456789; OK
+CCWA:
"9876543210",128,1
Note:
Call waiting
AT+CHLD=2
Note:
Accept the waiting call and place the active one
on hold
OK
+CSSU: 5
Note:
The held call was released (by the remote)
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Supplementary
Services Commands
Unstructured
Supplementary Service Data +CUSD
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 179
20.7.
Unstructured Supplementary Service Data
+CUSD
20.7.1.
Description
This command is used
to:
enable
or disable the CUSD indication sent to the application by the product when an
incoming USSD is
received
send
and receive USSD strings
Note:
The USSD supplementary service is described in GSM 02.90 [24]. It is based on
sequences of digits
which
may be entered by a mobile user with a handset. A sequence entered is sent to
the network
which
replies with an alphanumerical string, for display only, or for display plus
request for the next
sequence
20.7.2.
Syntax
to
enable disable
Action command
AT+CUSD=<n>[,<str>[<dcs>]]
OK
Read command
AT+CUSD?
+CUSD: <n>
OK
Test command
AT+CUSD=?
+CUSD: (list of
supported<n>s)
OK
Unsolicited response
+CUSD:
<m>[,<str>[,<dcs>]]
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Supplementary
Services Commands
Unstructured
Supplementary Service Data +CUSD
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 180
20.7.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<n>:
requested operation
0 disable the result code
presentation (default value)
1 enable the result code
presentation
2 cancel session (not
applicable to read command response)
<m>:
USSD status
0 no further user action
required (network initiated USSD-Notify, or no further
information needed after
mobile initiated operation)
1 further user action
required (network initiated USSD-Request, or further
information needed after
mobile initiated operation)
2 USSD terminated by
network
3 other local client has
responded
4 operation not supported
5 network timeout
<str>:
USSD string
converted in the selected
character set (please refer to +CSCS)
string type
<dcs>:
data coding scheme
integer type
Refer to [5] for more
information.
20.7.4.
Parameter Storage
The <n>
parameter is stored in EEPROM without using AT&W. The default value can be
restored
using AT&F
command.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Supplementary
Services Commands
Unstructured
Supplementary Service Data +CUSD
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 181
20.7.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CUSD=? +CUSD: (0-2)
OK
AT+CUSD=1,"#123#"
OK
+CUSD: 1,"02/08
report:0h04mn00S",15
Note:
USSD reponse from network
AT+CUSD? +CUSD: 1
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Supplementary
Services Commands
Call
Forwarding +CCFC
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 182
20.8.
Call Forwarding +CCFC
20.8.1.
Description
This command allows
control of the call forwarding supplementary service.
20.8.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CCFC=<reason>,<mode>[,<number>[,<type>[,<class>[,<subaddr>
[,<satype>[,<time>]]]]]]
[+CCFC:
<status>,<class>[,<number>,<type>[,<subaddr>,<satype>
[,<time>]]][
]]
OK
Read command
None
Test command
AT+CCFC=?
+CCFC: (list of supported
<reason>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Supplementary
Services Commands
Call
Forwarding +CCFC
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 183
20.8.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<reason>:
call forwarding reason
0 unconditional
1 mobile busy
2 no reply
3 not reachable
4 all call forwarding
5 all conditional call
forwarding
<mode>:
requested operation
0 disable
1 enable
2 interrogate
3 registration
4 erasure unconditional
<number>:
phone number
string type
<type>:
TON/NPI Type of address octet. (refer GSM 04.08 subclause
10.5.4.7 [6]); default
145 when dialing string
includes international access code character +, otherwise
129
integer type
129 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national / international unknown
<number> does not
include the international access code character "+"
145 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, international number
<number> includes
the international access code character "+"
161 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national number
128-255 other values
(refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Supplementary
Services Commands
Call
Forwarding +CCFC
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 184
<class>:
call class
The combination of
different classes is not supported, it will only result in the
activation/deactivation/status
request of all classes (7).
1 voice
2 data
4 fax
7 voice, data and fax
(default value if omitted)
8 short messages
<subaddr>:
not supported
<satype>:
not supported
<time>:
time to wait
1-30 for <reason> =
2 (No reply), 4 (all calls forwarding) and 5 (all conditional call
forwarding), (1 to 30) in
seconds before call is forwarded
default value: 20
<status>:
call forwarding status
0 not active
1 active
20.8.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
20.8.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CCFC=0,3,"0146290800"
Note:
Register to an unconditional call forwarding for all
classes
OK
AT+CCFC=0,2
Note:
Interrogate unconditional call forwarding
+CCFC:
1,1,"0146290800",129
Note:
Call forwarding active for voice
+CCFC:
1,2,"0146290800",129
Note:
Call forwarding active for data
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Supplementary
Services Commands
Call
Forwarding +CCFC
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 185
Command
Responses
+CCFC:
1,4,"0146290800",129
OK
Note:
Call forwarding active for fax
AT+CCFC=0,4
Note:
Erase unconditional call forwarding
OK
20.8.6.
Notes
If the FDN phonebook
is activated, the registration is restricted to the phone numbers written in
it.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Supplementary
Services Commands
Call
Waiting +CCWA
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 186
20.9.
Call Waiting +CCWA
20.9.1.
Description
This command allows
to control the call waiting supplementary service.
The product will
send a +CCWA unsolicited result code when the call waiting service is enabled.
20.9.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CCWA=<n>,[<mode>[,<class>]]
[+CCWA:<status>,<class>[
]]
OK
Read command
AT+CCWA?
+CCWA: <n>
OK
Test command
AT+CCWA=?
+CCWA: (list of supported
<n>s)
OK
Unsolicited response
+CCWA:
<number>,<type>[,<class>][,<alpha>]
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Supplementary
Services Commands
Call
Waiting +CCWA
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 187
20.9.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<n>:
result code presentation status in the TA
0 disable
1 enable
<mode>:
0 disable
1 enable
2 query
<number>:
phone number in ASCII format
string type
<type>:
TON/NPI Type of address octet for <number>. (refer GSM
04.08 subclause
10.5.4.7 [6])
integer type
129 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national / international unknown
145 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, international number
161 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national number
128-255 other values
(refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])
<class>:
call class
The combination of
different classes is not supported. It will only result in the
activation/deactivation/status
request of all classes (7).
1 voice
2 data
4 fax
7 voice, data and fax
(default value if omitted)
8 short messages
<status>:
call waiting status
0 not active
1 active
<alpha>:
phonebook name associated with <number>
string type
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Supplementary
Services Commands
Call
Waiting +CCWA
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 188
20.9.4.
Parameter Storage
The <n>
parameter is stored in EEPROM without using AT&W command. The default value
can be
restored using
AT&F
20.9.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CCWA=? +CCWA: (0,1)
OK
AT+CCWA=1,1,1 OK
Note:
Enable call waiting for voice calls
AT+CCWA=1,2 +CCWA:1,1
OK
Note:
Interrogate call waiting Note: Call waiting active for voice calls
+CCWA:"0146290800",145,1,
"FREDDY"
Note:
Number and name of the waiting voice call
+CCWA:"0146290800",145,1,"8023459678FFFF"
Note:
Number and name of the waiting voice call (UCS2 format)
AT+CCWA=1,0,7 OK
Note:
Erase call waiting
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Supplementary
Services Commands
Keypad
Control +CKPD
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 189
20.10.
Keypad Control +CKPD
20.10.1.
Description
This command
emulates the ME keypad by sending each keystroke as a character in a
<keys> string.
The supported GSM
sequences are listed in the Appendixes.
If emulation fails,
a "+CME ERROR: <err>" is returned.
If emulation
succeeds, the result depends on the GSM sequence activated.
20.10.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CKPD=<keys>
Depending of <keys>
OK
Read command
None
Test command
AT+CKPD=?
+CKPD: (list of supported
<keys>)
OK
20.10.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<keys>:
keyboard sequence
string of the following
characters
(0-9,*,#)
20.10.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Supplementary
Services Commands
Keypad
Control +CKPD
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 190
20.10.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CKPD="*#21#"
Note:
Check every call forwarding status
OK
AT+CKPD="1234"
Note:
Sequence not allowed
+CME ERROR: 3
20.10.6.
Notes
In the case where
the FDN phonebook is activated, the sequences concerning "call
forwarding" are
allowed only if the
entire sequence is written in the FDN.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Supplementary
Services Commands
Advice
Of Charge +CAOC
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 191
20.11.
Advice Of Charge +CAOC
20.11.1.
Description
This commands allows
to configure the Advice Of Charge (AOC) supplementary service (GSM 02.24
[22] and
GSM 02.86 [23] ) which enables the subscriber to obtain information on call
cost.
20.11.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CAOC=<mode>
[+CAOC: <ccm>]
OK
Read command
AT+CAOC?
+CAOC: <mode>
OK
Test command
AT+CAOC=?
+CAOC: (list of supported
<mode>s)
OK
Unsolicited response
+CCCM: <ccm>
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Supplementary
Services Commands
Advice
Of Charge +CAOC
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 192
20.11.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mode>:
requested operation
0 query CCM value
1 deactivate the
unsolicited reporting of CCM value (default value)
2 activate the
unsolicited reporting of CCM value
<ccm>:
current call meter value
three bytes of the
current call meter value in hexadecimal format (e.g. "00001E"
corresponds to the
decimal value 30). The value is in home units and bytes are
coded in a similar way as
the ACMmax value in SIM.
string type
20.11.4.
Parameter Storage
The <mode>
parameter is stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can
be
restored using
AT&F.
20.11.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CAOC=? +CAOC: (0-2)
OK
Note:
Request supported modes Note: 0, 1, 2 modes supported
AT+CAOC=0 +CAOC:
"000A08"
OK
Note:
Query CCM value Note: Display CCM value (CCM=2568)
AT+CAOC=1 OK
Note:
Deactivate unsolicited report of CCM value Note: CCM report deactivated
AT+CAOC=2 OK
Note:
Activate unsolicited report of CCM value Note: CCM report activated
AT+CAOC? +CAOC: 2
OK
+CCCM: "000A09"
Note:
Unsolicited CCM value
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Supplementary
Services Commands
Accumulated
Call Meter +CACM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 193
20.12.
Accumulated Call Meter +CACM
20.12.1.
Description
This command resets
the Advice Of Charge for Accumulated Call Meter (ACM) value in SIM file EFACM.
The ACM contains the
total number of home units for both the current and preceding calls. SIM
PIN2 is required to
reset the value.
20.12.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CACM=<pin2passwd>
OK
Read command
AT+CACM?
+CACM: <acm>
OK
Test command
AT+CACM=?
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Supplementary
Services Commands
Accumulated
Call Meter +CACM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 194
20.12.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<pin2passwd>:
Personal Identification Number 2.
8 digit number
<acm>:
Accumulated Call Meter
three bytes of the
current call meter value in hexadecimal format (e.g. "00001E"
corresponds to the
decimal value 30). The value is in home units and bytes are
coded in a similar way as
the ACMmax value in SIM.
string type
20.12.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
20.12.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CACM?
Note:
Request ACM value
+CACM: "000400"
OK
Note:
Display ACM value (ACM=1024)
AT+CACM=1234
Note:
Request ACM reset, real PIN2 is "1234"
OK
Note:
ACM value is reset
AT+CACM?
Note:
Request ACM value
+CACM: "000000"
OK
Note:
Display ACM value (ACM = 0)
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Supplementary
Services Commands
Accumulated
Call Meter Maximum +CAMM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 195
20.13.
Accumulated Call Meter Maximum +CAMM
20.13.1.
Description
The set command sets
the Advice Of Charge related to Accumulated Call Meter maximum value in
SIM file EF-ACMmax.
ACMmax contains the maximum number of home units the subscriber is
allowed to spend.
When ACM (see +CACM) reaches ACMmax, calls are prohibited. SIM PIN2 is
required to set the
value.
20.13.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CAMM=<ACMmax>,<pin2passwd>
OK
Read command
AT+CAMM?
+CAMM: <ACMmax>
OK
Test command
AT+CAMM=?
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Supplementary
Services Commands
Accumulated
Call Meter Maximum +CAMM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 196
20.13.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<pin2passwd>:
Personal Identification Number 2.
8 digit number
<ACMmax>:
Accumulated Call Meter maximum
three bytes of the
current call meter value in hexadecimal format (e.g. "00001E"
corresponds to the
decimal value 30). The value is in home units and bytes are
coded in a similar way as
the ACMmax value in SIM.
string type
20.13.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
20.13.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CAMM="000400",1234
OK
Note:
Request ACMmax update, PIN2 is "1234" Note: ACMmax updated to 1024
AT+CAMM? +CAMM:"000400"
OK
Note:
Request ACMmax value Note: ACMmax = 1024
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Supplementary
Services Commands
Price
per UNIT and Currency Table +CPUC
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 197
20.14.
Price per UNIT and Currency Table +CPUC
20.14.1.
Description
This command sets
the parameters for Advice of Charge related to price per unit and the currency
table in SIM file
EF-PUCT.
PUCT information can
be used to convert the home units (as used in +CAOC, +CACM and +CAMM)
into currency units.
20.14.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CPUC=<currency>,<ppu>,<pin2passwd>
OK
Read command
AT+CPUC?
+CPUC:
<currency>,<ppu>
OK
Test command
AT+CPUC=?
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Supplementary
Services Commands
Price
per UNIT and Currency Table +CPUC
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 198
20.14.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<currency>:
currency code
three character currency
code (e.g. "GBP", "DEM")
string type
<ppu>:
price per unit
dot is used as a decimal
separator (e.g. "2.66")
string type
<pin2
passwd>: Personal Identification Number 2.
8 digit number
20.14.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
20.14.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CPUC="EUR","0.82",1234
OK
Note:
Set Currency and Price per unit update Note: Euros at a rate of 0.82 per unit
set
AT+CPUC? +CPUC
"EUR","0.82"
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Supplementary
Services Commands
Closed
User Group +CCUG
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 199
20.15.
Closed User Group +CCUG
20.15.1.
Description
This command is used
to:
activate/deactivate
the control of CUG information for all following outgoing calls,
select
a CUG index,
suppress
Outgoing Access (OA). OA allows or not a member of a CUG to place calls outside
the CUG.
suppress
the preferential CUG. Preferential is the default CUG used by the network when
it
does not receive an
explicit CUG index.
The Closed User
Group Supplementary Service enables subscribers to form groups with restricted
access (both access
to and from).
The CUG
supplementary service is described in GSM 02.85 [25].
This service is provided on prior
arrangement with the
service provider. Subscription options should be selected at implementation.
20.15.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CCUG=<n>[,<index>[,<info>]]
OK
Read command
AT+CCUG?
+CCUG:
<n>,<index>,<info>
OK
Test command
AT+CCUG=?
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Supplementary
Services Commands
Closed
User Group +CCUG
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 200
20.15.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<n>:
CUG activation mode
0 disable (default value)
1 enable
<index>:
CUG index
0-9 selected default
value: 0)
10 preferred
<info>:
actions
0 no information (default
value)
1 suppress OA
2 suppress preferential
CUG
3 suppress OA and
preferential CUG
20.15.4.
Parameter Storage
All parameters are
stored in EEPROM without using AT&W.
20.15.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CCUG=0,0,0 OK
AT+CCUG? +CCUG: 0,0,0
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 201
Index
CACM, 194
CAMM, 196
CAOC, 192
CCFC, 183
CCID, 118
CCUG, 200
CCWA, 187
CHLD, 165
CIMI, 120
CKPD, 190
CLCC, 162
CLIP, 168
CLIR, 171
CMGD, 96
CMGF, 66
CMGL, 91
CMGR, 86
CMGS, 78
CMGW, 81
CMMS, 76
CMSS, 84
CNMA, 99
CNMI, 55
CNUM, 47
COLP, 173
CPBF, 22
CPBN, 31
CPBP, 26
CPBR, 17
CPBS, 6
CPBW, 11
CPMS, 68
CPUC, 198
CRES, 112
CRSM, 125
CSAS, 111
CSCA, 72
CSCB, 113
CSDH, 74
CSIM, 122
CSMP, 63
CSMS, 53
CSSN, 176
CSVM, 49
CUSD, 180
STCR, 158
STGI, 143
STGR, 153
STIN, 140
STRIL, 160
STSF, 137
WAIP, 51
WCBM, 116
WCOS, 9
WDCP, 45
WLPR, 131
WLPW, 128
WMCP, 108
WMGO, 106
WMSC, 102
WPGR, 38
WPGS, 43
WPGW, 36
WUSS, 104
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079
019
February
18, 2011
Volume 4
AT
Commands Interface Guide
for
Firmware 7.45
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 2
Related
Documents
This interface
specification is based on the following recommendations:
[1] ETSI GSM 07.05:
Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2); Use of DTE-DCE
interface for Short
Message Service (SMS) and Cell Broadcast Service (CBS)
[2] ETSI GSM 07.07:
Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2); AT command set for GSM
Mobile Equipment (ME)
[3] ITU-T Recommendation
V.25 ter: Serial asynchronous automatic dialing and control
[4] ETSI GSM 03.40:
Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2); Technical implementation
of the Short Message
Service (SMS) Point-to-Point (PP)
[5] ETSI GSM 03.38:
Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2); Alphabets and
languagespecific
information
[6] ETSI GSM 04.80:
Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2): Mobile radio interface
layer 3, Supplementary
service specification, Formats and coding
[7] 3GPP 05.02: 3rd Generation Partnership Project; Technical Specification Group
GSM/EDGERadio
Access Network;
Multiplexing and multiple access on the radio path 3GPP TS 05.02
V6.9.2 (2001-04)
[8] 3GPP 24.008: Mobile
radio interface Layer 3 specification; Core network protocols; Stage 3
[9] 3GPP TS 11.11
Specification of the Subscriber Identity Module - Mobile Equipment (SIM-ME)
Interface
[10] 3GPP TS 05.08 Radio
subsystem link control
[11] 3GPP TS 23.040
Technical realization of the Short Message Service (SMS);
[12] 3GPP TS 22.042
Network Identity and Time Zone (NITZ) service description; Stage 1
[13] 3GPP TS 51.011
Specification of the Subscriber Identity Module - Mobile Equipment (SIM-ME)
interface
[14] 3GPP TS 27-010
Terminal Equipment to User Equipment (TE-UE) multiplexer protocol
[15] 3GPP 23.014 Support
of Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) signaling
[16] ISO 639 Langages
Codes
[17] 3GPP 27 060 Packet
domain; Mobile Station (MS) supporting Packet Switched services
[18] 3GPP TS 23.038
Alphabets and language-specific information
[19] 3GPP TS 27.005 Use of Data
Terminal Equipment - Data Circuit terminating Equipment (DTEDCE)
interface for Short
Message Service (SMS) and Cell Broadcast Service (CBS)
[20] ETSI GSM 11.14
Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+); Specification of the SIM
Application Toolkit for
the Subscriber Identity Module - Mobile Equipment (SIM - ME) interface
[21] 3GPP TS 23.003
Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+) (GSM); Universal Mobile
Telecommunications System
(UMTS); Numbering, addressing and identification
[22] ETSI GSM 02.24
Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+) (GSM);Description of
Charge Advice Information
(CAI)
[23] ETSI GSM 02.86
Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+) (GSM);Advice of Charge
(AoC) Supplementary
Services - Stage 1
[24] ETSI GSM 02.90
Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+) (GSM);Unstructured
Supplementary Service
Data (USSD) - Stage 1
[25] ETSI GSM 02.85
Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+) (GSM);Closed User
Group (CUG) Supplementary
Services - Stage 1
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 3
AT Commands Interface
Guide for Firmware 7.45
[26] 3GPP 27.007:Digital
cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+) (GSM); Universal Mobile
Telecommunications System
(UMTS);AT command set for 3GPP User Equipment (UE) (Release
1999)
[27] 3GPP
23.107:Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS);QoS Concept and
Architecture (Release
1999)
[28] 3GPP 24.008:
European digital cellular telecommunication system (Phase 2+). Mobile radio
interface layer 3
specification. (Release 1999)
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 4
Contents
Volume
4
21.AUDIO
COMMANDS............................................................................................7
21.1. Speaker &
Microphone Selection +SPEAKER..................................................................7
21.2. Ringer Sound Level
+CRSL
............................................................................................11
21.3. Microphone Mute
Control +CMUT ..................................................................................16
21.4. Loudspeaker Volume
Level
+CLVL.................................................................................18
21.5. Side Tone
Modification +SIDET ......................................................................................22
21.6. Gain Control +VGR
.........................................................................................................27
21.7. Gain Control
+VGT..........................................................................................................30
21.8. Digital Gain
Control
+WDGR...........................................................................................34
21.9. Digital Gain
Control +WDGT ...........................................................................................41
21.10. Audio Filter
Command
+WADF.......................................................................................47
21.11. Echo Cancellation
+ECHO..............................................................................................53
21.12. Sierra Wireless
Voice Rate
+WVR..................................................................................61
21.13. DTMF Signals +VTD
.......................................................................................................64
21.14. DTMF Signals
+VTS........................................................................................................66
21.15. Play tone
+WTONE.........................................................................................................68
21.16. Play DTMF tone +
WDTMF.............................................................................................74
21.17. DTMF Detection
Mode +WDDM .....................................................................................79
21.18. Set Standard Tone
+WSST.............................................................................................82
21.19. Ring Melody
Playback +CRMP.......................................................................................87
21.20. Sierra Wireless
Change Default Melody +WCDM
..........................................................93
21.21. Sierra Wireless
Change Default Player +WCDP
............................................................95
21.22. Initialize Voice
Parameters
+VIP.....................................................................................97
21.23. Auto-tests
&T...................................................................................................................99
21.24. Audio Diagnostic
Start
+WADS.....................................................................................101
22.I/O
COMMANDS...............................................................................................106
22.1. Input/Output
Management +WIOM
...............................................................................106
22.2. Read GPIO value
+WIOR
.............................................................................................111
22.3. Write GPIO value
+WIOW.............................................................................................113
22.4. Sierra Wireless
Interrupt Pin Configuration +WIPC
......................................................115
23.BATTERY
COMMANDS ..................................................................................118
23.1. Analog Digital
Converters Measurements
+ADC..........................................................118
23.2. Sierra Wireless
Battery Charge Management +WBCM................................................121
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 5
AT Commands Interface
Guide for Firmware 7.45
23.3. Sierra Wireless
Autodiag +WDIAG
...............................................................................129
24.CPHS
COMMANDS
.........................................................................................136
24.1. CPHS Command:
+CPHS.............................................................................................136
24.2. Sierra Wireless
CPHS Mail Box Number
+WMBN........................................................144
24.3. Sierra Wireless
Alternate Line Service: +WALS
...........................................................147
25.FAX
COMMANDS ............................................................................................149
25.1.
Introduction....................................................................................................................149
25.2. Transmit Speed
+FTM...................................................................................................150
25.3. Receive Speed
+FRM...................................................................................................152
25.4. HDLC Transmit
Speed +FTH........................................................................................154
25.5. HDLC Receive Speed
+FRH.........................................................................................156
25.6. Stop Transmission
and Wait +FTS ...............................................................................158
25.7. Receive Silence
+FRS
..................................................................................................160
26.FAX
CLASS 2 COMMANDS............................................................................162
26.1. Transmit Data
+FDT......................................................................................................162
26.2. Receive Data +FDR
......................................................................................................163
26.3. Transmit Page
Punctuation
+FET.................................................................................164
26.4. Page Transfer
Status Parameters +FPTS
....................................................................166
26.5. Terminate Session
+FK.................................................................................................168
26.6. Page Transfer Bit
Order
+FBOR...................................................................................169
26.7. Buffer Size Report
+FBUF
............................................................................................171
26.8. Copy Quality
Checking
+FCQ.......................................................................................173
26.9. Capability to
Receive +FCR
..........................................................................................175
26.10. Current Session
Parameters
+FDIS..............................................................................177
26.11. DCE Capabilities
Parameters +FDCC
..........................................................................181
26.12. Local ID String
+FLID....................................................................................................184
26.13. Page Transfer Timeout
Parameter
+FPHCTO..............................................................186
26.14. Additional Fax
Class 2 indication
messages.................................................................188
27.REMOTE
DEVICE MANAGEMENT SERVICES COMMANDS........................190
27.1. Device Services
Configuration
+WDSC........................................................................190
27.2. Device Services
Error
+WDSE......................................................................................195
27.3. Device Services
Fallback +WDSF
................................................................................198
27.4. Device Services
General status
+WDSG......................................................................200
27.5. Device Services
Reply +WDSR
....................................................................................203
27.6. Device Services
Session
+WDSS.................................................................................206
27.7. Device Services
Indications
+WDSI..............................................................................210
27.8. Device Services
Bootstrap +WDSB
..............................................................................216
27.9. Device Services
Host +WDSH ......................................................................................218
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 6
AT Commands Interface
Guide for Firmware 7.45
27.10. Device Services
Local Download +WDSD....................................................................222
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 7
21.
Audio Commands
21.1.
Speaker & Microphone Selection +SPEAKER
21.1.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command is used to select the speaker and the microphone set.
21.1.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+SPEAKER=<ActiveConfig>
OK
Read command
AT+SPEAKER?
+SPEAKER: <ActiveConfig>
OK
Test command
AT+SPEAKER=?
+SPEAKER: (list of supported
<ActiveConfig>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Speaker
& Microphone Selection +SPEAKER
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 8
21.1.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<ActiveConfig>:
speaker mode (please refer to the "Notes"
section below)
1 MIC_1 + SPK_2 at 8kHz
2 MIC_1 + SPK_1 at 8kHz
3 MIC_2 + SPK_2 at 8kHz
4 MIC_2 + SPK_1 at 8kHz
5 MIC_1 + SPK_2 + DAI at
8kHz)
6 MIC_1 + SPK_1 + DAI at
8kHz
7 MIC_2 + SPK_2 + DAI at
8kHz
8 MIC_2 + SPK_1 + DAI at
8kHz
9 SPK_USER + MIC_USER
(Bluetooth)
10 No Audio
11 MIC_1 + SPK_2 at 16kHz
12 MIC_1 + SPK_1 at 16kHz
13 MIC_2 + SPK_2 at 16kHz
14 MIC_2 + SPK_1 at 16kHz
21.1.4.
Parameter Storage
The
<ActiveConfig> parameter is stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command.
The default value
can be restored
using AT&F.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Speaker
& Microphone Selection +SPEAKER
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 9
21.1.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+SPEAKER=? +SPEAKER:
(1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14)
OK
Note:
Response on Q26xx and WMP100
+SPEAKER: (2,3)
OK
Note:
Response on Q24NG
AT+SPEAKER=1
Note:
Activate config1
OK
Note:
Response on Q26xx and WMP100
+CME ERROR:3
Note:
Response on Q24NG
AT+SPEAKER? +SPEAKER: 1
OK
Note:
Config 1 is active
Note:
Response on Q26xx and WMP100
21.1.6.
Notes
Some
configuration may not be available on some embedded module:
<ActiveConfig>
Q24NG Q268x, WMP100 Q26Extreme SL6087
1 N/A X (default) X
(default) X (default)
2 X (default) X X N/A
3 X X X N/A
4 N/A X X N/A
5 N/A X N/A X
6 N/A X N/A N/A
7 N/A X N/A N/A
8 N/A X N/A N/A
9 N/A X X X
10 N/A X X X
11 N/A X N/A X
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Speaker
& Microphone Selection +SPEAKER
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 10
<ActiveConfig>
Q24NG Q268x, WMP100 Q26Extreme SL6087
12 N/A X N/A N/A
13 N/A X N/A N/A
14 N/A X N/A N/A
On
the embedded module, the speaker and microphone are selected as follows:
For Q24NG:
<ActiveConfig>
Analog In (Mic) Analog Out (Speaker)
2 MIC_1 SPK_1
3 MIC_2 SPK_2
For WMP100 and Q26xx:
<ActiveConfig>
Analog In (Mic) Analog Out
1 MIC_1 (Mic) SPK_2 (Hfr)
2 MIC_1 (Mic) SPK_1 (Ear)
3 MIC_2 (Auxmic) SPK_2
(Hfr)
4 MIC_2 (Auxmic) SPK_1
(Ear)
Audio 1 (sub-audio): Auxmic
+ Ear,
Audio 2 (main audio): Mic +
Hfr.
The digital audio
interface (IOM-2) mode allows the connectivity with audio peripherals, and
consists of 4 wires
(PCM-SYNC, PCM-CLK, PCM-IN, PCM-OUT).
The IOM-2 frame is
divided in 6 slots: each slot allows the transmission/reception of a 16 bits
word.
When a configuration
that includes digital IOs is used, the slot 0 will be allocated for exchanging
audio data with the
embedded module. Depending on the chosen configuration, the audio
samples will be
routed in different location in the audio chain.
During
the call, the <ActiveConfig> can not be changed between three
configuration groups:
(1,2,3,4,9,10),
(5-8) and (11-14).
If AT&W is used
during communication, the command responses are OK but the speaker
configuration could
be not changed if active configuration is in another group than default
configuration (for
instance from 5 to 1).
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Ringer
Sound Level +CRSL
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 11
21.2.
Ringer Sound Level +CRSL
21.2.1.
Description
This command is used
to set/get the sound level of the ringer on incoming calls. The action command
changes the default
<volume> value of the +CRMP command.
21.2.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CRSL=<sound
level>
OK
Read command
AT+CRSL?
+CRSL: <sound level>
OK
Test command
AT+CRSL=?
+CRSL: (list of supported
<sound level>s)
OK
21.2.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<sound
level>: There are two configuration modes. A mode to give the sound
level in deci dB units,
and a mode to give it in
index. By default gains are expressed in deci dB value.
All values are possible
for <sound level> between the min and max (see table in
Notes). If a
value does not correspond to a table value, the nearest is kept.
Else, if the
configuration mode has changed with +WBHV command, one index
corresponds to one deci
dB value.
21.2.4.
Parameter Storage
The <sound
level> parameter is stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default
value can
be restored using
AT&F.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Ringer
Sound Level +CRSL
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 12
21.2.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CRSL=-1000
Note:
Set volume to -10 dB
OK
Note:
Current ring playing with max volume.
AT+CRSL?
Note:
Get current ringer sound level.
+CRSL: -1000
OK
Note: -9
dB is the nearest value for 10 dB.
AT+CRSL=?
Note:
Supported parameters
+CRSL:(-8000 - 0)
OK
AT+WBHV=5,1
Note:
Set configuration to indexed mode
OK
AT+CRSL=41 OK
AT+CRSL?
Note:
Get current ringer sound level
+CRSL: 41
OK
Note:
Current level is 41
AT+CRSL=?
Note:
Supported parameters
+CRSL:(0-255)
OK
21.2.6.
Notes
Below are listed the
values for <sound level>. They are in deci dB units
and index (default value is
grayed).
Gain
in
index
Gain
in
dB
Real
dB
value
Gain
in
index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
0 -8000 -80 64 -1204
-12.04 128 -602 -6.02 192 -250 -2.5
1 -4816 -48.16 65 -1191
-11.91 129 -595 -5.95 193 -245 -2.45
2 -4214 -42.14 66 -1177
-11.77 130 -589 -5.89 194 -241 -2.41
3 -3862 -38.62 67 -1164
-11.64 131 -582 -5.82 195 -236 -2.36
4 -3612 -36.12 68 -1151
-11.51 132 -575 -5.75 196 -232 -2.32
5 -3419 -34.19 69 -1139
-11.39 133 -569 -5.69 197 -228 -2.28
6 -3260 -32.6 70 -1126
-11.26 134 -562 -5.62 198 -223 -2.23
7 -3126 -31.26 71 -1114
-11.14 135 -556 -5.56 199 -219 -2.19
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Ringer
Sound Level +CRSL
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 13
Gain
in
index
Gain
in
dB
Real
dB
value
Gain
in
index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
8 -3010 -30.1 72 -1102
-11.02 136 -549 -5.49 200 -214 -2.14
9 -2908 -29.08 73 -1090
-10.9 137 -543 -5.43 201 -210 -2.1
10 -2816 -28.16 74 -1078
-10.78 138 -537 -5.37 202 -206 -2.06
11 -2734 -27.34 75 -1066
-10.66 139 -530 -5.3 203 -201 -2.01
12 -2658 -26.58 76 -1055
-10.55 140 -524 -5.24 204 -197 -1.97
13 -2589 -25.89 77 -1043
-10.43 141 -518 -5.18 205 -193 -1.93
14 -2524 -25.24 78 -1032
-10.32 142 -512 -5.12 206 -189 -1.89
15 -2464 -24.64 79 -1021
-10.21 143 -506 -5.06 207 -185 -1.85
16 -2408 -24.08 80 -1010
-10.1 144 -500 -5 208 -180 -1.8
17 -2356 -23.56 81 -1000
-10 145 -494 -4.94 209 -176 -1.76
18 -2306 -23.06 82 -989
-9.89 146 -488 -4.88 210 -172 -1.72
19 -2259 -22.59 83 -978
-9.78 147 -482 -4.82 211 -168 -1.68
20 -2214 -22.14 84 -968
-9.68 148 -476 -4.76 212 -164 -1.64
21 -2172 -21.72 85 -958
-9.58 149 -470 -4.7 213 -160 -1.6
22 -2132 -21.32 86 -947
-9.47 150 -464 -4.64 214 -156 -1.56
23 -2093 -20.93 87 -937
-9.37 151 -459 -4.59 215 -152 -1.52
24 -2056 -20.56 88 -928
-9.28 152 -453 -4.53 216 -148 -1.48
25 -2021 -20.21 89 -918
-9.18 153 -447 -4.47 217 -144 -1.44
26 -1987 -19.87 90 -908
-9.08 154 -441 -4.41 218 -140 -1.4
27 -1954 -19.54 91 -898
-8.98 155 -436 -4.36 219 -136 -1.36
28 -1922 -19.22 92 -889
-8.89 156 -430 -4.3 220 -132 -1.32
29 -1892 -18.92 93 -880
-8.8 157 -425 -4.25 221 -128 -1.28
30 -1862 -18.62 94 -870
-8.7 158 -419 -4.19 222 -124 -1.24
31 -1834 -18.34 95 -861
-8.61 159 -414 -4.14 223 -120 -1.2
32 -1806 -18.06 96 -852
-8.52 160 -408 -4.08 224 -116 -1.16
33 -1779 -17.79 97 -843
-8.43 161 -403 -4.03 225 -112 -1.12
34 -1754 -17.54 98 -834
-8.34 162 -397 -3.97 226 -108 -1.08
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Ringer
Sound Level +CRSL
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 14
Gain
in
index
Gain
in
dB
Real
dB
value
Gain
in
index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
35 -1728 -17.28 99 -825
-8.25 163 -392 -3.92 227 -104 -1.04
36 -1704 -17.04 100 -816
-8.16 164 -387 -3.87 228 -101 -1.01
37 -1680 -16.8 101 -808
-8.08 165 -382 -3.82 229 -97 -0.97
38 -1657 -16.57 102 -799
-7.99 166 -376 -3.76 230 -93 -0.93
39 -1634 -16.34 103 -791
-7.91 167 -371 -3.71 231 -89 -0.89
40 -1612 -16.12 104 -782
-7.82 168 -366 -3.66 232 -86 -0.86
41 -1591 -15.91 105 -774
-7.74 169 -361 -3.61 233 -82 -0.82
42 -1570 -15.7 106 -766
-7.66 170 -356 -3.56 234 -78 -0.78
43 -1550 -15.5 107 -758
-7.58 171 -350 -3.5 235 -74 -0.74
44 -1530 -15.3 108 -750
-7.5 172 -345 -3.45 236 -71 -0.71
45 -1510 -15.1 109 -742
-7.42 173 -340 -3.4 237 -67 -0.67
46 -1491 -14.91 110 -734
-7.34 174 -335 -3.35 238 -63 -0.63
47 -1472 -14.72 111 -726
-7.26 175 -330 -3.3 239 -60 -0.6
48 -1454 -14.54 112 -718
-7.18 176 -325 -3.25 240 -56 -0.56
49 -1436 -14.36 113 -710
-7.1 177 -321 -3.21 241 -52 -0.52
50 -1419 -14.19 114 -703
-7.03 178 -316 -3.16 242 -49 -0.49
51 -1401 -14.01 115 -695
-6.95 179 -311 -3.11 243 -45 -0.45
52 -1384 -13.84 116 -688
-6.88 180 -306 -3.06 244 -42 -0.42
53 -1368 -13.68 117 -680
-6.8 181 -301 -3.01 245 -38 -0.38
54 -1352 -13.52 118 -673
-6.73 182 -296 -2.96 246 -35 -0.35
55 -1336 -13.36 119 -665
-6.65 183 -292 -2.92 247 -31 -0.31
56 -1320 -13.2 120 -658
-6.58 184 -287 -2.87 248 -28 -0.28
57 -1305 -13.05 121 -651
-6.51 185 -282 -2.82 249 -24 -0.24
58 -1290 -12.9 122 -644
-6.44 186 -277 -2.77 250 -21 -0.21
59 -1275 -12.75 123 -637
-6.37 187 -273 -2.73 251 -17 -0.17
60 -1260 -12.6 124 -630
-6.3 188 -268 -2.68 252 -14 -0.14
61 -1246 -12.46 125 -623
-6.23 189 -264 -2.64 253 -10 -0.1
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Ringer
Sound Level +CRSL
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 15
Gain
in
index
Gain
in
dB
Real
dB
value
Gain
in
index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
62 -1232 -12.32 126 -616
-6.16 190 -259 -2.59 254 -7 -0.07
63 -1218 -12.18 127 -609
-6.09 191 -254 -2.54 255 0 0
Note:
For buzzer output, very high and very low gain values are not accepted. Hence,
the nearest value is
kept,
which depends on the used embedded module. Please refer to Product Technical
Specification,
for more
information.
Example:
If buzzer minimum gain is -46.03 dB and -48.06 dB gain is selected (gain 1 in
index mode),
then
-46.03 dB is played
.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Microphone
Mute Control +CMUT
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 16
21.3.
Microphone Mute Control +CMUT
Test and read
command
Action command
21.3.1.
Description
This command is used
to mute the microphone input on the product (for the active microphone set
with the +SPEAKER
command). The action command is only allowed during a call.
21.3.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CMUT=<mode>
OK
Read command
AT+CMUT?
+CMUT: <mode>
OK
Test command
AT+CMUT=?
+CMUT: (list of supported
<mode>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Microphone
Mute Control +CMUT
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 17
21.3.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mode>:
microphone mute mode
0 microphone mute off
(default value)
1 microphone mute on
21.3.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
21.3.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CMUT=? +CMUT: (0,1)
OK
AT+CMUT=1
Note:
Mute ON (call active)
OK
AT+CMUT?
Note:
Get current value
+CMUT: 1
OK
Note:
Mute is active (call active)
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Loudspeaker
Volume Level +CLVL
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 18
21.4.
Loudspeaker Volume Level +CLVL
21.4.1.
Description
This command is used
by the application to tune the loudspeaker volume level.
21.4.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CLVL=<Volume>
OK
Read command
AT+CLVL?
+CLVL: <Volume>
OK
Test command
AT+CLVL=?
+CLVL: (list of supported
<Volume>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Loudspeaker
Volume Level +CLVL
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 19
21.4.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<Volume>:
reception volume
There are two
configuration modes:
the
gain is entered in deci dB units,
the
gain is entered in index.
By default gains are
expressed in deci dB value.
All values are possible
between the minimum and maximum values of the table given
in the Notes section. If
a value does not correspond to a table value, the nearest is
kept.
If the configuration mode
has been changed with +WBHV command to the index
mode, the deci dB value
will correspond to the index entered as described in the
table of the Notes
section.
21.4.4.
Parameter Storage
All parameters are
stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Loudspeaker
Volume Level +CLVL
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 20
21.4.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CLVL=?
Note:
Test command
+CLVL: (-4000-800)
OK
Note:
Possible values if speaker1 selected on Q26XX and
WMP100
embedded module
AT+CLVL=-2100 OK
AT+CLVL? +CLVL: -2000
OK
AT+WBHV=8,1
Note:
Set configuration to indexed mode
OK
AT+CLVL=? +CLVL: (0-15)
OK
Note:
Possible values if speaker1 or speaker2 selected on Q24NG
embedded
module
AT+CLVL=9 OK
AT+CLVL? +CLVL: 9
OK
21.4.6.
Notes
Below are listed the
values for <volume>. They are in deci dB units and index.
For Q24NG embedded
module:
Speaker
1 (-16.3dB by default) and speaker 2 (-10.3dB by default).
Gain
in
index
Gain
in
dB
Real
dB
value
Gain
in
index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
0 -26.3 4 -1830 -18.3 8
-1030 -10.3 12 -230 -2.3
1 -2430 -24.3 5 -1630
-16.3 9 -830 -8.3 13 -30 -0.3
2 -2230 -22.3 6 -1430
-14.3 10 -630 -6.3 14 170 1.7
3 -2030 -20.3 7 -1230
-12.3 11 -430 -4.3 15 370 3.7
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Loudspeaker
Volume Level +CLVL
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 21
For Q26XX and WMP100
embedded module:
(Default values are
grayed).
Speaker
1:
Gain
in
index
Gain
in
dB
Real
dB
value
Gain
in
index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
0 -4000 -40 4 -2400 -24 8
-800 -8 12 800 8
1 -3600 -36 5 -2000 -20 9
-400 -4
2 -3200 -32 6 -1600 -16
10 0 0
3 -2800 -28 7 -1200 -12
11 400 4
Speaker
2:
Gain
in
index
Gain
in
dB
Real
dB
value
Gain
in
index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
0 -3400 -34 4 -1800 -18 8
-200 -2 12 1400 14
1 -3000 -30 5 -1400 -14 9
200 2
2 -2600 -26 6 -1000 -10
10 600 6
3 -2200 -22 7 -600 -6 11
1000 10
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Side
Tone Modification +SIDET
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 22
21.5.
Side Tone Modification +SIDET
21.5.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command is used to set the level of audio feedback in the speaker
(microphone feedback
in the speaker).
21.5.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+SIDET=<val1>[,<val2>]
OK
Read command
AT+SIDET?
+SIDET:
<val1>,<val2>
OK
Test command
AT+SIDET=?
+SIDET: (list of supported
<val1>s),(list of supported <val2>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Side
Tone Modification +SIDET
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 23
21.5.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<val1>:
side tone mode
0 side tone is disabled
1 side tone is enabled
(default value)
<val2>:
side tone level
There are two
configuration modes:
the
gain is entered in deci dB units,
the
gain is entered in index.
By default gains are
expressed in deci dB value.
All values are possible
between the minimum and maximum values of the table
given in the Notes
section. If a value does not correspond to a table value, the
nearest is kept.
If the configuration mode
has been changed with +WBHV command to the index
mode, the deci dB value
will correspond to the index entered as described in the
table of the Notes
section.
21.5.4.
Parameter Storage
The <val1>and
<val2> parameters are stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The
default
values can be
restored using AT&F and AT+VIP=1.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Side
Tone Modification +SIDET
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 24
21.5.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+SIDET=? +SIDET:
(0-1),(-32768-540)
OK
Note:
Response on Q26XX and WMP100 embedded module
+SIDET: (0-1),(-32768-595)
OK
Note:
Response on Q24NG embedded module
AT+SIDET=1,190 OK
AT+SIDET? +SIDET: 1,188
OK
AT+WBHV=8,1
Note:
Set configuration to indexed mode
OK
AT+SIDET=? +SIDET:
(0-1),(0-63)
OK
Note:
Response on Q26XX and WMP100 embedded module
+SIDET: (0-1),(0-127)
OK
Note:
Response on Q24NG embedded module
AT+SIDET=1,0 OK
AT+SIDET?
Note:
Current value
+SIDET: 1,0
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Side
Tone Modification +SIDET
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 25
21.5.6.
Notes
Sidetone
level default value is kept if <val2> parameter
is ommited.
The
following tables list values for the two configuration modes for <val2>:
For Q24NG embedded
module (default value is grayed)
Gain
in
index
Gain in
dB
Real dB
Value
Gain
in
index
Gain
in dB
Real dB
Value
Gain in
index
Gain in
dB
Real
dB
Value
Gain
in
index
Gain in
dB
Real
dB
Value
0 -32768 inf 32 -602
-6.02 64 0 0 96 352 3.52
1 -3612 -36.12 33 -575
-5.75 65 13 0.13 97 361 3.61
2 -3010 -30.1 34 -549
-5.49 66 27 0.27 98 370 3.7
3 -2658 -26.58 35 -524
-5.24 67 40 0.4 99 379 3.79
4 -2408 -24.08 36 -500 -5
68 53 0.53 100 388 3.88
5 -2214 -22.14 37 -476
-4.76 69 65 0.65 101 396 3.96
6 -2056 -20.56 38 -453
-4.53 70 78 0.78 102 405 4.05
7 -1922 -19.22 39 -430
-4.3 71 90 0.9 103 413 4.13
8 -1806 -18.06 40 -408
-4.08 72 102 1.02 104 422 4.22
9 -1704 -17.04 41 -387
-3.87 73 114 1.14 105 430 4.3
10 -1612 -16.12 42 -366
-3.66 74 126 1.26 106 438 4.38
11 -1530 -15.3 43 -345
-3.45 75 138 1.38 107 446 4.46
12 -1454 -14.54 44 -325
-3.25 76 149 1.49 108 454 4.54
13 -1384 -13.84 45 -306
-3.06 77 161 1.61 109 462 4.62
14 -1320 -13.2 46 -287
-2.87 78 172 1.72 110 470 4.7
15 -1260 -12.6 47 -268
-2.68 79 183 1.83 111 478 4.78
16 -1204 -12.04 48 -250
-2.5 80 194 1.94 112 486 4.86
17 -1151 -11.51 49 -232
-2.32 81 205 2.05 113 494 4.94
18 -1102 -11.02 50 -214
-2.14 82 215 2.15 114 501 5.01
19 -1055 -10.55 51 -197
-1.97 83 226 2.26 115 509 5.09
20 -1010 -10.1 52 -180
-1.8 84 236 2.36 116 517 5.17
21 -968 -9.68 53 -164
-1.64 85 246 2.46 117 524 5.24
22 -928 -9.28 54 -148
-1.48 86 257 2.57 118 531 5.31
23 -889 -8.89 55 -132
-1.32 87 267 2.67 119 539 5.39
24 -852 -8.52 56 -116
-1.16 88 277 2.77 120 546 5.46
25 -816 -8.16 57 -101
-1.01 89 286 2.86 121 553 5.53
26 -782 -7.82 58 -86
-0.86 90 296 2.96 122 560 5.6
27 -750 -7.5 59 -71 -0.71
91 306 3.06 123 567 5.67
28 -718 -7.18 60 -56
-0.56 92 315 3.15 124 574 5.74
29 -688 -6.88 61 -42
-0.42 93 325 3.25 125 581 5.81
30 -658 -6.58 62 -28
-0.28 94 334 3.34 126 588 5.88
31 -630 -6.3 63 -14 -0.14
95 343 3.43 127 595 5.95
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Side
Tone Modification +SIDET
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 26
For Q26XX and WMP100
embedded module(default value is grayed)
Gain
in
index
Gain in
dB
Real dB
Value
Gain
in
inde
x
Gain in
dB
Real dB
Value
Gain
in
index
Gain in
dB
Real dB
Value
Gain
in
index
Gain in
dB
Real
dB
Value
0 -32768 -Inf 16 -3260
-32.6 32 -1860 -18.62 48 -620 -6.16
1 -6020 -60.21 17 -3130
-31.26 33 -1750 -17.54 49 -510 -5.12
2 -5420 -54.19 18 -3010
-30.1 34 -1660 -16.57 50 -420 -4.19
3 -5070 -50.66 19 -2910
-29.08 35 -1570 -15.7 51 -340 -3.35
4 -4820 -48.16 20 -2820
-28.16 36 -1490 -14.91 52 -260 -2.59
5 -4620 -46.23 21 -2730
-27.34 37 -1420 -14.19 53 -190 -1.89
6 -4460 -44.64 22 -2660
-26.58 38 -1350 -13.52 54 -120 -1.24
7 -4330 -43.3 23 -2590 -25.89
39 -1290 -12.9 55 -60 -0.63
8 -4210 -42.14 24 -2520
-25.24 40 -1230 -12.32 56 -10 -0.07
9 -4020 -40.21 25 -2410
-24.08 41 -1130 -11.26 57 100 0.96
10 -3860 -38.62 26 -2310
-23.06 42 -1030 -10.32 58 190 1.88
11 -3730 -37.28 27 -2210
-22.14 43 -950 -9.47 59 270 2.72
12 -3610 -36.12 28 -2130
-21.32 44 -870 -8.7 60 350 3.48
13 -3510 -35.1 29 -2060
-20.56 45 -800 -7.99 61 420 4.18
14 -3420 -34.19 30 -1990
-19.87 46 -730 -7.34 62 480 4.82
15 -3340 -33.36 31 -1920
-19.22 47 -670 -6.73 63 540 5.42
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Gain
Control +VGR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 27
21.6.
Gain Control +VGR
21.6.1.
Description
This command is used
by the application to set the speaker gain
21.6.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+VGR=<Rgain>
OK
Read command
AT+VGR?
+VGR: <Rgain>
OK
Test command
AT+VGR=?
+VGR: (list of supported
<Rgain>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Gain
Control +VGR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 28
21.6.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<Rgain>:
reception gain
There are two
configuration modes:
the
gain is entered in deci dB units,
the
gain is entered in index.
By default gains are
expressed in deci dB value.
All values are possible
between the minimum and maximum values of the table given
in the Notes section. If
a value does not correspond to a table value, the nearest is
kept.
If the configuration mode
has been changed with +WBHV command to the index
mode, the deci dB value
will correspond to the index entered as described in the
table of the Notes
section.
21.6.4.
Parameter Storage
All parameters are
stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command.
21.6.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+VGR=?
Note:
Test command
+VGR: (-4000-800)
OK
Note:
Possible values if speaker1 is selected on Q26XX and
WMP100
embedded module
AT+VGR=-2100 OK
AT+VGR?
Note:
Get current reception gain value
+VGR: -2000
OK
Note:
Receive gain
AT+WBHV=8,1
Note:
Set configuration to indexed mode
OK
AT+VGR=?
Note:
Test command
+VGR: (0-15)
OK
Note:
Possible values if speaker1 or speaker2 selected on Q24NG
embedded
module
AT+VGR=9 OK
AT+VGR?
Note:
Get current reception gain value
+VGR: 9
OK
Note:
Receive gain
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Gain
Control +VGR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 29
21.6.6.
Notes
Below are listed the
values for <Rgain>. They are in deci dB units and index.
For Q24NG embedded
module:
Speaker
1 (-16.3dB by default) and speaker 2 (-10.3dB by default).
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
0 -26.3 4 -1830 -18.3 8
-1030 -10.3 12 -230 -2.3
1 -2430 -24.3 5 -1630
-16.3 9 -830 -8.3 13 -30 -0.3
2 -2230 -22.3 6 -1430
-14.3 10 -630 -6.3 14 170 1.7
3 -2030 -20.3 7 -1230
-12.3 11 -430 -4.3 15 370 3.7
For Q26XX and WMP100
embedded module(default values are grayed):
Speaker
1:
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in
value
Real
dB
value
Gain in
Index
Gain in
dB
Real
dB
value
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
0 -4000 -40 -2400 -24 8
-800 -8 12 800 8
1 -3600 -36 5 -2000 -20 9
-400 -4
2 -3200 -32 6 -1600 -16
10 0 0
3 -2800 -28 7 -1200 -12
11 400 4
Speaker
2:
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
Index
Gain in
dB
Real
dB
value
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
0 -3400 -34 4 -18 00 -18
8 -200 -2 12 1400 14
1 -3000 -30 5 -1400 -14 9
200 2
2 -2600 -26 6 -1000 -10
10 600 6
3 -2200 -22 7 -600 -6 11
1000 10
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Gain
Control +VGT
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 30
21.7.
Gain Control +VGT
21.7.1.
Description
This command is used
by the application to set the microphone gain.
21.7.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+VGT=<Tgain>
OK
Read command
AT+VGT?
+VGT: <Tgain>
OK
Test command
AT+VGT=?
+VGT: (list of supported
<Tgain>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Gain
Control +VGT
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 31
21.7.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<Tgain>:
transmission gain
There are two
configuration modes:
the
gain is entered in deci dB units,
the
gain is entered in index.
By default gains are
expressed in deci dB value.
All values are possible
between the minimum and maximum values of the table given
in the Notes section. If
a value does not correspond to a table value, the nearest is
kept.
If the configuration mode
has been changed with +WBHV command to the index
mode, the deci dB value
will correspond to the index entered as described in the
table of the Notes
section.
21.7.4.
Parameter Storage
All parameters are
stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command.
21.7.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+VGT?
Note:
Get current transmission gain value
+VGT: (700-3500)
OK
Note:
Possible values on Q26XX and WMP100 embedded module
AT+VGT=900 OK
AT+VGT=?
Note:
Get current transmission gain value
+VGT: 700
OK
AT+WBHV=8,1
Note:
Set configuration to indexed mode
OK
AT+VGT=? +VGT: (0-117)
OK
Note:
Possible values on Q24NG embedded module
AT+VGT=9 OK
AT+VGT?
Note:
Get current transmission gain value
+VGT: 9
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Gain
Control +VGT
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 32
21.7.6.
Notes
Below are listed the
values for <Tgain>. They are in deci dB units and index:
For
Q24NG embedded module (default values are grayed):
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
0 -650 -6.5 31 900 9 62
2380 23.8 93 3930 39.3
1 -600 -6 32 950 9.5 63
2430 24.3 94 3980 39.8
2 -550 -5.5 33 1000 10 64
2480 24.8 95 4030 40.3
3 -500 -5 34 980 9.8 65
2530 25.3 96 4080 40.8
4 -450 -4.5 35 1030 10.3
66 2580 25.8 97 4130 41.3
5 -400 -4 36 1080 10.8 67
2630 26.3 98 4180 41.8
6 -350 -3.5 37 1130 11.3
68 2680 26.8 99 4230 42.3
7 -300 -3 38 1180 11.8 69
2730 27.3 100 4280 42.8
8 -250 -2.5 39 1230 12.3
70 2780 27.8 101 4330 43.3
9 -200 -2 40 1280 12.8 71
2830 28.3 102 4380 43.8
10 -150 -1.5 41 1330 13.3
72 2880 28.8 103 4430 44.3
11 -100 -1 42 1380 13.8
73 2930 29.3 104 4480 44.8
12 -50 -0.5 43 1430 14.3
74 2980 29.8 105 4530 45.3
13 0 0 44 1480 14.8 75
3030 30.3 106 4580 45.8
14 50 0.5 45 1530 15.3 76
3080 30.8 107 4630 46.3
15 100 1 46 1580 15.8 77
3130 31.3 108 4680 46.8
16 150 1.5 47 1630 16.3
78 3180 31.8 109 4730 47.3
17 200 2 48 1680 16.8 79
3230 32.3 110 4780 47.8
18 250 2.5 49 1730 17.3
80 3280 32.8 111 4830 48.3
19 300 3 50 1780 17.8 81
3330 33.3 112 4880 48.8
20 350 3.5 51 1830 18.3
82 3380 33.8 113 4930 49.3
21 400 4 52 1880 18.8 83
3430 34.3 114 4980 49.8
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Gain
Control +VGT
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 33
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
22 450 4.5 53 1930 19.3
84 3480 34.8 115 5030 50.3
23 500 5 54 1980 19.8 85
3530 35.3 116 5080 50.8
24 550 5.5 55 2030 20.3
86 3580 35.8 117 5130 51.3
25 600 6 56 2080 20.8 87
3630 36.3
26 650 6.5 57 2130 21.3
88 3680 36.8
27 700 7 58 2180 21.8 89
3730 37.3
28 750 7.5 59 2230 22.3
90 3780 37.8
29 800 8 60 2280 22.8 91
3830 38.3
30 850 8.5 61 2330 23.3
92 3880 38.8
For
Q26XX and WMP100 embedded module (default values are grayed):
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
0 700 7 1 2000 20 2 3500
35
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Digital
Gain Control +WDGR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 34
21.8.
Digital Gain Control +WDGR
21.8.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command is used by the application to tune the receive digital gain
of
the speaker.
21.8.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WDGR=<Configuration>,<Rgain>
OK
Read command
AT+WDGR?
+WDGR:
<Configuration>,<Rgain>
[+WDGR:
<Configuration>,<Rgain>[
]]
OK
Test command
AT+WDGR=?
+WDGR: <Configuration>,
(list of supported <Rgain>s)
[+WDGR: <Configuration>,
(list of supported <Rgain>s)]
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Digital
Gain Control +WDGR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 35
21.8.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<Configuration>:
audio configuration
1
HWL_AUDIO_DSP_RX_PGA_CONF
2
HWL_AUDIO_DSP_RX_VOL_CONF
<Rgain>:
reception gain
There are two
configuration modes:
the
gain is entered in deci dB units,
the
gain is entered in index.
By default gains are
expressed in deci dB value.
All values are possible
between the minimum and maximum values of the table given
in the Notes section. If
a value does not correspond to a table value, the nearest is
kept.
If the configuration mode
has been changed with +WBHV command to the index
mode, the deci dB value
will correspond to the index entered as described in the
table of the Notes
section.
21.8.4.
Parameter Storage
The parameters are
stored in EEPROM without using the AT&W command The default value can be
restored using
AT&F and "AT+VIP=1".
21.8.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WDGR=? +WDGR:
1,(-32768-1201)
+WDGR: 2,(-32768-1201)
OK
Note:
Possible values on Q26XX and WMP100 embedded module
AT+WDGR=1,879 OK
Note:
PGA configured with a gain of 8.79 dB
AT+WDGR? +WDGR: 1,879
+WDGR: 2,1184
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Digital
Gain Control +WDGR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 36
Command
Responses
AT+WBHV=8,1
Note:
Set configuration to indexed mode
OK
AT+WDGR=? +WDGR:
1,(0-255)
+WDGR: 2,(0-255)
OK
Note:
Possible values on Q26XX and WMP100 embedded module
AT+WDGR=1,176 OK
Note:
PGA configured with a gain of 8.79 dB
AT+WDGR? +WDGR: 1,176
+WDGR: 2,250
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Digital
Gain Control +WDGR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 37
21.8.6.
Notes
Below are listed the
values for <Rgain>. They are in deci dB units and index
For Q24NG embedded
module (default values are grayed):
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
Index
Gain in
dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
Index
Gain in
dB
Real
dB
value
0 -32768 inf 32 -602
-6.02 64 0 0 96 352 3.52
1 -3612 -36.12 33 -575
-5.75 65 13 0.13 97 361 3.61
2 -3010 -30.1 34 -549
-5.49 66 27 0.27 98 370 3.7
3 -2658 -26.58 35 -524
-5.24 67 40 0.4 99 379 3.79
4 -2408 -24.08 36 -500 -5
68 53 0.53 100 388 3.88
5 -2214 -22.14 37 -476
-4.76 69 65 0.65 101 396 3.96
6 -2056 -20.56 38 -453
-4.53 70 78 0.78 102 405 4.05
7 -1922 -19.22 39 -430
-4.3 71 90 0.9 103 413 4.13
8 -1806 -18.06 40 -408
-4.08 72 102 1.02 104 422 4.22
9 -1704 -17.04 41 -387
-3.87 73 114 1.14 105 430 4.3
10 -1612 -16.12 42 -366
-3.66 74 126 1.26 106 438 4.38
11 -1530 -15.3 43 -345
-3.45 75 138 1.38 107 446 4.46
12 -1454 -14.54 44 -325
-3.25 76 149 1.49 108 454 4.54
13 -1384 -13.84 45 -306
-3.06 77 161 1.61 109 462 4.62
14 -1320 -13.2 46 -287
-2.87 78 172 1.72 110 470 4.7
15 -1260 -12.6 47 -268
-2.68 79 183 1.83 111 478 4.78
16 -1204 -12.04 48 -250
-2.5 80 194 1.94 112 486 4.86
17 -1151 -11.51 49 -232
-2.32 81 205 2.05 113 494 4.94
18 -1102 -11.02 50 -214
-2.14 82 215 2.15 114 501 5.01
19 -1055 -10.55 51 -197
-1.97 83 226 2.26 115 509 5.09
20 -1010 -10.1 52 -180
-1.8 84 236 2.36 116 517 5.17
21 -968 -9.68 53 -164 -1.64
85 246 2.46 117 524 5.24
22 -928 -9.28 54 -148
-1.48 86 257 2.57 118 531 5.31
23 -889 -8.89 55 -132
-1.32 87 267 2.67 119 539 5.39
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Digital
Gain Control +WDGR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 38
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
Index
Gain in
dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
Index
Gain in
dB
Real
dB
value
24 -852 -8.52 56 -116
-1.16 88 277 2.77 120 546 5.46
25 -816 -8.16 57 -101 -1.01
89 286 2.86 121 553 5.53
26 -782 -7.82 58 -86
-0.86 90 296 2.96 122 560 5.6
27 -750 -7.5 59 -71 -0.71
91 306 3.06 123 567 5.67
28 -718 -7.18 60 -56
-0.56 92 315 3.15 124 574 5.74
29 -688 -6.88 61 -42
-0.42 93 325 3.25 125 581 5.81
30 -658 -6.58 62 -28
-0.28 94 334 3.34 126 588 5.88
31 -630 -6.3 63 -14 -0.14
95 343 3.43 127 595 5.95
For Q26XX and WMP100
embedded module (default values are grayed):
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
Index
Gain in
dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
Index
Gain in
dB
Real
dB
value
0 -32768 -Inf 64 0 0 128
602 6.02 192 954 9.54
1 -3612 -36.12 65 13 0.13
129 609 6.09 193 959 9.59
2 -3010 -30.1 66 27 0.27
130 616 6.16 194 963 9.63
3 -2658 -26.58 67 40 0.4
131 622 6.22 195 968 9.68
4 -2408 -24.08 68 53 0.53
132 629 6.29 196 972 9.72
5 -2214 -22.14 69 65 0.65
133 635 6.35 197 977 9.77
6 -2056 -20.56 70 78 0.78
134 642 6.42 198 981 9.81
7 -1922 -19.22 71 90 0.9
135 648 6.48 199 985 9.85
8 -1806 -18.06 72 102
1.02 136 655 6.55 200 990 9.9
9 -1704 -17.04 73 114
1.14 137 661 6.61 201 994 9.94
10 -1612 -16.12 74 126
1.26 138 667 6.67 202 998 9.98
11 -1530 -15.3 75 138
1.38 139 674 6.74 203 1003 10.03
12 -1454 -14.54 76 149
1.49 140 680 6.8 204 1007 10.07
13 -1384 -13.84 77 161
1.61 141 686 6.86 205 1011 10.11
14 -1320 -13.2 78 172
1.72 142 692 6.92 206 1015 10.15
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Digital
Gain Control +WDGR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 39
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
Index
Gain in
dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
Index
Gain in
dB
Real
dB
value
15 -1260 -12.6 79 183
1.83 143 698 6.98 207 1020 10.2
16 -1204 -12.04 80 194
1.94 144 704 7.04 208 1024 10.24
17 -1151 -11.51 81 205
2.05 145 710 7.1 209 1028 10.28
18 -1102 -11.02 82 215
2.15 146 716 7.16 210 1032 10.32
19 -1055 -10.55 83 226
2.26 147 722 7.22 211 1036 10.36
20 -1010 -10.1 84 236
2.36 148 728 7.28 212 1040 10.4
21 -968 -9.68 85 246 2.46
149 734 7.34 213 1044 10.44
22 -928 -9.28 86 257 2.57
150 740 7.4 214 1048 10.48
23 -889 -8.89 87 267 2.67
151 746 7.46 215 1053 10.53
24 -852 -8.52 88 277 2.77
152 751 7.51 216 1057 10.57
25 -816 -8.16 89 286 2.86
153 757 7.57 217 1061 10.61
26 -782 -7.82 90 296 2.96
154 763 7.63 218 1065 10.65
27 -750 -7.5 91 306 3.06
155 768 7.68 219 1069 10.69
28 -718 -7.18 92 315 3.15
156 774 7.74 220 1072 10.72
29 -688 -6.88 93 325 3.25
157 779 7.79 221 1076 10.76
30 -658 -6.58 94 334 3.34
158 785 7.85 222 1080 10.8
31 -630 -6.3 95 343 3.43
159 790 7.9 223 1084 10.84
32 -602 -6.02 96 352 3.52
160 796 7.96 224 1088 10.88
33 -575 -5.75 97 361 3.61
161 801 8.01 225 1092 10.92
34 -549 -5.49 98 370 3.7
162 807 8.07 226 1096 10.96
35 -524 -5.24 99 379 3.79
163 812 8.12 227 1100 11
36 -500 -5 100 388 3.88
164 817 8.17 228 1104 11.04
37 -476 -4.76 101 396
3.96 165 823 8.23 229 1107 11.07
38 -453 -4.53 102 405
4.05 166 828 8.28 230 1111 11.11
39 -430 -4.3 103 413 4.13
167 833 8.33 231 1115 11.15
40 -408 -4.08 104 422
4.22 168 838 8.38 232 1119 11.19
41 -387 -3.87 105 430 4.3
169 843 8.43 233 1122 11.22
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Digital
Gain Control +WDGR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 40
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
Index
Gain in
dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
Index
Gain in
dB
Real
dB
value
42 -366 -3.66 106 438
4.38 170 849 8.49 234 1126 11.26
43 -345 -3.45 107 446
4.46 171 854 8.54 235 1130 11.3
44 -325 -3.25 108 454
4.54 172 859 8.59 236 1133 11.33
45 -306 -3.06 109 462
4.62 173 864 8.64 237 1137 11.37
46 -287 -2.87 110 470 4.7
174 869 8.69 238 1141 11.41
47 -268 -2.68 111 478
4.78 175 874 8.74 239 1144 11.44
48 -250 -2.5 112 486 4.86
176 879 8.79 240 1148 11.48
49 -232 -2.32 113 494
4.94 177 884 8.84 241 1152 11.52
50 -214 -2.14 114 501
5.01 178 888 8.88 242 1155 11.55
51 -197 -1.97 115 509
5.09 179 893 8.93 243 1159 11.59
52 -180 -1.8 116 517 5.17
180 898 8.98 244 1162 11.62
53 -164 -1.64 117 524
5.24 181 903 9.03 245 1166 11.66
54 -148 -1.48 118 531
5.31 182 908 9.08 246 1170 11.7
55 -132 -1.32 119 539
5.39 183 913 9.13 247 1173 11.73
56 -116 -1.16 120 546
5.46 184 917 9.17 248 1177 11.77
57 -101 -1.01 121 553
5.53 185 922 9.22 249 1180 11.8
58 -86 -0.86 122 560 5.6
186 927 9.27 250 1184 11.84
59 -71 -0.71 123 567 5.67
187 931 9.31 251 1187 11.87
60 -56 -0.56 124 574 5.74
188 936 9.36 252 1190 11.9
61 -42 -0.42 125 581 5.81
189 941 9.41 253 1194 11.94
62 -28 -0.28 126 588 5.88
190 945 9.45 254 1197 11.97
63 -14 -0.14 127 595 5.95
191 950 9.5 255 1201 12.01
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Digital
Gain Control +WDGT
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 41
21.9.
Digital Gain Control +WDGT
21.9.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command is used by the application to tune the transmit digital
gain
of the microphone.
21.9.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WDGT=<Configuration>,<Tgain>
OK
Read command
AT+WDGT?
+WDGT:
<Configuration>,<Tgain>
[+WDGT:
<Configuration>,<Tgain>[
]]
OK
Test command
AT+WDGT=?
+WDGT: (list of supported
<Configuration>s), (list of supported <Tgain>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Digital
Gain Control +WDGT
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 42
21.9.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<Configuration>:
audio configuration
1
HWL_AUDIO_DSP_TX_PGA_CONF
<Tgain>:
transmission gain
There are two
configuration modes:
the gain
is entered in deci dB units,
the gain
is entered in index.
By default gains are
expressed in deci dB value.
All values are possible
between the minimum and maximum values of the table
given in the Notes
section. If a value does not correspond to a table value, the
nearest is kept.
If the configuration mode
has been changed with +WBHV command to the index
mode, the deci dB value will
correspond to the index entered as described in the
table of the Notes
section.
21.9.4.
Parameter Storage
The parameters are
stored in EEPROM without using the AT&W command. The default value can be
restored using
AT&F and "AT+VIP=1".
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Digital
Gain Control +WDGT
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 43
21.9.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WDGT=? +WDGT:
(1),(-32768-1201)
OK
Note:
Possible values on Q26XX and WMP100 embedded module
AT+WDGT=1,879 OK
Note:
PGA configured with a gain of 8.79 dB
AT+WDGT? +WDGT: 1,879
OK
AT+WBHV=8,1
Note:
Set configuration to indexed mode
OK
AT+WDGT=? +WDGT:
(1),(0-255)
OK
Note:
Possible values on Q26XX and WMP100 embedded module
AT+WDGT=1,176 OK
Note:
PGA configured with a gain of 8.79 dB
AT+WDGT? +WDGT: 1,176
OK
21.9.6.
Notes
Below are listed the
values for <Tgain>. They are in deci dB units and index.
For Q26XX and WMP100
embedded module (default values are grayed):
Gain
in
Index
Gain in
dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
0 -32768 -Inf 64 0 0 128
602 6.02 192 954 9.54
1 -3612 -36.12 65 13 0.13
129 609 6.09 193 959 9.59
2 -3010 -30.1 66 27 0.27
130 616 6.16 194 963 9.63
3 -2658 -26.58 67 40 0.4
131 622 6.22 195 968 9.68
4 -2408 -24.08 68 53 0.53
132 629 6.29 196 972 9.72
5 -2214 -22.14 69 65 0.65
133 635 6.35 197 977 9.77
6 -2056 -20.56 70 78 0.78
134 642 6.42 198 981 9.81
7 -1922 -19.22 71 90 0.9
135 648 6.48 199 985 9.85
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Digital
Gain Control +WDGT
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 44
Gain
in
Index
Gain in
dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
8 -1806 -18.06 72 102
1.02 136 655 6.55 200 990 9.9
9 -1704 -17.04 73 114
1.14 137 661 6.61 201 994 9.94
10 -1612 -16.12 74 126
1.26 138 667 6.67 202 998 9.98
11 -1530 -15.3 75 138
1.38 139 674 6.74 203 1003 10.03
12 -1454 -14.54 76 149
1.49 140 680 6.8 204 1007 10.07
13 -1384 -13.84 77 161
1.61 141 686 6.86 205 1011 10.11
14 -1320 -13.2 78 172
1.72 142 692 6.92 206 1015 10.15
15 -1260 -12.6 79 183
1.83 143 698 6.98 207 1020 10.2
16 -1204 -12.04 80 194
1.94 144 704 7.04 208 1024 10.24
17 -1151 -11.51 81 205
2.05 145 710 7.1 209 1028 10.28
18 -1102 -11.02 82 215
2.15 146 716 7.16 210 1032 10.32
19 -1055 -10.55 83 226
2.26 147 722 7.22 211 1036 10.36
20 -1010 -10.1 84 236
2.36 148 728 7.28 212 1040 10.4
21 -968 -9.68 85 246 2.46
149 734 7.34 213 1044 10.44
22 -928 -9.28 86 257 2.57
150 740 7.4 214 1048 10.48
23 -889 -8.89 87 267 2.67
151 746 7.46 215 1053 10.53
24 -852 -8.52 88 277 2.77
152 751 7.51 216 1057 10.57
25 -816 -8.16 89 286 2.86
153 757 7.57 217 1061 10.61
26 -782 -7.82 90 296 2.96
154 763 7.63 218 1065 10.65
27 -750 -7.5 91 306 3.06
155 768 7.68 219 1069 10.69
28 -718 -7.18 92 315 3.15
156 774 7.74 220 1072 10.72
29 -688 -6.88 93 325 3.25
157 779 7.79 221 1076 10.76
30 -658 -6.58 94 334 3.34
158 785 7.85 222 1080 10.8
31 -630 -6.3 95 343 3.43
159 790 7.9 223 1084 10.84
32 -602 -6.02 96 352 3.52
160 796 7.96 224 1088 10.88
33 -575 -5.75 97 361 3.61
161 801 8.01 225 1092 10.92
34 -549 -5.49 98 370 3.7
162 807 8.07 226 1096 10.96
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Digital
Gain Control +WDGT
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 45
Gain
in
Index
Gain in
dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
35 -524 -5.24 99 379 3.79
163 812 8.12 227 1100 11
36 -500 -5 100 388 3.88
164 817 8.17 228 1104 11.04
37 -476 -4.76 101 396
3.96 165 823 8.23 229 1107 11.07
38 -453 -4.53 102 405
4.05 166 828 8.28 230 1111 11.11
39 -430 -4.3 103 413 4.13
167 833 8.33 231 1115 11.15
40 -408 -4.08 104 422
4.22 168 838 8.38 232 1119 11.19
41 -387 -3.87 105 430 4.3
169 843 8.43 233 1122 11.22
42 -366 -3.66 106 438
4.38 170 849 8.49 234 1126 11.26
43 -345 -3.45 107 446
4.46 171 854 8.54 235 1130 11.3
44 -325 -3.25 108 454
4.54 172 859 8.59 236 1133 11.33
45 -306 -3.06 109 462
4.62 173 864 8.64 237 1137 11.37
46 -287 -2.87 110 470 4.7
174 869 8.69 238 1141 11.41
47 -268 -2.68 111 478
4.78 175 874 8.74 239 1144 11.44
48 -250 -2.5 112 486 4.86
176 879 8.79 240 1148 11.48
49 -232 -2.32 113 494
4.94 177 884 8.84 241 1152 11.52
50 -214 -2.14 114 501
5.01 178 888 8.88 242 1155 11.55
51 -197 -1.97 115 509
5.09 179 893 8.93 243 1159 11.59
52 -180 -1.8 116 517 5.17
180 898 8.98 244 1162 11.62
53 -164 -1.64 117 524
5.24 181 903 9.03 245 1166 11.66
54 -148 -1.48 118 531
5.31 182 908 9.08 246 1170 11.7
55 -132 -1.32 119 539
5.39 183 913 9.13 247 1173 11.73
56 -116 -1.16 120 546
5.46 184 917 9.17 248 1177 11.77
57 -101 -1.01 121 553
5.53 185 922 9.22 249 1180 11.8
58 -86 -0.86 122 560 5.6
186 927 9.27 250 1184 11.84
59 -71 -0.71 123 567 5.67
187 931 9.31 251 1187 11.87
60 -56 -0.56 124 574 5.74
188 936 9.36 252 1190 11.9
61 -42 -0.42 125 581 5.81
189 941 9.41 253 1194 11.94
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Digital
Gain Control +WDGT
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 46
Gain
in
Index
Gain in
dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
62 -28 -0.28 126 588 5.88
190 945 9.45 254 1197 11.97
63 -14 -0.14 127 595 5.95
191 950 9.5 255 1201 12.01
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Audio
Filter Command +WADF
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 47
21.10.
Audio Filter Command +WADF
21.10.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command enables/disables the high pass and low pass filters on TX
and RX mode, and the
FIR and FIR2 filters on RX mode.
21.10.2.
Syntax
For
<filter>=1,2,3 or 4
Action command
AT+WADF=<mode>,<filter>[,[<param1>][,[<param2>][,[<param3>]
[,[<param4>][,[<param5>][,[<param6>][,[<param7>][,[<param8>]
[,[<param9>][,[<param10>]]]]]]]]]]]
OK
For
<filter>=5
Action command
AT+WADF=<mode>,<filter>[,[<param1>][,[<param2>][,[<param3>]
[,[<param4>][,[<param5>][,[<param6>][,[<param7>][,[<param8>]
[,[<param9>][,[<param10>],[<param11>]]]]]]]]]]]
OK
For
<filter>=6
Action command
AT+WADF=<mode>,<filter>[,[<line>][,[<param1>][,[<param2>]
[,[<param3>]
[,[<param16>]]]]]]
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Audio
Filter Command +WADF
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 48
Read command
AT+WADF?
For
<filter>=1,2,3 or 4
+WADF:
<mode>,<filter>,<param1>,<param2>,<param3>,
<param4>,<param5>,<param6>,<param7>,<param8>,<param9>,<param10>[
]
For
<filter>=5
+WADF:
<mode>,<filter>,<param1>,<param2>,<param3>,<param4>,
<param5>,<param6>,<param7>,<param8>,<param9>,<param10>,<param11>[
]
For
<filter>=6
+WADF:<mode>,<filter>,<line>,<param1>,<param2>,<param3>,<param4>
[,[<param5>][,[<param6>]
.[,[<param16>]]]][
]
OK
Test command
AT+WADF=?
For
<filter>=1,2,3 or 4
+WADF: (list of supported
<mode>s), <filter>,
(list of supported
<param1>s),(list of supported <param2>s),
(list of supported
<param3>s),(list of supported <param4>s),
(list of supported
<param5>s),(list of supported <param6>s),
(list of supported
<param7>s),(list of supported <param8>s),
(list of supported
<param9>s),(list of supported <param10>s)[
]
For
<filter>=5
+WADF: (list of supported
<mode>s),<filter>,
(list of supported
<param1>s),(list of supported <param2>s),(list of supported
<param3>s),(list of
supported <param4>s), (list of supported <param5>s),(list of
supported <param6>s),
(list of supported <param7>s),(list of supported <param8>s),
(list of supported
<param9>s),(list of supported <param10>s), (list of supported
<param11>s)[
]
For
<filter>=6
+WADM: (list of supported
<mode>s),<filter>,(list of supported <line>s,(list of
supported <param1>s),(list
of supported <param2>s),(list of supported <param3>s),
(list of supported
<param4>s[,[(list of supported <param5>s)]
[,[(list of supported
<param16>s)]]][
]
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Audio
Filter Command +WADF
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 49
21.10.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mode>:
requested operation
0 stop a specific filter
1 enable a specific
filter
2 ask for the current
parameters values of a specific filter
<filter>:
filter type
1 high pass filter in TX
mode
2 high pass filter in RX
mode
3 low pass filter in TX
mode
4 low pass filter in RX
mode
5 FIR filter (Finite
impulse response numeric filter) in RX mode
6 FIR2 filter (Finite
impulse response numeric filter) in RX mode
<line>:
(0-1)
only for <filter>=6
FIR2 has 2 lines of 16
parameters (32 parameters are used to set FIR2 filter)
<paramx>: filter
parameters
range
high pass filter in TX
and RX
mode
(default
values)
low pass
filter in TX
and RX
mode
(default
values)
<param1>
0-65535 4032 0
<param2>
0-65535 61562 0
<param3>
0-65535 57484 0
<param4>
0-65535 8051 0
<param5>
0-65535 4032 4096
<param6>
0-65535 0 0
<param7>
0-65535 0 0
<param8>
0-65535 61617 0
<param9>
0-65535 3742 0
For <filter>=
1,2,3 or 4
<param10>
0-65535 3919 4096
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Audio
Filter Command +WADF
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 50
<param1>
Symmetrical: (0-1) default value: 0
<param2>
Gain: (0-255) - default value: 0
For
<filter>=5
<param3>-
<param11>
FIR Coefficients: (0-65365)
For <param3>,
default value is 32767
For all other params,
default value is 0
For
<filter>=6
<param1>-
<param16>
FIR2 Coefficients:
(0-65365)
For <line>=0:
<param1> default
value is 32767.
<param2>-<param16>
default values are 0
For <line>=1:
<param1>-<param16>
default values are 0
21.10.4.
Parameter Storage
The parameters are
stored in EEPROM without using the AT&W.command. The default value can be
restored using
AT&F and "AT+VIP=1".
21.10.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WADF=? +WADF:
(0-2),1,(0-65535),(0-65535),(0-65535),(0-
65535),(0-65535),(0-65535),(0-65535),(0-65535),(0-
65535),(0-65535)
+WADF:
(0-2),2,(0-65535),(0-65535),(0-65535),(0-
65535),(0-65535),(0-65535),(0-65535),(0-65535),(0-
65535),(0-65535)
+WADF:
(0-2),3,(0-65535),(0-65535),(0-65535),(0-
65535),(0-65535),(0-65535),(0-65535),(0-65535),(0-
65535),(0-65535)
+WADF:
(0-2),4,(0-65535),(0-65535),(0-65535),(0-
65535),(0-65535),(0-65535),(0-65535),(0-65535),(0-
65535),(0-65535)
OK
Note:
Possible values on WMP100, WMP50
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Audio
Filter Command +WADF
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 51
Command
Responses
AT+WADF? +WADF:
0,1,4032,61562,57484,8051,4032,0,0,61617,3742,3919
+WADF:
0,2,4032,61562,57484,8051,4032,0,0,61617,3742,3919
+WADF:
0,3,0,0,0,0,4096,0,0,0,0,4096
+WADF:
0,4,0,0,0,0,4096,0,0,0,0,4096
OK
Note :
Read the status and parameter values for all filters on WMP100,
WMP50
AT+WADF=1,1,0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9
Note:
Activate the high pass filter in TX mode
with
params (0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9)
OK
AT+WADF=2,1
Note:
Ask for the current params values of the
high
pass filter in TX mode
+WADF: 1,1,0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9
OK
AT+WADF?
Note:
Ask for the current params values of all
filters
on WMP100
+WADF: 1,1,0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9
+WADF:
0,2,4032,61562,57484,8051,
4032,0,0,61617,3742,3919
+WADF:
0,3,0,0,0,0,4096,0,0,0,0,4096
+WADF:
0,4,0,0,0,0,4096,0,0,0,0,4096
OK
AT+WADF=1,1,9,8,7,6,5,4,3,2,1,0
Note :
Update the params value of the high
pass
filter in TX mode. The <mode> parameter
has the
current value, the activation mode will
not
change.
OK
AT+WADF=2,1
Note:
Ask for the current params values of the
high
pass filter in TX mode
+WADF: 1,1,9,8,7,6,5,4,3,2,1,0
OK
AT+WADF=1,1,,,,,,,,,,30
Note :
Update <param10> of the high pass filter
in TX
mode using the current <mode> value
without
changing the others parameters
OK
AT+WADF=2,1
Note:
Ask for the current params values of the
high
pass filter in TX mode
+WADF: 1,1,9,8,7,6,5,4,3,2,1,30
OK
AT+WADF=0,1
Note:
Stop the high pass filter in TX mode
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Audio
Filter Command +WADF
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 52
Command
Responses
AT+WADF=1,6,0,,1
Note:
Activate FIR2 filter with set the second
parameter
of the first line
OK
21.10.6.
Notes
Each
filter's availability depends on the embedded module used
All
available filters on the embedded module are activable with each other filter
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Echo
Cancellation +ECHO
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 53
21.11.
Echo Cancellation +ECHO
21.11.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command is used to enable, disable or configure the Echo
Cancellation
functions for voice calls.
21.11.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+ECHO=<mode>,<algoId>[,<param_1>,
,<param_n>]
OK
Read command
AT+ECHO?
+ECHO:
<status>,<algoId>,<param_1>,
,<param_n>
[+ECHO:
<status>,<algoId>,<param_1>,
,<param_n>[
]]
OK
Test command
AT+ECHO=?
+ECHO: (list of supported
<mode>s), <algoId>, (list of supported <param>s)
[+ECHO: (list of supported
<mode>s), <algoId>, (list of supported <param>s) [
]]
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Echo
Cancellation +ECHO
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 54
21.11.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mode>:
mode
0 deactivate echo
cancellation
1 activate echo
cancellation.
<algoId> is
mandatory. The other configuration parameters are optional, so current values
are taken into account.
<algoId>:
algorithm
0 Algorithm 1. Switch
attenuation (default AEC algorithm if there are several algorithms).
1 Algorithm 2. Basic
Sierra Wireless AEC
2 Algorithm 3: Basic
Sierra Wireless AEC
3 Algorithm 6. Advanced
Sierra Wireless AEC.
4 Algorithm LiveVibes
version 1. Philips AEC.
5 Algorithm LiveVibes
version 2. Philips AEC.
<Status>:
echo cancellation status
0 deactivated.
1 activated.
2 Reset is needed to
activate echo cancellation.
<param_n>:
parameter of echo cancellation
depends on the choses
algorithm
<alg
oId>
<param_n>
0 <Volout> maximum
attenuation of the swith
0 31 db (default)
1 29 db
3 27 db
... ...
14 31 db
15 1 db
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Echo
Cancellation +ECHO
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 55
0 <step> attenuation
step between attenuation and no attenuation
0 1 db
1 2 db
2 3 db
3 4 db (default value)
0 <PcmThRel>
relative threshold between max and min energy information
range: [0; 31] (default
value: 10)
0 <PcmThMax>
threshold of max energy information.
range: [0; 31] (default
value: 7)
1 TBD
2 <AlgoParam> high
value leads to high echo attenuation but the full-duplex
quality will be less
efficient.
range: [0; 63] (default
value: 30)
2 <NoiseThres>
noise threshold
Low value leads to high
noise attenuation. The threshold 32767
indicates no noise
attenuation.
range: [0; 32767]
(default value: 8000)
2 <NmbTaps> Number
of Taps of the Adaptive Filter
range: [64; 256].
(default value: 256)
64 taps is for short Echo
256 taps is for long Echo
3 <AlgoParam> high
value leads to high echo attenuation but the full-duplex
quality will be less
efficient.
range: [0; 63]. (30 by
default)
3 <NoiseThres>
noise threshold
Low value leads to high
noise attenuation. The threshold 32767
indicates no noise
attenuation.
range: [0; 32767]
(default value: 50)
Values above 512 have no
effect (noise reduction will be
disabled)
3 <NmbTaps> number
of Taps of the Adaptive Filter.
range: [2; 256] ( 256 by
default)
64 taps is for short Echo
256 taps is for long
Echo.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Echo
Cancellation +ECHO
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 56
3
<ConvergenceTime1> convergence time in quiet condition:
This parameter expresses
duration as the number of GSM
speech frames (20 ms
each) containing far end speech, upon
which the switch only
mechanism must run, in quiet conditions.
range: [162; 32767]
(default value: 200)
3
<ConvergenceTime2> convergence time in noise condition:
This parameter is the
same as <ConvergenceTime1> but in
noisy condition.
range: [162; 32767]
(default value: 550)
Caution:
:<ConvergenceTime2> must be greater than or
equal to
<ConvergenceTime1>
3 <NoiseLevelMAX>
upper bound of the noise floor estimate
This parameter is
expressed as integer on 16bits, and
corresponds to the
rounded value of the noise floor estimate
expressed in dB (log2).
range:
[NOISE_LEVEL_MIN+1; 31] (default value: 15 )
NOISE_LEVEL_MIN is a
constant (NOISE_LEVEL_MIN=4 in
the current
implementation)
3
<DetectionThreshold> far-end speech detection threshold:
In order to detect far
end speech on the loudspeakers signal,
the SNR is computed
regarding to the far end signal power and
the far end signal noise
floor level. This parameter specifies a
threshold on the SNR
above which the switch mechanism will
be activated.
This parameter is
expressed as an integer on 16bits.
range: [0; 32767]
(default value: 32767)
3 <CNGAdjust>
comfort noise volume gain
Although the comfort
noise volume will self adjust to the
estimated ambient noise
level, it is possible to artificially reduce
its level. This parameter
is expressed in fixed point as a signed
Q15, meaning that 32767
stands for 1.0, and 0 for 0.0.
range: [0;32767] (default
value: 32767)
Setting this value to 0
will mean no comfort noise
3 <CNGParam1>
<CNGParam2>
16 bits comfort noise AR2
coefficients:
The user will set the AR2
coefficients for a specific car. Their
value will be estimated
on a recorded noise sequence by mean
of a tool provided by
Sierra Wireless (C or Matlab source code).
The recorded sequence
shall be made in the noisy conditions
and contain noise only.
range: [0; 65535]
(default value: 27484 for CNG Param1 and
38697 for CNGParam2)
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Echo
Cancellation +ECHO
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 57
3 <CNGGain> 16 bits
Comfort noise AR2 gain coefficient.
It specifies the gain of
the AR2 filter used for comfort noise
generation. It will be
estimated by the same tool used to
estimate CNGParam1 and
CNGParam2.
It is represented as a
Q15 on 16 bits.
range: [0; 32767]
(default value: 7311)
3 <SOMValue> Switch
attenuation value at the beginning of the call
This parameter sets the
depth of the attenuation of the transmit
audio signal when speech
is detected on the distant side.
range: [1; 16] (default
value: 4)
3 <NoiseEstimate>
value of the noise floor estimate written by the DSP (only in
case of active
communication)
The allowed range is [0;
32] when a communication is active.
Otherwise the returned
value is 65535. This field is present only
in the response to
AT+ECHO?
4-5 < echoMode >
echo mode. It is a 8 bits field.
range: [0; 255]
Bit 0: echo canceller.
Bit 1: dynamic echo
suppressor.
Bit 2: noise suppression.
Bit 3: confort noise
injection.
Bit 4: extra suppression
of non-linear echoes.
Bit 5: internal use.
Bit 6: internal use.
Bit 7: non-linear
preprocessing of the far-end signal.
4-5
<NLMSEchoPathDelay> range: [160; 270] (default value: 254)
4-5 <NLMSTaps>
range: [12; 200] (default value: 200)
4-5 <NLMSTwoAlpha>
range: [0; 32767] (default value: 8192
4-5 <NLMSErl>
range: [0; 32767] default value: (128)
4-5
<NLMSPresetCoefs> range: [0; 2] (default value: 1)
4-5 <NLMSOffset>
range: [0; 32767] (default value: 328)
4-5 <ESSpdetFar>
range: [0; 32767] (default value: 16384)
4-5 <ESSpdetMic>
range: [0; 32767] (default value: 29491)
4-5 <NLSpdetXClip>
range: [0; 32767] (default value: 7951)
4-5 <ESTailAlpha>
range: [0; 32767] (default value: 26214)
4-5 <ESTailPortion>
range: [0; 32767] (default value: 984)
4-5 <ESSpdetNear>
range: [0; 32767] (default value: 512)
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Echo
Cancellation +ECHO
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 58
4-5 <ESGammaEHigh>
range: [0; 32767] (default value: 512)
4-5 <ESGammaEdt>
range: [0; 32767] (default value: 256)
4-5 <ESGammaELow>
range: [0; 32767] (default value: 128)
4-5 <ESGammaN>
range: [0; 32767] (default value: 256)
4-5 <NSBlockSize>
range: [0; 32767] (default value: 400)
4-5 <NSLimit>
range: [0; 32767] (default value: 10922)
4-5 <NLAtten>
range: [0; 32767] (default value: 2048)
4-5 <CNILevel>
range: [0; 32767] (default value: 8192)
4-5 <WBEchoRatio>
range: [0; 32767] (default value: 256)
4-5 <NLPPGain>
range: [0; 255] (default value: 2048)
4-5 <NLPPLimit>
range: [0; 32767] (default value: 32767)
4-5 <txGain> range:
[0; 32767] (default value: 64)
5 <biquad> HPF
filter biquad
Composed of 6 parameters:
shift, b2, b1, b0, a2, a1.
The allowed range for
each: [0; 65535].
Only for LiveVibes V2.
21.11.4.
Parameter Storage
All parameters are
stored in EEPROM without using the AT&W command. The default values can be
restored using
AT&F or AT+VIP=1.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Echo
Cancellation +ECHO
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 59
21.11.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CMEE=1
Note:
Enables the use of result code
OK
AT+ECHO? +ECHO:
(0-1),0,(0-15),(0-3),(0-
31),(0-31)
+ECHO:
(0-1),2,(0-63),(0-32767),(64-
256)
OK
Note:
Algo1 and Algo3 available on this embedded
module
AT+ECHO=? +ECHO: (0-1),4,(0-255),(160-270),(12-
200),(0-32767),(0-32767),(0-2),(0-
32767),(0-32767),(0-32767),(0-
32767),(0-32767),(0-32767),(0-
32767),(0-32767),(0-32767),(0-
32767),(0-32767),(0-32767),(0-
32767),(0-32767),(0-32767),(0-
32767),(0-255),(0-32767),(0-32767)
OK
Note:
Only Algo LV-V1 available on this embedded
module
AT+ECHO?
Note:
Read current settings
+ECHO: 0,0,0,3,10,7
+ECHO: 0,2,30,8000,256
OK
AT+ECHO=1,0
Note:
Activate Algo1 with current parameters
OK
AT+ECHO?
Note:
Read current settings
+ECHO: 1,0,0,3,10,7
+ECHO: 0,2,30,8000,256
OK
AT+ECHO=1,2
Note:
Activate Algo3 with current parameters
+CME ERROR: 519
Note:
The new algorithm will be activated after a reset of
the
product
AT+ECHO=?
Note:
Read current settings
+ECHO: 1,0,0,3,10,7
+ECHO: 2,2,30,8000,256
OK
AT+CFUN=1
Note:
Reset the product
OK
AT+ECHO?
Note:
Read current settings
+ECHO: 0,0,0,3,10,7
+ECHO: 1,2,30,8000,256
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Echo
Cancellation +ECHO
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 60
Command
Responses
AT+ECHO=0,2
Note:
Deactivate the Echo Cancellation
OK
AT+ECHO?
Note:
Read current settings
+ECHO: 0,0,0,3,10,7
+ECHO: 0,2,30,8000,256
OK
AT+ECHO=1,0
Note:
Activate Algo1 with current parameters
+CME ERROR: 519
Note:
The new algorithm will be activated after a reset of
the
product because the last activated AEC is different
AT+ECHO?
Note:
Read current settings
+ECHO: 2,0,0,3,10,7
+ECHO: 0,2,30,8000,256
OK
AT+CFUN=1
Note:
Reset the product
OK
AT+ECHO?
Note:
Read current settings
+ECHO: 1,0,0,3,10,7
+ECHO: 0,2,30,8000,256
OK
21.11.6.
Notes
When embedded module
resets, an AEC algo is loaded. If the user wants to activate another AEC
algo (even if not
any is activated), a reset is needed. Then, the change will be taken into
account after
a reset.
When a reset is
needed to activate a new AEC algorithm, if a previous algorithm was activated,
it
continues to be
activated as long as a reset is not performed. No automatic reset is done.
Only one AEC
algorithm can be running at a time.
You can change
parameters of an AEC algorithm X during another AEC algorithm Y running with
mode 0 (AT+ECHO=
0,X). No reset is needed.
Echo cancellation
can be activated and deactivated during a call if the chosen AEC algo is the
default
one.
The echo parameters
can be updated without changing the activation mode using the <mode> and
<algoid>
current values.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Sierra
Wireless Voice Rate +WVR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 61
21.12.
Sierra Wireless Voice Rate +WVR
21.12.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command allows the voice rate for bearer voice to be configured for
outgoing and
incoming calls.
21.12.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WVR=[<out_coding_type>][,<in_coding_type>]
OK
Read command
AT+WVR?
+WVR:
<out_coding_type>,<in_coding_type>
OK
Test command
AT+WVR=?
+WVR: (list of supported
<out_coding_type>s),(list of supported <in_coding_type>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Sierra
Wireless Voice Rate +WVR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 62
21.12.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<out_coding_type>
voice outgoing call coding type, see following table
Preferred
type Other supported types
0 FR
1 EFR FR
2 HR FR
3 FR HR
4 HR EFR
5 EFR HR
6 AMR-FR EFR, AMR-HR
7 (default value) AMR-FR
EFR, AMR-HR, HR
8 AMR-HR HR, AMR-FR, EFR
9 AMR-HR AMR-FR, EFR
10 AMR-HR AMR-FR, FR
11 AMR-HR HR, AMR-FR
12 AMR-FR AMR-HR
13 AMR-FR FR, AMR-HR
14 AMR-FR FR, AMR-HR, HR
<in_coding_type>:
voice incoming call coding type, see <out_coding_type> for
possible values
21.12.4.
Parameter Storage
The
<out_coding_type> and <in_coding_type> parameters are stored in
EEPROM without using the
AT&W command.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Sierra
Wireless Voice Rate +WVR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 63
21.12.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WVR=? +WVR:
(0-14),(0-14)
Note:
HR, EFR and AMR available
AT+WVR=1
Note:
Configures voice type FR and EFR for outgoing
calls
only
OK
Note:
Bearer is configured for outgoing calls
AT+WVR=1,4
Note:
Configures voice type FR and EFR for outgoing
calls
and HR and EFR for incoming calls
OK
Note:
Bearer is configured for outgoing and incoming calls
AT+WVR=,4
Note:
Configures voice type HR and EFR for incoming
calls
OK
Note:
Bearer is unchanged for outgoing calls and configured for
incoming
calls
AT+WVR?
Note:
Asks for the current values
+WVR: 1,4
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
DTMF
Signals +VTD
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 64
21.13.
DTMF Signals +VTD
21.13.1.
Description
The product enables
the user application to send DTMF tones over the GSM network. This command
is used to define
tone duration.
21.13.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+VTD=<n>
OK
Read command
AT+VTD?
+VTD: <n>
OK
Test command
AT+VTD=?
+VTD: (list of supported
<n>s)
OK
21.13.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<n>:
length of tones emitted as a result of the +VTS command, in
units of 100 ms
integer type
Value zero (default value)
causes a tone duration of 70 ฑ 5 ms, according to 3GPP
23.014 [11] .
The value used is modulo
256.
21.13.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
DTMF
Signals +VTD
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 65
21.13.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+VTD=6
Note:
Define 600 ms tone duration
OK
AT+VTD?
Note:
Get current tone duration
+VTD: 6
OK
AT+VTD=? +VTD: (0-255)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
DTMF
Signals +VTS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 66
21.14.
DTMF Signals +VTS
21.14.1.
Description
The product enables
the application to send DTMF tones over the GSM network. This command
enables tones to be
transmitted, only when there is an active call.
21.14.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+VTS=<Tone>
OK
Read command
None
Test command
AT+VTS=?
+VTS: (list of supported
<Tone>s)
OK
21.14.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<Tone>:
DTMF tone to transmit
values are in
{0-9,*,#,A,B,C,D}
21.14.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
DTMF
Signals +VTS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 67
21.14.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+VTS=? +VTS:
(0-9,*,#,A,B,C,D)
OK
AT+VTS="A"
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Play
tone +WTONE
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 68
21.15.
Play tone +WTONE
21.15.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command allows a tone to be played on the current speaker or on the
buzzer.
21.15.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WTONE=<mode>[,<dest>,<freq>[,[<gain>][,[<duration>][,<freq2>[,<gain2>]]]]]
OK
Read command
None
Test command
AT+WTONE=?
OK
21.15.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mode>:
tone activation/deactivation
0 stop playing
1 play a tone
<dest>:
destination setting
1 speaker
2 buzzer
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Play
tone +WTONE
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 69
<freq>:
tone frequency (in Hz)
1-3999 If <dest>=1
(speaker)
from 1 to a
maximum value
referred in Product
Technical
Specification
If <dest>=2
(buzzer)
<gain>:
There are two configuration modes:
the gain
is entered in deci dB units,
the gain
is entered in index.
By default gains are
expressed in deci dB value.
All values are possible
between the minimum and maximum values of the table
given in the Notes
section. If a value does not correspond to a table value, the
nearest is kept.
If the configuration mode
has been changed with +WBHV command to the index
mode, the deci dB value
will correspond to the index entered as described in the
table of the Notes
section.
<freq2>:
2nd tone frequency (in Hz)
optional if
<mode>=1
only available with the
speaker
1-3999 speaker
<gain2>:
tone gain for the <freq2>
same values as <gain>
<duration>:
tone duration (in 100 ms units)
0-50 default value if
omitted: 0
When <duration>=0,
the duration is up to 21 minutes, and the tone can be
stopped by AT+WTONE=0
21.15.4.
Parameter Storage
None
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Play
tone +WTONE
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 70
21.15.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WTONE=1,1,300,-1510,50
Note:
Play a tone
OK
Note:
Done
AT+WTONE=0
Note:
Stop playing
OK
Note:
Done
AT+WTONE=1,1,300,-1510,50,600,-1510
Note:
Play a tone with 2 frequencies (allowed only
with the
speaker)
OK
Note:
Done
AT+WBHV=8,1
Note:
Set configuration to indexed mode
OK
AT+WTONE=1,1,300,45,50
Note:
Play a tone
OK
Note:
Done
AT+WTONE=0
Note:
Stop playing
OK
Note:
Done
AT+WTONE=1,1,300,45,50,600,45
Note:
Play a tone with 2 frequencies (allowed only
with the
speaker)
OK
Note:
Done
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Play
tone +WTONE
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 71
21.15.6.
Notes
Below are listed the
values for <gain>. They are in deci dB units and index.
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
Index
Gain in
dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
Index
Gain in
dB
Real
dB
value
0 -8000 -80 64 -1204 -12.04
128 -602 -6.02 192 -250 -2.5
1 -4816 -48.16 65 -1191
-11.91 129 -595 -5.95 193 -245 -2.45
2 -4214 -42.14 66 -1177
-11.77 130 -589 -5.89 194 -241 -2.41
3 -3862 -38.62 67 -1164
-11.64 131 -582 -5.82 195 -236 -2.36
4 -3612 -36.12 68 -1151
-11.51 132 -575 -5.75 196 -232 -2.32
5 -3419 -34.19 69 -1139
-11.39 133 -569 -5.69 197 -228 -2.28
6 -3260 -32.6 70 -1126
-11.26 134 -562 -5.62 198 -223 -2.23
7 -3126 -31.26 71 -1114
-11.14 135 -556 -5.56 199 -219 -2.19
8 -3010 -30.1 72 -1102
-11.02 136 -549 -5.49 200 -214 -2.14
9 -2908 -29.08 73 -1090
-10.9 137 -543 -5.43 201 -210 -2.1
10 -2816 -28.16 74 -1078
-10.78 138 -537 -5.37 202 -206 -2.06
11 -2734 -27.34 75 -1066
-10.66 139 -530 -5.3 203 -201 -2.01
12 -2658 -26.58 76 -1055
-10.55 140 -524 -5.24 204 -197 -1.97
13 -2589 -25.89 77 -1043
-10.43 141 -518 -5.18 205 -193 -1.93
14 -2524 -25.24 78 -1032
-10.32 142 -512 -5.12 206 -189 -1.89
15 -2464 -24.64 79 -1021
-10.21 143 -506 -5.06 207 -185 -1.85
16 -2408 -24.08 80 -1010
-10.1 144 -500 -5 208 -180 -1.8
17 -2356 -23.56 81 -1000
-10 145 -494 -4.94 209 -176 -1.76
18 -2306 -23.06 82 -989
-9.89 146 -488 -4.88 210 -172 -1.72
19 -2259 -22.59 83 -978
-9.78 147 -482 -4.82 211 -168 -1.68
20 -2214 -22.14 84 -968
-9.68 148 -476 -4.76 212 -164 -1.64
21 -2172 -21.72 85 -958
-9.58 149 -470 -4.7 213 -160 -1.6
22 -2132 -21.32 86 -947
-9.47 150 -464 -4.64 214 -156 -1.56
23 -2093 -20.93 87 -937
-9.37 151 -459 -4.59 215 -152 -1.52
24 -2056 -20.56 88 -928
-9.28 152 -453 -4.53 216 -148 -1.48
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Play
tone +WTONE
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 72
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
Index
Gain in
dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
Index
Gain in
dB
Real
dB
value
25 -2021 -20.21 89 -918
-9.18 153 -447 -4.47 217 -144 -1.44
26 -1987 -19.87 90 -908
-9.08 154 -441 -4.41 218 -140 -1.4
27 -1954 -19.54 91 -898
-8.98 155 -436 -4.36 219 -136 -1.36
28 -1922 -19.22 92 -889
-8.89 156 -430 -4.3 220 -132 -1.32
29 -1892 -18.92 93 -880
-8.8 157 -425 -4.25 221 -128 -1.28
30 -1862 -18.62 94 -870
-8.7 158 -419 -4.19 222 -124 -1.24
31 -1834 -18.34 95 -861
-8.61 159 -414 -4.14 223 -120 -1.2
32 -1806 -18.06 96 -852
-8.52 160 -408 -4.08 224 -116 -1.16
33 -1779 -17.79 97 -843
-8.43 161 -403 -4.03 225 -112 -1.12
34 -1754 -17.54 98 -834
-8.34 162 -397 -3.97 226 -108 -1.08
35 -1728 -17.28 99 -825
-8.25 163 -392 -3.92 227 -104 -1.04
36 -1704 -17.04 100 -816
-8.16 164 -387 -3.87 228 -101 -1.01
37 -1680 -16.8 101 -808
-8.08 165 -382 -3.82 229 -97 -0.97
38 -1657 -16.57 102 -799
-7.99 166 -376 -3.76 230 -93 -0.93
39 -1634 -16.34 103 -791
-7.91 167 -371 -3.71 231 -89 -0.89
40 -1612 -16.12 104 -782
-7.82 168 -366 -3.66 232 -86 -0.86
41 -1591 -15.91 105 -774
-7.74 169 -361 -3.61 233 -82 -0.82
42 -1570 -15.7 106 -766
-7.66 170 -356 -3.56 234 -78 -0.78
43 -1550 -15.5 107 -758
-7.58 171 -350 -3.5 235 -74 -0.74
44 -1530 -15.3 108 -750
-7.5 172 -345 -3.45 236 -71 -0.71
45 -1510 -15.1 109 -742
-7.42 173 -340 -3.4 237 -67 -0.67
46 -1491 -14.91 110 -734
-7.34 174 -335 -3.35 238 -63 -0.63
47 -1472 -14.72 111 -726
-7.26 175 -330 -3.3 239 -60 -0.6
48 -1454 -14.54 112 -718
-7.18 176 -325 -3.25 240 -56 -0.56
49 -1436 -14.36 113 -710
-7.1 177 -321 -3.21 241 -52 -0.52
50 -1419 -14.19 114 -703
-7.03 178 -316 -3.16 242 -49 -0.49
51 -1401 -14.01 115 -695
-6.95 179 -311 -3.11 243 -45 -0.45
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Play
tone +WTONE
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 73
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
Index
Gain in
dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
Index
Gain in
dB
Real
dB
value
52 -1384 -13.84 116 -688
-6.88 180 -306 -3.06 244 -42 -0.42
53 -1368 -13.68 117 -680
-6.8 181 -301 -3.01 245 -38 -0.38
54 -1352 -13.52 118 -673
-6.73 182 -296 -2.96 246 -35 -0.35
55 -1336 -13.36 119 -665
-6.65 183 -292 -2.92 247 -31 -0.31
56 -1320 -13.2 120 -658
-6.58 184 -287 -2.87 248 -28 -0.28
57 -1305 -13.05 121 -651
-6.51 185 -282 -2.82 249 -24 -0.24
58 -1290 -12.9 122 -644
-6.44 186 -277 -2.77 250 -21 -0.21
59 -1275 -12.75 123 -637
-6.37 187 -273 -2.73 251 -17 -0.17
60 -1260 -12.6 124 -630
-6.3 188 -268 -2.68 252 -14 -0.14
61 -1246 -12.46 125 -623
-6.23 189 -264 -2.64 253 -10 -0.1
62 -1232 -12.32 126 -616
-6.16 190 -259 -2.59 254 -7 -0.07
63 -1218 -12.18 127 -609
-6.09 191 -254 -2.54 255 0 0
Note:
For a buzzer output, very high and very low gain values are not accepted. It
depends on used
embedded
module. Please refer to Product Technical Specification for more information.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Play
DTMF tone + WDTMF
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 74
21.16.
Play DTMF tone + WDTMF
21.16.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command allows a DTMF tone to be played on the current speaker.
21.16.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WDTMF=<mode>[,<dtmf>[,[<gain>][,<duration>]]]
OK
Read command
None
Test command
AT+WDTMF=?
+WDTMF: (list of supported
<mode>s),(list of supported <dtmf>s),(list of supported
<gain>s),(list of
supported <duration>s)
OK
21.16.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mode>:
tone activation/deactivation
0 stop playing
1 play a DTMF tone
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Play
DTMF tone + WDTMF
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 75
<dtmf>:
DTMF to be played (mandatory if <mode>=1)
range: {0-9,*,#,A,B,C,D}
<gain>:
There are two configuration modes:
the gain
is entered in deci dB units,
the gain
is entered in index.
By default gains are
expressed in deci dB value.
All values are possible
between the minimum and maximum values of the table
given in the Notes
section. If a value does not correspond to a table value, the
nearest is kept.
If the configuration mode
has been changed with +WBHV command to the index
mode, the deci dB value
will correspond to the index entered as described in the
table of the Notes
section.
<duration>:
tone duration (in 100 ms units)
0-50 default value if
omitted: 0
When <duration>=0,
the duration is infinite, and the DTMF tone can be stopped
by AT+WDTMF=0
21.16.4.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WDTMF=?
Note:
Possible values.
+WDTMF:
(0-1),(0-9,*,#,A,B,C,D),(-8000-0),(0-
50)
OK
AT+WDTMF=1,"*",-1510,50
Note:
Play a DTMF tone
OK
AT+WDTMF=0
Note:
Stop playing
OK
AT+WBHV=8,1
Note:
Set configuration to indexed mode
OK
AT+WDTMF=?
Note:
Possible values.
+WDTMF:
(0-1),(0-9,*,#,A,B,C,D),(0-255),(0-
50)
OK
AT+WDTMF=1,"*",9,50
Note:
Play a DTMF tone
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Play
DTMF tone + WDTMF
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 76
21.16.5.
Notes
Below are listed the
values for <gain>. They are in deci dB units and index.
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
Index
Gain in
dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
Index
Gain in
dB
Real
dB
value
0 -8000 -80 64 -1204
-12.04 128 -602 -6.02 192 -250 -2.5
1 -4816 -48.16 65 -1191
-11.91 129 -595 -5.95 193 -245 -2.45
2 -4214 -42.14 66 -1177
-11.77 130 -589 -5.89 194 -241 -2.41
3 -3862 -38.62 67 -1164
-11.64 131 -582 -5.82 195 -236 -2.36
4 -3612 -36.12 68 -1151
-11.51 132 -575 -5.75 196 -232 -2.32
5 -3419 -34.19 69 -1139
-11.39 133 -569 -5.69 197 -228 -2.28
6 -3260 -32.6 70 -1126
-11.26 134 -562 -5.62 198 -223 -2.23
7 -3126 -31.26 71 -1114
-11.14 135 -556 -5.56 199 -219 -2.19
8 -3010 -30.1 72 -1102
-11.02 136 -549 -5.49 200 -214 -2.14
9 -2908 -29.08 73 -1090
-10.9 137 -543 -5.43 201 -210 -2.1
10 -2816 -28.16 74 -1078
-10.78 138 -537 -5.37 202 -206 -2.06
11 -2734 -27.34 75 -1066
-10.66 139 -530 -5.3 203 -201 -2.01
12 -2658 -26.58 76 -1055
-10.55 140 -524 -5.24 204 -197 -1.97
13 -2589 -25.89 77 -1043
-10.43 141 -518 -5.18 205 -193 -1.93
14 -2524 -25.24 78 -1032
-10.32 142 -512 -5.12 206 -189 -1.89
15 -2464 -24.64 79 -1021
-10.21 143 -506 -5.06 207 -185 -1.85
16 -2408 -24.08 80 -1010
-10.1 144 -500 -5 208 -180 -1.8
17 -2356 -23.56 81 -1000
-10 145 -494 -4.94 209 -176 -1.76
18 -2306 -23.06 82 -989
-9.89 146 -488 -4.88 210 -172 -1.72
19 -2259 -22.59 83 -978
-9.78 147 -482 -4.82 211 -168 -1.68
20 -2214 -22.14 84 -968
-9.68 148 -476 -4.76 212 -164 -1.64
21 -2172 -21.72 85 -958
-9.58 149 -470 -4.7 213 -160 -1.6
22 -2132 -21.32 86 -947
-9.47 150 -464 -4.64 214 -156 -1.56
23 -2093 -20.93 87 -937
-9.37 151 -459 -4.59 215 -152 -1.52
24 -2056 -20.56 88 -928
-9.28 152 -453 -4.53 216 -148 -1.48
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Play
DTMF tone + WDTMF
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 77
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
Index
Gain in
dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
Index
Gain in
dB
Real
dB
value
25 -2021 -20.21 89 -918
-9.18 153 -447 -4.47 217 -144 -1.44
26 -1987 -19.87 90 -908
-9.08 154 -441 -4.41 218 -140 -1.4
27 -1954 -19.54 91 -898
-8.98 155 -436 -4.36 219 -136 -1.36
28 -1922 -19.22 92 -889
-8.89 156 -430 -4.3 220 -132 -1.32
29 -1892 -18.92 93 -880
-8.8 157 -425 -4.25 221 -128 -1.28
30 -1862 -18.62 94 -870
-8.7 158 -419 -4.19 222 -124 -1.24
31 -1834 -18.34 95 -861
-8.61 159 -414 -4.14 223 -120 -1.2
32 -1806 -18.06 96 -852
-8.52 160 -408 -4.08 224 -116 -1.16
33 -1779 -17.79 97 -843
-8.43 161 -403 -4.03 225 -112 -1.12
34 -1754 -17.54 98 -834
-8.34 162 -397 -3.97 226 -108 -1.08
35 -1728 -17.28 99 -825
-8.25 163 -392 -3.92 227 -104 -1.04
36 -1704 -17.04 100 -816
-8.16 164 -387 -3.87 228 -101 -1.01
37 -1680 -16.8 101 -808
-8.08 165 -382 -3.82 229 -97 -0.97
38 -1657 -16.57 102 -799
-7.99 166 -376 -3.76 230 -93 -0.93
39 -1634 -16.34 103 -791
-7.91 167 -371 -3.71 231 -89 -0.89
40 -1612 -16.12 104 -782
-7.82 168 -366 -3.66 232 -86 -0.86
41 -1591 -15.91 105 -774
-7.74 169 -361 -3.61 233 -82 -0.82
42 -1570 -15.7 106 -766
-7.66 170 -356 -3.56 234 -78 -0.78
43 -1550 -15.5 107 -758
-7.58 171 -350 -3.5 235 -74 -0.74
44 -1530 -15.3 108 -750
-7.5 172 -345 -3.45 236 -71 -0.71
45 -1510 -15.1 109 -742
-7.42 173 -340 -3.4 237 -67 -0.67
46 -1491 -14.91 110 -734 -7.34
174 -335 -3.35 238 -63 -0.63
47 -1472 -14.72 111 -726
-7.26 175 -330 -3.3 239 -60 -0.6
48 -1454 -14.54 112 -718
-7.18 176 -325 -3.25 240 -56 -0.56
49 -1436 -14.36 113 -710
-7.1 177 -321 -3.21 241 -52 -0.52
50 -1419 -14.19 114 -703
-7.03 178 -316 -3.16 242 -49 -0.49
51 -1401 -14.01 115 -695
-6.95 179 -311 -3.11 243 -45 -0.45
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Play
DTMF tone + WDTMF
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 78
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
Index
Gain in
dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
Index
Gain in
dB
Real
dB
value
52 -1384 -13.84 116 -688
-6.88 180 -306 -3.06 244 -42 -0.42
53 -1368 -13.68 117 -680
-6.8 181 -301 -3.01 245 -38 -0.38
54 -1352 -13.52 118 -673
-6.73 182 -296 -2.96 246 -35 -0.35
55 -1336 -13.36 119 -665
-6.65 183 -292 -2.92 247 -31 -0.31
56 -1320 -13.2 120 -658
-6.58 184 -287 -2.87 248 -28 -0.28
57 -1305 -13.05 121 -651
-6.51 185 -282 -2.82 249 -24 -0.24
58 -1290 -12.9 122 -644
-6.44 186 -277 -2.77 250 -21 -0.21
59 -1275 -12.75 123 -637
-6.37 187 -273 -2.73 251 -17 -0.17
60 -1260 -12.6 124 -630
-6.3 188 -268 -2.68 252 -14 -0.14
61 -1246 -12.46 125 -623
-6.23 189 -264 -2.64 253 -10 -0.1
62 -1232 -12.32 126 -616
-6.16 190 -259 -2.59 254 -7 -0.07
63 -1218 -12.18 127 -609
-6.09 191 -254 -2.54 255 0 0
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
DTMF
Detection Mode +WDDM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 79
21.17.
DTMF Detection Mode +WDDM
21.17.1.
Description
This specific
command allows to start/stop the DTMF detection.
21.17.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WDDM=<mode>
OK
Read command
AT+WDDM?
+WDDM: <mode>
OK
Test command
AT+WDDM=?
+WDDM: (list of supported
<mode>s)
OK
Unsolicited response
+WDDI: <char>,<duration>
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
DTMF
Detection Mode +WDDM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 80
21.17.3.
Parameters and defined values
<mode>:
DTMF detection activation
0 stop DTMF detection
(default value)
1 start DTMF detection
<char>:
detected DTMF character
possible detected DTMF
characters: [0-9],[A-D],*, #
<duration>:
duration of the incoming character in milliseconds
range: 20 (depending on
DTMF decoder behavior) to 1200000 approximately (value
limited by the network
capabilities)
21.17.4.
Parameter storage
The <mode>
parameter is stored in EEPROM without using the AT&W command.
The default values
can be restored using AT&F.
21.17.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WDDM=?
Note:
Test command
+WDDM: (0,1)
AT+WDDM=1
Note:
Start DTMF detection
OK
AT+WDDM=1
Note:
Start DTMF detection
+CME ERROR: 558
Note:
DTMF detection already started by another client.
AT+WDDM?
Note:
Read current value
+WDDM: 1
OK
Note:
Detection started
+WDDI: "*",60
Note:
* char was detected during 60ms
AT+WDDM=0
Note:
Stop DTMF detection
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
DTMF
Detection Mode +WDDM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 81
21.17.6.
Notes
The
DTMF decoding will be only available for one applicative layer: ATI or Open ATฎ.
If the
DTMF decoding is
requested by one part and then requested by another part, a specific error
(+CME ERROR: 558 )
will be returned to the second part.
The
different audio filters and processes in Rx path should not be activated while
DTMF
decoding mode is
set.
The following AT
commands are partially deactivated when DTMF decoding is activated:
+WADF command
+ECHO command
The different audio
filters return in its old state when DTMF decoder is deactivated.
When
the detector is enabled (with +WDDM AT command), each time an incoming DTMF is
detected, an
unsolicited response will be returned by the embedded module with DTMF value
and its duration.
If
DTMF comes with duration lower than 20ms, the unsolicited event +WDDI will not
be
returned.
Decoded
DTMF signals will be notified only during a voice call.
The
DTMF decoding is only suspended when the voice call is finished and when the SU
does
not request the DTMF
decoding deactivation.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Set
Standard Tone +WSST
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 82
21.18.
Set Standard Tone +WSST
21.18.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command allows to set/get the level of the standard tones (outgoing
call tone level,
busy tone level and congestion tone level).
21.18.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WSST=<N/A>[,<ring
tone level>]
AT+WSST=[<N/A>],<ring
tone level>
OK
Read command
AT+WSST?
+WSST: <N/A>,<ring tone
level>
OK
Test command
AT+WSST=?
+WSST: (list of supported
<N/A>),(list of supported
<ring tone level>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Set
Standard Tone +WSST
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 83
21.18.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<N/A>:
not applicable
<ring
tone level>: ring tone level
<level>:
There are two configuration modes:
the
gain is entered in deci dB units,
the
gain is entered in index.
By default gains are
expressed in deci dB value.
All values are possible
between the minimum and maximum values of the table
given in the Notes
section. If a value does not correspond to a table value, the
nearest is kept.
If the configuration mode
has been changed with +WBHV command to the
index mode, the deci dB
value will correspond to the index entered as
described in the table of
the Notes section.
21.18.4.
Parameter Storage
The parameters are
stored in EEPROM without using the AT&W command.
21.18.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WSST=?
Note:
Get supported parameters
+WSST: (-8000-0),(-8000-0)
OK
AT+WSST=,-301
Note:
Set ring tone level to -3.01dB
OK
AT+WSST?
Note:
Get current standard tones sound level
+WSST: -4214,-301
OK
AT+WBHV=8,1
Note:
Set configuration to indexed mode
OK
AT+WSST=?
Note:
Get supported parameters
+WSST: (0-255),(0-255)
OK
AT+WSST=,5
Note:
Set ring tone level to 5
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Set
Standard Tone +WSST
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 84
21.18.6.
Notes
Below are listed the
values for <level>. They are in deci dB units and index. Default values
are
grayed in the
following table.
Gain
in
index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain
in
index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain
in
index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain
in
index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
0 -8000 -80 64 -1204
-12.04 128 -602 -6.02 192 -250 -2.5
1 -4816 -48.16 65 -1191
-11.91 129 -595 -5.95 193 -245 -2.45
2 -4214 -42.14 66 -1177
-11.77 130 -589 -5.89 194 -241 -2.41
3 -3862 -38.62 67 -1164
-11.64 131 -582 -5.82 195 -236 -2.36
4 -3612 -36.12 68 -1151
-11.51 132 -575 -5.75 196 -232 -2.32
5 -3419 -34.19 69 -1139
-11.39 133 -569 -5.69 197 -228 -2.28
6 -3260 -32.6 70 -1126
-11.26 134 -562 -5.62 198 -223 -2.23
7 -3126 -31.26 71 -1114
-11.14 135 -556 -5.56 199 -219 -2.19
8 -3010 -30.1 72 -1102
-11.02 136 -549 -5.49 200 -214 -2.14
9 -2908 -29.08 73 -1090
-10.9 137 -543 -5.43 201 -210 -2.1
10 -2816 -28.16 74 -1078
-10.78 138 -537 -5.37 202 -206 -2.06
11 -2734 -27.34 75 -1066
-10.66 139 -530 -5.3 203 -201 -2.01
12 -2658 -26.58 76 -1055
-10.55 140 -524 -5.24 204 -197 -1.97
13 -2589 -25.89 77 -1043
-10.43 141 -518 -5.18 205 -193 -1.93
14 -2524 -25.24 78 -1032
-10.32 142 -512 -5.12 206 -189 -1.89
15 -2464 -24.64 79 -1021
-10.21 143 -506 -5.06 207 -185 -1.85
16 -2408 -24.08 80 -1010
-10.1 144 -500 -5 208 -180 -1.8
17 -2356 -23.56 81 -1000
-10 145 -494 -4.94 209 -176 -1.76
18 -2306 -23.06 82 -989
-9.89 146 -488 -4.88 210 -172 -1.72
19 -2259 -22.59 83 -978
-9.78 147 -482 -4.82 211 -168 -1.68
20 -2214 -22.14 84 -968
-9.68 148 -476 -4.76 212 -164 -1.64
21 -2172 -21.72 85 -958
-9.58 149 -470 -4.7 213 -160 -1.6
22 -2132 -21.32 86 -947
-9.47 150 -464 -4.64 214 -156 -1.56
23 -2093 -20.93 87 -937
-9.37 151 -459 -4.59 215 -152 -1.52
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Set
Standard Tone +WSST
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 85
Gain
in
index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain
in
index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain
in
index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain
in
index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
24 -2056 -20.56 88 -928
-9.28 152 -453 -4.53 216 -148 -1.48
25 -2021 -20.21 89 -918
-9.18 153 -447 -4.47 217 -144 -1.44
26 -1987 -19.87 90 -908
-9.08 154 -441 -4.41 218 -140 -1.4
27 -1954 -19.54 91 -898
-8.98 155 -436 -4.36 219 -136 -1.36
28 -1922 -19.22 92 -889
-8.89 156 -430 -4.3 220 -132 -1.32
29 -1892 -18.92 93 -880
-8.8 157 -425 -4.25 221 -128 -1.28
30 -1862 -18.62 94 -870
-8.7 158 -419 -4.19 222 -124 -1.24
31 -1834 -18.34 95 -861
-8.61 159 -414 -4.14 223 -120 -1.2
32 -1806 -18.06 96 -852
-8.52 160 -408 -4.08 224 -116 -1.16
33 -1779 -17.79 97 -843
-8.43 161 -403 -4.03 225 -112 -1.12
34 -1754 -17.54 98 -834
-8.34 162 -397 -3.97 226 -108 -1.08
35 -1728 -17.28 99 -825
-8.25 163 -392 -3.92 227 -104 -1.04
36 -1704 -17.04 100 -816
-8.16 164 -387 -3.87 228 -101 -1.01
37 -1680 -16.8 101 -808
-8.08 165 -382 -3.82 229 -97 -0.97
38 -1657 -16.57 102 -799
-7.99 166 -376 -3.76 230 -93 -0.93
39 -1634 -16.34 103 -791
-7.91 167 -371 -3.71 231 -89 -0.89
40 -1612 -16.12 104 -782
-7.82 168 -366 -3.66 232 -86 -0.86
41 -1591 -15.91 105 -774
-7.74 169 -361 -3.61 233 -82 -0.82
42 -1570 -15.7 106 -766
-7.66 170 -356 -3.56 234 -78 -0.78
43 -1550 -15.5 107 -758
-7.58 171 -350 -3.5 235 -74 -0.74
44 -1530 -15.3 108 -750
-7.5 172 -345 -3.45 236 -71 -0.71
45 -1510 -15.1 109 -742
-7.42 173 -340 -3.4 237 -67 -0.67
46 -1491 -14.91 110 -734
-7.34 174 -335 -3.35 238 -63 -0.63
47 -1472 -14.72 111 -726
-7.26 175 -330 -3.3 239 -60 -0.6
48 -1454 -14.54 112 -718
-7.18 176 -325 -3.25 240 -56 -0.56
49 -1436 -14.36 113 -710
-7.1 177 -321 -3.21 241 -52 -0.52
50 -1419 -14.19 114 -703
-7.03 178 -316 -3.16 242 -49 -0.49
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Set
Standard Tone +WSST
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 86
Gain
in
index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain
in
index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain
in
index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain
in
index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
51 -1401 -14.01 115 -695
-6.95 179 -311 -3.11 243 -45 -0.45
52 -1384 -13.84 116 -688
-6.88 180 -306 -3.06 244 -42 -0.42
53 -1368 -13.68 117 -680
-6.8 181 -301 -3.01 245 -38 -0.38
54 -1352 -13.52 118 -673
-6.73 182 -296 -2.96 246 -35 -0.35
55 -1336 -13.36 119 -665
-6.65 183 -292 -2.92 247 -31 -0.31
56 -1320 -13.2 120 -658
-6.58 184 -287 -2.87 248 -28 -0.28
57 -1305 -13.05 121 -651
-6.51 185 -282 -2.82 249 -24 -0.24
58 -1290 -12.9 122 -644
-6.44 186 -277 -2.77 250 -21 -0.21
59 -1275 -12.75 123 -637
-6.37 187 -273 -2.73 251 -17 -0.17
60 -1260 -12.6 124 -630
-6.3 188 -268 -2.68 252 -14 -0.14
61 -1246 -12.46 125 -623
-6.23 189 -264 -2.64 253 -10 -0.1
62 -1232 -12.32 126 -616
-6.16 190 -259 -2.59 254 -7 -0.07
63 -1218 -12.18 127 -609
-6.09 191 -254 -2.54 255 0 0
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Ring
Melody Playback +CRMP
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 87
21.19.
Ring Melody Playback +CRMP
21.19.1.
Description
This command allows
a melody to be played. All melodies are manufacturer defined.
For incoming voice,
data or fax calls, 10 manufacturer-defined melodies can be played back (in a
loop).
For an incoming
short message, 2 manufacturer-defined sounds can be played back (once).
Melody #1: short
beep / Melody #2: long beep.
21.19.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+CRMP=<call
type>[,[<volume>][,[<type>][,<index>]]]
OK
Read command
AT+CRMP?
OK
Test command
AT+CRMP=?
+CRMP: (list of supported
<call type>s),(list of supported <volume>s),(list of
supported <type>s),(list
of supported <index>s)
OK
21.19.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<call
type>: call type
0 incoming voice call
1 incoming data call
2 incoming fax call
3 incoming short message
(SMS)
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Ring
Melody Playback +CRMP
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 88
<volume>:
There are two
configuration modes:
- the gain is entered in
deci dB units,
- the gain is entered in
index.
By default gains are
expressed in deci dB value.
All values are possible
between the minimum and maximum values of the table
given in the Notes
section. If a value does not correspond to a table value, the
nearest is kept.
If the configuration mode
has been changed with +WBHV command to the index
mode, the deci dB value
will correspond to the index entered as described in the
table of the Notes
section.
<type>:
melody type
0 manufacturer defined
(default value if omitted)
<index>:
melody index
0 stop melody playback
1-10 melody ID (default
value if omitted: 1)
Range of values:1 to 10
for voice/data/fax call type, and 1 to 2 for short
messages.
21.19.4.
Parameter Storage
None
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Ring
Melody Playback +CRMP
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 89
21.19.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CRMP=0,-1510,0,2
Note:
Play voice call melody index 2 with volume level -15dB.
OK
Note:
Melody playback
AT+CRMP=0,,,0
Note:
Stop the melody.
OK
Note:
The melody is stopped.
AT+CRMP=?
Note:
Supported parameters
+CRMP: (0-3),(-8000-0),0,(0-10)
OK
AT+WBHV=8,1
Note:
Set configuration to indexed mode
OK
AT+CRMP=0,7,0,2
Note:
Play voice call melody index 2 with volume level 7.
OK
AT+CRMP=?
Note:
Supported parameters
+CRMP: (0-3),(0-255),0,(0-10)
OK
21.19.6.
Notes
Loop melodies (for
voice/data/fax call) must be stopped by a +CRMP command with the <index>
field
set to 0 (example:
AT+CRMP=0,,,0).
When the
<volume> parameter is given, this overwrites the <sound level>
value of the +CRSL
command. If the
<volume> parameter is not given, the <sound level> value of +CRSL
is used as
default value.
+CRMP command does
not associate a specific melody to a specific incoming call type i.e. selected
melody will be
played in local. Separate melodies cannot be associated with data call, voice
call or fax
using +CRMP command
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Ring
Melody Playback +CRMP
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 90
Below are listed the
values for <volume>. They are in deci dB units and index.
Gain
in
index
Gain
in
dB
Real
dB
value
Gain
in
index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
0 -8000 -80 64
-1204 -12.04 128 -602 -6.02 192 -250 -2.5
1 -4816 -48.16
65 -1191 -11.91 129 -595 -5.95 193 -245 -2.45
2 -4214 -42.14
66 -1177 -11.77 130 -589 -5.89 194 -241 -2.41
3 -3862 -38.62
67 -1164 -11.64 131 -582 -5.82 195 -236 -2.36
4 -3612 -36.12
68 -1151 -11.51 132 -575 -5.75 196 -232 -2.32
5 -3419 -34.19
69 -1139 -11.39 133 -569 -5.69 197 -228 -2.28
6 -3260 -32.6 70
-1126 -11.26 134 -562 -5.62 198 -223 -2.23
7 -3126 -31.26
71 -1114 -11.14 135 -556 -5.56 199 -219 -2.19
8 -3010 -30.1 72
-1102 -11.02 136 -549 -5.49 200 -214 -2.14
9 -2908 -29.08
73 -1090 -10.9 137 -543 -5.43 201 -210 -2.1
10 -2816 -28.16
74 -1078 -10.78 138 -537 -5.37 202 -206 -2.06
11 -2734 -27.34
75 -1066 -10.66 139 -530 -5.3 203 -201 -2.01
12 -2658 -26.58
76 -1055 -10.55 140 -524 -5.24 204 -197 -1.97
13 -2589 -25.89
77 -1043 -10.43 141 -518 -5.18 205 -193 -1.93
14 -2524 -25.24
78 -1032 -10.32 142 -512 -5.12 206 -189 -1.89
15 -2464 -24.64
79 -1021 -10.21 143 -506 -5.06 207 -185 -1.85
16 -2408 -24.08
80 -1010 -10.1 144 -500 -5 208 -180 -1.8
17 -2356 -23.56
81 -1000 -10 145 -494 -4.94 209 -176 -1.76
18 -2306 -23.06
82 -989 -9.89 146 -488 -4.88 210 -172 -1.72
19 -2259 -22.59
83 -978 -9.78 147 -482 -4.82 211 -168 -1.68
20 -2214 -22.14
84 -968 -9.68 148 -476 -4.76 212 -164 -1.64
21 -2172 -21.72
85 -958 -9.58 149 -470 -4.7 213 -160 -1.6
22 -2132 -21.32
86 -947 -9.47 150 -464 -4.64 214 -156 -1.56
23 -2093 -20.93
87 -937 -9.37 151 -459 -4.59 215 -152 -1.52
24 -2056 -20.56
88 -928 -9.28 152 -453 -4.53 216 -148 -1.48
25 -2021 -20.21
89 -918 -9.18 153 -447 -4.47 217 -144 -1.44
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Ring
Melody Playback +CRMP
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 91
Gain
in
index
Gain
in
dB
Real
dB
value
Gain
in
index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
26 -1987 -19.87
90 -908 -9.08 154 -441 -4.41 218 -140 -1.4
27 -1954 -19.54
91 -898 -8.98 155 -436 -4.36 219 -136 -1.36
28 -1922 -19.22
92 -889 -8.89 156 -430 -4.3 220 -132 -1.32
29 -1892 -18.92
93 -880 -8.8 157 -425 -4.25 221 -128 -1.28
30 -1862 -18.62
94 -870 -8.7 158 -419 -4.19 222 -124 -1.24
31 -1834 -18.34
95 -861 -8.61 159 -414 -4.14 223 -120 -1.2
32 -1806 -18.06
96 -852 -8.52 160 -408 -4.08 224 -116 -1.16
33 -1779 -17.79
97 -843 -8.43 161 -403 -4.03 225 -112 -1.12
34 -1754 -17.54
98 -834 -8.34 162 -397 -3.97 226 -108 -1.08
35 -1728 -17.28
99 -825 -8.25 163 -392 -3.92 227 -104 -1.04
36 -1704 -17.04
100 -816 -8.16 164 -387 -3.87 228 -101 -1.01
37 -1680 -16.8
101 -808 -8.08 165 -382 -3.82 229 -97 -0.97
38 -1657 -16.57
102 -799 -7.99 166 -376 -3.76 230 -93 -0.93
39 -1634 -16.34
103 -791 -7.91 167 -371 -3.71 231 -89 -0.89
40 -1612 -16.12
104 -782 -7.82 168 -366 -3.66 232 -86 -0.86
41 -1591 -15.91
105 -774 -7.74 169 -361 -3.61 233 -82 -0.82
42 -1570 -15.7
106 -766 -7.66 170 -356 -3.56 234 -78 -0.78
43 -1550 -15.5
107 -758 -7.58 171 -350 -3.5 235 -74 -0.74
44 -1530 -15.3
108 -750 -7.5 172 -345 -3.45 236 -71 -0.71
45 -1510 -15.1
109 -742 -7.42 173 -340 -3.4 237 -67 -0.67
46 -1491 -14.91
110 -734 -7.34 174 -335 -3.35 238 -63 -0.63
47 -1472 -14.72
111 -726 -7.26 175 -330 -3.3 239 -60 -0.6
48 -1454 -14.54
112 -718 -7.18 176 -325 -3.25 240 -56 -0.56
49 -1436 -14.36
113 -710 -7.1 177 -321 -3.21 241 -52 -0.52
50 -1419 -14.19
114 -703 -7.03 178 -316 -3.16 242 -49 -0.49
51 -1401 -14.01
115 -695 -6.95 179 -311 -3.11 243 -45 -0.45
52 -1384 -13.84
116 -688 -6.88 180 -306 -3.06 244 -42 -0.42
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Ring
Melody Playback +CRMP
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 92
Gain
in
index
Gain
in
dB
Real
dB
value
Gain
in
index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
53 -1368 -13.68
117 -680 -6.8 181 -301 -3.01 245 -38 -0.38
54 -1352 -13.52
118 -673 -6.73 182 -296 -2.96 246 -35 -0.35
55 -1336 -13.36
119 -665 -6.65 183 -292 -2.92 247 -31 -0.31
56 -1320 -13.2
120 -658 -6.58 184 -287 -2.87 248 -28 -0.28
57 -1305 -13.05 121
-651 -6.51 185 -282 -2.82 249 -24 -0.24
58 -1290 -12.9
122 -644 -6.44 186 -277 -2.77 250 -21 -0.21
59 -1275 -12.75
123 -637 -6.37 187 -273 -2.73 251 -17 -0.17
60 -1260 -12.6
124 -630 -6.3 188 -268 -2.68 252 -14 -0.14
61 -1246 -12.46
125 -623 -6.23 189 -264 -2.64 253 -10 -0.1
62 -1232 -12.32
126 -616 -6.16 190 -259 -2.59 254 -7 -0.07
63 -1218 -12.18
127 -609 -6.09 191 -254 -2.54 255 0 0
Note:
For buzzer output, very high and very low gain values are not accepted. Hence,
the nearest value is
kept,
which depends on the used embedded module. Please refer to Product Technical
Specification,
for more
information.
Example:
If buzzer minimum gain is -46.03 dB and -48.06 dB gain is selected (gain 1 in
index mode),
then
-46.03 dB is played.
.
AT Commands Interface Guide
for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Sierra
Wireless Change Default Melody +WCDM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 93
21.20.
Sierra Wireless Change Default Melody
+WCDM
21.20.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command allows the selection of a manufacturer specific melody.
This default melody
will be played for any new incoming voice call, either on the buzzer or on the
speaker.
21.20.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WCDM=<melody>[,<player>]
AT+WCDM=[<melody>],<player>
OK
Read command
AT+WCDM?
+WCDM:
<melody>,<player>
OK
Test command
AT+WCDM=?
+WCDM: (list of supported
<melody>s),(list of supported <player>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Sierra
Wireless Change Default Melody +WCDM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 94
21.20.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<melody>:
melody number
0 no
melody (default value)
1-10 melody 1
to 10
<player>:
output used to play the melody
0 The
melody will be played on the buzzer for any new incoming voice call. (default
value)
1 The
melody will be played on the speaker for any new incoming voice call.
21.20.4.
Parameter Storage
The parameters are
stored in EEPROM without using AT&W.command. The default values can be
restored using
AT&F.
21.20.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WCDM=? +WCDM:
(0-10),(0-1)
OK
AT+WCDM=5
Note:
Select melody #5
OK
AT+WCDM?
Note:
Indicate the current melody
+WCDM: 5,0
OK
Note:
Melody #5 is currently selected, and the buzzer is selected to
play it.
An incoming call occurs, and the melody #5 is played on the
buzzer.
AT+WCDM=,1
Note:
Select the speaker to play the melody on
OK
AT+WCDM? +WCDM: 5,1
OK
Note:
The speaker is selected to play the melody if an incoming call
occurs.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio Commands
Sierra
Wireless Change Default Player +WCDP
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 95
21.21.
Sierra Wireless Change Default Player +WCDP
21.21.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command allows the default melody player to be selected.
21.21.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WCDP=<player>
OK
Read command
AT+WCDP?
+WCDP: <player>
OK
Test command
AT+WCDP=?
+WCDP: (list of supported
<player>s)
OK
21.21.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<player>:
output selected to play the melody
0 buzzer (default value)
1 speaker
21.21.4.
Parameter Storage
The <player>
parameter is stored in EEPROM without using the AT&W.command The default
value
can be restored
using AT&F.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Sierra
Wireless Change Default Player +WCDP
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 96
21.21.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WCDP=? +WCDP: (0-1)
OK
AT+WCDP=0
Note:
Selects the buzzer
OK
AT+WCDP? +WCDP: 0
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Initialize
Voice Parameters +VIP
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 97
21.22.
Initialize Voice Parameters +VIP
21.22.1.
Description
This command allows
factory settings for voice parameters to be restored from EEPROM.
These voice
parameters include:
gain
control (+VGR & +VGT commands),
speaker
& microphone selection (+SPEAKER command),
echo
cancellation (+ECHO command),
side
tone modification (+SIDET command),
digital
gain (+WDGT, +WDGR commands),
audio
filter (+WADF command),
loud
speaker volume level (+CLVL command).
21.22.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+VIP=<n>
OK
Read command
AT+VIP?
+VIP: <n>
OK
Test command
AT+VIP=?
+VIP: (list of supported
<n>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Initialize
Voice Parameters +VIP
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 98
21.22.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<n>:
initialization setting
1 restore all voice
parameters
21.22.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
21.22.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+VIP=? +VIP: (1)
OK
AT+VIP=1
Note:
Restore the factory settings from EEPROM
OK
AT+VIP? +VIP: 1
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Auto-tests
&T
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 99
21.23.
Auto-tests &T
21.23.1.
Description
This command allows
to trigger various auto-tests.
21.23.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT&T[<n>]
OK
Read command
None
Test command
None
21.23.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<n>:
auto-test activation parameter
0 perform software
auto-tests
1 execute the audio loop
test (close)
2 stop the audio loop
test (open)
21.23.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Auto-tests
&T
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 100
21.23.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT&T0
Note:
Perform software auto-tests
OK
Note: No
software problem detected, all checksums are correct
21.23.6.
Notes
AT&T command has
to be used when the MS is registered in order to process the AUDIO test loop
correctly.
Caution:
: The audio loop activation (enabled with AT&T1 command,
disabled with AT&T2 command) involves
some
restrictions on the use of other AT commands.
- Audio
loop mode must not be enabled when a communication is active.
- Audio
loop mode must not be enabled when a tone is under generation
- Audio
loop must be disabled (if active) Before opening a communication
- Tone
generation and sidetone modification must not be possible when the audio loop
is active.
AT&T0 just
returns OK (no action)
AT&T1 activates
the audio loop:
On
Q24 Series, the audio loop consists in an analog near-end loop (the microphone
analog
audio signal is
looped back to the speaker) and a digital far-end loop (the downlink digital
audio data is looped
back to the uplink stream).
On
Q268x and WMP Series, the loop audio consists in a digital near-end loop (the
microphone digital
audio samples are looped back to the speaker).
AT&T2
de-activates the audio loop.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Audio
Diagnostic Start +WADS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 101
21.24.
Audio Diagnostic Start +WADS
21.24.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary launches the Audio Diagnostic to make a diagnostic of audio path
using a specific
DTMF with duration and gain. DTMF is played by the speaker and is analyzed by
the
microphone and
returned by the embedded module.
21.24.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WADS=<DtmfCharacter>[,[<DtmfDuration>][,<Gain>]]
+WADS:
<DecodedDtmf>,<DecodedDuration>
OK
Read command
None
Test command
AT+WADS=?
+WADS: (list of supported
<DtmfCharacter>s),(list of supported
<DtmfDuration>s),(list of
supported <Gain>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Audio
Diagnostic Start +WADS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 102
21.24.3.
Parameters and defined values
<DtmfCharacter>:
DTMF used for the diagnostic
string type
possible values:
0-9,A,B,C,D,*,#
<DtmfDuration>:
duration of DTMF (in ms).
It is equal to 100ms if
omitted.
5-250 in ms,
in 20 ms unit.
<Gain>:
DTMF gain
It is equal to default
value if omitted (-15.1 dB, corresponding to index 45).
There are two
configuration modes:
the gain
is entered in deci dB units,
the gain
is entered in index.
By default gains are
expressed in deci dB value.
All values are possible
between the minimum and maximum values of the table
given in the Notes
section. If a value does not correspond to a table value, the
nearest is kept.
If the configuration mode
has been changed with +WBHV command to the
index mode, the deci dB
value will correspond to the index entered as
described in the table of
the Notes section.
<DecodedDtmf>:
DTMF decoded.
possible values:
0-9,A,B,C,D,*,#
<DecodedDuration
>: DTMF decoded.
5-500 in ms,
in 20ms unit
21.24.4.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WADS=? +WADS:
(0-9,*,#,A,B,C,D),(5-250),(-8000-0)
OK
AT+WADS=1,100,-1510
+WADS:
"1",100
OK
AT+WBHV=8,1 OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Audio
Diagnostic Start +WADS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 103
21.24.5.
Notes
This command is
available when the embedded module is in idle mode (no active voice call).
The played tone
detection on microphone is not guaranteed if gain is either too small or too
high.
When this feature is
used, we recommend to disable the echo cancellation, using the AT+ECHO
command, in order
not to disrupt tones detection, which could be handled as an echo by the AEC.
Below are listed the
values for <Gain>. They are in deci dB units and index.
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
Index
Gain in
dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
Index
Gain in
dB
Real
dB
value
0 -8000 -80 64 -1204
-12.04 128 -602 -6.02 192 -250 -2.5
1 -4816 -48.16 65 -1191
-11.91 129 -595 -5.95 193 -245 -2.45
2 -4214 -42.14 66 -1177
-11.77 130 -589 -5.89 194 -241 -2.41
3 -3862 -38.62 67 -1164
-11.64 131 -582 -5.82 195 -236 -2.36
4 -3612 -36.12 68 -1151
-11.51 132 -575 -5.75 196 -232 -2.32
5 -3419 -34.19 69 -1139
-11.39 133 -569 -5.69 197 -228 -2.28
6 -3260 -32.6 70 -1126
-11.26 134 -562 -5.62 198 -223 -2.23
7 -3126 -31.26 71 -1114
-11.14 135 -556 -5.56 199 -219 -2.19
8 -3010 -30.1 72 -1102
-11.02 136 -549 -5.49 200 -214 -2.14
9 -2908 -29.08 73 -1090
-10.9 137 -543 -5.43 201 -210 -2.1
10 -2816 -28.16 74 -1078
-10.78 138 -537 -5.37 202 -206 -2.06
11 -2734 -27.34 75 -1066
-10.66 139 -530 -5.3 203 -201 -2.01
12 -2658 -26.58 76 -1055
-10.55 140 -524 -5.24 204 -197 -1.97
13 -2589 -25.89 77 -1043
-10.43 141 -518 -5.18 205 -193 -1.93
14 -2524 -25.24 78 -1032
-10.32 142 -512 -5.12 206 -189 -1.89
15 -2464 -24.64 79 -1021
-10.21 143 -506 -5.06 207 -185 -1.85
16 -2408 -24.08 80 -1010
-10.1 144 -500 -5 208 -180 -1.8
17 -2356 -23.56 81 -1000
-10 145 -494 -4.94 209 -176 -1.76
18 -2306 -23.06 82 -989 -9.89 146 -488
-4.88 210 -172 -1.72
19 -2259 -22.59 83 -978 -9.78 147 -482
-4.82 211 -168 -1.68
20 -2214 -22.14 84 -968 -9.68 148 -476
-4.76 212 -164 -1.64
21 -2172 -21.72 85 -958 -9.58 149 -470
-4.7 213 -160 -1.6
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Audio
Diagnostic Start +WADS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 104
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
Index
Gain in
dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
Index
Gain in
dB
Real
dB
value
22 -2132 -21.32 86 -947 -9.47 150 -464
-4.64 214 -156 -1.56
23 -2093 -20.93 87 -937 -9.37 151 -459
-4.59 215 -152 -1.52
24 -2056 -20.56 88 -928 -9.28 152 -453
-4.53 216 -148 -1.48
25 -2021 -20.21 89 -918 -9.18 153 -447
-4.47 217 -144 -1.44
26 -1987 -19.87 90 -908 -9.08 154 -441
-4.41 218 -140 -1.4
27 -1954 -19.54 91 -898 -8.98 155 -436
-4.36 219 -136 -1.36
28 -1922 -19.22 92 -889 -8.89 156 -430
-4.3 220 -132 -1.32
29 -1892 -18.92 93 -880 -8.8 157 -425
-4.25 221 -128 -1.28
30 -1862 -18.62 94 -870 -8.7 158 -419
-4.19 222 -124 -1.24
31 -1834 -18.34 95 -861 -8.61 159 -414
-4.14 223 -120 -1.2
32 -1806 -18.06 96 -852 -8.52 160 -408
-4.08 224 -116 -1.16
33 -1779 -17.79 97 -843 -8.43 161 -403
-4.03 225 -112 -1.12
34 -1754 -17.54 98 -834 -8.34 162 -397
-3.97 226 -108 -1.08
35 -1728 -17.28 99 -825 -8.25 163 -392
-3.92 227 -104 -1.04
36 -1704 -17.04 100 -816
-8.16 164 -387 -3.87 228 -101 -1.01
37 -1680 -16.8 101 -808
-8.08 165 -382 -3.82 229 -97 -0.97
38 -1657 -16.57 102 -799
-7.99 166 -376 -3.76 230 -93 -0.93
39 -1634 -16.34 103 -791
-7.91 167 -371 -3.71 231 -89 -0.89
40 -1612 -16.12 104 -782
-7.82 168 -366 -3.66 232 -86 -0.86
41 -1591 -15.91 105 -774
-7.74 169 -361 -3.61 233 -82 -0.82
42 -1570 -15.7 106 -766
-7.66 170 -356 -3.56 234 -78 -0.78
43 -1550 -15.5 107 -758
-7.58 171 -350 -3.5 235 -74 -0.74
44 -1530 -15.3 108 -750
-7.5 172 -345 -3.45 236 -71 -0.71
45 -1510 -15.1 109 -742
-7.42 173 -340 -3.4 237 -67 -0.67
46 -1491 -14.91 110 -734
-7.34 174 -335 -3.35 238 -63 -0.63
47 -1472 -14.72 111 -726
-7.26 175 -330 -3.3 239 -60 -0.6
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Audio
Commands
Audio
Diagnostic Start +WADS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 105
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain
in
Index
Gain
in dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
Index
Gain in
dB
Real
dB
value
Gain in
Index
Gain in
dB
Real
dB
value
48 -1454 -14.54 112 -718
-7.18 176 -325 -3.25 240 -56 -0.56
49 -1436 -14.36 113 -710
-7.1 177 -321 -3.21 241 -52 -0.52
50 -1419 -14.19 114 -703
-7.03 178 -316 -3.16 242 -49 -0.49
51 -1401 -14.01 115 -695
-6.95 179 -311 -3.11 243 -45 -0.45
52 -1384 -13.84 116 -688
-6.88 180 -306 -3.06 244 -42 -0.42
53 -1368 -13.68 117 -680
-6.8 181 -301 -3.01 245 -38 -0.38
54 -1352 -13.52 118 -673
-6.73 182 -296 -2.96 246 -35 -0.35
55 -1336 -13.36 119 -665
-6.65 183 -292 -2.92 247 -31 -0.31
56 -1320 -13.2 120 -658
-6.58 184 -287 -2.87 248 -28 -0.28
57 -1305 -13.05 121 -651
-6.51 185 -282 -2.82 249 -24 -0.24
58 -1290 -12.9 122 -644
-6.44 186 -277 -2.77 250 -21 -0.21
59 -1275 -12.75 123 -637
-6.37 187 -273 -2.73 251 -17 -0.17
60 -1260 -12.6 124 -630
-6.3 188 -268 -2.68 252 -14 -0.14
61 -1246 -12.46 125 -623
-6.23 189 -264 -2.64 253 -10 -0.1
62 -1232 -12.32 126 -616
-6.16 190 -259 -2.59 254 -7 -0.07
63 -1218 -12.18 127 -609
-6.09 191 -254 -2.54 255 0 0
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 106
22. I/O
Commands
22.1.
Input/Output Management +WIOM
22.1.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command is used to manage GPIO.
It allocates the
GPIOs and set their configuration (input, output, or tri-state) as well as
their GPIO
value (if set as an
output). These actions can be done only if the GPIO is available (i.e. the pin
is not
already allocated by
another application).
22.1.2.
Syntax
For
<Mode>=0: release the GPIO
Action command
AT+WIOM=<mode>[,<Gpiold>]
OK
For
<Mode>=1: allocate and set the GPIO configuration
Action command
AT+WIOM=<mode>,<Gpiold>,<GpioDir>[,<GpioVal>]
OK
For
<Mode>=2: list the current GPIO status for all GPIO (allocated or not)
Action command
AT+WIOM=<mode>
+WIOM:
<Gpiold>,<GpioStatus>
[+WIOM:
<Gpiold>,<GpioStatus>[
]]
OK
For
<Mode>=3: list the GPIO capabilities for all GPIO (allocated or not)
Action command
AT+WIOM=<mode>
+WIOM:
<Gpiold>,<GpioAccess>
[+WIOM:
<Gpiold>,<GpioAccess>[
]]
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
I/O
Commands
Input/Output
Management +WIOM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 107
For
<Mode>=4 and 5: save / delete the configuration in flash memory
Action command
AT+WIOM=<mode>
OK
Read command
AT+WIOM?
+WIOM:
<Gpiold>,<GpioDir>[,<GpioVal>]
[+WIOM:
<Gpiold>,<GpioDir>[,<GpioVal>][
]]
OK
Test command
None
22.1.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mode>:
working mode
0 release the GPIO
1 allocate and set the
GPIO configuration
2 list the current GPIO
status
3 list the GPIO
capabilities
4 save the configuration
in flash memory
5 delete the saved
configuration in flash memory
<Gpiold>:
GPIO name (as mentioned in the embedded module Product Technical
Specification
and Customer Design
Guideline)
string type
<GpioDir>:
I/O direction or configuration
0 input
1 output
2 tri-state
(only available on GPO, please refer to the embedded module Product
Technical Specification
and Customer Design Guideline)
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
I/O
Commands
Input/Output
Management +WIOM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 108
<GpioVal>:
output / tri-state state
optional for GPIO with
input writable attribute or GPO forbidden for GPI
0 <Gpiold>
is reset/low (initial value if IO with input writable attribute)
1 <Gpiold>
is set/high
<GpioAccess>:
I/O access attribute
bit field
bit 0 output
is readable
bit 1 input is
writable
bit 2 output
and tri-state (only available on GPO, please refer to the embedded module
Product Technical
Specification and Customer Design Guideline)
<GpioStatus>:
GPIO pin usage
0 input
1 output
2 tri-state
3 not
available: already allocated by another application (Open ATฎ for
example)
4 currently
available: the pin is not used by a feature, or the GPIO has been previously
released
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
I/O
Commands
Input/Output
Management +WIOM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 109
22.1.4.
Parameter Storage
The <Gpiold>,
<GpioDir> and <GpioVal> parameters are stored or
deleted in flash memory using the
action command.
22.1.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WIOM=2 +WIOM:
"GPIO1",4
+WIOM: "GPIO2",4
+WIOM: "GPIO3",4
+WIOM: "GPIO4",3
+WIOM: "GPI1",4
+WIOM: "GPO1",4
OK
Note:
GPIO1, GPIO2, GPIO3, GPI1 and GPO1 are available, GPIO4
is used.
AT+WIOM=1,"GPIO1",0
OK
Note:
Allocate the GPIO1 as input
AT+WIOM=1,"GPIO2",1
OK
Note:
Allocate and configure the GPIO2 as output (output initial value:
0)
AT+WIOM=1,"GPI1",0
OK
Note:
Allocate the GPI1
AT+WIOM=1,"GPO1",1,0
OK
Note:
Allocate and configure the GPO1 value to low
AT+WIOM? +WIOM:
"GPIO1",0
+WIOM: "GPIO2",1,0
+WIOM: "GPI1",0
+WIOM: "GPO1",1,0
OK
AT+WIOM=2 +WIOM:
"GPIO1",0
+WIOM: "GPIO2",1
+WIOM: "GPIO3",4
+WIOM: "GPIO4",3
+WIOM: "GPI1",0
+WIOM: "GPO1",1
OK
Note:
GPIO1, GPIO2, GPI1 and GPO1 are allocated by the user,
GPIO3 is
available, GPIO4 is used.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
I/O
Commands
Input/Output
Management +WIOM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 110
Command
Responses
AT+WIOM=0,"GPIO1"
OK
AT+WIOM=2 +WIOM:
"GPIO1",4
+WIOM: "GPIO2",1
+WIOM: "GPIO3",4
+WIOM: "GPIO4",3
+WIOM: "GPI1",0
+WIOM: "GPO1",1
OK
Note:
GPIO2, GPI1 and GPO1 are allocated by the user, GPIO1 and
GPIO3
are available, GPIO4 is used.
AT+WIOM=3 +WIOM:
"GPIO1",3
+WIOM: "GPIO2",3
+WIOM: "GPIO3",0
+WIOM: "GPIO4",0
+WIOM: "GPI1",0
+WIOM: "GPO1",4
OK
AT+WIOM=4 OK
Note:
Save the configuration
22.1.6.
Notes
A GPIO can be used
either as input or output, if it is not used by a hardware feature.
Read command
AT+WIOM? lists the direction and the value for allocated GPIO only.
When a GPIO is used
by a feature, it is not available anymore: It doesn't appear in the
capabilities list
and its status
cannot be retrieved (using AT+WIOM=2). When writable or readable operations are
attempted on these
GPIOs, a '+CME ERROR: 501' error will be returned.
After a pin is set
in GPIO mode (or a GPIO is released), it is not possible to use it anymore in
other
feature than GPIO
mode until the next boot occurs: if user tries to activate a multiplexed
feature, an
error message
"+CME ERROR: 3" is returned. Similarly, to change a pin association
to a feature into
a GPIO pin (please
refer to the embedded module Product Technical Specification and Customer
Design Guideline for
the list of the features), a reset is needed.
If the parameter
<GpioId> is omitted for <mode>=0, all allocated GPIO are deallocated.
In all cases, the
<GpioVal> parameter is saved in a register, which is used when the IO is
configured
as output. This
value can be set at any moment (by +WIOM or +WIOW commands). This mechanism
prevents from the
transition states. The register initial value is zero.
Likewise, when a IO
is configured as output with an output value, the output value is set before
modification of the
direction to avoid transition states.
The multiplexing
pins list and the available GPIO list are given in the embedded module Product
Technical
Specification and Customer Design Guideline.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
I/O
Commands
Read
GPIO value +WIOR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 111
22.2.
Read GPIO value +WIOR
22.2.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command reads the requested GPIO state.
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command is allowed only on the inputs and the outputs with readable
attributes, which
were allocated by the user.
22.2.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WIOR=<Gpiold>
+WIOR: <GpioVal>
OK
Read command
None
Test command
None
22.2.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<Gpiold>:
GPIO name (as mentioned in the embedded module Product Technical
Specification
and Customer Design
Guideline)
string type
<GpioVal>:
GPIO state
0 <Gpiold> is
reset/low
1 <Gpiold> is
set/high
22.2.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
I/O
Commands
Read
GPIO value +WIOR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 112
22.2.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WIOR="GPIO05"
Note:
Reads GPIO05 value
+WIOR: 0
OK
Note:
GPIO05 is reset/low
22.2.6.
Notes
The GPIO allocation
and the GPIO configuration are done by the +WIOM command.
The string
<Gpiold> is to be indicated as mentioned in the embedded module Product
Technical
Specification and
Customer Design Guideline. It depends on the pins capabilities of the embedded
module.
Please refer to the
embedded module Product Technical Specification and Customer Design
Guideline for
information about the existing GPIO.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
I/O
Commands
Write
GPIO value +WIOW
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 113
22.3.
Write GPIO value +WIOW
22.3.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command sets the requested GPIO state.
This command is
allowed only on the outputs and the inputs with writable attribute which were
allocated by the
user.
22.3.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WIOW=<Gpiold>,<GpioVal>
OK
Read command
None
Test command
None
22.3.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<Gpiold>:
GPIO name (as mentioned in the embedded module Product Technical
Specification
and Customer Design
Guideline)
string type
<GpioVal>:
GPIO state
0 <Gpiold> is
reset/low
1 <Gpiold> is
set/high
22.3.4.
Parameter storage
The <state>
parameter is stored in EEPROM without using AT&W.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
I/O
Commands
Write
GPIO value +WIOW
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 114
22.3.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WIOW="GPIO02",0
Note:
Sets GPIO02 to low
OK
Note:
GPIO state is written
22.3.6.
Notes
The GPIO allocation
and the I/O configuration are done by the +WIOM command.
The string
<Gpiold> is to be indicated as mentioned in the embedded module Product
Technical
Specification and
Customer Design Guideline. It depends on the pins capabilities of the embedded
module.
Please refer to the
embedded module Product Technical Specification and Customer Design
Guideline for
information about the existing GPIO.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
I/O Commands
Sierra
Wireless Interrupt Pin Configuration +WIPC
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 115
22.4.
Sierra Wireless Interrupt Pin Configuration
+WIPC
22.4.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command is used to configure interrupt pins on the embedded
module.
Please refer to the
embedded module Product Technical Specification and Customer Design
Guideline for
information on the GPIO multiplexed with external interrupts.
This command can be
used only if the external interrupts are not currently in use by another
application.
22.4.2.
Syntax
For
<Mode>=0: release an external interrupt
Action command
AT+WIPC=<mode>[,<interruptId>]
OK
For
<Mode>=1: allocate and set an external interrupt
Action command
AT+WIPC=<mode>,<interruptId>,<polarity>,<filter>[,<debounceTiming>]
OK
For
<Mode>=2 and 3: save / delete the configuration in flash memory
Action command
AT+WIPC=<mode>
OK
Read command
AT+WIPC?
+WIPC:
<interruptId>,<polarity>,<filter>[,<debounceTiming>]
[+WIPC:
<interruptId>,<polarity>,<filter>[,<debounceTiming>][
]]
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
I/O
Commands
Sierra
Wireless Interrupt Pin Configuration +WIPC
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 116
Test command
AT+WIPC=?
+WIPC: (list of supported
<mode>s),list of supported <interruptId>s),list of
supported
<polarity>s),(list of supported <filter>s),(list of supported
<debounceTiming>s)
OK
22.4.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<InterruptId>:
external interrupt name (as mentioned in the embedded module
Product Technical
Specification and
Customer Design Guideline)
string type
<mode>:
requested configuration
0 release
the external interrupt
1 allocate
and set the external interrupt
2 save the
configuration in flash memory
3 delete
the saved configuration in flash memory
<polarity>:
external interrupt polarity selection
0 falling
1 rising
2 both
edges (with or without debounce)
<filter>:
processing filter
0 bypass
mode (no stretching and no debounce)
1 stretching
(not allowed for both edges)
2 debounce
<debounceTiming>:
number of cycles for debounce duration (in units
of 7.8 ms)
mandatory if
<filter>=2
range: 1-7
22.4.4.
Parameter Storage
The
<polarity>, <filter> and <debounceTiming> parameters are
stored or deleted in the flash memory
using the action
command.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
I/O
Commands
Sierra
Wireless Interrupt Pin Configuration +WIPC
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 117
22.4.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WIPC=? +WIPC:(0-3),("INT0","INT1","INT2"),(0-2),(0-
2),(1-7)
OK
AT+WIPC? OK
Note: No
external interrupts have been allocated.
AT+WIPC=1,"INT0",0,0
OK
Note:
INT0 is configured in bypass mode.
AT+WIPC=1,"INT2",1,2,1
OK
Note:
INT2 is configured in rising edge sensitivity with debounce.
AT+WIPC? +WIPC:
"INT0",0,0
+WIPC: "INT2",1,2,1
OK
Note:
Only INT0 and INT2 have been allocated .
AT+WIND=2048 OK
Note:
Activate the +WIND indications for interruption
Note :
Interrupt on INT0 +WIND: 12,"INT0"
Note :
Interrupt on INT2 +WIND: 12,"INT2"
AT+WIPC=0,"INT2"
OK
Note:
Release INT2
AT+WIPC? +WIPC:
"INT0",0,0
OK
22.4.6.
Notes
The
<debounceTiming> parameter is used only when <filter>=2.
The action command
is only usable on external interrupts when it is not currently used by another
device. The read
command lists only the interrupts used by the user.
If
<interruptId> is not set with <mode>=0 (deallocate mode), all
allocated external interrupts will be
released.
After a pin is set
in external interrupt mode (or an external interrupt is released), it is not
possible to
use it any more in
other feature than external interrupt mode, until the next boot occurs.
Similarly, to
change a pin
association to a feature into an external interrupt pin (refer to embedded
module Product
Technical
Specification and Customer Design Guideline for the list of the features), a
reset is needed.
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 118
23.
Battery Commands
23.1.
Analog Digital Converters Measurements
+ADC
23.1.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command retrieves the measures of various ADCs present on
embedded module.
The measurement can
be expressed in mV, corresponding to analog input signal measurement. It
can also be
expressed in digital value corresponding to ADC result register value.
23.1.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+ADC=<mode>,<ADCIdx>
+ADC:
<mode>,<ADCValue>
OK
Read command
AT+ADC?
+ADC:
<ADC0Value>[,<ADC1Value>[,<ADC2Value>] [
]]
OK
Test command
AT+ADC=?
+ADC:
<ADCIdx>,<AnalogMinVolt>,<AnalogMaxVolt>,<Resolution>
[+ADC:
<ADCIdx>,<AnalogMinVolt>,<AnalogMaxVolt>,<Resolution>
[
]]
OK
Note:
For the read command, ADC values are expressed in analog value.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Battery
Commands
Analog
Digital Converters Measurements +ADC
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 119
23.1.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<AnalogMinVolt>:
Minimal value measurable by ADC (in mV), depends on embedded
module. Please
refer to the embedded
module Product Technical Specification.
<AnalogMaxVolt>:
Maximal value measurable by ADC (in mV), depends on embedded
module. Please
refer to the embedded
module Product Technical Specification.
<Resolution>:
Digital register number of bit, depends on embedded
module. Please refer to the
Product Technical
Specification.
<mode>:
mode
0 ADC measure expressed
in analog value
1 ADC measure expressed
in digital value
<ADCIdx>:
ADC Index
0 The first index is
reserved to measure the battery voltage.
Other index can be
available. Please refer to Product Technical Specification to
know how many other ADCs
are available on embedded module.
<ADCValue>
value of ADC measured
0-2000 (mV)
<ADCValue> is expressed in analog value (except for battery voltage, a
resistor
bridge is used)
0-4095 <ADCValue>
is expressed in digital value (the register value coded on 12 bits)
23.1.4.
Parameter Storage
No parameter is stored in
EEPROM.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Battery
Commands
Analog
Digital Converters Measurements +ADC
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 120
23.1.5.
Examples
Command Responses
AT+ADC?
Note:
Ask for the list of possible values
+ADC: 0,3200,4800,12
+ADC: 1,0,2000,12
+ADC: 2,0,2000,12
+ADC: 3,0,2000,12
OK
Note:
Response on Q2687, WMP100
AT+ADC? +ADC:
3450,1800,1000,1800
OK
Note:
Response on Q2687, WMP100
AT+ADC=0,0 +ADC: 0,3450
OK
Note:
ADC0 asked in analog mode
AT+ADC=1,0 +ADC: 1,36
OK
Note:
ADC0 asked in digital mode
AT+ADC=1,2 +ADC: 1,77
OK
Note:
ADC2 asked in digital mode
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Battery
Commands
Sierra
Wireless Battery Charge Management +WBCM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 121
23.2. Sierra
Wireless Battery Charge Management
+WBCM
23.2.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command is used to manage the battery charging operations (start
and stop the charge,
enable or disable unsolicited +WBCI battery charge Indications) and to set the
battery charge
parameters.
Note:
Unsolicited responses for battery charge are only returned through one port
(except +WBCI: 0 and
+WBCI:
1). If these responses are already activated on a port and if the
activation/deactivation is
made on
another port, the command will return "+CME ERROR: 552" specific
error.
23.2.2.
Syntax
For
<Mode>=0 or 1:
Action command
AT+WBCM=<Mode>[,<ChargeInd>]
OK
For
<Mode>=2:
Action command
AT+WBCM=<Mode>
+WBCI:
<Status1>,<BattLevel>
OK
For
<Mode>=3
Action command
AT+WBCM=<Mode>,[<ChargeInd>],[<ChargingVoltage>],
[<DischargeCutOffVoltage>],[<OverChargeVoltage>],
[<BatteryTempMaxVolt>],[<BatteryTempMinVolt>],
[<AutomaticChargeResume>,[<WBCITimer>],
[<BattLevelFilter>]
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Battery
Commands
Sierra
Wireless Battery Charge Management +WBCM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 122
For
<Mode>=4:
Action command
AT+WBCM=<Mode>[,<ChargeMode>]
[+WBCM:
<Mode>,<ChargeMode>]
OK
For
<Mode>=5:
Action command
AT+WBCM=5
+WBCM:
<Mode>,<ChargerState>
OK
For
<Mode>=6:
Action command
AT+WBCM=<Mode>[,<BatteryChargeManagementEnable>]
[+WBCM:
<Mode>,<BatteryChargeManagementEnable>]
OK
Read command
AT+WBCM?
+WBCM:
<Mode>,<ChargeInd>,<ChargingVoltage>,
<DischargeCutOffVoltage>,<OverChargeVoltage>,
<BatteryTempMaxVolt>,<BatteryTempMinVolt>,
<AutomaticChargeResume>,<WBCITimer>,<BattLevelFilter>
OK
Test command
None
Unsolicited response
+WBCI: <Status2>[,<BattLevel>]
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Battery
Commands
Sierra
Wireless Battery Charge Management +WBCM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 123
23.2.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<mode>:
0 stop the battery charging
(default).
1 start the battery
charging
2 get the current battery
voltage
3 set the battery charge
parameters
4 choose the type of
charging
5 get the charger state
6 enable the battery
charge management
<ChargeInd>:
battery charge unsolicited indication mode
0 disable the battery
charge unsolicited indications
(default value)
1 enable the battery
charge unsolicited indications.
<ChargeMode>:
charging algorithm
0 NI-CD, NI-MH
1 Li-ion
<Charging
Voltage>: maximum level for the battery voltage in mV
When reached, the battery
is considered as charged
range: 3800-4300 (default
value: 4200)
<DischargeCutOffVoltage>:
minimum level for the battery voltage in mV
When reached, the battery
is considered as discharged:
- If a
charger is plugged, the charge is
automatically launched
- else the
GSM software stack is stopped (with
the +CPOF command
behavior)
range: 3200-3800 (default
value: 3200)
<OverChargeVoltage>:
value of the over voltage protection
range: 4200-5000 (default
value: 4700)
Unused if a PMU manages
the battery charge on the
embedded module.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Battery
Commands
Sierra
Wireless Battery Charge Management +WBCM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 124
<AutomaticChargeResume>:
The charge is automatically resumed to keep the
maximum level for the
battery voltage.
0 The automatic charge is
not resumed.
1 The automatic charge
resume is performed, the
maximum voltage for the
battery is kept.
<
WBCITimer >: time in ms between +WBCI unsolicited responses in or
out of charge (for
<ChargeInd>=1)
range: 1000-10000
(default value: 2000)
<BattLevelFilter>:
battery changed level in mV
The +WBCI: 2 or +WBCI: 3
indications only occur when
the delta between two
battery voltage measurements
has reached this value.
range: 100-500 (default
value: 0)
For value 0, +WBCI
indications are not filtered with
<BattLevelFilter>.
<BatteryTempMaxVolt>:
highest value for battery temperature sensor voltage in
mV (lowest temperature
with a NTC) with an accuracy
of +/-20mv, depending on
the ADC tolerance
default value: 1438 (3ฐC)
unused if
<ChargeMode>=0
<BatteryTempMinVolt>:
lowest value for battery temperature sensor voltage in
mV (highest temperature
with a NTC) with an accuracy
of +/-20mv, depending on
the ADC tolerance
default value: 601 (42ฐC)
unused if
<ChargeMode>=0
<Status1>:
2 battery currently in
charge, the <BattLevel>
parameter is also present
3 battery currently out of
charge, the <BattLevel>
parameter is also present
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Battery
Commands
Sierra
Wireless Battery Charge Management +WBCM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 125
<Status2>:
0 minimum battery level
reached. The battery is
considered as discharged
The product is turned off
(as with the +CPOF
command) if a charger is
not plugged. Else the
charge automatically
begins.
not dependent on the
<ChargeInd> parameter
1 maximum battery level
reached (the battery is
considered as charged) or
charging discontinuation
The battery charging is
stopped.
not dependent on the parameter
<ChargeInd>
2 battery currently in
charge, the <BattLevel>
parameter is also present
3 battery currently out of
charge, the <BattLevel>
parameter is also present
4 charger plugged,
5 charger unplugged,
6 unusual voltage or
temperature
7 start of the automatic
charge resume
<BattLevel>:
current battery voltage in mV during or out of charging
range: 2800-4300
<ChargerState>:
current charger state
0 unplugged
1 plugged
<BatteryChargeManagementEnable>:
state of the battery charge management
If disabled,
<mode>=1 to 5 are not allowed. The
temperature ADC can be
used for another usage.
0 disabled
1 enabled
23.2.4.
Parameter Storage
All parameters
except <Status1>, <Status2> and <BattLevel> are stored in
EEPROM without using
the
AT&W.command. The default value can be restored using AT&F.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Battery
Commands
Sierra
Wireless Battery Charge Management +WBCM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 126
23.2.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WBCM? +WBCM:
0,0,4200,3200,4700,1438,601,1,2000,0
OK
Note:
Current values
AT+WBCM=0
Note:
Stop the battery charging
OK
AT+WBCM=4,0
Note:
Configure the battery charging in Ni-Cd/Ni-MH mode
OK
AT+WBCM=4
Note:
Get the charging mode
+WBCM: 4,0
OK
Note:
The charging mode is Ni-Cd/Ni-MH
AT+WBCM=5 +WBCM: 5,1
OK
Note:
the charger is plugged
AT+WBCM=1,1
Note:
Start the battery charging with charge indications
OK
AT+WBCM=1,1
Note:
Start the battery charging with charge indications
+CME ERROR : 563
Note :
Charge is not started due to an error, but
unsolicited
event is activated
+WBCI: 2,4060
Note:
Unsolicited charge indication: the current battery
voltage
is 4.06 V.
AT+WBCM=1,0
Note:
Start the battery charging without charge indications
OK
AT+WBCM=2
Note:
Get the battery voltage during the charging
+WBCI: 2,4110
OK
Note:
The current battery voltage is 4.11 V
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Battery
Commands
Sierra
Wireless Battery Charge Management +WBCM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 127
Command Responses
+WBCI: 1
Note:
The battery voltage has reached the max level.
The
battery is considered as charged and the charging
is
stopped.
AT+WBCM=0,1
Note:
Enable the battery charge unsolicited indications out of charge
OK
+WBCI: 3,4195
Note:
The current battery voltage is 4.195 V.
AT+WBCM=3,0,4200,3500,4650
1,5000,200
Note:
Configure the battery charging parameters (depends on battery
specification);
in this case the charging mode is Ni-Cd/Ni-MH
OK
+WBCI: 0
Note:
The battery voltage has reached the minimum
level.
The battery is considered as discharged. If a
charger
is not plugged, the product is turned off, with
the
+CPOF command behaviour. Else the charge
automatically
begins.
AT+WBCM=4,1
Note:
Configure the battery charging in Li-Ion mode
OK
AT+WBCM=3,0,4200,3300,4600,1440,600,1,10000,100
Note:
Configure the battery charging parameters in Li-Ion
OK
+WBCI: 7
Note:
The battery voltage has reached the maintain
level.
If a charger is not plugged, the embedded
module
continues with a normal behaviour. Else the
charge
automatically begins.
AT+WBCM=6,0 OK
Note:
Disabled the battery charge management
AT+WBCM=1 +CME ERROR: 3
Note:
Battery charge management is disabled
AT+WBCM=6 +WBCM: 6,0
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Battery
Commands
Sierra
Wireless Battery Charge Management +WBCM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 128
23.2.6.
Notes
Please check charger
and battery recommendations.
If the battery
charging is started without charger plugged or with an abnormal temperature or
voltage,
the charging does
not start. +WBCI: 3 unsolicited indications are sent. After solving the
anomaly, it is
necessary to start
again the battery charging.
<BatteryTempMaxVolt>
indicative temperature values:
ฐC mV ฐC
mV ฐC mV
0 1495 5 1399 10 1293
1 1477 6 1378 11 1271
2 1458 7 1357 12 1249
3 1438 8 1336 13 1226
4 1419 9 1315 14 1203
These values are
obtained with the NTC equal to the Pull-up (Sierra Wireless recommends 100K)
and
the NTC is polarized
with the VCC_1V8 signal. Please refer to the battery application note and the
Customer Design
Guidelines for more information
<BatteryTempMinVolt>
indicative temperature values:
ฐC mV ฐC
mV ฐC mV
31 817 36 714 41 619
32 796 37 694 42 601
33 775 38 675 43 584
34 754 39 656 44 567
35 734 40 637 45 550
These values are
obtained with the NTC equal to the Pull-up (Sierra Wireless recommends 100K)
and
the NTC is polarized
with the VCC_1V8 signal. Please refer to the battery application note and the
Customer Design
Guidelines for more information.
For <mode>=4
(type of charging), if the <ChargeMode> parameter is omitted, the command
will get
the charging mode
(please refer to section Example).
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Battery
Commands
Sierra
Wireless Autodiag +WDIAG
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 129
23.3. Sierra
Wireless Autodiag +WDIAG
23.3.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command enables to control the embedded module self diagnostic.
23.3.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WDIAG=<type>,<mode>[,<period>,<trig1>,<trig2>,<trig3>,<trig3_freq>]
OK
Read command
AT+WDIAG?
+WDIAG: <type>,<mode>,<period>,<trig1>,<trig2>,<trig3>,<trig3_freq>
OK
Test command
AT+WDIAG=?
OK
Unsolicited response
+WDIAGI:
<type>,<indication>[,<value>]
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Battery
Commands
Sierra
Wireless Autodiag +WDIAG
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 130
23.3.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<type
>: ADC type
0 The first index is
reserved to measure the battery voltage.
Other index can be
available. Please refer to Product Technical
Specification for more
information on available ADCs on the embedded
module.
1 ADC auxiliary autodiag
(AUX-ADC0)
2 ADC auxiliary autodiag
(AUX-ADC1)
<mode>:
selfdiagnostic activation mode
0 stop (default value)
1 start
<period>:
period of ADC reading in seconds
0 best effort,
approximately 50 readings per second (default value)
1 - 3600 fixed period in
seconds
<trig1>:
minimum threshold
When this threshold is
reached, unsolicited response +WDIAGI is sent to
the user application.
0 trigger deactivated
(default value)
(ADCminV+100) -
(ADCmaxV-1)
threshold in mV
Please refer to the Product
Technical Specification to determine the
corresponding ADCminV and
ADCmaxV for the chosen ADC.
<trig2>:
maximum threshold
When this threshold is
reached, unsolicited response +WDIAGI is sent to
the user application.
0 trigger
deactivated (default value)
(ADCminV+100) -
(ADCmaxV-1)
threshold in mV
Please refer to the Product
Technical Specification to determine the
corresponding ADCminV and ADCmaxV
for the chosen ADC.
<trig3>:
delta threshold
When the delta of the last
<trig3freq> ADC readings exceeds the
threshold, unsolicited
response +WDIAGI is sent to the user application.
0 trigger deactivated
(default value)
10 - 3000 threshold in mV
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Battery
Commands
Sierra
Wireless Autodiag +WDIAG
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 131
<trig3_freq>:
number of last values used for the delta calculation
0 5 (default value)
1 10
2 20
<indication>:
type of event
0 current value (not
available in best effort mode)
1 ADC value is under the
minimum threshold value (<trig1>)
2 ADC value is above the
minimum threshold value (<trig1>) (only after an
unsolicited response with
<indication>=1)
3 ADC value is under the
maximum threshold value (<trig2>)
4 ADC value is under the
maximum threshold value (<trig2>) (only after an
unsolicited response with
<indication>=3)
5 The delta between two
values among the <trig3freq> last values is more
important than the delta
threshold value (<trig3>)
<value>:
ADC value in mV
range: 1-8000
for <indication> = 0:
the current ADC value
for <indication> = 2:
the minimum ADC value read while the minimum
threshold has been
exceeded.
for <indication> = 4:
the maximum ADC value read while the maximum
threshold has been
exceeded.
for <indication> = 5:
the delta ADC value read
23.3.4.
Parameter Storage
The parameters are
stored in EEPROM using the AT&W.command. The default value can be
restored using
AT&F.
AT Commands Interface Guide
for
Firmware 7.45
Battery
Commands
Sierra
Wireless Autodiag +WDIAG
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 132
23.3.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WDIAG=0,1,0,3000,4000,0
Note:
ADC selfdiagnostic start in best effort for a
min
and a max
trig
OK
Note: Done
AT+WDIAG?
Note:
Current value
+WDIAG: 0,1,0,3000,4000,0,0
OK
Note:
Done
AT+WDIAG=0,1,60,0,0,50,0
Note:
ADC selfdiagnostic start with a 60s frequency
for a
delta trig
OK
Note:
Done
AT+WDIAG?
Note:
Current value
+WDIAG: 0,1,60,0,0,50,0
OK
Note:
Done
AT+WDIAG=0,0
Note:
ADC selfdiagnostic stop
OK
Note:
Done
23.3.6.
Notes
Unsolicited
responses for self diagnostic are only returned through one port. If these
responses are
already activated on
a port and if the activation is made on another port, the command will return
"+CME ERROR:
552" specific error.
Values over 4650 mV
are not used
After a +WBCI=0
indication (minimum battery level reached), the selfdiagnostic is
stopped.
Only one
<type> can be activated at the same time.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Battery
Commands
Sierra
Wireless Autodiag +WDIAG
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 133
Examples of selfdiagnostic
feature behaviour
Example
1
AT+WDIAG=0,1,5,0,0,0,0
Note:
ADC selfdiagnostic started with a 5s period.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Battery
Commands
Sierra
Wireless Autodiag +WDIAG
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 134
Example
2
AT+WDIAG=0,1,0,3000,0,0,0
Note:
ADC selfdiagnostic started in "best
effort" with a 3000 mV minimum threshold.
Example
3
AT+WDIAG=0,1,0,0,4000,0,0
Note:
ADC selfdiagnostic started in "best
effort" with a 4000 mV maximum threshold
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Battery
Commands
Sierra
Wireless Autodiag +WDIAG
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 135
Example
4
AT+WDIAG=0,1,10,0,4000,0,0
Note:
ADC selfdiagnostic started with a 10s period for a
4000 mV maximum threshold.
+WDIAGI: 3
+WDIAGI: 4,4300
4300
Example
5
AT+WDIAG=0,1,0,0,0,100,1
Note:
ADC selfdiagnostic started in "best
effort" with a 100 mV delta threshold.
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 136
24.
CPHS Commands
24.1.
CPHS Command: +CPHS
24.1.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command is used to activate, deactivate or interrogate a CPHS
feature (e.g. voice
mail indicator, mail box number
)
It also activates
the following unsolicited responses:
+WMVI
which indicates the status of the LINE 1, LINE 2, DATA or FAX mailboxes.
+WDCI
which provides the call forwarding flags.
Note:
This command is used to specifically manage the SIM stored Voicemail Numbers.
Any actions related
to the
ME Memory stored Voicemail Numbers MUST be managed through the +CSVM Command.
24.1.2.
Syntax
For
<Mode>=0 or 1:
Action command
AT+CPHS=<Mode>,<FctId>
OK
For
<Mode>=2 and <FctId>=1:
Action command
AT+CPHS=<Mode>,<FctId>
+WVMI:
<LineId>,<VoiceMailStatus>
[+WVMI:
<LineId>,<VoiceMailStatus>[
]]
OK
For
<Mode>=2 and <FctId>=2:
Action command
AT+CPHS=<Mode>,<FctId>
+WMBN: <Lineld>,[<number>],[<type>],[<name>],<NumberStatus>
[+WMBN:
<Lineld>,[<number>],[<type>],[<name>],<NumberStatus>[
]]
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
CPHS
Commands
CPHS
Command: +CPHS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 137
For
<Mode>=2 and <FctId>=3:
Action command
AT+CPHS=<Mode>,<FctId>
+WALS: <Lineld>
OK
For
<Mode>=2 and <FctId>=4:
Action command
AT+CPHS=<Mode>,<FctId>
+WDCI:
<LineId>,<DivertedStatus>
[+WDCI:
<LineId>,<DivertedStatus>[
]]
OK
For
<Mode>=2 and <FctId>=5:
Action command
AT+CPHS=<Mode>,<FctId>[,<type
format>]
+WNON: <type
format>,<operator name>
OK
For
<Mode>=2 and <FctId>=6:
Action command
AT+CPHS=<Mode>,<FctId>[,<data
field>]
+WCPI: <data
field>,<InfoStatus>
OK
For
<Mode>=2 and <FctId>=7:
Action command
AT+CPHS=<Mode>,<FctId>,<Service>
+WCSP:
<Service>,<ServiceStatus>
OK
Read command
AT+CPHS?
+CPHS:
<FctId>[,<Status>]
[+CPHS:
<FctId>[,<Status>][
]]
OK
Test command
AT+CPHS=?
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
CPHS
Commands
CPHS
Command: +CPHS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 138
Unsolicited response
+WVMI:
<LineId>,<VoiceMailStatus>
Unsolicited response
+WDCI:
<LineId>,<DivertedStatus>
24.1.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<Mode>:
requested operation
this parameter has not effect
for alternate line service, Network Operator Name,
CPHS information and
Customer Profile Service features (<FctId>=3,5,6,7).
default value: 0 for
<FctId>=1,2,4
0 deactivate a CPHS feature
1 activate a CPHS feature
2 interrogate a CPHS status
<
FctId>: CPHS feature CPHS feature
the Customer Service
Profile and Alternate Line Service features are activated if
the field is set in CPHS
information and CSP files. The Network Operator Name
is activated if at least
one of the two format names exist (long or short
format).This is done at
initialization.
1 voice mail
indicator
2 mail box
number
3 alternate
line service
4 diverted
call indicator
5 network
operator name
6 CPHS
Information
7 Customer
Service Profile
<Status>:
CPHS feature state
0 disabled
1 enabled
<Lineld>:
line identity
1 line 1
2 line 2
3 data
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
CPHS
Commands
CPHS
Command: +CPHS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 139
4 fax
<VoiceMailStatus>:
voice mail status
0 no message
waiting
1 at least
one message is waiting
<number>:
phone number in ASCII format
string type
<type>:
TON/NPI Type of address octet (refer GSM 04.08 subclause
10.5.4.7 [6])
integer type
129 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national / international unknown
145 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, international number
161 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national number
128-255 other values
(refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])
<name>:
name of mailbox
string type
the +WPCS command affects
the format of the mailbox <name> entry
the maximum length is SIM
dependent
<NumberStatus>:
Indicates if <number> can be updated or not
0 update is not possible
1 update is possible
<DivertedStatus>:
divert Call Status
0 disabled
1 enabled
<type
format>: <operator name> format
0 long format (default
value)
1 short format
<operator
name>: operator name
string type
<data
field>: CPHS information field bit number
range: 0-25 (default value
if omitted: 0)
If <data field> field
is equal to 0, the whole CPHS information field will be displayed
in <InfoStatus>
parameter
Please refer to section
CPHS information field in the appendices
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
CPHS
Commands
CPHS
Command: +CPHS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 140
<InfoStatus>:
CPHS information field status
0 service
is not customer-accessible
1 service is
customer-accessible
"xxxxxxxx" whole CPHS
information bit field
hexadecimal string (8
digits)
<Service>:
CSP field bit number
range: 1-81
Please refer to section
CSP constants in the appendices.
<ServiceStatus>:
CSP bit status
0 service
is not customer-accessible
1 service is
customer-accessible
24.1.4.
Parameter Storage
The <Mode>
parameter is stored in EEPROM without using the AT&W.command. The default
value
can be restored
using AT&F.
24.1.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CPHS?
Note:
Interrogate the status of CPHS functionality
+CPHS: 1,0
Note:
The voice mail indicator functionality is deactivated
+CPHS: 2,0
Note:
The mail box number functionality is deactivated
+CPHS: 3,1
Note:
The alternate line service functionality is activated
+CPHS: 4,0
Note:
The divert call indicator functionality is deactivated
+CPHS: 5,1
Note:
The network operator name functionality is activated
+CPHS: 6,1
Note:
The CPHS information functionality is activated
+CPHS: 7,1
Note:
The customer service profile functionality is activated
OK
AT+CPHS=1,1
Note:
Activate the voice mail indicator functionality
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
CPHS
Commands
CPHS
Command: +CPHS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 141
Command
Responses
AT+CPHS?
Note:
Interrogate the status of CPHS functionality
+CPHS: 1,1
Note:
The voice mail indicator functionality is activated
+CPHS: 2,0
Note:
The mail box number functionality is deactivated
+CPHS: 3,1
Note: The
alternate line service functionality is activated
+CPHS: 4,0
Note:
The divert call indicator functionality is deactivated
+CPHS: 5,1
Note:
The network operator name functionality is activated
+CPHS: 6,1
Note:
The CPHS information functionality is activated
+CPHS: 7,1
Note:
The customer service profile functionality is activated
OK
+WVMI: 1,1
Note: A
message is waiting on line 1
+WVMI: 2,1
Note: A
message is waiting on line 2
AT+CPHS=1,4
Note:
Activate the divert call indicator functionality
OK
**** The
call forwarding is active on line 1 ***** +WDCI: 1,1
Note:
Call forwarding is activated on line 1
AT+CPHS=2,1
Note:
Interrogate the status of voice mail indicator
functionality
+WVMI: 1,1
Note: A
message is waiting on line 1
+WVMI: 2,1
Note: A
message is waiting on line 2
+WVMI: 3,0
Note: No
data waiting
+WVMI: 4,0
Note: No
fax waiting
OK
AT+CPHS=1,2
Note:
Activate the mail box number functionality
OK
AT+WALS=1 +WALS: 2
OK
Note:
Interrogate the status of activated line Note: The current line is number 2
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
CPHS
Commands
CPHS
Command: +CPHS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 142
Command
Responses
AT+CPHS=0,4
Note:
Deactivate the divert call indicator functionality
OK
AT+CPHS?
Note:
Interrogate the status of CPHS functionality
+CPHS: 1,1
Note:
The voice mail indicator functionality is activated
+CPHS: 2,1
Note:
The mail box number functionality is activated
+CPHS: 3,1
Note:
The alternate line service functionality is activated
+CPHS: 4,0
Note:
The divert call indicator functionality is deactivated
+CPHS: 5,1
Note:
The network operator name functionality is activated
+CPHS: 6,1
Note:
The CPHS Information functionality is activated
+CPHS: 7,1
Note:
The Customer Service Profile functionality is activated
OK
AT+CPHS=2,2
Note:
Get current values
+WMBN:
1,"19254871234",129,,1
Note:
Mail box number for line 1
+WMBN: 2,,,1
Note:
Mail box number for line 2
+WMBN: 3,,,1
Note:
Mail box number for data line
+WMBN: 4,,,1
Note:
Mail box number for fax line
OK
Note: Only
line1 can be updated
AT+CPHS=2,5
Note:
Get the operator name
+WNON: 0,"Orange F"
OK
AT+CPHS=2,7,9
Note:
Get the current status for barring of all
outgoing
calls
+WCSP: 9,1
OK
Note:
Barring of all outgoing calls is customer accessible.
AT+CPHS=2,6
Note:
Get the current status for all CPHS info field
+WCPI: 0,"0033000F"
OK
AT+CPHS=2,6,13
Note:
Get the current status for call forward activated
indicator
for line 1
+WCPI: 13,1
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
CPHS
Commands
CPHS
Command: +CPHS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 143
24.1.6.
Notes
This command may
answer "+CME ERROR: 3" if the CPHS feature is disabled or if the SIM
card
does not support
this CPHS feature.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
CPHS
Commands
Sierra
Wireless CPHS Mail Box Number +WMBN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 144
24.2.
Sierra Wireless CPHS Mail Box Number
+WMBN
24.2.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command sets the different mailbox numbers in SIM. The +CPHS
command can be used
to know which mailbox numbers can be updated.
24.2.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WMBN=<Lineld>[,<number>,[<type>],[<name>]]
OK
Read command
AT+WMBN?
OK
Test command
AT+WMBN=?
OK
24.2.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<Lineld>:
line associated to the mailbox
1 line 1
2 line 2
3 data
4 fax
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
CPHS
Commands
Sierra
Wireless CPHS Mail Box Number +WMBN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 145
<number>:
phone number
ASCII format
up to 20 digits
<type>:
TON/NPI Type of address octet for <number> (refer GSM
04.08 subclause 10.5.4.7
[6]);
default 145 when dialing string inclues international access code character
+,
otherwise 129
integer type
129 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national / international unknown
145 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, international number
161 ISDN / telephony
numbering plan, national number
128-255 other values
(refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])
<name>:
name of mailbox
string type
the +WPCS command affects
the format of the mailbox <name> entry.
the maximum length is SIM
dependent.
24.2.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
24.2.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+CPHS=2,2
Note: Gets
the current mail box numbers in SIM
+WMBN:1,"0123456789",129,"Home",1
+WMBN:2,"9876543210",129,"Work",1
+WMBN:3,,,,1
+WMBN:4,,,,1
OK
AT+WMBN=1,"+0033122334455",145
OK
Note: Sets
mailbox number for line 1 Note: Mailbox number for line 1 is set
AT+WMBN=2 OK
Note:
Erases mailbox number & name for line 2
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
CPHS
Commands
Sierra
Wireless CPHS Mail Box Number +WMBN
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 146
Command
Responses
AT+CPHS=2,2 +WMBN:
1,"+33122334455",145,,1
+WMBN: 2,,,,,1
+WMBN: 3,,,,,1
+WMBN: 4,,,,,1
OK
Note: Gets
the current mail box numbers again
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
CPHS
Commands
Sierra
Wireless Alternate Line Service +WALS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 147
24.3.
Sierra Wireless Alternate Line Service +WALS
24.3.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command allows to set and to get an active line. The +CPHS
command can be used
to know which line is activated.
24.3.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WALS=<CmdType>[,<Lineld>]
[+WALS: <Lineld>]
OK
Read command
AT+WALS?
+WALS: <Lineld>
OK
Test command
AT+WALS=?
+WALS: (list of supported <CmdType>s),(list of
supported <Lineld>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
CPHS
Commands
Sierra
Wireless Alternate Line Service +WALS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 148
24.3.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<CmdType>:
requested operation
0 sets active line
1 gets active line
<Lineld>:
line number
used only with
<CmdType>=0
1 line 1
2 line 2
24.3.4.
Parameter Storage
The <LineId>
parameter is stored in EEPROM without using the AT&W.command.
24.3.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WALS=? +WALS:
(0-1),(1-2)
OK
AT+WALS=0,1
Note:
Activate line 1
+WALS:1
OK
AT+WALS=1
Note:
Get the current activated line
+WALS:1
OK
AT+CPHS?
Note:
Get the current activated line
+WALS:1
OK
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 149
25. Fax
Commands
25.1.
Introduction
The fax service
provided by the product is class 1 compliant. However, only the core commands
defined by ITU T.31
are supported. This means that commands such as AT+FAR, +FCC, etc. are not
supported.
Autobauding must be
enabled to set up the product for fax.
All the following
commands return an ERROR response code if they are not issued during
communication.
Note:
This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Fax
Commands
Transmit
Speed +FTM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 150
25.2.
Transmit Speed +FTM
25.2.1.
Description
This command sets
the fax transmit speed.
Note:
This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.
25.2.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+FTM=<speed>
OK
Read command
None
Test command
AT+FTM=?
(list of supported
<speed>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Fax
Commands
Transmit
Speed +FTM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 151
25.2.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<speed>:
fax transmit speed
24 2400 bps (modem type
V.27ter)
48 4800 bps (modem type
V.27ter)
72 7200 bps (modem type
V.29)
73 7200 bps (long) (modem
type V.17)
74 7200 bps (short)
(modem type V.17)
96 9600 bps (modem type
V.29)
97 9600 bps (long) (modem
type V.17)
98 9600 bps (short)
(modem type V.17)
121 12000 bps (long)
(modem type V.17)
122 12000 bps (short)
(modem type V.17)
145 14400 bps (long)
(modem type V.17)
146 14400 bps (short)
(modem type V.17)
25.2.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
25.2.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+FTM=145
Note:
Set fax speed at 14400 bps for a V.17
type
modem
OK
AT+FTM=?
Note:
Get possible values
(24,48,72,73,74,96,97,98,121,122,145,146)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Fax
Commands
Receive
Speed +FRM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 152
25.3.
Receive Speed +FRM
25.3.1.
Description
This command sets
the fax receive speed.
Note:
This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.
25.3.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+FRM=<speed>
OK
Read command
None
Test command
AT+FRM=?
(list of supported
<speed>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Fax
Commands
Receive
Speed +FRM
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 153
25.3.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<speed>:
fax receive speed
24 2400 bps (modem type
V.27ter)
48 4800 bps (modem type
V.27ter)
72 7200 bps (modem type
V.29)
73 7200 bps (long) (modem
type V.17)
74 7200 bps (short)
(modem type V.17)
96 9600 bps (modem type
V.29)
97 9600 bps (long) (modem
type V.17)
98 9600 bps (short)
(modem type V.17)
121 12000 bps (long)
(modem type V.17)
122 12000 bps (short)
(modem type V.17)
145 14400 bps (long) (modem
type V.17)
146 14400 bps (short)
(modem type V.17)
25.3.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
25.3.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+FRM=?
Note:
Get possible values
(24,48,72,73,74,96,97,98,121,122,145,146)
OK
AT+FRM=145
Note:
Set fax speed at 14400 bps for a V.17
type
modem
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Fax
Commands
HDLC
Transmit Speed +FTH
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 154
25.4.
HDLC Transmit Speed +FTH
25.4.1.
Description
This command sets
the fax transmit speed using the HDLC protocol.
Note:
This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.
25.4.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+FTH=<speed>
OK
Read command
None
Test command
AT+FTH=?
(list of supported
<speed>s)
OK
25.4.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<speed>:
HDLC fax transmit speed
3 V.21 channels 300 bps
25.4.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Fax
Commands
HDLC
Transmit Speed +FTH
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 155
25.4.5.
Examples
Command Responses
AT+FTH=3
Note:
Set fax speed at 300 bps
OK
AT+FTH=?
Note:
Get possible values
(3)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Fax
Commands
HDLC
Receive Speed +FRH
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 156
25.5.
HDLC Receive Speed +FRH
25.5.1.
Description
This command sets
the fax receive speed using the HDLC protocol.
Note:
This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.
25.5.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+FRH=<speed>
OK
Read command
None
Test command
AT+FRH=?
(list of supported
<speed>s)
OK
25.5.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<speed>:
HDLC fax receive speed
3 V.21 channels 300 bps
25.5.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Fax
Commands
HDLC
Receive Speed +FRH
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 157
25.5.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+FRH=3
Note:
Set fax speed at 300 bps
OK
AT+FRH=?
Note:
Get possible values
(3)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Fax
Commands
Stop
Transmission and Wait +FTS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 158
25.6.
Stop Transmission and Wait +FTS
25.6.1.
Description
This command stops
the transmission for a specified period.
Note:
This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.
25.6.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+FTS=<n>
OK
Read command
None
Test command
AT+FTS=?
(list of supported <n>s)
OK
25.6.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<n>:
fax transmit silence period
0-255 silence period
(unit is 10 ms)
25.6.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Fax
Commands
Stop
Transmission and Wait +FTS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 159
25.6.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+FTS=?
Note:
Test command
(0-255)
OK
AT+FTS=50 OK
Note:
Stops transmission and waits for 0.5s
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Fax
Commands
Receive
Silence +FRS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 160
25.7.
Receive Silence +FRS
25.7.1.
Description
This command causes
the embedded module to stop listening to the network and report back to the
DTE after the
specified period.
It is aborted if any
character is received from the application.
Note:
This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.
25.7.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+FRS=<n>
OK
Read command
None
Test command
AT+FRS=?
(list of supported <n>s)
OK
25.7.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<n>:
fax receive non listening period
0-255 non listening
period (unit is 10ms)
25.7.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Fax
Commands
Receive
Silence +FRS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 161
25.7.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+FRS=?
Note:
Get possible values
(0-255)
OK
AT+FRS=50 OK
Note:
Stops listening and waits for 0.5s
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 162
26. Fax
class 2 Commands
26.1.
Transmit Data +FDT
26.1.1.
Description
This command
prefixes data transmission.
Note:
This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.
26.1.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+FDT
OK
Read command
None
Test command
None
26.1.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
None.
26.1.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
26.1.5.
Examples
None.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Fax
class 2 Commands
Receive
Data +FDR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 163
26.2.
Receive Data +FDR
26.2.1.
Description
This command
initiates data reception.
Note:
This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.
26.2.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+FDR
OK
Read command
None
Test command
None
26.2.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
None.
26.2.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
26.2.5.
Examples
None.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Fax
class 2 Commands
Transmit
Page Punctuation +FET
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 164
26.3.
Transmit Page Punctuation +FET
26.3.1.
Description
This command
punctuates page and document transmission after the +FDT command. It indicates
that the current
page is complete, and if there are additional pages to send.
The +FET unsolicited
response reports post page message response.
Note:
This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.
26.3.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+FET=<ppm>
OK
Read command
None
Test command
None
Unsolicited response
+FET: <ppm>
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Fax
class 2 Commands
Transmit
Page Punctuation +FET
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 165
26.3.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<ppm>:
post page message
0 another page next, same
document
1 another document next
2 no more pages or
documents
3 another partial page
next
4 another page, procedure
interrupt
5 another document,
procedure interrupt
6 all done, procedure
interrupt
26.3.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
26.3.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+FET=0 OK
Note:
Send another page of the same document
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Fax
class 2 Commands
Page
Transfer Status Parameters +FPTS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 166
26.4.
Page Transfer Status Parameters +FPTS
26.4.1.
Description
This command sets
post page transfer response.
The +FPTS
unsolicited response reports received page transfer status.
Note:
This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.
26.4.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+FPTS=<ppr>
OK
Read command
None
Test command
None
Unsolicited response
+FPTS: <ppr>
26.4.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<ppr>:
post page transfer response
1 page good
2 page bad; retry
requested
3 page good; retrain
requested
4 page bad; interrupt
requested
5 page good; interrupt
requested
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Fax
class 2 Commands
Page
Transfer Status Parameters +FPTS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 167
26.4.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
26.4.5.
Examples
None.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Fax
class 2 Commands
Terminate
Session +FK
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 168
26.5.
Terminate Session +FK
26.5.1.
Description
This command causes
the product to terminate the session.
Note:
This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.
26.5.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+FK
OK
Read command
None
Test command
None
26.5.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
None.
26.5.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
26.5.5.
Examples
None.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Fax
class 2 Commands
Page
Transfer Bit Order +FBOR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 169
26.6.
Page Transfer Bit Order +FBOR
26.6.1.
Description
This command sets
the bit order for negotiation and fax page transfer. The order is related to
the bit
order on radio link.
Note:
This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.
26.6.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+FBOR=<n>
OK
Read command
AT+FBOR?
<n>
OK
Test command
AT+FBOR=?
(list of supported <n>s)
OK
26.6.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<n>:
Bit
order for negotiation Bit order for page transfer
0 same (default) same
(default)
1 same reverse
2 reverse same
3 reverse reverse
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Fax
class 2 Commands
Page
Transfer Bit Order +FBOR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 170
26.6.4.
Parameter Storage
The <n>
parameter is stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can
be
restored using
AT&F.
26.6.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+FBOR=? (0-3)
OK
AT+FBOR=0 OK
Note:
Set bit order to 0 Note: Bit order set at default settings
AT+FBOR? 0
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Fax
class 2 Commands
Buffer
Size Report +FBUF
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 171
26.7. Buffer
Size Report +FBUF
26.7.1.
Description
This command
requests the size of the exchange buffer between the embedded module and the
fax
application.
Note:
This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.
26.7.2.
Syntax
Action command
None
Read command
AT+FBUF?
<buffer size>
OK
Test command
None
26.7.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<buffer
size>: size of the exchange buffer in bytes
integer type
26.7.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Fax
class 2 Commands
Buffer
Size Report +FBUF
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 172
26.7.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+FBUF? 1024
OK
Note:
Get current buffer size Note: Current buffer size is 1024 bytes
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Fax
class 2 Commands
Copy
Quality Checking +FCQ
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 173
26.8.
Copy Quality Checking +FCQ
26.8.1.
Description
This command
controls copy quality checking for receiving faxes.
Note:
This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.
26.8.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+FCQ=<n>
OK
Read command
AT+FCQ?
<n>
OK
Test command
AT+FCQ=?
(list of supported <n>s)
OK
26.8.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<n>:
copy quality mode
0 copy quality checking (default
value)
26.8.4.
Parameter Storage
The <n>
parameter is stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can
be
restored using
AT&F.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Fax
class 2 Commands
Copy
Quality Checking +FCQ
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 174
26.8.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+FCQ=? (0)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Fax
class 2 Commands
Capability
to Receive +FCR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 175
26.9.
Capability to Receive +FCR
26.9.1.
Description
This command
controls the capability of the embedded module to accept incoming faxes.
Note:
This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.
26.9.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+FCR=<n>
OK
Read command
AT+FCR?
<n>
OK
Test command
AT+FCR=?
(list of supported <n>s)
OK
26.9.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<n>:
capability to receive mode
0 The embedded module
will not accept incoming faxes.
1 The embedded module
will accept incoming faxes (default value)
26.9.4.
Parameter Storage
The <n>
parameter is stored in EEPROM using AT&W command. The default value can be
restored
using AT&F.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Fax
class 2 Commands
Capability
to Receive +FCR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019
Volume 4 February 18, 2011 176
26.9.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+FCR=? (0,1)
OK
AT+FCR=1 OK
AT+FCR? 1
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Fax
class 2 Commands
Current
Session Parameters +FDIS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 177
26.10.
Current Session Parameters +FDIS
26.10.1.
Description
This command allows
the DTE to configure the capabilities used for the current session.
The +FDIS
unsolicited response reports remote capabilities.
The +FDCS
unsolicited response reports current session capabilities.
Note:
This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.
26.10.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+FDIS=[<vr>][,[<br>][,[<wd>][,[<ln>][,[<df>][,[<ec>][,[<bf>][,[<st>]]]]]]]]
OK
Read command
AT+FDIS?
<vr>,<br>,<wd>,<ln>,<df>,<ec>,<bf>,<st>
OK
Test command
AT+FDIS=?
(list of supported
<vr>s),(list of supported <br>s),(list of supported
<wd>s),(list
of supported <ln>s),(list
of supported <df>s),(list of supported <ec>s),(list of
supported <bf>s),(list of
supported <st>s)
OK
Unsolicited response
+FDCS:
<remote_vr>,<br>,<wd>,<ln>,<df>,<ec>,<bf>,<st>
+FDIS:
<remote_vr>,<br>,<wd>,<ln>,<df>,<ec>,<bf>,<st>
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Fax
class 2 Commands
Current
Session Parameters +FDIS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 178
26.10.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<vr>:
vertical resolution
0 normal: 98 LPI (default
value)
1 fine: 196 LPI
<remote_vr>:
remote vertical resolution (bitfield)
0x01 R8 ด 7.7 l/mm, Fine
(196 LPI)
0x02 R8 ด 15.4 l/mm
0x04 R16 ด 15.4 l/mm
0x08 200 dpi ด 100 l/25.4
mm
0x10 200 dpi ด 200 l/25.4
mm
0x20 200 dpi ด 400 l/25.4
mm
0x40 300 dpi ด 300 l/25.4
mm
<br>:
bit rate
0 2400 bps (modem type
V.27 ter)
1 4800 bps (modem type
V.27 ter)
2 7200 bps (modem type
V.29)
3 9600 bps (modem type
V.29, V.17). (default value if "DATA144" feature
IS NOT supported)
4 12000 bps (modem type
V.33, V.17)
only when product
supports "DATA144" feature
5 14400 bps (modem type
V.33, V.17). (default value if "DATA144" feature
IS supported)
only when product
supports "DATA144" feature
<wd>:
page width
0 1728 pixels in 215 mm
(default value)
1 2048 pixels in 255 mm
2 2432 pixels in 303 mm
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Fax
class 2 Commands
Current
Session Parameters +FDIS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 179
<ln>:
page length
0 A4, 297 mm
1 B4, 364 mm
2 unlimited (default
value)
<df>:
data compression format
0 1-D modified Huffman
(default value)
1 2-D modified read
2 2-D uncompressed mode
3 2-D modified modified
read
<ec>:
error correction
0 disable Fax ECM
<bf>:
binary file transfer
0 disable
<st>:
scan time per line
if
<vr>=0 if <vr>=1
0 0 ms (default) 0 ms
(default)
1 5 ms 5 ms
2 10 ms 5 ms
3 10 ms 10 ms
4 20 ms 10 ms
5 20 ms 20 ms
6 40 ms 20 ms
7 40 ms 40 ms
26.10.4.
Parameter Storage
The parameters are
stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can be
restored using
AT&F.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Fax
class 2 Commands
Current
Session Parameters +FDIS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 180
26.10.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+FDIS=? (0,1),(0-5),(0-2),(0-2),(0-3),
(0),(0),(0-7)
OK
AT+FDIS=,4
Note:
Change bit rate
OK
AT+FDIS? 0,4,0,2,0,0,0,0
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Fax
class 2 Commands
DCE
Capabilities Parameters +FDCC
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 181
26.11.
DCE Capabilities Parameters +FDCC
26.11.1.
Description
This command allows
the DTE to configure the capabilities used for the any session.
Note: This
command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.
26.11.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+FDCC=[<vr>][,[<br>][,[<wd>][,[<ln>][,[<df>][,[<ec>][,[<bf>][,[<st>]]]]]]]]
OK
Read command
AT+FDCC?
<vr>,<br>,<wd>,<ln>,<df>,<ec>,<bf>,<st>
OK
Test command
AT+FDCC=?
(list of supported
<vr>s),(list of supported <br>s),(list of supported
<wd>s),(list
of supported <ln>s),(list
of supported <df>s),(list of supported <ec>s),(list of
supported <bf>s),(list of
supported <st>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Fax
class 2 Commands
DCE
Capabilities Parameters +FDCC
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 182
26.11.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<vr>:
vertical resolution
0 normal: 98 LPI (default
value)
1 fine: 196 LPI
<br>:
bit rate
0 2400 bps (modem type
V.27 ter)
1 4800 bps (modem type
V.27 ter)
2 7200 bps (modem type
V.29)
3 9600 bps (modem type
V.29, V.17). (default value if "DATA144" feature
IS NOT supported)
4 12000 bps (modem type
V.33, V.17)
only when product
supports "DATA144" feature
5 14400 bps (modem type
V.33, V.17). (default value if "DATA144" feature
IS supported)
only when product
supports "DATA144" feature
<wd>:
page width
0 1728 pixels in 215 mm
(default value)
1 2048 pixels in 255 mm
2 2432 pixels in 303 mm
<ln>:
page length
0 A4, 297 mm
1 B4, 364 mm
2 unlimited (default
value)
<df>:
data compression format
0 1-D modified Huffman
(default value)
1 2-D modified read
2 2-D uncompressed mode
3 2-D modified modified
read
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Fax class
2 Commands
DCE
Capabilities Parameters +FDCC
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 183
<ec>:
error correction
0 disable Fax ECM
<bf>:
binary file transfer
0 disable
<st>:
scan time per line
if
<vr>=0 if <vr>=1
0 0 ms (default) 0 ms (default)
1 5 ms 5 ms
2 10 ms 5 ms
3 10 ms 10 ms
4 20 ms 10 ms
5 20 ms 20 ms
6 40 ms 20 ms
7 40 ms 40 ms
26.11.4.
Parameter Storage
The parameters are
stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can be
restored using
AT&F.
26.11.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+FDCC=? (0,1),(0-5),(0-2),(0-2),(0-3),
(0),(0),(0-7)
OK
AT+FDCC=,4 OK
Note:
Change bit rate
AT+FDCC? 0,4,0,2,0,0,0,0
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Fax
class 2 Commands
Local
ID String +FLID
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 184
26.12.
Local ID String +FLID
26.12.1.
Description
This command defines
or queries the local ID string.
Note:
This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.
26.12.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+FLID=<string>
OK
Read command
AT+FLID?
<string>
OK
Test command
AT+FLID=?
(<nb_characters>),(list of
supported <ascii_code>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Fax
class 2 Commands
Local
ID String +FLID
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 185
26.12.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<string>:
local ID string
string type
default value: empty
string
<nb_characters>:
maximum number of characters
integer type
default value: 20
<ascii_code>:
allowed ASCII code
range: 32-127
26.12.4.
Parameter Storage
The <string>
parameter is stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can
be
restored using
AT&F.
26.12.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+FLID=? (20),(32-127)
OK
AT+FLID="local
ID string" OK
AT+FLID? local ID string
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Fax
class 2 Commands
Page
Transfer Timeout Parameter +FPHCTO
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 186
26.13.
Page Transfer Timeout Parameter +FPHCTO
26.13.1.
Description
This command sets
the time interval during which the embedded module expects another page
before it assumes
there are no more pages and aborts.
Note:
This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.
26.13.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+FPHCTO=<time_out>
OK
Read command
AT+FPHCTO?
<time_out>
OK
Test command
AT+FPHCTO=?
(list of supported
<time_out>s)
OK
26.13.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<time_out>:
waiting period for another page in units of 100 ms.
range: 0-255 (default
value: 30)
26.13.4.
Parameter Storage
The <time_out>
parameter is stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can
be restored using
AT&F.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Fax
class 2 Commands
Page
Transfer Timeout Parameter +FPHCTO
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 187
26.13.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+FPHCTO=? (0-255)
OK
AT+FPHCTO=50 OK
AT+FPHCTO? 50
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Fax
class 2 Commands
Additional
Fax Class 2 indication messages
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 188
26.14.
Additional Fax Class 2 indication messages
26.14.1.
Description
The following
messages are used to indicate DCE Responses. They are used in communication
only.
The +FCON response
indicates a connection with a fax machine.
The +FCFR response
indicates confirmation to receive.
The +FTSI response
reports the received transmit station ID string.
The +FCSI response
reports the received called station ID string.
The +FHNG response
reports the hang-up cause. It indicates that the call has been terminated.
Note:
This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.
26.14.2.
Syntax
Unsolicited response
+FCON
Unsolicited response
+FCFR
Unsolicited response
+FTSI:
"<string>"
Unsolicited response
+FCSI:
"<string>"
Unsolicited response
+FHNG: <cause>
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Fax
class 2 Commands
Additional
Fax Class 2 indication messages
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 189
26.14.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<cause>:
hang-up cause
0-9 normal end of
connection.
10-19 transmit phase A
error
20-39 transmit phase B
error
40-49 transmit phase C
error
50-69 transmit phase D
error
70-89 receive phase B
error
90-99 receive phase C
error
100-119 receive phase D
error
<string>:
remote ID string
string type
26.14.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
26.14.5.
Examples
None.
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 190
27.
Remote Device Management
Services
Commands
27.1.
Device Services Configuration +WDSC
27.1.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command allows a user to configure:
the
user agreement for connection, package download and package install
the
polling mode to make a connection to the Device Services server
the
retry mode to attempt a new connection to the server when
the GPRS service is
temporarily out of
order or when a http error occurs
the
mode of automatic registration to the AirPrime Managment Services server
27.1.2.
Syntax
For
<Mode>= 0,1,2,3
Action command
AT+WDSC=<Mode>,<State>
OK
For
<Mode>=4
Action command
AT+WDSC=<Mode>,<Timer_1>[[,<Timer_2>]...[,<Timer_n>]]
OK
For
<Mode>=5
Action command
AT+WDSC=<Mode>,<Config>[,<ValidityPeriod>]
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Remote
Device Management Services Commands
Device
Services Configuration +WDSC
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 191
Read command
AT+WDSC?
+WDSC: 0,<State>
+WDSC: 1,<State>
+WDSC: 2,<State>
+WDSC: 3,<State>
+WDSC:
4,<Timer_1>[[,<Timer_2>]...[,<Timer_n>]]
+WDSC:
5,<State>,[<ValidityPeriod>]
OK
Test command
AT+WDSC=?
+WDSC: (list of supported
<Mode>s),(list of supported <State>s) [,(list of
supported <Timer_n>s)]
OK
27.1.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<Mode>:
Mode
0 User agreement for
connection
When this mode is
activated and when a notification SMS is received by the
embedded module, an
indication (see +WDSI indication for more
information) is returned
by the embedded module to request for an
agreement before
connecting to the AirPrime Managment Services server
1 User agreement for
package download
When this mode is
activated, an indication (see +WDSI indication for more
information) is returned
by the embedded module to request for an
agreement before
downloading any package
2 User agreement for
package install
When this mode is
activated, an indication (see +WDSI indication for more
information) is returned
by the embedded module to request for an
agreement before
installing any package
3 Polling mode
The embedded module will
initiate a connection to the Device Services
server according to the
defined timer
4 Retry mode
If an error occurs during
a connection to the Device Services server (GPRS
establishment failed,
http error code received), the embedded module will
initiate a new connection
according to the defined timers. This mechanism is
persistent to the reset
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Remote
Device Management Services Commands
Device
Services Configuration +WDSC
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 192
5 An automatic
registration to the AirPrime Managment Services server can be
configured with this
command:
- network registration:
the registration is done by a GPRS
connection to the server
- MSISDN registration:
the registration is performed by sending a
SMS to the server (this
configuration is useful to obtain the MSISDN of the
embedded module by the
server)
The registration is
performed using +WDSS command.
<State>:
Status of the mode
For <Mode> = 0,1
and 2:
0 disabled (default
value)
1 enabled
For <Mode> = 3:
Value in range [0-525600] (units: min)
0 the polling mode is
deactivated
For <Mode> = 5:
0 No registration is
configured
1 MSISDN registration is
configured
2 Network registration is
configured
<Timer_1>:
Timer between the first failed connection and the next attempt
Value in range [0 to
20160] (units: min)
With value 0, the retry
mode is deactivated
Default value: 15
<Timer_n>:
Timer between the nth failed
attempt connection and the (n+1)th connection
(n<=8)
Value in range [1 to
20160] (units: min)
Default values:
<Timer_2>=60
<Timer_3>=240
<Timer_4>=960
<Timer_5>=2880
<Timer_6>=10080
<Timer_7>=10080
<Timer_8> not used
<Config>
Configuration of the automatic registration
1 MSISDN configuration
enabled
2 Network configuration
enabled
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Remote
Device Management Services Commands
Device
Services Configuration +WDSC
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 193
<ValidityPeriod>
Validity period of the SMS sent during the MSISDN registration
This parameter is also
used to arm a timer to re-try the MSISDN registration
This parameter is only
available when the MSISDN registration is enabled.
Default value: 167 (1
day)
Coding:
<ValidityPeriod>
value: Validity period value:
0 to 143
(<ValidityPeriod> + 1) x 5 minutes
144 to 167 12 hours +
((<ValidityPeriod> - 143) x 30
minutes
168 to 196
(<ValidityPeriod> - 166) x 1 day
197 to 255
(<ValidityPeriod> - 192) x 1 week
27.1.4.
Parameter Storage
The <State>,
<Timer_1> and <Timer_n>, <Config> and <ValidityPeriod>
parameters are stored in
non-volatile memory
without sending &W command. &F command has no impact on these values.
27.1.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WDSC=? +WDSC:
(0-2),(0-1)
+WDSC: 3,(0-525600)
+WDSC:
4,(0-20160),(1-20160),(1-20160),(1-
20160),(1-20160),(1-20160),(1-20160),(1-
20160)
+WDSC: 5,(1,2),(0-255)
OK
AT+WDSC? +WDSC: 0,0
+WDSC: 1,0
+WDSC: 2,0
+WDSC: 3,0
+WDSC:
4,15,60,240,960,2880,10080,
10080
+WDSC: 5,0
OK
Note: All modes are deactivated except
retry mode
which used the default timers
AT+WDSC=0,1 OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Remote
Device Management Services Commands
Device
Services Configuration +WDSC
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 194
Command
Responses
AT+WDSC? +WDSC: 0,1
+WDSC: 1,0
+WDSC: 2,0
+WDSC: 3,0
+WDSC:
4,15,60,240,960,2880,10080,
10080
+WDSC: 5,0
OK
AT+WDSC=5,1 OK
AT+WDSC? +WDSC: 0,1
+WDSC: 1,0
+WDSC: 2,0
+WDSC: 3,0
+WDSC:
4,15,60,240,960,2880,10080,
10080
+WDSC: 5,1,167
OK
27.1.6.
Notes
The switch between
the two registration modes is not possible when a registration mode has been
set.
When the registration
has failed, a new registration (same or different) can be set again.
In network
registration case, the registration is considered as failed when all
connections configured
by the retry mode
have failed. This registration is forbidden while the APN is not set by the
+WDSS
command.
In MSISDN
registration case, a new SMS is sent when:
the
time since the last registration SMS sent reaches the validity period
<ValidyPeriod>
the
SMS was not acknowledged by a SMS report
no
SMS was received from the AirPrime Managment Services server
Four new attempts
are made before the registration. When all attempts are made and a SMS is
received from the
server, the registration state (see +WDSI command)
changes from failed to done.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Remote
Device Management Services Commands
Device
Services Error +WDSE
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 195
27.2.
Device Services Error +WDSE
27.2.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command allows a user to know the last HTTP response received by
the device.
27.2.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WDSE
[+WDSE: <HTTP_Status>]
OK
Read command
None
Test command
None
27.2.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<HTTP_Status>:
Last HTTP response received by the embedded module
100 continue
101 switching protocols
200 ok
201 created
202 accepted
203 non-authoritative
information
204 no content
205 reset content
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Remote
Device Management Services Commands
Device
Services Error +WDSE
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 196
206 partial content
300 multiple choices
301 moved permanently
302 found
303 see other
304 not modified
305 use proxy
307 temporary redirect
400 bad request
401 unauthorized
402 payment required
403 forbidden
404 not found
405 method not allowed
406 not acceptable
407 proxy authentication
required
408 request time-out
409 conflict
410 gone
411 length required
412 precondition failed
413 request entity too
large
414 request-uri too large
415 unsupported media
type
416 requested range not
satisfiable
417 expectation failed
500 internal server error
501 not implemented
502 bad gateway
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Remote
Device Management Services Commands
Device
Services Error +WDSE
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 197
503 service unavailable
504 gateway time-out
505 http version not
supported
Note: If
no session was made with the server, AT+WDSE only returns with OK response,
without any
+WDSE:
<HTTP_Status> response.
27.2.4.
Parameter Storage
No parameter
storage.
27.2.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WDSS=1,1 OK
Note: A
session was made with the server.
AT+WDSE +WDSE: 200
OK
Note:
The last HTTP response received by the embedded
module
is OK.
27.2.6.
Notes
This command returns
+CME ERROR: 3 when:
a
parameter is filled
the
Device services are not in ACTIVATED state (see +WDSG command
for more
information)
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Remote
Device Management Services Commands
Device
Services Fallback +WDSF
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 198
27.3.
Device Services Fallback +WDSF
27.3.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command allows a user to get back a previous
installation or to
delete a package
(only if a reverse patch is present).
27.3.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WDSF=<Mode>
OK
Read command
AT+WDSF?
+WDSF: 1,<FallbackInfo>
+WDSF: 2,<EraseInfo>
OK
Test command
AT+WDSF=?
+WDSF: (1,2)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Remote
Device Management Services Commands
Device
Services Fallback +WDSF
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 199
27.3.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<Mode>:
Mode
1 downgrade to a previous
installation
2 delete the download
package which contains the reverse patch
<FallbackInfo>:
Indicate the presence of the previous package
0 previous package is not
present
1 previous package is
present
<EraseInfo>:
Indicate if a package can be deleted. This case is only
available if A&D memory
was pre-empted to allow
the package download (See +WDSI command for more
information). Be careful,
erasing the package will disable the possibility to make
any recovery or manual
fallback
0 package cannot be
deleted
1 package can be deleted
27.3.4.
Parameter Storage
The parameters are
not stored.
27.3.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WDSF? +WDSF: 1,1
+WDSF: 2,0
OK
Note: A
reverse package is present,no A&D memory pre-emption
AT+WDSF=1 OK
Note:
Downgrade to the previous installation
+WDSI: 17,1
Note:
Downgrade the package successfully done.
27.3.6.
Notes
The result of the
operation (+WDSI) is displayed only if +WDSI indication is activated (see +WDSI
for
more information)
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Remote
Device Management Services Commands
Device
Services General status +WDSG
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 200
27.4.
Device Services General status +WDSG
27.4.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command returns some general status about Device Services.
27.4.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WDSG
+WDSG:
<Indication>,<State>
[+WDSG:
<Indication>,<State>[
]]
OK
Read command
None
Test command
AT+WDSG=?
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Remote
Device Management Services Commands
Device
Services General status +WDSG
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 201
27.4.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<Indication>:
Indication
0 device services
activation state
1 session and package
indication
<State>:
Status of an indication
For <Indication>=0
0 device services are
prohibited. Device services will never be activated
1 device services are
deactivated. Connection parameters to a Device Services
server have to be
provisioned
2 device services have to
be provisioned. NAP parameters have to be provisioned
3 device services are
activated
If a device has never
been activated (first used of device services on this device),
the <State> is set
to 1
The connection parameters
are automatically provisioned, no action are needed
by the user
(<State>=2 or <State>=3)
The device will be
activated (<State>=3) when a dedicated NAP will be set
manually or automatically
at the first session (see +WDSS command for more
information)
For <Indication>=1
0 no session or package
1 a session is under
treatment
2 a package is available
on the server
3 a package was downloaded
and ready to install
When a package was
installed or not (not certified to be sent by the AirPrime
Managment Services
server, see +WDSI command for more information) or a
recovery was made, the
<State> is set to 0.
27.4.4.
Parameter Storage
No storage.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Remote
Device Management Services Commands
Device
Services General status +WDSG
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 202
27.4.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WDSG=? OK
AT+WDSG +WDSG: 0,3
+WDSG: 1,0
OK
Note:
Device services are activated, no session to the server, no
patch to
download or to install.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Remote
Device Management Services Commands
Device
Services Reply +WDSR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 203
27.5.
Device Services Reply +WDSR
27.5.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command allows a user to respond to the Device Services server
request when user
agreement is requested for connection, download and/or package install (see
+WDSI command
for more information).
27.5.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WDSR=<Reply>[,<Timer>]
OK
Read command
None
Test command
AT+WDSR=?
+WDSR: (list of supported
<Reply>s),(list of supported <Timer>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Remote
Device Management Services Commands
Device
Services Reply +WDSR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 204
27.5.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<Reply>:
Reply to a user agreement request (see +WDSI
command description for more
information) from the
embedded module
0 delay or refuse the
connection to the server
1 accept the connection
to the server
2 delay or refuse to
download
3 accept the download
(download now)
4 accept the install
(Install now)
5 delay the install
(Install later)
<Timer>:
Timer until a new User agreement request is returned by the
embedded module
This parameter is only
available for <Reply>=0, 2 and 5
Units: minutes (0-1440)
When this value is not
filled, a default value is set to 30 minutes later
Value 0 indicates that
the application refuses the user agreement (impossible for
<Reply>=5)
27.5.4.
Parameter Storage
No parameter
storage.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Remote
Device Management Services Commands
Device
Services Reply +WDSR
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 205
27.5.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WDSR=? +WDSR:
(0-5),(0-1440)
OK
+WDSI: 1
Note:
The Device Services server requests the device to make a
connection
to the server. The user is requested to allow the
connection.
AT+WDSR=1 OK
+WDSI: 3
Note: A
user agreement is requested to install a package
AT+WDSR=5,10 OK
Note: A
delay (10 minutes) is requested.
+WDSI: 3
Note: 10
minutes later, a new user agreement is requested to
install
a package.
AT+WDSR=4 OK
Note:
The install is requested.
27.5.6.
Notes
It is not possible
to refuse an install request (AT+WDSR=5,0), which will return +CME ERROR: 3
response.
After an install
delay, if the embedded module is powered-down, it is not powered-on and the new
user agreement
request will be returned during the next start up.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Remote
Device Management Services Commands
Device
Services Session +WDSS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 206
27.6.
Device Services Session +WDSS
27.6.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command allows a user to configure a dedicated NAP and to initiate
a connection to the Device
Services server.
This command is also
used to activate an automatic registration to the AirPrime Managment Services
server.
27.6.2.
Syntax
For
<Mode>=0
Action command
AT+WDSS=<Mode>,<Apn>[,<User>[,<Pwd>]]
OK
For
<Mode>=1
Action command
AT+WDSS=<Mode>,<Action>
OK
For
<Mode>=2
Action command
AT+WDSS=<Mode>
OK
Read command
AT+WDSS?
[+WDSS:
0,<Apn>[,<User>]]
[+WDSS: 1,<Action>]
[+WDSS: 2,<State>]
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Remote
Device Management Services Commands
Device
Services Session +WDSS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 207
Test command
AT+WDSS=?
+WDSS: 0,(Max length for
<Apn>),(Max length for <User>),(Max length for <Pwd>)
+WDSS: 1,(list of supported
<Action>s for this <Mode>)
+WDSS: 2,(list of supported
<State>)
OK
27.6.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<Mode>:
Mode
0 PDP context configuration
for Device Services
1 user initiated
connection to the Device Services server
2 activate the automatic
registration
<Apn>:
access point name for Device Services
string type, up to 50
chars
<User>:
login for the APN
string type, up to 30
chars
<Pwd>:
password for the APN
string type, up to 30
chars
<Action>:
For <Mode>=1 only
0 release the current
connection to the Device Services server (default value)
1 establish a connection
to the Device Services server
<State>:
state of the automatic registration on the AirPrime Managment
Services server
0 configuration is not
set with +WDSC command
1 a registration mode is
configured with +WDSC command
2 registration is
activated
3 registration in
progress
4 registration failed
5 registration done
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Remote
Device Management Services Commands
Device
Services Session +WDSS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 208
27.6.4.
Parameter Storage
<User> and
<Pwd> parameters are stored in flash without using &W command. &F
has no effect on
these parameters.
<Apn>
parameter is stored in E2P.
27.6.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WDSS=? +WDSS:
0,50,30,30
+WDSS: 1,(0-1)
+WDSS: 2
OK
AT+WDSS? OK
Note: No
APN is defined.
AT+WDSS=0,"Sierra
Wireless"
Note:
Define the APN for Device Services: Sierra Wireless
OK
AT+WDSS? +WDSS:
0,"Sierra Wireless"
+WDSS: 1,0
+WDSS: 2,0
OK
Note: No
connection to the server and the used PDP context for
the next
connection is the one defined by the provisioning
AT+WDSS=1,1 OK
Note:
The user initiates a connection to the Device Services
server
AT+WDSS=1,0 OK
Note:
The user releases the current connection to the Device
Services
server.
AT+WDSS=2 OK
Note:
The automatic registration is performed (depend on the
configuration
set by +WDSC)
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Remote
Device Management Services Commands
Device
Services Session +WDSS
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 209
27.6.6.
Notes
27.6.6.1.
Activation of dedicated PDP context
When no dedicated
NAP is defined using +WDSS command and a session is asked (by AT command
or notify by SMS),
the embedded module will use a NAP defined by +CGDCONT command to activate
the dedicated PDP
context. This NAP will be recorded to configure the NAP Device Services and it
will be used to
activate the dedicated PDP context for the next sessions.
When the PDP context
cannot be activated because of bad AirPrime Managment Services NAP
configuration, the
embedded module will use a NAP defined by +CGDCONT command to activate the
dedicated PDP
context (but the initial NAP configuration is not erased).
27.6.6.2.
AT command behaviour
AT+WDSS? command
returns only OK if no APN is defined.
When a request is
sent to the Wireless Microprocesserฎ to
resume an inexistent or unsuspended
session, +CME ERROR:
3 is returned.
When a request is
sent to the Wireless Microprocesserฎ to
release an inexistent session, +CME
ERROR: 3 is
returned.
27.6.6.3.
Registration information
The activation of
the automatic registration depends on the configuration which was done with
+WDSC:
If
the network registration was set, the embedded module try to connect to the
AirPrime
Managment Services
server with a GPRS connection
If
the MSISDN registration was set, a SMS is sent to the AirPrime Managment
Services
server
The activation is
done if the embedded module is registered on the network. If the embedded
module
is not registered
when the command is performed, the activation will be done at the next network
registration (even
if the embedded module resets).
If MSISDN registration
is configured, a new SMS is automatically sent when the SIM is changed.
No GPRS connection
to the AirPrime Managment Services server is possible when a registration is
not completed.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Remote
Device Management Services Commands
Device
Services Indications +WDSI
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 210
27.7.
Device Services Indications +WDSI
27.7.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command allows the user to request some unsolicited indication for
Device Services.
27.7.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WDSI=<Level>
OK
Read command
AT+WDSI=?
[+WDSI: <Level>
OK
Test command
AT+WDSI=?
+WDSI: (list of supported
<Level>s)
OK
Unsolicited response
+WDSI: <Event>[,Data>]
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Remote
Device Management Services Commands
Device
Services Indications +WDSI
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 211
27.7.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<Level>:
Indication level, bit field (default value = 0)
bit set to 0: indication
deactivated
bit set to 1: indication
activated
0 no indication
1 (bit 0) activate the
initialization end indication (<Event>=0)
2 (bit 1) activate the
server request for a user agreement indication (<Event>=1,2,3)
4 (bit 2) activate the
authentication indications (<Event> = 4 & 5)
8 (bit 3) activate the
session start indication (<Event> = 6, 7 & 8)
16 (bit 4) activate the
package download indications (<Event> = 9, 10 & 11)
32 (bit 5) activate the
certified downloaded package indication (<Event> = 12 & 13)
64 (bit 6) activate the
update indications (<Event> = 14, 15 & 16)
128 (bit 7) activate the
fallback indication (<Event> = 17)
256 (bit 8) activate
download progress indication (<Event>=18)
512 (bit 9) activate
memory pre-emption indication (<Event>=19)
1024 (bit 10) activate
User Pin request indication for bootstrap (<Event>=20)
2048 (bit 11) Activate
provisioning indication (<Event>=21)
4096 (bit 12) Activate
automatic registration indication (<Event>=22)
<Event>:
0 device services are
initialized and can be used. Devices services are initialized
when the SIM PIN code is
entered and a dedicated NAP is configured (see
+WDSS command)
1 the Device
Services server requests the device to make a connection. The device
requests a user agreement
to allow the embedded module to make the
connection. The response
can be sent using +WDSR command and this
indication can be
returned by the device if the user has activated the user
agreement for connection
(see +WDSC command for more information)
2 the Device
Services server requests the device to make a package download.
The device requests a
user agreement to allow the embedded module to make
the download. The
response can be sent using +WDSR command and this
indication can be
returned by the device if the user has activated the user
agreement for download
(see +WDSC command for more information).
3 the device has
downloaded a package. The device requests a user agreement to
install the downloaded
package. The response can be sent using +WDSR
command and this
indication can be returned by the device if the user has
activated the user
agreement for install (see +WDSC command for more
information).
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Remote
Device Management Services Commands
Device
Services Indications +WDSI
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 212
4 the embedded module
starts sending data to the server
5 authentication with the
server failed
6 authentication has
succeeded, a session with the server started
7 session with the server
failed
8 session with the server
is finished
9 a package is available
on the server and can be downloaded by the embedded
module. A <Data>
parameter is returned indicating the package size in kB
10 a package was
successfully downloaded and stored in flash
11 an issue happens
during the package download. If the download has not started
(+WDSI: 9 indication was
not returned), this indication indicates that there is not
enough space in the
device to download the update package. If the download has
started (+WDSI: 9
indication was returned), a flash problem implies that the
package has not been
saved in the device
12 downloaded package is
certified to be sent by the AirPrime Managment Services
server
13 downloaded package is
not certified to be sent by the AirPrime Managment
Services server
14 update will be
launched
15 OTA update client has
finished unsuccessfully
16 OTA update client has
finished successfully
17 a fallback mechanism
was launched
18 download progress.
This event is returned without <Data> parameter to indicate
that a download starts.
During the download, a percentage progress is indicated
in <Data> parameter
19 memory pre-emption for
a package download. This event is returned when a
memory pre-emption is
needed on A&D volume to store the package which is
available on the AirPrime
Managment Services server. The <Data> parameter
indicates how many 64kB
sectors are pre-empted. When the pre-emption is over,
this event is also
returned without <Data> parameter
20 a Bootstrap SMS was
received and a User Pin is requested (See +WDSB
command for more
information)
21 A provision was made
by the AirPrime Managment Services server
22 Automatic registration
status
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Remote
Device Management Services Commands
Device
Services Indications +WDSI
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 213
<Data>:
Specific data for some <event>
For <Event>=5 To be
defined
For <Event>=9
<Data> indicates the package size in bytes, which will be downloaded
<Data> indicates
the pre-empted DOTA area size needed to download an update
package.
Unit: kBytes.
If pre-emption is not
made, this parameter is not returned for this event.
If a reverse package is
not downloaded and stored, the pre-empted area will be
released after the
installation.
For <Event>=17
<Data> indicates if the fallback was asked by the user or applied because
a
recovery was necessary
0 automatic recovery (a
recovery mechanism was made)
1 fallback asked by the
user (see +WDSF command for more information)
For <Event>=18
<Data> indicates the download progress in percentage
For <Event>=19
<Data> indicates the number of 64k sector which is pre-empted for the
package
download (See Notes). If
pre-emption is not made, this parameter is not returned
for this event. If a
reverse package is not downloaded and stored, the pre-empted
area will be released
after the installation.
For <Event>=21
<Data> indicates the provisioned parameters
0 Commercial feature (a
reset is needed to take into account this update) (See
+WCFM command)
1 Alarm (see +CALA
command)
2 Echo cancellation (see +ECHO command)
3 Greeting (see +CGMI
command)
4 Preferred PLMN (see
+CPOL command)
5 PDP context (see
+CGDCONT and +WDSS commands)
6 SIM PIN code activation
state (see +CLCK command)
7 Voice codec (see +WVR command)
8 GPRS class (see
+CGCLASS command)
9 Device Service Polling
mode (see +WDSC command for more information)
10 Network selection (see
+WDSC command for more information)
11 Open ATฎ application
activation state (see +WOPEN command)
12 Retry mode (see +WDSC command
for more information (mode 4))
For <Event>=22
<Data> indicates the state of the automatic registration
0 Registration in
progress
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Remote
Device Management Services Commands
Device
Services Indications +WDSI
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 214
1 Registration failed
(after retries)
2 Registration succeeded
27.7.4.
Parameter Storage
The <Level>
parameter is stored in EEPROM without using AT&W command. The default value
can
be restored using
AT&F.
27.7.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WDSI=? +WDSI: (0-8191)
OK
AT+WDSI? +WDSI: 0
OK
Note:
All indications are deactivated
AT+WDSI=8191 OK
+WDSI: 1
Note:
The Device Services server requests a connection to the
embedded
module
AT+WDSR=1
Note:
Accept the connection
OK
+WDSI: 4
Note:
The embedded module will send the first data to the
AirPrime
Managment Services server.
+WDSI: 6
Note:
The authentication succeeded
+WDSI: 8
Note:
The session with the server is over.
+WDSI: 9,1000
Note: A
package will be downloaded, the size is 1kbytes
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Remote
Device Management Services Commands
Device
Services Indications +WDSI
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 215
Command Responses
+WDSI: 18, "1%"
Note: 1%
was downloaded
+WDSI: 18,"100%"
Note:
The whole package was donwloaded
+WDSI: 10
Note:
The whole package was stored in flash.
27.7.6.
Notes
To receive +WDSI
indications, the Device Services should be in activated state (see +WDSG
command for more
information).
When a package is
available on the AirPrime Managment Services server, the embedded module
checks if enough
space is available in a dedicated memory area.
This dedicated area
is size to 1 64kB sector on 32Mb flash and 4 64kB sectors on 64Mb and 128Mb
flash.
When the package to
be downloaded is bigger than the dedicated area size, the embedded module
will pre-empt the
sufficient memory size on A&D memory area. This will be only available if
the A&D
memory contains
sufficient free memory. The A&D memory size can be configured using +WOPEN
command.
When the package is
downloaded, the embedded module tries to install it. After installing it, a new
+WDSI:
19,<Data> can be returned by the embedded module if the package contains
a reverse
patch. In this case,
the package is not deleted after the install in order to keep the possibility
to make
a manual fallback
(using +WDSF command).
If the package does
not contain a reverse patch, in this case, the embedded module will delete the
downloaded package
in order to resize the package dedicated area to the default size and +WDSI: 19
(without
<Data> parameter> is returned by the embedded module.
If the downloaded
package is not certified (bad CRC, bad signature, not correspond to the current
software), this
package is automatically deleted in order to resize the package dedicated area
to the
default size. In
this case also, +WDSI: 19 (without <Data> parameter> is returned by
the embedded
module.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Remote
Device Management Services Commands
Device
Services Bootstrap +WDSB
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 216
27.8.
Device Services Bootstrap +WDSB
27.8.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command allows a user to enter the User Pin for the Bootstrap SMS
treatment.
27.8.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WDSB=<UserPin>
OK
Read command
AT+WDSB?
+WDSB: <BootStatus>
OK
Test command
None
27.8.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<UserPin>:
User Pin which is filled on AirPrime Managment Services server.
This User Pin is
needed in order to treat
a Bootstrap SMS
Length: up to 20 digits.
<BootStatus>:
Status of Bootstrap SMS
0 no Bootstrap SMS was
received. No User Pin is required
1 a Bootstrap SMS was
received. A User Pin is required
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Remote
Device Management Services Commands
Device
Services Bootstrap +WDSB
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 217
27.8.4.
Parameter Storage
No storage.
27.8.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
+WDSI: 20
Note: A
Bootstrap SMS was received. A user Pin is requested.
AT+WDSB=1234 OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Remote
Device Management Services Commands
Device
Services Host +WDSH
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 218
27.9.
Device Services Host +WDSH
27.9.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command allows a user to define all host applications
that can use
the update mechanism
using AirPrime Managment Services and acknowledge an update for a host
application. An
upload mechanism is available for UART using 1K-Xmodem protocol.
27.9.2.
Syntax
For
<Mode>=0, 1, 2, 3, 4
Action command
AT+WDSH=<Mode>,<Name>[,<Version>,<PhysicalPort>]
OK
For
<Mode>=5
Action command
AT+WDSH=<Mode>,<Name>
OK
Read command
AT+WDSH?
+WDSH:
<Name>,<Version>,<PhysicalPort>
[+WDSH:
<Name>,<Version>,<PhysicalPort>[
]]
OK
Test command
AT+WDSH?
+WDSH: (list of supported
<Mode>s),<Nlength>,<Vlength>,(list of supported
<PhysicalPort>s)
OK
Unsolicited response
+WDSH: <Name>
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Remote
Device Management Services Commands
Device
Services Host +WDSH
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 219
27.9.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<Mode>:
Mode
0 declare and delete a
host application
To add a host
application, a <Name>, a <Version> and a <PhysicalPort>,
parameters have to be
filled.
To delete a host
application, only the <Name> parameter has to be filled.
1 acknowledge the host
application update install
To acknowledge that a
host application update install succeeded, the <Name>,
<Version> and
<PhysicalPort> parameters have to be filled. <Name> and
<Version>
parameters can be different that the previous one declared.
2 update was not made
To acknowledge that a
host application update install failed, the <Name>,
<Version> and
<PhysicalPort> parameters have to be filled. Those parameters
have to be the same as
the previous one declared. If one of these parameters is
different from the
previous one declared, the command returns an error.
3 a recovery was made on
a host application
To acknowledge that a
host application recovery was made, the <Name>,
<Version> and
<PhysicalPort> parameters have to be filled. <Name> and
<Version>
parameters can be different from the previous one declared.
4 a fallback was made on
a host application
To acknowledge that a
host application fallback was made, the <Name>,
<Version> and
<PhysicalPort> parameters have to be filled. <Name> and
<Version>
parameters can be different from the previous one declared.
5 launch the upload on
one UART, using 1K-X modem protocol
<Name>:
Host application name. ASCII string, up to 50 characters.
<Version>:
Version of the customer host application. ASCII string, up to 50
characters.
<PhysicalPort>:
Physical Port where the version and the name of a host
application were
declared. The possible
value of this field depends on the embedded module
hardware capabilities.
UARTx: UART number x
SPIx: SPI bus number x
I2Cx: I2C bus number x
PARALLEL: parallel bus x
X is a digit which depends
on the platform. Please refer to the platform Product
Technical Specifications.
Note:
Parallel bus and SPI2 are not supported by the AirPrime SL6087
module.
<Vlength>:
maximum length for <Version>, equal to 50.
<Nlength>:
maximum length for <Name>, equal to 50
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Remote
Device Management Services Commands
Device
Services Host +WDSH
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 220
27.9.4.
Parameter Storage
All parameter
(except <Mode>) are stored in flash without using AT&W command.
AT&F command
has no effect on
these parameters.
27.9.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WDSH=? +WDSH:
(0-5),50,50,(UART1-2,USB1,SPI1-
2,I2C1)
OK
Note: On
the device, 2 UARTS, 1 USB, 2 SPI and 1 I2C are
available.
AT+WDSH=0,Host1,v1.0,UART1
Note:
Declare the host application on UART 1.
OK
AT+WDSH? +WDSH:
Host1,v1.0,UART1
OK
Note:
The host application was declared on UART 1
AT+WDSH=0,New
Host,v1.1,UART1
Note: Declare the host application on UART1.
OK
AT+WDSH? +WDSH: Host1,v1.0,UART1
+WDSH: New Host,v1.1,UART1
OK
AT+WDSH=0,Host2,v2,UART2
Note: Declare the host application on UART2.
OK
AT+WDSH? +WDSH:
Host1,v1.0,UART1
+WDSH: Host2,v2,UART2
+WDSH: New Host,v1.1,UART1
OK
AT+WDSH=0,Host2
Note: Delete host application which name is
Host2
OK
AT+WDSH? +WDSH:
Host1,v1.0,UART1
+WDSH: New Host,v1.1,UART1
OK
AT+WDSS=1,1 OK
+WDSI: 18,1500
Note:
User agreement for host application package download
(1500
kBytes)
+WDSH: Host1
Note:
The downloaded package is a package for the host
application
which name is Host1
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Remote
Device Management Services Commands
Device
Services Host +WDSH
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 221
Command
Responses
AT+WDSH=5,Host1
Note:
Launch the upload
C
Note:
C character launches the updload using 1K
Xmodem
protocol.
<data>
Note:
Package data for Host 1 transmitted on the port where
AT+WDSH=5,
command was sent.
AT+WDSH=1,Host1,v1.1,UART1
Note:
Acknowledge the update, indicating the new version
and the
same name
OK
AT+WDSH=1,Host1.1,v1.1,UART1
Note:
Acknowledge the update, indicating the new version
and the
new name.
OK
AT+WDSH=2,Host1,v1.0,UART1
Note:
The update was not made
OK
27.9.6.
Notes
Up to 10 host
applications can be defined on one Physical port.
The <Name>
parameter MUST be different for each host application. If space is present at
the end of
the name, these
spaces are removed. Therefore the following names are considered as the same:
name and name .
In AT+WDSH?
response, the host application is sorted by name.
When
AT+WDSH=5,<Name> is sent to the embedded module, the embedded module is
waiting for
ASCII C character
(0x43) to start the upload.
Host application
states:
Defined:
This is the initial state for a host application. In this state, <Mode>=0
only is
supported for the
host application.
Downloaded:
The host application is set to that state when the +WDSH: <Name>
unsolicited
response is returned
by the embedded module. In this state, <Mode>=0 and 4 cannot be
used. The allowed
modes are <Mode>=1, 2, 3 and 5.
Updated:
The host application is set to that state when the +WDSH command with
<Mode>=1
is received by the
embedded module. In this state, the allowed modes are <Mode>=3 and 4.
Parallel bus and
SPI2 are not supported in the AirPrime SL6087 module.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Remote
Device Management Services Commands
Device
Services Local Download +WDSD
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 222
27.10.
Device Services Local Download +WDSD
27.10.1.
Description
This Sierra Wireless
proprietary command allows a customer to download an update
package to the
device using a local
port.
The response to
AT+WDSD=<Size> command is <NACK> character when the device is ready
to
receive data using
1K-Xmodem protocol.
After having
downloaded the whole package, the device will return an OK response (response
to the
+WDSD command).
After the OK
response, the package is ready to be installed using +WDSR command.
If an error occurs
during the download, a +CME ERROR: 3 is returned.
27.10.2.
Syntax
Action command
AT+WDSD=<Size>
<Nack>
OK
Read command
None
Test command
AT+WDSD=?
+WDSD: (list of supported
<Size>s)
OK
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Remote
Device Management Services Commands
Device
Services Local Download +WDSD
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 223
27.10.3.
Parameters and Defined Values
<Size>:
Package size in bytes.
The possible range for
this parameter depends on flash capability and on A&D
configuration (see +WOPEN
command description, parameter <A&DSize> of
AT+WOPEN=6 command
response).
MaxSize value differs
according to the flash memory size:
1024 Kbytes for 32Mbits
Flash size, 4864 Kbytes for 64Mbits flash size and 13056
Kbytes for 128Mbits flash
size.
27.10.4.
Parameter Storage
None.
27.10.5.
Examples
Command
Responses
AT+WDSD=? +WDSD:
(0-851968)
OK
AT+WOPEN=6 +WOPEN:
6,832,448
OK
AT+WDSD=1000
Note:
Download a 1kBytes package
<NACK>
Note:
The device is ready to receive data
Send Data
OK
Note:
All data are well received by the embedded module
+WDSI: 3
Note: A
package is ready to be installed (see +WDSI and
+WDSR commands
description).
27.10.6.
Notes
The flow control of
the hyperterminal has to be set to Hardware.
This command will
automatically activate the user agreement for install (see +WDSC
command
description).
No reset is made
during the package download.
A timeout will
happen (and a +CME ERROR: 3 is returned) if no data is sent to the device
during 5
minutes.
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 224
Index
ADC, 119
CLVL, 18
CMUT, 16
CPHS, 137
CRMP, 87
CRSL, 11
ECHO, 53
FBOR, 170
FBUF, 172
FCQ, 174
FCR, 176
FDCC, 182
FDIS, 178
FDR, 164
FDT, 163
FET, 165
FK, 169
FLID, 185
FPHCTO, 187
FPTS, 167
FRH, 157
FRM, 153
FRS, 161
FTH, 155
FTM, 151
FTS, 159
SIDET, 22
SPEAKER, 7
T, 99
VGR, 27
VGT, 30
VIP, 97
VTD, 64
VTS, 66
WADF, 47
WADS, 101
WALS, 148
WBCM, 122
WCDM, 93
WCDP, 95
WDDM, 79
WDGR, 34
WDGT, 41
WDIAG, 130
WDSB, 217
WDSC, 191
WDSD, 224
WDSE, 196
WDSF, 199
WDSG, 201
WDSH, 219
WDSI, 211
WDSR, 204
WDSS, 207
WDTMF, 74
WIOM, 106
WIOR, 111
WIOW, 113
WIPC, 115
WMBN, 145
WSST, 82
WTONE, 68
WVR, 61
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079
019
February
18, 2011
Appendix
AT
Commands Interface Guide
for
Firmware 7.45
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 2
Contents
1.
CODES AND
VALUES.........................................................................................4
1.1. ME Error Result
Code: +CME
ERROR.............................................................................4
1.2. Message Service
Failure Result Code: +CMS
ERROR....................................................6
1.3. Specific Error
Result Codes ..............................................................................................7
1.4. Failure Cause from
3GPP TS 24.008 recommendation (+CEER)..................................10
1.5. Specific Failure
Cause for +CEER..................................................................................12
1.6. GSM 04.11 Annex
E-2: Mobile Originating SM-transfer
...............................................13
1.7. Result Codes
...................................................................................................................15
1.8. GSM Sequences
List.......................................................................................................16
1.9. Operator
Names..............................................................................................................19
1.10. CPHS Information
Field...................................................................................................20
1.11. CSP
Constants................................................................................................................21
2.
EXAMPLES........................................................................................................24
2.1. Examples with the
PIN
Required.....................................................................................24
2.2. Examples where a
Voice Call is Originated
....................................................................25
2.3. Example with
Incoming Calls
..........................................................................................26
2.4. Example of a Call
Forwarding
.........................................................................................26
2.5. Example of a
Multiparty
Call............................................................................................27
2.6. Examples about
Phonebooks..........................................................................................27
2.7. Examples about
Short
Messages....................................................................................34
2.8. Examples about Fax
Class
2...........................................................................................35
2.9. +CSIM and +CRSM
Examples........................................................................................37
2.10. + WBHV Examples..........................................................................................................38
2.11. +WDSI Examples
............................................................................................................41
2.12. Full AT GPRS
Commands Examples
.............................................................................47
2.13. Unit test cases
for AT +WOPEN=7 mode
.......................................................................52
2.14. Unit test cases
for AT + WOPEN=8
mode......................................................................54
3.
TECHNICAL APPENDIXES
...............................................................................58
3.1. Working
Modes................................................................................................................58
3.2. Multiplexing Mode
...........................................................................................................61
3.3. Support of SIM
ToolKit by the M.E..................................................................................67
3.4. Structure of
TERMINAL PROFILE
..................................................................................68
3.5. Command Type and
Next Action Indicator. ....................................................................72
3.6. Coding of Alpha
Fields in the SIM for UCS2
...................................................................73
3.7. Specifications of
Power Down Control mechanism through serial Ports (physical
RS232 ports or virtual CMUX ports)
..........................................................................................75
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 3
AT Commands Interface
Guide for Firmware 7.45
3.8. Description of
Multi-Flow
Behavior..................................................................................81
3.9. USB CDC feature
............................................................................................................83
4.
INTEROPERABILITY.........................................................................................86
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 4
1.
Codes and Values
1.1. ME
Error Result Code: +CME ERROR
<error> is
defined as below:
<error>
Meaning Resulting from the following commands
3 Operation not allowed
Access techno param
filled while the
SIM file does not support
it
All GSM 07.07 commands
(+CME ERROR: 3)
+CPOL
4 Operation not supported
All GSM 07.07 commands (+CME ERROR: 4)
5 PH-SIM PIN required
(SIM lock) All GSM 07.07 commands (+CME ERROR: 5)
10 SIM not inserted All
GSM 07.07 commands (+CME ERROR: 10)
11 SIM PIN required All
GSM 07.07 commands (+CME ERROR: 11)
12 SIM PUK required All
GSM 07.07 commands (+CME ERROR: 12)
13 SIM failure All GSM
07.07 commands (+CME ERROR: 13)
16 Incorrect password
Bad user pin
+CACM, +CAMM, +CPUC,
+CLCK, +CPWD, +CPIN,
+CPIN2 (+CME ERROR: 16)
+WDSB
17 SIM PIN2 required
+CPBW (FDN), +CLCK (FDN),
18 SIM PUK2 required
+CACM, +CAMM, +CPUC, +CPBW (FDN), +CPIN,
+CPIN2, +CLCK (FDN), +CPWD
20 Memory full +CPBW,
+WOLM, ATD
21 Invalid index +CPBR,
+CPBW, ATD>[mem]index, +WMGO, +WPGW,
+WOLM
22 Not found +CPBF,
+CPBP, +CPBN, +CGSN, +WOPN,
ATD>[mem]"name"
24 <Apn>,
<User>, <Pwd> too long +CPBW, +CPIN, +CPIN2, +CLCK, +CPWD, +WPGW,
+WCCS, +WIMEI, +WDSS
26 Dial string too long
+CPBW, ATD, +CCFC
27 Invalid characters in
dial string +CPBW
30 No network service
+VTS, +COPS=?, +CLCK, +CCFC, +CCWA, +CUSD,
+CCED
32 Network not allowed
emergency
calls only
+COPS, +CCED
40 Network
personalization PIN required
(Network lock)
All GSM 07.07 commands
(+CME ERROR: 40)
42 Network
personalization PIN required
(Network subset lock)
All GSM 07.07 commands
(+CME ERROR: 42)
44 Network
personalization PIN required
(Service Provider lock)
All GSM 07.07 commands (+CME
ERROR: 44)
46 Network
personalization PIN required
(Corporate lock)
All GSM 07.07 commands
(+CME ERROR: 46)
103 Incorrect MS
identity. +CGATT
106 ME is blacklisted by
the network. +CGATT
107 MS is not allowed to
operate in GPRS. +CGATT
111 MS is not allowed to
operate in the
requested PLMN.
+CGATT
Codes and
Values
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 5
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
<error>
Meaning Resulting from the following commands
112 MS is not allowed to
make location
updating in this area.
+CGATT
113 Roaming in this
location area is not
allowed.
+CGATT
132 service option not
supported (#32) +CGACT +CGDATA ATD*99
133 requested service
option not
subscribed (#33)
+CGACT +CGDATA ATD*99
134 service option
temporarily out of order
(#34)
+CGACT +CGDATA ATD*99
148 unspecified GPRS
error All GPRS commands
149 PDP authentication
failure +CGACT +CGDATA ATD*99
150 invalid mobile class
+CGCLASS +CGATT
Codes and
Values
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 6
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
1.2.
Message Service Failure Result Code: +CMS
ERROR
<er> is defined
as below:
<er>
Meaning Resulting from the following commands
1 to 127
Error cause values from the GSM
recommendation
04.11 Annex E-2
+CMGS,
+CMSS
301 SMS service of ME
reserved +CSMS (with +CMS: ERROR 301)
302 Operation not allowed
All SMS commands (+CMSS, +CMGL, +CPMS, +CSMP
303 Operation not
supported All SMS commands
304 Invalid PDU mode
parameter +CMGS, +CMGW
305 Invalid text mode
parameter +CMGS, +CMGW, +CMSS
310 SIM not inserted All
SMS commands
311 SIM PIN required All
SMS commands
312 PH-SIM PIN required
All SMS commands
313 SIM failure All SMS
commands
316 SIM PUK required All
SMS commands
317 SIM PIN2 required All
SMS commands
318 SIM PUK2 required All
SMS commands
321 Invalid memory index
+CMGR, +CMSS, +CMGD
322 SIM or ME memory full
+CMGW
330 SC address unknown
+CSCA?, +CMSS, +CMGS
340 no +CNMA
acknowledgement
expected
+CNMA
Codes and
Values
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 7
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
1.3.
Specific Error Result Codes
<error>
Meaning Resulting from the following commands
500
Unknown error. All commands
501 GPIO cannot be
reached by
device layer (for example
the
GPIO is not currently
allocated to
the user).
+WIOM, +WIOR, +WIOW,
+WASR
502 AT command is
inconsistent (for
example, the user tries
to
configure a GPI in
output)
+WIOM, +WIOR, +WIOW
503 The external
interrupt cannot be
reached
+WIPC
504 Error during external
interrupt
treatment
+WIPC
505 The resource has not
been
reserved
+DAC
512 MM establishment
failure (for
SMS).
+CMGS, +CMSS (+CMS ERROR:
512)
513 Lower layer failure
(for SMS) +CMGS, +CMSS (+CMS ERROR: 513)
514 CP error (for SMS).
+CMGS, +CMSS (+CMS ERROR: 514)
515 Please wait, init or
command
processing in progress.
All commands ("+CME
ERROR: 515" or "+CMS ERROR:
515") except ATH0,
ATH1, AT+WIOR, AT+WIOW,
AT+CFUN=1, AT+CLCC,
AT+WAC, AT+CPAS, AT+VGR,
AT+VTS, AT+SPEAKER.
517 SIM Toolkit facility
not supported. +STGI
518 SIM Toolkit
indication not
received.
+STGI
519 Reset the product to
activate or
change a new echo
cancellation
algorithm.
+ECHO, +VIP
520 Automatic abort about
get PLMN
list for an incoming
call.
+COPS=?
526 PIN deactivation
forbidden with
this SIM card.
+CLCK
527 Please wait, RR or MM
is busy.
Retry your selection
later.
+COPS
528 Location update
failure.
Emergency calls only.
+COPS
529 PLMN selection
failure.
Emergency calls only.
+COPS
531 SMS not sent: the
<da> is not in
FDN phonebook, and FDN
lock is
enabled. (for SMS)
+CMGS, +CMSS (+CMS ERROR:
531)
532 the embedded
application is
activated so the objects
flash are
not erased
+WOPEN
533 Missing or Unknown
APN ATD*99 +GACT +CGDATA
Codes and
Values
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 8
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
<error>
Meaning Resulting from the following commands
536 Class locked: a
command has
been launched from a
port, the
effect is to lock all
commands
belonging to the same
class. If
another port launches a
command
of this class, this error
will occur
as long as the class is
not
released (at first
commands
completion time)
All commands
537 Phonebook group full.
+CPBW
538 Not Enough Space to
copy SMS +WMCP
539 Invalid SMS +CMGR
541 Open ATฎ application
and AT
software version do not
match
+WOPEN
543 CMUX connection is
refused by
remote, after a restart
of CMUX
protocol by embedded
module,
due to a 27.010
connection loss
during virtual channels
establishment.
+CMUX
544 CMUX connection
timeout +CMUX
546 Emergency call is not
allowed
without SIM
+COPS
547 Emergency call is
allowed without
SIM
+COPS
548 No flash objects to
delete +WOPEN
549 The phone number of
the
requested phonebook entry
is
empty
ATD><index>[;],
ATD><phonebook><index>[;]
550 Unable to resize the
Application &
Data storage place, since
the new
required size would
overlap with
the current Open ATฎ application
storage place.
+WOPEN
551 Service abort request
has failed AT +WAC
552 Unsolicited responses
for autodiag
or charge indications are
already
activated on another port
+WDIAG, +WBCM
553 The PUK 1 code is
burned but PIN
1/CHV 1 code is OK
+CPIN, +CKPD, D
(sequence)
554 The SIM is blocked
(PIN 1/CHV 1
and PUK 1 codes are
burned)
All GSM 07.07 commands
555 AT command aborted by
a
POWER OFF (the AT command
treatment should be
partial)
AT+CPOL? command is under
treatment and if a POWER
OFF is
made in the mean time
using
+CPOF command (the
+CPOLS?
treatment is then
stopped)
+COPS, +CPIN, +CPIN2,
+CMGL, +CMGR, +CMGD,
+WDCP, +WLPR, +WLPW,
+CCID, +CSIM, +CRSM, +CLCK,
+CACM, +CAMM, +CPUC,
+WMSC, +WMCP, +CPOL,
+CSQ, +CCED
+CPOL
Codes and
Values
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 9
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
<error>
Meaning Resulting from the following commands
556 AT command aborted by
a SIM
Extract (the AT command
treatment should be
partial)
AT+CPOL? command is under
treatment and if the SIM
is
removed (the +CPOLS?
treatment
is then stopped)
+COPS, +CPIN, +CPIN2,
+CMGL, +CMGR, +CMGD,
+WDCP, +WLPR, +WLPW,
+CCID, +CSIM, +CRSM, +CLCK,
+CACM, +CAMM, +CPUC,
+WMSC, +WMCP, +CPOL
+CPOL
558 The service
activation associated
to the AT command is
already
activated by another port
the resource has been
already
reserved by another
application
+WDDM
+DAC
559 Audio Diagnostic was
stopped
because an incoming call
happens.
+WADS
560 Auto Shutdown is
already enabled
or disabled
+WASR
562 AT command aborted by
an auto
answer to an incoming
call (the AT
command treatment should
be
partial)
AT+CPOL? command is under
treatment and if an
auto-answer
mechanism happens on the
same
port (the +CPOLS?
treatment is
then stopped)
+CPBF, +CPBR, +CGATT,
+CGCLASS, +CPWD, +CLCK,
+CPIN, +CPIN2, +CSIM,
+CRSM, +VTS, +CPBS, +CPBW,
+WDCP, +CMGR, +CMGL,
+WMSC, +CMGW, +CMGS,
+CMSS, +WCBM, +CSAS,
+CMGD, +WLPR, +WLPW,
+CCID, +CCFC, +CLIR,
+CLIP, +COLP, +CCWA, +CACM,
+CAMM, +CPUC, +CPOL
+CPOL
563 The charge is not
started due to
an error. (Example:
charger not
plugged), but other
command part
(unsolicited event
activation) is
done.
+WBCM
567 Operation denied due
to CPU
overheated
+WTMR
567 Operation denied due
to CPU
overheated
+WTMR
650 General error
Device Services not in
good state
+WDSS
651 Communication error
+WDSS
652 Session in progress
+WDSS
653 GSM call in progress
+WDSS
654 RDMS services are in
DEACTIVATED state
+WDSE, +WDSF, +WDSR,
+WDSS
655 RDMS services are in
PROHIBITED state
+WDSA, +WDSB, +WDSC,
+WDSD, +WDSE, +WDSF,
+WDSH, +WDSI, +WDSR,
+WDSS
656 RDMS services are in
TO BE
PROVISIONED state
No NAP are available
(either in
+CGDCONT)
+WDSC, +WDSE, +WDSF,
+WDSR, +WDSS
+WDSS
657 Automatic
registration error +WDSS, +WDSC
Codes and
Values
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 10
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
1.4.
Failure Cause from 3GPP TS 24.008
recommendation
(+CEER)
Cause
value Diagnostic
1 Unassigned
(unallocated) number
3 No route to destination
6 Channel unacceptable
8 Operator determined
barring
16 Normal call clearing
17 User busy
18 No user responding
19 User alerting, no
answer
21 Call rejected
22 Number changed
26 Non selected user
clearing
27 Destination out of
order
28 Invalid number format
(incomplete number)
29 Facility rejected
30 Response to STATUS
ENQUIRY
31 Normal, unspecified
34 No circuit/channel
available
38 Network out of order
41 Temporary failure
42 Switching equipment
congestion
43 Access information
discarded
44 Requested
circuit/channel not available
47 Resources unavailable,
unspecified
49 Quality of service
unavailable
50 Requested facility not
subscribed
55 Incoming calls barred
with in the CUG
57 Bearer capability not
authorized
58 Bearer capability not
presently available
63 Service or option not
available, unspecified
65 Bearer service not
implemented
68 ACM equal to or
greater than ACMmax
69 Requested facility not
implemented
70 Only restricted
digital information bearer capability is available
79 Service or option not
implemented, unspecified
81 Invalid transaction
identifier value
87 User not member of CUG
88 Incompatible
destination
91 Invalid transit
network selection
95 Semantically incorrect
message
Codes and
Values
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 11
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Cause
value Diagnostic
96 Invalid mandatory
information
97 Message type
non-existent or not implemented
98 Message type not
compatible with protocol state
99 Information element
non-existent or not implemented
100 Conditional IE error
101 Message not
compatible with protocol state
102 Recovery on timer
expiry
111 Protocol error,
unspecified
127 Inter-working,
unspecified
224 MS requested detach
225 NWK requested Detach
226 Unsuccessful attach
cause NO SERVICE
227 Unsuccessful attach
cause NO ACCESS
228 Unsuccessful attach
cause GPRS SERVICE REFUSED
229 PDP Deactivation
requested by NWK
230 PDP Deactivation
because LLC link activation Failed
231 PDP Deactivation
cause NWK reactivation with same TI
232 PDP Deactivation
cause GMM abort
233 PDP Deactivation
cause LLC or SNDCP failure
234 PDP Unsuccessful
activation cause GMM error
235 PDP Unsuccessful
activation cause NWK reject
236 PDP Unsuccessful
activation cause NO NSAPI available
237 PDP Unsuccessful
activation cause SM refuse
238 PDP Unsuccessful
activation cause MMI ignore
239 PDP unsuccessful
activation cause Nb Max Session Reach
All other
values in the range Will be treated as cause
[0,31] 31
[32,47] 47
[48,63] 63
[64,79] 79
[80,95] 95
[96,111] 111
[112,127] 127
Codes and
Values
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 12
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
1.5.
Specific Failure Cause for +CEER
Cause
value Diagnostic
240 FDN is active and
number is not in FDN
241 Call operation not
allowed
252 Call barring on
outgoing calls
253 Call barring on
incoming calls
254 Call impossible
255 Lower layer failure
Codes and
Values
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 13
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
1.6.
GSM 04.11 Annex E-2: Mobile Originating
SM-transfer
These error causes
could appear for SMS commands (+CMGS, +CMSS, +CMGD
)
Error #
Error label Description
1 Unassigned
(unallocated)
number
The destination requested
by the Mobile Station cannot be
reached because, although
the number is in a valid format, it is
not currently assigned
(allocated).
8 Operator determined
barring The MS has tried to send a mobile originating short message
when the MSs network
operator or service provider has
forbidden such
transactions.
10 Call barred The
outgoing call barred service applies to the short message
service for the called
destination.
21 Short message transfer
rejected
The equipment sending
this cause does not wish to accept this
short message, although
it could have accepted the short
message since the
equipment sending. This cause is neither
busy nor incompatible.
27 Destination out of
service The destination indicated by the Mobile Station cannot be
reached because the
interface to the destination is not
functioning correctly.
The term "not functioning correctly"
indicates that a
signaling message was unable to be delivered
to the remote user; e.g.,
a physical layer or data link layer
failure at the remote
user, user equipment off-line, etc.
28 Unidentified
subscriber The subscriber is not registered in the PLMN (e.g.. IMSI not
known)
29 Facility rejected The
facility requested by the Mobile Station is not supported by
the PLMN.
30 Unknown subscriber The
subscriber is not registered in the HLR (e.g.. IMSI or
directory number is not
allocated to a subscriber).
38 Network out of order
The network is not functioning correctly and the condition is
likely to last a
relatively long period of time; e.g., immediately
reattempting the short
message transfer is not likely to be
successful.
41 Temporary failure The
network is not functioning correctly and the condition is not
likely to last a long
period of time; e.g., the Mobile Station may
wish to try another short
message transfer attempt almost
immediately.
42 Congestion The short
message service cannot be serviced because of high
traffic.
47 Resources unavailable,
unspecified
This cause is used to
report a resource unavailable event only
when no other cause
applies.
50 Requested facility not
subscribed
The requested short
message service could not be provided by
the network because the
user has not completed the necessary
administrative
arrangements with its supporting networks.
69 Requested facility not
implemented
The network is unable to
provide the requested short message
service.
81 Invalid short message
transfer
reference value
The equipment sending
this cause has received a message
with a short message
reference which is not currently in use on
the MS-network interface.
95 Invalid message,
unspecified This cause is used to report an invalid message event only
when no other cause in
the invalid message class applies.
Codes and
Values
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 14
AT Commands Interface Guide
for
Firmware 7.45
Error #
Error label Description
96 Invalid mandatory
information The equipment sending this cause has received a message
where a mandatory
information element is missing and/or has
a content error (both
cases are undistinguishable).
97 Message type
non-existent or
not implemented
The equipment sending
this cause has received a message
with a message type it
does not recognize either because this
is a message not defined
or defined but not implemented by
the equipment sending
this cause.
98 Message not compatible
with
short message protocol
state
The equipment sending
this cause has received a message
such that the procedures
do not indicate that this is a
permissible message to
receive while in the short message
transfer state.
99 Information element
nonexistent
or not implemented
The equipment sending
this cause has received a message
which includes
unrecognized information elements because the
information element
identifier is not defined or it is defined but
not implemented by the equipment
sending the cause.
However, the information
element is not required to be present
in the message so that
the equipment sends the cause to
process the message.
111 Protocol error,
unspecified This cause is used to report a protocol error event only when
no other cause applies.
127 Inter-working,
unspecified There has been inter-working with a network which does not
provide causes for
actions it takes; thus, the precise cause for
a message which is being
sent cannot be ascertained.
All values other than
specified should be treated as error #41.
Codes and
Values
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 15
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
1.7.
Result Codes
Verbose
result code Numeric (V0 set) Description
+CME ERROR: <err>
As verbose Error from GSM 07.05 commands
+CMS ERROR: <err>
As verbose Error from SMS commands (07.07)
BUSY 7 Busy signal
detected
ERROR 4 Command not
accepted
NO ANSWER 8 Connection
completion timeout
NO CARRIER 3 Connection
terminated
OK 0 Acknowledges correct
execution of a command
line
RING 2 Incoming call
signal from network
+COLP:<number>,<type>
as verbose Outgoing Call Presentation
+CR: <type> as
verbose Outgoing Call report control
+ILRR: <rate> as
verbose Local TA-TE data rate
CONNECT 300 10 Data
connection at 300 bauds
CONNECT 1200 11 Data
connection at 1200 bauds
CONNECT 1200/75 12 Data
connection at 1200/75 bauds
CONNECT 2400 13 Data
connection at 2400 bauds
CONNECT 4800 14 Data
connection at 4800 bauds
CONNECT 9600 15 Data
connection at 9600 bauds
CONNECT 14400 16 Data
connection at 14400 bauds
+CSSI:
<code1>[,<index>] As verbose Supplementary service notification
during a call
setup
Codes and
Values
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 16
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
1.8.
GSM Sequences List
In accordance with GSM
02.30, the product supports the following GSM sequences, which can be
used through the ATD
and the +CKPD commands.
1.8.1.
Security
Change PIN code **04*OLDPIN*NEWPIN*NEWPIN#
Change PIN2 code **042*OLDPIN2*NEWPIN2*NEWPIN2#
Unlock PIN code **05*PUK*NEWPIN*NEWPIN#
Unlock PIN2 code **052*PUK2*NEWPIN2*NEWPIN2#
Show the IMEI number
*#06#
1.8.2.
Call Forwarding
Please refer to SC
and BS values below in this paragraph.
Activate *SC#
or *SC**BS#
Register and activate **SC*PhoneNumber#
or **SC*PhoneNumber*BS#
or **SC*PhoneNumber*[BS]*T#
or *SC*PhoneNumber#
or *SC*PhoneNumber*BS#
or *SC*PhoneNumber*[BS]*T#
Check status *#SC#
or *#SC**BS#
Deactivate #SC#
or #SC**BS#
Unregister and deactivate
##SC#
or ##SC**BS#
Codes and Values
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 17
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Service
Codes (SC) Network Service Codes (BS)
002 all call forwarding
No code All tele- and bearer services
004 all conditional call
forwarding 10 All tele-services
21 call forwarding
unconditional 11 Telephony
61 call forwarding on no
answer 12 All data tele-services
62 call forwarding on not
reachable 13 Fax services
67 call busy 16 Short
Message Services
17 Voice Group Call
Service
18 Voice Broadcast
Service
19 All tele-services
except SMS
20 All bearer services
21 All asynchronous
services
22 All synchronous
services
24 All data circuit
synchronous
25 All data circuit
asynchronous
Note:
The no-reply condition timer (T), is only used for SC = 002, 004 or 61.
1.8.3.
Call Barring
Please refer to SC
values below in this paragraph. BS values are the same as above, see Call
Forwarding.
Activate *SC*Password#
or *SC*Password*BS#
Check status *#SC#
or *#SC**BS#
Deactivate #SC*Password#
or #SC*Password*BS#
Change password for call
barring **03*330*OLDPWD*NEWPWD*NEWPWD#
or **03**OLDPWD*NEWPWD*NEWPWD#
or *03*330*OLDPWD*NEWPWD*NEWPWD#
or *03**OLDPWD*NEWPWD*NEWPWD#
Service
Codes (SC)
33 call barring of
outgoing call
330 all barring service
(only for deactivation)
331 call barring of
outgoing international call
332 call barring of
outgoing international calls except to HPLMN
333 all outgoing barring
service (only for deactivation)
35 call barring of
incoming calls
Codes and
Values
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 18
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Service
Codes (SC)
351 call barring of
incoming calls if roaming
353 all incoming barring
service (only for deactivation)
1.8.4.
Call Waiting
BS values are the
same as above, see Call Forwarding.
Activate *43*BS#
Check status *#43*BS#
Deactivate #43*BS#
1.8.5.
Number Presentation
CLIP check status *#30#
CLIR check status *#31#
Suppress CLIR for a voice
call *31#PhoneNumber
Invoke CLIR for a voice
call #31#PhoneNumber
COLP check status *#76#
Codes and
Values
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 19
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
1.9.
Operator Names
For more
information, refer to the following documentation:
SE13
(22nd August,2005)
NAPRD
2.6.8
Note:
The Country Initials may vary for the same MCC (Mobile Country Code) without
any impact.
Codes and
Values
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 20
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
1.10.
CPHS Information Field
CPHS
Information
Data field
Bit Field Meaning
0 None All information
1 0 CSP service activated
and allocated
2 1 SST service activated
and allocated
3 2 Mailbox Number
service activated and allocated
4 3 Operator Name
Shortform service activated and allocated
5 4 Information Numbers
service activated and allocated
6 5 RFU
7 6 RFU
8 7 RFU
9 8 Voice Message Waiting
indicator for Line 1
10 9 Voice Message
Waiting indicator for Line 2
11 10 Data Message
Waiting indicator
12 11 Fax Message Waiting
indicator
13 12 Call Forward Activated
indicator for Line 1
14 13 Call Forward
Activated indicator for Line 2
15 14 Call Forward
Activated indicator for Data
16 15 Call Forward
Activated indicator for Fax
17 16 Reserved
18 17 Reserved
19 18 Reserved
20 19 Reserved
21 20 Line 1 Mailbox
Number available
22 21 Line 2 Mailbox
Number available
23 22 Data Mailbox Number
available
24 23 Fax Mailbox Number
available
25 24 EF Mn Updateable
Codes and
Values
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 21
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
1.11.
CSP Constants
1.11.1.
Service Group: Call Offering
Service
External value
Call Forwarding
Unconditional 1
Call Forwarding On User
Busy 2
Call Forwarding on No
Reply 3
Call Forwarding On User
Not Reachable 4
Call Transfer 5
1.11.2.
Service Group: Call Restriction
Service
External value
Barring of All Outgoing
Calls 9
Barring of Outgoing
International Calls 10
Barring of Outgoing
International Calls except those directed
to the Home PLMN country
11
Barring of All Incoming
Calls when Roaming Outside the
Home PLMN country
12
BIC roam 13
1.11.3.
Service Group: Other Supplementary Services
Service
External value
Multi-Party Service 17
Closed User Group 18
Advice Of Charge 19
Preferential CUG 20
CUG Outgoing Access 21
1.11.4.
Service Group: Group Completion
Service
External value
Call Hold 25
Call Waiting 26
Completion of Call to
Busy Subscriber 27
Restriction of the menus
allowing use of user to user
signaling
28
Codes and
Values
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 22
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
1.11.5.
Service Group: Teleservices
Service
External value
Short Message Mobile
Terminated 33
Short Message Mobile
Originated 34
Short Message Cell
Broadcast 35
Restricts menu options
for the ability to set reply path active
on outgoing Short
Messages
36
SMS Delivery Confirmation
37
Restriction of menus for
SMS Protocol ID options 38
Validity Period,
restriction of menus for SMS Validity period
options
39
1.11.6.
Service Group: CPHS Teleservices
Service
External value
Alternate Line Service 41
1.11.7.
Service Group: CPHS Features
Service
External value
Reserved: SST in phase 1
CPHS 49
1.11.8.
Service Group: Number Identification
Service
External value
Calling Line
Identification Presentation 57
Connected Line Identification
Restriction 59
Connected Line
Identification Presentation 60
Malicious Call Indicator
61
CLI per call mode
default block CLI menu to send CLI 63
CLI per call mode
default send CLI menu to block CLI 64
Codes and
Values
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 23
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
1.11.9.
Service Group: Phase 2+ Services
Service
External value
Menus concerned with GPRS
functionality 65
Menus concerned with High
Speed Circuit Switched Data
functionality
66
ASCI Voice Group call
menus 67
ASCI Voice Broadcast
service menus 68
Multi Subscriber profile
menus 69
Multiple band:
Restriction of menus allowing user to select a
particular GSM 900/ 1800
or 1900 band
70
1.11.10.
Service Group: Value Added Services
Service
External value
Restriction of menu
options for manual PLMN selection 73
Restriction of menu
options for Voice Mail or other similar
menus
74
Restriction of menu
options for the ability to send Short
messages with type Paging
75
Restriction of menu options
for the ability to send Short
messages with type Email
76
Restriction of menu
options for Fax calls 77
Restriction of menu
options for Data calls 78
Restriction of menus
allowing the user to change language 80
1.11.11.
Service Group: Information Numbers
Service
External value
The ME shall only present
Information numbers to the user if
this field is set to FF
81
Note:
External values not used in these tables are reserved for further use.
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 24
2.
Examples
This chapter gives
illustrative examples of the general AT commands used for a communication. The
presentation of
commands and responses is as close as possible to what a user can see on its
test
monitor. Blank lines
have been intentionally removed. The characters on the left margin are DTE
generated. Middle
column characters are embedded module generated.
2.1.
Examples with the PIN Required
2.1.1.
When the ME has to be powered ON
AT+CMEE=1 Enable the report mobile equipment errors
OK
AT+CREG=1 Report registration
OK
AT+CPAS Query ME Status
+CPAS: 5 (ME is asleep)
OK
AT+CFUN=1 Set ME to full functionality
OK
AT+COPS=0 Ask for automatic operator selection and
registration.
+CME ERROR: 11 SIM PIN required.
AT+CPIN=1234 User entered a wrong PIN
+CME ERROR: 16 Incorrect password.
AT+CPIN=0000
OK PIN Ok
AT+COPS=0 Ask for automatic operator selection and
registration.
OK
+CREG:1 Registered on the network
AT+COPS=3,0 Select the long name alphanumeric format.
OK
AT+COPS? Get the operator name
+COPS: 0,0,"I
OMNITEL"
OK
Examples
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 25
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
2.1.2.
When the ME has already been powered on
AT+CMEE=1 Enable the report mobile equipment errors
OK
AT+CPAS Get the ME Status
+CPAS: 0 ME is ready to receive commands
OK
AT+CPIN? Is ME requiring a password?
+CPIN: SIM PIN Yes, SIM PIN required
AT+CPIN=0000
OK PIN Ok
2.2.
Examples where a Voice Call is Originated
2.2.1.
When the ME is powered on and the SIM PIN has
been
entered
AT+CMEE=1 Enable the reporting of mobile equipment
errors
OK
AT+WIND=63 Ask to display the general indications.
OK
AT+CPIN? Is ME requiring a password?
+CPIN: READY product is ready
ATD0607103543; Make a voice call
+WIND: 5,1 Indication of call
+WIND: 2 Remote party is ringing.
OK Call setup was successful
Conversation
ATH Release the call
OK
2.2.2.
When a voice call is attempted from a phonebook
ATD>"John
Pamborn";
+CME ERROR: 22 The "John Pamborn" entry is not
found.
ATD>"Joel
Guerry";
+WIND: 5,1 Indication of outgoing call.
+WIND: 2 Remote party is ringing.
OK Call setup was successful
Conversation
ATH Release the call
OK
Examples
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 26
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
2.3.
Example with Incoming Calls
2.3.1.
When the ME is powered on and the SIM PIN has
been
entered
AT+CMEE=1 Enable the report mobile equipment errors
OK
AT+WIND=63 Ask to display the general indications.
OK
AT+CLIP=1 Enable the calling line identification
presentation.
OK
AT+CRC=1 Enable extended format of incoming indication.
OK
AT+CNUM Query own number (voice number) or MSISDN.
+CNUM:
"Speech","+33608971019",145
OK
Call this number from another equipment.
+WIND: 5, 1 Indication of call (Ring)
+CRING: VOICE Type of call is VOICE.
+CLIP:
"+33607103543",145,,,"John Panborn" Identification of the remote party.
+CRING: VOICE
ATA Answer the call.
OK
Conversation
NO CARRIER The call has been released by the remote party.
+WIND: 6,1 Indication of call release.
2.4.
Example of a Call Forwarding
2.4.1.
When the ME is powered on and the SIM PIN has
been
entered
AT+CMEE=1 Enable the report mobile equipment errors
OK
AT+CCFC=1,3,"0607492638"
Register to a call
forwarding when ME is busy.
OK
AT+CCFC=2,3,"0149293031",129
Register to a call
forwarding when it does answer.
+CME ERROR: 30 No network service
AT+CCFC=1,2 Interrogate
+CCFC:
1,1,"+33607492638",145 Call forwarding active for a voice call.
AT+CCFC=1,4 Delete call forwarding ME busy
OK
Examples
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 27
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
2.5.
Example of a Multiparty Call
When the
ME is powered on and the SIM PIN has been entered.
AT+CMEE=1 Enable the report mobile equipment errors
OK
AT+WIND=63 Ask to display the general indications.
OK
AT+CCWA=1,1 Enable call waiting.
OK
ATD>"John
Panborn";
+WIND: 5,1 Indication of call.
+WIND: 2 Remote party is ringing.
OK Call setup was successful
Conversation (call1)
+WIND: 5,2 Indication of another call.
+CCWA:
"+33595984834",145,"Dolores Claiborne" Another call is waiting.
AT+CHLD=2 Put first call on hold and answer the second
one.
OK
Conversation (call2)
AT+CHLD=3 Every call is part of a multiparty
conversation.
OK
AT+CHLD=11 Release the first call (with John Panborn) and
recover the second call (with Dolores
Claiborne)
Conversation (call2)
ATH Release the second call.
2.6.
Examples about Phonebooks
For each example
illustrated in this section: at the beginning the ME is powered on and the SIM
PIN
has been entered.
2.6.1.
Example 1: The whole phonebook of the ME is
read
Command
Response
AT+CPBS=?
Note:
Query supported phonebook memories
+CPBS:
("SM","FD","ON")
OK
Note:
ADN, FDN, and MSISDN phonebooks supported.
AT+CPBS="SM"
Note:
Select ADN phonebook.
OK
Examples
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 28
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Command
Response
AT+CPBR=?
Note:
Read the index range and the length of the elements.
+CPBR: (1-80),20,14
OK
Note: 80
locations (from 1 to 80), max length of 20 for the
phone
number, 14 characters max for the text.
AT+CPBR=1,80
Note:
Read all entries (only the set ones are returned).
+CPBR:
1,"0346572834",129,"Dolores
Claiborne"
+CPBR:
2,"1284374523",129,"Thad
Beaumont"
+CPBR: 3,
"1243657845",129,"John
Panborn"
OK
2.6.2.
Example 2: Erase or Write a Phonebook Entry
Command
Response
AT+CPBW=?
Note:
Get the phonebook type.
+CPBW: (1-80),20,(129,145),14
OK
Note: 80
locations, max length of 20 for the phone number,
TON/NPI
of 129 or 145 and 14 characters max for the text.
AT+CPBW=3
Note: Erase
location 3
OK
AT+CPBW=3,"4356729012",129,"Carry"
Note:
Write at location 3.
OK
AT+CPBR=1,80
Note:
Read all entries (only the ones set are returned).
+CPBR:1,"0346572834",129,"Dolores
Claiborne"
+CPBR:2,"1284374523",129,"Thad
Beaumont"
+CPBR: 3,"4356729012",129,"Carry"
OK
Examples
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 29
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
2.6.3.
Example 3: Find Phonebook Entries
Command
Response
AT+CPBF=?
Note:
Get the phonebook type.
+CPBF: 20,14
OK
Note:
Max length of 20 for the phone number, 10 characters
for the
text.
AT+CPBF="D"
Note:
Read entries starting with "D".
+CPBF:
1,"0346572834",129,"Dolores
Clairborne"
OK
AT+CPBF="W"
Note:
Read entries with "W".
+CME ERROR: 22
Note:
Entry not found.
2.6.4.
Example 4: Phonebook and Custom Character Set
The Custom To
Extended GSM conversion table and the Extended GSM To Custom conversion table
can be used to
display the extended GSM characters:
| ^ { } [ ]
~ \
To manage one of
these extended characters, the character 0x1B must be set in the right place
(in
the position
corresponding to the value of the ASCII code) in the Custom to GSM conversion
table
(instead of 0x20
(space ASCII code)).
For example, the
ASCII code of \ (backslash) is 0x5C, the character 0x1B must be set at the
position
0x5C of the Custom
to GSM conversion table. The range of character 0x5C in this table is 92. So to
update the table the
command AT+WCCS=1,0,92 will be used.
In the other way,
write the space ASCII code 0x20 in the right place in the Custom to GSM
conversion
table if an extended
character is not needed.
Command
Response
AT+CPBS?
Note:
Query the current phonebook
+CPBS: 3,80
OK
Note:
ADN selected, 3 entries stored
AT+WPCS?
Note:
Query the current phonebook char set
+WPCS: "TRANSPARENT"
OK
Note:
Transparent mode selected
AT+CPBR=1 +CPBR:
1,"0146290800",129,"S
bastien"
OK
Note:
GSM character "้" is not displayed
Examples
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 30
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Command
Response
AT+WCCS=1,0,0,255
>202020202020202020200A20200D202020202020205F20
202020202020202020202122230225262728292A2B2C2D2
E2F303132333435363738393A3B3C3D3E3F004142434445
464748494A4B4C4D4E4F505152535455565758595A20202
02011206162636465666768696A6B6C6D6E6F7071727374
75767778797A20202020202020202020202020202020202
02020202027272020202020202020202020202020402001
2403205F20202020202D202020202020272020202020202
020202060414141415B0E1C09451F454549494949445D4F
4F4F4F5C200B5555555E59201E7F6161617B0F1D6304056
56507696969207D086F6F6F7C200C0675757E792079
OK
AT+WCCS=1,1,0,127
>40A324A5E8E9F9ECF2C70AD8F80DC5E5205F2020202020
2020202020C6E6DFC920212223A425262728292A2B2C2D2
E2F303132333435363738393A3B3C3D3E3FA14142434445
464748494A4B4C4D4E4F505152535455565758595AC4D6D
1DCA7BF6162636465666768696A6B6C6D6E6F7071727374
75767778797AE4F6F1FCE0
Note:
Set the custom character set tables to enable a GSM to default
font
conversion
OK
AT+WPCS="CUSTOM"
Note:
Use the custom character set
OK
AT+CPBR=1 +CPBR:
1,"0146290800",129,"S้bastien"
OK
Note:
GSM character "้" is correctly displayed
2.6.5.
Example 5: Use the Extended Phonebook
Command
Response
AT+WCOS? +WCOS: 0
OK
Note:
Phonebook not extended
AT+CPBS? +CPBS:
"SM",10,20
OK
Note:
Selected phonebook: ADN
AT+CPBW=1,"0123456",,"test"
OK
Note:
Write an entry in SIM
Examples
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 31
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Command
Response
AT+CPBR=1 +CPBR:
1,"0123456",129,"test"
OK
Note:
Read an entry in SIM
AT+CPBW=1,"0123456",,"test",1
+CME
ERROR: 3
Note:
+WCOS=0; you cant write a phonebook
group
AT+WCOS=1 OK
Note:
Phonebook extended in SIM
AT+CPBW=1,"0123456",,"test",1
OK
Note:
Write an entry in SIM
AT+CPBR=1 +CPBR: 1,
"0123456", 129, "test",
1
OK
Note:
Read an entry in SIM (extended)
AT+WCOS=0 OK
AT+WCOS? +WCOS: 0
OK
Note:
Phonebook not extended
AT+CPBR=1 +CPBR:
1,"0123456",129,"test"
OK
Note:
Read an entry in SIM (not extended)
AT+CPBS="ME"
OK
Note:
Selected phonebook: ME (Flash)
Examples
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 32
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Command
Response
AT+WCOS=1 OK
Note:
Phonebook extended
AT+CPBW=1,
"+331290909", 145, "Fred",
"0141284549",
129, "0600003210", 129,
"0141280000",
129, "019876543210", 129,
"fred@mywebaddress.com",
"Becker Street
London",1
OK
Note:
Write an entry in Flash
AT+CPBR=1 +CPBR: 1,
"+331290909",
145,"Fred",
"0141284549", 129,
"0600003210", 129,
"0141280000",
129, "019876543210",
129,
"fred@mywebaddress.com",
"Becker
Street London",1
OK
AT+WCOS=0 OK
AT+CPBR=1 +CPBR:
13,"+331290909",145,"Fred"
OK
Note:
Read an entry in Flash (not extended)
To use the extended
ME phonebook, you must do:
AT+CPBS="ME"
AT+WCOS=1
To use the extended
ADN phonebook, you must do:
AT+CPBS="SM"
AT+WCOS=1
To use the not
extended phonebook, you must do:
AT+WCOS=0
2.6.6.
Example 6: Phonebook and Custom Character Set
Command
Response
AT+CPBS?
Note:
Query the current phonebook
+CPBS: 3,80
OK
Note:
ADN selected, 3 entries stored
AT+WPCS?
Note:
Query for the current phonebook character set
+WPCS: "TRANSPARENT"
OK
Note:
Transparent mode selected
AT+CPBW=1,"0146290800",129,"test
of { }"
Examples
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 33
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Command
Response
AT+CPBR=1 +CPBR:
1,"0146290800",129," test
of "
OK
Note:
GSM characters "{"and "}" are not displayed
AT+WCCS=1,0,0,255<CR>
>202020202020202020200A20200D202020202020205F20
202020202020202020202122230225262728292A2B2C2D2
E2F303132333435363738393A3B3C3D3E3F004142434445
464748494A4B4C4D4E4F505152535455565758595A1B1B1
B1B11206162636465666768696A6B6C6D6E6F7071727374
75767778797A1B1B1B1B201B20202020202020202020202
02020202027272020202020202020202020202020402001
2403205F20202020202D202020202020272020202020202
020202060414141415B0E1C09451F454549494949445D4F
4F4F4F5C200B5555555E59201E7F6161617B0F1D6304056
56507696969207D086F6F6F7C200C0675757E792079
<CTRL-Z>
OK
AT+WCCS=1,1,0,127<CR>
>40A324A5E8E9F9ECF2C70AD8F80DC5E5205F2020202020
2020202020C6E6DFC920212223A425262728292A2B2C2D2
E2F303132333435363738393A3B3C3D3E3FA14142434445
464748494A4B4C4D4E4F505152535455565758595AC4D6D
1DCA7BF6162636465666768696A6B6C6D6E6F7071727374
75767778797AE4F6F1FCE0
<CTRL-Z>
Note:
Set the custom character set tables to enable a GSM to default
font
conversion
OK
AT+WPCS="CUSTOM"
Note:
Use the custom character set
OK
AT+CPBR=1 +CPBR:
1,"0146290800",129," test
of { }"
OK
Note:
GSM characters "{" and "}" are correctly
displayed
2.6.7.
Example 7: MT Phonebook (read only)
Command
Response
AT+CPBS="MT"
OK
Note:
Select MT phonebook
AT+WCOS=1
Note:
Select extended entries
OK
Examples
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 34
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Command
Response
AT+CPBF=""
Note:
Read all entries
+CPBF:
1,"0987654321",129," Carry",0
+CPBF:
2;"9876543210",129,"John",0
+CPBF:
31,"0346572834",129,"Dolores
Claiborne","9876543210",129,"",,"",,"654789123
0",129,
"dolores@mywebaddress.com"," Becker
Street London",0
+CPBF: 32,
"6547892012", 129, "Pierre", "",
,"",,"9874521021",129,"",,,"Pierre@mywebaddres
s.com", "",0
OK
AT+WCOS=0
Note:
Select extended entries: not extended
OK
AT+CPBF=""
Note:
Read all entries
+CPBF:
1,"0987654321",129," Carry"
+CPBF:
2;"9876543210",129,"John"
+CPBF:
31,"0346572834",129,"Dolores Claiborne"
+CPBF:
32,"6547892012",129,"Pierre"
OK
Index: 1 and 2 SM phonebook entries
Index: 31 and 32 ME phonebook entries
2.7.
Examples about Short Messages
2.7.1.
Send a Short Message
AT+CNMI=0,1,1,1,0 SMS-DELIVERs are directly stored, SMS-STATUS-
REPORTs are displayed
OK
AT+CSMP=17,169,0,0 SMS-SUBMIT message with a validity period (one
day)
OK
AT+CMGF=1 Text mode to send a Short Message
OK
AT+CSCA="+33608080706"
Set Service Center
Address to +33608080706
OK
AT+CMGS=0601290800 Send a SMS-SUBMIT to mobile phone
Product sends a 4 characters sequence: 0x0D
0x0A 0x3E 0x20
This is the first
text line Edit first line and press
carriage return (<CR>, 0x0D)
This is the last text
line Edit last line and send
message by pressing <ctrl-Z> (0x1A)
Examples
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 35
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
+CMGS: 5 Success: message reference 5 is returned from
the SMS Service Center
+CDS:
2,5,"0601290800",129,"99/05/01 14:15:10+04"
Success: report of successful message delivery
received
2.7.2.
Read Short Messages
AT+CMGF=1 Text mode to read Short Messages
AT+CMGL="ALL"
List all stored messages
+CMGL: 1,"REC
READ","+336290918",,"99/05/01 14:15:10+04"
I will be late This is the first message
+CMGL: 2,"REC
UNREAD","+336290918",,"99/05/01 14:19:44+04"
Traffic jam on
Broadway This is the second
message
OK
AT+CMGR=1 "
" Read the first message
+CMGR: "REC
READ","+336290918",,"99/05/01 14:19:44+04"
OK
2.8.
Examples about Fax Class 2
2.8.1.
Send a Fax Class 2
AT+FCLASS=2 Select fax class 2
OK
AT+FLID="LocalFax"
OK
ATD0601234567 Call establishment
+FCON Connection OK
[+FCSI:
"RemoteFax"]
+FDIS:0,3,0,2,0,0,0,0
OK
AT+FDT Beginning of the data transfer
+FDCS:0,3,0,2,0,0,0,0
CONNECT
<0x11h> Send carrier
First page data terminated by
<0x10h><0x03h>
OK Page transmitted
AT+FET=0 Send another page
+FPTS:1 First page acquitted
OK
AT+FDT
CONNECT
<0x11h> Send carrier
Second page data terminated by
<0x10h><0x03h>
Examples
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 36
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
OK Page transmitted
AT+FET=2 No more page
+FPTS:1 First page acknowledged
+FHNG:0 Normal end of connection
OK
2.8.2.
Receive a Fax Class 2
AT+FCR=1
OK
AT+FLID="LocalFax"
OK
RING Incoming call
ATA Answer
+FCON Connection OK
[+FTSI:
"RemoteFax"]
+FDCS:0,3,0,2,0,0,0,0
OK
AT+FDR
+FCFR
+FDCS:0,3,0,2,0,0,0,0
CONNECT
<0x12h> Receive page carrier
First page data terminated by
<0x10h><0x03h>
OK Page received
+FPTS:1 First page acknowledged
+FET:0 To receive another page
OK
AT+FDR
+FDCS:0,3,0,2,0,0,0,0
CONNECT
<0x12h> Receive page carrier
Second page data terminated by
<0x10h><0x03h>
OK Page received
+FPTS:1 Second page acknowledged
+FET:2 No more page to receive
OK
AT+FDR
+FHNG:0 Normal end of connection
OK
Examples
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 37
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
2.9.
+CSIM and +CRSM Examples
Note: if
SIM answer is not specified in the following examples, it will mean that the
answer will depend on
the SIM
content.
2.9.1.
DF GSM Selection and then Status
AT+CSIM=14,"A0A40000027F20"
+CSIM=4,"9F16"
OK
AT+CSIM=10,"A0F2000016"
+CSIM=48,"
"
OK
2.9.2.
DF Telecom Selection and then Status
AT+CSIM=14,"A0A40000027F10"
+CSIM=4,"9F16"
OK
AT+CSIM=10,"A0F2000016"
+CSIM=48,"
"
OK
2.9.3.
EF ADN Selection and then Status
DF Telecom selection is mandatory just before
the following AT commands.
AT+CSIM=14,"A0A40000026F3A"
+CSIM=4,"9F0F"
OK
AT+CSIM=10,"A0C000000F"
+CSIM=34,"
"
OK
2.9.4.
Status Commands
Status No File Id without P1,P2, P3
AT+CRSM=242
Status 6F3A (EF ADN) without P1, P2, P3
AT+CRSM=242,28474
Status 6F07 (EF IMSI) without P1, P2, P3
AT+CRSM=242,28423
Examples
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 38
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Status 3F00 (MF) without P1, P2, P3
AT+CRSM=242,16128
Status 7F10 (DF Telecom) without P1, P2,
P3
AT+CRSM=242,32528
Status 7F20 (DF GSM) without P1, P2, P3
AT+CRSM=242,32544
2.9.5.
Get Response Commands
Get Response (EF ADN) without P1, P2, P3
AT+CRSM=192,28474
Get Response (EF IMSI) without P1, P2, P3
AT+CRSM=192,
28423
Get Response (MF) without P1, P2, P3
AT+CRSM=192,16128
Get Response (DF Telecom) without P1, P2,
P3
AT+CRSM=192,32528
Get Response (DF GSM) without P1, P2, P3
AT+CRSM=192,32544
Get Response 6F07 (EF IMSI)
AT+CRSM=192,
28423,0,0,15
2.9.6.
Read Record Commands
Read Record EF ADN (Pin Code validated)
AT+CRSM=178,28474,1,4,28
2.10. +
WBHV Examples
2.10.1.
Restart the embedded module
AT+CFUN=1
OK
2.10.2.
Interrogate embedded module Configuration
AT+WBHV?
+WBHV: 0,0
+WBHV: 1,0
+WBHV: 2,0
+WBHV: 3,0,0
OK
Examples
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 39
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
2.10.3.
Activate ENS Feature
There is no STK session
open yet.
AT+WBHV=3,1
+CME ERROR: 3
2.10.4.
Open a STK Session
AT+STSF=2,"5FFFFFFF7F"
OK
AT+STSF=1
OK
2.10.5.
Activate ENS Feature
AT+WBHV=3,1
OK
AT+WBHV=3
+WBHV: 3,1,1 // Embedded module reset is needed
OK
2.10.6.
Restart the embedded module and Interrogate ENS
Feature
Mode
AT+CFUN=1
OK
AT+WBHV=3
+WBHV: 3,1,0
OK
2.10.7.
Deactivate ENS Feature
AT+WBHV=3,0
OK
AT+WBHV=3
+WBHV: 3,0,1 // Embedded module reset
is needed
OK
2.10.8.
Restart the Embedded module and Interrogate
embedded
module ENS Feature Mode
AT+CFUN=1
OK
Examples
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 40
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
AT+WBHV=3
+WBHV: 3,0,0 // Embedded module reset
is not needed
OK
2.10.9.
Activate and Deactivate the Feature
AT+WBHV=3,1
OK
AT+WBHV=3
+WBHV: 3,1,1 // Embedded module reset
is needed
OK
AT+WBHV=3,0
OK
AT+WBHV=3
+WBHV: 3,0,0 // Embedded module reset
is not needed
OK
2.10.10.
Restore Factory Settings
Case 1: ENS feature
is already deactivated
AT+WBHV=3
+WBHV: 3,0,0 // Embedded module reset
is not needed
OK
AT&F
OK
AT+WBHV=3
+WBHV: 3,0,0 // Embedded module reset
is not needed
OK
Activate the ENS feature
AT+WBHV=3,1
OK
AT+WBHV=3
+WBHV: 3,1,1 // Embedded module reset
is needed
OK
AT&F // restore the factory
settings again
OK
AT+WBHV=3
+WBHV: 3,0,0 // Embedded module reset
is not needed for the new setting
OK
Examples
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 41
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Case 2: ENS feature
is already activated
AT+WBHV=3
+WBHV: 3,1,0 // Embedded module reset
is not needed
OK
AT&F
OK
AT+WBHV=3
+WBHV: 3,0,1 // Embedded module reset
is needed for the new setting
OK // since the ENS feature
mode before AT&F is 1
2.11.
+WDSI Examples
2.11.1.
No user agreement, no job on server, no error
AT+WDSS=1,1
OK
+WDSI: 4
+WDSI: 6
+WDSI: 8
2.11.2.
No user agreement, bad authentication
AT+WDSS=1,1
OK
+WDSI: 4
+WDSI: 5
+WDSI: 7
2.11.3.
No user agreement, bad server URL
AT+WDSS=1,1
OK
+WDSI: 4
+WDSI: 7
AT+WDSE
+WDSE: 404
OK
Examples
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 42
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
2.11.4.
No user agreement, server error during the
session
AT+WDSS=1,1
OK
+WDSI: 4
[+WDSI: 6]
[+WDSI: 9]
+WDSI: 7
AT+WDSE
+WDSE: 500
OK
2.11.5.
No user agreement, package download, no DOTA
pre-emption
AT+WDSS=1,1
OK
+WDSI: 4
+WDSI: 6
+WDSI: 8
+WDSI: 9,<size>
+WDSI: 18
[+WDSI: 18,"1%"]
+WDSI: 18,"100%"
+WDSI: 10
2.11.6.
No user agreement, download failure, no DOTA
pre-emption
AT+WDSS=1,1
OK
+WDSI: 4
+WDSI: 6
+WDSI: 8
+WDSI: 9,<size>
+WDSI: 18
[+WDSI: 18,"1%]
+WDSI: 11
Examples
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 43
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
+WDSI: 4 (reconnection to the
server to send the status)
+WDSI: 6
+WDSI: 8
2.11.7.
No user agreement, not enough space to store
package
AT+WDSS=1,1
OK
+WDSI: 4
+WDSI: 6
+WDSI: 8
+WDSI: 11 (No +WDSI: 9)
+WDSI: 4 (reconnection to the
server to send the status)
+WDSI: 6
+WDSI: 8
2.11.8.
User agreement for connection, no job on server
+WDSI: 1
AT+WDSR=1
OK
+WDSI: 4
+WDSI: 6
+WDSI: 8
2.11.9.
User agreement for download, no DOTA preemption
+WDSI: 4
+WDSI: 6
+WDSI: 8
+WDSI: 9,<size>
+WDSI: 2
AT+WDSR=3
OK
+WDSI: 18
[+WDSI: 18,"1%"]
+WDSI: 18,"100%"
+WDSI: 10
Examples
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 44
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
2.11.10.
User agreement for install, valid package
+WDSI: 3
AT+WDSR=4
OK
+WDSI: 12
+WDSI: 14
Reset
+WDSI: 16
2.11.11.
No user agreement, download and install, valid
package,
no DTOA pre-emption
AT+WDSS=1,1
OK
+WDSI: 4
+WDSI: 6
+WDSI: 8
+WDSI: 9,<size>
+WDSI: 18
[+WDSI: 18,"1%"]
+WDSI: 18,"100%"
+WDSI: 10
+WDSI: 12
+WDSI: 14
Reset
+WDSI: 16
2.11.12.
User agreement for download and install, invalid
package
(bad signature), no DOTA pre-emption
AT+WDSS=1,1
OK
+WDSI: 4
+WDSI: 6
+WDSI: 8
+WDSI: 9,<size>
+WDSI: 2
AT+WDSR=3
[+WDSI: 18,"1%"]
+WDSI: 18,"100%"
Examples
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 45
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
+WDSI: 10
+WDSI: 3
AT+WDSR=4
OK
+WDSI: 13
2.11.13.
No user agreement, download and install, invalid
package
(bad signature), no DOTA pre-emption
AT+WDSS=1,1
OK
+WDSI: 4
+WDSI: 6
+WDSI: 8
+WDSI: 9,<size>
+WDSI: 18
[+WDSI: 18,"1%"]
+WDSI: 18,"100%"
+WDSI: 10
+WDSI: 13
2.11.14.
Recovery
+WDSI: 8
+WDSI: 12
+WDSI: 14
Reset
+WDSI: 17,0
2.11.15.
No user agreement, package download, install,
DOTA
pre-emption, no reverse patch
+WDSI: 4
+WDSI: 6
+WDSI: 8
+WDSI: 19,1 (one sector was
pre-empted)
+WDSI: 9,<size>
+WDSI: 18
[+WDSI: 18,"1%"]
+WDSI: 18,"100%"
+WDSI: 10
Examples
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 46
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
+WDSI: 12
+WDSI: 14
Reset
+WDSI: 16
+WDSI: 19
+WDSI: 4
+WDSI: 6
+WDSI: 8
2.11.16.
No user agreement, package download, install,
DOTA
pre-emption, reverse patch
+WDSI: 4
+WDSI: 6
+WDSI: 8
+WDSI: 19,1 (one sector was
pre-empted)
+WDSI: 9,<size>
+WDSI: 18
[+WDSI: 18,"1%"]
+WDSI: 18,"100%"
+WDSI: 10
+WDSI: 12
+WDSI: 14
Reset
+WDSI: 16
+WDSI: 19,1 (reverse patch, so
the package is kept in flash)
+WDSI: 4
+WDSI: 6
+WDSI: 8
Examples
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 47
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
2.12.
Full AT GPRS Commands Examples
2.12.1.
Activation of an IP PDP Context
Example
1:
AT+CGDCONT=1,"IP","internet";+CGDCONT=2,"IP","abc.com"
OK
ATD*99***1#
CONNECT
Example
2:
AT+CGCLASS="CG"
OK
+CGREG: 1
AT+CGDCONT=1,"IP","internet"
OK
AT+CGQREQ=1,1,4,5,2,14
OK
AT+CGQMIN=1,1,4,5,2,14
OK
AT+CGATT=1
OK
AT+CGACT=1,1
OK
Note:
+CGDATA: the goal of this command is the same as ATD*99***
AT +CGDATA=1
CONNECT
.
Data transfer
.
+CGEV: NW DETACH
2.12.2.
Network Request
AT+CGAUTO=0
OK
+CRING: GPRS "IP",
"211.45.89.152"
AT+CGANS=1
CONNECT
.Data
transfer
Examples
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 48
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
2.12.3.
3G Quality of Service Profile (Requested)
+CGEQREQ
- Example
Test command
AT+CGEQREQ=?
+CGEQREQ:
"IP",(0-4),(0-384,65535),(0-384,65535),(0-384,65535),(0-384,65535),(0-
2),(0,10-
1500,1502,1510,1520),("0E0","1E1","1E2","7E3","1E3","1E4","1E5","1E6"),("0E0","5E2"
,"1E2","5E3","4E3","1E3","1E4","1E5","1E6","6E8"),(0-3),(0,10-4000),(0-3)
+CGEQREQ:
"PPP",(0-4),(0-384,65535),(0-384,65535),(0-384,65535),(0-384,65535),(0-
2),(0,10-
1500,1502,1510,1520),("0E0","1E1","1E2","7E3","1E3","1E4","1E5","1E6"),("0E0","5E2"
,"1E2","5E3","4E3","1E3","1E4","1E5","1E6","6E8"),(0-3),(0,10-4000),(0-3)
OK
Define primary PDP contexts #1 and #2
AT+CGDCONT=1,"IP","internet";+CGDCONT=2,"IP","abc.com"
OK
Ask for 3G QoS Profiles
AT+CGEQREQ?
+CGEQREQ:
1,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0
+CGEQREQ:
2,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0
OK
Specifies a 3G QoS profile for PDP context #1
AT+CGEQREQ=1,3,0,128,0,0,2,1500,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0
OK
Ask for QoS Profiles
AT+CGEQREQ?
+CGEQREQ: 1,3,0,128,0,0,2,1500,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0
+CGEQREQ:
2,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0
OK
Undefined 3G Qos profile for PDP context #1
AT+CGEQREQ=1
OK
Ask for 3G QoS Profiles
AT+CGEQREQ?
+CGEQREQ:
1,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0
+CGEQREQ:
2,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0
OK
Examples
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 49
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Specifies a 3G QoS profile for PDP context #1
AT+CGEQREQ=1,3,0,128,0,0,2,1500,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0
OK
Ask for 3G QoS Profiles
AT+CGEQREQ?
+CGEQREQ:
1,3,0,128,0,0,2,1500,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0
+CGEQREQ:
2,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0
OK
Specifies a 3G QoS profile for PDP context #3
which is not defined yet
AT+CGEQREQ=3,3,32,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0
+CME ERROR: 3
2.12.4.
3G Quality of Service Profile (Minimum acceptable)
+CGEQMIN
- Example
Define primary PDP contexts #1 and #2
AT+CGDCONT=1,"IP","internet";+CGDCONT=2,"IP","abc.com"
OK
Test command
AT+CGEQMIN=?
+CGEQMIN
"IP",(0-4),(0-384,65535),(0-384,65535),(0-384,65535),(0-384,65535),(0-
2),(0,10-
1500,1502,1510,1520),("0E0","1E1","1E2","7E3","1E3","1E4","1E5","1E6"),("0E0","5E2"
,"1E2","5E3","4E3","1E3","1E4","1E5","1E6","6E8"),(0-3),(0,10-4000),(0-3)
+CGEQMIN:
"PPP",(0-4),(0-384,65535),(0-384,65535),(0-384,65535),(0-384,65535),(0-
2),(0,10-
1500,1502,1510,1520),("0E0","1E1","1E2","7E3","1E3","1E4","1E5","1E6"),("0E0","5E2"
,"1E2","5E3","4E3","1E3","1E4","1E5","1E6","6E8"),(0-3),(0,10-4000),(0-3)
OK
Ask for minimum 3G QoS Profiles
AT+CGEQMIN?
+CGEQMIN:
1,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0
+CGEQMIN:
2,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0
OK
Specifies a minimum 3G QoS profile for PDP
context #1.
AT+CGEQMIN=1,3,0,128,0,0,2,1500,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0
OK
Examples
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 50
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Specifies a minimum 3G QoS profile for PDP
context #3 where #3 is not defined yet.
AT+CGEQMIN=3,3,32,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0
+CME ERROR: 3
Ask for 3G QoS Profiles
AT+CGEQMIN?
+CGEQMIN:
1,3,0,128,0,0,2,1500,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0
+CGEQMIN: 2,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0
OK
Undefined the minimum 3G Qos profile for PDP
context #1
AT+CGQMIN=1
OK
Ask for the minimum 3G QoS Profiles
AT+CGEQMIN?
+CGEQMIN:
1,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0
+CGEQMIN:
2,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0
OK
Specifies a minimum 3G QoS profile for PDP
context #1
AT+CGEQMIN=1,3,0,128,0,0,2,1500,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0
OK
Ask for the minimum 3G QoS Profiles
AT+CGEQMIN?
+CGEQMIN:
1,3,0,128,0,0,2,1500,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0
+CGEQMIN:
2,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0
OK
2.12.5.
3G Quality of Service Profile (Negotiated)
+CGEQNEG
- Example
Example:
Define primary PDP contexts #1 and #2
AT+CGDCONT=1,"IP","internet";+CGDCONT=2,"IP","abc.com"
OK
Ask for 3G QoS Profiles
AT+CGEQREQ?
+CGEQREQ:
1,3,32,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0
+CGEQREQ: 2,3,32,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0
OK
Examples
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 51
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Specifies a 3G QoS profile for PDP context #1
AT+CGEQREQ=1,3,0,128,0,0,2,1500,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0
OK
Specifies a minimum 3G QoS profile for PDP
context #1
AT+CGEQMIN=1,3,64,64,0,0,2,1500,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0
OK
Activate PDP context #1
AT+CGACT=1,1
OK
AT+CGACT?
+CGACT=1,1
OK
Test for the negotiated 3G QoS profile
AT+CGEQNEG=?
+CGEQNEG: (1)
OK
Ask for the negotiated 3G QoS profile
AT+CGEQNEG=1
+CGEQNEG:
1,3,128,128,64,64,1,1500,"5E3","1E5",2,150,2
OK
Ask for the negotiated 3G QoS profile
AT+CGEQNEG=2 // Inactivated PDP context #2
OK
AT+CGEQNEG=3 // Undefined PDP context #3
+CME ERROR: 3
AT+CGEQNEG=1,2 // PDP context #1 is activated but #2 is not
activated
+CGEQNEG:
1,3,128,128,64,64,1,1500,"5E3","1E5",2,150,2
OK
AT+CGEQNEG=1,3 // PDP context #1 is activated but #3 is not
defined
+CME ERROR: 3
Examples
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 52
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
2.13.
Unit test cases for AT +WOPEN=7 mode
No
application binary
AT+WOPEN=0
OK
AT+WOPEN=4
OK
AT+WOPEN=1
OK
AT+WOPEN?
+WOPEN: 1
OK
AT+WOPEN=7
+WOPEN: 7,1
OK
Download a corrupted
binary (write a random byte somewhere in the binary before the download,
thanks to a
hexadecimal editor)
AT+WDWL
+WDWL:0
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
OK
AT+WOPEN=1
OK
AT+WOPEN?
+WOPEN: 1
OK
AT+WOPEN=7
+WOPEN: 7,2
OK
Download a binary
with corrupted header (write a random byte in the binary header (in the first 8
bytes) before the
download, thanks to an hexadecimal editor)
AT+WDWL
+WDWL:0
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
OK
AT+WOPEN=1
OK
Examples
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 53
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
AT+WOPEN?
+WOPEN: 1
OK
AT+WOPEN=7
+WOPEN: 7,3
OK
Download a binary
with wrong version (modify the version in the header before the download,
thanks
to an hexadecimal
editor)
AT+WOPEN=1
OK
AT+WDWL
+WDWL:0
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
OK
AT+WOPEN?
+WOPEN: 1
OK
AT+WOPEN=7
+WOPEN: 7,4
OK
Download a binary
with too many tasks (use a Basic application which required more than three
tasks)
AT+WDWL
+WDWL:0
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
OK
AT+WOPEN=1
OK
AT+WOPEN?
+WOPEN: 1
OK
AT+WOPEN=7
+WOPEN: 7,5
OK
Examples
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 54
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Download a binary
requiring too many RAM (use an application which requires a call stack of
256KBytes)
AT+WDWL
+WDWL:0
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
OK
AT+WOPEN=1
OK
AT+WOPEN?
+WOPEN: 1
OK
AT+WOPEN=7
+WOPEN: 7,9
OK
2.14.
Unit test cases for AT + WOPEN=8 mode
Without
application binary
AT+WOPEN=0
OK
AT+WOPEN=4
OK
AT+WOPEN=1
OK
AT+WOPEN?
+WOPEN: 1
OK
AT+WOPEN=7
+WOPEN: 7,1
OK
Download a corrupted
binary (write a random byte somewhere in the binary before the download,
thanks to an
hexadecimal editor)
AT+WDWL
+WDWL:0
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
OK
AT+WOPEN=8,0,0,0
+WOPEN: 8,0,0,0
OK
AT+WOPEN=8
+WOPEN: 8,0,0,0
OK
AT+CFUN=1
Examples
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 55
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
OK
(Press any key,
embedded module starts normally)
With
application binary
AT+WOPEN=1
OK
AT+WOPEN?
+WOPEN:1
OK
AT+WOPEN=7
+WOPEN: 7,2
OK
Download a binary
with corrupted header (write a random byte in the binary header (in the first 8
bytes) before the
download, thanks to an hexadecimal editor)
AT+WDWL
+WDWL: 0
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
OK
AT+WOPEN=1
OK
AT+WOPEN?
+WOPEN: 1
OK
AT+WOPEN=7
+WOPEN: 7,3
OK
Download a binary
with wrong version (modify the version in the header before the download,
thanks
to an hexadecimal
editor)
AT+WOPEN=1
OK
AT+WDWL
+WDWL: 0
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
OK
AT+WOPEN?
+WOPEN: 1
OK
AT+WOPEN=7
+WOPEN: 7,4
OK
Download a binary
with too many tasks (use a Basic application which required more than three
tasks)
Examples
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 56
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
AT+WDWL
+WDWL: 0
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
OK
AT+WOPEN= 1
OK
AT+WOPEN?
+WOPEN: 1
OK
AT+WOPEN=7
+WOPEN: 7,5
OK
Download a binary
requiring too many RAM (use an application which requires a call stack of
256KBytes)
AT+WDWL
+WDWL:0
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
OK
AT+WOPEN=1
OK
AT+WOPEN?
+WOPEN: 1
OK
AT+WOPEN=7
+WOPEN: 7,9
OK
AT+WOPEN=8
+WOPEN: 8,0,0,0
AT+WOPEN=8,0,0,0
OK
AT+CFUN=1
(Press any key,
embedded module and Open ATฎ application start normally)
With application
binary
AT+WOPEN=1
OK
AT+WOPEN=8,1,10,12
OK
AT+WOPEN=8
+WOPEN: 8,1,10,12
OK
Press the keys 10
and 12, nothing occurs
AT+CFUN=1
Examples
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 57
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
OK
Press any key except
key 10 and 12, embedded module and Open ATฎ application
start normally
AT+CFUN=1
OK
Press only the key
10 or 12, embedded module start and Open ATฎ application
start normally
AT+CFUN=1
OK
Press the keys 10
and 12, embedded module starts but Open ATฎ application
does not start
AT+WOPEN=7
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 58
3.
Technical Appendixes
3.1.
Working Modes
3.1.1.
Working Mode Description
Embedded module can
work in different modes. Each one is characterized by:
power
consumption,
Open
ATฎ power processing,
feature
availability.
3.1.1.1.
ACTIVE mode
In ACTIVE mode, the
embedded module is fully powered and all services are available.
There are two
varieties of ACTIVE mode status based on the GSM stack as described below.
3.1.1.1.1.
ACTIVE mode with GSM stack in idle
This is the default
mode for the embedded module. To switch the embedded module to this mode
use
"AT+WBHV=1,0" command. The embedded module must be restarted in order
to take the new
behavior into
account.
No features are restricted
in this mode.
3.1.1.1.2.
ACTIVE mode with GSM stack turned off
In this mode, the
SIM device and GSM/GPRS features (like GSM voice or data call, SMS, GPRS data
transfer) are not
available. The embedded application is running and the serial port remains
active,
meaning AT commands
are available. If any data has to be transmitted over the network, this mode
has to be turned
off.
To switch the
embedded module to this mode use "AT+WBHV=1,1" command. The embedded
module must be
restarted in order to take the new behavior into account.
To disable this
mode, use the "AT+WBHV=1,0" command and restart the embedded module.
To turn
off and on the GSM
stack without any reset, use commands AT+CFUN=1,0 and AT+CFUN=0,0.
3.1.1.2.
SLEEP mode
In SLEEP mode, the
embedded module is fully powered but the internal processor is in sleep state
for
a low power
consumption mode. The software is suspended, waiting for RTC alarm expiration,
TCU
timer expiration,
wireless paging (if GSM stack is enabled), external IT, keypad press, UART DTR
drop, or USB resume,
removing it from this state.
There are two
varieties of SLEEP mode status based on the GSM stack as described below.
Technical
Appendixes
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 59
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
3.1.1.2.1.
SLEEP mode with GSM stack in idle
This mode is a low
power consumption mode. In this mode the embedded module has restricted
access to peripheral
interfaces, thereby UARTs, USB, SPIs, I2C, GPIOs, ADCs and Buzzer are not
available.
To enable or disable
this mode use AT+W32K command.
The mode activation
and deactivation is initiated when the customer device is connected to the
serial
interface (DTE). DTR
pin must be pulled UP for requesting activation of the SLEEP mode with GSM
stack in idle. To
deactivate this mode DTR pin must be pulled DOWN. All details are described in
chapter 3.7
'Specifications of Power down Control mechanism through serial Ports (physical
RS232 ports or
virtual CMUX
ports)'.
When this mode is
activated, the embedded module requires 1 to 15 seconds to power down
consumption. In this
state, a 32 kHz internal clock is used during the inactivity stage.
Then, the embedded
module can automatically wake up on unsolicited events such as:
GSM
paging,
external
interruption,
key
press,
alarm,
Open
ATฎ timer expiration.
During the wake up
period, the embedded module will have the same characteristic as the ACTIVE
mode with GSM stack
in idle in terms of power consumption and Open ATฎ power
processing.
The embedded module
automatically switches back to idle state after all Open ATฎ treatments.
3.1.1.2.2.
SLEEP mode with GSM stack turned off
This mode is a low
power consumption mode.
In this mode, SIM
device and GSM/GPRS features like GSM voice or data call, SMS, GPRS data
transfer are not
available. In addition, the embedded module has restricted access to peripheral
interfaces, thereby
UARTs, USB, SPIs, I2C, GPIOs, ADCs and Buzzer are not available.
In this mode, the
embedded module can automatically wake up on unsolicited events such as:
external
interruption,
key
press,
alarm,
Open
ATฎ timer expiration.
During the wake up
period, the embedded module has the same characteristics as the ACTIVE mode
in terms of power
consumption and Open ATฎ power processing.
The embedded module
automatically switches back to idle state after all Open ATฎ treatments.
To switch the
embedded module to this mode, use "AT+WBHV=1,2" command. The embedded
module must be
restarted in order to take the new behavior into account.
To disable this
mode, use "AT+WBHV=1,0" command and restart.
3.1.1.3.
Alarm mode
This mode is a low
power consumption mode. The only feature which is available in this mode is the
alarm wake up. The
RTC is powered in the embedded module which can be woke up either on
preprogrammed
RTC alarm expiration
or on user request (ON/OFF pin out).
Technical
Appendixes
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 60
AT Commands Interface Guide
for
Firmware 7.45
To use it, an alarm
wake up has to be previously recorded by AT+CALA command before switching to
this mode.
To activate the
embedded module in this mode, use the "AT+CPOF" command when the
ON/OFF
switch is LOW.
Deactivate this mode
by placing the ON/OFF switch to HIGH or after alarm wake up.
3.1.1.4.
OFF mode
In OFF mode, nothing
is powered in the embedded module, and no service is available.
3.1.2.
Working Mode Features
The table below sums
up feature availability in each mode.
Features
ACTIVE
mode
SLEEP
mode
ALARM
Mode
OFF
Mode
Alarm √ √ √ -
Wake-up Open ATฎ
application on timer events √ √ - -
GSM/GPRS paging (alert
from the network for incoming
call, incoming SMS or
incoming GPRS data)
Yes, if GSM
Stack is not
turned off.
Yes, if GSM
Stack is not
turned off.
- -
SIM √ - - -
UARTs √ - - -
USB √ - - -
SPIs √ - - -
I2C √ - - -
GPIO √ - - -
ADCs √ - - -
Buzzer √ - - -
Keypad √ √ - -
External IT √ √ - -
Flash led √ √ - -
Technical
Appendixes
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 61
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
3.1.3.
Open ATฎ Power Processing Performance
The Open ATฎ power
processing performance is evaluated thanks to a Dhrystone Open ATฎ
application. The
source code of this application is extracted from "dhryansi " which
is a part of the
samples given in ADS
1.2 release. This Dhrystone algorithm is executed for at least 2 seconds.MIPS
Levels:
CPU Power
Level MIPS
CPU@26Mhz 21 MIPS
CPU@104Mhz 87 MIPS
CPU
Consumption per Service:
State
Consumption of maximum processing power
GSM idle state 2%
GSM call state 15%
GPRS transfer state 18%
For example using
the two tables above, an Open ATฎ Application running on
WMP100 embedded
module at 104MHz
during a GPRS transfer can consume 87-(18%*87)=71 MIPS.
3.1.4.
Power Consumption Performance
For additional power
consumption performance, please refer to the embedded module Product
Technical
Specification.
3.2.
Multiplexing Mode
3.2.1.
Description
The AT+CMUX command
is used to manage (enable or disable) the 3GPP TS 27.010 multiplexing
protocol control
channel. It allows to multiplex up to 4 logical channels on each UART and USB.
Several MUX sessions
can be launched on different physical ports at the same time. The client
application may
handle, by this mean, up to 12 channels (4 logical multiplexed channels on both
UART and on
USB)."
Notes on speed and
autobauding:
The
response is returned at the speed of the received AT+CMUX command
(prior to entering
<mode>).
It
is recommended that whenever the multiplexer control channel is released, the
embedded
module should assume
an interface rate for autobauding purposes irrespective of any
previous higher
speed having been selected.
If
a +CMUX
command is issued whilst in any multiplexer mode then that +CMUX command
is
ignored and the
embedded module will return an +CME ERROR: <err> response.
Technical
Appendixes
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 62
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
3.2.1.1.
Restrictions
Only
basic option and UIH framing is supported.
Only
convergence layers type 1 and 3 are supported.
Autobauding
is not compatible with multiplex mode. It is neither possible to start
multiplexing
when autobauding is
active (AT+IPR=0), nor to set autobauding during multiplex mode, since
the multiplexer uses
only a fixed baud rate. In the same way, the bit rate can not be changed
through AT+IPR
command while multiplex mode is active. Therefore, AT+IPR=<rate> should
not be used, and
will have no effect.
Before
starting multiplexing mode, port speed must be configured by
AT+IPR=<rate>
command, to be
compliant with defined values for <port _speed> parameter (in the volume
1,
refer to
"Multiplexing Mode +CMUX" section, "Parameters and Defined
Values" section).
3.2.1.2.
Specific Behaviors
In
multiplexing mode, AT configuration commands (as AT+CMEE for example), (see:
[2]ง
1.10) will be
applied to all logical channels.
In
multiplexing mode, unsolicited result code (see: [2]ง 1.7) will be transmitted
to all logical
channels
AT
commands are grouped by classes (SMS, phonebook, GPRS, SIM TOOL KIT,
See [2]
ง3.7.1) and
launching an AT command from a port, has for the effect to lock all commands
belonging to the
same class.
If another port
launches an AT command of the locked class, an +CME ERROR: 536 will
occur as long as the
class is not released (at first commands completion time).
If
Bluetooth is started, it is not possible to start CMUX on UART2.
In the same way, it
MUX is started on UART2, it is not possible to start Bluetooth.
After
an at+cfun=1 during
a CMUX session, CMUX is automatically restarted by the
embedded module with
previous parameters, and all previous opened DLCs are reopened,
with the speed of at+ipr? Command.
DCD,
RI and DTR signals are managed virtually:
When V24 sets DCD,RI
or DTR signal, a MSC frame is sent to remote part, to indicate a
virtual state change
.Everything is logical, no physical signals are involved.
+++
Escape Sequence is always possible to get offline.
Flow
control is managed physically or virtually by MSC.
By default, the
embedded module manage a hardware flow control on a UART, and this flow
control becomes
virtual on logical channels when some DLCs are opened.
At
CMUX session stop, Sierra Wireless embedded module automatically goes back into
AT
mode, without having
to reset the embedded module.
A timeout
of 5 minutes is implemented for CMUX connection. After this timeout, if no DLC
is
opened, the MUX
session is closed, and previous physical port is reopened. This timeout
avoids to be blocked
into the MUX opening state without any activities."
3.2.2.
Results
AT+CMUX=<mode>[,<subset>[,<port_speed>[,<N1>[,<T1>[,<N2>[,<T2>[,<T3>]]]]]]],
will respond OK
when parameters are
in the range, and number of parameters are in correct syntax.
Note:
The 230400 (<port_speed> = 6), 460800 (<port_speed> = 7) and 921600
(<port_speed> = 8) speeds
are
added in AT+CMUX=? and AT+CMUX? responses.
The 230400, 460800
and 921600 speeds are added in AT+IPR=? and AT+IPR? responses.
Technical
Appendixes
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 63
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
AT+CMUX=<mode>[,<subset>[,<port_speed>[,<N1>[,<T1>[,<N2>[,<T2>[,<T3>]]]]]]],
will respond
ERROR when:
ERROR
Responses Meaning
+CME ERROR: 3 - Operation not allowed:
Example:
Trying to start a MUX session during autobauding.
-
Parameters or number of parameters are out of range.
+CME ERROR: 544 CMUX
connection Timeout (no answer from the remote) ie no DLC0
opened response.
3.2.3.
Execution Conditions
Before reception of
errors of ง2.1, AT+CMUX=<mode>[,<subset>
[,<port_speed>[,<N1>[,<T1>[,<N2>[,<T2>[,<T3>]]]]]]]
first reply OK.
3.2.4.
Power Down Control (Sleep Mode)
CMUX feature is
based on ETSI 27.010 specifications that provide Sleep-On/Wake-Up procedure
through 27.010
multiplexing protocol. It suits the description of the serial port sleep mode
mechanism
(Please refer to Specifications
of Power Down Control mechanism through serial Ports (physical
RS232 ports or
virtual CMUX
ports)
To match sleep mode
specifications, Sierra Wireless embedded module handles 27.010 MSC
protocol frames that
are dependent of each emulated port (associated to a particular DLCI).
Physical signals (such as DTR) of
the UART on which it has been activated are not monitored
by Sierra Wireless
embedded module (DCE).
To cope with Sierra
Wireless sleep mode, 27.010 sleep mode procedures are authorized only when
all activated
emulated/virtual ports are in Serial Sleep mode state emulated application DTR
and
CTS are low on each
port, no AT response is to be sent
CMUX
wake-up/sleep-on frames as specified in 27.010 recommendations applies to all
activated DLC
since those
particular frames (PSC frames) are sent/received over the DLCI 0, which is the
control
channel.
3.2.5.
Sleep Mode Activation
For all
opened DLCI, each connected application on each DLC should set its DTR low
in order to
have the Sierra
Wireless module sleep.
RX data line (DTE)
Not Clear to Send
Clear to Send
Busy
Ready
CTS (DTE e.g. logical MSC
frame sent by the Sierra Wireless module)
DTR (DTE e.g. logical MSC
frame through PC MUX driver)
1
2 3
Technical
Appendixes
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 64
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
1: The
application (DTE) drops DTR to indicate a busy state (a protocol MSC frame is
sent by the PC
CMUX driver on the
concerned DLCI)
2: Sierra
Wireless embedded module (DCE) checks if there are any pending AT response to
send.
3: When
DTR is low and there are no more AT responses, the DCE sets CTS to low.
Once the last opened
DLCI detects the DTR drop from the PC application, the CMUX driver starts
sending a 27.010 PSC
protocol frame, and waits for its response before allowing the entire system to
go into Sleep Mode
state.
Clear to Send
PSC response
PSC frame
Not Clear to Send
TX data line (DTE)
RX data line (DTE)
1
2
3 4
1: All
the logical CTS are set high (each connected application can see CTS low)
2: Last
CTS drop causes Sierra Wireless embedded module (DCE) CMUX driver to send a PSC
frame and to wait
for the PSC response.
: Application
replies with a PSC response
: All
Sierra Wireless embedded module serial virtual ports are in sleep mode state.
3.2.6.
Wake Up Procedure
There are two
different ways of waking up the embedded module:
3.2.6.1.
Wake up by DTE (e.g. desktop PC) wakes up embedded
module
with a 27.010 Wake up frame
In order to wake up
the embedded module, the client application has to trigger one of its connected
DTR high like the
physical scheme.
When wanting to send
the DTR MSC protocol frame, the DTE MUST first sends F9F9F9 wake up
frames, waiting for
embedded module response, and then sends as a valid frame the DTR on MSC
frame.
Technical
Appendixes
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 65
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Otherwise, the
embedded module might sleep on again if all DTR are detected low !
TX data line (DTE)
1
2
3
4
RX data line (DTE)
No data
Valid protocol
frame
F9F9F9F9 wake up
frame (order target to
wake up)
F9F9F9F9 wake up frame
acknowledgement (inform
Application that target is
waken up)
1: DTE
sends 27.010 protocol F9F9F9F9 frame to wake up the asleep target.
2: DCE
replies with 27.010 F9F9F9F9 wake up frame as acknowledgment and waits for a
valid frame.
: DTE
sends a valid 27.010 frame in order to have the target stop its acknowledgment.
(It is
required that the first valid frame is a MSC frame that raise application DTR)
: DCE
stops sending F9F9F9F9 answer after receiving this valid frame.
F9F9F9 protocol wake up
frame
F9F9F9 wake up response
DTR on MSC frame
MSC response
Application raises one of
the DTR
(or reopen a COM port to
make it raised)
Target stops
sending F9F9
flags when
receiving a valid
frame
Target PC
MUX driver PC Application
Note: If
the valid frame is a DATA frame, the embedded module does not detect any DTR
change and
sleeps
on again with the PSC frame.
3.2.6.2.
Wake up by Sierra Wireless embedded module (DCE)
(unsolicited
AT response" e.g. "RING" is to be sent)
The embedded module
wakes up the DTE with a 27.010 protocol wake up frame first and then sends
its unsolicited
indication.
The protocol preliminary
wake up sequence is described below:
Technical
Appendixes
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 66
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
b
RX data line
1
2
3
4
TX data line
No data
Valid protocol
frame
F9F9F9F9 wake up
frame (order target to
wake up)
F9F9F9F9 wake up frame
acknowledgement (inform
Application that target is
waken up)
27.010 Test frame
1: DCE
sends 27.010 protocol F9F9F9F9 frame to wake up the asleep Application.
2: DTE
replies with 27.010 F9F9F9F9 wake up frame as acknowledgment and waits for a
valid frame.
: DCE
sends a valid 27.010 test frame in order to have the target stop its acknowledgment.
: DTE
stops sending F9F9F9F9 answer after receiving the valid frame.
The entire
"unsolicited string" wake up sequence and sending is described below:
RX data line
Wake Up
MSC frames "RING"
Wake Up
MSC frames
Sleep On
MSC frames
Sleep On
"RING" MSC frames
DTR (logical MSC frame sent
by the DTE
Busy
0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3
0: The
DCE is disturbed with an incoming call.
1: DCE
starts sending F9F9F9 wake up frame, waiting for its response and sending a
valid test frame
(0x4D ,0x55, 0x58,
0x57, 0x41, 0x4B, 0x45, 0x55, 0x50 = MUXWAKEUP ). (Once waken up, the RI is
sent before the RING
string in our case)
2: The
unsolicited response message is sent.
8 : After
the unsolicited response has been sent, the port is in sleep mode again (no
more AT
response and DTR
low). Then DCE sends PSC to sleep on and waits for its response.
During the
preliminary Wake Up sequence, if no F9F9F9 is received within T3 timer, the
embedded
module takes the
decision to close all the ports assuming that there is no more CMUX driver in
the
remote side.
Technical
Appendixes
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 67
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
F9F9F9 protocol wake up
frame
F9F9F9 wake up response
Valid frame: test frame
"MUXWAKEUP"
Test frame response
An unsolicited AT response
("RING") is to be
sent out
SIERRA
WIRELESS Module
(DCE) DTE
27.010 driver
DTE
Application
(e.g.
Hyperterminal on PC)
PC stops sending F9F9F9
when receiving valid frame
UIH frames
DCE sends "RING"
unsolicited string
through 27.010
Protocol PSC Sleep On
PSC response
Preliminary
Wake up
phase
DCE
"unsolicited
response
sending"
phase
3.3.
Support of SIM ToolKit by the M.E.
The table below
indicates the commands of the supported letter classes:
Table 1:
Support of SIM Toolkit classes (Not supported)
Letter
classes
Command/function
description
a Proactive command: GET
READER STATUS
Proactive command:
PERFORM CARD APDU
Proactive command: POWER
ON CARD
Proactive command: POWER
OFF CARD
Event download: Card
reader status
b Proactive command: RUN
AT COMMAND
c Proactive command:
LAUNCH BROWSER
Event download: Browser
termination
d Soft key support
e Proactive command: OPEN
CHANNEL
Proactive command: CLOSE
CHANNEL
Proactive command:
RECEIVE DATA
Proactive command: SEND
DATA
Technical
Appendixes
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 68
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Letter
classes
Command/function
description
Proactive command: GET
CHANNEL STATUS
Event download: Data
available
Event download: Channel
status
Table 2:
Compatibility between available Terminal Responses and Proactive Commands
Proactive
commands
Setup
Menu
Display
Text
Get
Inkey
Get
Input
Setup
Call
Play
Tone
Select
Item
Refresh Send
SS
Send
SMS
Send
USSD
Setup
eventlist
Setup idle
modetext
Send
DTMF
Lang
Notification
Terminal
Reponses
(0) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14)
(95) Backward Move
(96) Command
beyond ME
capabilities
(97) ME currently
unable to
process
command
(98) No response
from the user
(99) SIM session
terminated by
the user
3.4.
Structure of TERMINAL PROFILE
First
byte (Download):
b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1
Profile download User
choice
SMS-PP data download Set
by product to 1
Cell Broadcast data download User
choice
Menu selection User choice
9E XX response code for SIM
data download error
Set by product
to 1
Timer expiration Set by
product to 0
USSD string data object
supported in Call Control
User choice
Enveloppe Call Control always
sent to the SIM during
automatic redial mode
User choice
Technical
Appendixes
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 69
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Second
byte (Other):
b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1
Command result User choice
Call Control by SIM User
choice
Cell identity included in Call
Control by SIM
User choice
MO short message control by SIM User
choice
Handling of the alpha
identifier according to
subclause 9.1.3
User choice
UCS2 Entry supported User
choice
UCS2 Display supported User
choice
Display of the extension text User
choice
Third
byte (Proactive SIM):
b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1
Proactive SIM: DISPLAY TEXT User
choice
Proactive SIM: GET INKEY User
choice
Proactive SIM: GET INPUT User
choice
Proactive SIM: MORE TIME User
choice
Proactive SIM: PLAY TONE User
choice
Proactive SIM: POLL INTERVAL Set
by product to 1
Proactive SIM: POLLING OFF Set
by product to 1
Proactive SIM: REFRESH User
choice
Fourth
byte (Proactive SIM):
b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1
Proactive SIM: SELECT ITEM User
choice
Proactive SIM: SEND SHORT
MESSAGE
User choice
Proactive SIM: SEND SS User
choice
Proactive SIM: SEND USSD User
choice
Proactive SIM: SET UP CALL User
choice
Proactive SIM: SET UP MENU User
choice
Proactive SIM: PROVIDE LOCAL
INFORMATION (MCC, MNC, LAC,
Cell ID & IMEI)
Set by product
to 1
Proactive SIM: PROVIDE LOCAL
INFORMATION (NMR)
Set by product
to 1
Technical
Appendixes
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 70
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Fifth
byte (Event driven information):
b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1
Proactive SIM: SET UP EVENT LIST
Set by product to 1
Event: MT call Set by
product to 1
Event: Call connected Set
by product to 1
Event: Call disconnected Set
by product to 1
Event: Location status Set
by product to 1
Event: User activity User
choice
Event: Idle screen available User
choice
Event: Card reader status Set
by product to 0
Sixth
byte: (reserved for Event driven information extensions)
b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1
Event: Language selection Set
by product to 1
Event: Browser Termination Set
by product to 0
Event: Data available Set
by product to 0
Event: Channel status Set
by product to 0
RFU, bit = 0
Seventh
byte (Multiple card proactive commands) for class "a"
b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1
Proactive SIM: POWER ON CARD Set
by product to 0
Proactive SIM: POWER OFF CARD Set
by product to 0
Proactive SIM: PERFORM CARD APDU
Set by product to 0
Proactive SIM: GET READER STATUS
Set by product to 0
RFU, bit = 0
Eighth
byte (Proactive SIM):
b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1
Proactive SIM: TIMER
MANAGEMENT (start, stop)
Set by product
to 1
Proactive SIM: TIMER
MANAGEMENT (get current value)
Set by product
to 1
Proactive SIM: PROVIDE LOCAL
INFORMATION (date, time and
time zone)
Set by product
to 1
Binary choice in GET INKEY User
choice
SET UP IDLE MODE TEXT User
choice
RUN AT COMMAND (e.g.. class
"b" is supported)
Set by product
to 0
2nd alpha
identifier in SET UP
CALL
Set by product
to 1
2nd capability
configuration
parameter (see 9.1.6)
Set by product
to 0
Technical
Appendixes
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 71
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Ninth
byte:
b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1
Sustained DISPLAY TEXT (see
6.4.1)
Set by product
to 0
SEND DTMF command (see 6.4.24) User
choice
Proactive SIM: PROVIDE LOCAL
INFORMATION - BCCH Channel
List coding as in subclause
12.29)
Set by product
to 1
Proactive SIM: PROVIDE LOCAL
INFORMATION (language)
Set by product
to 1
Proactive SIM: PROVIDE LOCAL
INFORMATION (Timing Advance)
Set by product
to 1
Proactive SIM: LANGUAGE
NOTIFICATION
User choice
Proactive SIM: LAUNCH BROWSER Set
by product to 0
RFU, bit = 0
Subsequent
bytes:
b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1
RFU, bit = 0
Information
about BCCH channel list
(This is an extract
of GSM Rec.11.14)
Byte(s) Description
Length
1 BCCH channel list tag 1
2 Length (X) of bytes
following 1
3 to X+2 BCCH channel
list X
8 BCCH
channel list
Contents: the list
of absolute RF channels for BCCH carriers, as known by the ME from the SYSTEM
INFORMATION
messages. The BCCH channel list is composed of one to three BCCH channel sub
lists, each sub list
is derived from the set of frequencies defined by reference neighbor cells
description
information element or elements. In the latter case the set is the union of the
different
subsets defined by
the neighbor cells description information elements (see TS 3GPP TS 24.008
[8]).
The length of the
BCCH channel list field depends on the length of the received BCCH channel list
derived from the
different SYSTEM INFORMATION messages to be considered.
Coding: Each ARFCN (Absolute Radio Frequency
Channel Number) is represented by 10 bits. Spare
bit(s) are to be
filled with 0.
Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5
Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1
Byte 1 ARFCN#1 (high
part)
Byte 2 ARFCN#1 (low part)
ARFCN#2 (high part)
Byte 3 ARFCN#2 (low part)
ARFCN#3 (high part)
Byte X-1 ARFCN#m-1 (low
part) ARFCN#m (high part)
Technical
Appendixes
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 72
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5
Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1
Byte X ARFCN#m (low part)
Spare bit
(0)
Spare
bit(0)
SIM applications
should take into account that early implementations of SIM application toolkit
may
have coded this
field differently, because of an inconsistency between the content and the
coding of
this element in
previous versions of 11.14. The SIM is able to identify Mes that are using the
coding
described above by
evaluating the indication "BCCH Channel List coding" in the TERMINAL
PROFILE command.
3.5.
Command Type and Next Action Indicator.
This table has been
extracted from the GSM Technical specification 11.14.
Value Name
Used for Type
of Command
coding
used for
Next
Action
Indicator
coding
'00' - -
'01' REFRESH X
'02' MORE TIME X
'03' POLL INTERVAL X
'04' POLLING OFF X
'05' SET UP EVENT LIST X
'10' SET UP CALL X X
'11' SEND SS X X
'12' SEND USSD X X
'13' SEND SHORT MESSAGE X
X
'14' SEND DTMF X
15 LAUNCH BROWSER class
"c" X
'20' PLAY TONE X X
'21' DISPLAY TEXT X X
'22' GET INKEY X X
'23' GET INPUT X X
'24' SELECT ITEM X X
'25' SET UP MENU X X
'26' PROVIDE LOCAL
INFORMATION X
'27' TIMER MANAGEMENT X
'28' SET UP IDLE MODEL
TEXT X X
'30' PERFORM CARD APDU
class "a" X X
'31' POWER ON CARD class
"a" X X
'32' POWER OFF CARD class
"a" X X
'33' GET READER STATUS
class "a" X X
'34' RUN AT COMMAND class
"b" X
35 LANGUAGE
NOTFIICATION X
40 OPEN CHANNEL class
"e" X X
41 CLOSE CHANNEL class
"e" X X
42 RECEIVE DATA class
"e" X X
Technical
Appendixes
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 73
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Value Name
Used for Type
of Command
coding
used for
Next
Action
Indicator
coding
43 SEND DATA class
"e" X X
44 GET CHANNEL STATUS
class "e" X X
'81' End of the proactive
session not applicable X
3.6.
Coding of Alpha Fields in the SIM for UCS2
The coding can take
one of the three following structures, or GSM default alphabet. If the ME
supports UCS2 coding
of alpha fields in the SIM, it will support all three coding schemes for
character
sets containing 128
characters or less. For character sets containing more than 128 characters, the
ME will at least
support the first coding scheme. Within a record, only one coding scheme,
either GSM
default alphabet, or
one of the three described below, can be used.
1. If the
first byte in the alpha string is 0x80, then the other bytes are
16 bit UCS2 characters.
The most significant
byte (MSB) of the UCS2 character is coded in the lower numbered byte of
the alpha field, and
the less significant byte (LSB) of the UCS2 character is coded in the higher
numbered alpha field
byte. In other words, byte 2 of the alpha field contains the most significant
byte (MSB) of the
first UCS2 character, and byte 3 of the alpha field contains the less
significant
byte (LSB) of the
first UCS2 character (as shown below). Unused bytes shall be set to FF: if
the
alpha field has an
even length in bytes, the last (unusable) byte will be set to FF.
Example
1
Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte
4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte 8 Byte 9
80 Ch1MSB Ch1LSB Ch2MSB Ch2LSB Ch3MSB Ch3LSB FF
FF
2. If the
first byte of the alpha string is 0x81, then the 2nd byte
contains a value indicating the
number of characters
in the string. The 3rd byte contains an 8 bit number which defines bits 15 to
8 of a 16 bit base
pointer, where bit 16, and bits 7 to 1 would be set to zero. These sixteen bits
represent a base
pointer to a "half-page" in the UCS2 code space, to be used with some
or all of
the remaining bytes
in the string. The 4th and subsequent bytes in the string contain coding as
follows:
if
bit 8 of the byte is set to zero, the remaining bits of the byte contain a GSM
Default Alphabet
character
if
bit 8 of the byte is set to one, the remaining bits are an offset value to add
to the 16 bit base
pointer defined by
byte 3, and the resulting 16 bit value is a UCS2 code point, and defines a
UCS2 character.
Example
2
Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte
4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte 8 Byte 9
81 05 13 53 95
A6 28 FF FF
Technical
Appendixes
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 74
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
In the example above
Byte
2 indicates there are 5 characters in the string
Byte
3 indicates bits 15 to 8 of the base pointer, and indicates a bit pattern of
0hhh shah h000 0000
as the 16 bit base pointer number. Bengali characters for example start
at code position
0980 (0000 1001 1000
0000), which is indicated by the coding 13 in byte 3
(shown by the
italicized underlined digits).
Byte
4 indicates GSM Default Alphabet character 53, e.g.. "S".
Byte
5 indicates a UCS2 character offset to the base pointer of 15, expressed in
binary as
follows 001 0101,
which, when added to the base pointer value results in a sixteen bit value of
0000 1001 1001 0101,
e.g.. 0995, which is the Bengali letter KA.
Byte
8 contains the value FF: as the string length is 5, this a valid character in
the string,
where the bit
pattern 111 1111 is added to the base pointer, yielding to a sixteen bit value
of
0000 1001 1111 1111
for the UCS2 character (that is 09FF).
Byte
9 contains the padding value OxFF.
3. If the
first byte of the alpha string is set to 0x82,
then the 2nd byte contains the length of the
string (number of
characters).The 3rd and 4th bytes contain a 16 bit number which defines the
complete 16 bit base
pointer to a "half-page" in the UCS2 code space, for use with some or
all of
the remaining bytes
in the string. The 5th and subsequent bytes in the string contain coding as
follows:
if
bit 8 of the byte is set to zero, the remaining seven bits of the byte contain
a GSM Default
Alphabet character,
if
bit 8 of the byte is set to one, the remaining seven bits are an offset value
added to the base
pointer defined in
bytes 3 and 4, and the resulting 16 bit value is a UCS2 code point, and
defines a UCS2 character.
Example
3
Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte
4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte 8 Byte 9
82 05 05 30 2D
82 D3 2D 31
In the example
above:
Byte
2 indicates there are 5 characters in the string
Bytes
3 and 4 contain a 16 bit base pointer number of 0530, pointing to the first
character of
the Armenian
character set.
Byte
5 contains a GSM Default Alphabet character of 2D, which is a dash
"-".
Byte
6 contains a value 82, which indicates it is an offset of 02 added to the
base pointer,
resulting in a UCS2
character code of 0532, which represents Armenian character Capital
BEN.
Byte
7 contains a value D3, an offset of 53, which when added to the base
pointer results in
a UCS2 code point of
0583, representing Armenian Character small PIWR.
Technical
Appendixes
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 75
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
3.7.
Specifications of Power Down Control
mechanism
through serial Ports (physical
RS232
ports or virtual CMUX ports)
3.7.1.
What is new on X55 and further software releases
V24 Sleep mode and
Sierra Wireless 32K mode used to be a one and only functionality. Since v24
now supports several
ports (physical or virtual), Sierra Wireless products are allowed to enter 32K low
consumption mode
only when all of these ports are individually ready to enter such a mode.
3.7.2.
Definitions
3.7.2.1.
Serial Port Sleep Mode State
This mode reflects
the particular V24 state of a port (physical or virtual) regarding the
possibility to
enter or not 32K low
consumption mode.
This
mode is entered automatically when:
The port is in AT command
mode. (no GSM/GPRS communication is in progress on it).
No AT response is to be
sent to the DTE.
The connected DTE is no
more ready to communicate on it (meaning DTE sets DTR low).
This
mode is left automatically when some
unsolicited responses are to be sent to the DTE.
The connected DTE is
ready to communicate on it (meaning DTE sets DTR high).
CTS is set when in
this mode, the DCE does not allow the DTE to send data to the involved serial
port
(meaning low on that
port).
3.7.2.2.
Serial Ports Sleep Mode Global State
This mode reflects
the state of all the internal serial ports regarding their ability to enter 32K
low
consumption mode.
It is a Boolean
(asleep or not) that authorizes or not GSM/GPRS protocol and Hardware Layers to
enter 32K low
consumption mode.
This mode is entered
and left automatically depending on the state of all currently available serial
ports (virtual or
physical).
Global
V24 sleep mode is entered when all v24 available
ports are in sleep mode state.
Global
V24 sleep mode is left when at
least one of the v24 available ports is not in sleep
mode state.
Technical
Appendixes
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 76
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
3.7.2.3.
Sierra Wireless 32K Low Consumption Mode
This mode is based
on a slower clock (32KHz) that is used instead of 13MHz clock. Most of hardware
blocks are stopped.
It is aimed at reducing the power consumption.
This mode is entered
and left automatically if the feature is allowed.
To
activate this mode, the "+W32K" AT command must be used.
It is authorized or
not by peripherals (such as UARTs, Buses,
) and mainly driven by GSM/GPRS
protocols and
Hardware Layers: this mode is entered when no GSM/GPRS activity is required (no
communication is in
progress, no paging is in progress,
).
Regarding UARTs and
serial ports activity, 32K low consumption mode may be entered as soon as
V24 sleep mode global
state is "asleep".
Sierra Wireless
embedded module decides on its own to leave 32K low consumption at each
GSM/GPRS paging
occasion.
During, this little
time (which is operator dependant), UARTs are activated again so that DTR state
changes can be processed.
When this mode is
activated, no data can be exchanged on RXD and TXD lines. Only embedded
module status
changes can be monitored (DTR and RTS changes) by the DCE.
3.7.3.
Summary
To summarize the 3
definitions, the following schematics describe the functional links between, serial
port
sleep mode single state manager, serial
ports sleep mode global state manager and W32K
sleep
mode manager.
Technical
Appendixes
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 77
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Customer Application
Customer enables
SIERRA WIRELESS
32K low power mode
consumption
AT+W32K=1
Manage
each serial port sleep mode state (asleep or not)
SIERRA
WIRELESS
32K
low power
mode
manager
Serial link driver
V24
is
ASLEEP or NOT
SIERRA
WIRELESS
Module
Authorize
or
not Low
power
mode
Update
Global
Serial
Sleep
mode state
Serial Port 1
Serial Port N-1 Serial Port
N
Technical
Appendixes
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 78
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
3.7.4.
Case of Single Serial Port Use
This section
describes the expected behavior for a single serial port (physical or virtual).
Please
remember that this
behavior is independent of W32K feature activation.
3.7.4.1.
Sleep on Procedure
In order to place a
serial port in Sleep Mode state, the DTE just has to drop its DTR signal to
indicate
that it is Busy.
Then, Sierra Wireless embedded module (DCE) sets the DTE CTS low.
1
3
2
DTR (DTE)
Clear to Send
Busy
RX data line (DTE)
Clear to Send
CTS (DTE)
Ready
1: The
application drops its DTR to indicate a busy state
2: Sierra
Wireless embedded module (DCE) detects DTR drop and check if there are still AT
responses to send on
that port.
8 : When
DTR is low and there are no more AT response, the DCE sets the application
(DTE)
CTS low. (At this
point, the associated serial port is in Sleep Mode state)
Note:
While in data mode, the CTS does not follow the DTR.
3.7.4.2.
Wake up Procedures
3.7.4.2.1.
On DTE initiative: Wake up by DTR Raise
DTR (DTE)
Busy
CTS (DTE)
Not Clear to Send
Clear to Send
Ready
1
2 3
1: The
application raises its DTR signal to indicate a ready state (meaning DTE wants
to
communicate with the
DCE).
Technical
Appendixes
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 79
AT Commands Interface Guide
for
Firmware 7.45
2: Sierra
Wireless embedded module (DCE) takes into account the DTR signal change. (MSR
IRQ for
physical port or
protocol frame for CMUX)
8 : V24
triggers the DTE CTS signal to allow AT commands again. (CTS is high)
3.7.4.2.2.
On DCE initiative: Wake up by AT unsolicited indications ( e.g.
"RING
" indicator)
CTS (DTE)
RX data line (DTE)
"RING" "RING"
Not Clear to Send
DTR (DTE) Busy
1 2 1 2
1: An
incoming call occurs. Consequently unsolicited indications ("RING")
are sent to the DTE.
8 : As
soon as unsolicited indication has been sent, the port switches back to sleep
mode state
(as long as there is
no more AT command response to send and that DTR remains High)
3.7.4.3.
Complete Sequence Behavior
DTR (DTE)
CTS (DTE)
TX data line (DTE)
RX data line (DTE)
Not Clear to Send
Clear to Send Clear to Send
Ready
Ready
Busy
"RING"
"RING"
time
time
time
time
"ATA"
"OK"
1
2 3
4 4
5 6
7
8
1: The
application (DTE) drops its DTR to indicate to DCE a busy state
2: Sierra
Wireless embedded module (DCE) computes and check if there are still AT
responses to
send on that port.
3: Since
no more AT response is to be sent, the DCE sets CTS to low so that application
(DTE)
can not send any
data to the Sierra Wireless embedded module (DCE). At this stage, the
associated
serial port is in Sleep Mode state.
4: An
incoming call occurs. As a consequence, unsolicited AT indications (e.g.
"RING") are sent
to the DTE.
Note
that even if RING are sent, Serial Port remains in Sleep Mode state.
Technical
Appendixes
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 80
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
5: Customer
application (DTE) wants to answer to "RING" unsolicited AT
indications. It MUST
raise first DTR to
wake up the serial Port.
6: On
Sierra Wireless embedded module (DCE), detection of DTR rise informs that
customer
application (DTE)
wants to get out from sleep mode state. DCE sets CTS high so that
customer application
(DTE) can send again data to Sierra Wireless embedded module.
Note
that at this stage, Serial Port is no more in Sleep Mode state.
7: Customer
application (DTE) replies to RING indication with "ATA" command.
8: Sierra
Wireless embedded module (DCE) acknowledges and processes the command.
Note
that this behavior applies whether W32K is activated or not.
3.7.4.4.
Transition State (from Asleep to Awake)
When unsolicited AT
responses are to be sent (e.g. "RING" indication), V24 software
elements enters
a transition state
that places the global sleep mode state in the "Awake State". Thus,
until unsolicited
responses are sent,
the Sierra Wireless embedded module can not enter Low power mode
consumption (W32K).
As a consequence, RTS signal MUST remain High to allow the transmission of
the unsolicited
response.
Note:
Mind that unsolicited responses are broadcasted on all available serial ports when unsolicited
responses
are to be sent (e.g. "RING") on a
serial port and signals are not managed (e.g. RS232
cable is
disconnected whereas associated V24 serial port is still registered) then
Sierra Wireless
embedded
module is not allowed to enter W32K low power mode consumption.
3.7.5.
Case of Several Serial Ports Use
The behavior
specified in section Case of Single Serial Port Use applies to each of
the activated serial
ports (physical or
virtual e.g. CMUX).
Note:
When Sierra Wireless 32K low power mode is activated (AT+W32K=1), embedded
module really
enters
low power mode when all activated serial ports are set to sleep mode state.
3.7.6.
UART2 Exception (on all embedded modules)
Physical block of
the UART2 only provides embedded module with RX/TX and CTS/RTS signals so
that DTR can not be
wired on UART2 serial port.
Since only RXD/TXD
and RTS/CTS are available, there is no way to enter/leave sleep mode on this
particular port.
Thus, UART2 is not
scanned to manage global Serial Sleep mode state. As a consequence, data
can
be lost
on UART2 if W32k is activated.
Warning:
When only UART2 is activated, activation of W32K mode is
forbidden.
Note:
When emulating one (or more) virtual port(s) over UART2 using CMUX feature, it
is then possible to
use W32K
mode.
Technical
Appendixes
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 81
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
3.8.
Description of Multi-Flow Behavior
Multi-flows allow
the embedded module to treat commands from various sources (or flows):
UART
ports
USB
port
embedded
Open ATฎ applications.
CMUX
virtual ports
AT commands are
organized in classes , and multi-flow allows the simultaneous execution of
commands of
different classes coming from the possible sources:
commands
belonging to the same class can not be treated as the same time. When a
command of a class
is treated, the embedded module will respond "busy" to any command of
the same class until
the first command processing has completed.
when
a flow is waiting for the treatment of a command, it is busy until the command
execution
completion.
Example:
The embedded module
receives a command of class AT_CLASS_PHONEBOOK on UART1. The
processing of the
command starts, and a response from the phonebook entity is expected. No other
command of the
AT_CLASS_PHONEBOOK class can be processed, and the UART1 port is busy.
The embedded module
receives then a command from USB port, of another class. It is able to
immediately process
this second command.
When the phonebook
entity answers, the first commands processing completes. UART1 port and
AT_CLASS_PHONEBOOK
class are released.
Notes:
concatenation
of commands remains possible,
the
Repeat command (A/) runs independently for each flow,
an
embedded Open ATฎ application or "+WMFM" AT command may change data
redirection.
3.8.1.
Commands Classes
There are 27
commands classes, presented in the array below:
Class name
Related commands
AT_CLASS_A_SLASH A/
AT_CLASS_COM +CHLD, +VTD,
+VTS, +WATH, A, D, DL, H, O
AT_CLASS_CPHS +CPHS,
+WALS, +WMBN
AT_CLASS_DATA +CRLP,
+DOPT
AT_CLASS_FAX +FBOR,
+FBUF, +FCQ, +FCR, +FDCC, +FDIS, +FPHCT, +FRH,
+FRM, +FRS, +FTH, +FTM,
+FTS, FLID
AT_CLASS_GPRS +CGACT,
+CGANS, +CGATT, +CGAUT, +CGCLA, +CGDATA,
+CGDCONT, +CGERE, +CGPAD,
+CGQMI, +CGQRE, +CGREG,
+CGSMS, +GCAP,
+WGPRS;+CGCMOD
AT_CLASS_LOCATION +WLOC
Technical
Appendixes
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 82
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Class name
Related commands
AT_CLASS_MAIN %D, &C,
&D, &E, &F, &S, &T, &V, &W, +ADC, +ATGH;+CALA,
+CBST, +CCLK, +CEER,
+CGMI, +CGMM, +CGMR, +CGSN,
+CICB, +CIND,
+CLAE;+CLAN;+CLCC, +CLVL;+CMEC, +CMEE,
+CMER, +CMUT, +CMUX+CPAS,
+CR, +CRC, +CREG, +CRMP,
+CRSL, +CSCS, +CSNS,
+CSTA;+CSVM, +ECHO, +FCLASS, +ICF,
+IFC, +ILRR, +IPR,
+SIDET, +SPEAK, +VGR, +VGT, +VIP, +W32K,
+WAC, +WADF;+WBCM, +WCCS,
+WCDM, +WCDP, +WCFM,
+WCTM, +WDGR; +WDGT;
+WDOP, +WDTMF, +WDWL, +WFM,
+WHWV, +WIMEI, +WIND,
+WIOM, +WIOR, +WIOW, +WLCK, ,
+WMSN, +WPCS,
+WREGC;+WRIM, +WRST, +WSCAN, +WSST, ,
+WSTR, +WSVN, +WTONE,
+WVR, E, I, Q, S, V, Z, +WMFM,
+WOPEN, +WCOS
AT_CLASS_NETWORK +CCED,
+COPN, +COPS, +CPLS, +CPOL, +CSQ, +WMBS,
+WOPN, +WOLM
AT_CLASS_PHONEBOOK +CNUM,
+CPBF, +CPBN, +CPBP, +CPBR, +CPBS, +CPBW,
+WAIP, +WDCP
AT_CLASS_PHONEBOOK WPGW,
WPGR, WPGS
AT_CLASS_POFF +CFUN,
+CPOF, +WBHV
AT_CLASS_RIL +CRSM, +CSIM
AT_CLASS_RS +CPWL
AT_CLASS_SECURITY +CLCK,
+CPIN, +CPIN2, +CPINC, +CPWD
AT_CLASS_SIM +CCID,
+CIMI, +WLPR, +WLPW
AT_CLASS_SMS +CMGD,
+CMGF, +CMGL, +CMGR, +CMGS, +CMGW, +CMSS,
+CNMA, +CNMI, +CPMS,
+CRES, +CSAS, +CSCA, +CSCB,
+CSDH, +CSMP, +CSMS,
+WCBM, +WMGO, +WMSC, +WUSS,
+WMCP
AT_CLASS_SS +CACM, +CAMM,
+CAOC, +CCFC, +CCUG, +CCWA, +CKPD,
+CLIP, +CLIR, +COLP,
+CPUC, +CSSN, +CUSD
AT_CLASS_STLK +STGI,
+STGR, +STIN, +STSF
AT_CLASS_V24B %C, \N,
+DR, +DS
3.8.2.
Remark on Error 536
When a class is
locked and when another command belonging to the same class arrives, the
embedded module
answers +CME ERROR: 536.
Technical
Appendixes
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 83
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
3.9.
USB CDC feature
3.9.1.
Software Specification
The embedded module
implements an Abstract Control Modem as specified in the Communication
Device Class 1.1
specification, therefore a host can use the embedded module either as a
embedded
module device or as a
virtual communication port (VCOM).
3.9.2.
Managing the USB Feature
3.9.2.1.
Enabling the USB Port
To activate the USB
feature, in CDC mode, the application must send the AT+WMFM=0,1,3
command to the
embedded module. The embedded module replies:
OK
if the USB stack successfully started,
+CME
ERROR: 3 if the USB stack failed to start.
From here there is 2
possibilities:
1 The embedded
module is wired to the host, the device enumeration is done: if the enumeration
is successfully
completed, a VCOM and a embedded module device (viewable in the devices
manager) are created
at the host side otherwise the failure is notified to the user (by the host).
2 The embedded
module is not wired to the host: the USB stack is waiting for the USB cable
plugging. As soon as
the cable is plugged, the enumeration stage described above starts.
3.9.2.2.
Disabling the USB Port
To deactivate the
USB feature, the application must send the AT+WMFM=0,0,3 command by using
either the UART1 or
the UART2.
Two cases are
supported:
1- The USB stack is
running in CDC mode: if the stack is successfully stopped the embedded
module replies OK
otherwise it replies '+CME ERROR: 3' (note the USB stack is still running
in CDC mode).
2- The USB stack is
stopped: the embedded module replies unconditionally '+CME ERROR: 3'.
A embedded module
reset, whatever its origin, stops the USB stack. If the user has saved the USB
CDC configuration in
EEPROM the stack will be restarted while the embedded module is rebooting.
Stopping the USB
stack and then disabling the CDC device implies that the VCOM and embedded
module are getting
unavailable at the host side. The applications using these resources must be
closed since the
piece of software drivers they are using does not longer exist.
3.9.3.
USB Restrictions
The Sierra Wireless
implementation does not, currently support, the remote wake up feature.
The Sierra Wireless
implementation does not, currently, support the low power mode.
Technical
Appendixes
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 84
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
3.9.4.
Supported Applications
In a general way all
the applications using a serial port can be used on the USB serial port. Some
tests have been
conducted with the following applications:
hyper
terminal
Y-Modem
/ X-Modem / Z-Modem
TMT
DockLight
Delrina Fax (select
the Sierra Wireless USB embedded module)
3.9.5.
AT Command Restrictions
When using the USB
port to manage the embedded module the following commands are either not
supported or have a
specific behavior.
AT+ICF
- character format
AT+ICF? The list of
supported USB emulated serial port settings are stated (highlighted in green)
in
the following table.
The settings highlighted in orange must not be used.
Data
number Stop number Kind of Parity AT+ICF? responses
None +ICF: 3,4
Odd +ICF: 2,0
Even +ICF: 2,1
Mark
8 1
Space
Not supported always
replies: "+ICF:
2,4"
8 2 None +ICF: 1,4
Odd +ICF: 2,0
Even +ICF: 2,1
Mark
Space
Not supported always
replies: "+ICF:
2,4"
7 1 None +ICF: 6,4
Odd +ICF: 5,0
Even +ICF: 5,1
Mark
Space
Not supported always
replies: "+ICF:
5,4"
7 2 None +IFC: 4,4
Odd +IFC: 5,0
Even +IFC: 5,1
Mark
Space
Not supported always
replies: "+ICF:
5,4"
8 or 7 1.5 None
Odd
Even
Mark
Space
Not supported always
replies "+ICF:
2,4"
Technical
Appendixes
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 85
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
AT+ICF=? will
provide the same responses as it is sent on UART1 or 2.
AT+CFUN=1
- embedded module reset
Normally (when using
UART1/2 to manage the embedded module) the OK response is sent to the
application after the
embedded module reset.
When using the
emulated serial port a such response is not provided! In addition the embedded
module reset will
cause the USB stack stopping. From the hosts point of view it is similar to a
USB
cable disconnection.
As consequence the host is going to un-install the Sierra Wireless USB driver
and the application
will reference a non valid driver.
AT+WDWL
- firmware download
This command is
unsupported when using the USB serial emulated port.
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 86
&E OK
AT&G OK
AT&K OK
AT&P OK
AT&Q OK
AT&R OK
AT&Y OK
AT+GOI OK
AT+GCI OK
WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev.
019 Appendix February 18, 2011 87
AT Commands Interface
Guide for
Firmware 7.45
Index
ACTIVE, 58
Alarm, 59
CEER, 10
CGEQMIN, 49
CGEQNEG, 50
CGEQREQ, 48
CME, 4
CMS, 6
CMUX, 75
CPHS, 20
CRSM, 37
CSIM, 37
CSP, 21
MT, 33
OFF, 60
SLEEP, 58
WDSI, 41
WOPEN, 52